(1)B-11 1/2
2
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
PRECAUTIONS
PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING
* Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.
WARNING
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical
shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:
• Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required
voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument.
• Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have
accumulated on it.
• Use only the supplied power cord/plug.
• Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and
do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on
it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything
over it.
• Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or
modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it
should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it
inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
• Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet
conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into
any openings.
• Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.
• Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit.
A burning item may fall over and cause a fire.
• If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden
loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or smoke
should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch,
disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected
by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
CAUTION
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage
to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:
• When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold
the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it.
• Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used
for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms.
• Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector.
Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the
outlet.
• Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or
heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to
prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal
components.
• Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment,
mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio
may generate noise.
• Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally
fall over.
• Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables.
• When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is
easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off
the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power
switch is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum
level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug
the power cord from the wall AC outlet.
Power supply/Power cord
Do not open
Water warning
Fire warning
If you notice any abnormality
Power supply/Power cord Location
(1)B-11 2/2
3
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
• Do not place the instrument against a wall (allow at least 3 cm/one-inch from
the wall), since this can cause inadequate air circulation, and possibly result in
the instrument overheating.
• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the
power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all
components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes
of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume
controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level.
• When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint thinners,
solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths.
• Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument.
• Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the panel
or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power immediately and unplug the
power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified
Yamaha service personnel.
• Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might
discolor the panel or keyboard.
• Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not
use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.
• Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a
high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing
loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a
physician.
Saving and backing up your data
• Always save data to a USB flash memory or other external media, in order to
help prevent the loss of important data due to a malfunction or user operating
error.
Backing up the external media
•To protect against data loss through media damage, we recommend that you
save your important data onto two external media.
Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or
modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.
Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.
Connections
Maintenance
Handling caution
Saving data
The serial number of this product may be found on the bottom
of the unit. You should note this serial number in the space
provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record
of your purchase to aid identification in the event of theft.
Model No. DDK-7
Serial No.
(bottom)
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
4
Accessories
• Owner’s Manual
•Power cord
Congratulations!
You are the proud owner of a fine electronic keyboard, the DDK-7.
The Yamaha DDK-7 combines the most advanced tone generation technology with state-of-the-art
digital electronics and features to give you stunning sound quality with maximum musical
versatility.
In order to make the most of your DDK-7 and its extensive performance potential, we urge you to
read the manual thoroughly while trying out the various features described.
Keep the manual in a safe place for later reference.
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
5
Main Features
Wide Variety of Registration Menus page 20
The Registration Menu buttons feature a total of 288 Registrations, allowing you to instantly set up the
DDK-7 for playing your favorite type of music. The Registrations in Registration Menu are divided into six
basic categories for ease of selection. Moreover, you can edit any of the Registrations and customize them to fit
your own performance needs.
Richly textured, four-layer AWM Voices and High Quality Digital
Effects
pages 24
and 52
The DDK-7 contains a huge amount of exceptionally high-quality Voices – 415 altogether – created with the
AWM (Advanced Wave Memory) tone generation system. The authentic touch response keyboard lets you
play these Voices with all the expressiveness and control of an actual acoustic instrument. What’s more, there
are 183 different effect types in 15 categories that you can apply to each Voice section —letting you enhance
and even completely change the character of the Voices, without having to use the Voice Edit features.
Dynamic, Contemporary Rhythms and Auto Accompaniment page 60
The exceptionally of wide selection of 274 rhythms lets you choose exactly the rhythm you need in your
performance. Each rhythm contains 15 variations (sections) – such as Main, Fill In, Intro, Ending, and Break
– that you can easily switch while you play, to make your performance even more dynamic and professional.
Each rhythm has its own matching accompaniment divided into five instrument parts, providing basic
backing as well as embellishments.
Comprehensive input and output connectors ideal for live
performance
page 223
Since the DDK-7 is equipped with two types of AUX OUT jacks: MAIN and SUB, you can select outputs for
each part. This lets you add an external effect to a specific part, or adjust the volume balance among the parts
with an external mixer—allowing you to build up your own system and create just the sound you want.
Large, 6.5-inch TFT-LCD with Intuitive Touch Panel Operation page 13
This large LCD display not only lets you clearly see a wide selection of settings and parameters at almost any
angle, it also serves as a touch control panel — letting you intuitively make selections and adjust settings
simply by touching the screen! Once you touch a setting, you can even adjust it in finer detail if necessary with
the Data Control dial.
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
6
This product utilizes NF, an embedded Internet browser from ACCESS Co., Ltd. NF is used with
the patented LZW, licensed from Unisys Co., Ltd. NF may not be separated from this product,
nor may it be sold, lent or transferred in any way. Also, NF may not be reverse-engineered,
reverse-compiled, reverse-assembled or copied.
This software includes a module developed by the Independent JPEG Group.
• The bitmap fonts used in this instrument have been provided by and are the property of Ricoh Co., Ltd.
• This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or
with respect to which it has license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without
limitation, all computer software, styles files, MIDI files, WAVE data and sound recordings. Any unauthorized
use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of
copyright has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES.
• Copying of the commercially available music sequence data and/or digital audio files is strictly prohibited except
for your personal use.
•Electone and STAGEA are the trademarks of Yamaha Corporation.
• The company names and product names in this Owner’s Manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of
their respective companies.
• The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only, and may
appear somewhat different from those on your instrument.
• The pan flute and sitar, shown in the displays of the DDK-7, are on display at the Hamamatsu Museum of
Musical Instruments.
• This device is capable of using various types/formats of music data by optimizing them to the proper format
music data for use with the device in advance. As a result, this device may not play them back precisely as their
producers or composers originally intended.
The DDK-7 is compatible with the following formats.
“GM (General MIDI)” is one of the most common Voice allocation formats. “GM System
Level 2” is a standard specification that enhances the original “GM” and improves Song data
compatibility. It provides for increased polyphony, greater Voice selection, expanded Voice
parameters, and integrated effect processing.
XG is a major enhancement of the GM System Level 1 format, and was developed by Yamaha
specifically to provide more Voices and variations, as well as greater expressive control over
Voices and effects, and to ensure compatibility of data well into the future.
GS was developed by the Roland Corporation. In the same way as Yamaha XG, GS is a major
enhancement of the GM specifically to provide more Voices and Drum kits and their variations,
as well as greater expressive control over Voices and effects.
The Style File Format combines all of Yamaha’s auto accompaniment know-how into a single
unified format.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
13
14
12
Appendix
Connections
Internet Direct
Connection
Transpose
and Pitch Controls
Controllers
Rhythm Program
Voice Edit
Music Data Recorder
(MDR)
Registration Memory
Rhythm/
Keyboard Percussion
Voice Controls
and Effects
Organ Flutes
Voices
Quick Introductory
Guide
Contents
Accessories ..............................................................4
Main Features ...........................................................5
Panel Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Front Panel ................................................................8
LCD Display/Display Select ....................................10
Overview .................................................................10
1 Quick Introductory Guide . . . . . . . . . . 11
Getting Started........................................................11
Using the LCD Display............................................13
LCD Display Settings ..............................................16
Voice Display ..........................................................18
Registration Menu ...................................................20
Confirming the Version of Your DDK-7....................23
Factory Set (Initializing the DDK-7).........................23
2 Voices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Voices for each keyboard .......................................24
Selecting Voices with the Voice buttons .................26
Voice List.................................................................32
3 Organ Flutes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
4 Voice Controls and Effects . . . . . . . . . 40
Selecting from the Voice Condition display ............41
Selecting from the panel .........................................46
Effect List ................................................................52
5 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion . . . . . . 60
Selecting rhythms with the Rhythm button..............60
Rhythm List .............................................................68
Accompaniment......................................................70
Automatic Accompaniment – Auto Bass Chord
(A.B.C.) ...................................................................71
Melody On Chord (M.O.C.).....................................73
Keyboard Percussion..............................................74
6 Registration Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Storing Registrations...............................................89
Selecting Registrations ...........................................91
Saving the Registration data to USB flash memory .... 92
Initializing Registration Memory ..............................93
Registration Shift .....................................................94
Unifying a specific parameter.................................99
7 Music Data Recorder (MDR) . . . . . . . 102
Calling Up the M.D.R. Display ..............................103
Formatting External Media ....................................103
Selecting a Song...................................................104
Recording .............................................................110
Changing the Song Name ....................................113
Saving Registrations as Registration Data (File)...116
Recalling Recorded Registrations ........................121
Playing Back a Song.............................................122
Other Functions (Tools).........................................128
8 Voice Edit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Voice Structure......................................................137
Editing a Voice ......................................................138
Saving the edited Voice ........................................145
Quitting Voice Edit.................................................146
Recalling an Edited Voice .....................................146
9 Rhythm Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Outline of the Rhythm Programming Operation ....147
Rhythm Pattern Program .......................................148
Rhythm Sequence Program ..................................183
Saving Rhythm Pattern and Rhythm Sequence Data
to external media...................................................192
10 Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Footswitches .........................................................193
Foot Pedal .............................................................196
Expression Pedals.................................................205
11 Transpose and Pitch Controls . . . . 208
12 Internet Direct Connection . . . . . . . 209
Connecting the Instrument to the Internet.............209
Accessing the Website from the DDK-7 ...............210
About the Internet Settings Display.......................218
Exiting from the Internet Display ...........................221
Initializing Internet Settings ...................................221
Glossary of Internet Terms ....................................222
13 Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Accessory Jacks and Controls .............................223
Connecting Headphones or External System .......225
Connecting a Pedal Unit .......................................229
Connecting a Foot Pedal.......................................229
Connection with Computer....................................230
Connecting External Devices................................231
MIDI.......................................................................235
MIDI Control ..........................................................238
14 Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
XG Voice & Drum List............................................240
XG Drum Map .......................................................245
MIDI Data Format ..................................................248
Troubleshooting ....................................................263
Specifications........................................................266
Index .....................................................................268
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
8
Panel Layout
Front Panel
UPPER 1, 2
(page 24)
SUSTAIN button
(page 49)
REGIST MENU
(page 20)
RHYTHM/
KEYBOARD PERCUSSION
(page 60)
USB TO DEVICE terminal
(page 224)
[M.] (Memory) button
(page 89)
Registration memory
(page 89)
LOWER 1, 2
(page 25)
LCD display/
DISPLAY SELECT
(page 10)
PEDAL 1, 2
(page 25)
LEAD 1, 2
(page 24)
13 14 15 16
123
REVERB button
(page 46)
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
10
LCD Display/Display Select
Overview
1 LCD display (touch-panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . page 13
2 DATA CONTROL dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 15
3 [VOICE DISPLAY] button . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 18
4 [REGIST MENU] button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 20
5 [FOOT SWITCH] button . . . . . . . . . .pages 94, 193
6 [MDR] button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 102
7 [INTERNET] button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 210
8 [UTILITY] button . . . . . . pages 16, 205, 208, 238
9 [PROGRAM] button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 138
) [SUSTAIN] button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 49
! [REVERB] button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 46
@ [U. ORGAN FLUTES] button. . . . . . . . . . . page 37
# [L. ORGAN FLUTES] button . . . . . . . . . . . page 37
$ [ROTARY SP SPEED] button . . . . . . . . . . page 50
1
2
345 678 9)! @#$
AC INLET jack (page 223)
Upper keyboard
Lower keyboard
USB TO DEVICE terminal (page 224)
MIC jack (page 223)
Front Panel
(page 8)
TO PEDAL connector (page 225)
FOOT PEDAL jacks (page 224)
PHONES jack (page 223)
I/O connectors (page 225)
USB/MIDI terminals (page 224)
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
11
Quick Introductory Guide
Whether you are an advanced performer or have never touched an electronic keyboard in your life, we
recommend that you take the time to go through this basic section. It shows you in the simplest
possible manner how to start playing your DDK-7.
Connect the power cord.
First insert the plug of the power cable into the AC INLET on the DDK-7, then
plug the other end of the cable into the proper AC outlet on the wall.
Connect the speakers or headphones.
Since the DDK-7 has no built-in speakers, you will need to monitor the sound
of the instrument by using external equipment. Connect a set of headphones,
powered speakers, or other playback equipment as required.
Contents
1 Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
2 Using the LCD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
• Changing the Display Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
• Pressing Buttons on the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
• Adjusting Parameter Values by Using the Display
Sliders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
3 LCD Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
• Selecting the Display Language . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
• Muting the Touch Panel Sound. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
• Adjusting the Display Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
4Voice Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
5 Registration Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
• Selecting Registrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
• Registration Menu List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
6 Confirming the Version of Your DDK-7 . . . . . . . .23
7Factory Set (Initializing the DDK-7) . . . . . . . . . . . 23
1
Getting Started
Only use the voltage specified as correct for the DDK-7. The required voltage
is printed on the name plate of the DDK-7. Yamaha products are
manufactured specifically for the supply voltage in the area where they are to
be sold. If you intend to use the instrument in another location, or if any
doubt exists about the supply voltage, please consult with a qualified
technician.
1
AC INLET jack
2
Reference Page
Using Headphones
(page 225)
Playing the Sounds of the
DDK-7 Through an External
Audio System (page 226)
Using a mixer for live
performance (page 226)
1
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
12
Quick Introductory Guide
1
Turn the power on.
Make sure the volume settings of the DDK-7 and external devices are turned
down to the minimum.
Turn the power on by pressing the [POWER] switch on the DDK-7 front panel,
then turn the power on the amplifiers.
When powering down the setup, make sure to switch off the power of the
external device (or lower its volume) before switching off the DDK-7.
Set the MASTER VOLUME control.
The MASTER VOLUME control is an overall control that affects the volume of
the entire instrument.
Now that you've set up the DDK-7 properly, you're ready to begin playing it.
The Expression Pedal on the DDKU-P7 Pedal Unit can be used to control the
volume with your foot as you play.
Speaker (Left)
OUTPUT R
PHONES
Speaker (Right)
L/L+R
Do not use the instrument/
device or headphones for a
long period of time at a
high or uncomfortable
volume level, since this can
cause permanent hearing
loss.
3
Even when the power
switch is turned off,
electricity is still flowing to
the product at the minimum
level.
For turning the power on or off.
4
NOTE
when you connect an
external audio device to the
AUX OUT jacks, the output
level is fixed and cannot be
controlled.
Decreasing
the volume
Increasing
the volume
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
13
Quick Introductory Guide
1
This instrument features a special touch panel that allows you to change the parameters
by simply touching the ‘virtual’ buttons or sliders on the display. (Please note that two
or more parameters cannot be operated simultaneously.)
You can also use the Data Control dial to make fine changes to the parameter value
shown in the display.
Changing the Display Page
There are some oval-shaped numbered buttons at the top right of the display. Pressing
these buttons changes the “page” of the display. The selected page’s button turns
orange.
2
Using the LCD Display
NOTE
When cleaning the display,
use a soft, dry cloth.
Do not use any sharp or
hard tools to operate the
touch panel. Doing so may
damage the display.
Page 1
Page 2
Press this button to select Page 1
Press this button to select Page 2
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
14
Quick Introductory Guide
1
Pressing Buttons on the Display
There are three types of buttons: those that select a function, those that switch a
function on/off, and those that open a list or menu of parameters. To select the desired
function, simply press the button in the display directly.
For switching on/off or opening a parameter list, see the instructions below.
To switch the function on or off:
You can independently mute each Voice section in the Voice Display, each
accompaniment part in Rhythm Menu display, and each Element in the Voice Edit
display.
To open the parameter list:
When you press the button, a parameter list will appear in which you can select the
desired parameter.
Off, or mute (button is grayed out) On
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
15
Quick Introductory Guide
1
Adjusting Parameter Values by Using the Display
Sliders
You can adjust some parameters such as Volume, Reverb, Pan and so on, by using the
‘virtual’ sliders in the display. There are two ways to move the slider in the display:
touching it directly, and using the Data Control dial. We suggest that you touch the
display slider when making coarse adjustments and use the Data Control dial for fine
adjustment.
Touching the display slider directly:
Press a point in the slider to which you want to adjust the parameter value. The slider
will move to the point you pressed. Also, by sliding your finger up or down while
holding down the display slider, you can change the parameter value.
Using the Data Control dial:
Touch on/above the slider in the display to enable the parameter and set a rough value,
then turn the Data Control dial.
To control Pan, you can move the horizontal slider in the same way as vertical sliders.
Slider will move to the point you touch
Slider will follow your finger
or
DATA CONTROL
Touch here to enable the parameter
Blue mark
DATA CONTROL
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
16
Quick Introductory Guide
1
Here you can change the display settings: displayed language (English or Japanese),
touch panel sound, and display brightness.
Selecting the Display Language
The LCD display can be shown in two languages, English and Japanese. The default
setting is English.
Press the [UTILITY] button to call up the GLOBAL Page of the
Utility Display.
Press the desired button, (Japanese) or [English].
3
LCD Display Settings
NOTE
The settings in the Utility
Display are automatically
saved when another display
is called up.
1
2
LANGUAGE
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
17
Quick Introductory Guide
1
Muting the Touch Panel Sound
The DDK-7 is set by default with the touch panel sound turned on, giving you audio
feedback when you press a button or control. If you want to mute the touch panel
sound, follow the procedure below.
Press [UTILITY] button to call up GLOBAL Page of the Utility
Display.
Press the [OFF] button of the TOUCH PANEL SOUND to mute the
sound.
To turn the sound on again, select [ON] in Step #2.
Adjusting the Display Brightness
You can adjust the display brightness to a comfortable, easy-to-read level.
Press the [UTILITY] button to call up the GLOBAL Page of the
Utility Display.
Move the LCD BRIGHTNESS slider by touching it directly or
using the Data Control dial.
Higher settings make the display brighter and lower settings make it darker.
1
2
TOUCH PANEL SOUND
1
2
DATA CONTROL
LCD BRIGHTNESS
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
18
Quick Introductory Guide
1
You can visually confirm the currently assigned Voices to each keyboard, currently
selected rhythm, Registration Shift, and so on, in the Voice Display.
How to call up the Voice Display:
The Voice Display always appears when the DDK-7 is turned on. To call up the Voice
Display from any other display, press the [VOICE DISPLAY] button.
The Voice Display consists of three different pages that can be switched by pressing the
[1], [2] or [3] button at the top right of the display.
4
Voice Display
3
1
2
564
Switching the Display Pages
Voice Display [Page 1]
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
19
Quick Introductory Guide
1
1 Voice Sections
Shows the Voices currently assigned to each Voice section. You can also mute specific
Voice section by pressing its button (the button is grayed-out).
2 RHYTHM
Shows the currently selected rhythm.
3 A.B.C. MODE
Shows the mode of the Auto Bass Chord.
4 TEMPO
Shows the current rhythm tempo.
5 BAR/BEAT
Shows the bar/beat when the rhythm is playing.
6 REGISTRATION
Shows the current position of the Registration Shift.
You can confirm the parameter values (for example, Reverb, Volume, Pan) for each
Registration Memory simultaneously. Moreover, you can unify a specific parameter
used in various Registration Memories at one time. See page 99 for the details.
Determines the Melody On Chord modes. See page 73 for details.
Reference Page
Selecting a Voice (page 26)
Reference Page
Selecting a rhythm (page 60)
Reference Page
Auto Bass Chord (page 71)
Reference Page
Adjusting the tempo
(page 66)
Reference Page
Registration Shift (page 94)
Voice Display [Page 2]
Voice Display [Page 3]
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
20
Quick Introductory Guide
1
A “Registration” consists of panel settings including the selected Upper Keyboard
Voices, Lower Keyboard Voices, Pedal Voices, rhythm and so on. The Registration
Menu button includes 288 Registrations, specially suited for playing in a different
music style.
Selecting Registrations
Press the [REGIST MENU] button to call up the Registration
Menu display.
Select the desired registration category with the category
buttons in the display.
Each button has different Registrations for different music genres. For example,
if you want to play Jazz, press the [JAZZ & LATIN] button. For details on the
Registration Menu, see page 22.
5
Registration Menu
NOTE
Additional basic
Registrations are preset on
the Registration Memory
locations from 1 to 16. See
page 89 for details.
1
2
1
Live Performance
2
Basic
3
Pops & Rock
4
Dance & Ballad
5
Jazz & Latin
6
Symphony & World
456
1 23
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
21
Quick Introductory Guide
1
Select the desired Registration by pressing the appropriate
button on the display.
One display page contains 12 Registration buttons. Pressing the numbered
buttons in the display changes the display pages, letting you select up to 48
Registrations from one Registration category button.
The color of the selected Registration name changes to orange, indicating that it
has been selected, and the Auto Bass Chord mode is shown at the bottom of the
display.
Play your favorite song with the selected Registration.
3
Change the display pages here.
Reference Page
Auto Bass Chord (page 71)
4
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
22
Quick Introductory Guide
1
Registration Menu List
Page
LIVE PERFORMANCE
BASIC POPS & ROCK DANCE & BALLAD JAZZ & LATIN
SYMPHONY & WORLD
1
Bell Pop Piano Simple 8 Beat 1 Dynamic 8 Beat Organ Ballad Blow On Sax Fanfare
AOR Piano Simple 8 Beat 2 NY Ballad Dramatic Ballad Sax Ensemble String Orchestra
Ballad Stack Light Step British Pop Love Ballad Moonlight Romantic Violin
Rockin’on Piano Sunny Pop 8 Beat Modern Smooth Lead Big Band Baroque
Ballad Piano Kids March 1 Rock Band Pop Ballad Clarinet Swing Flute&Harp
LA Fusion Kids March 2 Detroit Pop Guitar Ballad Jazz Combo Serenade
70’s Pops Kids March 3 Techno Pop Acoustic Ballad Medium Jazz Fast March
Pop E.Piano Synth. Rock Sheriff Reggae Healing Guitar Organ Session Wild West
Prism E.Piano Symphonic March 1 Rock&Roll Chillout Guitar Combo Vienna Waltz
Kool E.Piano Symphonic March 2 Power Rock Sweetheart 1 Tender Ballad Polka
Spacey E.Piano Bluegrass 60’s Guitar Rock Sweetheart 2 Jazz Waltz Chanson Club
Smooth E.Piano Sea Carnival Unplugged Slow & Easy Five-Four Theatre Organ
2
60’s Soul Basic Waltz Motor City Euro Trance Big Band Samba Flamenco
Classic Jazz Org Brass Ensemble Lovely Shuffle 6/8 Trance Mambo Brass Pop Flamenco
Organ Band Pure Waltz Gospel Shuffle Cool Hip Hop Mambo Tenor Mexican Dance
Bump Organ Rococo Ensemble Joyful Gospel Latin House Montuno Mariachi
Kool Dist. Organ Pop Cha Cha Frankly Soul Dance Beat Bossa Nova Celtic Dance
Rock Dist. Organ Comical Rumba Soul Euro Dance Pop Pop Bossa Folk Step
Organ Funk Comical Samba Gospel UK Pop Sweet Rumba Italiano
Progressive Rock Toy Orchestra 6/8 Soul Jive Beguine Musette
Lounge Organ Charleston Hit Pop Disco Queen Cha Cha Cha Country
60’s Cheap Organ Winter Swing New Country Disco Soul Mellow Groove Hawaiian
Sunset Reggae Snow Waltz 1 Eternal Pop Pop Disco Modern R&B Chinese Nocturne
Hard Rock Organ Snow Waltz 2 Ground Beat Hot Disco Dixieland Jazz Japanese Sound
3
70’s Crossover Alpine Polka *A Bounce Pop *A Ibiza *A Jungle Drum *A Orchestra March*A
East Coast Brass Alpine Polka *B Bounce Pop *B Ibiza *B Jungle Drum *B Orchestra March*B
Fat Analog Synth Alpine Polka *C Bounce Pop *C Ibiza *C Jungle Drum *C Orchestra March*C
Club Jazz Alpine Polka *D Bounce Pop *D Ibiza *D Jungle Drum *D Orchestra March*D
Distor. Guitar Dream Ballad *A Blues Jam *A Power House *A Jazz Club *A Pasodoble *A
Tricky Guitar Dream Ballad *B Blues Jam *B Power House *B Jazz Club *B Pasodoble *B
Wow Guitar Dream Ballad *C Blues Jam *C Power House *C Jazz Club *C Pasodoble *C
Flange Clavi. Dream Ballad *D Blues Jam *D Power House *D Jazz Club *D Pasodoble *D
Pop Fusion Lead Pops Orchestra*A Evergreen Waltz*A Dance Latino *A Afro Session *A Tango *A
AOR Lead Pops Orchestra*B Evergreen Waltz*B Dance Latino *B Afro Session *B Tango *B
Sweet Fusion Pops Orchestra*C Evergreen Waltz*C Dance Latino *C Afro Session *C Tango *C
Retro Pop Pops Orchestra*D Evergreen Waltz*D Dance Latino *D Afro Session *D Tango *D
4
Sweep Pad Kids On Stage *A 16 Beat Pop *A Twilight Disco*A ChaCha Grandee*A Show Time *A
Pop Ballad Kids On Stage *B 16 Beat Pop *B Twilight Disco*B ChaCha Grandee*B Show Time *B
Fat Pad Kids On Stage *C 16 Beat Pop *C Twilight Disco*C ChaCha Grandee*C Show Time *C
Deep Pad Kids On Stage *D 16 Beat Pop *D Twilight Disco*D ChaCha Grandee*D Show Time *D
Oriental Pad Galaxy March *A Top Gear Rock *A Love Song *A 3/4 Fast Jazz *A Majestic Sound*A
Spacious Piano Galaxy March *B Top Gear Rock *B Love Song *B 3/4 Fast Jazz *B Majestic Sound*B
70’s Flute Pad Galaxy March *C Top Gear Rock *C Love Song *C 3/4 Fast Jazz *C Majestic Sound*C
Screen Ballad Galaxy March *D Top Gear Rock *D Love Song *D 3/4 Fast Jazz *D Majestic Sound*D
Brass Pad SE *A Southern Pop *A Movie Ballad *A Twilight Sax *A Orchestra Swing*A
Pop Rock Brass SE *B Southern Pop *B Movie Ballad *B Twilight Sax *B Orchestra Swing*B
Dance Brass SE *C Southern Pop *C Movie Ballad *C Twilight Sax *C Orchestra Swing*C
World Strings SE *D Southern Pop *D Movie Ballad *D Twilight Sax *D Orchestra Swing*D
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
23
Quick Introductory Guide
1
You can confirm the version of your DDK-7 by the following procedure.
Press the [UTILITY] button to call up the GLOBAL Page of the
Utility Display.
Press the [Version] button in the display.
The Version dialog appears in the display. Pressing [OK] closes the dialog.
All current settings including Registration Memory, User Voices, User Rhythms, and
LCD Display settings can be deleted at once by the following procedure. Be careful
when executing Factory Set, since it erases all your existing data. Always save your
important data to external media, such as USB flash memory.
Factory Set does not reset the Internet Direct Connection settings. If you want to reset
the Internet Direct Connection settings, see page 221.
Turn off the power.
While holding down the ENDING [1] button, turn the power back
on.
Release the ENDING [1] button after Voice Display appears.
If you don’t want to reset the LCD Display settings, you can initialize only Registration
settings. See page 93 for more information.
6
Confirming the Version of Your DDK-7
7
Factory Set (Initializing the DDK-7)
1
2
Reference Page
Saving Registrations
(page 116)
Reference Page
Initializing Internet Settings
(page 221)
1
2
3
Reference Page
Initializing Registration
Memory (page 93)
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
24
Voices
2
Voices
The DDK-7 features hundreds of high quality Voices. Any of these Voices can be used on the
Upper Keyboard and Lower Keyboard. If you connect the Pedal Unit to the DDK-7, you can
use any of these voices also on the Pedalboard. Up to four Voice sections are available on
the Upper Keyboard for playing together in a layer, while the Lower Keyboard and
Pedalboard each have two Voice sections.
A total of 415 voices can be selected on the display which you can call up by pressing
the Voice section buttons on the front panel.
Voices for the Upper Keyboard
Up to four different Voice sections are available on the Upper Keyboard for playing
together: Upper Keyboard Voice 1, Upper Keyboard Voice 2, Lead Voice 1, and Lead
Voice 2. Voices for each section can be selected from the panel.
Contents
1Voices for each keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
2 Selecting Voices with the Voice buttons . . . . . . .26
• Selecting a Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
• Changing the Voice volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
3Voice List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Voices for the Upper Keyboard
Voices for
the Lower Keyboard
Voices for Pedalboard
1
Voices for each keyboard
Upper Keyboard Voice 1
Upper Keyboard Voice 2
Lead Voice 1
Lead Voice 2
2
Voices
2
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
25
Lead Voice 1 and 2 sound only the highest note (or last note played) if two or more
keys are played together. This makes the Lead Voices ideal for “lead” or solo
instruments such as Trumpet and Saxophone.
Voices for the Lower Keyboard
Up to two different Voice sections are available on the Lower Keyboard for playing
together: Lower Keyboard Voice 1 and Lower Keyboard Voice 2. Voices for each section
can be selected from the panel.
Voices for Pedalboard
Up to two different Voice sections are available on the Pedalboard for playing together:
Pedal Voice 1 and Pedal Voice 2. Voices for each section can be selected from the panel.
Pedal Voices 1 and 2 sound only the highest note if two or more pedals are played, by
default.
Lower Keyboard Voice 1
Lower Keyboard Voice 2
Reference Page
POLY (page 42)
Pedal Voice 1
Pedal Voice 2
Voices
2
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
26
Since selection of Voices follows the same procedure throughout all Voice sections,
instructions for only the Upper Keyboard Voice 1 (UPPER 1) are given here.
Selecting a Voice
Press the [UPPER 1] button.
The voice menu of the currently selected category is shown in the display.
Select the desired instrument category with the category
buttons in the display.
You can also choose the “User” category to select a User voice you have created.
2
Selecting Voices with the Voice buttons
1
Voice menu
2
Reference Page
Voice Edit (page 137)
Voices
2
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
27
For example, to call up Piano 1, select the Piano category.
The name of the selected category (Piano) is displayed on the upper left. The
Voice name shown under the category name is that of the currently assigned
Voice and is irrelevant to the Voice menu below.
Select the desired Voice name (Piano 1, for example) from the
Voice menu.
The Voice menu contains many Piano Voices, more than can fit on one display
page. To change the display pages, press the appropriate number buttons in the
display.
The color of the selected Voice name changes to orange, indicating that it has
been selected.
Changing the Voice volume
There are two ways to set the Voice volume: using the VOLUME buttons on the panel
and using the volume slider in the display. The VOLUME buttons let you make coarse
adjustments to the volume while the slider gives you fine control.
3
Reference Page
Voice List (page 32)
Voices
2
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
28
Using the VOLUME buttons on the panel (coarse)
Press one of the VOLUME buttons of each Voice section on the panel to set the desired
level for each Voice.
The buttons have seven volume settings, from a minimum of 0, or no sound, to a
maximum of full volume.
Using VOLUME slider in the display (fine)
Pressing the same Voice button on the panel again (or pressing the Voice name of the
selected Voice in the display) calls up the Voice Condition Display.
To set the volume, touch the VOLUME slider in the display or use the Data Control
Dial. The control range is from 0 (no sound) to 24 (full volume).
DATA CONTROL
Volume slider
NOTE
Depending on the volume
value (set by the slider), two
adjacent VOLUME lamps
may be lit at the same time,
indicating an intermediate
position.
Voices
2
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
29
Pressing a Voice button once calls up the Voice Menu display. Pressing it a second
time calls up the Voice Condition display. Successive presses alternate between the
two displays.
When the Voice Condition display is shown, pressing [VOICE MENU] button on
the display also calls up the Voice Menu.
From the Voice Condition display, you can control Voice-related parameters such as
Pan, Effect, Volume, and so on. For more information on the Voice Condition
display, see page 41.
CAUTION
Turning the DDK-7 off
erases all panel settings
you have made.
If you wish to keep the
panel settings you have
made, save them to a USB
flash memory or other
external media before
turning the DDK-7 off
(page 92).
About the To Lower function
Voices selected for the Lead Voice 1, Pedal Voice 1, and Pedal Voice 2 sections can
also be played on the Lower Keyboard when the [TO LOWER] button in each
section is on. When [TO LOWER] is on, the Lead Voice and Pedal Voice cannot be
played on the Upper Keyboard and Pedalboard, respectively.
The To Lower function is not available in the Lead Voice 2 section.
Voices
2
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
30
Reference Page
Foot Pedal (page 196)
About the Solo function
The Lead Voice 2 section features an exclusive Solo function. Solo lets you
instantly switch to a solo Lead Voice in the middle of your performance, muting
all other Upper Keyboard Voices. If you connect an optional Foot Pedal to the
DDK-7, you can control the solo function without taking your hands from the
keyboards.
Select the Voice that you wish to play solo in the Lead Voice
2 section.
In this condition, all the Voices for Upper Keyboard (Upper Keyboard
Voice 1 and 2, and Lead Voice 1 and 2) can be played.
Press the [SOLO] button in the Lead Voice 2 section.
This sets Solo to standby status.
Press the [UTILITY] button to call up the Utility Display.
Press the [F. PEDAL] button at the top right of the display to call up the
FOOT PEDAL Page.
1
2
3
Voices
2
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
31
Press the [SOLO] button in the display.
Select the [SOLO] button in the left side of the display if you are using the
(1 VOLUME) of the FOOT PEDAL jacks, or select in the right side if you
are using (2 SUSTAIN).
The Solo function is assigned to the Foot Pedal, and the polarity is
selected automatically.
In this condition (Solo on), all Voices set to the Upper Keyboard except
for Lead Voice 2 are playable on the Upper Keyboard.
To temporarily turn Solo on as you play, press the Foot
Pedal and hold down.
In this condition, only the Lead Voice 2 is playable on the Upper Keyboard.
(All other voices are muted.) Each time you press the Foot Pedal (Solo on)
you can play only Lead Voice 2, and each time you release it (Solo off) you
can play all Voices except Lead Voice 2 on the Upper Keyboard.
Notes on using Solo
•Some Registration Menu settings reverse the polarity of the Foot Pedal for the
Solo function. In this condition, the situation described above is reversed. In
other words, each time you press the Foot Pedal you can play all Voices except
Lead Voice 2, and each time you release it you can play only Lead Voice 2 on the
Upper Keyboard. To return the polarity to its original setting, press the [-]
button in the display.
•Pressing the Foot Pedal while holding down a key will not turn Solo on for
that key. Solo will active when the next key is played after pressing the Foot
Pedal.
• Lead Voices 1 and 2 sound only the highest note if two or more keys are
played. However, in the Solo mode, Lead Voice 2 sounds for the last key
played.
4
5
Voices
2
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
32
This list shows all available Voices on the DDK-7. Numbers written at the left side of each column in this list
indicate the numbered buttons displayed in the Voice Menu.
3
Voice List
Category/
Voice Name
Preset
Feet
Preset
Effect 1
Preset
Effect 2
STRINGS/VIOLIN
1 Strings 1 8’ THRU THRU
Strings 2 8’ THRU THRU
Strings 3 8’ AMBIENCE THRU
Strings 4 8’ THRU THRU
Strings 5 8’ THRU THRU
Strings 6 8’ THRU THRU
Strings 7 8’ DELAY LR THRU
Strings 8 8’ THRU THRU
Strings 9 8’ HM ENHANCER THRU
Chamber Strs 1 8’ AMBIENCE THRU
Chamber Strs 2 8’ THRU THRU
Chamber Strs 3 8’ THRU THRU
Chamber Strs 4 8’ HM ENHANCER THRU
2 Pizzicato Strs 1 8’ THRU ROOM S
Pizzicato Strs 2 8’ AMBIENCE ROOM S
Pizzicato Strs 3 8’ AMBIENCE ROOM S
Pizzicato Strs 4 8’ BASEMENT ROOM S
Tremolo Strings 8’ AMBIENCE THRU
3 Strings1&7 8’ THRU THRU
Strings2&Viola 8’ THRU THRU
Strings3&4 8’ AMBIENCE THRU
Strings7&Violin5 8’ THRU THRU
Violin5&Cello 8’ HM ENHANCER THRU
Octave Strings 1 8’ THRU THRU
Octave Strings 2 8’ THRU THRU
4Violin 1 8’ THRU THRU
Violin 2 8’ AMBIENCE THRU
Violin 3 8’ THRU THRU
Violin 4 8’ THRU THRU
Violin 5 8’ AMBIENCE THRU
Violin 6 8’ AMBIENCE THRU
Viola 8’ AMBIENCE THRU
Cello 1 8’ RESONATOR THRU
Cello 2 8’ THRU THRU
Pizzicato Violin 8’ AMBIENCE ROOM S
CONTRABASS
1 Contrabass 1 8’ THRU THRU
Contrabass 2 8’ THRU THRU
Contrabass 3 16’/8’ THRU THRU
Contrabass 4 8’ THRU THRU
Contrabass 5 8’ AMBIENCE THRU
Acoustic Bass 1 8’ AMBIENCE THRU
Acoustic Bass 2 8’ HM ENHANCER THRU
Pizzicato Bass 1 8’ THRU THRU
Pizzicato Bass 2 8’ THRU THRU
BRASS/TRUMPET
1 Brass Section 1 8’ THRU THRU
Brass Section 2 8’ THRU THRU
Brass Section 3 8’ THRU THRU
Brass Section 4 8’ HM ENHANCER THRU
Brass Section 5 8’ HM ENHANCER THRU
Brass Section 6 8’ THRU THRU
Trombone Sec 1 16’/8’ HM ENHANCER THRU
Trombone Sec 2 16’/8’ THRU THRU
Trombone Sec 3 16’/8’ THRU THRU
Trombone Sec 4 16’/8’ AMBIENCE THRU
Trombone Sec 5 16’/8’ THRU HALL 1
2 Brass1&Trp6 8’ THRU THRU
Brass2&Trp6 8’ ST 2BAND EQ THRU
Horn 1&4 8’ ST 2BAND EQ HALL 1
Octave Brass 1 8’ AMBIENCE THRU
Octave Brass 2 8’ DELAY LR THRU
Octave Brass 3 8’ THRU THRU
Octave Brass 4 8’ THRU THRU
Octave Brass 5 8’ THRU THRU
Octave Brass 6 8’ THRU THRU
Octave Brass 7 8’ ECHO THRU
3Trumpet 1 8’ THRU THRU
Trumpet 2 8’ THRU THRU
Trumpet 3 8’ THRU THRU
Trumpet 4 8’ THRU THRU
Trumpet 5 8’ HM ENHANCER THRU
Trumpet 6 8’ THRU THRU
Trumpet 7 8’ AMBIENCE THRU
Muted Trumpet 1 8’ THRU THRU
Muted Trumpet 2 8’ THRU THRU
Muted Trumpet 3 8’ PHASER 1 THRU
Flugel Horn 1 8’ THRU THRU
Flugel Horn 2 8’ THRU THRU
4Trombone 1 16’/8’ ST 2BAND EQ THRU
Trombone 2 16’/8’ THRU THRU
Trombone 3 16’/8’ THRU THRU
Trombone 4 16’/8’ THRU THRU
Muted Trombone 1 16’/8’ THRU THRU
Muted Trombone 2 16’/8’ ST 3BAND EQ PHASER 1
Category/
Voice Name
Preset
Feet
Preset
Effect 1
Preset
Effect 2
Voices
2
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
33
5 Horn 1 8’ THRU THRU
Horn 2 8’ THRU THRU
Horn 3 8’ THRU THRU
Horn 4 8’ THRU THRU
Horn 5 8’ THRU THRU
Horn 6 8’ THRU THRU
Muted Horn 8’ THRU THRU
6Tuba 1 16’ ST 2BAND EQ THRU
Tuba 2 16’/8’ THRU THRU
Euphonium 16’/8’ THRU THRU
Brass Bass 1 16’ THRU THRU
Brass Bass 2 8’ THRU THRU
Brass Bass 3 8’ THRU THRU
WOODWIND/FLUTE
1 Flute 1 8’ THRU THRU
Flute 2 8’ THRU THRU
Flute 3 8’ THRU THRU
Flute 4 8’ THRU THRU
Piccolo 4’ THRU THRU
Recorder 1 4’ THRU THRU
Recorder 2 4’ THRU THRU
Ocarina 4’ THRU THRU
Whistle 4’ ST 2BAND EQ AMBIENCE
2 Clarinet 1 8’ THRU THRU
Clarinet 2 8’ THRU THRU
Clarinet 3 8’ THRU THRU
Clarinet 4 8’ THRU THRU
Bass Clarinet 16’/8’ THRU THRU
3 Oboe 1 8’ THRU THRU
Oboe 2 8’ THRU THRU
Oboe 3 8’ THRU THRU
Oboe 4 8’ THRU THRU
Oboe 5 8’ HM ENHANCER THRU
English Horn 1 8’ THRU THRU
English Horn 2 8’ THRU THRU
Bassoon 1 16’/8’ THRU THRU
Bassoon 2 16’/8’ THRU THRU
Bassoon 3 16’/8’ THRU THRU
4 Alto Sax 1 16’/8’ HM ENHANCER THRU
Alto Sax 2 16’/8’ THRU THRU
Tenor Sax 1 16’/8’ THRU THRU
Tenor Sax 2 16’/8’ THRU THRU
Tenor Sax 3 16’/8’ THRU THRU
Soprano Sax 1 8’ THRU THRU
Soprano Sax 2 8’ THRU THRU
Baritone Sax 16’/8’ THRU THRU
Category/
Voice Name
Preset
Feet
Preset
Effect 1
Preset
Effect 2
5 Sax Ens 1 16’/8’ THRU THRU
Sax Ens 2 16’/8’ THRU THRU
Sax Ens 3 16’/8’ THRU THRU
Woodwind Ens 1 8’ THRU THRU
Woodwind Ens 2 8’ THRU THRU
Woodwind Ens 3 8’ THRU THRU
Woodwind Ens 4 8’ THRU THRU
TUTTI
1 Strings&Winds 8’ THRU THRU
Strings&Brass 1 8’ THRU THRU
Strings&Brass 2 8’ XG HM ENHNCE THRU
Strings&Horn 8’ THRU THRU
Brass&Sax 1 8’ THRU THRU
Brass&Sax 2 8’ THRU THRU
Brass&Sax 3 8’ THRU THRU
Brass&Winds 8’ THRU THRU
2Orchestra Hit 8’ THRU THRU
CHOIR
1 Choir 1 8’ THRU THRU
Choir 2 8’ THRU THRU
Choir 3 8’ THRU THRU
Choir 4 8’ THRU THRU
Choir 5 8’ THRU THRU
Choir 6 8’ THRU THRU
Choir 7 8’ THRU THRU
Choir 8 8’ THRU THRU
Choir 9 8’ THRU THRU
2Vocal 8’ XG HM ENHNCE THRU
PAD
1 Smooth Pad 1 8’ THRU THRU
Smooth Pad 2 4’ THRU THRU
Smooth Pad 3 8’ THRU THRU
Smooth Pad 4 8’ DELAY LR THRU
Smooth Pad 5 8’ DELAY LR THRU
Smooth Pad 6 8’ THRU THRU
Smooth Pad 7 4’ XG CHORUS 1 CROSS DELAY
Smooth Pad 8 8’ XG CHORUS 1 XG HM ENHNCE
2 Resonance Pad 1 8’ ENS DETUNE TEMPO CROSS
Resonance Pad 2 8’ XG FLANGER 3 CROSS DELAY
Resonance Pad 3 8’ ENS DETUNE CROSS DELAY
Resonance Pad 4 4’ CELESTE 2 DELAY LR
Resonance Pad 5 8’ SYMPHONIC DELAY LR
Resonance Pad 6 8’ XG PCH CHG 1 CROSS DELAY
Resonance Pad 7 8’ DELAY LR PHASER 1
Resonance Pad 8 8’ DELAY LR TEMPO CROSS
Resonance Pad 9 8’ V_FLANGER ECHO
Resonance Pad 10 8’ DELAY LR XG CHORUS 1
Resonance Pad 11 8’ COMPRESSOR DELAY LR
Category/
Voice Name
Preset
Feet
Preset
Effect 1
Preset
Effect 2
Voices
2
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
34
3 Bell Pad 1 8’ CELESTE 1 DELAY LR
Bell Pad 2 8’ XG CHORUS 3 CROSS DELAY
Bell Pad 3 8’ XG CHORUS 3 DELAY LR
Bell Pad 4 8’ XG CHORUS 4 DELAY LR
Bell Pad 5 8’ CHORUS 1 XG DLY LCR
Bell Pad 6 8’ XG CHORUS 2 DELAY LR
Bell Pad 7 8’ XG CHORUS 2 DELAY LR
Bell Pad 8 8’ XG AT PAN 1 DELAY LR
Bell Pad 9 4’ XG 3BAND EQ DELAY LR
4 Space Pad 1 8’ ENS DETUNE DELAY LR
Space Pad 2 8’ XG FLANGER 1 DELAY LR
Space Pad 3 8’ DELAY LR XG FLANGER 1
Space Pad 4 16’ PITCH CHANGE DELAY LR
Space Pad 5 8’ XG CHORUS 1 DELAY LR
Space Pad 6 8’ V_FLANGER TALKING MOD
5 Noisy Pad 1 8’ ENS DETUNE DELAY LR
Noisy Pad 2 8’ ENS DETUNE TALKING MOD
Noisy Pad 3 8’ XG FLANGER 2 DELAY LR
Noisy Pad 4 8’ ECHO XG FLANGER 2
Noisy Pad 5 8’ EQ DISCO CANYON
SYNTH
1 Synth Lead 1 8’ CELESTE 1 TEMPO DELAY
Synth Lead 2 8’ ODRV+DELAY PHASER 1
Synth Lead 3 8’ ER 1 DELAY LR
Synth Lead 4 8’ XG CHORUS 4 THRU
Synth Lead 5 8’ XG CHORUS 3 TEMPO CROSS
Synth Lead 6 8’ XG CHORUS 4 XG DLY LCR
Synth Lead 7 8’ GM CHORUS 3 DELAY LR
Synth Lead 8 8’ V_DIST SOFT DELAY LR
2 Pop Lead 1 8’ ST 2BAND EQ TEMPO DELAY
Pop Lead 2 8’ XG HM ENHNCE TEMPO CROSS
Pop Lead 3 8’ CMP+OD+TDLY ENS DETUNE
Pop Lead 4 8’ PITCH CHANGE TEMPO DELAY
Pop Lead 5 8’ DELAY LR THRU
Pop Lead 6 8’ XG HM ENHNCE ECHO
Pop Lead 7 16’/8’ DELAY LCR THRU
3 Synth Cla 1 8’ ST 2BAND EQ TEMPO DELAY
Synth Cla 2 8’ ENS DETUNE DELAY LR
Synth Cla 3 8’ XG 3BAND EQ DELAY LR
Synth Cla 4 8’ DELAY LR ENS DETUNE
Synth Cla 5 8’ ENS DETUNE XG DLY LCR
Synth Cla 6 8’ XG FLANGER 3 DELAY LR
Synth Sax 8’ ST 2BAND EQ DELAY LR
Synth Trumpet 8’ ST 2BAND EQ DELAY LR
Synth Violin 8’ ST 2BAND EQ DELAY LCR
Category/
Voice Name
Preset
Feet
Preset
Effect 1
Preset
Effect 2
4 Synth Brass 1 8’ PITCH CHANGE THRU
Synth Brass 2 8’ THRU THRU
Synth Brass 3 8’ THRU THRU
Synth Brass 4 8’ ST 3BAND EQ THRU
Synth Brass 5 8’ XG 3BAND EQ THRU
Synth Brass 6 8’ XG 3BAND EQ XG CHORUS 4
Synth Brass 7 8’ COMPRESSOR THRU
Synth Brass 8 8’ ST 2BAND EQ DELAY LR
Synth Brass 9 8’ CROSS DELAY THRU
Synth Brass 10 8’ ENS DETUNE CROSS DELAY
Synth Brass 11 8’ REVERS GATE DELAY LR
Synth Brass 12 8’ ST 3BAND EQ TEMPO CROSS
Synth Brass 13 8’ ST 2BAND EQ ENS DETUNE
5 Synth Strs 1 8’ ST 2BAND EQ XG CHORUS 1
Synth Strs 2 8’ ST 3BAND EQ XG CHORUS 1
Synth Strs 3 8’ XG CHORUS 1 CROSS DELAY
Synth Strs 4 8’ XG 3BAND EQ XG CHORUS 1
Synth Strs 5 8’ XG CHORUS 1 CROSS DELAY
Synth Strs 6 8’ PHASER 1 ER 1
Synth Strs 7 8’ XG CHORUS 1 CROSS DELAY
6 Synth Bell 1 8’ XG CHORUS 1 TEMPO DELAY
Synth Bell 2 8’ XG PCH CHG 1 THRU
Synth Bell 3 8’ ST 3BAND EQ TEMPO DELAY
Synth Bell 4 8’ XG HM ENHNCE XG SYMPHONIC
Synth Bell 5 8’ CROSS DELAY TUNNEL
Synth Bell 6 8’ XG HM ENHNCE XG SYMPHONIC
Synth Bell 7 8’ CROSS DELAY TUNNEL
Synth Decay 1 8’ ST 2BAND EQ TEMPO CROSS
Synth Decay 2 8’ ST 2BAND EQ ENS DETUNE
Synth Decay 3 8’ AMBIENCE REVERS GATE
Synth Decay 4 8’ HM ENHANCER AMP SIM
ORGAN
1 Pipe Organ 1 8’ AMBIENCE THRU
Pipe Organ 2 8’ THRU THRU
Pipe Organ 3 8’ THRU THRU
Pipe Organ 4 8’ THRU THRU
Pipe Organ 5 8’ THRU THRU
Harmonica 1 8’ THRU THRU
Harmonica 2 8’ ST 3BAND EQ THRU
Harmonica 3 8’ DELAY LR THRU
Category/
Voice Name
Preset
Feet
Preset
Effect 1
Preset
Effect 2
Voices
2
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
35
2 Theatre Organ 1 8’ TREMOLO 2 HM ENHANCER
Theatre Organ 2 8’ HM ENHANCER THRU
Theatre Organ 3 8’ GT TREMOLO 1 HM ENHANCER
Theatre Organ 4 8’ TREMOLO 2 HM ENHANCER
Theatre Organ 5 8’ TREMOLO 2 XG HM ENHNCE
Theatre Organ 6 8’ THRU THRU
Theatre Organ 7 8’ TREMOLO 2 THRU
Theatre Organ 8 8’ THRU XG HM ENHNCE
Accordion 1 8’ ST 3BAND EQ THRU
Accordion 2 8’ THRU THRU
Accordion 3 8’ THRU THRU
Accordion 4 8’ ST 3BAND EQ THRU
Bandoneon 8’ THRU THRU
Reed Organ 8’ THRU THRU
3 Jazz Organ 1 16’ 2WAY ROT SP THRU
Jazz Organ 2 16’ ROTARY SP 1 THRU
Jazz Organ 3 16’ TREMOLO 1 XG ROTARY SP
Jazz Organ 4 16’ TREMOLO 1 ROTARY SP 1
Jazz Organ 5 16’ ST 3BAND EQ BASEMENT
Jazz Organ 6 16’ ST 3BAND EQ XG ROTARY SP
Jazz Organ 7 16’ ST 2BAND EQ ROTARY SP 1
Jazz Organ 8 16’ ST 2BAND EQ XG ROTARY SP
Jazz Organ 9 16’ ST 3BAND EQ DUAL ROTSP 2
4 Pop Organ 1 8’ ST 2BAND EQ TREMOLO 1
Pop Organ 2 8’ ST 3BAND EQ DUAL ROTSP 1
Pop Organ 3 8’ XG 3BAND EQ DUAL ROTSP 1
Pop Organ 4 8’ ST 2BAND EQ DIST+2ROT SP
Pop Organ 5 8’ XG PCH CHG 1 DIST+2ROT SP
Rock Organ 1 8’ ST 2BAND EQ ODRV+ROT SP
Rock Organ 2 8’ V_DIST SOFT DUAL ROTSP 2
Rock Organ 3 8’ COMP+DIST ROTARY SP 1
5 Organ Bass 1 8’ THRU THRU
Organ Bass 2 16’ THRU THRU
Organ Bass 3 16’ THRU THRU
Organ Bass 4 16’ THRU THRU
PIANO
1 Piano 1 8’ THRU THRU
Piano 2 8’ XG HM ENHNCE THRU
Piano 3 8’ AMBIENCE THRU
Honkytonk Piano 8’ LO-FI ST 3BAND EQ
Harpsichord 1 8’ THRU THRU
Harpsichord 2 8’ THRU THRU
Clavichord 8’ AMBIENCE THRU
Category/
Voice Name
Preset
Feet
Preset
Effect 1
Preset
Effect 2
2 DX E.Piano 1 8’ CHORUS 2 THRU
DX E.Piano 2 8’ ENS DETUNE THRU
DX E.Piano 3 8’ ST 2BAND EQ CELESTE 4
DX E.Piano 4 8’ ST 2BAND EQ TEMPO CROSS
Stage E.Piano 1 8’ THRU THRU
Stage E.Piano 2 8’ ST 3BAND EQ CHORUS 1
Stage E.Piano 3 8’ ST 2BAND EQ EP AUTO PAN
Stage E.Piano 4 8’ ST 2BAND EQ PITCH CHANGE
Stage E.Piano 5 8’ XG TREMOLO XG CMP+DIST
Stage E.Piano 6 8’ ST 2BAND EQ EP PHASER 3
3 Stack E.Piano 1 8’ ST 2BAND EQ XG SYMPHONIC
Stack E.Piano 2 8’ HM ENHANCER ENS DETUNE
Clavi 1 16’ THRU THRU
Clavi 2 16’ ST 2BAND EQ TOUCH WAH 2
GUITAR
1 Nylon Guitar 1 16’/8’ THRU THRU
Nylon Guitar 2 16’/8’ ST 3BAND EQ THRU
Steel Guitar 1 16’/8’ ST 2BAND EQ HM ENHANCER
Steel Guitar 2 16’/8’ THRU THRU
12Str Guitar 16’/8’ ST 2BAND EQ XG HM ENHNCE
Jazz Guitar 1 16’/8’ THRU THRU
Jazz Guitar 2 16’/8’ THRU THRU
Harp 1 8’ THRU THRU
Harp 2 8’ THRU THRU
Harp 3 8’ ER 1 THRU
2 Elec Guitar 1 16’/8’ ST 2BAND EQ SYMPHONIC
Elec Guitar 2 16’/8’ ST 2BAND EQ V_DIST SOFT
Elec Guitar 3 16’/8’ ST 2BAND EQ ST OVERDRIVE
Elec Guitar 4 16’/8’ ODRV+T DLY THRU
Elec Guitar 5 16’/8’ ST 2BAND EQ V_DIST SOFT
Muted Guitar 16’/8’ ST 2BAND EQ TEMPO DELAY
Distortion Gtr 1 16’/8’ ST 2BAND EQ WAH+OD+T DLY
Distortion Gtr 2 16’/8’ ST 3BAND EQ V_DST H+TDLY
Distortion Gtr 3 16’/8’ ST 3BAND EQ DIST+T DLY
3 Banjo 8’ THRU THRU
Mandolin 8’ THRU THRU
Pedal Steel Gtr 8’ THRU THRU
PERCUSSION
1Vibraphone 1 8’ THRU THRU
Vibraphone 2 8’ HM ENHANCER AUTO PAN
Marimba 1 8’ THRU THRU
Marimba 2 8’ THRU THRU
Xylophone 4’ THRU THRU
Glockenspiel 1 4’ THRU THRU
Glockenspiel 2 4’ THRU THRU
Category/
Voice Name
Preset
Feet
Preset
Effect 1
Preset
Effect 2
Voices
2
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
36
2 Celesta 1 4’ HM ENHANCER THRU
Celesta 2 4’ HM ENHANCER THRU
Music Box 1 4’ THRU THRU
Music Box 2 4’ HM ENHANCER STAGE 2
Chime 1 4’ AMBIENCE THRU
Chime 2 8’ AMBIENCE HALL L
Chime 3 8’ ST 2BAND EQ PLATE 2
TIMPANI
1 Timpani 1 8’ ST 2BAND EQ ER 1
Timpani 2 8’ ST 2BAND EQ ER 2
Timpani Roll 1 8’ ST 2BAND EQ ER 1
Timpani Roll 2 8’ ST 2BAND EQ ER 2
Timpani Roll 3 8’ ST 2BAND EQ ER 1
ELECTRIC BASS
1 Fingered Bass 1 16’ THRU THRU
Fingered Bass 2 8’ THRU THRU
Fingered Bass 3 16’ THRU THRU
Fingered Bass 4 16’ THRU THRU
Fingered Bass 5 16’ THRU THRU
Slap Bass 1 16’ THRU THRU
Slap Bass 2 16’ THRU THRU
Slap Bass 3 16’ ST 2BAND EQ XG PCH CHG 1
Slap Bass 4 16’ M BAND COMP THRU
2 Picked Bass 1 16’ THRU THRU
Picked Bass 2 16’ ST 2BAND EQ PITCH CHANGE
Picked Bass 3 16’ THRU THRU
Picked Bass 4 16’ THRU THRU
Fretless Bass 1 16’ THRU THRU
Fretless Bass 2 16’ ST 2BAND EQ PITCH CHANGE
SYNTH BASS
1 Funk Bass 1 16’ THRU THRU
Funk Bass 2 16’ THRU THRU
Funk Bass 3 16’ THRU THRU
Funk Bass 4 16’ ENS DETUNE THRU
Funk Bass 5 16’ ST 2BAND EQ XG FLANGER 1
Funk Bass 6 16’ ST 2BAND EQ ENS DETUNE
Funk Bass 7 16’ ST 2BAND EQ XG HM ENHNCE
Funk Bass 8 16’ THRU THRU
Funk Bass 9 16’ ST 2BAND EQ ENS DETUNE
Funk Bass 10 16’ ST 2BAND EQ PITCH CHANGE
2 Dance Bass 1 16’ THRU THRU
Dance Bass 2 16’ THRU THRU
Dance Bass 3 16’ THRU THRU
Dance Bass 4 16’ ST 2BAND EQ HM ENHANCER
Dance Bass 5 16’ ST 2BAND EQ ENS DETUNE
Dance Bass 6 16’ ST 2BAND EQ ENS DETUNE
Dance Bass 7 16’ THRU THRU
Dance Bass 8 16’ HM ENHANCER FLANGER 1
Category/
Voice Name
Preset
Feet
Preset
Effect 1
Preset
Effect 2
3 Smooth Bass 1 16’ ST 2BAND EQ PITCH CHANGE
Smooth Bass 2 16’ THRU THRU
Smooth Bass 3 16’ ST 2BAND EQ FLANGER 1
Smooth Bass 4 16’ ST 2BAND EQ PITCH CHANGE
Smooth Bass 5 16’ ST 2BAND EQ ENS DETUNE
Smooth Bass 6 16’ THRU THRU
Smooth Bass 7 16’ ST 2BAND EQ PITCH CHANGE
WORLD
1 Pan Flute 1 8’ THRU THRU
Pan Flute 2 8’ THRU THRU
Bagpipe 8’ THRU THRU
Dulcimer 8’ THRU THRU
Shakuhachi 8’ THRU THRU
Yokobue 4’ THRU THRU
Shamisen 8’ THRU THRU
Koto 8’ THRU THRU
Taishokoto 4’ THRU THRU
2 Erhu 1 8’ HM ENHANCER THRU
Erhu 2 8’ THRU THRU
Sheng 8’ THRU THRU
Zheng 8’ THRU THRU
Pipa 8’ THRU THRU
Nay 8’ THRU THRU
Surnay 8’ THRU THRU
Oud 8’ THRU THRU
Sitar 8’ THRU THRU
Kamanche 8’ THRU THRU
3 Steel Drum 8’ THRU THRU
Log Drum 8’ THRU THRU
Kalimba 8’ THRU THRU
Category/
Voice Name
Preset
Feet
Preset
Effect 1
Preset
Effect 2
Organ Flutes
3
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
37
Organ Flutes
The DDK-7 has an Organ Flutes feature that allows you to create your own organ Voices,
giving you access to an unlimited combination of organ sounds. With this function, you can
recreate all of the classic organ sounds by adjusting the flute footage levels and the
percussive sounds, just like on conventional organs. There are nine flute footage settings,
with three additional footage settings for the attack sound.
Press one of the Organ Flutes buttons (UPPER or LOWER).
The Flute Footage Levers appear on the display.
Press the ON/OFF button in the display to turn the Organ Flutes
function on by selecting “ON”.
To turn off the Organ Flutes function, press the same button a second time to
select “OFF”. The lamp of the [U. ORGAN FLUTES] or [L. ORGAN
FLUTES] button on the panel lights up when the Organ Flutes function is on.
The lamp turns off when the function is off.
Select the wave type for the Organ Flute Voice.
Selecting [SINE] button produces a clean, clear sound and selecting
[VINTAGE] produces a gritty, slightly distorted sound.
1
FOOTAGE Page
2
3
3
Organ Flutes
3
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
38
Adjust flute footage settings (over a range of 0 – 8).
The Flute footage levers can be adjusted by directly touching the display.
The Data Control dial cannot be used. Play the keyboard and listen to the
changes in the sound as you adjust the footage levels.
Press the [ATTACK/VOLUME] button in the upper right on the
display to adjust the volume and attack settings.
1 ATTACK
Determines the level of each volume in the percussive portion of the Voice. Footage
settings are 4', 2-2/3' and 2'. The LENGTH lever determines the duration of the
attack sound.
2 RESP. (Response)
Determines the overall speed of the keyboard response. Moving the lever downward
makes the keyboard response slower, creating a pipe organ effect.
3 MODE
Determines which notes in a held group of notes are given an attack sound.
This parameter is common to both Upper and Lower Organ Flute Voices.
FIRST: Only the first note played will have attack. All other notes played while
the first is held have no attack.
EACH: All notes played have an attack sound.
4 REVERB
Reference Page
Reverb (page 46)
Determines the amount of reverb applied to the Organ Flute Voice. When the reverb
depth in the REVERB Page 1 control is set to the minimum, the setting here will have
no effect.
5 VOLUME
Determines the overall volume of the Organ Flute Voice. The volume balance of the
individual footages is maintained. A minimum setting here produces no Organ Flute
sound.
4
5
1
23
4 5
ATTACK/VOLUME Page
Organ Flutes
3
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
39
Press the [EFFECT] button in the upper right on the display to
adjust the Rotary Speaker settings.
1 EFFECT TYPE
Select the Rotary Speaker (tremolo) effect type. Pressing the button for which the effect
type (or “OFF”) is displayed calls up a list of the effect types. Select the desired type
from among the list.
2 EFFECT Parameters
Effect parameters are displayed corresponding to the selected effect type.
6
1
2
EFFECT Page
Reference Pages
Effect List (page 52)
Rotary Speaker (page 50)
Select the desired effect type
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
40
4
Voice Controls and Effects
Voice Controls and Effects
The DDK-7 is equipped with two general kinds of functions that can be used to change the
sound of the Voices: Voice Controls and Effects.
Each Voice has been given certain factory-preset effect settings to best enhance its sound.
However, if you wish, you can change the sound to suit your preferences by using the
controls and effects described in this section. All built-in effects are digital.
The chart below shows the various Voice controls and effects for the individual Voice
sections. Available functions are indicated by circles. The controls and effects are applied
differently according to the different types: independently for each Voice section,
independently for each keyboard or globally for the entire system.
* Priority is applied only for Lead Voice 2.
Controls and Effects Reference
page
for
changing
the settings
Voice sections to which the controls/effects are applied
Upper Keyboard Lead Voice Lower Keyboard Pedalboard
Upper
Keyboard
Voice 1, 2
Organ Flute
Voice
Lead Voice 1, 2
Lower
Keyboard
Voice 1, 2
Organ Flute
Voice
Pedalboard
Voice 1, 2
Selecting from the Voice Condition display
Pan page 41 O—O O—O
Touch Tone page 41 O—O O—O
Pitch page 42 O—O O—O
Feet page 42 O—O O—O
Reverb (send level) page 42 OOOOOO
Brilliance page 42 O—O O—O
Volume page 42 OOOOOO
Priority* page 42 ——O*———
Poly (Pedal
polyphonic mode)
page 42
—————O
Vibrato page 43 O—O O—O
Touch Vibrato page 44 O—O O—O
Lead Slide page 44 O—O———
Transpose page 44 O—OO—O
Tune page 44 O—OO—O
Effect (1, 2) page 45 O—O O—O
Selecting from
the panel
Reverb page 46 O
Sustain page 49 OOOOOO
Rotary Speaker page 50
O
Contents
1 Selecting from the Voice Condition display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
2 Selecting from the panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
3 Effect List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
4
4
Voice Controls and Effects
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
41
Choose a Voice on the panel, then press the same button on the panel again (or press
the name of the selected Voice in the display). The Voice Condition display appears.
Voice Condition Display for each Voice has four pages that can be switched by pressing
[1] – [4] buttons at the top right of the display.
In this display, you can adjust the basic Voice controls, including panning, touch tone
and volume. The displays of the various Voice sections have slight differences in their
functions.
1 PAN
Determines the position of the Voice in the stereo image. Seven pan positions are
available.
2 TOUCH TONE
The Touch Tone function gives you expressive control over the volume and timbre of a
Voice. All Voices are provided with this expressive function, making it possible to
perfectly reproduce the subtle dynamic and tonal changes of actual instruments.
Two types of keyboard touch affect this function: Initial Touch and After Touch.
2 -1 INITIAL touch
Controls volume and timbre according to the velocity at which you play the
keys. The harder you play the keys, the greater the volume and the brighter the
timbre will become.
Higher settings make the change wider. Minimum setting produces no effect.
Range: 0 – 14
2 -2 AFTER touch
Controls volume and timbre according to the pressure you apply to the keys
after playing them.
The harder you press down on the keys, the greater the volume and the brighter
the timbre will become.
Higher settings make the change wider. Minimum setting produces no effect.
Range: 0 – 14
1
Selecting from the Voice Condition display
2 -1 2 -2 3
2
1
2
1
45
76 8 2-1 2-2 345 76 9
Voice Condition [Page 1]
NOTE
Initial Touch may not be
effective on some organ
Voices.
NOTE
After Touch has no effect on
percussive Voices (such as
piano or vibraphone),
percussion sounds, or some
organ Voices.
NOTE
After Touch is not applied to
the Pedal Voices.
4
Voice Controls and Effects
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
42
3 PITCH
Controls pitch according to the play style of After Touch.
AFTER touch
Controls the pitch according to the pressure you apply to the keys after playing
them.
The minimum setting produces no effect at all. Higher (positive) settings make
the pitch higher according to the pressure and lower (negative) settings make the
pitch lower. The setting of +14 or -14 results in the widest pitch change.
Range: -14 – +14
4 FEET
Determines the octave setting of the Voice, letting you use the Voice over a wide
register. There are three settings: 4', 8' and 16' (4' is highest and 16' is lowest). A 2'
setting is added to the Pedal Voice sections. PRESET is the original (factory) setting.
5 REVERB
Determines the amount of reverb applied to each Voice section. When the REVERB
control in the Reverb Page 1 is set to the minimum, the setting here will have no effect.
See page 46 for details.
6 BRILLIANCE
Adjustment of the Voice tone, brighter or mellower. Range is from -3 to +3. Higher
settings makes the voice tone brighter.
7 VOLUME
Fine adjustment of the Voice volume. See page 28 for more information.
8 PRIORITY (only for the Lead Voice 2)
Determines the mode of Lead Voice 2, Last or Top.
LAST: Only the last played key is sounded when two or more keys are played
simultaneously.
TOP: Only the highest note is sounded when two or more keys are played
simultaneously. When the Solo mode is on, Lead Voice 2 sounds according to
Last mode, regardless of the setting made here.
9 POLY (only for Pedal Voices)
Allows you to switch the pedal polyphonic mode on or off. Setting POLY to on
switches the normally monophonic pedal Voices to polyphonic play. This makes it
possible to play the Pedalboard in various expressive ways, such as playing legato or
playing intervals and chords.
Keep in mind that you cannot exceed the total maximum polyphony: 14 notes for all
sections, Upper, Lower and Pedal.
Reference Page
Solo function (page 30)
4
Voice Controls and Effects
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
43
The items included in this page differ between the Lead Voice sections and the other
sections. SLIDE (
3) only applies to Lead Voice 1 and 2.
1 VIBRATO
The Vibrato function wavers the level of the Voices, making them sound warmer and
more animated. This effect is applied independently to each Voice section. For some
Voices, vibrato may not be effective at all or the effect may not sound as expected.
1 - 1 PRESET/USER
Selecting PRESET calls up the original
(factory) vibrato settings for the Voice.
When PRESET is selected, DELAY,
DEPTH and SPEED parameters cannot
be edited.
Selecting USER lets you adjust the vibrato
settings for yourself.
1 - 2 DELAY
Determines the amount of time that elapses between the playing of a key and
the start of the vibrato effect. Higher settings increase the delay of the vibrato
onset.
Range: 0 – 14
1 - 3 DEPTH
Determines the intensity of the vibrato effect. Higher settings result in a more
pronounced vibrato. The minimum setting cancels the vibrato effect.
Range: 0 – 14
1 - 4 SPEED
Determines the speed of the vibrato effect. Higher settings increase the speed of
the vibrato.
Range: 0 – 14
1 -2 1 -3 1 -4 3 -1 3 -2
3
1
1 -1
2
4 5
Voice Condition [Page 2]
Delay
Speed
Depth
Vibrato Control
4
Voice Controls and Effects
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
44
2 TOUCH VIBRATO
Turns the Touch Vibrato function on or off. Setting Touch Vibrato to on lets you apply
vibrato to individual notes as you play them by after touch. The harder you press down
the key, the greater the vibrato will be. When Touch Vibrato is off, vibrato depth
cannot be controlled, no matter how hard you press the keys.
3 SLIDE (only for Lead Voices)
Applies a portamento effect to notes played in legato. The Slide function is effective
within a one-octave range for Lead Voices. Slide has no effect when playing notes
beyond a one-octave range. By connecting an optional Foot Pedal to the DDK-7, you
can use it to control the slide function.
3 - 1 ON/OFF
On/Off switch the Slide effect.
3 - 2 TIME
Determines the speed of the slide or portamento effect. Higher settings makes
the slide speed slower.
Range: 0 – 14
4 TRANSPOSE
Changes the pitch in semitones for each Voice section. Range is from -6 to +6.
5 TUNE
Determines the fine pitch settings (detune) for each Voice section, producing a richer
sound. Each step represents a 1-cent change in pitch.
Range: -64 – +63
NOTE
Touch Vibrato is not applied
to the Pedal Voices.
Reference Page
Controlling Lead Slide (with
Foot Pedal); (page 199)
Reference Page
Transpose (for entire
instrument); (page 208)
Reference Page
Pitch (for entire instrument);
(page 208)
4
Voice Controls and Effects
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
45
You can edit the effect parameters from these two displays. Both displays have the same
contents. You can select two effects for each Voice section with these displays (Voice
Condition Pages 3 and 4).
1 EFFECT 1 (Page 3)/EFFECT 2 (Page 4)
Selects the effect category. Pressing the effect button on the display calls up the effect
category list. Select the desired effect category in the list.
By selecting [PRESET] in the list, the original (factory) effect category for the selected
Voice is automatically set. Selecting [THRU] bypasses the effect (no effect is added to
the selected Voice).
2 TYPE 1 (Page 3)/ TYPE 2 (Page 4)
Determines the type of the effect. Pressing the TYPE button on the display calls up the
effect type list, corresponding to the selected effect category. Select the desired effect
type in the list.
If you have selected the [PRESET] category, the effect type cannot be edited.
After changing the effect type, the effect parameter below is automatically changed
corresponding to the selected effect type.
3 Effect Parameters
Effect parameters are displayed corresponding to the selected effect type.
3
2
1
Voice Condition [Page 3, 4]
Reference Page
Effect List (page 52)
4
Voice Controls and Effects
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
46
The Reverb, Sustain and Rotary Speaker displays are called up by pressing the
respective buttons on the panel.
Reverb
Reverb adds an echo-like effect to the sound, giving the impression of a performance in
a large room or concert hall. You can adjust the reverb volume for each Voice sections,
or adjust the reverb volume for rhythm and accompaniment separately.
To adjust the reverb effect and call up the Reverb pages:
Press the REVERB button, located to the left of the panel, to set the Reverb effect. The
Reverb display appears.
The Reverb display consists of four pages.
DEPTH:
Fine adjustment of the depth of reverberation or the level of the reflected sounds.
When this parameter is set to the minimum, the settings in the pages that follow have
no effect.
Range: 0 – 24
2
Selecting from the panel
REVERB [Page 1]
4
Voice Controls and Effects
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
47
1 TYPE
Determines the reverb type for each of the Voice sections and the Organ Flute Voice.
Several types can be selected: Room, Hall, Stage, and so on.
Pressing the TYPE button on the display calls up the Reverb Type list.
The list contains many reverb types, more than can fit on one display page. To change
the display pages, press the appropriate number buttons [1] or [2] in the display. Select
the desired reverb type in the list. After changing the reverb type, the TIME parameter
below is automatically changed corresponding to the selected reverb type.
2 TIME
Determines the reverb length for each of the Voice sections and the Organ Flute Voice.
Higher settings increase the reverberance.
Range: 0.3s – 30.0s
3 ORGAN
Determines the amount of reverb applied to the Organ Flute Voice. This parameter
corresponds to the REVERB slider contained in the ATTACK/VOLUME Page of the
Organ Flute display.
Range: 0 – 24
321
REVERB [Page 2]
Reference Page
Effect List (page 52)
Press the number buttons to change the display pages.
Reference Page
Organ Flutes (page 37)
4
Voice Controls and Effects
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
48
Determines the amount of reverb effect applied to each Voice section.
Each slider corresponds to the REVERB slider in Voice Condition Page 1 of the
respective Voices.
Range: 0 – 24
1 TYPE
Determines the reverb type for rhythm, accompaniment, keyboard percussion, and
microphone signal.
2 TIME
Determines the length of reverb applied to the rhythm, accompaniment, keyboard
percussion, and microphone signal.
Range: 0.3s – 30.0s
3 RHYTHM
Determines the amount of reverb applied to the rhythm (with PERCUSSION slider)
and accompaniment (with ACCOMPANI. slider). Each slider corresponds to the
REVERB slider in the Rhythm Condition display.
Range: 0 – 24
4 KEYBOARD PERCUSSION
Determines the amount of reverb applied to the Keyboard Percussion.
Range: 0 – 24
REVERB [Page 3]
32 41
REVERB [Page 4]
Reference Page
Connecting a Microphone
(page 232)
Reference Pages
Changing the rhythm reverb
(page 67)
Keyboard Percussion
(page 74)
4
Voice Controls and Effects
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
49
Sustain
The sustain effect, selectable for the each Voice section, causes Voices to gradually fade
out when the keys are released. The sustain on/off and sustain length settings are
independent for each Voice section, providing maximum expressive control.
The optional Foot Pedal can also be used to switch sustain on/off for voice sections
other than Pedal Voice 1 and 2.
To add sustain to the Voices and call up the Sustain page:
Press the SUSTAIN button, located to the left of the panel, to set the sustain. The
Sustain display appears.
The Sustain display consists of two pages.
The display shows the on/off status and the current sustain length values for each Voice
section. The values here must be set high enough for the sustain effect to be noticeable.
Press the ON/OFF button in the display to select “ON” above the Voice section name
for which you want to apply sustain. To turn sustain off, press the same button a
second time to select “OFF”.
To adjust the sustain length value, use the display sliders. If you set the highest value
(HOLD), some Voices such as organ or synth will sound continuously even when the
keys are released.
The lamp of the [SUSTAIN] button lights up when you turn on the Sustain effect for
one of the Voice sections in the Sustain display. When you turn off the Sustain effect
for all Voice sections in the Sustain display, the lamp turns off. Remember to check
whether the sustain effects are on or off in the Sustain display before you start to play.
Range: 0 – 12, HOLD
Reference Page
Foot Pedal (page 196)
SUSTAIN Display
Switches the sustain function on/off
Sustain length value
4
Voice Controls and Effects
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
50
Rotary Speaker
Rotary Speaker recreates the rich, swirling sound of the popular rotating speaker effect.
The Rotary Speaker effect can be switched in real time as you play, with either the front
panel button. The Rotary Speaker effect CANNOT be turned on only by turning on
the [ROTARY SP SPEED] button. The following procedure is needed to use the
Rotary Speaker effect.
Select the Rotary Speaker effect from the desired Voice.
When you want to set Rotary Speaker to one of the Voice section, you can select the
effect category of Rotary Speaker in the Voice Condition Display Page 3 or 4.
See page 45 for details.
When you want to set Rotary Speaker for the Organ Flute Voice, select the effect
type in the EFFECT Page. See page 39 for details.
1
Select “Rotary Speaker” here.
Select an effect type other than [OFF].
4
Voice Controls and Effects
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
51
Adjust the rotating speed and mode of the Rotary Speaker.
Press the [ROTARY SP SPEED] button on the panel.
The ROTARY SPEAKER display appears. The settings in this display are
common to all Voice sections.
1 SPEED
Determines the speed of the speaker rotation.
Range: 2.69Hz – 39.7Hz
2 MODE
Determines the slow/stop mode when [ROTARY SP SPEED] button is off. If [SLOW]
is selected, a slow chorus effect is applied when you turn off the button on the panel.
If [STOP] is selected, the Rotary Speaker effect turns off when you turn off the button
on the panel.
Once the Rotary Speaker effect has been turned on and set, you can control the effect
in real time from the panel.
Control the Rotary Speaker effect from the panel.
You can control Rotary Speaker on/off from the panel. An optional Foot Pedal,
or the Footswitch on the Pedal Unit can also be used to switch the effect on/off.
See page 196 for details.
2
21
ROTARY SPEAKER Display
3
Reference Page
Footswitches (page 193)
Foot Pedal (page 196)
4
Voice Controls and Effects
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
52
REVERB
Produces a gentle “wash” of aftertones in the sound,
recreating the subtle ambience and depth of actual
performance spaces and rooms.
DELAY
Produces delayed distinct repeats of the sound, or
echoes. This is also useful for creating rhythmic
repeats in the sound.
3
Effect List
Effect Type Effect Type
HALL 1 PLATE 2
HALL 2 WHITE ROOM
HALL 3 TUNNEL
HALL M CANYON
HALL L BASEMENT
ROOM 1 XG HALL 1
ROOM 2 XG HALL 2
ROOM 3 XG ROOM 1
ROOM 4 XG ROOM 2
ROOM S XG ROOM 3
ROOM M XG STAGE 1
ROOM L XG STAGE 2
STAGE 1 XG PLATE
STAGE 2 GM PLATE
PLATE 1
Parameter
Value Description
Time 0.3 - 30.0 s Determines the decay time of
the reverb.
Dry/Wet D63>W - D<W63 Determines the balance of
the original sound (dry) and
the effect sound (wet).
Effect Type
DELAY LCR
XG DLY LCR
DELAY LR
ECHO
CROSS DELAY
TEMPO DELAY
TEMPO ECHO
TEMPO CROSS
Parameter Value Description
L DelayTime 0.1 - 1486.0 msec
Echo: 0.1 - 371.5
msec
Determines the time that
elapses between the original
sound and the delayed
repeat in the left channel.
R DelayTime 0.1 - 1486.0 msec
Echo: 0.1 - 371.5
msec
Determines the time that
elapses between the original
sound and the delayed
repeat in the right channel.
C DelayTime 0.1 - 1486.0 msec
Echo: 0.1 - 371.5
msec
Determines the time that
elapses between the original
sound and the delayed
repeat in the center of the
stereo image.
L>R
Delay Time
0.1 - 743.0 msec Determines the time for the
sound to move from left to
right (when using Cross
Delay).
R>L
Delay Time
0.1 - 743.0 msec Determines the time for the
sound to move from right to
left (when using Cross
Delay).
DelayTime 32th - 4th When using Tempo Delay,
this sets the time between
delayed repeats to match the
tempo of the rhythm/song.
InputSelect L, R, L&R Determines the input
configuration.
Feedback
Delay Time
0.1 - 1486.0 msec Determines the feedback
time of the delayed repeats.
The larger the value, the
longer the time between
delayed repeats. (For Delay
LR, the left and right
channels can be set
independently.)
Feedback
Delay 1
0.1 - 1486.0 msec Determines the first feedback
delay time of the L/R delay.
Feedback
Delay 2
0.1 - 1486.0 msec Determines the second
feedback delay time of the
L/R delay.
Feedback
Level
-63 - +63 Determines the amount of
delayed repeats in the
sound. When this is set to
0%, the delayed repeat from
the second time will not
sound.
L Feedback -63 - +63 Determines the feedback
level in the left channel.
R Feedback -63 - +63 Determines the feedback
level in the right channel.
Dry/Wet D63>W - D<W63 Determines the balance of
original sound and the effect
sound.
4
Voice Controls and Effects
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
53
ER/KARAOKE
Produces early reflections without the subsequent
reverb, or a deep echo effect like that used in Karaoke
sing-along applications.
CHORUS
Creates a warm effect as if several of the same sound
were playing at once. Makes the overall sound richer,
“fatter” and more animated.
FLANGER
This creates a metallic periodic “sweeping” effect,
similar to Chorus but with a brighter more resonant
sound.
Effect Type
ER 1
ER 2
GATE REVERB
REVERS GATE
KARAOKE 1
KARAOKE 2
KARAOKE 3
Parameter Value Description
Type S-H, L-H, Rdm,
Rvs, Plt, Spr
Determines the early
reflection type. The response
of the early reflections varies
depending on the type.
Room Size 0.1 - 7.0 Determines the room size.
The higher the value the
longer the ER.
Type Type A, Type B Determines the reverse gate
type.
DelayTime 0.1 - 400 msec Determines the time that
elapses between the original
sound and the delayed
repeat.
Feedback
Level
-63 - +63 Determines the amount of
delayed repeats in the
sound. When this is set to
0%, the delayed repeat from
the second time will not
sound.
Dry/Wet D63>W - D<W63 Determines the balance of
the original sound and effect
sound.
Effect Type Effect Type
CHORUS 1 GM CHORUS 4
CHORUS 2 FB CHORUS
XG CHORUS 1 CELESTE 1
XG CHORUS 2 CELESTE 2
XG CHORUS 3 CELESTE 3
XG CHORUS 4 CELESTE 4
GM CHORUS 1 SYMPHONIC
GM CHORUS 2 XG SYMPHONIC
GM CHORUS 3 ENS DETUNE
Parameter Value Description
LFO Freq. 0.00 - 39.7 Hz Determines the frequency of
oscillation, or the speed of
the wavering effect.
LFO Depth 0 - 127 Determines the depth of
oscillation, or the amount of
the wavering effect.
Input Mode Mono, Stereo Determines the input
configuration.
Detune -50 - +50 cent Determines the amount of
detuning (or pitch shifting) is
applied to the delayed
repeats.
L DelayTime 0.0 - 50.0 msec Determines the time that
elapses between the original
sound and the delayed
repeat in the left channel.
R DelayTime 0.0 - 50.0 msec Determines the time that
elapses between the original
sound and the delayed
repeat in the right channel.
Dry/Wet D63>W - D<W63 Determines the balance of
the original sound and the
effect sound.
Effect Type
FLANGER 1
FLANGER 2
XG FLANGER 1
XG FLANGER 2
XG FLANGER 3
GM FLANGER
V_FLANGER
TEMP FLANGER
DYNA FLANGER
Parameter Value Description
LFO Freq. 0.00 - 39.7 Hz Determines the frequency of
oscillation, or the speed of
the wavering effect.
LFO Depth 0 - 127 Determines the depth of
oscillation, or the amount of
the wavering effect.
FEEDBACK
LEVEL
-63 - +63 Determines the amount of
output sound (with the
flanging effect) that is
returned to the input. The
larger the value, the more
complex and pronounced the
flanging effect becomes.
LFO Wave Triangle, Sine,
Random
Determines the waveform:
triangular wave, sine wave or
random.
4
Voice Controls and Effects
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
54
PHASER
Similar to Flanger, this produces rolling timbre
changes and a pronounced up/down filter sweep
effect.
TREMOLO/AUTO PAN
This periodically changes the volume and has the
effect of moving the sound image both front and
back, and left and right.
Sensitivity 0 - 127 Determines the sensitivity.
The higher the value the
greater the change.
Threshold 0 - 127 Determines the input level at
which effect begins to be
applied.
Dry/Wet D63>W - D<W63 Determines the original
sound and the effect sound.
Effect Type
PHASER 1
PHASER 2
EP PHASER 1
EP PHASER 2
EP PHASER 3
TEMPO PHASER
DYNA PHASER
Parameter Value Description
LFO Freq. 0.00 - 39.7 Hz Determines the frequency of
oscillation, or the speed of
the wavering effect.
LFO Depth 0 - 127 Determines the depth of
oscillation, or the amount of
the wavering effect.
Phase Shift 0 - 127 Determines the phase
relationship between the
processed signal and the
original. This changes the
sound characteristics of the
Phaser effect.
Feedback
Level
-63 - +63 Determines the amount of
output sound (with the
phasing effect) that is
returned to the input. The
larger the value, the more
complex and pronounced the
phasing effect becomes.
Sensitivity 0 - 127 Determines the sensitivity.
The higher the value the
greater the change.
Threshold 0 - 127 Determines the input level at
which effect begins to be
applied.
Dry/Wet D63>W - D<W63 Determines the balance of
the original sound and the
effect sound.
Parameter Value Description
Effect Type Effect Type
TREMOLO 1 ORGAN TREMOLO
TREMOLO 2 AUTO PAN
XG TREMOLO XG AT PAN 1
EP TREMOLO XG AT PAN 2
GT TREMOLO 1 EP AUTO PAN
GT TREMOLO 2
Parameter Value Description
LFO Freq. 0.00 - 39.7 Hz Determines the tremolo
speed.
LFO Depth 0 - 127 Determines the depth of the
Tremolo effect.
AM Depth 0 - 127 Determines the amount of
volume change.
PM Depth 0 - 127 Determines the amount of
pitch change in the sound.
Input Mode Mono, Stereo Determines the input
configuration.
L/R Depth 0 - 127 Determines the depth of
panning between the left and
right channels.
F/R Depth 0 - 127 Front/rear. Determines the
depth of the front and rear
panning effect. This controls
both level and pitch at the
same time.
Pan L<->R, L->R, L<-R,
Lturn, Rturn, L/R
Determines the Auto Pan
type. (“L<->R” is a sine wave
and “L/R” is a sawtooth
wave.)
Dry/Wet D63>W - D<W63 Determines the balance of
original sound and the effect
sound.
4
Voice Controls and Effects
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
55
ROTARY SPEAKER
This popular effect (used mainly for electronic organ
sounds) recreates the rich, animated pulsing sound of
a rotating speaker horn.
DISTORTION
This effect adds distortion to the sound.
Effect Type Effect Type
XG ROTARY SP DUAL ROTSP 2
ROTARY SP 1 DIST+ROT SP
ROTARY SP 2 ODRV+ROT SP
ROTARY SP 3 AMP+ROT SP
ROTARY SP 4 DIST+2ROT SP
ROTARY SP 5 ODRV+2ROT SP
2WAY ROT SP AMP+2ROT SP
DUAL ROTSP 1
Parameter Value Description
EQ Low Freq. 32 - 2.0k Hz Determines the central
frequency of the low
frequency range that is
boosted or cut.
EQ Low Gain -12 - +12 dB Determines the amount over
which the low frequency
range is boosted or cut.
EQ Middle
Freq.
100 - 16k Hz Determines the central
frequency of the middle
frequency range that is
boosted or cut.
EQ Middle
Gain
-12 - +12 dB Determines the amount over
which the middle frequency
range is boosted or cut.
EQ Hi.Freq. 500 - 16k Hz Determines the central
frequency of the high
frequency range that is
boosted or cut.
EQ Hi.Gain -12 - +12 dB Determines the amount over
which the high frequency
range is boosted or cut.
Low/High
Balance
L63>H - L<H63 Determines the volume
balance between low and
high speakers.
MIC L-R Angle 0 - 180deg Determines the L/R angle of
the apparent microphone.
Dist. Drive 0 - 127 Determines the depth of
distortion. The higher the
value the greater the amount
of distortion.
Amp. Type Off, Stack, Combo,
Tube
Determines the amplifier type
simulated.
Drive 0 - 127 Determines the amount of
distortion.
Effect Type Effect Type
DIST HARD 1 V_DIST HARD
DIST HARD 2 V_DIST SOFT
DIST SOFT 1 COMP+DIST
DIST SOFT 2 XG CMP+DIST
ST DIST HARD AMP SIM
ST DIST SOFT XG AMP SIM
OVERDRIVE ST AMP SIM 1
ST OVERDRIVE ST AMP SIM 2
XG DIST XG ST AMP
XG ST DIST
Parameter Value Description
Drive 0 - 127 Determines the amount or
degree of distortion in the
sound.
Amp. Type Off, Stack, Combo,
Tube
Determines the type of
amplifier that is simulated.
LPF Cutoff 1.0 - 18kHz, Thru Determines the cutoff
frequency of the low pass
filter. Frequencies above this
value are cut or filtered out.
OutputLevel 0 - 127 Determines the level or
volume of the processed
sound.
EQ Low Gain -12 - +12 dB Determines the amount of EQ
boost or cut in the low
frequency range.
EQ Middle
Gain
-12 - +12 dB Determines the amount of EQ
boost or cut in the mid
frequency range.
Overdrive 0 - 100 % Determines the depth of
overdrive. The higher the
value the greater the amount
of distortion.
Device Transistor, Vintage,
Dist 1, Dist 2, Fuzz
Determines the device that
will create distortion:
Transistor, VintageTube,
Distortion, Fuzz and so on.
Speaker Flat, Stack, Combo,
Twin, Radio,
Megaphone
Determines the simulated
speaker type: Flat, Stack,
Combo, Twin, Radio,
Megaphone and so on.
Presence 0 - 20 Values in the higher range
can give vocals more
presence.
Comp.
Threshold
-48 - -6 db Determines the input level at
which compression begins to
be applied.
Dry/Wet D63>W - D<W63 Determines the balance of
the original sound and the
effect sound.
4
Voice Controls and Effects
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
56
DISTORTION+
A combination of Distortion and Delay.
WAH
This uses an automatic up/down filter sweep to
change the timbre of the sound, producing a
“wahwah” sound.
Effect Type Effect Type
DIST+DELAY V_DIST H+DLY
ODRV+DELAY V_DIST S+DLY
XG DIST+DLY DIST+T DLY
XG ODRV+DLY ODRV+T DLY
CMP+DIST+DLY CMP+DST+TDLY
CMP+ODRV+DLY CMP+OD+TDLY
XG CMP+DT+DL V_DST H+TDLY
XG CMP+OD+DL V_DST S+TDLY
Parameter Value Description
Dist. Drive 0 - 127 Determines the depth of
distortion. The higher the
value the greater the amount
of distortion.
Dist. Out Level 0 - 127 Determines the output level
of the distorted sound.
L DelayTime 0.1 - 1486.0 msec Determines the time that
elapses between the original
sound and the delayed
repeat in the left channel.
R DelayTime 0.1 - 1486.0 msec Determines the time that
elapses between the original
sound and the delayed
repeat in the right channel.
Delay
Feedback
-63 - +63 Determines the amount of
delayed repeats in the
sound.
Comp.
Threshold
-48 - -6db Determines the input level at
which compression begins to
be applied.
DelayTime 0.1 - 1486.0 msec Determines the time that
elapses between the original
sound and the delayed
repeat.
Overdrive 0 - 100 % Determines the depth of
overdrive. The higher the
value the greater the amount
of distortion.
Device Transistor, Vintage,
Dist 1, Dist 2, Fuzz
Determines the device that
will create distortion:
Transistor, VintageTube,
Distortion, Fuzz and so on.
Speaker Flat, Stack, Combo,
Twin, Radio,
Megaphone
Determines the simulated
speaker type: Flat, Stack,
Combo, Twin, Radio,
Megaphone and so on.
Presence 0 - 20 Values in the higher range
can give vocals more
presence.
Dry/Wet D63>W - D<W63 Determines the balance of
original sound and the effect
sound.
Effect Type Effect Type
AUTO WAH TC WAH+ODRV
XG AUTO WAH XG TC WAH+OD
TOUCH WAH 1 CLAVI TC WAH
TOUCH WAH 2 EP TOUCH WAH
AT WAH+DIST WAH+DST+TDLY
XG AT WH+DST WAH+OD+T DLY
AT WAH+ODRV WAH+DIST+DLY
XG AT WAH+OD XG WH+DST+DL
TC WAH+DIST WAH+ODRV+DLY
XG TC WH+DST XG WH+OD+DLY
Parameter Value Description
LFO Freq. 0.00 - 39.7 Hz Determines the speed of the
Wah effect.
LFO Depth 0 - 127 Determines the depth of the
Wah effect.
Cutoff 0 - 127 Determines the central
frequency that the wah filter
acts upon.
Resonance 1.0 - 12.0 Determines the frequency
bandwidth (around the
central frequency set in
Cutoff above) that the wah
filter affects.
Drive 0 - 127 Higher values result in a more
distorted sound.
Sensitivity 0 - 127 Determines the degree to
which the wah filter is
affected by your playing
touch.
DelayTime 0.1 - 1486.0 msec Determines the time that
elapses between the original
sound and the delayed
repeat.
Delay
Feedback
-63 - +63 Determines the amount of
delayed repeats in the
sound.
Comp.
Threshold
-48 - -6db Determines the input level at
which compression begins to
be applied.
Dist. Out Level 0 - 127 Determines the output level
of the distorted sound.
Dry/Wet D63>W - D<W63 Determines the balance of
the original sound and the
effect sound.
4
Voice Controls and Effects
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
57
DYNAMIC
This effect (also called compression) “squeezes” the
overall dynamic range of the sound, and has a gain
control–letting you make soft sounds louder, and thus
give more “punch” to the sound.
EQ/ENHANCER
This effect boosts or cuts specific frequency bands,
allowing you to shape the tone of the sound as
required by the mix.
Effect Type
M BAND COMP
COMPRESSOR
NOISE GATE
Parameter Value Description
Type Normal, Low, Mid,
High, Low/High,
Low/Mid, Mid/High,
FullBit, Wild, Attacky,
LowEnd, Hard, Basic
Determines the compressor
type.
EQ Low Gain -63 - +63 Determines the amount of
low-frequency gain (boost or
cut).
EQ Middle
Gain
-63 - +63 Determines the amount of
mid-frequency gain (boost or
cut).
EQ Hi.Gain -63 - +63
Determines the amount of
high-frequency gain (boost or
cut).
Attack 1 - 40 msec Determines how soon the
compression effect is
applied, once the
compressor has been
triggered (as a result of
Threshold below).
Release 10 - 680 msec Determines how soon the
compressor returns to its
normal gain, once the trigger
signal drops below the
Threshold point.
Threshold multi-band
compressor:
-32 - +32
compressor:
-48 - -6 dB
Noise Gate:
-72 - -30 dB
Determines the level of the
input signal required to
trigger the compressor.
Signals at a level below the
Threshold pass through
unaffected; signals at and
above the Threshold are
compressed.
Ratio 1.0 - 20.0 Determines the amount of
compression of the sound
(for signals passing the
Threshold). This is expressed
as a ratio
–
the change in
output signal relative to the
change in input. The range
here is 1/1 (no change in
output signal, hence no
compression) to 20/1. Higher
ratios result in greater
compression.
OutputLevel 0 - 127 Determines the overall output
of the compressed signal.
Use this to bring up the
overall level after you've
reduced the dynamic range
with compression.
Effect Type
ST 2BAND EQ
ST 3BAND EQ
XG 3BAND EQ
EQ DISCO
EQ TEL
HM ENHANCER
XG HM ENHNCE
Parameter Value Description
EQ LowFreq. 50 - 2.0k Hz
ST2BandEQ:
32 - 2.0k Hz
Determines the central
frequency of the low
frequency range that is to be
boosted or cut.
EQ Low Gain -12 - +12 dB Determines the amount over
which the low frequency
range is boosted or cut.
EQ Middle
Freq.
100 - 16k Hz Determines the central
frequency of the middle
frequency range that is to be
boosted or cut.
EQ Middle
Gain
-12 - +12 dB Determines the amount over
which the middle frequency
range is boosted or cut.
EQ M Width 0.1 - 12.0 Determines the bandwidth or
the range of frequencies
around the specific middle
frequency that is to be
boosted or cut. Lower values
let you narrow in on a specific
frequency, while higher
values select a broader
range of frequencies to be
affected.
EQ Hi.Freq. 500Hz - 16 kHz Determines the central
frequency of the high
frequency range that is to be
boosted or cut.
EQ Hi.Gain -12 - +12 dB Determines how much
increase/ decrease the wave
frequency point of EQ high
frequency.
HPF Cutoff 500Hz - 16 k Hz Determines the cutoff
frequency of the low pass
filter. Frequencies above this
value are cut or filtered out.
Drive 0 - 127 Determines the amount or
depth of the Enhancer effect.
Mix Level 0 - 127 Determines how much of the
processed enhanced sound
is mixed together with the
original sound.
4
Voice Controls and Effects
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
58
PITCH CHANGE
This effect changes the pitch.
MISCELLANEOUS
Creates special effects.
AMBIENCE
IMPULSE EXP
RESONATOR
VOICE CANCEL
TALKING MOD
LO-FI
DYNA FILTER
Effect Type
PITCH CHANGE
XG PCH CHG 1
XG PCH CHG 2
Parameter Value Description
Pitch -24 - +24 Determines the amount of
pitch change in semitones.
Pitch Fine 1 -50 - +50 Fine pitch adjustment to
detune the sound and create
a chorus effect.
Pitch Fine 2 -50 - +50 Fine pitch adjustment to
detune the sound and create
a chorus effect.
Initial Delay 0.1 - 400 msec Determines the time that
elapses between the original
sound and the early
reflections.
Feedback
Level
-63 - +63 Determines the amount of
delayed repeats in the
sound. When this is set to
0%, the delayed repeat from
the second time will not
sound.
Dry/Wet D63>W - D<W63 Determines the balance of
original sound and the effect
sound.
Effect Type
AMBIENCE
IMPULSE EXP
RESONATOR
VOICE CANCEL
TALKING MOD
LO-FI
DYNA FILTER
DYNA RINGMOD
RING MOD
ISOLATOR
Parameter Value Description
DelayTime 0.0 - 50.0 msec Determines the delay time.
Output Phase Normal, Invers Determines the phase of the
effect sound.
Dry/Wet D63>W - D<W63 Determines the balance of
original sound and the effect
sound.
Parameter Value Description
Density 0.159 - 22.61 msec Determines the density.
Dispersion 4.028 msec - 4.000
sec
Determines the resonance
time.
Wet Level 0 - 127 Determines the level of the
effected sound.
Parameter Value Description
Type Type1 - 6 Determines the type.
Decay Time 4.028 msec -
4.000 sec
Determines the length of
reverberation.
LPF Cutoff 28.5Hz -
21.6 kHz (Thru)
Determines the cutoff
frequency of the Low Pass
Filter. The portion of the
signal above the specified
frequency is cut.
Dispersion 0 - 16 Determines the resonance
time.
Wet Level 0 - 127 Determines the level of the
effected sound.
Parameter Value Description
Low Adjust 0 - 26 Determines the frequencies
in the lower portion of the
middle range that are
attenuated.
High Adjust 0 - 26 Determines the frequencies
in the upper portion of the
middle range that are
attenuated.
Parameter Value Description
Vowel a, i, u, e, o Determines the specific
vowel used for the “talking”
effect.
Drive 0 - 127 Determines the effect depth.
OutputLevel 0 - 127 Determines the output level
of the effect-processed
sound.
Parameter Value Description
Sampling
Control
44.1 kHz - 345.0 Hz Determines the sampling
frequency.
Word Length 0 - 127 Determines the resolution or
roughness of the sound.
Filter Type Thru, PwrBass,
Radio, Tel, Clean,
Low
Determines the filter type.
Dry/Wet D63>W - D<W63 Determines the balance of
original sound and the effect
sound.
Parameter Value Description
Sensitivity 0 - 127 Determines the sensitivity.
The higher the value the
greater the change.
4
Voice Controls and Effects
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
59
DYNA RINGMOD
RING MOD
ISOLATOR
THRU
Bypass control. This cancels the effect processing.
Level Offset 0 - 127 Determines the offset values
of the filter frequency. The
offset value affects the filter
frequency when no control
signals are received.
Filter Type LPF (12 dB),
LPF (18 dB),
LPF (24 dB),
HPF, BPF, BEF
Determines the filter type.
Resonance -16 - +111 The higher the value, the
more sharp the frequency
response curve is.
Dry/Wet D63>W - D<W63 Determines the balance of
original sound and the effect
sound.
Parameter Value Description
Sensitivity 0 - 127 Determines the modulation
sensitivity for the input
change.
Threshold 0 - 127 Determines the input level at
which effect begins to be
applied.
Dry/Wet D63>W - D<W63 Determines the balance of
original sound and the effect
sound.
Parameter Value Description
Frequency 0.7 - 5002.6 Hz Determines the frequency for
the Amplitude Modulation.
Frequency
Fine
0 - 127 Determines detailed
adjustment of the Amplitude
Modulation.
LFO Wave Triangle, Sine Selects a triangular wave or
sine wave as the wave for
modulation.
LFO Depth 0 - 127 Determines the wave depth.
The higher the value, the
greater the effect.
Dry/Wet D63>W - D<W63 Determines the balance of
original sound and the effect
sound.
Parameter Value Description
On/Off Off, On Determines the on/off status
for the effect.
Low Mute Off, On Mute switch for the low
frequency range.
Middle Mute Off, On Mute switch for the mid
frequency range.
High Mute Off, On Mute switch for the high
frequency range.
Low Level 0 - 127 Determines the level of the
low frequencies.
Middle Level 0 - 127 Determines the level of the
mid frequencies.
High Level 0 - 127 Determines the level of the
high frequencies.
Parameter Value Description
Effect Type
Thru
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
60
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
This DDK-7 features 274 different real rhythms featuring actual
drum and percussion sampled sounds. Automatic Accompaniment
functions are used with the rhythms, providing appropriate and
completely automatic accompaniment to match the style of the
selected rhythm. Moreover, the DDK-7 has a Keyboard Percussion
feature that allows you to play drum and percussion sounds from
the Upper, Lower keyboard and Pedalboard.
A total of 274 rhythms can be instantly selected from the Rhythm Menu Display
which is called up by pressing the RHYTHM button.
Selecting a rhythm
In the explanation below, 16Beat 1 in the POPS category is selected as an example.
Press the Rhythm button in the RHYTHM section on the front
panel.
The Rhythm Menu is displayed.
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
Contents
1 Selecting rhythms with the Rhythm button . . . .60
• Selecting a rhythm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
• Operating the rhythm from the panel . . . . . . . . . .63
• Changing the rhythm volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
• Adjusting the tempo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
• Changing the rhythm reverb. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
2Rhythm List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
3 Accompaniment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
4Automatic Accompaniment – Auto Bass Chord
(A.B.C.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
5 Melody On Chord (M.O.C.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
6 Keyboard Percussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
• Using the Preset Keyboard Percussion . . . . . . . . 74
• Preset Keyboard Percussion List . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
• Assigning sounds to the User Keyboard Percussion
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
• Copying the Keyboard Percussion settings
. . . . . . 81
• Detailed settings for each percussion instrument
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
• Kit Assign List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
1
Selecting rhythms with the Rhythm button
1
Rhythm button
5
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
61
Select the desired Rhythm category with the category buttons in
the display.
You can also choose the “User” category to select a User rhythm you have created
in the Rhythm Pattern Program.
For example, to call up 16Beat 1, select the POPS category.
The name of the selected category (Pops) is displayed on the upper left. The
Rhythm name shown under the category name is that of the currently assigned
Rhythm and is irrelevant to the Rhythm menu below.
Select the desired rhythm name from the Rhythm menu.
The Rhythm menu contains many Pops rhythms, more than can fit on the
display page. To change the display pages, press the appropriate number buttons
in the display.
The color of the selected rhythm name changes to orange, indicating that it has
been selected.
2
Rhythm category
3
Reference Page
Rhythm Pattern Program
(page 148)
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
62
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
Rhythm Structure
Each rhythm is made up of “sections.” Since each section is a rhythmic variation of
the basic rhythm, you can use them to add “spice” to your performance and mix up
the beats while you are playing. You can freely change the section while the rhythm
is played back.
INTRO
This is used for the beginning of the song. There are three Intro sections that can be
selected with INTRO [1] – [3] buttons. When the Intro finishes playing, the
rhythm automatically shifts to the Main section.
MAIN
This is used for playing the main part of the song. There are four Main sections that
can be selected with MAIN/FILL IN [A] – [D] buttons. The rhythm pattern of
several measures repeats indefinitely.
FILL IN
This is designed for use as a temporary and regular rhythmic pattern to spice up a
repeating rhythm. There are four Fill In sections that can be played by pressing the
selected (lit) MAIN/FILL IN [A] – [D] buttons as desired. When one measure
pattern of Fill In finishes playing, the rhythm is automatically shifts to the Main
section.
Selected Intro section’s lamp is lit
Selected Main section’s lamp is lit
Selected Fill In section’s lamp flashes
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
63
Operating the rhythm from the panel
You can turn the rhythm on/off and switch the sections as desired by pressing the
buttons on the panel. Using the Fill Ins and Break patterns let you add dynamic
interest and “spice” to your performance.
To start/stop the rhythm:
START
The rhythm begins as soon as the [START] button is pressed.
To stop the rhythm, press the button again.
SYNCHRO START
The [SYNCHRO START] button puts the rhythm in “standby.”
The rhythm starts when you press a note on the Lower keyboard or
Pedalboard.
When you start the rhythm with the [SYNCHRO START] button,
pressing this button again stops the rhythm.
BREAK
This lets you add dynamic variations and breaks in the rhythm pattern. The Break
section is selected by pressing the [BREAK] button. When the one-measure Break
pattern finishes playing, the rhythm automatically shifts to the Main section.
ENDING
This is used for the ending of the song. There are three Ending sections that can be
selected with the ENDING [1] – [3] buttons. When the ending is finished, the
rhythm automatically stops.
The lamp is lit when the Break section is selected
Selected Ending section’s lamp is lit
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
64
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
INTRO
Pressing one of the INTRO [1] – [3] buttons automatically adds
a short introduction before starting the actual (Main) rhythm.
First press one of the INTRO [1] – [3] buttons, then press the
[START] or [SYNCHRO START] button to actually start
the rhythm.
While the introduction is playing, the BAR/BEAT display
shows the countdown to the first measure of the pattern.
For example, if there is a four-measure lead-in for a pattern
in 4/4 time, the display at right appears:
ENDING
Pressing one of the ENDING [1] – [3] buttons automatically
adds an ending phrase before stopping the rhythm.
When you press the Ending button while rhythm is
playing back, the rhythm will automatically stop after the
ending phrase is played. You can have the ending gradually
slow down (ritardando) by pressing the ENDING button once again, while the ending
is playing.
To switch the rhythm sections:
You can change the rhythm section of the Main phrase by pressing the desired MAIN/
FILL IN [A] – [D] button. The selected section’s lamp (above the button) is lit.
To use the Fill In patterns:
As you play the DDK-7 along with the rhythm, occasionally press the selected MAIN/
FILL button as desired. The Fill In pattern (one measure) will be played and the
selected Fill In section’s lamp (above the button) flashes.
When you use the Auto Fill In function, Fill Ins will be played automatically. The Auto
Fill In function is set in the Rhythm Condition display.
Pressing the Rhythm button on the panel again (or pressing the rhythm name of the
selected rhythm in the display again) calls up the Rhythm Condition Display.
NOTE
When an Intro or Ending
pattern is playing, the Lower
Keyboard cannot be played.
NOTE
Pressing the ENDING [1]
button during playback of
the Main section will first call
up the fill in pattern, then the
Ending 1 pattern.
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
65
When Auto Fill is set to ON in the left side of the display, the Fill In pattern is
automatically played whenever you switch the Main sections.
To use the Break patterns:
As you play the DDK-7 along with the rhythm, occasionally press the [BREAK]
button.
Moreover, you can start/stop the rhythm and switch the sections by using the
Footswitch or optional footpedal. See page 194 for details.
Changing the rhythm volume
There are two ways to set the rhythm volume: using the VOLUME buttons on the
panel and using the volume slider in the display. The volume buttons let you make
coarse adjustments to the volume while the slider gives you fine control.
Using VOLUME buttons on the panel
(coarse):
Press the VOLUME buttons of the rhythm on the panel to
set the desired level. The buttons have seven volume
settings, from a minimum of 0, or no sound, to a
maximum of full volume.
Using VOLUME slider in the display (fine):
Pressing the rhythm button on the panel again (or pressing the rhythm name of the
selected rhythm in the display again) calls up the Rhythm Condition Display.
To set the volume, touch the PERCUSSION VOLUME slider in the display or use the
Data Control Dial. The control range is from 0 (no sound) to 24 (full volume).
DATA CONTROL
NOTE
Depending on the volume
value (set by the slider), two
adjacent VOLUME lamps
may be lit at the same time,
indicating an intermediate
position.
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
66
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
Adjusting the tempo
You can adjust the rhythm tempo by pressing
the TEMPO buttons. Pressing the right
button increases the tempo and pressing the
left button decreases it. Each rhythm has its
original (preset) tempo. Press the TEMPO
buttons simultaneously to restore the tempo
to the original setting.
TEMPO display shows the current tempo. Displayed values are given in beats per
minute.
The tempo range is 40 to 240 beats per minute.
Each rhythm has its original (preset) tempo. Press [PRESET TEMPO] button in the
display to restore the tempo to the original setting.
When the rhythm begins playing, the TEMPO indicator changes function to a BAR/
BEAT indicator.
On the BAR/BEAT indicator, the number on the left indicates the current bar or
measure and the one on the right indicates the number of the beat in each bar.
Increasing
the tempo
Decreasing
the tempo
TEMPO Indicator
Bar (measure)
Beat
BAR/BEAT Indicator
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
67
You can also see the Tempo and Bar/Beat indications in the Voice Display. In the Voice
Display, both Tempo and Bar/Beat can be seen in one display.
Changing the rhythm reverb
You can adjust the amount of reverb applied to the rhythms and the percussion sounds
used in the rhythms in the Rhythm Condition display.
When the Reverb depth for the entire instrument in Reverb Display Page 1
is set to the minimum, the setting here will have no effect.
Range: 0 – 24
Reference Page
Voice Display (page 18)
Reference Page
Reverb (page 46)
DATA CONTROL
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
68
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
2
Rhythm List
MARCH
1
Marching Band 1
Marching Band 2
Marching Band 3
Alpine March
6/8 March 1
6/8 March 2
6/8 Kids
6/8 Organ March
Broadway
SF March
Wild West
Baroque
WALTZ
1
Vienna Waltz
Orchestra Waltz
Simple Waltz
Gentle Waltz
Guitar Serenade
Snow Waltz
Classic Waltz
Mariachi
Alpine Waltz
Musette
2
Jazz Waltz 1
Jazz Waltz 2
Jazz Waltz 3
Jazz Waltz 4
Modern Waltz
Pop Waltz
Country Waltz
SWING&JAZZ
1
Big Band 1
Big Band 2
Big Band 3
Big Band 4
Big Band 5
Big Band 6
Big Band 7
Big Band Bop
Orch. Big Band
Orchestra Swing
Movie Panther
Jungle Drum
2
Jazz Club
Simple Swing
Acoustic Jazz
Medium Jazz
2
Fast Jazz
Combo Swing
Cool Combo
Light Swing
Afro Cuban 1
Afro Cuban 2
Bebop
Five-Four
3
Jazz Ballad 1
Jazz Ballad 2
Movie Swing
Piano Trio
Midnight Swing
Slow Jazz
Moonlight 1
Moonlight 2
Winter Song 1
Winter Song 2
4
Foxtrot
Slowfox
Quickstep
Dixieland 1
Dixieland 2
Dixieland Jazz
Ragtime
Charleston
Guitar Swing
POPS
1
8Beat Light 1
8Beat Light 2
8Beat Light 3
8Beat Light 4
Folk Rock 1
Folk Rock 2
60’s 8Beat
Asian Pops
Unplugged 1
Unplugged 2
Unplugged 3
8Beat Adria
2
Bubblegum Pop
70’s 8Beat
Tijuana
SingerSongWriter
Surfin’ 8Beat
Finger Pickin’
Heart Beat
Guitar Pop
2 British 16Beat
3
16Beat 1
16Beat 2
16Beat 3
16Beat 4
Fusion Shuffle 1
Fusion Shuffle 2
Jazz Pop
16Beat Shuffle 1
16Beat Shuffle 2
4
Pop Shuffle
Eurovision Pop
British Pop
Sing Along
Simple Shuffle 1
Simple Shuffle 2
Simple Shuffle 3
R&B
1
Blues Rock
Motor City
Soul 1
Soul 2
16Beat Soul
Frankly Soul
Gospel Funk
Jazz Funk
Funk Beat 1
Funk Beat 2
Detroit Pop 1
Detroit Pop 2
2
New R&B
Modern R&B
New Gospel
Cool Blues
Gospel Shuffle
Gospel Sisters
Amazing Gospel
6/8 Blues
Slow Blues
6/8 Soul
Blues Shuffle
LATIN
1
Samba
Big Band Samba
Light Samba 1
Light Samba 2
Pop Samba 1
Pop Samba 2
1
Bossa Nova 1
Bossa Nova 2
Bossa Nova 3
Pop Bossa
2
Mambo 1
Mambo 2
Salsa 1
Salsa 2
Montuno
Calypso
Cha Cha Cha
Big Band Cha Cha
Pop Cha Cha
3
Rumba
Pop Rumba
Fast Rumba
Guitar Rumba
Beguine 1
Beguine 2
Cuban Bolero
Tango 1
Tango 2
Tango Orchestra
Tango Milonga
WORLD MUSIC
1
Bolero
Flamenco
Pop Flamenco
Pasodoble
Polka 1
Polka 2
Banda Polka
Irish Dance
Tarantella
Sirtaki
Enka
2
Reggae
Happy Reggae
Sheriff Reggae
Shuffle Reggae
Bluegrass 1
Bluegrass 2
Hoedown
Country 2/4
Country Shuffle
Country Band
Hawaiian
Mexican Dance
This list shows all available rhythms on the DDK-7. Numbers written at the left side of each column in this list
indicate the numbered buttons displayed in the Rhythm Menu.
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
69
•
BALLAD
1
Power Ballad
Dramatic Ballad
Movie Ballad 1
Movie Ballad 2
Secret Service
Carpenters Pop
Romantic Ballad
Love Song
16Beat Ballad 1
16Beat Ballad 2
16Beat Ballad 3
Easy Ballad
2
Guitar Ballad 1
Guitar Ballad 2
Guitar Ballad 3
Organ Ballad
Chart Ballad
Analog Ballad
Pop Ballad
8Beat Modern
Chillout
Slow&Easy
3
6/8 Slow Rock 1
6/8 Slow Rock 2
6/8 Orchestra 1
6/8 Orchestra 2
6/8 Ballad
Acoustic Ballad
ROCK
1
Power Rock
Southern Rock
60’s Rock 1
60’s Rock 2
Hard Rock 1
Hard Rock 2
Rock Shuffle 1
Rock Shuffle 2
Tears Rock 1
Tears Rock 2
Soft Rock
British Rock
2
Country Rock 1
Country Rock 2
New Country
Cowboy Rock
Rock&Roll 1
Rock&Roll 2
Skiffle
Caribbean Rock
R&R Shuffle
Jive
Boogie Woogie
DANCE
1
Ibiza 1
Ibiza 2
Euro Trance
Disco Teens
Techno Party
Club Dance
Dream Dance
Club House
UK Pop
US Disco
Swing House
2
US Pop
US Hip Hop
Classic Hip Hop
Trip Hop
Chart Pop
Ground Beat
Hip Hop Groove
Hip Hop Pop
Hip Hop Light
Euro Hip Hop
3
Latin DJ’s
Club Latin
Latin Disco 1
Latin Disco 2
Garage
6/8 Trance
80’s Dance
Pop Beat 1
Pop Beat 2
Funky Dance
4
Disco Philly 1
Disco Philly 2
70’s Disco 1
70’s Disco 2
Disco Funk
Disco Chocolate
Dance Pop
Table 1:
Certain rhythms created for use with slow, soft
Songs or for Songs that do not use a bass part at the
beginning, may not have drum sections. To use
these rhythms, refer to the following information.
Some sections of the following nine rhythms are
configured with accompaniment only; they do not
contain any drum or percussion.
Some sections of the following five rhythms do not
contain an Auto Bass part. This means that even
though the Auto Bass Chord is turned on, the bass
part will not sound.
•Guitar Serenade in the WALTZ category
•Folk Rock 1 in the POPS category
•Unplugged 1 in the POPS category
•Pop Flamenco in WORLD MUSIC category
•New Country in the ROCK category
Category Rhythm Section
MARCH
6/8 Organ March Main A, Main B
Baroque All sections except Intro 1
WALTZ
Simple Waltz Ending 1
Guitar Serenade All sections except Intro 1
WORLD
MUSIC
Banda Polka Main A, Fill In A
Hoedown Ending 1
Mexican Dance Main A, Fill In A
BALLAD Dramatic Ballad Main A
ROCK R&R Shuffle Ending 1
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
70
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
The Accompaniment function provides arpeggiated chords and other instrumental
embellishments when rhythms are used.
Accompaniment controls are selected from the Rhythm Menu and Rhythm Condition
display.
Select the desired rhythm name in the display.
At the bottom of the display, there are seven part buttons, such as Chord 1,
Chord 2, Pad, and so on. These parts, with the exception of Main Drum and
Add Drum, are Accompaniment parts.
Turn the desired parts on.
The Accompaniment consists of five parts, Chord 1, Chord 2, Pad, Phrase 1,
and Phrase 2, and each of them can be set to on or off by pressing corresponding
button in the display.
If you turn all the parts off, the Accompaniment does not sound.
CHORD 1/CHORD 2:
These are the rhythmic chord backing parts.
PAD:
This part features sustained chords and commonly uses lush sounds such as
strings and organ.
PHRASE 1/PHRASE 2:
These parts are used for various embellishments and riffs that enhance the song,
such as brass section accents and chord arpeggios.
Not all parts contain accompaniment data. Some parts may be empty depending
on the selected rhythm and rhythm section.
3
Accompaniment
Main Drum and Add Drum contains the drum and percussion rhythm patterns.
When you turn both Main Drum and Add Drum off, the drum and percussion do
not sound. Generally, Main Drum contains the main part of the rhythm and Add
drum has additional percussion sounds, such as tambourine.
1
Accompaniment parts
2
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
71
Adjust the volume and amount of reverb applied to the
Accompaniment.
Pressing the rhythm button on the panel again calls up the Rhythm Condition
display.
The two sliders at the right side of the display can control the Accompaniment
volume and reverb. Touch the slider in the display or use the Data Control dial
to adjust the volume/reverb.
The Auto Bass Chord (A.B.C.) function works with the Rhythm section of the DDK-7
to automatically produce bass accompaniment as you play. It adds an entirely new
dimension to your performance by effectively putting a full backing band at your
disposal. There are three modes used for producing Automatic Accompaniment
patterns.
Before using the A.B.C. function, turn Pedal Poly off. If Pedal Poly is set to on, the bass
pattern of the A.B.C. will not sound.
To set the A.B.C. function:
Select the A.B.C. modes in the Rhythm Condition Display.
4
Automatic Accompaniment
– Auto Bass Chord (A.B.C.)
3
DATA CONTROL
Reference Page
POLY (page 42)
Rhythm Condition Display
12
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
72
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
1 A.B.C. MODE
OFF:
Cancels the Auto Bass Chord function.
SINGLE FINGER:
The Single Finger mode provides the fastest and easiest means to obtain many different
chord/bass combinations. You can produce major, minor, 7th, and minor 7th chords by
simply using one, or at most, two or three fingers to play the chords. The chord
produced will sound in the same octave regardless of where it is played on the Lower
keyboard.
Key of C
Major chords:
Press the root of the chord (the note that corresponds to the chord’s
name).
Minor chords:
Simultaneously press the root and any one black key to the left of it.
7th chords:
Simultaneously press the root and any one white key to the left of it.
Minor 7th chords:
Simultaneously press the root as well as any black key and any white
key to the left of it.
Playing single finger chords without the use of the rhythm lets you add full continuous
chords to your performance.
FINGERED CHORD:
The Fingered Chord mode automatically produces bass accompaniment for chords
played in the Lower keyboard. It allows you to use a wider range of chord types than in
the Single Finger mode. In the Fingered Chord mode, you play full chords while the
Auto Bass Chord function automatically selects the appropriate bass pattern. If you play
only one or two notes in the Lower keyboard, the appropriate chord will sound on the
basis of the previously played chord.
Key of C
Playing fingered chords without the use of the rhythm lets you add full continuous
chords to your performance.
CUSTOM A.B.C.:
The Custom A.B.C. mode is a slight variation on the Fingered Chord mode. It allows
you to determine what bass notes will be played in the accompaniment by playing a note
on the Pedalboard along with the chords you play in the Lower keyboard.
C
Cm
C7
Cm7
C Cm C7 Cm7 Cmaj7
CaugCm maj7 Cdim Cdim7 Csus4
Cm7-5C7sus4 C6 Cm6 Cadd9
NOTE
When playing certain chords
(aug, dim7, sus4, 6, and
m6), make sure to play the
root of the chord as the
lowest note in that chord.
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
73
2 MEMORY
LOWER:
When this is set to on, the Lower keyboard Voices and chord accompaniment keep
playing even after you release your fingers from the Lower keyboard, while the rhythm
plays.
PEDAL:
When this is set to on, the Pedalboard Voices and bass accompaniment keep playing
even after you release your foot from the Pedalboard, while the rhythm plays.
(In the Single Finger and Fingered modes:) When this is set to on, the bass
accompaniment of the Pedalboard Voices keeps playing even after you release your
fingers from the Lower keyboard.
When you start the rhythm with [SYNCHRO START] button, set the Lower/Pedal
Memory to on. When Memory is off, releasing your fingers from Lower keyboard stops
the rhythm.
The Melody On Chord (M.O.C.) feature automatically adds a harmony part to the
melodies you play on the Upper keyboard. The harmony is derived from the chords
you play on the Lower keyboard – or from the chords that are played for you, if you use
Automatic Accompaniment. Melody On Chord has three different modes, each
providing a different set of harmonics to accompany the melody played. Melody On
Chord can also be controlled with the Footpedal.
To set the M.O.C. function:
Press the [VOICE DISPLAY] button, then call up the Page 3 by using the Page
buttons.
The Melody On Chord display appears.
5
Melody On Chord (M.O.C.)
Voice Display [Page 3]
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
74
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
1 M.O.C. MODE
OFF:
Cancels the Melody On Chord function.
Mode 1:
Produces harmonies of up to two notes in a range close to the melody played.
Mode 2:
Produces harmonies of up to three notes in a range close to the melody played.
Mode 3:
Produces harmonies of up to four notes in a range relatively distant from the melody
played.
Melody On Chord can be heard only when the Upper Keyboard Voice section’s volume
is set to the appropriate value. Melody On Chord does not apply to the Lead Voices.
The Keyboard Percussion function features many types of drum and percussion
sounds, playable from the keyboards and Pedalboard.
Keyboard Percussion has two different modes, Preset and User. Preset Keyboard
Percussion lets you play the preset drum kit sounds from the keyboards (assigned
beforehand to the keys), while the User Keyboard Percussion lets you freely assign the
drum sounds to any key or pedal you wish.
Using the Preset Keyboard Percussion
Turn off the Upper, Lower and/or Pedal Voices by setting each
Voice’s volume to MIN.
Turn on the Keyboard Percussion function by pressing the
[K.B.P.1] or [K.B.P.2] button.
The Keyboard Percussion (K.B.P.) Display appears.
Pressing the [K.B.P.1] button calls up the Preset 1 kit on the Upper/Lower
keyboards, and pressing [K.B.P.2] button calls up the Preset 2 kit on the
Pedalboard.
Reference Page
Controlling Melody On Chord
(with Footpedal); (page 200)
6
Keyboard Percussion
1
2
NOTE
In the Voice Display, each
Voice section can be muted
(page 19).
NOTE
Two Keyboard Percussion
sets, [K.B.P.1] and [K.B.P.2],
can be played at the same
time by setting both buttons
to on.
Reference Page
Connecting a Pedal Unit
(page 229)
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
75
Select the desired percussion kit.
As a default, Multi Kit is assigned to the keyboards but you can change the kit
from a total of 16 different kits. Pressing the Kit button on the display calls up
the Percussion Kit List. Choose the desired Kit within the list.
For details of percussion assignments for each kit, see the Preset Keyboard
Percussion List on page 76.
Adjust the volume and amount of reverb applied to the Keyboard
Percussion.
Two sliders in the K.B.P. display determine the reverb and volume settings.
The settings here determine the reverb/volume for the entire Keyboard
Percussion setup, not for each percussion instrument. You can, however, adjust
each percussion instrument’s reverb/volume (page 83).
Play some notes on the keyboards.
3
The message “Are you sure you want to clear all assignments and setup data?” may
appear when you change the kit. Select [CLEAR] to clear all assignments (made in
the ASSIGN Page) and detailed settings (made in the SETUP Page) and call up the
selected kit on the panel. Select [CANCEL] to call up the selected kit without
erasing the assignments and detailed settings.
4
DATA CONTROL
5
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
76
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
Preset Keyboard Percussion List
: Indicates the keys of the DDK-7 keyboard and DDKU-P7.
*The 10 kits, Standard Kit 2 – Symphony Kit, have the same sound assignments as Standard Kit 1.
Multi Kit Standard Kit 1 - Symphony Kit
Preset 2(PK) Preset 1(LK) Preset 1(UK) Preset 2(PK) Preset 1(LK) Preset 1(UK)
Bass Drum Heavy - Kick -
SD Brush Roll - Side Stick Surdo Mute
Snare Drum Heavy - Snare Surdo Open
SD Brush Shot 1 Claves Hand Clap Hi Q
SD Reverb 1 - Snare Tight Whip Slap
Snare Drum Light - Floor Tom L Scratch H
Tom 3 Synth Tom 3 Hi-Hat Closed Scratch L
Snare Drum Rim 1 Concert BD Floor Tom H Finger Snap
Tom 2 Synth Tom 2 Hi-Hat Pedal Click Noise
Hi-Hat Close Bass Drum Heavy Low Tom Metronome Click
Tom 1 Synth Tom 1 Hi-Hat Open Metronome Bell
Hi-Hat Open Bass Drum Light Mid Tom L Seq Click L
Ride Cymbal 1 Snare Drum Heavy - Mid Tom H Seq Click H -
Synth Tom 3 SD Brush Roll - Crash Cymbal 1 Brush Tap -
Crash Cymbal 1 Snare Drum Heavy - High Tom Brush Swirl -
Synth Tom 2 SD Brush Shot 1 - Ride Cymbal 1 Brush Slap -
Orchestra Cymbal SD Reverb 1 - Chinese Cymbal Brush Tap Swirl -
- Snare Drum Light - Ride Cymbal Cup Snare Roll -
Synth Tom 1 Tom 3 - Ta mbourine Castanet -
- Snare Drum Rim 1 - Splash Cymbal Snare Soft -
Tom 2 - Sticks -
Hi-Hat Close - Kick Soft -
Tom 1 - Open Rim Shot -
Hi-Hat Open - Kick Tight -
Ride Cymbal 1 - Kick Bongo H
Orch Snare Drum - Side Stick Bongo L
Crash Cymbal 1 - Snare Conga H Mute
Snare Drum Roll - Hand Clap Conga H Open
Orchestra Cymbal - Snare Tight Conga L
Orch Cymbal Roll - Floor Tom L Timbale H
Tr iangle Mute - Hi-Hat Closed Timbale L
Tambourine - Floor Tom H Agogo H
Tr iangle Open - Hi-Hat Pedal Agogo L
Castanet - Low Tom Cabasa
Cowbell 1 - Hi-Hat Open Maracas
Timbale 1 Low - Mid Tom L Samba Whistle H
Timbale 1 High - Mid Tom H Samba Whistle L
Wood Block Low - Crash Cymbal 1 Guiro Short
Conga Low - High Tom Guiro Long
Wood Block High - Ride Cymbal 1 Claves
Conga High - Chinese Cymbal Wood Block H
Bongo Low - Ride Cymbal Cup Wood Block L
Agogo Low - Tambourine Cuica Mute
Bongo High - Splash Cymbal Cuica Open
Agogo High - Cowbell Tr iangle Mute
Cuica Low - Crash Cymbal 2 Tr iangle Open
Hand Claps - Vibraslap Shaker
Cuica High - Ride Cymbal 2 Jingle Bells
Shaker - - Bell Tree
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
C
1
D
1
F
1
G
1
A
1
C
2
D
2
F
2
G
2
A
2
C
3
D
3
F
3
G
3
A
3
C
4
D
4
F
4
G
4
A
4
C
5
D
5
F
5
G
5
A
5
C5
D5
E5
F5
G5
A5
B5
C6
C4
D4
E4
F4
G4
A4
B4
C3
D3
E3
F3
G3
A3
B3
C2
D2
E2
F2
G2
A2
B2
C1
D1
E1
F1
G1
A1
B1
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
77
SFX Kit 1 SFX Kit 2
Preset 2(PK) Preset 1(LK) Preset 1(UK) Preset 2(PK) Preset 1(LK) Preset 1(UK)
Cutting Noise 1 - Phone Call -
Cutting Noise 2 - Door Squeak -
- - Door Slam -
String Slap - Scratch Cut -
- - Scratch H 3 -
- - Wind Chime -
- - Telephone Ring -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - - - -
- - - - - -
- - - - - -
- - - - - -
Flute Key Click - - CarEngnIgnition - -
- - - Car Tires Squeal - -
- - - Car Passing - -
- - - Car Crash - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
Cutting Noise 1 - Phone Call Burst
Cutting Noise 2 - Door Squeak Roller Coaster
- - Door Slam Submarine
String Slap - Scratch Cut -
- - Scratch H 3 -
- - Wind Chime -
- - Telephone Ring -
- - - -
- Shower - Laugh
- Thunder - Scream
- Wind - Punch
- Stream - Heart Beat
- Bubble - Foot Steps
- Feed - -
- - - -
- - - -
Flute Key Click - CarEngnIgnition -
- - Car Tires Squeal -
- - Car Passing -
- - Car Crash -
- - Siren -
- - Tr ain -
- - Jet Plane -
- - Starship -
- Dog - Machine Gun
Horse Laser Gun
Bird Tweet Explosion
- Firework
- -
- -
Ghost -
Maou -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
C
1
D
1
F
1
G
1
A
1
C
2
D
2
F
2
G
2
A
2
C
3
D
3
F
3
G
3
A
3
C
4
D
4
F
4
G
4
A
4
C
5
D
5
F
5
G
5
A
5
C5
D5
E5
F5
G5
A5
B5
C6
C4
D4
E4
F4
G4
A4
B4
C3
D3
E3
F3
G3
A3
B3
C2
D2
E2
F2
G2
A2
B2
C1
D1
E1
F1
G1
A1
B1
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
78
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
Arabic Kit Pop Latin Kit
Preset 2(PK) Preset 1(LK) Preset 1(UK) Preset 2(PK) Preset 1(LK) Preset 1(UK)
Kick Soft - Bongo H Open 1 f -
Side Stick - Bongo H Open 3 f -
Snare Soft - Bongo H Rim -
Arabic Hand Clap - Bongo H Tip -
Snare Drum - Bongo H Heel -
Floor Tom L - Bongo H Slap -
Hi-Hat Closed - Bongo L Open 1 f Hand Clap
Floor Tom H - Bongo L Open 3 f -
Hi-Hat Pedal - Bongo L Rim -
Low Tom - Bongo L Tip -
Hi-Hat Open - Bongo L Heel Conga H Tip
Mid Tom L - Bongo L Slap Conga H Heel
Mid Tom H Nakarazan Dom - Timbale L Open Conga H Open -
Crash Cymbal 1 Cabasa - - Conga H Mute -
High Tom Nakarazan Edge - - Conga H SlapOpen -
Ride Cymbal 1 Hager Dom - - Conga H Slap -
Crash Cymbal 2 Hager Edge - - Conga H SlapMute -
Duhulla Dom Bongo H - Paila L Conga L Tip -
Tambourine Bongo L - Timbale H Open Conga L Heel -
Duhulla Tak Conga H Mute - - Conga L Open -
Conga H Open - Conga L Mute -
Conga L - Conga L SlapOpen -
Zagrouda H - Conga L Slap -
Zagrouda L - Conga L Slide -
Kick Soft Katem Dom Bongo H Open 1 f Cowbell Top
Side Stick Katem Tak Bongo H Open 3 f -
Snare Soft Katem Sak Bongo H Rim -
Arabic Hand Clap Katem Tak Bongo H Tip -
Snare Drum Doff Tak Bongo H Heel Guiro Short
Floor Tom L Tabla Dom Bongo H Slap Guiro Long
Hi-Hat Closed Ta bla Tak 1 Bongo L Open 1 f -
Floor Tom H Ta bla Tik Bongo L Open 3 f -
Hi-Hat Pedal Ta bla Tak 2 Bongo L Rim Tambourine
Low Tom Tabla Sak Bongo L Tip -
Hi-Hat Open Ta bla Roll Edge Bongo L Heel -
Mid Tom L Ta bla Flam Bongo L Slap -
Mid Tom H Sagat 1 Timbale L Open Maracas
Crash Cymbal 1 Tabel Dom - Shaker
High Tom Sagat 3 - Cabasa
Ride Cymbal 1 Tabel Tak - Cuica Mute
Crash Cymbal 2 Sagat 2 - Cuica Open
Duhulla Dom Rik Dom Paila L -
Tambourine Rik Tak 2 Timbale H Open -
Duhulla Tak Rik Finger 1 - -
Cowbell Rik Tak 1 - -
Duhulla Sak Rik Finger 2 - Tr iangle Mute
Claves Rik BrassTremolo - Tr iangle Open
Doff Dom Rik Sak Paila H -
- Rik Tik - Wind Chime
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
C
1
D
1
F
1
G
1
A
1
C
2
D
2
F
2
G
2
A
2
C
3
D
3
F
3
G
3
A
3
C
4
D
4
F
4
G
4
A
4
C
5
D
5
F
5
G
5
A
5
C5
D5
E5
F5
G5
A5
B5
C6
C4
D4
E4
F4
G4
A4
B4
C3
D3
E3
F3
G3
A3
B3
C2
D2
E2
F2
G2
A2
B2
C1
D1
E1
F1
G1
A1
B1
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
79
Assigning sounds to the User Keyboard Percussion
You can assign any desired drum and percussion sound to any key or pedal, and your
original setups can be saved to eight memory locations: User 1 through User 8. The
User setting saved in User memory location can be called up by using the [K.B.P.1] or
[K.B.P.2] buttons.
In the instructions below, drum sounds are assigned to User 1 and called up with
[K.B.P.1] button.
Turn on the Keyboard Percussion function by pressing the
[K.B.P.1] button.
The K.B.P. display appears.
Press [USER 1] on the display.
This procedure assigns User 1 to the [K.B.P.1] button. You can call up the User 1
setting the next time you press the [K.B.P.1] button.
Select the desired percussion kit.
See page 75 for selecting the kit.
Press the [ASSIGN] button at the top right of the display to call
up the ASSIGN Page.
In the ASSIGN Page, you can assign specific drum sounds to any of the keys.
Select the desired drum instrument that you wish to assign to
a key.
Select the desired drum instrument category with the category buttons in the
display. The drum instrument menu of the selected category appears.
1
2
3
4
5
Reference Page
Kit Assign List (page 85)
Drum Instrument Category
Drum Instrument Menu
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
80
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
Assign an instrument to a particular key or pedal by
simultaneously holding down the desired instrument name in the
display and pressing the key (or pedal) to which the instrument is
to be assigned.
When the assignment is complete, the key name and instrument name is
displayed at the top of the display. The assignments are saved to the User
memory selected in Step 2 (in this example, User 1).
Repeat the operation steps above as necessary to construct your
own User Keyboard Percussion set.
To erase one instrument:
Simultaneously hold down the [CLEAR] button in the display (ASSIGN Page) and
press the key (or pedal) corresponding to the instrument you wish to erase.
6
NOTE
Though eight User Keyboard
Percussion setups can be
created, they cannot be
memorized to Registration
Memory. Only on/off data and
the Keyboard Percussion
Menu are memorized to
Registration Memory.
The Keyboard Percussion setting you have created is automatically saved
when you switch to another display. While data is being saved, the square at
the top left of the display turns light blue for a few seconds. Do not turn the
power off while the Keyboard Percussion settings are being saved.
The key to which the instrument is to be assigned
Instrument Name
Press the key.
Hold down the Instrument name…
7
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
81
To erase all instruments:
You can clear all assignments using the [CLEAR] button in the display (ASSIGN Page).
Press, then release the [CLEAR] button. The following display
appears, prompting confirmation of the operation.
Press [CLEAR] in the display to erase all data. When [CLEAR] is
selected, a “Completed” message momentarily appears on the
display.
Press [CANCEL] in the display to abort the operation.
Copying the Keyboard Percussion settings
You can copy the Preset Keyboard Percussion to one of the User locations, or copy from
one User location to another. In the instructions below, Preset 1 is copied to User 1.
Press the [K.B.P.1] button to copy Preset 1.
To copy Preset 1, select the [K.B.P.1] button; to copy Preset 2, select the
[K.B.P.2] button. To copy either User location, select button [K.B.P.1] or
[K.B.P.2].
Press the [MENU] button at the top right of the display to call up
the MENU Page.
1
2
1
2
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
82
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
Within the Menu buttons, select the User location as the
destination — for example, User 1.
Press the COPY [FROM] button in the display. A list appears,
letting you select the copy source location.
Select the copy source (Preset 1 here) from the list.
A message appears, prompting confirmation of the operation.
Press the [COPY] button in the display to copy Preset 1. When
[COPY] is selected, a “Completed” message momentarily
appears in the display.
Press the [CANCEL] button in the display to abort the operation.
3
4
5
6
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
83
Detailed settings for each percussion instrument
You can independently adjust the settings of pan, pitch, reverb and volume for each
instrument. The settings here are system settings that cannot be memorized to
Registration memory.
Turn off the volume of the relevant keyboard (the keyboard to
which the instrument to be changed is assigned).
Press the [SETUP] button at the top right of the K.B.P. display to
call up the SETUP Page.
Press the appropriate key (the key to which the instrument to be
changed is assigned).
The selected instrument’s name is shown on the display and you can change its
settings.
1 PAN
Determines the position of the currently selected instrument in the stereo image. Seven
pan positions are available.
2 PITCH COARSE
Adjusts the pitch of the currently selected instrument by 100 cents.
Range: -64 – +63
3 PITCH FINE
Adjusts the pitch of the currently selected instrument by one cent, allowing more
detailed tuning of the instrument than PITCH COARSE (
2).
Range: -64 – +63
4 REVERB
Determines the amount of reverb applied to the currently selected instrument.
Range: 0 – 24
5 VOLUME
Determines the volume of the currently selected instrument.
Range: 0 – 24
1
2
3
1
2345 6
The name of the
selected instrument
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
84
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
6 RESET
Initializes settings such as pan, pitch, and reverb to their default values.
Pressing the [EXECUTE] button calls up the following display, prompting
confirmation of the operation.
Press the [EXECUTE] button in the display to restore (initialize) the default settings.
When [EXECUTE] is selected, a “Complete” message momentarily appears on the
display.
Press the [CANCEL] button in the display to abort the operation.
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
85
Kit Assign List
Multi Kit
CYMBAL
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Crash Cym Mute
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Orchestra Cymbal
Orch Cymbal Roll
Orch Cymbal Mute
Cymbal March
Cym Brush Shot
Tam- Tam
HI-HAT
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Close
Hi-Hat Pedal 1
Hi-Hat Pedal 2
Analog HH Open
Analog HH Close
SNARE DRUM
Snare Drum Light
Snare Drum Heavy
Snare Drum Rim 1
Snare Drum Rim 2
SD Accent 1
SD Accent 2
SD Reverb 1
SD Reverb 2
Synth Snare Drum
Orch Snare Drum
Snare Drum Roll
Analog SD
SNARE BRUSH
SD Brush Shot 1
SD Brush Shot 2
SD Brush Roll
TOM
Tom 1
Tom 2
Tom 3
Tom 4
Tom Brush Shot 1
Tom Brush Shot 2
Tom Brush Shot 3
Tom Brush Shot 4
Synth Tom 1
Synth Tom 2
Synth Tom 3
BASS DRUM
Bass Drum Light
Bass Drum Heavy
Bass Drum Attack
Synth Bass Drum
Bass Drum March
Concert BD
Analog BD Short
Analog BD Long
CONGA/BONGO
Conga High
Conga Low
Conga Slap
Conga Muff
Conga Slide
Bongo High
Bongo Low
Bongo Slap
Bongo Mute
CUICA/SURDO
Cuica High
Cuica Middle
Cuica Low
Tamborim Open
Tamborim Mute
Surdo Open
Surdo Mute
Surdo Rim
Surdo Muff
TIMBALES/COWBELL
Timbale 1 High
Timbale 1 Low
Timbale 2 High
Timbale 2 Low
Timbale 3 High
Timbale 3 Low
Timbale 4 High
Timbale 4 Low
Cowbell 1
Cowbell 2
Cowbell 3
Cowbell 4
PERCUSSION 1
Cabasa
Shaker
Maracas High
Maracas Low
Guiro Short
Guiro Long
Wood Block High
Wood Block Mid
Wood Block Low
Claves
Castanet
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
Agogo High
Agogo Low
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Windbell Down
Windbell Up
Tambourine
Pandeiro
Bells
Hand Claps
Finger Snap
Scratch
Noise Percussion
PERCUSSION 3
Kotsuzumi 1
Kotsuzumi 2
Kotsuzumi 3
Kotsuzumi 4
Ohtsuzumi 1
Ohtsuzumi 2
Taiko 1
Taiko 2
Ohdaiko 1
Ohdaiko 2
Kakegoe 1
Kakegoe 2
Kakegoe 3
Standard Kit 1
CYMBAL
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal
SNARE DRUM
Snare
Snare Tight
Snare Soft
Snare Roll
Side Stick
Open Rim Shot
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Tap Swirl
TOM
Floor Tom L
Floor Tom H
Low Tom
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
High Tom
BASS DRUM
Kick
Kick Tight
Kick Soft
PERCUSSION 1
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine
Castanet
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Standard Kit 2
CYMBAL
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal
SNARE DRUM
Snare Short
Snare Tight H
Snare Soft 2
Snare Roll
Side Stick Light
Open Rim Shot H
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Tap Swirl
TOM
Floor Tom L
Floor Tom H
Low Tom
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
High Tom
BASS DRUM
Kick Short
Kick Tight
Kick Soft
PERCUSSION 1
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine
Castanet
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Hit Kit
CYMBAL
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open 2
Hi-Hat Closed 2
Hi-Hat Pedal 2
SNARE DRUM
Snare Ambient
Snare Tight 2
Snare Electro
Snare Roll
Stick Ambient
Snare Pitched
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Tap Swirl
TOM
Hybrid Tom 1
Hybrid Tom 2
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
86
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
Hybrid Tom 3
Hybrid Tom 4
Hybrid Tom 5
Hybrid Tom 6
BASS DRUM
Kick Tight H
Kick Wet
Kick Tight L
PERCUSSION 1
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine Light
Castanet
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Room Kit
CYMBAL
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal
SNARE DRUM
Snare Snappy
Snare Tight Snap
Snare Soft
Snare Roll
Side Stick
Open Rim Shot
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Tap Swirl
TOM
Tom Room 1
Tom Room 2
Tom Room 3
Tom Room 4
Tom Room 5
Tom Room 6
BASS DRUM
Kick
Kick Tight
Kick Soft
PERCUSSION 1
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine
Castanet
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Rock Kit
CYMBAL
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal
SNARE DRUM
Snare Rock
Snare Rock Tight
Snare Noisy
Snare Roll
Side Stick
Open Rim Shot
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Tap Swirl
TOM
Tom Rock 1
Tom Rock 2
Tom Rock 3
Tom Rock 4
Tom Rock 5
Tom Rock 6
BASS DRUM
Kick Gate
Kick 2
Kick Soft
PERCUSSION 1
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine
Castanet
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Electro Kit
CYMBAL
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal
SNARE DRUM
Snare Noisy 2
Snare Noisy 3
Snare Snap Elec
Snare Roll
Side Stick
Open Rim Shot
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Reverse Cymbal
TOM
Tom Electro 1
Tom Electro 2
Tom Electro 3
Tom Electro 4
Tom Electro 5
Tom Electro 6
BASS DRUM
Kick Gate Heavy
Kick Gate
Kick 3
PERCUSSION 1
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Scratch H 2
Scratch L 2
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine
Hi Q 2
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Analog Kit
CYMBAL
Crash Analog
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hat Open Analog
Hat Close Analog
Hat Close Anlg 2
SNARE DRUM
Snare Analog
Snare Analog 2
Snare Noisy 4
Snare Roll
Side Stick Anlg
Open Rim Shot
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Reverse Cymbal
TOM
Tom Analog 1
Tom Analog 2
Tom Analog 3
Tom Analog 4
Tom Analog 5
Tom Analog 6
BASS DRUM
Kick Analog
Kick Anlg Short
Kick 3
PERCUSSION 1
Conga Analog M
Conga Analog L
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
87
Conga Analog H
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell Analog
Claves 2
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas 2
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Scratch H 2
Scratch L 2
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine
Hi Q 2
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Dance Kit
CYMBAL
Crash Analog
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Analog
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open 3
Hi-Hat Closed 3
Hat Close Anlg 3
SNARE DRUM
Snare Clap
Snare Dry
Snare Techno
Reverse Dance 2
Side Stick Anlg
Rim Gate
Snare Analog 3
Snare Analog 4
Vinyl Noise
Reverse Cymbal
TOM
Tom Dance 1
Tom Dance 2
Tom Dance 3
Tom Dance 4
Tom Dance 5
Tom Dance 6
BASS DRUM
Kick Techno
Kick Techno L
Kick Techno Q
PERCUSSION 1
Conga Analog M
Conga Analog L
Conga Analog H
Bongo Analog H
Bongo Analog L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell Dance
Claves 2
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas 2
Vibraslap Analog
PERCUSSION 2
Kick Dance 1
Kick Dance 2
Dance Breath 1
Dance Breath 2
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine Anlg
Hi Q 2
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Dance Perc 3
Dance Perc 4
Snare Dance 1
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Dance Clap
PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch Dance 1
Scratch Dance 2
Dance Perc 2
Hi Q Dance 1
Dance Perc 1
Reverse Dance 1
Jazz Kit
CYMBAL
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal
SNARE DRUM
Snare Jazz L
Snare Jazz M
Snare Jazz H
Snare Roll
Side Stick Light
Open Rim Shot
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Tap Swirl
TOM
Floor Tom L
Floor Tom H
Low Tom
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
High Tom
BASS DRUM
Kick Jazz
Kick Tight
Kick Soft
PERCUSSION 1
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine
Castanet
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Brush Kit
CYMBAL
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal
SNARE DRUM
Brush Slap 3
Brush Tap 2
Brush Slap 2
Snare Roll
Side Stick Light
Open Rim Shot
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Tap Swirl
TOM
Tom Brush 1
Tom Brush 2
Tom Brush 3
Tom Brush 4
Tom Brush 5
Tom Brush 6
BASS DRUM
Kick Jazz
Kick Tight
Kick Soft
PERCUSSION 1
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine
Castanet
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Symphony Kit
CYMBAL
Hand Cymbal
Hand Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Hand Cymbal S
Hand Cymbal 2 S
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal
SNARE DRUM
Band Snare
Band Snare 2
Snare Soft
Snare Roll
Side Stick
Open Rim Shot
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Tap Swirl
TOM
Floor Tom L
Floor Tom H
Low Tom
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
High Tom
BASS DRUM
Gran Cassa Mute
Gran Cassa
Kick Soft 2
PERCUSSION 1
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
88
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine
Castanet
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
SFX Kit 1
SFX
Cutting Noise 1
Cutting Noise 2
String Slap
Flute Key Click
Shower
Thunder
Wind
Stream
Bubble
Feed
Ghost
Maou
Dog
Horse
Bird Tweet
SFX Kit 2
SFX 1
Phone Call
Telephone Ring
Wind Chime
Door Squeak
Door Slam
Scratch Cut
Scratch H 3
Laugh
Scream
Punch
Heart Beat
Foot Steps
SFX 2
CarEngnIgnition
Car Tires Squeal
Car Passing
Car Crash
Siren
Train
Jet Plane
Starship
Burst
Roller Coaster
Submarine
Machine Gun
Laser Gun
Explosion
Firework
Arabic Kit
ARABIC 1
Nakarazan Dom
Nakarazan Edge
Hager Dom
Hager Edge
Zagrouda H
Zagrouda L
Arabic Hand Clap
Duhulla Dom
Duhulla Tak
Duhulla Sak
Doff Dom
Doff Tak
ARABIC 2
Katem Dom
Katem Tak
Katem Sak
Tabla Dom
Tabla Tak 1
Tabla Tak 2
Tabla Sak
Tabla Tik
Tabla Roll Edge
Tabla Flam
Tabel Dom
Tabel Tak
ARABIC 3
Sagat 1
Sagat 2
Sagat 3
Rik Dom
Rik Tak 1
Rik Tak 2
Rik Sak
Rik Tik
Rik Finger 1
Rik Finger 2
Rik BrassTremolo
CYMBAL/SNARE DRUM
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal 1
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal
Snare Drum
Snare Soft
Side Stick
TOM/BASS DRUM
Floor Tom L
Floor Tom H
Low Tom
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
High Tom
Kick Soft
PERCUSSION
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Cowbell
Claves
Cabasa
Tambourine
Pop Latin Kit
CONGA
Conga H Tip
Conga H Heel
Conga H Open
Conga H Mute
Conga H SlapOpen
Conga H Slap
Conga H SlapMute
Conga L Tip
Conga L Heel
Conga L Open
Conga L Mute
Conga L SlapOpen
Conga L Slap
Conga L Slide
BONGO
Bongo H Open 1 f
Bongo H Open 3 f
Bongo H Rim
Bongo H Tip
Bongo H Heel
Bongo H Slap
Bongo L Open 1 f
Bongo L Open 3 f
Bongo L Rim
Bongo L Tip
Bongo L Heel
Bongo L Slap
PERCUSSION 1
Timbale H Open
Timbale L Open
Paila H
Paila L
Cowbell Top
Tambourine
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Cuica Open
Cuica Mute
Cabasa
Shaker
PERCUSSION 2
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wind Chime
Hand Clap
6
REGISTRATION MEMORY
89
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
Registration Memory
Registration Memory allows you to store virtually all the settings you make on the panel and
LCD, providing a convenient way to instantly change all Voice settings and rhythms while
you’re playing, with the simple touch of a single button on the Registration Memory panel.
The buttons are conveniently located between the Upper and Lower keyboards for easy
access while playing. Moreover, you can also recall the settings using the right footswitch
on the Pedal Unit, or optional Foot Pedal. All Registrations in Registration Memory can also
be saved to a USB flash memory or other external media.
Various types of basic Registrations have been programmed to the numbered Registration
Memory buttons, 1 – 16. When you record your own Registration settings to a numbered
button, the preset Registration for that button will be overwritten and erased as a result.
When you initialize the Registration Memory (page 93), the preset settings will be recalled
and your own Registration setting(s) will be erased and replaced with the factory defaults.
Newly created Registrations you make can be stored to the Registration Memory panel
buttons. All Registrations in Registration Memory can also be saved to a USB flash
memory or other external media for future recall.
Create your original Registration.
While holding down the [M.] (Memory) button in the Registration
Memory section, press the numbered button to which you wish
to save your Registration.
When the Registration is stored, the numbered button flashes momentarily.
13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 D
Contents
1 Storing Registrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
2 Selecting Registrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
3Saving the Registration data to USB flash memory
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
4 Initializing Registration Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
5 Registration Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
• Setting the Registration Shift mode in the Regist Shift
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
• Confirming the Registration Shift setting in the Voice
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
6 Unifying a specific parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
1
Storing Registrations
1
Reference Pages
Selecting a Voice (page 26)
Selecting a Rhythm
(page 60)
Voice Controls and Effects
(page 40)
2
13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 D.
2. Press desired numbered button.
1. While holding down [M.] button...
When recording Registration settings, the square at the top left of the
display turns light blue for a few seconds, indicating that the Registration is
currently being saved. Do not turn the power off while the Registration is
being saved.
6
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
90
6
REGISTRATION MEMORY
Functions and settings that cannot be memorized:
The following settings cannot be stored to a Registration Memory number.
• Pitch (page 208)
• MIDI Control settings (fpage 238)
• Mic. Volume (page 233)
• AUX OUT settings (page 228)
• Mic. Reverb (page 233)
• LCD related settings (page 16)
• Internet Direct Connection settings (page 218)
The following settings common to all Registration Memory numbers 1 – 16 and
cannot be stored individually for each number.
• Transpose (page 208)
• Attack mode in Organ Flute Voices (page 38)
• Registration Shift (page 94)
• Auto Fill setting (page 64)
• Reverb type (page 47)
• User Voices (page 145)
• User rhythms (page 172)
• User Keyboard Percussion (page 79)
• Rhythm Sequences (page 183)
• Disable setting (page 91)
Reference Page
Saving Registrations as
Registration Data (File)
(page 116)
6
REGISTRATION MEMORY
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
91
Simply press the numbered button that corresponds to the Registration you wish to
select.
•You can also recall Registrations by using the Foot Contollers. This function is called
“Registration Shift” (page 94).
•You can also program the Registrations to change automatically at specific points
within the Rhythm Sequence. This function is called “Registration Sequence” (page
188).
2
Selecting Registrations
Reference Page
Controlling the Registration
Shift (page 203)
Using the [D.] (Disable) button:
Rhythm and automatic accompaniment patterns also change when you select
different Registration Memory buttons. Pressing the [D.] (Disable) button allows
you to keep the same rhythm, accompaniment patterns, tempo, and so on
throughout all your Registration changes, or make your own rhythm selections if
you want to.
When the [D.] button is on, the following functions will not change, even when
you change the Registration Memory number.
• Rhythm menu, Rhythm section, Rhythm tempo, Rhythm volume, Rhythm
reverb
• Rhythm reverb time
•Accompaniment volume, Accompaniment reverb, On/Off status of
Accompaniment parts
• A.B.C. mode, A.B.C. memory
• M.O.C. mode
•Second expression pedal control for rhythm tempo
7 8 9 10 11 12 D.
Disable Button
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
92
6
REGISTRATION MEMORY
You can save your Registration Memory settings to an external storage device, such as
USB flash memory, with sixteen Registrations comprising a single file.
The instructions below explain how to save the Registration data to a USB flash
memory. For details about using other external storage devices, see chapter 7, Music
Data Recorder (M.D.R.).
Insert a USB flash memory into the USB TO DEVICE terminal on
the left side of the DDK-7.
Press the [MDR] button on the panel to call up the M.D.R. display.
Select the song to which you want to save the Registration data
(page 104).
Press [REGIST EDIT] button in the display to call up the
Registration Edit display.
Press the [SAVE] button in the display.
A message appears, indicating the Registration data is currently being saved.
When the operation is completed, the message closes.
3
Saving the Registration data to USB flash
memory
Reference Page
Saving Registrations as
Registration Data (File);
(page 116)
1
2
3
4
5
Reference Page
Recalling Recorded
Registrations (page 121)
Reference Page
Changing the Song Name
(page 113)
6
REGISTRATION MEMORY
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
93
Deleting all Registration data in Registration Memory initializes the Registration
Memory. Be careful when using this operation, since it erases all your existing data.
In order to avoid inadvertently losing your important data, save it to an external storage
device.
Press the [UTILITY] button on the panel to call up the GLOBAL
Page in the Utility display.
Press the INITIALIZE [EXECUTE] button on the right side in the
display.
The message “Are you sure you want to initialize Registration data?” appears.
Press [INITIALIZE] to actually initialize the data. When the operation is
complete, the DDK-7 will be restarted.
Press [CANCEL] to cancel the operation.
4
Initializing Registration Memory
Reference Page
Factory Set (Initializing the
DDK-7); (page 23)
1
2
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
94
6
REGISTRATION MEMORY
The Registration Shift function allows you to change Registrations without taking your
hands from the keyboards. By using the Right Footswitch on the expression pedal, or
optional Foot Pedal, you can “jump” to a specified Registration or step through the
panel Registrations in sequence, either in numeric order or in any order you specify.
Registration Shift has three modes: Shift, Jump and User. These are set in the Regist
Shift display. You can also view and check the Registration Shift mode in the Voice
Display.
Setting the Registration Shift mode in the Regist Shift
display
Connect the Pedal Unit (DDKU-P7) or optional Foot Pedal (FC4/FC5) to the
instrument.
If you want to use the Foot Pedal, set the desired parameters in the Regist Shift display
explained in this section, then assign the Regist Shift function to the Foot Pedal. Refer
to the section “Controlling Registration Shift” on page 203.
Setting the Registration Shift mode in the Regist Shift display
Press the [FOOT SWITCH] button on the panel.
Press the [RIGHT] button at the top right of the display to call up
the RIGHT Page (Regist Shift display).
5
Registration Shift
Reference Page
Footswitches (page 193)
Foot Pedal (page 196)
DDKU-P7 FC4 FC5
1
2
6
REGISTRATION MEMORY
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
95
1 OFF
Turns off the Registration Shift assignment. When you select OFF, you cannot change
Registrations by using the Right Footswitch, or with an optional Foot Pedal.
2 SHIFT
In the Shift mode, each press of the Right Footswitch, or with an optional Foot Pedal
selects the Registration Memory presets in their numerical order. After the last
Registration is reached, the function ‘wraps around’ to select the first preset again. The
numbered buttons light up as they are selected.
3 JUMP
Pressing the Right Footswitch, or with an optional Foot Pedal jumps to select the
designated panel Registration.
You can set the Jump “destination” with buttons in the display or the Data
Control dial.
4 USER
In the User mode, each press of the Right Footswitch, or with an optional Foot Pedal
selects Registrations according to the order you’ve specified.
To set the User Registration order:
1 Press the desired numbered button in the Registration Memory
section.
2 Press the [SET] button in the display.
The Registration number appears in the display, indicating that the Registration is
entered.
1
2
3
4
REGIST SHIFT Display
Registration number of the destination
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
96
6
REGISTRATION MEMORY
3 Repeat the above procedure #1 through #2 to set the Registration
order.
1 POSITION
These are cursor controls used to move the cursor (colored orange) along the Registration
row in the display. Entered Registration numbers are shown in boxes, while the numbers in
the row above indicate the position in the sequence (in other words, the number of
successive presses of the Right Footswitch). Up to 80 steps (Registrations) can be
memorized.
Moves the cursor to the first position.
Moves the cursor one step to the left.
Moves the cursor one step to the right.
Moves the cursor five steps to the right.
2 DATA
These are data controls used to enter and delete Registration numbers in the Registration
row.
SET: For initially entering a Registration number to a blank space in the Registration row,
or for replacing a number at the current cursor position.
To enter a number, press the desired Registration Memory button (the selected button will
light), then press [SET] in the display. The entered Registration number will appear in the
Registration row. After using SET to enter Registrations, the cursor can be moved among
the numbers.
INSERT: For inserting a Registration number just before the current cursor position.
To perform the operation, first move the cursor to a numbered position. Then, press the
desired Registration Memory button (the selected button will light), and press [INSERT]
in the display. The new Registration number is inserted at the cursor position and all other
numbers to the right of the cursor are moved to accommodate the new numbers.
Registration numbers cannot be entered beyond the Registration Shift function’s capacity of
80. If the insert operation exceeds this capacity, a “Data Full” message appears and the
operation cannot be executed.
DELETE: For deleting a Registration number at the current cursor position. To delete the
unnecessary number, move the cursor to a numbered position and press [DELETE] in the
display.
CLEAR: For erasing all current user Registration Shift settings.
After selecting [CLEAR], a message appears prompting confirmation of the operation.
Select [CLEAR] to clear all data. The message “Clear all data” momentarily appears in the
display and returns to the previous display.
Select [CANCEL] to abort the operation.
3
1
2
Registration row
NOTE
When the cursor is
positioned at “-”, Footswitch,
or an optional Foot Pedal
does not work.
6
REGISTRATION MEMORY
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
97
3 SHIFT END
Determines how to end the Registration shift function.
STOP: Selects the last Registration and quits the operation.
TOP: After the last preset is reached, the first preset is called up again, starting the sequence
over again from the beginning.
NEXT REGIST: After the last preset is reached, the next Registration data in the Song is
called up. This function is available only when two or more Registration data sets are saved
in one Song. This function is handy when you need to play a song with more than sixteen
Registrations.
The Shift End mark ( ) will automatically be put at the end of the Registrations you
entered when Top or Next Regist is selected as the Shift End.
Confirming the Registration Shift setting in the Voice
Display
You can confirm the Registration Shift mode in the Voice Display, Page 1.
Press the [VOICE DISPLAY] button on the panel to call up the Voice
Display.
The Registration Shift mode is shown at the bottom right of the display.
Reference Page
Saving Two or More
Registration Banks to One
Song (page 117)
NOTE
When you play the song
using Next Regist. function,
always press the [F] (Play)
button in the M.D.R. display
to start the song and activate
these functions.
The [CUSTOM] (Custom
Play) button will not activate
the Next Regist. function.
NOTE
If the next Registration data
contains User voices, the
DDK-7 may produce no
sound for a few seconds
while loading the
Registration.
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
98
6
REGISTRATION MEMORY
Registration Shift, OFF:
The current Registration number is displayed.
Registration Shift, in “SHIFT” mode:
The current Registration number (left) and the next number (right) are
displayed.
Registration Shift, in “JUMP” mode:
The current Registration number (left) and the destination number (right) will
be displayed. You can change the destination number even in the middle of the
performance by using the buttons in the display or the Data Control
dial.
Registration Shift, in “USER” mode:
Indicates the current position of the Registration Shift. You can change the
Registration by moving the cursor (in orange) right/left, using the displayed
buttons or the Data Control dial. This is handy if you’ve inadvertently advanced
the shift setting in the middle of your performance. The user Registration
settings cannot be edited here.
Moves the cursor to the first position.
Moves the cursor one step to the left and selects the next Registration.
Moves the cursor one step to the right and selects the previous Registration.
Moves the cursor five step to the right and selects the Registration.
Current Registration
Next Registration
Destination number
can be changed.
6
REGISTRATION MEMORY
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
99
In the Voice Display, Page 2, you can conveniently “unify” a specific parameter used in
different Voice groups at one time. This is useful when you are changing, for example,
the Voice Brilliance setting for the Upper Keyboard and want the same setting to be
applied to the entire instrument.
Press the [VOICE DISPLAY] button on the panel.
Press the [2] button at the top right of the display to select
Page 2.
Press the PARAMETER button (indicates the currently selected
parameter) in the display to select the desired parameter for
changing.
The Parameter Select pop-up menu appears, letting you select the desired
parameter.
6
Unifying a specific parameter
Available parameters
• Reverb • Rhythm Reverb • Volume
• Panning • Brilliance • Sustain
1
2
3
Parameter
Part
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
100
6
REGISTRATION MEMORY
Select the parameter and part in the Parameter Select pop-up
menu. After selecting the desired parameter, the pop-up menu
automatically closes.
The amount of the selected parameter for each Registration is shown in the
display.
Select the targeted Registration numbers and turn them on.
Press the targeted Registration in the display and turn it on with the SETTINGS
buttons: ALL ON, ALL OFF, ON, OFF, and SELECT.
ALL ON: Selects all Registration memory numbers.
ALL OFF: Cancels all Registration memory numbers.
ON: Sets the currently selected Registration memory number to “ON.”
OFF: Sets the currently selected Registration memory number to “OFF.”
SELECT: Turns on the Registration memory numbers that contain the same Voice as
the one which is currently set in the Registration at the cursor position. The targeted
Registration numbers are underlined.
Parameter value
for each
Registration
Selected
parameter
4
Parameters in Registrations set to ON will be changed.
6
REGISTRATION MEMORY
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
101
Unifies the currently turned-on parameter’s values.
You unify the relevant parameter values in each Registration memory number or
offset them. Keep in mind that you cannot restore the original data once you
change the parameter’s value.
Unifying the currently turned-on parameter’s value:
Pressing [SET] unifies the currently turned-on parameter’s values to the one in
the currently selected Registration (at the cursor position). A message appears
prompting you to confirm the operation.
To continue the operation, select [UNIFY]. Select [CANCEL] to abort the
operation.
Offsetting the currently turned-on parameter’s value.
Pressing the [+]/[-] buttons in the display or using the Data Control dial offsets
the currently turned-on parameter’s value. If you select Pan as the parameter,
[
E]/[F] buttons are shown instead of [+]/[-].
If you change the value, and if parameter values for some Registration memory
number reach the maximum or minimum, the following message appears.
In this case, pressing [OK] continues the operation, ignoring those parameters at
maximum or minimum value. Pressing [CANCEL] aborts the operation.
5
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
102
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
The Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.) is a sophisticated recording system built into the DDK-7 that
lets you record your performances and Registration settings to a USB flash memory or other
external media. Moreover, the M.D.R. allows you to perform various other operations to your
song data (such as copy, delete and convert). Before purchasing any USB storage device, you
should check with your Yamaha dealer or an authorized Yamaha distributor for advice on
compatibility.
Contents
1 Calling Up the M.D.R. Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
2 Formatting External Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
3 Selecting a Song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
• Song Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
4 Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
• Recording your performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
• Re-recording (Retry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
• Recording each part separately . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
• Punch-in Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
5 Changing the Song Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
6
Saving Registrations as Registration Data (File)
.116
•
Saving Two or More Registration Banks to One Song
. 117
• Replacing Registrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
• Next Regist Settings (Changing the order of the
Registration data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
7 Recalling Recorded Registrations. . . . . . . . . . . 121
8 Playing Back a Song. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
• Playing Back the Selected Part(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
• Fast Forward, Rewind and Pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
• Changing the Tempo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
• Repeat Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
• Playing Back XG Songs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
9 Other Functions (Tools) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
• Song Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
• Song Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
• Converting to XG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
• XG Song Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
• XG Song Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
• Converting to EL format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
• Converting from EL format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
• Checking the Remaining Memory/media ID. . . . . . 136
Song data
USB flash memory
Copy
Delete
Convert
Before using a USB device, read through the important section “Precautions when
using the USB TO DEVICE terminals” on page 234. About USB devices
compatible with the DDK-7, see “Compatible USB devices” on page 234.
To protect your data (write-protect switch):
Some USB flash memory devices are equipped with a write-protect switch. To
prevent accidental erasure of important data saved in USB flash memory, slide the
write-protect switch on the device to the “protect” position. When saving data,
make sure that the write-protect switch is set to the “overwrite” position.
7
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
103
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
Press the [MDR] button in the panel to call up the M.D.R. display. All operations related
to the M.D.R., such as recording and playing your performances, can be done in the
M.D.R. display.
The M.D.R. display consists of two display pages: the SONG SELECT Page and the
TOOLS Page. In the SONG SELECT Page, you can select the song that you want to
playback, or to which you want to record your performance, then playback or record. The
TOOLS Page has a variety of song utility operations, such as copy, delete, rename, etc.
Pressing any button other than the [MDR] button while the M.D.R. display is open exits
from the M.D.R. display. If you exit from the function inadvertently, simply press the
[MDR] button again to recall the M.D.R. display.
All the instructions in this chapter are related to the M.D.R. display. To call up the M.D.R.
functions and the M.D.R. display, press the [MDR] button.
If you find that you are unable to use new, blank external media (such as USB flash
memory, floppy disks or USB storage devices) or old ones that have been used with
other devices, you may need to format them.
Formatting erases all the data in the media and makes it ready to record. The data
erased by formatting will be lost permanently. Check whether or not the media
contains any important data you wish to keep before executing the operation.
Connect the device to the USB TO DEVICE terminal.
Press the [TOOLS] button at the top right of the display to call up
the TOOLS Page.
1
Calling Up the M.D.R. Display
2
Formatting External Media
1
2
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
104
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
Press the [FORMAT] button in the display.
Select the desired media you want to format.
To format a USB flash memory, select [USB XX]. To format a floppy disk, select
[USB-FD1].
Press the [EXECUTE] button in the display.
A message appears, prompting confirmation of the operation. Select [OK] to
format the media, or [CANCEL] to abort the operation.
In the SONG SELECT Page, you can select a blank song to which you want to record
your performance or save the Registration settings, or you can select a desired song for
playback.
To select the desired song:
In the SONG SELECT Page, songs in the currently selected media are displayed. First
call up the desired media (and folder, if necessary) in the display, then select the desired
song.
3
4
NOTE
“USB-FD01” appears in the
display only when a floppy
disk drive (UD-FD01) has
been installed to the DDK-7.
Do not remove the media
while formatting.
3
Selecting a Song
5
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
105
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
Check the currently selected media at the top of the display.
For example, if you want to select a song in the USB flash memory, confirm that
“USB XX:/” is displayed at the top of the display.
For information on selecting the desired media, see page 107.
Press desired song button in the display.
Referring to the song name and icons, select the desired song. The selected song
button is highlighted in orange.
One display contains eight songs, Song 1 – Song 8. To change the display page
and call up other songs, press the appropriate number buttons in the display.
For example, pressing the [2] button calls up Song 9 –16, while the [3] button
calls up Song 17 – 24, and so on.
1
Currently selected media/folder
2
Reference Pages
Changing the Song Name
(page 113)
Song Icons (page 108)
Song containing data Blank song (containing no data)
Song 1
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
Song 2 Song 3 Song 4
Song 5 Song 6 Song 7 Song 8
Song 17 Song 18 Song 19 Song 20
Song 21 Song 22 Song 23 Song 24
Press the number
buttons to change the
displayed songs.
Song 1 – Song 8
When the [1] button is selected
When the [3] button is selected
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
106
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
Song Part Information
Pressing the [PART SETUP] button calls up the Part Setup display of the currently
selected song, letting you confirm which parts are played when playing the song.
When playing back the song (by pressing the [F] button), only those parts that
are set to “PLAY” in the Part Setup display actually play, while parts that are set to
“OFF” are muted. (If the song contains no performance data, all parts are set to
“OFF”.) You can change the status for each part by changing the PLAY/OFF
settings for each part and pressing the [SAVE] button in the display.
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
107
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
To change the media/folder:
Press the [FOLDER SELECT] button in the SONG SELECT Page
to call up the Folder Select display.
1 Current Media/Folder
Displays the currently selected media/folder. For example, if “USB 01:/Folder1/” is
shown, the folder named “Folder1” in the USB flash memory is selected.
2 Media/Folder List
Displays the media or folders. Up to 120 folders can be displayed.
3 Scroll Buttons
If the Media/Folder List contains many folders, more than can fit on the display, you
can scroll the display with these buttons.
4 UP
Selects the upper layer folder or media. For example, when “USB 01:/Folder1/”
(Folder1 in the USB flash memory) is selected, pressing the [UP] button selects “USB
01:/”.
5 CREATE FOLDER
Creates a new folder in the Media/Folder List.
Up to 120 folders can exist in one media or within a single upper folder. Pressing this
button calls up the New Folder display in which you can enter the desired name. Enter
the name and press the [OK] button to create a new folder. The method for entering
the folder name is the same as that of the song name. See page 113 for more
information.
6 RENAME FOLDER
Calls up the Rename Folder display. You can change the folder name of the currently
selected folder in the Media/Folder List. See page 113 for more information.
7 DELETE FOLDER
Deletes the folder that is selected in the Media/Folder List.
1
4
5
6
7
3
2
1
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
108
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
Select the desired media and/or folder in the Media/Folder List.
To call up the folder in the media in the display, press the selected media button
in the Media/Folder List again.
Press the [EXECUTE] button.
To abort the operation, press the [CLOSE] button.
Song Icons
These icons are shown when you select a media, folder, and song.
These icons are shown when you select a song created on the Electone.
2
NOTE
A message prompting
initialization of the
Registration data may
appear when you select a
folder. Select [INITIALIZE] to
initialize the Registration
called up on the panel, then
select a new Song. Media is
not initialized after the
operation is complete.
Indicates media such as a USB flash memory or floppy disk. This icon is
displayed in the Media/Folder List.
Indicates a folder.
Indicates that write-protect or copy-protect is effective for the media.
Indicates that performance data is contained in the song.
Indicates a Protected Original Song. See page 131 for more information.
Indicates a Protected Edit Song. See page 131 for more information.
Indicates a song that has been created with the ELS-01.
Indicates a song that has been created with the ELS-01C or ELS-01X.
Indicates a song that has been created with an EL-series Electone, such as
the EL-900.
3
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
109
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
Media Contents: Folders, Songs, and Files
Folders:
A folder is a storage location in the media, used to organize multiple songs in
groups. If you’ve saved hundreds of songs to a USB flash memory or USB storage
device, it may be difficult to find the desired song quickly. Organizing your songs in
folders, with similar songs grouped together (for example, according to genre or
tempo), makes it easier to find the songs you want.
Songs:
A song is the DDK-7 data for a piece of music, recorded to external media. A single
song can contain a variety of data, including the recorded performance,
Registrations, and so on.
Files:
A file is an element of data in a song. For example, a single song consists of various
files, such as Registration files and performance files. The following files are created
with the M.D.R. (The extension will not appear in the DDK-7 display. They will,
however, be displayed on a computer.)
In addition, one file (extension: .nam) is automatically created in each folder for
organization/maintenance of the folder contents. It does not appear on the DDK-7
display.
Song
1
Song
2
Song
3
Song
4
Song
5
Song
6
3
Song 2
Song 1
Song Song Song
Folder A
Song 4
Folder B
5
6
Creating folders...
USB flash memory
USB flash memory
Files in the song
File Explanation Extension
Performance data This file contains performance data, played on the
keyboards and pedals of the DDK-7.
.mid
Registration data This file contains Registration settings, User Voices,
User rhythms, and Rhythm Sequences.
.b00
XG-converted data This file contains XG song data, for which DDK-7
performance data is converted to XG-compatible
format.
.mid
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
110
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
Recording your performance
Set the desired Registrations on the DDK-7. Make all the DDK-7 settings necessary
for the song you will record. This means entering the all Registrations you will need for
the entire performance in the Registration Memory. Make sure also to select the
Registration that you will use at the beginning of the song.
Insert a USB flash memory to the USB TO DEVICE terminal.
Select a blank song for recording your performance.
For details on selecting a song, see page 104.
If you want to overwrite an existing song already containing performance data,
you will need to delete it beforehand.
Press the [RECORD] button in the display.
The following display appears, indicating that you can record your performance.
Press the [F] (Play) button.
An hourglass icon appears, indicating that Registration data is currently being
read.
After the hourglass disappears, begin playing.
When you finish playing, press the [
J
] (Stop) button in the
display.
The recording is finished and the LCD returns to the SONG SELECT Page.
The song to which your performance is recorded is automatically named
“SONG XX” (xx indicates song number). You can change the song name as
desired. (For details, see page 113.)
4
Recording
Never attempt to eject the
media or turn the power off
during recording, reading
and playing back.
1
2
3
NOTE
You cannot record to a folder
which contains songs for the
EL-series Electone, such as
EL-900.
4
5
6
Do not remove the media
from the instrument while
data is being recorded
(while the hourglass icon
or other message is
shown).
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
111
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
Re-recording (Retry)
If you make a mistake during recording, you can re-record the song from the
beginning.
Press the [RETRY] button while the song is still running.
This automatically stops recording and returns you to the starting point of the
song.
Press the [F] (Play) or [CUSTOM] button to begin re-recording
the song.
Re-recording starts from the beginning of the song and replaces the previously
recorded performance with the newly recorded performance.
Recording each part separately
You can also record the parts of your performance independently. This function lets
you record Keyboard Percussion and performance control data, such as Registration
changes and expression pedal operation, separately from the other parts of the song.
Even Keyboard Percussion and Lead Voice 1 Voices can be recorded separately, though,
the Lead Voice 2 Voices will be included in the performance data of the Upper
Keyboard. The following instruction is an example: First, record the chords and bass to
the song using the Lower and Pedalboard, and then record the melody using the Upper
Keyboard.
Follow steps 1 – 3 on page 110 to call up the Rec Standby display.
Select the parts for recording.
Each pressing of a part button switches the status: PLAY, OFF, and REC.
PLAY: Playback the parts that have been recorded.
OFF: Recording or playback is not active.
REC: Records the part.
If you set the Upper part to “REC,” the performance on the Upper Keyboard
(including Lead Voice 1 Voices) is recorded. Setting Lead to “REC,” however,
records only the Lead Voice 1 Voices. You cannot set both Upper and Lead to
“REC” at the same time; neither can the Lower and Keyboard Percussion parts
be recorded at the same time.
1
2
1
2
NOTE
When you record the
Keyboard Percussion, make
sure that the [K.B.P.1] or
[K.B.P.2] button is set to on.
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
112
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
The following setting lets you record only Lower Keyboard and Pedalboard
parts.
Press the [F] (Play) button, and start playing after the
hourglass icon disappears.
Press the [J] (Stop) button when you are finished with your
performance to stop recording.
Now you’ve recorded the first parts of your performance.
Press the [RECORD] button to set up recording of the next part
— Upper part in this case.
A message appears prompting confirmation of operation. Select [OK] to
overwrite and the Rec Standby display appears.
Select the parts for recording.
Set the next parts you want to record (in this case, the Upper part) to “REC.”
Also set the part already recorded (in this case Lower and Pedal parts) to “PLAY,”
so you can hear the previously recorded parts as you record new ones.
Press the [CUSTOM] button to start recording of the new part or
parts (Upper part).
Playback of the previously recorded parts starts immediately. The [CUSTOM]
button is used here to record only the parts that have been selected for recording,
and plays back only those parts that have been selected for playback. While you
listen to the parts being played back, start playing the melody on the Upper
keyboard.
When the end of the recorded performance is reached, playback is automatically
stopped. The length of a subsequently recorded part cannot exceed the length of
the previously recorded parts.
3
4
5
6
7
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
113
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
Punch-in Recording
This lets you re-record a specific phrase or section which you don’t want to use, either
that of a specific part(s) or all parts.
Select the song which contains the phrase you want to change.
For details on selecting a song, see page 104.
Press the [F] (Play) button to start playback of the song.
Press the [K] (Pause) button at the point you want to execute
punch-in recording.
Press the [RECORD] button.
The recording display appears, indicating that the Music Data Recorder is ready
to record.
Set the parts which you want to change to “REC” status and
other parts to “PLAY.”
Press the [F] (Play) button to start punch-in recording. Play the
new phrase, as you want it to be changed.
Press the [J] (Stop) button to quit the punch-in recording as
soon as you reach the end of the phrase.
You can name the song, such as giving it a title or indicating the date on which it was
recorded. However, song names of the EL-series Electone, such as the EL-900, cannot
be changed.
Select the song whose name you want to change.
For details on selecting a song, see page 104.
Press the [TOOLS] button at the top right of the display to call up
the TOOLS Page.
NOTE
This function is best used
when the phrase to be
re-recorded has definite
beginning and end points,
with slight pauses before and
after.
5
Changing the Song Name
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
NOTE
When you change the name
of an XG song, the extension
(.mid) cannot be changed.
1
2
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
114
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
Press the [CHANGE SONG NAME] button.
The following display appears.
Move the cursor to the desired point by using the [E][F]
buttons in the display or the Data Control dial.
Select the desired character type: alphabet, upper or lowercase,
or symbol.
Select the desired character for entry.
A song name can contain up to 50 characters.
After finished, select [OK] to actually enter the name.
The LCD will return to the TOOLS Page display.
3
4
DATA CONTROL
Cursor
or
5
NOTE
If you select Japanese as the
Language in the Utility
display (page 16), you can
also select Japanese
language characters
(hiragana and kanji, normal
size katakana, half size
katakana, full size alphabet,
and full size symbols).
NOTE
An XG song name can
contain up to 46 characters.
6
7
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
115
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
To delete the entered character:
Move the cursor to the character you want to delete.
Press the [DELETE] button at the bottom right in the display.
The character is deleted.
To convert into kanji (Japanese language):
This applies only if you are using the (Kana-Kan) button in Japanese.
When the input “Hiragana” characters are shown in the reverse
display (highlighted), press the (kanji-conversion) button
one or several times to convert to the characters into the
appropriate kanji.
• The reversed area can be changed by the [E][F] buttons in the display or
the Data Control dial.
• The converted area can be cleared at once by pressing the (cancel)
button.
To actually enter the change, press the [OK] button or enter the
next character. To enter the hiragana character itself (without
converting it), press the (delete) button.
1
DATA CONTROL
Cursor
or
A “name is not available” message may appear when you press the [OK] button to
finish entering the name. If this message appears, the name is invalid and you
should enter another name.
The following names cannot be used. (“xx” indicates numbers.)
MDR_xx.EVT ELS_SONG.NAM MDR_xxx.TMP TMP
MDR_xx.MID MDR_xxx.MID REG_xxx.TMP TMP.E02
MDR_xx.Bxx REG_xxx.B00 ELS_SONG.TMP
MDR_xx.Vxx SONG_xxx.C02
SONG.NAM
2
1
2
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
116
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
You can also record Registrations by themselves, without recording a performance.
Bulk data, including Registration Memory and Registration Shift settings, Rhythm
Patterns (User rhythms) Rhythm Sequence data, and User Voices, are also saved in the
operation.
First create your original settings you want to save then select
the destination (blank song).
For details on selecting a song, see page 104.
Press the [REGIST EDIT] button in the SONG SELECT Page to
call up the Regist Edit display.
Press the [SAVE] button.
A message appears, indicating that the Registration is being recorded. After the
message disappears, exit from the Regist Edit display by pressing the [CLOSE]
button and return to the SONG SELECT Page. The song to which the
Registration is recorded is automatically named “SONG XX” (xx indicates song
number).
6
Saving Registrations as Registration Data (File)
13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 D.
Registrations 1 – 16 stored to
the numbered buttons are
saved together as a bank.
Save
Registrations
new song
1
2
3
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
117
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
Saving Two or More Registration Banks to One Song
When you want to use more than 16 Registration numbers, you can save additional
Registration banks to a single song, with the following procedure.
First create the original settings you want to save, then select the
destination song.
For details on selecting a song, see page 104.
Press the [REGIST EDIT] button in the SONG SELECT Page to
call up the Regist Edit display.
The Registration data which has previously been saved to the song is shown.
Press the lowest blank (empty) Registration button.
Press the [SAVE] button.
The Registration data will be added.
When you play back this song, the top Registration in this display will be loaded
to the DDK-7. You can also change the order of the Registration data. See page
118.
13 14 15 16
1234
5678 910 1211
13 14 15 16
1234
5678 910 1211
13 14 15 16
1234
5678 910 1211
REG:01 Registration
REG:02
Registration to be added
REG:50
Registration to be added
Add
Reference Page
Next Regist. (page 97)
Programming a Registration
Sequence (page 188)
1
2
3
4
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
118
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
Replacing Registrations
The M.D.R. also lets you change the Registrations of an existing song without
changing the performance data. In advance, you need to create the original Registration
that will replace the old one.
Select the song for which you wish to replace the Registrations.
For details on selecting a song, see page 104.
Press the [REGIST EDIT] button in the SONG SELECT Page to
call up the Regist Edit display.
The Registration data which has been saved to the song is shown.
Select the Registration data you wish to replace.
Press the [SAVE] button.
A message appears, prompting confirmation of overwriting the Registration
data. Select [OK] to overwrite (replace), or select [CANCEL] to abort the
operation.
Next Regist Settings (Changing the order of the
Registration data)
When playing back a song which uses more than 16 Registration numbers, you can use
two or more Registration banks saved in a single song and recall them one by one as
you play the song. This function is called Next Regist.
If you want to use the Next Regist function, you'll have to make one of the following
settings in advance:
• Set the Registration Shift mode to User, and select Next Regist as the Shift End
(page 94).
• Enter the Next Regist data in the Registration Sequence (page 189).
Save the desired Registrations to a song.
For instructions on saving two or more Registration banks to a song, see page 117.
1
2
3
4
NOTE
If the next Registration data
contains User voices, the
DDK-7 may produce no
sound for a few seconds
while loading the
Registration.
M1
REG_001
M16 M1 M16
REG_002
1
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
119
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
Select the song containing the Registrations for which you want
to change the order.
For details on selecting a song, see page 104.
Press the [REGIST EDIT] button in the SONG SELECT Page to
call up the Regist Edit display.
Change the Registration order, in the order you want to recall.
First select the specific Registration bank you want to edit, then move, copy or
delete the selected data as needed to change the order.
1 Registration Data List
From this list, select the Registration you want to move, copy or delete. The selected
Registration is highlighted in orange. When more than five Registration banks are
saved in the song, a scroll button is available for scrolling through the
Registration Data List.
2 MOVE
Moves the selected Registration bank up or down.
3 DATA TO BE LOADED
When loading the Registration bank to the panel, select the desired data you want to
load. For more information, see page 121.
2
3
4
2
1
4
3
7
6
5
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
120
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
4 LOAD
Loads the selected Registration bank to the panel/keyboards. After loading, you can
check the Registration by playing the keyboards.
5 SAVE
Saves the current panel settings as a Registration bank in the song. The currently
selected Registration in the Registration Data List (
1) will become the destination
location.
6 COPY
Copies the currently selected Registration to the lowest blank location in the
Registration Data List.
7 DELETE
Deletes the currently selected Registration bank in the Registration Data List.
Exit from the Regist Edit display by pressing the [CLOSE] button
at the top right of the display.
5
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
121
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
Registrations (and bulk data) recorded to song numbers can be easily loaded back to
the DDK-7 by the following procedure.
The M.D.R. independently records the following five types of data:
• REGIST
• USER VOICE
• K.B.P.
• USER RHYTHM
• SEQUENCE
You can select and recall the desired data independently.
Insert the appropriate media and select the song you want to
load back to the DDK-7.
For details on selecting a song, see page 104.
Press the [REGIST EDIT] button in the SONG SELECT Page to
call up the Regist Edit display.
Select the Registration you want to load to the DDK-7.
Using the five “DATA TO BE LOADED” buttons, select the desired
data you want to load.
Press the [LOAD] button to load the selected data in the
Registration.
Exit from the Regist Edit display by pressing the [CLOSE] button
at the top right of the display.
7
Recalling Recorded Registrations
1
2
3
4
NOTE
When you load the
Registration data by using
the Next Regist function, all
data will be loaded no matter
which buttons you select
here.
5
6
NOTE
If you are loading a
Registration while a rhythm is
playing, the sequence data
and User rhythms in the
Registration data cannot be
loaded.
When you select the protected song, the buttons (DATA TO BE LOADED) may
be unavailable (grayed out). For example, combining a part of one protcted song
with another protected song is not allowed.
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
122
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
Select the song to be played back.
For details on selecting a song, see page 104.
Press the [F] (Play) button in the display to load the
Registration data.
An hourglass icon appears, indicating the Registration data is loading.
If the song contains more than two Registration banks, the first one will be
loaded. You can check the Registration order in the Regist. Edit display.
If the song contains no performance data, after loading the Registration data, the
LCD returns to the SONG SELECT Page.
Playback starts automatically after reading the Registration data
(the elapsed time is shown).
In general, all parts recorded to the song are played back; however, you can mute
specific parts and playback only selected parts. For more information, see page
123.
When the end of the recorded performance is reached, playback automatically
stops. You can, however, stop playback in the middle of the song by pressing the
[
J
] (Stop) button in the display.
8
Playing Back a Song
NOTE
When you play Electone
data, the resulting song
balance will vary according
to the speakers you are
using.
NOTE
The functions intended for
control with the Knee Lever
must be assigned to the Foot
Pedal.
1
2
Reference Page
Next Regist Settings
(page 118)
3
Reference Page
Song Part Information
(page 106)
Custom Play
If you want to play back the song without resetting the Registrations, press the
[CUSTOM] button instead of the [F] (Play) button. This displays the song time
and starts playback immediately.
When you play the song using the Next Regist function, always press the [F]
(Play) button to start the song, not the [CUSTOM] button.
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
123
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
Playing Back the Selected Part(s)
You can also play back selected parts of your recorded performance, while other parts
are temporarily turned off. This function is especially useful for playing a single part,
such as the melody, over previously recorded accompaniment parts.
To play back the selected part(s):
During playback, press each part button to turn the part you want to playback to
“PLAY” and the part you want to mute to “OFF.”
Fast Forward, Rewind and Pause
Fast Forward and Rewind:
During playback, press the [H] (Fast forward) button or [G] (Rewind) button and
hold it down until the time reaches the desired position.
Even when the button is released, playback is paused. To resume playback from the
point you’ve advanced or reversed to, press the [F] (Play) button or [CUSTOM]
button.
Pause:
If you want to temporarily stop playback of the song or songs, press the [K] (Pause)
button.
To resume playback from the point at which the song was paused, press the [K]
(Pause) button again or press the [F] (Play) or [CUSTOM] button.
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
124
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
Changing the Tempo
You can change the tempo of the song as the song is playing in the M.D.R. display,
either while the song is stopped or while it is playing.
To Change the Tempo:
Use the TEMPO buttons in the display to change the tempo. (The
TEMPO buttons on the panel cannot be used to change the tempo for the Music Data
Recorder.) The range is 50 – 200%. The original recorded tempo is 100% and values
less than 100% indicate slower tempo; values greater than 100% indicate faster tempo.
To reset the changed tempo:
Use the [TEMPO RESET] button in the display to reset the tempo to its original value
(100%).
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
125
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
Repeat Playback
This feature allows you to repeatedly play back either all songs on a folder or only one
specific song.
Select the song you wish to play back.
If you wish to play back all songs on a folder, select the first song that will be
played back. For details on selecting a song, see page 104.
Press the [TOOLS] button at the top right of the display to call up
the TOOLS Page.
Press the [REPEAT SETTING] button to call up the Repeat Setting
display.
Select the repeat mode.
1 ALL
Repeats all songs in the currently selected folder in order.
2 SINGLE
Repeats the currently selected song again and again.
3 RANDOM
Repeats all songs in the currently selected folder randomly.
4 OFF
Cancels repeat playback.
1
2
3
4
3
4
2
1
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
126
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
Exit from the Repeat Setting display by pressing the [CLOSE]
button at the top right of the display.
Press the [F] (Play) button in the SONG SELECT Page to begin
playback.
When you stop playback, the repeat setting is automatically cancelled.
Playing Back XG Songs
The DDK-7 allows you to playback XG song data, created on the computer or
converted from DDK-7 song format to XG format. The fast forward, rewind and pause
controls are available, just as with songs (performances) recorded on the DDK-7.
Insert the media containing XG song data into the USB TO
DEVICE terminal.
Select the media that contains the desired XG song in the SONG
SELECT Page.
For details on selecting media, see page 107.
Press the [XG] button in the SONG SELECT Page to call up the
XG songs in the display.
When the [ORIGINAL] button is selected, the DDK-7 songs are shown in the
SONG SELECT Page; when the [XG] button is selected, the XG songs are
shown.
5
6
Reference Page
Converting to XG (page 132)
1
2
3
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
127
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
Select the desired song for playback.
Press the [F] (Play) button in the display to start song
playback.
The following display appears, letting you set the volume or mute settings for
each part.
1 PART buttons
Sets the each part for playback or mute (off). Each press of the button toggles between
PLAY and OFF.
2 XG VOLUME
Adjusts the volume of the XG song within a range of 0 – 100. To set the volume, touch
the slider in the display directly or use the Data Control dial.
3 PART SETUP
Determines the volume balance of the parts. Pressing this button calls up the following
display.
You can adjust the volume of each part within a range of 0 – 100. Use the ALL slider to
adjust the volume of the XG song (the same function as XG VOLUME above).
Each channel button below each slider (for example, the [CH1] button) lets you set the
part to mute or play (the same function as the PART buttons above).
4
5
123
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
128
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
The TOOLS Page in the M.D.R. display has many functions, such as song copy, song
delete, etc.
Song Copy
This function lets you copy data recorded in one song to another song. You can copy
and exchange the data even between two different media. (Songs created with the EL-
series, such as the EL-900, cannot be copied.) Make sure to check the remaining
memory of the destination media in advance. If memory space is insufficient, or if the
folder already contains 100 songs, Song Copy is not available. Copying of XG songs is
done with a different method from Song Copy here. Refer to “XG Song Copy,” page
133.
To copy within one media:
Insert the appropriate media.
To copy a song from one USB flash memory to another:
Insert the appropriate source and destination USB flash memory devices.
To copy between a SmartMedia card and USB flash memory:
Insert the Smartmedia card into the appropriate USB device connected to the DDK-7,
as well as the USB flash memory device.
Select the song to be copied.
For details on selecting a song, see page 104.
Press the [TOOLS] button at the top right of the display to call up
the TOOLS Page.
Press the [SONG COPY] button to call up the Song Copy display.
9
Other Functions (Tools)
Moving a Protected Song
A protected song can be copied within a folder, but it cannot be copied to another
folder or media. If you specify another folder or media as the copy destination, a
message appears prompting moving of the song — not copying. When the
[EXECUTE] button is pressed, the protected original song and all protected edited
songs which come from the same protected original song will be moved together.
1
2
3
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
129
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
Confirm that the desired song to be copied is displayed in the upper half of the
display. If you want to change the song, press the COPY FROM [CHANGE]
button to call up the Song Select display and select another song.
Press the COPY TO [CHANGE] button to call up the Song Select
display, then select the destination song.
Press the [EXECUTE] button to execute Song Copy.
If you have not selected a blank song, a message appears prompting
confirmation whether to overwrite or not.
Select [OVERWRITE] to execute or [CANCEL] to abort the operation.
The song name of the destination is the same as the one of the source song, but
“*” is attached at the beginning.
If you want to change the song name, see page 113.
Song Delete
You can delete data in one song; only Registration data, only performance data, or both
of them (entire song) can be deleted. The songs created with the EL series such as EL-
900 cannot be deleted.
To delete the XG song, the method is different from the song delete. Refer to “XG
Song Delete,” page 134.
Select the song to be deleted.
For details on selecting a song, see page 104.
Press the [TOOLS] button at the top right of the display to call up
the TOOLS Page.
4
5
Never attempt to eject the
media or turn the power off
during copying.
1
2
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
130
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
Press the [SONG DELETE] button to call up the Song Delete
display.
Confirm that the desired song to be deleted is displayed in upper half of the
display. If you want to change the song, press the [CHANGE] button to call up
the song select display and select the desired song.
Select the desired data you want to delete, “REGIST” and/or
“SONG.”
When you want to delete the entire song, select both REGIST and SONG.
If only “REGIST” is selected, the Registration data in the song will be deleted.
If only “SONG” is selected, the performance data in the song will be deleted.
If the song does not contain Registration (or performance) data, you cannot
select “REGIST” (or “SONG”) in the display.
Press the [EXECUTE] button.
A message will appear prompting confirmation of the operation. Select
[DELETE] to delete the song, or [CANCEL] to abort the operation.
3
4
5
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
131
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
About Protected Songs
If you buy or download the song data, it may be protected so that you cannot delete
or copy, in order to prevent accidental erasure or protect copyright. This is
“Protected Song.” Protected songs can be saved to a USB flash memory.
The protected song can be played back as same as the song you created, but it
cannot be converted to XG format, or EL format. It is not possible to edit the
Registration data in the protected song, nor to overwrite the performance data.
If you want to edit the protected song, first copy it within one media/folder, then
edit the copy. (You cannot copy to another media/folder.) The copy song (called
“protected edit song”) is available only when the original song (called “protected
original song”) exists in the same folder. Be careful not to delete the protected
original song.
To move the protected song in a USB flash memory with a computer,
you’ll need to use the Musicsoft Downloader application. If you move
the song without Musicsoft Downloader, the song cannot be played
back.
Musicsoft Downloader can be obtained at the following Internet
address:
http://music.yamaha.com/download/
Folder
Protected
Original
Song
Protected
Edit Song
Copy
You cannot edit this song
You can edit this song, only when this is in the folder
that contains protected original song.
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
132
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
Converting to XG
This function allows you to convert the DDK-7 song data to XG format data. You can
playback the data using XG devices. The converted XG song data may sound
differently from the original data.
Confirm that the media should contain enough amount of available memory before
the conversion. The protected songs cannot be converted to XG format.
Selects a song to be converted to XG.
For details on selecting a song, see page 104.
Press the [TOOLS] button at the top right of the display to call up
the TOOLS Page.
Press the [CONVERT TO XG] button.
A message will appear, prompting confirmation of the converted data.
Press the [EXECUTE] to convert.
The M.D.R. starts playback of the selected song for you to decide whether you
convert it to the XG data, or not. After finishing playback the following message
appears.
(If necessary) Press the [RENAME] to give a name to the
converted XG song.
For details of the method to edit the song name, see page 113.
1
2
3
4
5
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
133
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
Press the [CONVERT] button.
After the process of the conversion the LCD returns to the original display.
To call up the XG song in the display, press [XG] button in the SONG SELECT
Page of the M.D.R. display. For more information, see page 126.
XG Song Copy
Select the XG song to be copied.
For details to select an XG song, see page 126.
Press the [TOOLS] button at the top right of the display to call up
the TOOLS Page.
Press the [XG SONG COPY] button to call up the XG Song Copy
display.
Confirm that the desired song to be copied is displayed in upper half of the
display. If you want to change the song, press the COPY FROM [CHANGE]
button to call up the Song Select display and select the desired song.
Press the COPY TO [CHANGE] button to call up the folder select
display, then select the destination media.
Press the [EXECUTE] button to execute the XG Song Copy.
Select [CANCEL] or [CLOSE] to abort the operation.
If the remaining memory of the destination media is insufficient, XG Song
Copy cannot be executed. (An error message will appear and the operation is
cancelled.) Up to 120 XG songs can be saved in one folder.
6
1
2
3
4
5
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
134
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
XG Song Delete
Select the XG song to be deleted.
For details on selecting an XG song, see page 126.
Press the [TOOLS] button at the top right of the display to call up
the TOOLS Page, then select the [XG SONG DELETE] button.
The XG Song Delete display appears.
Confirm that the desired song to be deleted is shown in the upper
half of the display, then press the [EXECUTE].
If you want to change the song, press the [CHANGE] button to call up the
Song Select display and select the desired song. After pressing the [EXECUTE]
button, a message appears prompting confirmation of the operation. Select
[DELETE] to delete the selected XG song, or select [CANCEL] to abort the
operation.
Converting to EL format
You can convert songs created on the DDK-7 to EL-series format, and save them to a
floppy disk. The converted data can be used with EL-series Electones, such as the EL-
900. This function is not available for protected songs.
To use the floppy disk, you’ll need to install the optional UD-FD01 floppy disk drive.
Select the song to be converted to EL-series format.
For details on selecting a song, see page 104.
In the TOOLS Page, press the [CONVERT TO EL] button to call up
the Convert display.
1
2
3
Reference Pages
About Protected Songs
(page 131)
NOTE
User rhythms cannot be
converted to EL format.
1
2
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
135
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
Confirm that the desired song to be converted is displayed in the upper half of
the display. If you want to change the song, press the [CHANGE] button of the
Change From section to call up the Song Select display and select the desired
song.
Press the [CHANGE] button of the Change To section in the
display, then select the destination.
If the source song contains two or more Registration banks, you’ll need to make
ready the same number of destination songs to save the converted data.
Press the [EXECUTE] button in the display to start conversion.
A message appears, prompting confirmation of the operation. Select
[CONVERT] to convert to EL format, or [CANCEL] to abort the operation.
If the remaining memory of the floppy disk is insufficient, conversion cannot be
executed. (An error message appears and the operation is cancelled.)
Converting from EL format
You can convert the songs in the floppy disk created with an EL-series Electone, such as
the EL-900, to the DDK-7 format, and save it to a USB flash memory. To use the
floppy disk, you’ll need to install the optional UD-FD01 floppy disk drive. Depending
on the original song, the sound or tempo of the converted song may differ from the
original data, or the Next Song function of the original song may not be effective.
Insert the floppy disk that contains the song you want to convert,
then select the source song.
For details on selecting a song, see page 104.
In the TOOLS Page, press the [CONVERT FROM EL] button to call
up the Convert display.
NOTE
If the source song’s name
contains full size characters
or Japanese characters, the
converted song name will be
shown with question marks
(such as “????”).
3
4
NOTE
When you convert the
protected EL data to DDK-7
format, set the write-protect
tab of the EL disk to the
“overwrite” position (tab
closed).
1
2
NOTE
When converting a protected
EL song to the DDK-7 format,
make sure to use a USB flash
memory card with ID.
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
136
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
Confirm that the desired song to be converted is shown in upper
half of the display.
If you want to change the song, press the [CHANGE] button of the Change
From section to call up the Song Select display and select the desired song.
Press the [CHANGE] button of the Change To section in the
display, then select the destination.
The specified destination location must be within the range of Song 1 - 100 in
the USB flash memory. If a destination is not selected, an empty song is
automatically set as the destination.
Press the [EXECUTE] button in the display to start conversion.
A message appears, prompting confirmation of the operation. Select
[CONVERT] to convert from EL format, or [CANCEL] to abort the operation.
If the remaining memory of the USB flash memory is insufficient, conversion
cannot be executed. (An error message appears and the operation is cancelled.)
Checking the Remaining Memory/media ID
In the TOOLS Page, press the [REMAINING MEMORY] button. This allows you to
check the remaining memory in the media, the song data capacity of the currently
selected song, and whether or not the media has an ID.
3
4
5
8
Voice Edit
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
137
Voice Edit
This DDK-7 has a Voice Edit feature that allows you to create your own Voices.
We suggest that you read through the Voice Structure below at first to get a firmer
understanding of the Voices. Then go through the editing steps, reading Editing a Voice on
page 140 for editing of an AWM Voice.
The internal structure of the Voices of this DDK-7 is explained below.
AWM Voice structure
AWM Voices consist of up to four recorded samples of a real instrument.
Each waveform, referred to as an “Element,” can be edited, by changing the level
(volume), filter settings, and so on. A single Voice contains four boxes (AWM1 –
AWM4) in which the Elements are put. If a Voice consists of less than three Elements,
some boxes are empty. For example, Strings 1 consists of two Elements (as shown).
You can add Elements from other Voices – Brass, for example – if a box (AWM3 and/or
AWM4) is empty. This allows you to create your own original ensemble sounds. In the
Voice Edit function, you can edit not only each Element, but also assemble some
Elements from other Voices.
Contents
1 Voice Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
• AWM Voice structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
2 Editing a Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
• Selecting a Voice for editing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
• Editing an AWM Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
3Saving the edited Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
4 Quitting Voice Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
5 Recalling an Edited Voice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
1
Voice Structure
Element 1 Element 2
Strings 1
AWM1 AWM2 AWM3 AWM4
8
8
Voice Edit
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
138
Selecting a Voice for editing
Select the Voice you want to edit from the Voice Menu.
For example, if you want to edit Accordion 1, select [Accordion 1] in the Voice
Menu in any Voice section.
Mute all other Voice sections except for the targeted Voice section.
Press the [PROGRAM] button to call up the PROGRAM Display.
Select the desired voice section at the left half of this display.
After you have selected the Voice section, the AWM Page (first page of the Voice
Edit display) will appear.
2
Editing a Voice
1
2
3
8
Voice Edit
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
139
The message “Voice data is too large to edit” may appear when you press the
[PROGRAM] button. If this message appears, select another Voice.
8
Voice Edit
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
140
Editing an AWM Voice
You can edit an AWM Voice on the AWM Page and LAYER Page in the Voice Edit
display. In the AWM Page, the tonal balance of the entire Voice can be corrected by
some EQ parameters. In the LAYER Page, you can make detailed edits to each
Element.
1 Element On/Off switches
The [AWM1] – [AWM4] buttons indicate the Elements which make up the selected
Voice. You can mute any of the Elements by simply pressing the corresponding button.
Pressing the button again cancels the mute.
2 EQ LOW FREQ./EQ LOW GAIN
Sets the frequency and gain (level) of the low frequency band. The EQ LOW FREQ.
slider sets the desired frequency band over a range of 32 Hz – 2.0 kHz. The EQ LOW
GAIN slider sets the level for the frequency band (specified by the EQ LOW FREQ.
slider) over a range of -12 dB – +12 dB.
3 EQ HIGH FREQ./EQ HIGH GAIN
Sets the frequency and gain (level) of the high frequency band. The EQ HIGH FREQ.
slider sets the desired frequency band over a range of 500 Hz – 16.0 kHz. The EQ
HIGH GAIN slider sets the level for the frequency band (specified by the EQ HIGH
FREQ. slider) over a range of -12 dB – +12 dB.
EQ (Equalizer)
Usually an equalizer is used to correct the sound output from amps or speakers to
match the special character of the room. The sound is divided into several frequency
bands, then by raising or lowering the level for each band, the correction is made.
This DDK-7 has a two-band (high and low) digital equalizer that lets you adjust the
overall sound according to the type of music you play — classical music being more
refined and soft, pop music more crisp, and rock music more dynamic.
23
1
AWM Page
8
Voice Edit
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
141
1 Element select buttons
Select the Element you wish to edit.
2 Element On/Off switches
The [AWM1] – [AWM4] buttons indicate the Elements which make up the selected
Voice. You can mute any of the Elements by simply pressing the corresponding button.
Pressing the button again cancels the mute. Muting all other Elements except for the
one you are editing lets you clearly hear that single Element for ease in editing. Note
that when some Elements are muted, playing the keyboard in certain key areas or with
certain velocities may result in no sound.
3 Display switch buttons
The LAYER Page contains three pages. The buttons are used to switch among
them.
1 VOICE/ELEMENT
Indicates the Voice/Element currently being edited. For example, the screen above
shows that Element 1 of Accordion 1 is being edited.
You can also call up another Element from another Voice and replace the currently
selected Element with it. Pressing the VOICE or ELEMENT button in the display
calls up the Voice or Element menu, from which you can select the desired Voice/
Element.
3
2
1
LAYER Page
LAYER Page 1
2
1
3 4
These buttons
switch the
display.
8
Voice Edit
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
142
2 LEVEL
Determines the output level of the Element.
Range: 0 – 127
3 NOTE LIMIT
Determines the lowest and highest notes in the range for which the Element sounds.
The setting of the HIGH slider cannot be set lower than that of the LOW slider. Some
Elements are not affected by this parameter.
Range: C-2 – G8
4 PAN
Determines the position of the Element in the stereo image.
Range: L64 – R63
1 NOTE SHIFT
Determines the pitch settings in semitones.
Range: -64 – +63
2 TUNE FINE
Determines the fine tuning.
Range: -64 – +63
3 ATTACK RATE
Determines how quickly the Element will reach its maximum level after the key is
played. Higher values produce a faster attack.
Range: 0 – 127
4 RELEASE RATE
Determines how much time it takes for the level to reach 0 after the key is released.
Higher values make the time shorter.
Range: 1 – 127
LAYER Page 2
3 45612
8
Voice Edit
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
143
5 CUTOFF FREQ.
Determines the cutoff frequency of the filter.
Range: 9600 – 24000 cent
6 RESONANCE
Determines the amount of resonance (harmonic emphasis) applied to the signal at the
cutoff frequency. Some Elements are not affected by this parameter.
Range: 16 – 140
Filter — Cutoff frequency and Resonance
Filter modifies the tone by cutting the output of a specific frequency portion of the
sound. This DDK-7 is equipped with a low pass filter, which passes only those
signals below the cutoff frequency and cuts signals above the cutoff frequency.
You can produce a relatively bright or darker sound by setting the cutoff frequency.
Resonance is a parameter that boosts the level of the signal in the area of the cutoff
frequency. By emphasizing the overtones in this area, this can produce a distinctive
“peaky” tone.
Level
Level
Cutoff Frequency
Cutoff Frequency
Frequency
Frequency
Resonance
These frequencies are passed by the filter.
8
Voice Edit
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
144
1 LFO WAVE
Determines the LFO waveform used to vary the sound. For details, see page 145.
2 LFO SPEED
Determines the speed of the LFO waveform. Higher values make the speed faster.
Range: 2 – 93
3 LFO PMD (Pitch Modulation Depth)
Determines the amount by which the LFO waveform varies the pitch of the sound.
Higher values result in a greater amount of pitch change. For the minimum setting, the
pitch does not change.
Range: 0 – 400
4 LFO FMD (Frequency Modulation Depth)
Determines the amount by which the LFO waveform varies the filter cutoff frequency.
Higher values result in a greater amount of frequency change. For the minimum
setting, the frequency does not change.
Range: 0 – 4800 cent
5 LFO AMD (Amplitude Modulation Depth)
Determines the amount by which the LFO waveform varies the amplitude of the
sound. Higher values result in a greater amount of amplitude change. For the
minimum setting, the amplitude does not change.
Range: 0 – 128
When playing a User Voice you have created using the LFO parameters (above), set the
Vibrato setting in the Voice Condition display to “Preset,” not “User.” If Vibrato is set
to “User” and the Vibrato parameters (depth and/or speed) are set fairly high, you may
not be able to hear the effect of the LFO.
LAYER Page 3
3 4 51 2
Reference Page
Vibrato (page 43)
8
Voice Edit
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
145
Edited AWM Voices can be saved as User Voices (up to sixteen).
Press the [SAVE] button at the top right of the display to call up
the SAVE Page.
Select the User Voice number you wish to save to.
The message appears to prompt confirmation of the operation. (Saving a new
Voice automatically erases the Voice previously stored to the selected User
number.)
(If necessary) Press the [RENAME] button to give a name to your
original Voice.
The method for editing the name is the same as the one for the song name in the
M.D.R. section. (See page 113 for more information.) Up to sixteen characters
can be entered.
LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator)
As its name suggests, the LFO creates waveforms of a low frequency.
These waveforms can be used to vary the pitch, filter or amplitude to create effects
such as vibrato, wah and tremolo.
The following five waveforms are available.
3
Saving the edited Voice
tri
squ
rnd sine
saw
1
2
3
8
Voice Edit
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
146
Press the [SAVE] button to save the Voice, or press [CANCEL] to
abort the operation.
After saving the Voice, be sure to quit the Voice Edit function (page 146) before
turning the power off. Turning off the DDK-7 without quitting Voice Edit erases the
User Voice you have edited.
You can quit the Voice Edit function from any of its display pages.
Press the [PROGRAM] button on the panel.
If your original Voice has already been saved, the Voice Edit function quits
automatically. If the edited Voice has not been saved, a message appears
prompting confirmation of the operation.
Select [EXIT] to quit the Voice Edit function, or [CANCEL] to abort
the operation and return to the previous display.
Once your original AWM Voice has been saved, it can be selected from the User menu
in each Voice section. Refer to chapter 2, “Selecting Voices with the Voice buttons”
(page 26).
This operation automatically erases any Voice that had been previously
saved to the selected User Voice number. Be careful not to erase any
important data. Always save your important data in advance to a USB flash
memory or other external media using the M.D.R. function.
4
Quitting Voice Edit
When quitting Voice Edit, the square at the top left of the display turns light
blue for a few seconds, indicating that the Voice you have created is
currently being saved. Do not turn the power off while the Voice is being
saved.
5
Recalling an Edited Voice
4
1
2
9
Rhythm Program
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
147
Rhythm Program
The DDK-7 includes powerful rhythm programming functions: Rhythm Pattern Program and
Rhythm Sequence Program. Rhythm Pattern Program allows you to record your own original
rhythms and save them as user rhythms. Rhythm Sequence Program lets you connect the
existing rhythms or your original rhythms to create complete rhythm tracks, which you can
automatically play back during your performance. Moreover, Rhythm Sequence Program
includes an automatic Registration Shift feature — called Registration Sequence.
Contents
1 Outline of the Rhythm Programming Operation . 147
2Rhythm Pattern Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
• Entering the Rhythm Pattern Program . . . . . . . . . . 148
• Basic settings for the Rhythm Pattern . . . . . . . . . . 151
• Entering Percussion Sounds to a Rhythm Pattern
– Step Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
• Editing Entered Percussion Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
• Entering Percussion Sounds to a Rhythm Pattern
– Real Time Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
• Creating Backing Patterns (Rhythmic Chord Function)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
• Changing the Voices for Accompaniment Parts. . . 166
• Adjusting Volume and Panning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
• Effect Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
• Detailed settings for each percussion instrument . 171
• Saving Rhythm Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
• Quitting the Rhythm Pattern Program . . . . . . . . . . . 174
• Recalling User Rhythm Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
• Selecting Rhythm from an External Media . . . . . . . 175
• Percussion Kit List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
3Rhythm Sequence Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
• Selecting a Sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
• Programming a Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
• Auditioning a Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
• Editing an Existing Rhythm Sequence . . . . . . . . . . 186
• Programming a Registration Sequence . . . . . . . . . 188
• Editing an Existing Registration Sequence. . . . . . . 189
• Quitting the Rhythm Sequence Program . . . . . . . . 190
• Playing Rhythm Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
• Playing All Sequences in Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
4Saving Rhythm Pattern and Rhythm Sequence
Data to external media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
1
Outline of the Rhythm Programming Operation
Entering percussion sounds and/or editing them
Creating the backing (Rhythmic Chord) patterns and/or editing them
Effect settings and detailed settings for each percussion Voice (Panning, Tuning, and so on)
Saving your rhythm patterns as User rhythms
Selecting the destination of the sequence
Entering a rhythm pattern one by one
Programming the Registration Sequence
Rhythm Pattern Program (pages 148 – 173)
You can create your original rhythm patterns by entering percussion sounds or editing preset
rhythm patterns.
Rhythm Sequence Program (pages 183 – 190)
You can connect any of the rhythms together to make complete rhythm compositions. Moreover,
you can also program Registration Shift events at any point in the composition so that the
Registration Memory settings automatically change as the rhythm sequence plays back.
9
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
148
9
Rhythm Program
Rhythm Pattern Program lets you use any of the different instrument sounds (drum
and percussion) assigned to each key on the Upper and Lower keyboards in creating
your own rhythms. Up to 48 of your original rhythms can be saved as User Rhythms.
Entering the Rhythm Pattern Program
There are two ways to program a User pattern: copying a preset rhythm that is similar
to the rhythm you want to create, and creating your own rhythm from scratch.
To copy a preset rhythm:
Copying a preset rhythm lets you make changes to an existing rhythm, saving you time
if you want to program a rhythm that is similar to an existing preset pattern.
To create your own rhythm from scratch:
Load a blank pattern to the Rhythm Pattern Program, then create a completely new
rhythm.
To copy a preset rhythm, select the rhythm you want to copy from
the Rhythm Menu.
Press the [PROGRAM] button to call up the Program Display.
2
Rhythm Pattern Program
1
2
NOTE
Pressing the [PROGRAM]
button while the rhythm is
running automatically stops
the rhythm.
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
149
9
Rhythm Program
To copy a preset rhythm, press the [RHYTHM] button. To create
your own rhythm from scratch, press the [NEW RHYTHM] button.
3
To copy a preset rhythm To create your own rhythm
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
150
9
Rhythm Program
A Rhythm consists of 15 sections: Intro 1 – 3, Main A – D, Fill In A – D, Ending 1 – 3, and Break.
In Rhythm Pattern Program, you can enter or edit percussion notes one by one, or assemble each part from
other different rhythms to create your own new User Rhythm.
Case 1: Creating your own rhythm by changing a preset rhythm
Case 2: Creating your own rhythm by assembling parts from other different
rhythms
Case 3: Creating your own rhythm from scratch
Intro 1
2
3
Main A
B
C
D
Fill In A
B
C
D
Ending 1
2
3
Break
Intro 1'
2
3
Main A
B
C
D
Fill In A
B
C
D
Ending 1
2
3
Break
Preset Rhythm User Rhythm
Changing Intro 1
to Intro 1'
Save as
a User Rhythm
All Rhythm sections, including any which have not
been edited, are saved as one User Rhythm.
Intro 1
2
3
Main A
B
C
D
Fill In A
B
C
D
Ending 1
2
3
Break
Intro 1
2
3'
Main A
B
C'
D'
Fill In A
B
C'
D'
Ending 1
2
3
Break'
Preset Rhythm
Intro 1'
2'
3'
Main A'
B'
C'
D'
Fill In A'
B'
C'
D'
Ending 1'
2'
3'
Break'
Preset Rhythm
Save as
a User Rhythm
User Rhythm
Assemble some
sections or parts
Intro 1
2
3
Main A
B
C
D
Fill In A
B
C
D
Ending 1
2
3
Break
Intro 1
2
3
Main A
B
C
D
Fill In A
B
C
D
Ending 1
2
3
Break
Blank Rhythm User Rhythm
Entering percussion
sounds into
each section
Save as
a User Rhythm
These are blank sections (no percussion sounds);
if you press ENDING [2] or [3] button, no sound is played.
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
151
9
Rhythm Program
Basic settings for the Rhythm Pattern
In the SETTING Page of the display, set the conditions of the rhythm, such as time
signature, measure length, and so on. You can also customize the part settings in this
SETTING Page — deleting any part or copying a part from another rhythm to the
currently selected rhythm.
Press the [SETTING] button in the display to call up the SETTING
Page.
Determines the time signature used for the rhythm.
You can select the time signature with the BEAT buttons.
If you start the Rhythm Pattern Program from a preset rhythm, pressing a BEAT
button that is not the same as the currently selected rhythm calls up the
following message.
Selecting [CLEAR] deletes all data in the rhythm and changes the time
signature.
Select [CANCEL] to abort the operation.
1
2
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
152
9
Rhythm Program
Select a section to which you want to enter or edit the rhythm
pattern.
Pressing the SECTION button on the display calls up the Section Select pop-up
menu. After selecting the desired section, the pop-up menu automatically closes.
You can play the selected section by pressing the Rhythm [START] button on
the panel. You can also change the section while the rhythm is playing. For
details on muting the accompaniment part, refer to page 167.
Sets the measure length of the rhythm pattern.
Pressing the MEASURE button on the display calls up the Measure Select pop-
up menu. Select the desired measure in the pop-up menu. If you select Break or
Fill In as the section, the measure cannot be changed.
(If necessary) Set the Metronome, Part Assemble, and Part Clear
parameters.
1 METRONOME
Turns the metronome click on or off. When set to ON, the metronome sounds on each
beat of the measure (for example, three times per measure in 3/4 time) to serve as a
rhythmic guide when programming patterns. Set to On here with Real Time Write.
3
4
5
1
2
3
Reference Pages
Step Write and Real Time
Write (page 154)
Entering Percussion Sounds
to a Rhythm Pattern – Real
Time Write (page 162)
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
153
9
Rhythm Program
2 ASSEMBLE
Copies the part from another rhythm to the currently selected rhythm. You can
assemble various sections from multiple rhythms to create your original rhythm.
Pressing the [ASSEMBLE] button calls up the following display.
Select the copy source: Rhythm, Section and Part. Then select the destination. You can
copy only one part, or all parts of a rhythm.
After setting the source and destination, press [EXECUTE]. Copy is executed and
returning to the previous display.
3 CLEAR PART
Clears a specific part or parts from the currently selected rhythm. Pressing this button
calls up the following display.
Select the part you want to delete from the displayed parts. You cannot select a part
that contains no data (the button is grayed out). If you select [ALL] here, the
percussion and all accompaniment parts are cleared.
When selecting the desired part, a display prompting confirmation of the operation
appears. Select [CLEAR] to execute the operation, or select [CANCEL] to abort the
operation.
Select copy source
(Rhythm, Section,
and Part)
Select the part for
the copy destination
Press here to execute the copy
Reference Page
Accompaniment (page 70)
NOTE
If you select BASS here, the
bass phrase in the A.B.C. will
be cleared.
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
154
9
Rhythm Program
Entering Percussion Sounds to a Rhythm Pattern – Step Write
You can enter percussion sounds in the INPUT Page of the display. Before entering
percussion sounds, turn off the Upper and Lower keyboard Voices by setting each
Voice’s volume to MIN.
Press the [INPUT] button at the top of the display to call up the
INPUT Page.
Select the part, MAIN DRUM or ADD DRUM, to which you want to
enter the percussion.
In general, main (or basic) drum/percussion instruments (such as Bass Drum,
Snare Drum, and so on) are entered in Main Drum part and others (such as
Tambourine, Triangle) are entered in Add Drum part.
Step Write and Real Time Write
There are two different methods you can use to program rhythms: Step Write and Real
Time Write.
Step Write allows you to enter percussion sounds as individual note values. As a
method, it is very similar to writing down the notes on a sheet of music paper; each note
is entered one at a time, and though you can hear each individual note entered, you
cannot actually hear the pattern playing as you create it. Step Write is good for precision
and for entering percussion sounds whose note placement and rhythmic value has been
determined, such as a bass drum that plays every beat in a measure.
Real Time Write on the other hand, is similar to using a multi-track tape recorder; you
can hear previously recorded parts of the pattern as you record new parts on top. Real
Time Write is best for capturing the “feel” of a rhythm, because it allows you to actually
play the pattern as you are creating it.
Each method has its own advantages and uses. Which method you use depends partly
on the type of rhythm you intend to create and partly on your own personal preference.
You can switch between the two methods in editing to create a single rhythm by the use
of both methods. This would come handy, for example, in programming the basic beats
of a rhythm with Step Write, then using Real Time Write to add percussion accents and
embellishments.
Which mode of the operation is selected depends on the play status of the rhythm. If
the rhythm is stopped, Step Write is automatically selected. If the rhythm is playing,
Real Time Write is selected. See the instructions below for Step Write, and page 162 for
Real Time Write.
NOTE
The volume of the percussion
and accompaniment sound
during use of Rhythm Pattern
Program can be controlled
with the VOLUME button of
the RHYTHM section. When
you quit Rhythm Pattern
Program, the VOLUME of the
RHYTHM section will return
to the previous selected
level.
1
2
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
155
9
Rhythm Program
Select the desired Drum Kit.
You can select a kit from 20 Drum kits and 5 SFX kits. For details on each kit,
see page 176. Pressing the button indicating the currently selected kit calls up
the kit Select the pop-up menu, then select the desired kit from the pop-up
menu. The selected kit is called up on the Upper and Lower keyboards.
You can select only one kit for each part (Main Drum or Add Drum). When you
want to create a rhythm pattern including two different drum kits, select one kit
for Main Drum and another for Add Drum.
Select the percussion sound you wish to enter by pressing the
key on the Upper or Lower keyboard that corresponds to the
sound.
The selected instrument’s name appears on the display.
Set the appropriate Quantize value.
For details on Quantize, refer to page 161.
3
Drum kit SFX kit
4
Instrument name
Selected key
5
NOTE
The Quantize setting can be
changed in the middle of
Step Write.
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
156
9
Rhythm Program
Set the Gate Time. (This is optional, and only necessary when
you want to enter a sustaining sound, such as a whistle.)
For a list of instruments that require a Gate Time setting, refer to the Percussion
Kit List on page 176. For details on Gate Time, refer to page 165.
Use the ACCENT buttons to enter the sound to the selected
point. Press each ACCENT button to actually enter the
percussion sounds.
You can change the rhythm clock to which the percussion sound is entered by
pressing the QUANTIZE [E][F] buttons.
1 Rhythm Clock box
Displays the current position in the pattern according to measure, beat, and number of
clicks.
A click is the smallest division of a pattern, and one beat is made up of 480 clicks.
The rhythm clock advances up to the measures set in the SETTING Page and loops
back to the beginning of the rhythm (01:01:000).
2 ACCENT buttons
Records the instrument and determines its volume or Accent level. Press one of the
ACCENT buttons you wish to set (“ppp” is softer and “fff ” is louder; “REST” is no
sound). The instrument is automatically inserted at the Accent level to the selected
position in the pattern. Selection of an Accent level automatically advances the rhythm
clock by one step, according to the current Quantize resolution value.
3 QUANTIZE [E][F] controls
Each press of the buttons advances or reverses the rhythm clock by one step. The size of
a single step is determined by the Quantize value.
Repeat steps #4 through #7 above to layer each instrument and
complete your own rhythm.
6
7
1
32
Reference Page
Basic settings for the Rhythm
Pattern (page 151)
8
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
157
9
Rhythm Program
Editing Entered Percussion Notes
You can change the accent level, position, or gate time of the entered sound, or delete
the entered sound.
To change the accent level of an entered note:
Select the desired note for changing the accent level.
1 NEXT INSTRUMENT
Selects the entered instruments one by one, from left key to right.
2 NOTE [E][F] controls
Selects the previous/next position’s note of the currently selected instrument. In the
above notes for example, you can select notes 1, 3 and 4 one by one. Rests (2 and
5) are ignored.
3 QUANTIZE [E][F] controls
Advances or reverses the rhythm clock by one step. The size of a single step is
determined by the Quantize value.
1
213
123 4 5
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
158
9
Rhythm Program
Change the accent level by using the ACCENT buttons or Accent
box.
The Accent box allows for finer changes.
1 Accent box
Touch on the box to enable the Accent box.
Turning the Data Control dial changes the accent level over a range of 0 – 127.
The minimum setting results in no sound.
2 ACCENT buttons
Determines the coarse accent level. Eight accent levels (from “ppp” to “fff”) are
available.
Press the desired Accent button to change the currently selected note to the selected
level.
To move an entered note:
Select the note you want to move (as in Step 1 on page 157).
Press the Rhythm Clock box to enable the box.
Turn the Data Control dial to change the position by one clock.
2
1
2
1
2
3
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
159
9
Rhythm Program
To change the length of an entered note:
The length of sustaining sounds such as Snare Roll and Whistle can be changed by
adjusting the Gate Time. See page 166 for more information.
To erase an entered note:
Select the note you want to erase (as in Step 1 on page 157).
Press the [REST] button in the ACCENT section of the display.
The selected note is deleted and replaced with a rest.
You can also erase all notes of a single instrument, or all notes entered.
To erase one instrument:
Select the key to which the instrument that you want to erase is
assigned.
The key name you have selected and its instrument name are displayed.
Press [CLEAR] in the display.
The following display appears, prompting confirmation of the operation.
1
2
1
Instrument name
Selected key
2
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
160
9
Rhythm Program
Select [CLEAR] to erase the selected instrument.
A bell sound indicates that the instrument has been erased.
The following method can also be used to erase one instrument.
While holding down the [CLEAR] button, press the key on the
keyboard corresponding to the instrument you wish to erase.
A bell sound indicates that the instrument has been erased.
To erase all instruments:
Press [CLEAR] in the display.
The following display appears, prompting confirmation of the operation.
Select [CLEAR ALL] to erase all instruments.
All instruments are instantly erased.
When you want to replace the instrument you have already entered with another
instrument, it’s not necessary to delete and re-enter. You can quickly replace the sound
with the following procedure.
To replace the instrument:
Before the operation, stop the rhythm.
Select the key to which the instrument you want to replace is
assigned.
The key name you have selected and its instrument name are displayed.
Simultaneously hold down the [CHANGE] button in the display
and press the key on the Upper or Lower keyboard that
corresponds to the instrument you want to use.
The instrument is instantly erased and replaced with the newly selected one.
3
1
2
1
Instrument name
Selected key
2
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
161
9
Rhythm Program
About Quantize
The Quantize function is a process of rounding off timing or duration values, so
that each note plays with precise timing. You can select nine types of Quantize
value.
With Step Write
It allows you to automatically correct the length (duration) and timing of each note
you enter.
Steps Depending on the Quantize Values
With Real Time Write
It allows you to automatically correct the timing of the notes you play, according to
the specified Quantize resolution. No correction occurs when you select FREE.
Generally, you should set Quantize to be the same as the shortest note you intend to
play.
1234 5
6789 5
With this button,
change the displayed
Quantize buttons
0 120 240 360 480
(1 beat)
Clock
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
40
80
160
120
60
240
320
Setting Quantize to FREE (5) results in the finest, least amount of quantization (1/480 beat).
Original data (you play)
After applying a “ ” quantize value to the original data
Quarter note length
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
162
9
Rhythm Program
Entering Percussion Sounds to a Rhythm Pattern –
Real Time Write
While you listen to the entered rhythm or metronome click, play the Upper/Lower
keyboards to enter the desired percussion sounds.
Select the desired part to which the percussion sounds are
entered, and the desired drum kit, by following Steps 1 – 3 on
page 154.
Set the appropriate Quantize value.
The positions at which the sounds are input will be corrected according to the
predetermined Quantize value in the Real Time Write operation. For details,
refer to page 161.
Press the rhythm [START] button in the panel.
The rhythm (or Metronome) starts playing, enabling the Real Time Write
operation.
While the rhythm is running, play the percussion sounds from
the Upper and/or Lower keyboards.
If you have started the Rhythm Pattern Program by copying a preset rhythm,
you can listen the selected rhythm as you play the sound. If you have started
from scratch, set the Metronome to “on” in the SETTING Page and listen to the
metronome click. The pattern will automatically repeat (or “loop”) for a certain
number of measures as set in the SETTING Page.
Repeat steps #2 through #4 above to layer each instrument and
complete your own rhythm.
1
2
3
4
Reference Page
Metronome (page 152)
5
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
163
9
Rhythm Program
You can erase an instrument while rhythm is played.
To erase an instrument/key assignment:
While holding down the [CLEAR] button, press the key on the keyboard
corresponding to the instrument you wish to erase. All instances of the selected
instrument will be erased from the pattern.
When you want to erase all instruments, or edit entered percussion notes, you need to
stop the rhythm then edit. See page 157, “Editing Entered Percussion Notes.”
Creating Backing Patterns (Rhythmic Chord Function)
The Rhythm Pattern Program allows you to use one of the DDK-7’s Accompaniment
patterns with your original rhythm. You can select and save the Accompaniment
pattern that best matches the rhythm that you have created. Moreover, Rhythm Pattern
Program features a Rhythmic Chord function that lets you add your own backing
patterns to the rhythms you create.
To select an appropriate Accompaniment pattern for your newly
created rhythm:
Press the [SETTING] button at the top of the display to call up the
SETTING Page.
Press the [ASSEMBLE] button.
A pop-up menu appears, letting you select the copy source and destination part.
Using the COPY FROM [RHYTHM] and [SECTION] buttons, select
the rhythm and the section which has the accompaniment you
wish to use.
Using the COPY TO [PART] button, select the desired
accompaniment part (CHORD 1 or CHORD 2) to be used for the
Rhythmic Chord pattern.
Using the COPY FROM [PART] button, select the accompaniment
part you want to copy.
1
2
3
Reference Page
Basic settings for the Rhythm
Pattern (page 151)
4
5
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
164
9
Rhythm Program
Press the [EXECUTE] button to execute the copy.
The desired accompaniment part (Rhythmic Chord pattern) has been copied.
To create your own backing patterns with the Rhythmic Chord
function:
The Rhythmic Chord pattern can be entered by the same methods as the rhythm: Step
Write and/or Real Time Write.
Press the [INPUT] button at the top of the display to call up the
INPUT Page.
Select the part, CHORD 1 or CHORD 2, which you want to create
for the Rhythmic Chord pattern.
If the part you have select contains a preset accompaniment pattern, a message
appears prompting you to confirm whether you want to clear the existing data or
not. To create your own Rhythmic Chord pattern, select [CLEAR].
Select the desired Voice.
Pressing the button showing the Voice name calls up the relevant Voice Menu.
Select the desired Voice category with the instrument icon buttons, then select
the desired Voice from the Voice Menu. The selected Voice is called up for both
the Upper and Lower keyboards.
Voices can also be changed even after entering the Rhythmic Chord pattern.
You can select only one Voice for one part (Chord 1 or Chord 2). When you
want to create a Rhythmic Chord pattern including two different Voices, select
one Voice for Chord 1 and another for Chord 2.
6
1
2
3
NOTE
The Voice menu that appears
here is not the same as the
one for the Voice Sections.
See the Rhythm Program
Voice List on page 179.
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
165
9
Rhythm Program
Set the appropriate Quantize value.
For details on the Quantize function, refer to page 161.
Set the Gate Time.
You can adjust the Gate Time setting by using GATE TIME buttons
in the display, or Data Control dial.
Enter the Rhythmic Chord pattern.
The methods for entering the Rhythmic Chord pattern are the same as those for
entering the rhythm pattern. Any key you press sounds a C major triad chord
(C, E, and G). For information on Step Write, see page 156; for information on
Real Time Write, see page 162.
You can also edit the entered Rhythmic Chord pattern using the same method as in
“Editing Entered Percussion Notes” (page 157). To change the gate time of the notes of
the Rhythmic Chord pattern, follow the instructions below.
Gate time determines the actual length of time a note sounds. For example, a
quarter note is sometimes played as tenuto (long length) and sometimes played as
staccato (short length).
Since 1 beat is made up of 480 clocks, a quarter note played tenuto may have a gate
time between 450 – 470, and a staccato quarter note may be about 240.
4
5
DATA CONTROL
6
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
166
9
Rhythm Program
To change the Gate Time:
Select the note for which you want to change the gate time (see
Step 1 on page 157).
Press the Gate Time box to enable the box.
Turn the Data Control dial to change the Gate Time.
Changing the Voices for Accompaniment Parts
In Rhythm Pattern Program, you can create your original drum patterns using Main
Drum and Add Drum, and original backing patterns using Chord 1 and Chord 2.
Moreover, you can change the Voices for all accompaniment parts, including Pad,
Phrase 1 and Phrase 2.
Voices can be changed in the VOICE/EFFECT Page.
Press the [VOICE/EFFECT] button at the top of the display to call
up the VOICE/EFFECT Page.
Press the [VOICE] button in the display.
The following display will appear.
1
2
3
1
2
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
167
9
Rhythm Program
Select the desired part for which you wish to change the Voice.
The Voice menu appears.
Select the desired Voice, and the Voice menu automatically
closes.
After selecting the desired Voice, customize the accompaniment to your personal
preference by adjusting the volume and pan, and setting the desired effects below.
Adjusting Volume and Panning
Volume and Pan are set in VOICE/EFFECT Page.
1 ON/OFF
Determines the on/off status of each accompaniment part. When this is set to OFF, the
part is muted.
2 Volume sliders
Determines the volume of each accompaniment part.
Range: 0 – 127
3
4
NOTE
The Voice menu that appears
here is not the same as the
one for the Voice Sections.
See the Rhythm Program
Voice List on page 179.
1
2
VOLUME Display
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
168
9
Rhythm Program
Determines the position of each accompaniment part in the stereo image.
Range: L64 – R63
Effect Settings
You can set Reverb, Chorus, and Variation effects as desired for your original rhythm.
Reverb adds a warm ambience to the sound, simulating the complex reflections of
actual performance spaces, such as a concert hall or a small club. Chorus provides a
wide variety of sound transformations and enhancements. Variation includes many
kinds of special effects for changing the sound, both subtly and radically. These effects
are set in the VOICE/EFFECT Page.
Determines the amount of reverb applied to each accompaniment part.
Range: 0 – 127
PAN Display
REVERB Display
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
169
9
Rhythm Program
1 CHORUS TYPE
Determines the type of the chorus effect. Pressing the CHORUS TYPE button calls up
the chorus type list.
Select the desired chorus type, and the list automatically closes.
2 Chorus sliders
Determines the amount of chorus effect applied to each accompaniment part.
Range: 0 – 127
1
2
CHORUS Display
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
170
9
Rhythm Program
1 VARIATION (Variation Effect Category)
Selects the effect category of the variation effect. Pressing the VARIATION button calls
up the effect category list.
Select the desired effect category, and the list automatically closes.
After changing the category, the variation type below automatically changes
corresponding to the selected category.
2 TYPE (Variation Type)
Determines the type of the variation effect. Pressing the TYPE button calls up the effect
type list.
Select the desired type, and the list automatically closes.
3 Variation sliders
Determines the amount of Variation effect applied to each accompaniment part.
Range: 0 – 127
1 2
3
VARIATION Display
Reference Page
Effect List (page 52)
LCD
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
171
9
Rhythm Program
Detailed settings for each percussion instrument
You can independently adjust the settings of pan, pitch, reverb and volume for each
instrument.
Press the [DRUM SETUP] button at the top of the display to call
up the DRUM SETUP Page.
Select the desired part, Main Drum or Add Drum.
Press the appropriate key (the key to which the instrument to be
changed is assigned).
The selected instrument’s name is shown on the display and you can change its
settings.
Adjust the parameters: Pan, Volume, Reverb and Pitch.
1
2
3
4
2
3 4 5 6
1
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
172
9
Rhythm Program
1 Percussion Kit Name
Indicates the currently selected kit. Pressing this button calls up the Percussion Kit list,
letting you select the desired kit. When you change the kit, the instruments you have
already entered are replaced with the instruments of the newly selected kit.
2 PAN
Determines the position of the currently selected instrument in the stereo image.
Range: L63 – R63
3 VOLUME
Determines the volume of the currently selected instrument.
Range: 0 – 127
4 REVERB
Determines the amount of reverb applied to the currently selected instrument.
Range: 0 – 127
5 PITCH COARSE
Determines the pitch of the currently selected instrument, adjustable in semitone
(100-cent) steps.
Range: -64 – +63
6 PITCH FINE
Determines the pitch of the currently selected instrument, adjustable in 1-cent steps,
allowing more detailed tuning of the instrument than in PITCH COARSE (
5) above.
Range: -64 – +63
Saving Rhythm Patterns
You can save your newly created rhythm pattern as a User Rhythm, up to a maximum
of 48 patterns.
If necessary, confirm the contents of the rhythm you want to
save.
For details, see page 173.
Press the [SAVE] button at the top right of the display to call up
the SAVE Page.
If the rhythm is playing, it will automatically be stopped.
Select the User Rhythm number to which you wish to save.
The following display appears, prompting confirmation of the operation.
Reference Page
Percussion Kit List
(page 176)
1
2
3
LCD
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
173
9
Rhythm Program
Press the [SAVE] button to save the pattern, or press [CANCEL]
to abort the operation.
After saving the Rhythm, be sure to quit Rhythm Pattern Program (page 174) before
turning the power off. Turning off the DDK-7 without quitting Rhythm Pattern
Program erases the User Rhythm you have created.
Remaining Memory (amount of memory available for storing rhythms) is shown on
the display as a percentage.
When the pattern cannot be saved because of lack of available memory space, a
“Data full” message appears. Return to the previous page by pressing [OK] in this
case.
You should periodically save your rhythm as you are creating it and check the
amount of remaining memory. If the rhythm currently being edited cannot be saved
because of a lack of memory space, erase some of the less necessary percussion
sounds with the [CLEAR] button in the INPUT Page, and try saving the pattern
again.
Confirming rhythm patterns before saving
The rhythm pattern you have created will be saved with 15 sections collectively into
one rhythm. Before saving, we recommend that you confirm the contents of each
section.
Example: When saving the Main A and Main B sections you have created
into one user rhythm
First select “Main A” by using the [SECTION] button on the SETTING Page,
then press the [START] button on the panel. This lets you hear the Main A pattern
you have created. Confirm that the rhythm pattern is what you want to save as
Main A. Next, select “Main B” by using the [SECTION] button, then play it back
and confirm that this is what you want to save as Main B.
If the Main A and/or Main B patterns contain undesired data or no data, create the
desired data by using the Assemble function (page 153).
After confirming the desired section (Main A and Main B here), we recommend
that you confirm that all other sections contain no data. If unnecessary data is
contained in some sections which you don’t want to save, delete that unnecessary
data. This can reduce the data size of the user rhythm.
4
Remaining Memory
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
174
9
Rhythm Program
Quitting the Rhythm Pattern Program
You can quit the Rhythm Pattern Program from any of its display pages.
Press the [PROGRAM] button.
If a rhythm is playing, it will automatically be stopped.
If you leave Rhythm Pattern Program without having edited any patterns, this
simply quits the Rhythm Pattern Program.
If you have not saved the edited pattern, a message appears, prompting
confirmation of the operation.
Select [EXIT] to leave Rhythm Pattern Program, or [CANCEL] to
abort the operation and return to the previous display.
Recalling User Rhythm Patterns
The User rhythms you have created in the Rhythm Pattern Program can be selected
and played from the User menu. Refer to Chapter 5, “Selecting rhythms with the
Rhythm button” (page 60).
When you leave the Rhythm Pattern Program, the square at the top left in the
display turns light blue for a few seconds, indicating that data is currently
being saved. Do not turn the power off while the data is being saved.
1
2
Select the User Rhythm number.
Select “USER” category here.
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
175
9
Rhythm Program
Selecting Rhythm from an External Media
You can load rhythms from a USB flash memory, or other external media and edit and
save them as User Rhythms. Data that can be loaded includes not only that of the
DDK-7, but also all Style File Format files.
Insert the media which contains the desired pattern into the USB
TO DEVICE terminal.
Press the [PROGRAM] button on the panel.
Press [FILE] at the top right in the display.
If you open the FILE Page while the rhythm is playing, the rhythm will
automatically be stopped.
Press the [SELECT] button to select the desired pattern file.
The method for selecting a file is the same as that in the M.D.R. section.
See page 104 for more information.
Press [EXECUTE] or press the highlighted, selected button again
to load the pattern.
To edit the loaded pattern, go to the INPUT Page (page 157), then save your
created pattern(s) as a User Rhythm (page 172).
1
2
3
4
About file types that can be loaded to the DDK-7
This DDK-7 is compatible with Style File Format data. The
Style File Format (SFF) is Yamaha’s original style data
format, which uses a unique conversion system to provide
high-quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide
range of chord types. In this format, each rhythm pattern (called a “style”) is made
up of fifteen sections (Intro 1 – 3, Main A – D, Fill In A – D, Break, Ending 1 – 3)
as rhythm pattern variations. Each of these fifteen sections in turn has eight
different parts, made up of MIDI sequence data.
You can load any patterns (styles) which have been created by an SFF-compatible
instrument. Instruments compatible with SFF have the Style File Logo on the
panel.
5
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
176
9
Rhythm Program
Percussion Kit List
*: Indicates an instrument which requires the Gate Time setting.
Standard Kit 1
Live!Std Kit
Live!Std+P Kit
Standard Kit 2
Live!Funk Kit
Live!Funk+P Kit
Hit Kit Room Kit Rock Kit Electro Kit
Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Mute
Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo Open
Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q
Whip Slap Whip Slap Whip Slap Whip Slap Whip Slap Whip Slap
Scratch H Scratch H Scratch H Scratch H Scratch H Scratch H
Scratch L Scratch L Scratch L Scratch L Scratch L Scratch L
Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap
Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise
Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click
Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell
Seq Click L Seq Click L Seq Click L Seq Click L Seq Click L Seq Click L
Seq Click H Seq Click H Seq Click H Seq Click H Seq Click H Seq Click H
Brush Tap Brush Tap Brush Tap Brush Tap Brush Tap Brush Tap
Brush Swirl* Brush Swirl* Brush Swirl* Brush Swirl* Brush Swirl* Brush Swirl*
Brush Slap Brush Slap Brush Slap Brush Slap Brush Slap Brush Slap
Brush Tap Swirl* Brush Tap Swirl* Brush Tap Swirl* Brush Tap Swirl* Brush Tap Swirl* Reverse Cymbal*
Snare Roll* Snare Roll* Snare Roll* Snare Roll* Snare Roll* Snare Roll*
Castanet Castanet Castanet Castanet Castanet Hi Q 2
Snare Soft Snare Soft 2 Snare Electro Snare Soft Snare Noisy Snare Snap Elec
Sticks Sticks Sticks Sticks Sticks Sticks
Kick Soft Kick Soft Kick Tight L Kick Soft Kick Soft Kick 3
Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot H Snare Pitched Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot
Kick Tight Kick Tight Kick Wet Kick Tight Kick 2 Kick Gate
Kick Kick Short Kick Tight H Kick Kick Gate Kick Gate Heavy
Side Stick Side Stick Light Stick Ambient Side Stick Side Stick Side Stick
Snare Snare Short Snare Ambient Snare Snappy Snare Rock Snare Noisy 2
Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap
Snare Tight Snare Tight H Snare Tight 2 Snare Tight Snap Snare Rock Tight Snare Noisy 3
Floor Tom L Floor Tom L Hybrid Tom 1 Tom Room 1 Tom Rock 1 Tom Electro 1
Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Closed 2 Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Closed
Floor Tom H Floor Tom H Hybrid Tom 2 Tom Room 2 Tom Rock 2 Tom Electro 2
Hi-Hat Pedal Hi-Hat Pedal Hi-Hat Pedal 2 Hi-Hat Pedal Hi-Hat Pedal Hi-Hat Pedal
Low Tom Low Tom Hybrid Tom 3 Tom Room 3 Tom Rock 3 Tom Electro 3
Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open 2 Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open
Mid Tom L Mid Tom L Hybrid Tom 4 Tom Room 4 Tom Rock 4 Tom Electro 4
Mid Tom H Mid Tom H Hybrid Tom 5 Tom Room 5 Tom Rock 5 Tom Electro 5
Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1
High Tom High Tom Hybrid Tom 6 Tom Room 6 Tom Rock 6 Tom Electro 6
Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup
Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine Light Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine
Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal
Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2
Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap
Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2
Bongo H Bongo H Bongo H Bongo H Bongo H Bongo H
Bongo L Bongo L Bongo L Bongo L Bongo L Bongo L
Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Conga H Mute
Conga H Open Conga H Open Conga H Open Conga H Open Conga H Open Conga H Open
Conga L Conga L Conga L Conga L Conga L Conga L
Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H
Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L
Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H
Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L
Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa
Maracas Maracas Maracas Maracas Maracas Maracas
Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle H*
Samba Whistle L* Samba Whistle L* Samba Whistle L* Samba Whistle L* Samba Whistle L* Samba Whistle L*
Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short
Guiro Long* Guiro Long* Guiro Long* Guiro Long* Guiro Long* Guiro Long*
Claves Claves Claves Claves Claves Claves
Wood Block H Wood Block H Wood Block H Wood Block H Wood Block H Wood Block H
Wood Block L Wood Block L Wood Block L Wood Block L Wood Block L Wood Block L
Cuica Mute Cuica Mute Cuica Mute Cuica Mute Cuica Mute Scratch H 2
Cuica Open Cuica Open Cuica Open Cuica Open Cuica Open Scratch L 2
Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute
Triangle Open Triangle Open Triangle Open Triangle Open Triangle Open Triangle Open
Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker
Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells
Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree
C-1
D-1
E-1
F-1
G-1
A-1
B-1
C
-1
D
-1
F
-1
G
-1
A
-1
C0
D0
E0
F0
G0
A0
B0
C
0
D
0
F
0
G
0
A
0
C1
D1
E1
F1
G1
A1
B1
C
1
D
1
F
1
G
1
A
1
C2
D2
E2
F2
G2
A2
B2
C
2
D
2
F
2
G
2
A
2
C3
D3
E3
F3
G3
A3
B3
C
3
D
3
F
3
G
3
A
3
C4
D4
E4
F4
G4
A4
B4
C
4
D
4
F
4
G
4
A
4
C5
D5
E5
F5
G5
C
5
D
5
F
5
Upper KeyboardLower Keyboard
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
177
9
Rhythm Program
*: Indicates an instrument which requires the Gate Time setting.
Analog Kit Dance Kit Jazz Kit Brush Kit Symphony Kit Multi Kit 1
Surdo Mute Kick Dance 1 Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Scratch
Surdo Open Kick Dance 2 Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo Open Concert BD
Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q Noise Percussion
Whip Slap Whip Slap* Whip Slap Whip Slap Whip Slap Bass Drum March
Scratch H Scratch Dance 1* Scratch H Scratch H Scratch H Analog BD Short
Scratch L Scratch Dance 2* Scratch L Scratch L Scratch L Synth Tom 3
Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Analog BD Long
Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise Synth Tom 2
Metronome Click Dance Perc 1 Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click Synth Bass Drum
Metronome Bell Reverse Dance 1 Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Synth Tom 1
Seq Click L Dance Perc 2 Seq Click L Seq Click L Seq Click L Bass Drum Attack
Seq Click H Hi Q Dance 1 Seq Click H Seq Click H Seq Click H Bass Drum Heavy
Brush Tap Snare Analog 3 Brush Tap Brush Tap Brush Tap Tom 4
Brush Swirl* Vinyl Noise* Brush Swirl* Brush Swirl* Brush Swirl* Bass Drum Light
Brush Slap Snare Analog 4 Brush Slap Brush Slap Brush Slap Tom 3
Reverse Cymbal* Reverse Cymbal* Brush Tap Swirl* Brush Tap Swirl* Brush Tap Swirl* Orch Snare Drum
Snare Roll* Reverse Dance 2* Snare Roll* Snare Roll* Snare Roll* Snare Drum Roll*
Hi Q 2 Hi Q 2 Castanet Castanet Castanet Tom 2
Snare Noisy 4 Snare Techno Snare Jazz H Brush Slap 2 Snare Soft SD Brush Roll
Sticks Snare Dance 1 Sticks Sticks Sticks Tom 1
Kick 3 Kick Techno Q Kick Soft Kick Soft Kick Soft 2 SD Brush Shot 2
Open Rim Shot Rim Gate Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot Tom Brush Shot 4
Kick Anlg Short Kick Techno L Kick Tight Kick Tight Gran Cassa SD Brush Shot 1
Kick Analog Kick Techno Kick Jazz Kick Jazz Gran Cassa Mute Snare Drum Heavy
Side Stick Anlg Side Stick Anlg Side Stick Light Side Stick Light Side Stick Tom Brush Shot 3
Snare Analog Snare Clap Snare Jazz L Brush Slap 3 Band Snare Snare Drum Light
Hand Clap Dance Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap Tom Brush Shot 2
Snare Analog 2 Snare Dry Snare Jazz M Brush Tap 2 Band Snare 2 SD Accent 2
Tom Analog 1 Tom Dance 1 Floor Tom L Tom Brush 1 Floor Tom L SD Accent 1
Hat Close Analog Hi-Hat Closed 3 Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Closed Tom Brush Shot 1
Tom Analog 2 Tom Dance 2 Floor Tom H Tom Brush 2 Floor Tom H SD Reverb 2
Hat Close Anlg 2 Hat Close Anlg 3 Hi-Hat Pedal Hi-Hat Pedal Hi-Hat Pedal Snare Drum Rim 2
Tom Analog 3 Tom Dance 3 Low Tom Tom Brush 3 Low Tom SD Reverb 1
Hat Open Analog Hi-Hat Open 3 Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open Snare Drum Rim 1
Tom Analog 4 Tom Dance 4 Mid Tom L Tom Brush 4 Mid Tom L Synth Snare Drum
Tom Analog 5 Tom Dance 5 Mid Tom H Tom Brush 5 Mid Tom H Analog SD
Crash Analog Crash Analog Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 Hand Cymbal Triangle Mute
Tom Analog 6 Tom Dance 6 High Tom Tom Brush 6 High Tom Tambourine
Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Hand Cymbal S Triangle Open
Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Castanet
Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Claves
Tambourine Tambourine Anlg Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine
Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Cabasa
Cowbell Analog Cowbell Dance Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Hand Cymbal 2 Finger Snap
Vibraslap Vibraslap Analog Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap
Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Analog Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Hand Cymbal 2 S Hand Claps
Bongo H Bongo Analog H Bongo H Bongo H Bongo H Crash Cymbal 2
Bongo L Bongo Analog L Bongo L Bongo L Bongo L Hi-Hat Close
Conga Analog H Conga Analog H Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Crash Cymbal 1
Conga Analog M Conga Analog M Conga H Open Conga H Open Conga H Open Hi-Hat Open
Conga Analog L Conga Analog L Conga L Conga L Conga L Crash Cym Mute
Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H Ride Cymbal 2
Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L Hi-Hat Pedal 2
Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H Ride Cymbal 1
Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L Hi-Hat Pedal 1
Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Ride Cymbal Cup
Maracas 2 Maracas 2 Maracas Maracas Maracas
Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle H* Cym Brush Shot
Samba Whistle L* Samba Whistle L* Samba Whistle L* Samba Whistle L* Samba Whistle L* Cymbal March
Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Analog HH Close
Guiro Long* Guiro Long* Guiro Long* Guiro Long* Guiro Long* Orch Cymbal Roll
Claves 2 Claves 2 Claves Claves Claves Analog HH Open
Wood Block H Dance Perc 3 Wood Block H Wood Block H Wood Block H Orchestra Cymbal
Wood Block L Dance Perc 4* Wood Block L Wood Block L Wood Block L Orch Cymbal Mute
Scratch H 2 Dance Breath 1 Cuica Mute Cuica Mute Cuica Mute
Scratch L 2 Dance Breath 2* Cuica Open Cuica Open Cuica Open Tam-Tam
Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute
Triangle Open Triangle Open Triangle Open Triangle Open Triangle Open
Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker
Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells
Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree
C-1
D-1
E-1
F-1
G-1
A-1
B-1
C
-1
D
-1
F
-1
G
-1
A
-1
C0
D0
E0
F0
G0
A0
B0
C
0
D
0
F
0
G
0
A
0
C1
D1
E1
F1
G1
A1
B1
C
1
D
1
F
1
G
1
A
1
C2
D2
E2
F2
G2
A2
B2
C
2
D
2
F
2
G
2
A
2
C3
D3
E3
F3
G3
A3
B3
C
3
D
3
F
3
G
3
A
3
C4
D4
E4
F4
G4
A4
B4
C
4
D
4
F
4
G
4
A
4
C5
D5
E5
F5
G5
C
5
D
5
F
5
Upper KeyboardLower Keyboard
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
178
9
Rhythm Program
*: Indicates an instrument which requires the Gate Time setting.
Multi Kit 2 Live!Studio Kit SFX Kit 1 SFX Kit 2 Arabic Kit Cuban Kit Pop Latin Kit
Maracas High Surdo Mute
Surdo Mute Surdo Open
Maracas Low Hi Q
Surdo Muff Whip Slap
Surdo Rim Scratch H
Cuica High Scratch L Hand Clap
Surdo Open Finger Snap
Cuica Middle Click Noise
Tamborim Mute Metronome Click
Cuica Low Metronome Bell Conga H Tip Conga H Tip
Tamborim Open Seq Click L Conga H Heel Conga H Heel
Pandeiro Seq Click H Nakarazan Dom Conga H Open Conga H Open
Bongo High Brush Tap Cabasa Conga H Mute Conga H Mute
Conga Slide Brush Swirl* Nakarazan Edge Conga H SlapOpen Conga H SlapOpen
Bongo Low Brush Slap Hager Dom Conga H Slap Conga H Slap
Conga Slap Brush Tap Swirl* Hager Edge Conga H SlapMute Conga H SlapMute
Conga Muff Snare Roll* Bongo H Conga L Tip Conga L Tip
Bongo Mute Castanet Bongo L Conga L Heel Conga L Heel
Conga High Snare Studio L Conga H Mute Conga L Open Conga L Open
Bongo Slap Sticks Conga H Open Conga L Mute Conga L Mute
Conga Low Kick Ambience H Conga L Conga L SlapOpen Conga L SlapOpen
Open Rim Shot Zagrouda H Conga L Slap Conga L Slap
Timbale 1 High Kick Ambience L Zagrouda L* Conga L Slide* Conga L Slide*
Timbale 1 Low Kick Studio Cutting Noise 1* Phone Call* Kick Soft Bongo H Open 1 f Bongo H Open 1 f
Side Stick Cutting Noise 2* Door Squeak* Side Stick Bongo H Open 3 f Bongo H Open 3 f
Timbale 2 High Snare Studio M Door Slam* Snare Soft Bongo H Rim Bongo H Rim
Hand Clap String Slap* Scratch Cut* Arabic Hand Clap Bongo H Tip Bongo H Tip
Timbale 2 Low Snare Studio L Scratch H 3* Snare Drum Bongo H Heel Bongo H Heel
Timbale 3 High Floor Tom L Wind Chime* Floor Tom L Bongo H Slap Bongo H Slap
Woodblock High Hi-Hat Closed Telephone Ring* Hi-Hat Closed Bongo L Open 1 f Bongo L Open 1 f
Timbale 3 Low Floor Tom H Floor Tom H Bongo L Open 3 f Bongo L Open 3 f
Woodblock Mid Hi-Hat Pedal Hi-Hat Pedal Bongo L Rim Bongo L Rim
Timbale 4 High Low Tom Low Tom Bongo L Tip Bongo L Tip
Woodblock Low Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open Bongo L Heel Bongo L Heel
Timbale 4 Low Mid Tom L Mid Tom L Bongo L Slap Bongo L Slap
Vibraslap Mid Tom H Mid Tom H Timbale L Open Timbale L Open
Triangle Mute Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1
Tambourine High Tom High Tom
Triangle Open Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1
Castanet Chinese Cymbal Flute Key Click* CarEngnIgnition* Crash Cymbal 2
Claves Ride Cymbal Cup Car Tires Squeal* Duhulla Dom Paila L Paila L
Tambourine Car Passing* Tambourine Timbale H Open Timbale H Open
Cabasa Splash Cymbal Car Crash* Duhulla Tak
Cowbell Siren* Cowbell
Finger Snap Crash Cymbal 2 Train* Duhulla Sak
Vibraslap Jet Plane* Claves
Hand Claps Ride Cymbal 2 Starship* Doff Dom Paila H Paila H
Wind Bell Down Bongo H Burst* Katem Dom Cowbell Top Cowbell Top
Agogo High Bongo L Roller Coaster* Katem Tak
Wind Bell Up Conga H Mute Submarine* Katem Sak
Agogo Low Conga H Open Katem Tak
Bells Conga L Doff Tak Guiro Short Guiro Short
Cowbell 4 Timbale H Tabla Dom Guiro Long* Guiro Long*
Shaker Timbale L Tabla Tak 1
Cowbell 3 Agogo H Tabla Tik
Guiro Short Agogo L Shower* Laugh* Tabla Tak 2 Tambourine Tambourine
Cowbell 2 Cabasa Thunder* Scream* Tabla Sak
Guiro Long Maracas Wind* Punch* Tabla Roll Edge*
Cowbell 1 Samba Whistle H* Stream* Heart Beat* Tabla Flam
Taiko 2 Samba Whistle L* Bubble* Foot Steps* Sagat 1 Maracas Maracas
Ohdaiko 2 Guiro Short Feed* Tabel Dom Shaker Shaker
Taiko 1 Guiro Long* Sagat 3 Cabasa Cabasa
Ohdaiko 1 Claves Tabel Tak Cuica Mute
Ohtsuzumi 2 Wood Block H Sagat 2 Cuica Open
Ohtsuzumi 1 Wood Block L Rik Dom
Kakegoe 3 Cuica Mute Rik Tak 2
Kotsuzumi 4 Cuica Open Rik Finger 1
Kakegoe 2 Triangle Mute Rik Tak 1
Kotsuzumi 3 Triangle Open Rik Finger 2 Triangle Mute
Kakegoe 1 Shaker Rik BrassTremolo* Triangle Open
Kotsuzumi 2 Jingle Bells Rik Sak
Kotsuzumi 1 Bell Tree Dog* Machine Gun* Rik Tik Wind Chime
Horse* Laser Gun*
Bird Tweet* Explosion*
Firework*
Ghost*
Maou*
C-1
D-1
E-1
F-1
G-1
A-1
B-1
C
-1
D
-1
F
-1
G
-1
A
-1
C0
D0
E0
F0
G0
A0
B0
C
0
D
0
F
0
G
0
A
0
C1
D1
E1
F1
G1
A1
B1
C
1
D
1
F
1
G
1
A
1
C2
D2
E2
F2
G2
A2
B2
C
2
D
2
F
2
G
2
A
2
C3
D3
E3
F3
G3
A3
B3
C
3
D
3
F
3
G
3
A
3
C4
D4
E4
F4
G4
A4
B4
C
4
D
4
F
4
G
4
A
4
C5
D5
E5
F5
G5
C
5
D
5
F
5
Upper KeyboardLower Keyboard
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
179
9
Rhythm Program
Rhythm Program Voice List
PIANO
1 Live!GrandPiano
BrightPiano
Harpsichord
GrandHarpsi
HonkyTonk
Live!WarmGrand
BalladStack
MIDIGrand
OctavePiano1
OctavePiano2
CP80
Cool!GalaxyEP
StageEP
PolarisEP
JazzChorus
HyperTines
2 Cool!E.Piano
PhaseEP
NewTines
FunkEP
DXModern
SmoothTine
ChorusBell
VintageEP
VenusEP
ModernEP
TremoloEP
SuperDX
SuitcaseEP
StereoClavi.
PhaseClavi.
Clavi.
3WahClavi.
XG GrandPiano
XG GrndPianoKSP
XG MellowGrPno
XG PianoStrings
XG Dream
XG BrightPiano
XG BritePnoKSP
XG El.GrandPiano
XG El.GrPnoKSP
XG DetunedCP80
XG LayeredCP1
XG LayeredCP2
XG Honkytonk
XG HonkytonkKSP
XG El.Piano1
4 XG El.Piano1KSP
XG MellowEP1
XG ChorusEP1
XG HardEl.Piano
XG VXfadeEl.P1
XG 60’sEl.Piano1
XG El.Piano2
XG El.Piano2KSP
XG ChorusEP2
XG DXEPHard
XG DXLegend
XG DXPhaseEP
XG DX+AnalogEP
XG DXKotoEP
XG VXfadeEl.P2
XG Harpsichord
5 XG Harpsi.KSP
XG Harpsichord2
XG Harpsichord3
XG Clavi.
XG Clavi.KSP
XG Clavi.Wah
XG PulseClavi.
XG PierceClavi.
CHROMATIC PERC.
1Vibraphone
JazzVibes
Suspense
Marimba
Xylophone
SteelDrums
Celesta
Glockenspiel
MusicBox
TubularBell
Kalimba
Dulcimer
Timpani
XG Celesta
XG Glockenspiel
XG MusicBox
2 XG Orgel
XG Vibraphone
XG VibesKSP
XG HardVibes
XG Marimba
XG MarimbaKSP
XG SineMarimba
XG Balimba
XG LogDrums
XG Xylophone
XG TubularBells
XG ChurchBells
XG Carillon
XG Dulcimer
XG Dulcimer2
XG Cimbalom
3 XG Santur
ORGAN
1 Cool!Organ
Cool!JazzOrgan
Cool!RotorOrgan
Cool!FullRocker
StadiumOrgan
RotaryDrive
PercOrgan
RockOrgan1
DanceOrgan
GospelOrg
DrawbarOrgan1
JazzOrgan1
RockOrgan2
PurpleOrgan
ElectricOrgan
DrawbarOrgan2
2 JazzOrgan2
RockOrgan3
ClickOrgan
MellowDraw
BrightDraw
60’sOrgan
JazzOrgan3
Tibia 16+4
TibiaFull
Tibia 8+4
Tibia 8
Kinura 8
Vox 8
Thtr.Trp. 8
Thtr.Trp. 16+8
Tibia+Vox
3Trp.+Kinura
ChapelOrgan1
ChapelOrgan2
ChapelOrgan3
PipeOrgan
ReedOrgan
Musette
TuttiAccrd
SmallAccrd
Accordion
TangoAccrd
Steirisch
Bandoneon
SoftAccordion
Sweet!Harmonica
ModernHarp
4 BluesHarp
XG DrawbarOrgan
XG DetunedDrawOrg
XG 60’sDrawOrg1
XG 60’sDrawOrg2
XG 70’sDrawOrg1
XG DrawbarOrgan2
XG 60’sDrawOrg3
XG EvenBarOrg
XG 16+2’2_3Org
XG OrganBass
XG 70’sDrawOrg2
XG CheezyOrgan
XG DrawbarOrgan3
XG Perc.Organ
XG 70’sPercOrg1
5 XG Det.Perc.Org
XG LightOrgan
XG Perc.Organ2
XG RockOrgan
XG RotaryOrgan
XG SlowRotary
XG FastRotary
XG ChurchOrgan
XG ChurchOrgan3
XG ChurchOrgan2
XG NotreDame
XG OrganFlute
XG Trem.OrganFl
XG ReedOrgan
XG PuffOrgan
XG Accordion
6 XG AccordIt
XG Harmonica
XG Harmonica2
XG TangoAccord
XG TangoAccord2
GUITAR
1 Live!NylonGuitar
Cool!JazzGuitar
Cool!El.Guitar
Live!SteelGuitar
Live!DynoSteel1
Sweet!Mandolin
Cool!FunkGuitar
Cool!Stratsphere
Cool!VintageLead
Cool!PowerLead
Cool!BluesGuitar
RockGuitar
VintageStrum
Live!12StrGuitar
Live!DynoSteel2
Cool!CleanGuitar
2VodooLead
PowerChord
CampfireGuitar
SolidGuitar
VintageAmp
AlohaGuitar
CrunchGuitar
SmoothLead
60’sClean
Live!ClassicGtr
Cool!JazzSoloGtr
VintageOpen
FolkGuitar
SolidChord
VintageMute
PedalSteel
3 LeadGuitar
ChorusGuitar
VintageTrem
OctaveGuitar
DeepChorus
TremoloGuitar
HeavyStack
BrightClean
WahGuitar
DXJazzGuitar
Distortion
El.12StrGuitar
FeedbackGuitar
18StringGuitar
MutedGuitar
FunkGuitar
4 Overdrive
Mega SteelGuitar
Mega HiStrGuitar
Mega 12StrGuitar
Mega CleanGuitar
Mega Overdrive
Mega Distortion
XG NylonGuitar
XG NylonGuitar2
XG NylonGuitar3
XG Vel.GtrHarmo
XG Ukulele
XG SteelGuitar
XG SteelGuitar2
XG 12StrGuitar
XG Nylon&Steel
5 XG Steel&Body
XG Mandolin
XG JazzGuitar
XG MellowGuitar
XG JazzAmp
XG CleanGuitar
XG ChorusGuitar
XG MutedGuitar
XG FunkGuitar1
XG MuteSteelGtr
XG FunkGuitar2
XG JazzMan
XG Overdriven
XG GuitarPinch
XG Distortion
XG FeedbackGtr
6 XG FeedbackGtr2
XG GtrHarmonics
XG GtrFeedback
XG GtrHarmonics2
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
180
9
Rhythm Program
BASS
1 Cool!FingerBass
AcousticBass
Cool!DynoPick
Cool!Fretless
SlapBass
SubBass
HardBass
ResoBass
HouseBass
BigDroneBass
RockBass
SuperFretles
PickBass
FusionBass
Bass&Cymbal
AnalogBass
2 DXFunkBass
DrySynBass
80’sSynBass
HiQBass
FunkBass
MellowFinger
ClickBass
PunchyBass
TBBass
Mega Aco.Bass
Mega FingerBass
Mega PickBass
Mega Fretless
XG AcousticBass
XG JazzRhythm
XG VXUprghtBass
3 XG FingerBass
XG FingerDark
XG FlangeBass
XG Bass&DistEG
XG FingerSlap
XG FingerBass2
XG ModulatedBass
XG PickBass
XG MutePickBass
XG FretlessBass
XG FretlessBass2
XG FretlessBass3
XG FretlessBass4
XG Syn.Fretless
XG SmoothFretless
XG SlapBass1
4 XG ResonantSlap
XG PunchThumb
XG SlapBass2
XG Vel.SwitchSlap
XG SynthBass1
XG SynBass1Dark
XG FastResoBass
XG AcidBass
XG Clavi.Bass
XG TechnoBass
XG Orbiter
XG SquareBass
XG RubberBass
XG Hammer
XG SynthBass2
XG MellowSyBass
5 XG SequencedBass
XG ClickSynBass
XG SynBass2Dark
XG SmoothSyBass
XG ModulrSyBass
XG DXBass
XG XWireBass
STRINGS
1 Sweet!Violin
Viola
Cello
Contrabass
Harp
Hackbrett
Fiddle
Banjo
Sitar
Koto
Shamisen
SoloViolin
TremoloStrings
PizzicatoStrings
XG Violin
XG SlwAtkViolin
2 XG Viola
XG Cello
XG Contrabass
XG Trem.Strings
XG SlwAtTremStr
XG SuspenseStr
XG PizzicatoStr
XG OrchestralHarp
XG YangChin
ENSEMBLE
1 Live!Strings
Live!Allegro
Live!Orchestra
Symphon.Str
OberStrings
OrchestraHorns
OrchestraFlute
OrchestraOboe
Tutti
Strings
Orch.Strings
StringsQuartet
ConcertStrings
AnalogStrings
ChamberStrings
BowStrings
2 SlowStrings
MarcatoStrings
SynStrings1
SynStrings2
OrchestraHit
Live!Gospel
Live!Humm
HahChoir
SweetHeaven
DreamHeaven
Live!Mmh
GothicVox
Sunbeam
BellHeaven
PanHeaven
ProHeaven
3 Choir
AirChoir
VoxHumana
Voices
UuhChoir
XG Timpani
XG Strings1
XG StereoStrings
XG SlwAtkStrings
XG ArcoStrings
XG 60’sStrings
XG Orchestra
XG Orchestra2
XG TremOrchestra
XG Vel.Strings
XG Strings2
4 XG S.SlowStrings
XG LegatoStrings
XG WarmStrings
XG Kingdom
XG 70’sStrings
XG Strings3
XG SynStrings1
XG ResoStrings
XG SynStrings4
XG SynStrings5
XG SynStrings2
XG ChoirAahs
XG StereoChoir
XG ChoirAahs2
XG MellowChoir
XG ChoirStrings
5 XG VoiceOohs
XG SynthVoice
XG SynthVoice2
XG Choral
XG AnalogVoice
XG OrchestraHit
XG OrchestraHit2
XG Impact
BRASS
1 Sweet!Trumpet
Sweet!Trombone
Sweet!MutedTrp.
Sweet!FlugelHorn
JazzTrumpet
SoloTrumpet
Trombone
SoloTrombone
SoftTrombone
MellowTrombone
MutedTrombone
BaritonHorn
BaritonHit
AlpBass
FlugelHorn
Tuba
2 Live!HyperBrass
Live!PopBrass
Live!OctaveBrass
Live!FrenchHorns
Live!Symph.Horns
BrassCombo
BrassSection
BreathBrass
HybridCompBrass
NaturalBrass
Sforzando
BigBrass
BallroomBrass
BrightBrass
MellowBrass
HybriHorn
3 Hybripad
SoftVel.Brass
80’sBrass
SoftBrass
FullHorns
SmoothTrombone
HighBrass
OberBrass
TrumpetEns
MellowHorns
BigBandBrass
PopBrass
BrassHit
AnalogBrass
TromboneSection
SmallBrass
4 SoftAnalog
FunkyAnalog
TechnoBrass
SynthBrass
OberHorns
FatSynBrass
XG Trumpet
XG Trumpet2
XG BriteTrumpet
XG WarmTrumpet
XG Trombone
XG Trombone2
XG Tuba
XG Tuba2
XG MutedTrumpet
XG FrenchHorn
5 XG FrenchHornSolo
XG FrenchHorn2
XG HornOrchestra
XG BrassSection
XG Tp&TbSection
XG BrassSection2
XG HighBrass
XG MellowBrass
XG SynthBrass1
XG QuackBrass
XG ResoSynBrass
XG PolyBrass
XG SynthBrass3
XG JumpBrass
XG AnaVel.Brass1
XG AnalogBrass1
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
181
9
Rhythm Program
6 XG SynthBrass2
XG SoftBrass
XG SynthBrass4
XG ChoirBrass
XG AnaVel.Brass2
XG AnalogBrass2
REED
1 Sweet!TenorSax
Sweet!AltoSax
Sweet!SopranoSax
GrowlSax
BaritoneSax
Live!SaxSection
Saxappeal
MoonLight
BalladBrass
SaxyMood
SopranoSax
TenorSax
AltoSax
SaxStack
Live!SaxSect.Sft
Live!SaxSect.Hrd
2WoodwindEns
Sweet!Clarinet
Sweet!Oboe
EnglishHorn
Bassoon
Clarinet
Oboe
XG SopranoSax
XG AltoSax
XG SaxSection
XG HyperAltoSax
XG TenorSax
XG BreathyTenor
XG SoftTenorSax
XG TenorSax2
XG BaritoneSax
3 XG Oboe
XG EnglishHorn
XG Bassoon
XG Clarinet
PIPE
1 Sweet!Flute
Sweet!PanFlute
FluteEnsemble
Flute
PanFlute
ClassicalFlute
Piccolo
EthnicFlute
Shakuhachi
Whistle
Recorder
Ocarina
XG Piccolo
XG Flute
XG Recorder
XG PanFlute
2 XG BlownBottle
XG Shakuhachi
XG Whistle
XG Ocarina
SYNTH LEAD
1 Oxygen
Matrix
WireLead
HipLead
HopLead
DanceHook
TechLead
Tekkline
SoftMini
OctaveHook
TranceLead
FireWire
Analogon
Blaster
Skyline
SquareLead
2 SawtoothLead
PopLead
ProLead
BrightMini
TinyLead
FunkyLead
Paraglide
Robolead
Fargo
Portatone
BigLead
Warp
Adrenaline
Stardust
AeroLead
MiniLead
3 Impact
SunBell
UnderHeim
HiBias
Vinylead
PanLead
Stringbells
CrystalEyes
Padbells
MelodyMaker
BigTune
TrumpetSaw
AttackSaw
PercSquare
XG SquareLead
XG SquareLead2
4 XG LMSquare
XG Hollow
XG Shroud
XG Mellow
XG SoloSine
XG SineLead
XG SawtoothLead
XG SawtoothLead2
XG ThickSaw
XG DynamicSaw
XG DigitalSaw
XG BigLead
XG HeavySynth
XG WaspySynth
XG PulseSaw
XG Dr.Lead
5 XG VelocityLead
XG Seq.Analog
XG CalliopeLead
XG PurePad
XG ChiffLead
XG Rubby
XG CharangLead
XG DistortedLead
XG WireLead
XG VoiceLead
XG SynthAahs
XG VoxLead
XG FifthsLead
XG BigFive
XG Bass&Lead
XG Big&Low
6 XG Fat&Perky
XG SoftWhirl
SYNTH PAD
1 Insomnia
Skydiver
Bubblespace
HipaStringPad
MellowPad
Mediterrain
NeoWarmPad
CyberPad
OberSweep
Messenger
Wave2001
FarEast
Disclosure
BrightOber
DarkPad
Mystery
2 Sirius
S&HGroove
Velo.Ashrami
EveningStars
AngelVibes
Atmosphere
XenonPad
Equinox
GlassPad
Fantasia
DX Pad
Symbiont
Stargate
Area51
DarkMoon
Ionosphere
3GoldenAge
Solaris
TimeTravel
Millennium
Dunes
XG NewAgePad
XG Fantasy
XG WarmPad
XG ThickPad
XG SoftPad
XG SinePad
XG HornPad
XG RotaryStrings
XG PolySynthPad
XG PolyPad80
XG ClickPad
4 XG AnalogPad
XG SquarePad
XG ChoirPad
XG Heaven
XG Itopia
XG CCPad
XG BowedPad
XG Glacier
XG GlassPad
XG MetallicPad
XG TinePad
XG PanPad
XG HaloPad
XG SweepPad
XG Shwimmer
XG Converge
5 XG PolarPad
XG Celestial
SYNTH EFFECTS
1 XG Rain
XG Clavi.Pad
XG HarmoRain
XG AfricanWind
XG Carib
XG SoundTrack
XG Prologue
XG Ancestral
XG Crystal
XG SynthDr.Comp
XG Popcorn
XG TinyBells
XG RoundGlocken
XG GlockenChime
XG ClearBells
XG ChorusBells
2 XG SynthMallet
XG SoftCrystal
XG LoudGlocken
XG ChristmasBel
XG VibeBells
XG DigitalBells
XG AirBells
XG BellHarp
XG Gamelimba
XG Atmosphere
XG WarmAtmos.
XG HollowRelease
XG NylonEl.Piano
XG NylonHarp
XG HarpVox
XG Atmos.Pad
3 XG Planet
XG Brightness
XG FantasyBells
XG Smokey
XG Goblins
XG GoblinsSynth
XG Creeper
XG RingPad
XG Ritual
XG ToHeaven
XG Night
XG Glisten
XG BellChoir
XG Echoes
XG Echoes2
XG EchoPan
4 XG EchoBells
XG BigPan
XG SynthPiano
XG Creation
XG StarDust
XG Reso&Panning
XG Sci-Fi
XG Starz
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
182
9
Rhythm Program
ETHNIC
1 Bagpipe
XG Sitar
XG DetunedSitar
XG Sitar2
XG Tambra
XG Tamboura
XG Banjo
XG MutedBanjo
XG Rabab
XG Gopichant
XG Oud
XG Shamisen
XG Koto
XG Taisho-kin
XG Kanoon
XG Kalimba
2 XG Bagpipe
XG Fiddle
XG Shanai
XG Shanai2
XG Pungi
XG Hichiriki
XG TinkleBell
XG Bonang
XG Altair
XG GamelanGongs
XG StereoGamelan
XG RamaCymbal
XG AsianBells
PERCUSSION
1 XG Agogo
XG SteelDrums
XG GlassPerc.
XG ThaiBells
XG Woodblock
XG Castanets
XG TaikoDrum
XG GranCassa
XG MelodicTom
XG MelodicTom2
XG RealTom
XG RockTom
XG SynthDrum
XG AnalogTom
XG ElectroPerc.
XG Rev.Cymbal
SOUND EFFECTS
1 XG GtrFretNoise
XG BreathNoise
XG Seashore
XG BirdTweet
XG TelephoneRing
XG Helicopter
XG Applause
XG Gunshot
XG CuttingNoise
XG CuttingNoise2
XG StringSlap
XG Fl.KeyClick
XG Shower
XG Thunder
XG Wind
XG Stream
2 XG Bubble
XG Feed
XG Dog
XG Horse
XG BirdTweet2
XG Ghost
XG Maou
XG PhoneCall
XG DoorSqueak
XG DoorSlam
XG ScratchCut
XG ScratchSplit
XG WindChime
XG TelphoneRing2
XG CarEngineIgn
XG CarTiresSqel
3 XG CarPassing
XG CarCrash
XG Siren
XG Train
XG JetPlane
XG Starship
XG Burst
XG RollrCoaster
XG Submarine
XG Laugh
XG Scream
XG Punch
XG Heartbeat
XG FootSteps
XG MachineGun
XG LaserGun
4 XG Explosion
XG Firework
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
183
9
Rhythm Program
With the Rhythm Sequence Program function, you can string together any of the
DDK-7’s existing rhythms and the rhythms of your own creation together to make
complete rhythm compositions.
You can save four rhythm compositions (each can contain up to 140 bars) to the
Sequence buttons on the panel for future recall. Two or more rhythm compositions can
be played back in succession, letting you divide a song into parts and play back the
rhythm data as desired. Here are a couple of example applications:
• When you want to play more than two songs in a medley, save the rhythm
composition for each song to a separate sequence button. You can then recall each
desired song by simply pressing the corresponding sequence button to which the
song is saved.
• When you want to practice a song in separate sections (for example, separately
practicing the verse, chorus and bridge), divide the song into the relevant parts.
For example, save the intro part to the [SEQ. 1] button, the main chorus part to the
[SEQ. 2] button, the ending to the [SEQ. 3] button, and so on. Then, recall the
desired part simply by pressing the appropriate sequence button. You can also play
through a song by recalling all the parts in sequence.
Selecting a Sequence
There are two ways to program a rhythm sequence: copying an existing sequence that is
similar to the sequence you want to create, or creating your own sequence from scratch.
Press the [PROGRAM] button in the DISPLAY SELECT section.
Any rhythm currently playing will automatically be stopped when you call up
the Rhythm Sequence Program function.
3
Rhythm Sequence Program
1
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
184
9
Rhythm Program
Press one of the Sequence buttons ([SEQ. 1] – [SEQ. 4]) in the
display to select the rhythm sequence number you want to edit.
The lamp of the selected numbered sequence button in the Rhythm section
lights, and the Sequence Display appears.
Instead of pressing the Sequence button on the Program display,
you can press one of the sequence buttons on the Sequence
display, or you can press the Sequence buttons in the Rhythm
section on the panel to select the sequence number.
This selects the Sequence number, to which a rhythm composition can be saved.
If you want to copy a rhythm composition from another Sequence number, go
on to the next step.
Press the Sequence button ([SEQ. 1] – [SEQ. 4]) of the copy
source on the right half in the display.
A message appears, prompting confirmation of the operation.
Press [COPY] to execute the operation, or select [CANCEL] to
abort the operation.
2
3
4
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
185
9
Rhythm Program
Programming a Sequence
Press the [RHYTHM] button at the top right of the display to call
up the RHYTHM Page.
Press the [CATEGORY] button to call up the Rhythm Category
Select pop-up menu, then select the Rhythm category
corresponding to the rhythm you want to enter to the sequence.
If you press User category button, you can select a rhythm of
your own creation (User rhythm).
The rhythm menu of the selected rhythm category is displayed.
Select the desired rhythm from the displayed rhythm menu.
Select a rhythm section (Main A – D, Fill in A – D, Intro 1 – 3,
Ending 1 – 3, or Break) by pressing one of the rhythm control
buttons on the panel.
The selected rhythm and section appears at the top of the display.
Press the [SET] button in the display.
One bar of the selected rhythm is entered and its name is displayed as a box in
the rhythm row on the display. When the rhythm is entered, the cursor (colored
orange) will automatically move to one step right. A maximum of 140 bars can
be entered to a single sequence. When you select an ending pattern and press the
[SET] button, an entire ending pattern (more than one bar) is entered.
You cannot enter a rhythm after an ending pattern.
1
2
3
4
NOTE
When entering an Intro
section, check the number of
bars at the top of the display.
5
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
186
9
Rhythm Program
Repeat steps #2 through #5 above to enter the rhythm and create
your own rhythm composition.
Turning the power off before quitting or closing the Rhythm Sequence Program erases
any sequences you have made. Before turning the power off, quit the Rhythm Sequence
Program (page 190).
Auditioning a Sequence
You can play a sequence you are editing at any time to audition the changes.
Move the cursor to the desired position for playback.
Move the cursor by using the Data Control dial, or the POSITION buttons on
the display.
Press the rhythm [START] button on the panel.
The Sequence plays back. Pressing the [START] button again stops playback.
Editing an Existing Rhythm Sequence
You can insert a new rhythm between the rhythms you have already entered, or delete
the entered rhythm from the sequence.
6
1
DATA CONTROL
2
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
187
9
Rhythm Program
1 POSITION
These are cursor controls for moving the cursor (colored orange) along the rhythm row
in the display.
Moves the cursor to the first position.
Moves the cursor one step to the left.
Moves the cursor one step to the right.
Moves the cursor five steps to the right.
2 DATA
These are data controls for entering rhythms and deleting existing rhythms in the
rhythm row.
SET
For initially entering a rhythm to an empty position in the rhythm row, or for
replacing a pattern at the cursor position. Pressing the [SET] button enters the
rhythm selected from the rhythm menu to the cursor position.
This operation is not available between measures of an ending pattern.
INSERT
For inserting a rhythm before the current cursor position. The new rhythm is
entered just before the cursor position and all other rhythms to the right of the
cursor are moved to accommodate the new number. This operation is not
available between measures of an ending pattern.
Additional rhythms cannot be entered beyond the Rhythm sequence function’s
capacity of 140. If the Insert operation results in the rhythm number going over
the capacity, a “Data Full” message appears and the operation cannot be
executed.
DELETE
For deleting a rhythm at the current cursor position. When the ending pattern is
selected, pressing the [DELETE] button deletes the entire ending pattern (more
than one bar).
CLEAR
For erasing all patterns entered to the selected sequence.
After selecting [CLEAR], a message appears prompting confirmation of the
operation.
Select [CLEAR] to clear the currently selected rhythm sequence, or select
[CANCEL] to abort the operation and return to the previous display.
12
When you insert an ending
pattern into the editing
sequence, any existing
rhythm data that follows an
Ending pattern is
automatically deleted.
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
188
9
Rhythm Program
Programming a Registration Sequence
The Registration Sequence feature allows you to have desired Registrations
automatically called up in sequence, when playing a Rhythm Sequence. It lets you
program the timing (bar/beat/clock) at which the Registration is changed. You can also
program the Next Regist function in Registration Sequence.
A Registration Sequence is saved as a part of the corresponding Rhythm Sequence.
With this feature, you can have the sounds of the instrument change as desired
automatically to match the Rhythm Sequence playback.
Press the [REGIST] button at the top right in the display to call up
the Registration Sequence display.
The Registration Sequence is programmed from this display. The entered
Registration number is shown along the Registration row in the middle of the
display.
Press the desired numbered button in the Registration Memory
section.
Using the buttons in the display or the Data Control dial,
set the Bar/Beat/Clock position at which you want to change the
Registration (1 beat = 96 Clock).
When using the Data Control dial, first press the number you wish to change in
the display, then turn the dial.
NOTE
If you are loading a
Registration while a rhythm is
playing, the sequence data
and User rhythms in the
Registration data cannot be
loaded.
1
2
13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 D.
3
DATA CONTROL
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
189
9
Rhythm Program
Press the DATA [SET] button in the display.
The Registration number appears in the display (in the timing order), indicating
that the Registration is entered. Up to 140 Registrations can be entered.
If some Registration numbers are entered to the same Bar/Beat/Clock, the last
entered one takes priority.
Repeat steps #2 through #4 above to set the Registration
Sequence.
Entering Next Regist:
When you program the Next Regist function in Registration Sequence, the next
registration data in current song can be loaded automatically just by playing the
rhythm sequence.
Using the buttons in the display or the Data Control
dial, set the Bar/Beat/Clock position at which you want to enter
the Next Regist (1 beat = 96 clock).
Press the NEXT REGIST [INSERT] button in the display.
The Next Regist mark appears at the timing point you set in step #1,
indicating that the Next Regist is entered.
Editing an Existing Registration Sequence
You can move or delete the entered Registration Sequence (Registration number or
Next Regist data) from the sequence.
To move an entry:
Using the POSITION buttons, move the cursor and select the data
(Registration number or Next Regist) you want to move.
Change the position by pressing the Bar/Beat/Clock buttons in
the display.
Next Regist Loading Time
• Loading Next Regist may take a few seconds (the time may differ depending on
the size of the data to be loaded).
• When using a floppy disk instead of USB flash memory, the loading time will be
longer than when using USB flash memory.
•Next Registration data can be loaded by two ways: using optional foot pedal/right
footswitch and programming Next Regist in the Registration Sequence. Loading
time is the same regardless of which way you load the Next Registration data.
4
5
1
2
1
2
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
190
9
Rhythm Program
To move the Registration number timing, press the DATA [SET]
button. To move the Next Regist timing, press the NEXT REGIST
[SET] button.
The position of the Registration number or Next Regist is changed and
displayed in the proper order.
To erase an entry:
Using the POSITION buttons, move the cursor and select the data
(Registration number or Next Regist) you want to delete.
Press the [DELETE] button to delete the data.
Quitting the Rhythm Sequence Program
You can quit the Rhythm Sequence Program from any of its display pages. When you
quit, the sequence you have made will be automatically saved.
To quit the Rhythm Sequence Program:
Press the [PROGRAM] button on the panel.
The Voice Display appears, indicating that the Rhythm Sequence Program is closed.
When quitting the Rhythm Sequence Program, the square at the top left of
the display turns light blue for a few seconds, indicating that the sequence is
currently being saved. Do not turn the power off while the sequence is being
saved.
3
1
2
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
191
9
Rhythm Program
Playing Rhythm Sequences
To play any of the rhythm sequences you have created:
Press the appropriate Sequence button ([SEQ. 1] – [SEQ. 4]) on
the panel.
The SEQ button’s lamp lights.
Press the rhythm [START] button.
The rhythm in the selected sequence starts playback.
The Registration Memory also changes with the Rhythm Sequence playback,
if the sequence includes a Registration Sequence.
Rhythm playback automatically stops when the sequence reaches its end.
If you’ve stopped rhythm playback in the middle of the sequence, press the
[START] button again to resume playback.
Playing All Sequences in Order
You can also have up to all four rhythm sequences automatically play in order, one after
another.
Press the desired Sequence buttons, making sure that all their
LEDs are lit.
Press the rhythm [START] button.
The rhythm sequences start from the lowest number and play in order
automatically to the highest number. (For example, if you press Sequence
buttons 4, 2 and 1 in that order, the sequences will be played back not in the
order you pressed them, but in their numeric order: 1, 2, then 4.) This function
effectively allows you to make a long rhythm sequence that exceeds the 140-
pattern memory limit of a single sequence.
Pressing one of the SEQ. buttons while a Rhythm Sequence is playing back
automatically cancels the pressed sequence, and its LED turns off. You cannot
cancel a sequence that is currently playing. The SEQ. lamp goes out when the
sequence assigned to it is finished playing.
1
2
1
2
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
192
9
Rhythm Program
To start a sequence using the Left Footswitch:
You can start or stop the Rhythm Sequence playback using the left footswitch.
To use the left footswitch, pedal unit must be connected to the DDK-7.
Press the desired Sequence buttons, making sure that all their
LEDs are lit.
Press the [FOOT SWITCH] button on the panel to call up the
Footswitch display, LEFT Page.
Set the control mode of the Footswitch to RHYTHM STOP.
(See page 193 for information about the Footswitch settings.)
Press the Left Footswitch with your right foot to turn the
sequence on.
Pressing the Left Footswitch again in the middle of the sequence playback
cancels the Rhythm Sequence.
When you are playing a Rhythm Sequence that is made up of several sequences
(SEQ. buttons), pressing the Left footswitch turns off the currently playing
Rhythm Sequence, and pressing it again starts the next sequence.
You can also start the Rhythm Sequence playback using the optional foot pedal.
You can save your own rhythm patterns (created in the Rhythm Pattern Program) and
Rhythm Sequence (created in the Rhythm Sequence Program) to external media, such
as USB flash memory. Refer to the section “Saving Registrations as Registration Data
(File)” on page 116 for instructions.
When loading your original Rhythm data from external media back to the DDK-7, be
sure to stop the rhythm if it is playing. Loading cannot be executed when a rhythm is
running.
Reference Page
Connecting a pedal unit
(page 229)
Footswitches (page 193)
1
2
3
4
Reference Page
Connecting a foot pedal
(page 229)
Foot pedal (page 196)
4
Saving Rhythm Pattern and Rhythm
Sequence Data to external media
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
193
10
Controllers
Controllers
These leg- and foot-operated controls allow you to execute various performance functions
and switch the effect on/off, without taking your hands from the keyboard. In order to use
these controllers, you’ll need to connect the DDKU-P7 Pedal Unit or an optional FC4/5/7/9
Foot Pedal to the DDK-7.
To use the Footswitches, connect the Pedal Unit DDKU-P7 to the DDK-7.
The Pedal Unit DDKU-P7 has two Footswitches on the main expression pedal. The
Right Footswitch is used for the Registration Shift function. The Left Footswitch can
be set to control one of the following functions: Rhythm, Glide, and Rotary speaker.
See page 94 for the details of the Registration Shift function or Right Footswitch.
The explanation on the Left Footswitch is given here.
Press the [FOOT SWITCH] button.
Contents
1 Footswitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
• Controlling the Rhythm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
• Controlling Glide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
• Controlling Rotary Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
2 Foot Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
• Controlling Sustain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
• Controlling Lead Slide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
• Controlling Melody On Chord. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
• Controlling the Solo Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
• Controlling the Rhythm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
• Controlling Glide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
• Controlling Rotary Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
• Controlling Registration Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
• Controlling Expression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
3 Expression Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
• Controlling Pitch Bend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
• Controlling the Rhythm Tempo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
1
Footswitches
Reference Page
Connecting a pedal unit
(page 229)
Right Footswitch
Left Footswitch
Expression Pedal
1
10
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
194
10
Controllers
Press the [LEFT] button at the top right of the display to call up
the LEFT Page.
In this display, you can assign the control function to the Left Footswitch: Rhythm,
Glide, and Rotary Speaker.
If you choose OFF here, the Left Footswitch will not control any function.
Controlling the Rhythm
You can control the rhythm start/stop or switch the rhythm sections by using the Left
Footswitch.
1 STOP
Switches the rhythm on/off whenever you press the Footswitch.
2 BREAK
When you press the Footswitch, the Break section turns on. This function corresponds
to the [BREAK] button on the panel.
3 MAIN A – MAIN D
These functions correspond to the MAIN/FILL IN [A] – [D] buttons on the panel.
For example, when the [MAIN A] button is selected in this display and you press the
Footswitch, the rhythm section is switched to Main A or Fill In A.
2
FOOTSWITCH Display
1 2
3
4 5
Reference Page
Rhythm Structure (page 62)
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
195
10
Controllers
4 INTRO 1 – INTRO 3
These functions correspond to the INTRO [1] – [3] buttons on the panel. For
example, when the INTRO [1] button is selected in this display and you press the
Footswitch, the rhythm section is switched to Intro 1.
5 ENDING 1 – ENDING 3
These functions correspond to the ENDING [1] – [3] buttons on the panel. For
example, when the ENDING [1] button is selected in this display and you press the
Footswitch, the rhythm section is switched to Ending 1. After the ending pattern is
played, the rhythm stops.
You can also control the rhythm start/stop or switch the rhythm sections by using an
optional Foot Pedal.
Controlling Glide
You can control the Glide effect by using the Left Footswitch.
Pressing the Footswitch immediately lowers the pitch of the selected Voice or Voices by
a half-step and releasing it slowly returns the pitch to the original.
1 Voice Selections (UPPER1/UPPER2/LEAD1/LEAD2/LOWER1/
LOWER2)
Select the desired Voice section(s) to which the Glide function is to be applied.
2 TIME
Determines the speed of the Glide function, or in other words, how gradually the pitch
returns when the Footswitch is released. Higher values make the speed slower.
Range: 1 – 5
You can also control the Glide effect by using an optional Foot Pedal.
Reference Page
Foot pedal (page 196)
1 2
Reference Page
Foot pedal (page 196)
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
196
10
Controllers
Controlling Rotary Speaker
You can control the Rotary Speaker effect (on/off) by using the Left Footswitch.
When the [Rotary Speaker] button is selected in this display and you press the
Footswitch, the Rotary Speaker effect is switched on or off. This function corresponds
to the [ROTARY SP SPEED] button on the panel. To use this function, you’ll need to
make the appropriate Rotary Speaker settings for each Voice section or Organ Flute
Voice. For details, see page 50.
You can also control the Rotary Speaker effect (on/off) by using an optional Foot
Pedal.
To use the Foot Pedal, you will need to connect an optional Foot Pedal (FC4/FC5/
FC7/FC9) to the DDK-7. The Foot Pedal then can be used to turn one of the
following functions on and off. Up to two Foot Pedals can be connected to the DDK-
7. You can assign one function for each Foot Pedal in the FOOT PEDAL Page of the
Utility display. Note that Some functions will need to be turned on or its parameters set
beforehand.
Assignable Functions
To control Expression, use the FC7/FC9. To control other functions, use the FC4/
FC5.
Reference Page
Rotary Speaker (page 50)
Reference Page
Foot pedal (page 196)
2
Foot Pedal
Sustain Lead Slide
Melody On Chord Solo
Rhythm Glide
Rotary Speaker Registration Shift
Expression
FC4 FC7
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
197
10
Controllers
Assigning functions to a Foot Pedal:
Press the [UTILITY] button to call up the Utility display.
Press the [F.PEDAL] button at the top right of the display to call
up the Foot Pedal Page.
In this display, you can assign the control function to the Foot Pedal.
Select the control function to be assigned to the Foot Pedal.
Select the desired function button from the left side of the display if you've
connected the Foot Pedal to the FOOT PEDAL (1 VOLUME) terminal; select
from the right side if you've connected the Foot Pedal to the FOOT PEDAL (2
SUSTAIN) terminal.
The polarity of the Foot Pedal will automatically be selected depending on the selected
function; however, you can select the polarity manually.
The effect is constantly applied as long as the Foot Pedal is
pressed.
Releasing the Foot Pedal turns the effect off.
1
2
3
4
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
198
10
Controllers
Controlling Sustain
You can control the on/off status of Sustain for each Voice Section by using the Foot
Pedal. Sustain for the Pedalboard cannot be controlled.
Press the [SUSTAIN] button to call up the Sustain display, then
turn the desired Voice section on from the display.
Select [SUSTAIN] in the FOOT PEDAL Page of the UTILITY
display.
The Sustain function is now assigned to the Foot Pedal.
To apply sustain, press the Foot Pedal.
Sustain is constantly applied as long as the Foot Pedal is pressed. Releasing the
Foot Pedal turns sustain off.
Reference Page
Sustain (page 49)
1
2
3
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
199
10
Controllers
Controlling Lead Slide
Call up the Voice Condition display Page 2 of the Lead Voice
section to which you want to apply the Lead Slide effect.
Press the [ON] button of the Slide section on the display.
Select [SLIDE] in the FOOT PEDAL Page of the Utility display.
The Slide effect function is now assigned to the Foot Pedal.
Press the Foot Pedal when you want to apply the Slide effect.
The Slide effect is applied as long as the Foot Pedal is pressed. Releasing the Foot
Pedal, cancels the Lead Slide effect.
Reference Page
Voice Condition Display
(page 41)
1
2
3
4
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
200
10
Controllers
Controlling Melody On Chord
Call up the Page 3 of the Voice Display.
Select one of the modes.
Select [M.O.C.] in the FOOT PEDAL Page of the Utility display.
The M.O.C. function is now assigned to the Foot Pedal.
Press the Foot Pedal when you want to apply the M.O.C. effect.
The M.O.C. effect is applied constantly, as long as the Foot Pedal is pressed.
When you release the Foot Pedal, the M.O.C. effect is cancelled.
1
Reference Page
Voice display (page 18)
VOICE Display [Page 3]
2
Reference Page
Melody On Chord (page 73)
3
4
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
201
10
Controllers
Controlling the Solo Function
You can turn the Solo function on/off by using the Foot Pedal. See page 30 for more
information.
Controlling the Rhythm
You can control the rhythm start/stop or switch the rhythm sections not only by using
the Left Footswitch, but also the Foot Pedal.
Set the rhythm settings in the LEFT Page of the Footswitch
display.
Select [RHYTHM CONTROL] in the FOOT PEDAL Page of the
Utility display.
The Rhythm Control function is now assigned to the Foot Pedal.
Press the Foot Pedal when you want to start/stop the rhythm or
switch the rhythm sections.
Reference Page
Footswitch Display
(page 194)
1
2
3
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
202
10
Controllers
Controlling Glide
You can control the Glide effect not only by using the Left Footswitch, but also the
Foot Pedal.
Set the Glide settings in the LEFT Page of the Footswitch display.
Select [GLIDE] in the FOOT PEDAL Page of the Utility display.
The Glide Effect is now assigned to the Foot Pedal.
Pressing the Foot Pedal immediately lowers the pitch of the
selected Voice or Voices by a half-step and releasing it slowly
returns the pitch to the original.
Controlling Rotary Speaker
You can control the Rotary Speaker effect (on/off) not only by using the Left
Footswitch, but also the Foot Pedal.
Select [ROTARY SPEAKER] in the FOOT PEDAL Page of the
Utility display.
The Rotary Speaker function is now assigned to the Foot Pedal.
Reference Page
Footswitch Display
(page 194)
1
2
3
1
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
203
10
Controllers
Press the Foot Pedal when you want to switch the Rotary
Speaker effect on or off.
Pressing the Foot Pedal has the same effect as pressing the [ROTARY SP
SPEED] button. To use this function, you will need to select the Rotary Speaker
effect for the desired Voice. Refer to page 50.
Controlling Registration Shift
You can control Registration Shift not only by using the right Footswitch, but also the
Foot Pedal.
Set the Registration Shift mode in the Regist Shift display.
Select [REGIST SHIFT] in the FOOT PEDAL Page of the UTILITY
display.
The Registration Shift function is now assigned to the Foot Pedal.
Press the Foot Pedal when you want to change Registrations.
2
Reference Page
Registration Shift (page 94)
1
2
3
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
204
10
Controllers
Controlling Expression
You can control Expression not only by using the Expression Pedal, but also the Foot
Pedal.
Select [EXPRESSION] in the FOOT PEDAL Page of the Utility
display.
The Expression function is now assigned to the Foot Pedal.
Press the Foot Pedal down to control the Expression.
1
2
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
205
10
Controllers
The Pedal Unit DDKU-P7 features a expression pedal and a 2nd expression pedal.
The Expression pedal can be used to control the volume with your foot as you play.
The 2nd Expression Pedal can be used to control the Pitch Bend and the Tempo of the
Rhythm. The explanation on the 2nd Expression Pedal is given here.
Press the [UTILITY] button on the front panel.
The Utility display appears.
Press the [EXP.] button in the upper right of the display to call up
the EXP. (Expression) Page.
In this display, you can assign the Pitch Bend control or Tempo control to the
2nd Expression Pedal. If both Pitch Bend and Rhythm Tempo controls are set to
ON, both functions are applied when you press the 2nd Expression Pedal.
Generally one of them is assigned to the 2nd Expression Pedal.
3
Expression Pedals
Reference Page
Getting Started (page 11)
Reference Page
Connecting a Pedal Unit
(page 229)
Expression Pedal
2nd Expression Pedal
Pedal Unit
1
2
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
206
10
Controllers
Controlling Pitch Bend
1 MODE
Determines the range of the Pitch Bend control. Each step changes the pitch range
by a semitone.
Range: 1 – 12
The setting 2 (NARROW) results in a small amount of pitch variation (over +/- two
semitones); the setting 12 (WIDE) results in a large amount of pitch variation (over
+/- one octave).
2 Voice Sections (PITCH BEND)
Selects the Voice sections to which the Pitch Bend function will be applied, and turns
the function ON. Pitch Bend can be selected independently or together for Upper
Voices 1 and 2, Lead Voice 1 and 2, Pedal Voices 1 and 2.
21
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
207
10
Controllers
Controlling the Rhythm Tempo
1 MODE
Determines the range of tempo change.
Range: 1 – 12
The setting 2 (NARROW) results in a small amount of tempo change (70% – 140%);
the setting 12 (WIDE) results in a large amount of tempo change (50% – 200%).
2 TEMPO
When you want to control the tempo with the 2nd Expression Pedal, set this to “ON.”
When set to on, pressing the pedal down with your toe speeds up the tempo and
pressing it back with your heel slows it down.
21
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
208
11
Transpose and Pitch Controls
Transpose and Pitch Controls
There are two pitch-related controls on the DDK-7: Transpose and Pitch. Transpose allows
you to change the key of the instrument and Pitch lets you finely adjust the tuning.
Transpose and Pitch can be adjusted in the Utility display. (The settings here cannot be
recorded to the Music Data Recorder.)
Press the [UTILITY] button.
The Utility display appears.
Press the [GLOBAL] button at the top right of the display to call
up the GLOBAL Page.
In this display, you can change the Transpose and Pitch settings.
1 TRANSPOSE
Determines the coarse pitch setting of all the Voices, and is adjustable in half-steps
(semitones).
Range: -6 – +6
2 PITCH
Determines the fine pitch setting of all the Voices. Each step changes the pitch by
0.2 Hz. The default Pitch is 440.0 Hz (corresponding to key A3).
Range: 427.2 Hz – 452.6 Hz
You can also change the Transpose and Pitch for each Voice section, in the Voice
Condition display. For more information, see page 43.
1
2
21
NOTE
The Transpose setting here is
not applied to an XG Song
(page 126).
11
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
209
Internet Direct Connection
12
Internet Direct Connection
This convenient, powerful feature lets you directly connect your DDK-7 to the Internet. In this
section, you may come across some unfamiliar terms and phrases related to computers and
online communications. To look up the meaning of these terms, refer to the Internet Glossary
(page 222).
You can connect the instrument to a full-time online connection (ADSL, optical fiber,
cable Internet, etc.) via a router or a modem equipped with a router.
To use the Internet connection, you will first need to subscribe to an Internet service or
provider.
Contents
1 Connecting the Instrument to the Internet . . . .209
2 Accessing the Website from the DDK-7 . . . . . .210
• Scrolling the Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
• Following Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
• Refreshing a Web Page/Canceling Loading of a
Web Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
• Return to the Previous Web Page . . . . . . . . . . .213
• Saving Bookmarks of Your Favorite Pages. . . . .214
• Editing Bookmarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
• Changing the Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
3 About the Internet Settings Display . . . . . . . . . 218
• Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
• LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
• Wireless LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
• Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
4 Exiting from the Internet Display. . . . . . . . . . . .221
5 Initializing Internet Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
6 Glossary of Internet Terms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
1
Connecting the Instrument to the Internet
Use a computer to connect to the Internet and get online before connecting
the instrument, since no modem or router settings can be made from the
instrument itself.
NOTE
Depending on the Internet
connection, you may not be
able to connect to two or
more devices (for example, a
computer and the
instrument), depending on
the contract with the
provider. This means you
cannot connect with the
DDK-7. If in doubt, check
your contract or contact your
provider.
Reference Page
Connecting USB storage
devices or USB-LAN adaptor
(page 234)
Modem*
No router capability
* Here, “modem” refers to an ADSL modem,
optical network unit (ONU) or cable modem.
Router
Cable type
LAN cable
LAN cable
USB-LAN adaptor
Connection example 1:
Connecting by cable (using a modem without router)
12
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
210
Internet Direct Connection
12
To access the website, press the [INTERNET] button while the instrument is
connected to the Internet.
ADSL modem
Router capability
LAN cable
LAN cable
USB-LAN adaptor
Connection example 2:
Connecting by cable (using a modem with router)
NOTE
Some types of modems
require an optional hub
network for simultaneously
connecting to several
devices (such as computer,
musical instrument, etc.).
2
Accessing the Website from the DDK-7
USB wireless LAN adaptor
* Here, “modem” refers to an ADSL modem,
optical network unit (ONU) or cable modem.
Access pointModem* Router
Connection example 3:
Wireless connection
Control Menu Browser
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
211
Internet Direct Connection
12
In the Control Menu located in the left part of the display, you can control the
displayed website and set various settings. The browser display, to the right of the
control menu, is the area in which the website is displayed.
Scrolling the Display
When the size of the web page is too large to be shown at one time in the browser
display of the instrument, a scroll bar appears at the right side or bottom of the display.
Touch and move the scroll bar to view those parts of the page that are not shown.
Following Links
When there is a link in the page, it is shown as a button or in colored text, etc. To select
the link, press it (the button or text) directly on the display.
The touch panel will not sound when you press a link, even if the touch panel sound is
set to ON in the Utility Display (page 17).
The first page shown when opening a browser and connecting to the Internet is
called the “home page.” If you want to return to the home page from another
website, press the [HOME] button in the Control Menu.
Reference Page
Changing the Home Page
(page 217)
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
212
Internet Direct Connection
12
Monitoring the Internet Connection Status
The four icons and a message indicate the current Internet connection status.
1 Offline indicator ( )
This is shown when the instrument is not connected to the Internet. When this
appears, you cannot view any web pages.
2 Communication Status indicator ( )
This flashes when the web page is being loaded, indicating that communication
with the site is in progress. The indicator lights continuously when loading is
finished (communication is established).
3 SSL indicator ( )
This is shown when the opened website uses SSL, and it indicates that data is
encrypted before transmission.
4 Wireless LAN indicator
When you connect the DDK-7 to Internet using wireless LAN, an icon indicating
the condition of the connection is displayed. If the signal to the DDK-7 becomes
weak or there is no signal from the access point, move the DDK-7 nearer to the
access point.
:Strong
:Normal
:Weak (not connected to Internet)
:No signal (not connected to Internet)
1
5
23
4
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
213
Internet Direct Connection
12
Refreshing a Web Page/Canceling Loading of a Web Page
To refresh a web page (to make sure you have the latest version of the
page, or to try reloading), press the [REFRESH] button.
To cancel loading of a page (if the page is taking too long to open), press
the [STOP] button.
Return to the Previous Web Page
To return to a previously selected web page, press the [BACK] button.
To return to the page selected before pressing the [BACK] button, press
the [FORWARD] button.
5 Communication status indicator
The following three messages will be shown depending on the status of accessing
web site.
Now opening web page ...
Indicates loading of the web page.
Web page has been displayed.
Indicates the web page has been loaded
and the web page is completely displayed.
Disconnected.
Indicates the DDK-7 is offline (not
connected to Internet).
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
214
Internet Direct Connection
12
Saving Bookmarks of Your Favorite Pages
You can “bookmark” the page you’re viewing, and set up a custom link so the page can
be instantly called up in the future.
With the desired page currently selected, press the
[BOOKMARK] button in the control menu.
The Bookmark display appears, showing a list of the currently saved bookmarks.
The title of the web page registered to the selected bookmark is shown below the
list.
Call up the display for registering bookmarks by pressing the
[ADD] button.
1
2
Page title
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
215
Internet Direct Connection
12
Select the position of the new bookmark by pressing the desired
position directly, or using the [UP]/[DOWN] button or the Data
Control Dial.
To save the bookmark, press the [EXECUTE] button, or press the
[CANCEL] button to cancel.
To return to the browser, press the [EXIT] button.
Opening a Bookmarked Page:
Press the [BOOKMARK] button in the control menu to call up the
Bookmark display, then select the desired bookmark.
Press the [JUMP] button to open the page of the selected
bookmark.
3
DATA CONTROL
4
5
1
2
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
216
Internet Direct Connection
12
Editing Bookmarks
From the Bookmark display, you can change the names and rearrange the order of your
bookmarks, as well as delete unnecessary bookmarks from the list.
1 UP/DOWN
Moves the selection position in the Bookmark list.
2 JUMP
Opens the web page of the selected bookmark.
3 ADD
Used when saving a bookmark (page 214).
4 CHANGE
Changes the name of the selected bookmark. Pressing this button calls up the display
for entering characters. For details on entering characters, see page 113.
5 DELETE
Deletes the selected bookmark from the Bookmark list.
6 MOVE
Changes the order of the bookmarks.
1 Select the bookmark you wish to move, then press the [MOVE]
button.
The left part of the display changes, letting you select the new position for the
bookmark.
2 Select the intended position by pressing the desired position in
the display, or by using the [UP]/[DOWN] buttons or Data Control
dial.
3 Move the bookmark to the selected position by pressing the
[EXECUTE] button.
7 CLOSE
This closes the Bookmark display and returns to the browser display.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
217
Internet Direct Connection
12
Changing the Home Page
You can specify any desired page on the site to be the home page. In advance, open the
page you wish to set as your new home page.
Press the [SETTING] button in the control menu to call up the
Internet Setting display.
Press the [Browser] button to call up the Browser Page.
Press the [Register] button of the “Set this page as Home.”
To return to the browser, press the [EXECUTE] button in the
control menu.
A message appears, prompting confirmation of the operation. Select [YES] to
return to the browser.
1
2
3
4
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
218
Internet Direct Connection
12
From the Internet Settings display, you can make various settings related to the Internet
connection, including preferences for the menus and displays. The Internet Settings
display has four sub-displays: Browser, LAN, Wireless LAN, and Others.
Browser
1 Encode
Selects the character code encoding for the browser.
2 Home page
Shows and allows editing of the web page which is set as the home page.
3 Set this page as Home
For details, refer to “Changing the Home Page” on page 217.
4 Restore default Home
Restores the home page setting.
5 Show images
Image data and pictures in the web page are shown in the browser when this is set to
on. Image data is not shown when this is set to off.
6 Character entry keys
This setting lets you select the character order of the virtual keyboard for entering
characters. When this is set to “Alphabetical,” the keys are in alphabetical order. When
this is set to “ASCII,” the keys are arranged as a conventional “QWERTY” keyboard.
7 Time zone
This determines the time setting for the browser.
3
About the Internet Settings Display
1
3
4
5
6
7
2
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
219
Internet Direct Connection
12
LAN
In this display page, you can make settings for the LAN connection. These settings are
needed for not only wired LAN connection but also wireless LAN connection.
1 Use DHCP
Determines whether or not DHCP is used. If your router is compatible with DHCP,
select “ON (set DNS automatically)” here.
2 DNS server 1 / DNS server 2
These determine the addresses of the primary and secondary DNS servers. These
settings must be made when “Use DHCP” above is set to “ON (set DNS manually)” or
“OFF.”
3 IP address / Subnet mask / Gateway
These settings are available only when DHCP is not used. The settings here are: IP
address, subnet mask, and gateway server address. These settings must be made when
“Use DHCP” above is set to “OFF.”
Wireless LAN
In this display page, you can make settings for the wireless LAN connection. These
settings must be the same as the settings on the Access Point.
1
2
3
Make a written note of these settings, in case you
have to enter the settings again.
Use DHCP
DNS server 1
DNS server 2
IP address
Subnet mask
Gateway
1
2
3
5
4
Make a written note of these settings, in case you
have to enter the settings again.
SSID
Channel Ch
Encryption On Off
WEP key type ASCII Hexadecimal
WEP key length 64 bit 128 bit
WEP key
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
220
Internet Direct Connection
12
1 Access Point
Pressing the [Display Information] button calls up the access point list. It shows the
access points near the DDK-7.
Once you select the desired access point and press the [OK] button, a message appears
prompting confirmation of whether to transfer the access point settings to the DDK-7
or not. When you select [YES], the SSID, Channel and Encryption settings are
transferred to the DDK-7.
2 SSID
Determines the SSID setting.
3 Channel
Determines the channel.
4 Encryption
Determines whether or not the data is encrypted.
5 WEP key type / WEP key length / WEP key
These settings are available only when Encryption above is enabled. These set the type
and length of the encryption key.
Others
1 Proxy server / Proxy port / Non-proxy server
Determines the proxy server name, port number and the host name for a main, non-
proxy server. The settings here are only necessary when using a proxy server.
2 Delete cookies
Deletes the contents of all saved cookies.
3 Delete all bookmarks
Deletes all saved bookmarks.
4 Initialize setup
Restores all settings in the Internet Settings displays to their defaults. See “Initializing
Internet Settings” on page 221.
NOTE
An access point that is
encrypted in a non-WEP
format cannot be used.
NOTE
If no signal from the access
point is received, the access
point cannot be listed.
NOTE
The WEP key type, length
and WEP key are not entered
automatically. You have to
enter them by yourself if you
want to use an access point
that is encrypted.
2
3
4
5
1
NOTE
When using two or more non-
proxy servers, separate each
server name with a comma.
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
221
Internet Direct Connection
12
5 Connection information
Shows detailed information on the current connection.
Pressing any button other than [INTERNET] button quits the Internet Direct
Connection and closes the website display. Pressing the [INTERNET] button again
automatically opens the previously opened website.
The settings of the Internet function are not initialized when using the Initialize
operation of the DDK-7 (page 23); Internet settings must be initialized separately, as
explained here. Initializing will reset to the default values not only the settings of the
browser, but also all settings you have made in the Internet Settings displays, including
those related to Internet connection.
Press the [SETTING] button in the control menu to call up the
Internet Settings display.
Press the [Others] button at the top right of the display.
Press the [Initialize] button to initialize the Internet settings.
A message appears, prompting confirmation of the operation.
Select [YES] to initialize the Internet settings, or select [NO] to
abort the operation.
4
Exiting from the Internet Display
5
Initializing Internet Settings
1
2
3
4
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
222
Internet Direct Connection
12
6
Glossary of Internet Terms
Broadband An Internet connection technology/service (such as ADSL and optical fiber) that allows for high-speed, high-
volume data communication.
Browser The software used to search for, access, and view web pages. For this instrument, this refers to the display
that shows the contents of the web pages.
Cookie A system that records certain information that the user transfers when visiting a website and using the
Internet. The function is similar to a preference file in a conventional computer program, in that it “remembers”
certain information such as your user name and password, so you don’t have to re-enter the information each
time you visit the site.
DHCP This is a standard or protocol by which IP addresses and other low-level network configuration information
can be dynamically and automatically assigned each time connection is made to the Internet.
DNS A system that translates names of computers connected to a network to their corresponding IP addresses.
Download Transferring data over a network, from a larger “host” system to a smaller “client” system’s hard drive or other
local storage device — much like copying files from your hard disk drive to a floppy disk. For this instrument,
this refers to the process of transferring Song and other data from a website to the instrument.
Gateway A system which links different networks or systems, and makes possible data transfer and conversion despite
differing communications standards.
Home page The first page shown when opening a browser and connecting to the Internet. This phrase is also used to
mean the “front screen” or top page of a website.
Internet A huge network made up of networks, the Internet allows high-speed data transfer among computers, mobile
phones and other devices.
IP address A string of numbers assigned to each computer connected to a network, and indicating the device’s location
on the network.
LAN Short for Local Area Network, this is a data-transfer network that connects a group of computers at a single
location (such as an office or home) by means of a special cable.
Link A highlighted word, button or icon within a web page that, when clicked, opens another web page.
Modem A device which connects and allows data transfer between a conventional telephone line and a computer. It
converts the digital signals from the computer to analog audio for sending over the phone line, and vice
versa.
NTP Short for Network Time Protocol, a standard for setting the internal system clock of the computer over a
network. For this instrument, the internal clock of the computer is used to specify the valid time/date for
cookies and SSL.
Provider A communications business that offers Internet connection services. In order to connect to the Internet, it is
necessary to contract to a provider.
Proxy A proxy server is a server that all computers on a local network have to go through before accessing
information on the Internet. It intercepts all or designated requests to the real server to see if it can fulfill the
requests itself. If not, it forwards the request to the real server. Proxy servers are used to improve performance
and speed, and to filter requests, usually for security and to prevent unauthorized access to an internal
network.
Router A device for connecting multiple computer networks. For example, a router is necessary when connecting
several computers in a house or office, and allow them to all access the Internet and share data. A router is
usually connected between a modem and a computer, although some modems have a built-in router.
Server A hardware system or computer used as a central point for a network, providing access to files and services.
Site Short for “website,” this refers to the group of web pages that are opened together. For example, the
collection of web pages whose addresses begin with “http://www.yamaha.co.jp/” is referred to as the Yamaha
site.
SSID This is an identification name for specifying a particular network over a wireless LAN connection.
Communication is possible only between terminals with matching SSID names.
SSL Short for Secure Sockets Layer, a standard for transmitting confidential data such as credit card numbers
over the Internet.
Subnet mask A setting used to divide a large-scale network into several smaller networks.
URL Short for Uniform Resource Locator, a string of characters used to identify and link to specific websites and
pages on the Internet. A complete URL usually starts with the characters “http://.”
Web page Refers to each individual page that makes up a website.
Wireless LAN A LAN connection that allows data transfer through a wireless, cable-free connection.
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
223
Connections
13
Connections
On the backside and front left side of the DDK-7 keyboard is a separate panel equipped with
various input/output terminals and miscellaneous controls.
This section provides brief explanations for each jack/control on the DDK-7.
For details on connecting to external devices, see page 225.
1 AC INLET jack
For connecting the power cable.
2 PHONES jacks
For connection of a stereo headphone set.
3 MIC jack
For connecting a mono input, such as a microphone. The DDK-7 outputs the
microphone signal, with reverb processing, through the OUTPUT jacks or AUX OUT
jacks.
4 MIC VOLUME knob
For adjusting the level of input signal from the MIC jack.
Contents
1 Accessory Jacks and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
2 Connecting Headphones or External System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
• Using Headphones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
• Playing the Sounds of the DDK-7 Through an
External Audio System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
• Using a mixer for live performance. . . . . . . . . . .226
• Selecting Outputs for Each Part . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
3 Connecting a Pedal Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
4 Connecting a Foot Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
5 Connection with Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
• Using the USB terminal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
• Using the MIDI IN/OUT terminals . . . . . . . . . . . .231
6 Connecting External Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
• Recording the Sounds of the DDK-7 to an External
Recorder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
• Outputting the Sound of an External Device Through
the External Speakers of the DDK-7. . . . . . . . . . 232
• Connecting a Microphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
• Controlling External MIDI Devices from the DDK-7
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
• Controlling the DDK-7 from an External Device . 234
• Connecting USB storage devices or USB-LAN
adaptor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
7 MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
• What is MIDI? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
• MIDI Messages of the DDK-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
• MIDI Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
8 MIDI Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
1
Accessory Jacks and Controls
234
5
1
Reference Page
Using Headphones
(page 225)
Reference Page
Connecting a Microphone
(page 232)
13
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
224
Connections
13
5 USB TO DEVICE terminal
For connecting USB storage devices such as USB flash memory.
1 FOOT PEDAL jacks
For connecting to an optional FC4/FC5/FC7/FC9 Foot Pedal.
1 - 1 VOLUME jack
For controlling the volume and a range of other important functions.
1 - 2 SUSTAIN jack
For controlling the sustain and a range of other important functions.
2 MIDI IN/OUT terminals
For connecting external MIDI devices such a synthesizer or sequencer. You can also use
these to connect with a computer that has a MIDI Interface.
3 USB terminals
3 - 1 USB TO DEVICE terminal
For connecting USB storage devices (such as USB flash memory) or a USB-LAN
adaptor for connecting to the Internet.
3 - 2 USB TO HOST terminal
For connecting to a computer with a USB cable. To connect to a computer,
make sure that an appropriate USB-MIDI driver is installed to the computer.
4 OPTICAL OUT terminal
For connection using an optical-fiber cable. This terminal outputs a digital signal of
44.1 kHz, 24 bits.
12
1
-2 1-1
345
3
-1 3-2
7
7
-1 7-2
68
(View from rear.)
Reference Pages
Foot Pedal (page 196)
Reference Pages
Controlling External MIDI
Devices from the DDK-7
(page 233)
Controlling the DDK-7 from
an External Device
(page 234)
Connection with Computer
(page 230)
What is MIDI? (page 235)
Reference Pages
Internet Direct Connection
(page 209)
Connecting USB storage
devices or USB-LAN adaptor
(page 234)
Connection with Computer
(page 230)
USB
USB is an abbreviation for Universal Serial Bus. It is a serial interface for connecting
a computer with peripheral devices.
Reference Page
Recording the Sounds of the
DDK-7 to an External
Recorder (page 231)
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
225
Connections
13
5 TO PEDAL terminal
For connecting to the DDKU-P7 Pedal Unit.
6 AUX IN (Phone; L/L+R, R) jacks
This pair of stereo phone jacks is for connection to an external device. The signal from
the connected external device sounds from external speakers connected to the DDK-7.
7 AUX OUT (LEVEL FIXED) jacks
7 - 1 SUB (1, 2) jacks
For connection to an external amplifier/speaker system. These outputs can be
selected for each part.
The output level is fixed and cannot be controlled with the MASTER
VOLUME Dial.
7 - 2 MAIN (L/L+R, R) jacks
This set of stereo outputs is for connection to an external amplifier/speaker. The
output level is fixed and cannot be controlled.
8 OUTPUT (L/L+R, R) jacks
This set of stereo outputs is for connection to an external amplifier/speaker. The output
level can be controlled.
Using Headphones
To use headphones, connect to the PHONES jack.
Reference Pages
Connecting a Pedal Unit
(page 229)
Reference Page
Outputting the Sound of an
External Device Through the
External Speakers of the
DDK-7 (page 232)
Reference Pages
Playing the Sounds of the
DDK-7 Through an External
Audio System (page 226)
Recording the Sounds of the
DDK-7 to an External
Recorder (page 231)
2
Connecting Headphones or External
System
Before connecting the DDK-7 to other electronic components, turn
off the power to all the components. Before turning the power of the
components on or off, set all volume levels to minimum (0).
Otherwise, electrical shock or damage to the components may
occur.
PHONES
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
226
Connections
13
Playing the Sounds of the DDK-7 Through an External
Audio System
By using the OUTPUT jacks, you can connect your DDK-7 to external powered
speakers. If you’re connecting the DDK-7 to a mono device, use only the OUTPUT L/
L+R jack.
Using a mixer for live performance
Generally, when you use the DDK-7 on stage (in concert, etc.), you should connect it
to a mixer. By using a mixer, you can easily adjust the volume and tone quality of each
component.
To connect to a mixer, use the AUX OUT jacks of the DDK-7. The DDK-7 features
two types of AUX OUT jacks: MAIN and SUB, allowing you to assign some parts of
the DDK-7's output to the SUB jacks and the other parts to the MAIN jacks. In this
way, you can apply effects to the specific parts or adjust the volume balance among the
parts with an external mixer. For details, see “Selecting Outputs for Each Part” on page
228.
Speaker (Left) Speaker (Right)
OUTPUT L/L+R R
Mic.
MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER
Sound
Some Parts
Other parts
Sound
Sound
Sound
Main Speakers
(ex. Powerd-amp Speakers)
Monitor Speaker
Mixer
External Effector
Keyboards
R
AUX OUT
(MAIN)
L/L+R 2
AUX OUT
(SUB)
1
DDK-7
Connection example
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
227
Connections
13
*The Unbalanced line is intended for line-level signals.
Power-on Procedure
Before turning the power on to all components, set all volume levels to minimum (0)
then turn on the power in the following order:
(1) DDK-7 and external keyboard(s)
(2) Mixer
(3) Powered Speaker
To turn the power off, first turn down the volume for each devices, then turn off the
power in the reverse order (3 → 2 → 1).
Jacks Output Type Location
AUX OUT MAIN jacks
L/L+R, R
Unbalanced*
LEVEL FIXED
Backside of the keyboard
AUX OUT SUB jacks
1, 2
Unbalanced
LEVEL FIXED
Backside of the keyboard
OUTPUT jacks
L/L+R, R
Unbalanced
LEVEL FIXED
Backside of the keyboard
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
228
Connections
13
Selecting Outputs for Each Part
You can assign each individual part of the DDK-7's sounds such as Voice, Percussion,
to be output from specific AUX OUT jacks: MAIN and/or SUB.
Press the [UTILITY] button to call up the GLOBAL Page of the
Utility display.
Press the [AUX OUT] button in the upper right of the display to
call up the AUX OUT Page.
You can assign individual parts to the AUX OUT MAIN and/or SUB jacks: each Voice
section, Organ Flute Voice, Main drum, Add drum, Accompaniment, Keyboard
Percussion, XG and microphone to the AUX OUT MAIN and/or SUB jacks.
Turn the desired output on for each part.
You can select these from MAIN, SUB1, SUB2 and SUB1&2.
If you select a setting other than MAIN, no sound will be heard from the headphones
and monitor speakers because the parts assigned to SUB1, SUB2 and SUB1&2 will
not be output through the PHONES and OUTPUT jacks.
Any parts assigned to the AUX OUT MAIN or SUB1&2 will be output in stereo (1:
left, 2: right). Any parts assigned to AUX OUT SUB1 or SUB2 will be output in
mono.
1
2
3
NOTE
The settings in the Utility
display are automatically
saved when another display
is called up.
NOTE
Chorus and variation effects
of the Rhythm, and Reverb
are not applied to the sound
output through SUB1, SUB2
and SUB1&2.
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
229
Connections
13
Connecting a Pedal Unit (DDKU-P7) to the DDK-7 allows you to use the Pedalboard,
right and left Footswitches, Expression Pedal and 2nd Expression Pedal. These foot-
operated controls allow you to execute various performance functions and switch
effects on/off, without taking your hands from the keyboard. If you connect and
disconnect the Pedal Unit, you must be sure to first turn off the power of the DDK-7,
then use the cable to make the connection. If you connect and disconnect the cable
while the power to the DDK-7 is on, DDK-7 and the Pedal Unit can be damaged.
Connecting an optional Foot Pedal (FC4/FC5/FC7/FC9) to the DDK-7 allows you to
execute various performance functions and switch effects on/off, without taking your
hands from the keyboard. To do this, you must assign a desired function to the Foot
Pedal.
3
Connecting a Pedal Unit
Reference Page
Voices for each keyboard
(page 24)
Footswitches (page 193)
Expression Pedals
(page 205)
4
Connecting a Foot Pedal
DDKU-P7
TO PEDAL
Messages
Dedicated Cable
FOOT PEDAL
2 (SUSTAIN)
Foot Pedal
1 (VOLUME)
Reference Page
Foot Pedal (page 196)
Controlling Sustain
(page 198)
Controlling Melody On Chord
(page 200)
Controlling Lead Slide
(page 199)
Controlling the Solo Function
(page 201)
Controlling the Rhythm
(page 201)
Controlling Rotary Speaker
(page 196)
Controlling Expression
(page 204)
Controlling Registration Shift
(page 203)
Controlling Glide (page 202)
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
230
Connections
13
By using the USB TO HOST terminal or MIDI IN/OUT terminals, you can connect
your DDK-7 to a computer and receive/transmit MIDI data (for more information
about MIDI, see page 235).
Connecting your DDK-7 to a computer opens up a whole new world of musical
possibilities. You can save your original songs to computer and create notation (score
writing application or sequencing software is needed), and even upload your original
DDK-7 song data to your own website, to promote your talents or share songs with
your friends. You can also control the DDK-7 from the computer, for example, by
playing a MIDI file on the computer to play back the sounds of your DDK-7.
Using the USB terminal
Using the DDK-7’s USB TO HOST terminal and a standard USB cable, connect the
DDK-7 and the computer.
MIDI terminals are automatically disabled when the USB TO HOST terminal is used.
5
Connection with Computer
Before you can actually transfer data between the DDK-7 and a computer via
the USB connection, you will need to install an appropriate MIDI driver.
Download the latest MIDI driver software from the Yamaha web site at
“http://music.yamaha.com/download/.”
NOTE
When you are using the
M.D.R., MIDI data cannot be
transferred to/from the
computer.
Precautions when using the USB TO HOST terminals
When connecting the computer to the USB TO HOST terminal, make sure to observe the
following points. Failing to do so may result in freezing of the computer, corrupting data,
and even losing data.
If the computer or the instrument freezes, turn the power to the instrument off or restart the
computer.
•Before connecting the computer to the USB TO HOST terminal, exit from any
power-saving mode (such as suspended, sleep, standby) of the computer.
•Before turning on the power to the instrument, connect the computer to the USB
TO HOST terminal.
•Execute the following before turning the power to the instrument on/off or
plugging/unplugging the USB cable to/from the USB TO HOST terminal.
•Quit any open applications.
•Make sure that data is not being transmitted from the instrument. (Data is
transmitted only by playing notes on the keyboard or playing back a Song.)
• While a USB device is connected to the instrument, you should wait for six
seconds or more between these operations: When turning the power of the
instrument off then on again, or when alternately connecting/disconnecting the
USB cable.
Computer
USB cable
USB TO HOST
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
231
Connections
13
Using the MIDI IN/OUT terminals
By using an optional MIDI interface such as the UX16, you can connect the DDK-7
to the computer, with the MIDI IN/OUT terminals on the instrument. Connect the
DDK-7 and the MIDI Interface with two standard MIDI cables (one connecting the
OUT terminal on the DDK-7 to the MIDI IN terminal on the interface, and the other
connecting the IN terminal on the DDK-7 to the MIDI OUT terminal on the
interface). Connect the MIDI interface to the computer with a USB cable.
Recording the Sounds of the DDK-7 to an External
Recorder
You can record your DDK-7 performance to an external recorder, such as an MD
recorder or cassette tape recorder, using the OPTICAL OUT terminal or AUX OUT
jacks. Using the OPTICAL OUT terminal allows you to record to external media with
exceptionally high-quality digital sound (providing the external recorder has an Optical
In terminal). Or you can use the AUX OUT jacks.
NOTE
Depending on your particular
MIDI interface, you may have
to connect the MIDI Interface
and the computer with a
serial cable.
6
Connecting External Devices
Computer
MIDI Interface
(for example, UX16)
MIDI IN MIDI OUT
MIDI
INOUT
NOTE
If you want to record the
sound input from the AUX IN
jack together with the DDK-7
sound, use the AUX OUT
MAIN jack.
OPTICAL IN
OPTICAL OUTAUX OUT MAIN L/L+R
LINE IN R
R
L
Cassette tape recorder, etc.
Cassette tape recorder, etc.
Audio cable Optical digital cable
Recording Recording
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
232
Connections
13
Outputting the Sound of an External Device Through
the External Speakers of the DDK-7
You can connect the AUX IN jacks of the DDK-7 with the LINE OUT of an external
device, such as a CD player. You can also connect the OUTPUT jacks of the DDK-7
to external speakers. The sound from the CD player is output from an external audio
system via the DDK-7.
First turn on the power of the external device(s), then that of the DDK-7. Reverse this
order when you turn the power off.
If you’re connecting the DDK-7 to a mono device, use only the AUX IN L/L+R jack.
Connecting a Microphone
By connecting a microphone to the DDK-7, you can enjoy singing along with your
own performance. The DDK-7 outputs your vocals through the external audio system
connected to the AUX OUT or OUTPUT jacks of the DDK-7.
Connect your microphone to the MIC jack.
A dynamic microphone is recommended.
Use the MIC VOLUME knob to set the microphone volume.
Speaker (Left)
Playing
AUX INOUTPUT (MAIN)
Stereo audio system
Playing
Speaker (Right)
Playing
RL+L/R RL+L/R
LINE OUT R L+L/R
1
MIC
2
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
233
Connections
13
To adjust the volume/reverb:
Press the [UTILITY] button on the panel to call up the Utility
display.
Using the MIC. REVERB and VOLUME sliders in the GLOBAL
Page, adjust the amount of the reverb applied to the microphone,
and the volume.
No sound from the microphone can be heard even though you raise the volume
here, unless you turn the MIC VOLUME knob to the right. Similarly, no reverb
can be heard even though you raise the reverb level here, unless you raise the
total reverb level in the REVERB display.
Controlling External MIDI Devices from the DDK-7
You can use the DDK-7 to remotely play the Voices of a MIDI keyboard (or tone
generator), combining them with the DDK-7 and letting you create even richer, more
multi-layered sound textures. (The MIDI receive channels of the MIDI keyboard must
match the transmit channels on your DDK-7.)
The DDK-7 transmits as digital data a variety of performance messages along with note
information, including values that indicate how far the expression pedal is pressed
down and how hard you play the keyboard. How the connected external device
responds to these messages depends on the particular device.
MIDI terminals are automatically disabled when the USB TO HOST terminal is used.
1
2
Reference Page
Reverb (page 48)
Reference Page
What is MIDI? (page 235)
Tone generator
MIDI cable
MIDI messages
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
NOTE
When you are using the
M.D.R., MIDI data cannot be
transmitted.
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
234
Connections
13
Controlling the DDK-7 from an External Device
You can use an external MIDI keyboard or sequencer to remotely play the sounds of
your DDK-7 and change its Registrations. (You will need to set the MIDI transmit
channels of the MIDI keyboard to match the fixed receive channels on your DDK-7.)
MIDI terminals are automatically disabled when the USB TO HOST terminal is used.
Connecting USB storage devices or USB-LAN adaptor
Using the USB TO DEVICE terminal(s), you can connect USB storage devices for
saving your DDK-7 data, and/or a USB-LAN adaptor for direct connection to the
Internet.
Compatible USB devices
You can connect a single USB-LAN adaptor and up to two USB storage devices (such
as USB flash memory) to the USB TO DEVICE terminal(s). Before purchasing a USB-
LAN adaptor or USB storage devices, please consult your Yamaha dealer, or an
authorized Yamaha distributor for advice, or see the Yamaha website (http://
www.global.yamaha.com/).
NOTE
When you are using the
M.D.R., MIDI data cannot be
received.
MIDI keyboard or synthesizer
MIDI cable
MIDI messages
MIDI IN MIDI OUT
Reference Pages
Internet Direct Connection
(page 209)
Formatting External Media
(page 103)
NOTE
If necessary, use a USB hub.
Only self-powered (battery or
external power supply) types
can be used. USB hubs of up
to one levels can be used.
Precautions when using the USB TO DEVICE terminals
•Never turn the USB device’s power on/off and never plug/unplug the USB
cable when the connected USB storage device is of the self-powered type.
Doing so may result in the operation of the DDK-7 “freezing” or hanging
up.
• While the instrument is accessing data (such as Save, Load, and Delete
operations), do NOT unplug the USB cable, do NOT remove the media
from the device, and do NOT turn the power off to either device. Doing so
may corrupt the data on either or both devices.
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
235
Connections
13
This section explains what MIDI is, and what it can do, as well as how you can use
MIDI on your DDK-7.
What is MIDI?
No doubt you have heard the terms “acoustic instrument” and “digital instrument.”
In the world today, these are the two main categories of instruments. Let’s consider a
grand piano and a classical guitar as representative acoustic instruments. They are easy
to understand. With the piano, you strike a key, and a hammer inside hits some strings
and plays a note. With the guitar, you directly pluck a string and the note sounds. But
how does a digital instrument go about playing a note?
As shown in the illustration above, in an electronic instrument the sampled note
(previously recorded note) stored in the tone generator section (electronic circuit) is
played based on information received from the keyboard, and output through the
speakers. So then what is the information from the keyboard that becomes the basis for
note production?
For example, let’s say you play a “C” quarter note using the grand piano sound on the
keyboard. Unlike an acoustic instrument that puts out a resonated note, the electronic
instrument puts out information from the keyboard such as “with what Voice,” “with
which key,” “about how strong,” “when was it pressed” and “when was it released.”
Then each piece of information is changed into a number value and sent to the tone
generator. Using these numbers as a basis, the tone generator plays the stored sampled
note.
Example of Keyboard Information
As described above, your keyboard performance and panel operations such as Voice
selection are handled as MIDI events. All rhythm-related data – including rhythm
patterns, auto accompaniment patterns, Rhythm Sequences, etc. – also consist of
MIDI messages.
7
MIDI
Voice number (with what Voice) 01 (grand piano)
Note number (with which key) 60 (C3)
Note on (when was it pressed) Timing expressed numerically (quarter note)
Velocity (about how strong) 120 (strong)
Internal amp
Internal amp
Tone generator
(Electric circuit)
Playing the keyboard
RL
Acoustic guitar note production
Digital instrument note production
Pluck a string and the body resonates
the sound.
Based on playing information from the keyboard,
a sampled note stored in the tone generator is
played through the speakers.
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
236
Connections
13
MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) allows electronic musical instruments to
communicate with each other, by sending and receiving compatible Note, Control
Change, Program Change and various other types of MIDI data, or messages.
MIDI Messages of the DDK-7
MIDI messages can be divided into two groups: the Channel Messages and System
Messages. Channel Messages consist of data related to the performance on the
keyboard for a specific channel. System Messages consist of data that allows several
MIDI devices to communicate with each other.
Channel Messages
Each time you play the keyboard on the DDK-7, channel messages (indicating which
keys are played and how strongly) are transmitted via a specific channel. Similarly, the
DDK-7 can be played remotely when receiving this data from an external keyboard.
Note On: Indicates which keys are played with the note numbers 0 through 127.
The reception note range is C-2 (0) – G8 (127), C3 = 60.
Note Off: Generated when a key is released.
Velocity: Indicates how strongly the key is played. The range is 1 – 127.
For more detailed information, see MIDI Data Format on page 248 and MIDI
Implementation Chart on page 261.
• Program Change
Program Change messages allow you to change Voices in the middle of a song. With
these messages you can change the Registrations of the DDK-7. For more detailed
information, see MIDI Data Format on page 248 and MIDI Implementation Chart on
page 261.
• Control Change
Control Change Messages let you select Voice banks, control the volume, panning,
modulation, portamento time, brightness and various other sound parameters, through
specific Control Change numbers.
For more detailed information on the Control Change messages available on the DDK-
7, see MIDI Data Format on page 248 and MIDI Implementation Chart on page 261.
System Messages
• System Exclusive Messages
System Exclusive messages are used to exchange the system and Voice/Registration
data.
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
237
Connections
13
MIDI Channels
MIDI data is assigned to one of sixteen MIDI channels. Using these channels, 1 – 16,
the performance data for sixteen different instrument parts can be simultaneously sent
over one MIDI cable.
Think of the MIDI channels as TV channels. Each TV station transmits its broadcasts
over a specific channel. Your home TV set receives many different programs
simultaneously from several TV stations and you select the appropriate channel to
watch the desired program.
MIDI operates on the same basic principle. The transmitting instrument sends MIDI
data on a specific MIDI channel (MIDI Transmit Channel) via a single MIDI cable to
the receiving instrument. If the receiving instrument’s MIDI channel (MIDI Receive
Channel) matches the Transmit Channel, the receiving instrument will sound
according to the data sent by the transmitting instrument.
The receive channel of the DDK-7 is fixed at channel 1 for the Upper Keyboard,
channel 2 for the Lower Keyboard, and channel 3 for the Pedalboard. This means that
when you are using another MIDI device to play the DDK-7’s Voices, you must set the
MIDI transmit channel(s) of the connected device to match the receive channel(s) of
the DDK-7. You can select the transmit channel for each keyboard (Upper, Lower and
Pedal) from channels 1 – 16. See page 238 for more information.
1
Weather Report
NEWS
2
2
NEWS
MIDI Transmit channel 2 MIDI Receive channel 2
MIDI
cable
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
238
Connections
13
When you connect your DDK-7 with a second MIDI device (such as a synthesizer or
computer), you can determine how the DDK-7 controls that MIDI device, or how the
DDK-7 is controlled.
Press the [UTILITY] button in the panel to call up the Utility
Display.
Press the [MIDI] button at the top right of the display to call up
the MIDI Page.
1 OUTPUT
For setting the channels over which MIDI information will be transmitted. Any
channel from 1 through 16 can be assigned to the Upper keyboard, the Lower
keyboard, the Pedalboard, Sustain, Expression Pedal and 2nd Expression Pedal. The
MIDI messages on each keyboard will be sent on the channels set here. You must set
the transmit channel here to match the receive channel of the connected device.
Pressing each OUTPUT button calls up the channel selection pop-up menu. After you
select the desired channel, the pop-up menu automatically closes.
Sustain, Expression Pedal and 2nd Expression Pedal can be set to “OFF” (MIDI
information will not be transmitted.)
2 MIDI OUT FILTER
Deletes unnecessary MIDI data and keeps it from being transmitted from the DDK-7.
After Touch, second Expression and Rhythm start/stop are automatically filtered. Set
the parameter for which you wish to disable transmission to ON.
8
MIDI Control
1
2
1
23
3-1 3-2 3-3
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
239
Connections
13
3 INTERNAL/EXTERNAL
Switches control over the displayed items between the DDK-7 (INTERNAL) or the
connected device (EXTERNAL).
3 - 1 LEAD 1
Determines Internal or External control of the Lead Voices.
INT. (Internal): Lead Voice 1 is played from the Upper keyboard of the DDK-7.
(If the To Lower function is on, it is played from Lower keyboard.)
EXT. (External): The Lead Voice 1 is played from the connected instrument via MIDI
channel 4.
3 - 2 SYNC.
To synchronize playback with an external MIDI device, you can use either the
instrument’s internal clock (int.) or MIDI clock signals from the external device
(ext.).
INT. (Internal): The instrument uses its own internal clock.
EXT. (External): The instrument uses MIDI clock signals from the external device
(midi).
3 - 3 EXPRESSION
Determines the control of the expression pedal functions. Ordinarily, this
control is set to AUTO.
AUTO: Internal and External is automatically switched.
INT. (Internal): You can manually control the expression pedal and Foot Pedal even
during M.D.R. playback.
EXT. (External): While playing the M.D.R. or receiving MIDI messages, the
expression pedal and Foot Pedal is invalid. (The volume is controlled by the recorded
data in a USB flash memory or received MIDI data.)
14
Appendix
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
240
Appendix
XG Voice & Drum List
14
Voice Number
Voice Name Category
MSB LSB PRG
001XG GrandPiano PIANO
011XG GrndPianoKSP
0181XG MellowGrPno
0401XG PianoStrings
0411XG Dream
002XG BrightPiano
012XG BritePnoKSP
003XG El.GrandPiano
013XG El.GrndPnoKSP
0323XG DetunedCP80
0403XG LayeredCP1
0413XG LayeredCP2
004XG Honkytonk
014XG HonkytonkKSP
005XG El.Piano1
015XG El.Piano1KSP
0185XG MellowEP1
0325XG ChorusEP1
0405XG HardEl.Piano
0455XG VXfadeEl.P1
0645XG 60’sEl.Piano1
006XG El.Piano2
016XG El.Piano2KSP
0326XG ChorusEP2
0336XG DXEPHard
0346XG DXLegend
0406XG DXPhaseEP
0416XG DX+AnalogEP
0426XG DXKotoEP
0456XG VXfadeEl.P2
007XG Harpsichord
017XG Harpsi.KSP
0257XG Harpsichord2
0357XG Harpsichord3
008XG Clavi.
018XG Clavi.KSP
0278XG Clavi.Wah
0648XG PulseClavi.
0658XG PierceClavi.
009XG Celesta CHROMATIC
PERC.
0010 XG Glockenspiel
0011 XG MusicBox
06411XG Orgel
0012 XG Vibraphone
0112 XG VibesKSP
04512XG HardVibes
0013 XG Marimba
0113 XG MarimbaKSP
06413XG SineMarimba
09713XG Balimba
09813XG LogDrums
0014 XG Xylophone CHROMATIC
PERC.
0015 XG TubularBells
09615XG ChurchBells
09715XG Carillon
0016 XG Dulcimer
03516XG Dulcimer2
09616XG Cimbalom
09716XG Santur
0017 XG DrawbarOrgan ORGAN
03217XG DetDrawOrg
03317XG 60’sDrawOrg1
03417XG 60’sDrawOrg2
03517XG 70’sDrawOrg1
03617XG DrawbarOrgan2
03717XG 60’sDrawOrg3
03817XG EvenBarOrg
04017XG 16+2’2_3Org
06417XG OrganBass
06517XG 70’sDrawOrg2
06617XG CheezyOrgan
06717XG DrawbarOrgan3
0018 XG Perc.Organ
02418XG 70’sPercOrg1
03218XG Det.Perc.Org
03318XG LightOrgan
03718XG Perc.Organ2
0019 XG RockOrgan
06419XG RotaryOrgan
06519XG SlowRotary
06619XG FastRotary
0020 XG ChurchOrgan
03220XG ChurchOrgan3
03520XG ChurchOrgan2
04020XG NotreDame
06420XG OrganFlute
06520XG Trem.OrganFl
0021 XG ReedOrgan
04021XG PuffOrgan
0022 XG Accordion
03222XG AccordIt
0023 XG Harmonica
03223XG Harmonica2
0024 XG TangoAccord
06424XG TangoAccord2
0025 XG NylonGuitar GUITAR
01625XG NylonGuitar2
02525XG NylonGuitar3
04325XG Vel.GtrHarmo
09625XG Ukulele
0026 XG SteelGuitar
01626XG SteelGuitar2
Voice Number
Voice Name Category
MSB LSB PRG
Only for XG song playback.
14
Appendix
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
241
03526XG 12StrGuitar GUITAR
04026XG Nylon&Steel
04126XG Steel&Body
09626XG Mandolin
0027 XG JazzGuitar
01827XG MellowGuitar
03227XG JazzAmp
0028 XG CleanGuitar
03228XG ChorusGuitar
0029 XG MutedGuitar
04029XG FunkGuitar1
04129XG MuteSteelGtr
04329XG FunkGuitar2
04529XG JazzMan
0030 XG Overdriven
04330XG GuitarPinch
0031 XG Distortion
04031XG FeedbackGtr
04131XG FeedbackGtr2
0032 XG GtrHarmonics
06532XG GtrFeedback
06632XG GtrHarmonics2
0033 XG AcousticBass BASS
04033XG JazzRhythm
04533XG VXUprghtBass
0034 XG FingerBass
01834XG FingerDark
02734XG FlangeBass
04034XG Bass&DistEG
04334XG FingerSlap
04534XG FingerBass2
06534XG ModulatedBass
0035 XG PickBass
02835XG MutePickBass
0036 XG FretlessBass
03236XG FretlessBass2
03336XG FretlessBass3
03436XG FretlessBass4
09636XG Syn.Fretless
09736XG SmthFretless
0037 XG SlapBass1
02737XG ResonantSlap
03237XG PunchThumb
0038 XG SlapBass2
04338XG Vel.SwSlap
0039 XG SynthBass1
01839XG SynBass1Dark
02039XG FastResoBass
02439XG AcidBass
03539XG Clavi.Bass
04039XG TechnoBass
06439XG Orbiter
06539XG SquareBass
06639XG RubberBass
09639XG Hammer
0040 XG SynthBass2
0640 XG MellowSyBass
01240XG SequencedBass
Voice Number
Voice Name Category
MSB LSB PRG
01840XG ClickSynBass BASS
01940XG SynBass2Dark
03240XG SmoothSyBass
04040XG ModulrSyBass
04140XG DXBass
06440XG XWireBass
0041 XG Violin STRINGS
0841 XG SlwAtkViolin
0042 XG Viola
0043 XG Cello
0044 XG Contrabass
0045 XG Trem.Strings
0845 XG SlwAtTremStr
04045XG SuspenseStr
0046 XG PizzicatoStr
0047 XG Orch.Harp
04047XG YangChin
0048 XG Timpani ENSEMBLE
0049 XG Strings1
0349 XG StereoStrings
0849 XG SlwAtkStrings
02449XG ArcoStrings
03549XG 60’sStrings
04049XG Orchestra
04149XG Orchestra2
04249XG TremOrchestra
04549XG Vel.Strings
0050 XG Strings2
0350 XG S.SlowStrings
0850 XG LegatoStrings
04050XG WarmStrings
04150XG Kingdom
06450XG 70’sStrings
06550XG Strings3
0051 XG SynStrings1
02751XG ResoStrings
06451XG SynStrings4
06551XG SynStrings5
0052 XG SynStrings2
0053 XG ChoirAahs
0353 XG StereoChoir
01653XG ChoirAahs2
03253XG MellowChoir
04053XG ChoirStrings
0054 XG VoiceOohs
0055 XG SynthVoice
04055XG SynthVoice2
04155XG Choral
06455XG AnalogVoice
0056 XG OrchestraHit
03556XG OrchestraHit2
06456XG Impact
0057 XG Trumpet BRASS
01657XG Trumpet2
01757XG BriteTrumpet
03257XG WarmTrumpet
0058 XG Trombone
01858XG Trombone2
Voice Number
Voice Name Category
MSB LSB PRG
14
Appendix
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
242
0059 XG Tuba BRASS
01659XG Tuba2
0060 XG MutedTrumpet
0061 XG FrenchHorn
0661 XG FrHornSolo
03261XG FrenchHorn2
03761XG HornOrchestra
0062 XG BrassSection
03562XG Tp&TbSection
04062XG BrassSection2
04162XG HighBrass
04262XG MellowBrass
0063 XG SynthBrass1
01263XG QuackBrass
02063XG ResoSynBrass
02463XG PolyBrass
02763XG SynthBrass3
03263XG JumpBrass
04563XG AnaVel.Brass1
06463XG AnalogBrass1
0064 XG SynthBrass2
01864XG SoftBrass
04064XG SynthBrass4
04164XG ChoirBrass
04564XG AnaVel.Brass2
06464XG AnalogBrass2
0065 XG SopranoSax REED
0066 XG AltoSax
04066XG SaxSection
04366XG HyperAltoSax
0067 XG TenorSax
04067XG BreathyTenor
04167XG SoftTenorSax
06467XG TenorSax2
0068 XG BaritoneSax
0069 XG Oboe
0070 XG EnglishHorn
0071 XG Bassoon
0072 XG Clarinet
0073 XG Piccolo PIPE
0074 XG Flute
0075 XG Recorder
0076 XG PanFlute
0077 XG BlownBottle
0078 XG Shakuhachi
0079 XG Whistle
0080 XG Ocarina
0081 XG SquareLead SYNTH LEAD
0681 XG SquareLead2
0881 XG LMSquare
01881XG Hollow
01981XG Shroud
06481XG Mellow
06581XG SoloSine
06681XG SineLead
0082 XG SawtoothLead
0682 XG SawtoothLead2
0882 XG ThickSaw
Voice Number
Voice Name Category
MSB LSB PRG
01882XG DynamicSaw SYNTH LEAD
01982XG DigitalSaw
02082XG BigLead
02482XG HeavySynth
02582XG WaspySynth
04082XG PulseSaw
04182XG Dr.Lead
04582XG VelocityLead
09682XG Seq.Analog
0083 XG CalliopeLead
06583XG PurePad
0084 XG ChiffLead
06484XG Rubby
0085 XG CharangLead
06485XG DistortedLead
06585XG WireLead
0086 XG VoiceLead
02486XG SynthAahs
06486XG VoxLead
0087 XG FifthsLead
03587XG BigFive
0088 XG Bass&Lead
01688XG Big&Low
06488XG Fat&Perky
06588XG SoftWhirl
0089 XG NewAgePad SYNTH PAD
06489XG Fantasy
0090 XG WarmPad
01690XG ThickPad
01790XG SoftPad
01890XG SinePad
06490XG HornPad
06590XG RotaryStrings
0091 XG PolySynthPad
06491XG PolyPad80
06591XG ClickPad
06691XG AnalogPad
06791XG SquarePad
0092 XG ChoirPad
06492XG Heaven
06692XG Itopia
06792XG CCPad
0093 XG BowedPad
06493XG Glacier
06593XG GlassPad
0094 XG MetallicPad
06494XG TinePad
06594XG PanPad
0095 XG HaloPad
0096 XG SweepPad
02096XG Shwimmer
02796XG Converge
06496XG PolarPad
06696XG Celestial
0097 XG Rain SYNTH
EFFECTS
04597XG Clavi.Pad
06497XG HarmoRain
06597XG AfricanWind
Voice Number
Voice Name Category
MSB LSB PRG
14
Appendix
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
243
06697XG Carib SYNTH
EFFECTS
0098 XG SoundTrack
02798XG Prologue
06498XG Ancestral
0099 XG Crystal
01299XG SynthDr.Comp
01499XG Popcorn
01899XG TinyBells
03599XG RoundGlocken
04099XG GlockenChime
04199XG ClearBells
04299XG ChorusBells
06499XG SynthMallet
06599XG SoftCrystal
06699XG LoudGlocken
06799XG ChristmasBel
06899XG VibeBells
06999XG DigitalBells
07099XG AirBells
07199XG BellHarp
07299XG Gamelimba
00100 XG Atmosphere
018100 XG WarmAtmos.
019100 XG HollowRelease
040100 XG NylonEl.Piano
064100 XG NylonHarp
065100 XG HarpVox
066100 XG Atmos.Pad
067100 XG Planet
00101 XG Brightness
064101 XG FantasyBells
096101 XG Smokey
00102 XG Goblins
064102 XG GoblinsSynth
065102 XG Creeper
066102 XG RingPad
067102 XG Ritual
068102 XG ToHeaven
070102 XG Night
071102 XG Glisten
096102 XG BellChoir
00103 XG Echoes
08103 XG Echoes2
014103 XG EchoPan
064103 XG EchoBells
065103 XG BigPan
066103 XG SynthPiano
067103 XG Creation
068103 XG StarDust
069103 XG Reso&Panning
00104 XG Sci-Fi
064104 XG Starz
00105 XG Sitar ETHNIC
032105 XG DetunedSitar
035105 XG Sitar2
096105 XG Tambra
097105 XG Tamboura
00106 XG Banjo
Voice Number
Voice Name Category
MSB LSB PRG
028106 XG MutedBanjo ETHNIC
096106 XG Rabab
097106 XG Gopichant
098106 XG Oud
00107 XG Shamisen
00108 XG Koto
096108 XG Taisho-kin
097108 XG Kanoon
00109 XG Kalimba
00110 XG Bagpipe
00111 XG Fiddle
00112 XG Shanai
064112 XG Shanai2
096112 XG Pungi
097112 XG Hichiriki
00113 XG TinkleBell
096113 XG Bonang
097113 XG Altair
098113 XG GamelanGongs
099113 XG StereoGamelan
0 100 113 XG RamaCymbal
0 101 113 XG AsianBells
00114 XG Agogo
PERCUSSION
00115 XG SteelDrums
097115 XG GlassPerc.
098115 XG ThaiBells
00116 XG Woodblock
096116 XG Castanets
00117 XG TaikoDrum
096117 XG GranCassa
00118 XG MelodicTom
064118 XG MelodicTom2
065118 XG RealTom
066118 XG RockTom
00119 XG SynthDrum
064119 XG AnalogTom
065119 XG ElectroPerc.
00120 XG Rev.Cymbal
00121 XG GtrFretNoise SOUND
EFFECTS
00122 XG BreathNoise
00123 XG Seashore
00124 XG BirdTweet
00125 XG TelephoneRing
00126 XG Helicopter
00127 XG Applause
00128 XG Gunshot
64 0 1 XG CuttingNoise
64 0 2 XG CuttingNoise2
64 0 4 XG StringSlap
64 0 17 XG Fl.KeyClick
64 0 33 XG Shower
64 0 34 XG Thunder
64 0 35 XG Wind
64 0 36 XG Stream
64 0 37 XG Bubble
64 0 38 XG Feed
64 0 49 XG Dog
64 0 50 XG Horse
Voice Number
Voice Name Category
MSB LSB PRG
14
Appendix
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
244
64 0 51 XG BirdTweet2 SOUND
EFFECTS
64 0 55 XG Ghost
64 0 56 XG Maou
64 0 65 XG PhoneCall
64 0 66 XG DoorSqueak
64 0 67 XG DoorSlam
64 0 68 XG ScratchCut
64 0 69 XG ScratchSplit
64 0 70 XG WindChime
64 0 71 XG TelphoneRing2
64 0 81 XG CarEngineIgn
64 0 82 XG CarTiresSqel
64 0 83 XG CarPassing
64 0 84 XG CarCrash
64 0 85 XG Siren
64 0 86 XG Train
64 0 87 XG JetPlane
64 0 88 XG Starship
64 0 89 XG Burst
64 0 90 XG RollrCoaster
64 0 91 XG Submarine
64 0 97 XG Laugh
64 0 98 XG Scream
64 0 99 XG Punch
64 0 100 XG Heartbeat
64 0 101 XG FootSteps
64 0 113 XG MachineGun
64 0 114 XG LaserGun
64 0 115 XG Explosion
64 0 116 XG Firework
127 0 1 Standard Kit 1 DRUM
127 0 2 Standard Kit 2 *Refer to
Drum Kit Map
127 0 5 Hit Kit
127 0 9 Room Kit
127 0 17 Rock Kit
127 0 25 Electro Kit
127 0 26 Analog Kit
127 0 28 Dance Kit
127 0 33 Jazz Kit
127 0 41 Brush Kit
127 0 49 Symphony Kit
126 0 1 SFX Kit 1
126 0 2 SFX Kit 2
Voice Number
Voice Name Category
MSB LSB PRG
14
Appendix
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
245
XG Drum Map
MSB/LSB/PC
Note
Standard Kit 1
(127/0/1)
Key
Off
Standard Kit 2
(127/0/2)
Key
Off
Hit Kit
(127/0/5)
Key
Off
Room Kit
(127/0/9)
Key
Off
Rock Kit
(127/0/17)
Key
Off
Electro Kit
(127/0/25)
Key
Off
12
13 Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Mute
14 Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo Open
15 Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q
16 Whip Slap Whip Slap Whip Slap Whip Slap Whip Slap Whip Slap
17 Scratch H Scratch H Scratch H Scratch H Scratch H Scratch H
18 Scratch L Scratch L Scratch L Scratch L Scratch L Scratch L
19 Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap
20 Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise
21 Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click
22 Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell
23 Seq Click L Seq Click L Seq Click L Seq Click L Seq Click L Seq Click L
24 Seq Click H Seq Click H Seq Click H Seq Click H Seq Click H Seq Click H
25 Brush Tap Brush Tap Brush Tap Brush Tap Brush Tap Brush Tap
26 Brush Swirl Ø Brush Swirl Ø Brush Swirl Ø Brush Swirl Ø Brush Swirl Ø Brush Swirl Ø
27
Brush Slap Brush Slap Brush Slap Brush Slap Brush Slap Brush Slap
28 Brush Tap Swirl Ø Brush Tap Swirl Ø Brush Tap Swirl Ø Brush Tap Swirl Ø Brush Tap Swirl Ø Reverse Cymbal Ø
29
Snare Roll Ø Snare Roll Ø Snare Roll Ø Snare Roll Ø Snare Roll Ø Snare Roll Ø
30
Castanet Castanet Castanet Castanet Castanet Hi Q 2
31
Snare Soft Snare Soft 2 Snare Electro Snare Soft Snare Noisy Snare Snap Elec
32
Sticks Sticks Sticks Sticks Sticks Sticks
33 Kick Soft Kick Soft Kick Tight L Kick Soft Kick Soft Kick 3
34
Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot H Snare Pitched Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot
35 Kick Tight Kick Tight Kick Wet Kick Tight Kick 2 Kick Gate
36
Kick Kick Short Kick Tight H Kick Kick Gate Kick Gate Heavy
37
Side Stick Side Stick Light Stick Ambient Side Stick Side Stick Side Stick
38 Snare Snare Short Snare Ambient Snare Snappy Snare Rock Snare Noisy 2
39
Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap
40 Snare Tight Snare Tight H Snare Tight 2 Snare Tight Snap Snare Rock Tight Snare Noisy 3
41
Floor Tom L Floor Tom L Hybrid Tom 1 Tom Room 1 Tom Rock 1 Tom Electro 1
42
Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Closed 2 Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Closed
43 Floor Tom H Floor Tom H Hybrid Tom 2 Tom Room 2 Tom Rock 2 Tom Electro 2
44
Hi-Hat Pedal Hi-Hat Pedal Hi-Hat Pedal 2 Hi-Hat Pedal Hi-Hat Pedal Hi-Hat Pedal
45 Low Tom Low Tom Hybrid Tom 3 Tom Room 3 Tom Rock 3 Tom Electro 3
46
Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open 2 Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open
47 Mid Tom L Mid Tom L Hybrid Tom 4 Tom Room 4 Tom Rock 4 Tom Electro 4
48
Mid Tom H Mid Tom H Hybrid Tom 5 Tom Room 5 Tom Rock 5 Tom Electro 5
49
Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1
50 High Tom High Tom Hybrid Tom 6 Tom Room 6 Tom Rock 6 Tom Electro 6
51
Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1
52 Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal
53 Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup
54 Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine Light Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine
55 Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal
56 Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell
57 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2
58 Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap
59 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2
60 Bongo H Bongo H Bongo H Bongo H Bongo H Bongo H
61 Bongo L Bongo L Bongo L Bongo L Bongo L Bongo L
62 Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Conga H Mute
63 Conga H Open Conga H Open Conga H Open Conga H Open Conga H Open Conga H Open
64 Conga L Conga L Conga L Conga L Conga L Conga L
65 Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H
66 Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L
67 Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H
68 Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L
69 Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa
70 Maracas Maracas Maracas Maracas Maracas Maracas
71 Samba Whistle H Ø Samba Whistle H Ø Samba Whistle H Ø Samba Whistle H Ø Samba Whistle H Ø Samba Whistle H Ø
72
Samba Whistle L Ø Samba Whistle L Ø Samba Whistle L Ø Samba Whistle L Ø Samba Whistle L Ø Samba Whistle L Ø
73
Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short
74 Guiro Long Ø Guiro Long Ø Guiro Long Ø Guiro Long Ø Guiro Long Ø Guiro Long Ø
75
Claves Claves Claves Claves Claves Claves
76 Wood Block H Wood Block H Wood Block H Wood Block H Wood Block H Wood Block H
77 Wood Block L Wood Block L Wood Block L Wood Block L Wood Block L Wood Block L
78 Cuica Mute Cuica Mute Cuica Mute Cuica Mute Cuica Mute Scratch H 2
79 Cuica Open Cuica Open Cuica Open Cuica Open Cuica Open Scratch L 2
80 Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute
81 Triangle Open Triangle Open Triangle Open Triangle Open Triangle Open Triangle Open
82 Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker
83 Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells
84 Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree
85 No Sound
86
87
88
89
90
91
14
Appendix
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
246
MSB/LSB/
PCNote
Analog Kit
(127/0/26)
Key
Off
Dance Kit
(127/0/28)
Key
Off
Jazz Kit
(127/0/33)
Key
Off
Brush Kit
(127/0/41)
Key
Off
Symphony Kit
(127/0/49)
Key
Off
SFX Kit 1
(126/0/1)
Key
Off
12
13 Surdo Mute Kick Dance 1 Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Mute
14 Surdo Open Kick Dance 2 Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo Open
15 Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q
16 Whip Slap Whip Slap Ø Whip Slap Whip Slap Whip Slap
17 Scratch H Scratch Dance 1 Ø Scratch H Scratch H Scratch H
18 Scratch L Scratch Dance 2 Ø Scratch L Scratch L Scratch L
19 Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap
20 Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise
21 Metronome Click Dance Perc 1 Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click
22 Metronome Bell Reverse Dance 1 Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell
23 Seq Click L Dance Perc 2 Seq Click L Seq Click L Seq Click L
24 Seq Click H Hi Q Dance 1 Seq Click H Seq Click H Seq Click H
25 Brush Tap Snare Analog 3 Brush Tap Brush Tap Brush Tap
26 Brush Swirl Ø Vinyl Noise Ø Brush Swirl Ø Brush Swirl Ø Brush Swirl Ø
27 Brush Slap Snare Analog 4 Brush Slap Brush Slap Brush Slap
28 Reverse Cymbal Ø Reverse Cymbal Ø Brush Tap Swirl Ø Brush Tap Swirl Ø Brush Tap Swirl Ø
29 Snare Roll Ø Reverse Dance 2 Ø Snare Roll Ø Snare Roll Ø Snare Roll Ø
30 Hi Q 2 Hi Q 2 Castanet Castanet Castanet
31 Snare Noisy 4 Snare Techno Snare Jazz H Brush Slap 2 Snare Soft
32 Sticks Snare Dance 1 Sticks Sticks Sticks
33 Kick 3 Kick Techno Q Kick Soft Kick Soft Kick Soft 2
34 Open Rim Shot Rim Gate Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot
35 Kick Anlg Short Kick Techno L Kick Tight Kick Tight Gran Cassa
36 Kick Analog Kick Techno Kick Jazz Kick Jazz Gran Cassa Mute Cutting Noise 1 Ø
37 Side Stick Anlg Side Stick Anlg Side Stick Light Side Stick Light
Side Stick Cutting Noise 2 Ø
38 Snare Analog Snare Clap Snare Jazz L Brush Slap 3 Band Snare
39 Hand Clap Dance Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap String Slap Ø
40 Snare Analog 2 Snare Dry Snare Jazz M Brush Tap 2 Band Snare 2
41 Tom Analog 1 Tom Dance 1 Floor Tom L Tom Brush 1 Floor Tom L
42 Hat Close Analog Hi-Hat Closed 3 Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Closed
43 Tom Analog 2 Tom Dance 2 Floor Tom H Tom Brush 2 Floor Tom H
44 Hat Close Anlg 2 Hat Close Anlg 3 Hi-Hat Pedal Hi-Hat Pedal Hi-Hat Pedal
45 Tom Analog 3 Tom Dance 3 Low Tom Tom Brush 3 Low Tom
46 Hat Open Analog Hi-Hat Open 3 Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open
47 Tom Analog 4 Tom Dance 4 Mid Tom L Tom Brush 4 Mid Tom L
48 Tom Analog 5 Tom Dance 5 Mid Tom H Tom Brush 5 Mid Tom H
49 Crash Analog Crash Analog Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 Hand Cymbal
50 Tom Analog 6 Tom Dance 6 High Tom Tom Brush 6 High Tom
51 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Hand Cymbal S
52 Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Flute Key Click Ø
53
Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup
54 Tambourine Tambourine Anlg Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine
55 Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal
56 Cowbell Analog Cowbell Dance Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell
57 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Hand Cymbal 2
58 Vibraslap Vibraslap Analog Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap
59 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Analog Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Hand Cymbal 2 S
60 Bongo H Bongo Analog H Bongo H Bongo H Bongo H
61 Bongo L Bongo Analog L Bongo L Bongo L Bongo L
62 Conga Analog H Conga Analog H Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Conga H Mute
63 Conga Analog M Conga Analog M Conga H Open Conga H Open Conga H Open
64 Conga Analog L Conga Analog L Conga L Conga L Conga L
65 Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H
66 Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L
67 Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H
68 Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L Shower Ø
69
Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Thunder Ø
70
Maracas 2 Maracas 2 Maracas Maracas Maracas Wind Ø
71
Samba Whistle H Ø Samba Whistle H Ø Samba Whistle H Ø Samba Whistle H Ø Samba Whistle H Ø Stream Ø
72
Samba Whistle L Ø Samba Whistle L Ø Samba Whistle L Ø Samba Whistle L Ø Samba Whistle L Ø Bubble Ø
73
Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Feed Ø
74
Guiro Long Ø Guiro Long Ø Guiro Long Ø Guiro Long Ø Guiro Long Ø
75 Claves 2 Claves 2 Claves Claves Claves
76 Wood Block H Dance Perc 3 Wood Block H Wood Block H Wood Block H
77 Wood Block L Dance Perc 4 Ø Wood Block L Wood Block L Wood Block L
78 Scratch H 2 Dance Breath 1 Cuica Mute Cuica Mute Cuica Mute
79 Scratch L 2 Dance Breath 2 Ø Cuica Open Cuica Open Cuica Open
80 Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute
81 Triangle Open Triangle Open Triangle Open Triangle Open Triangle Open
82 Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker
83 Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells
84 Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Dog Ø
85
Horse Ø
86
Bird Tweet Ø
87
88
89
90 Ghost Ø
91
Maou Ø
14
Appendix
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
247
MSB/LSB/
PCNote
SFX Kit 2
(126/0/2)
Key
Off
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36 Phone Call Ø
37 Door Squeak Ø
38 Door Slam Ø
39 Scratch Cut Ø
40 Scratch H 3 Ø
41 Wind Chime Ø
42 Telephone Ring Ø
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52 CarEngnIgnition Ø
53 Car Tires Squeal Ø
54 Car Passing Ø
55 Car Crash Ø
56 Siren Ø
57 Train Ø
58 Jet Plane Ø
59 Starship Ø
60 Burst Ø
61 Roller Coaster Ø
62 Submarine Ø
63
64
65
66
67
68 Laugh Ø
69 Scream Ø
70 Punch Ø
71 Heart Beat Ø
72 Foot Steps Ø
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84 Machine Gun Ø
85 Laser Gun Ø
86 Explosion Ø
87 Firework Ø
88
89
90
91
14
Appendix
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
248
1. Channel Messages
1.1 DDK Mode
MIDI Data Format
Code (Hexadecimal) Function Receive Transmit Remarks
8n, nn, 00-7F Note Off 1ch
2ch
3ch
(4ch)*
5-14ch
15ch
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
UK
LK
PEDAL
LEAD 1
XG
Keyboard Percussion
9n, nn, 00
9n, nn, 01-7F
Note Off
Note On
1ch
2ch
3ch
(4ch)*
5-14ch
15ch
(1ch)*
(2ch)*
(3ch)*
˛
˛
˛
UK
LK
PEDAL
LEAD 1
XG
Keyboard Percussion
An, nn, 00-7F Polyphonic After Touch 5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 00, 00-7F
Bn, 20, 00-7F
Bank select 5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 01, 00-7F Modulation 5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 04, 00-7F 2nd Expression 16ch
(4ch)*
16ch
(4ch)**
Control
LEAD 1
Bn, 05, 00-7F Portamento Time 5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 06, 00-7F
Bn, 26, 00-7F
Data Entry 5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 07, 00-7F Volume 5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 0A, 00-7F Pan 5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 0B, 00-7F Expression 16ch
5-14ch
(16ch)* Control
XG
Bn, 40, 00-7F Sustain
Hold
16ch
5-14ch
(16ch)*
˛
Control
XG
Bn, 41, 00-7F Portamento 5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 42, 00-7F Sostenuto 5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 43, 00-7F Soft Pedal 5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 47, 00-7F Resonance 5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 48, 00-7F Release Time 5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 49, 00-7F Attack Time 5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 4A, 00-7F Brightness 5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 4B, 00-7F Decay Time 5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 4C, 00-7F Vibrato Rate 5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 4D, 00-7F Vibrato Depth 5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 4E, 00-7F Vibrato Delay 5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 54, 00-7F Portamento Control 5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 5B, 00-7F Reverb Send Level 5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 5D, 00-7F Chorus Send Level 5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 5E, 00-7F Variation Effect Send Level 5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 60, 00-7F
Bn, 61, 00-7F
Data Increment
Data Decrement
5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 62, 00-7F
Bn, 63, 00-7F
NRPN LSB
NRPN MSB
5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 64, 00-7F
Bn, 65, 00-7F
RPN LSB
RPN MSB
5-14ch ˛ XG
“˛” indicates “Not available.”
“
Ø” indicates “Available.”
14
Appendix
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
249
* Can be changed in the MIDI settings (page 238).
** Can be output when assigned to channel 4.
1.2 XG Mode
Bn, 78, 00
Bn, 79, 00
Bn, 7B, 00
Bn, 7C, 00
Bn, 7D, 00
Bn, 7E, 00
Bn, 7F, 00
All Sound Off
Reset All Controllers
All Note Off
Omni Off
Omni On
Mono
Poly
5-14ch ˛ XG
Cn, nn Program Change 5-14ch
16ch
˛
16ch
XG
Control
Dn, 00-7F After Touch 1ch
2ch
3ch
(4ch)*
5-14ch
(1ch)*
(2ch)*
˛
UK
LK
PEDAL
LEAD 1
XG
En, 00-7F, 00-7F Pitch Bend 1ch
2ch
(4ch)*
˛
˛
˛
(1-16ch)*
˛
UK
LK
LEAD 1
XG
Code (Hexadecimal) Function Receive Transmit Remarks
8n, nn, 00-7F Note Off 1-16ch ˛
9n, nn, 00
9n, nn, 01-7F
Note On
Note Off
1-16ch
(1ch)*
(2ch)*
(3ch)*
UK
LK
PEDAL
An, nn, 00-7F Polyphonic After Touch 1-16ch ˛
Bn, 00, 00-7F
Bn, 20, 00-7F
Bank select 1-16ch ˛
Bn, 01, 00-7F Modulation
1-16ch
˛
Bn, 04, 00-7F 2nd Expression ˛ 16ch
(4ch)**
Control
LEAD 1
Bn, 05, 00-7F Portamento Time 1-16ch ˛
Bn, 06, 00-7F
Bn, 26, 00-7F
Data Entry 1-16ch ˛
Bn, 07, 00-7F Volume 1-16ch ˛
Bn, 0A, 00-7F Pan 1-16ch ˛
Bn, 0B, 00-7F Expression
1-16ch
(16ch)* Control
Bn, 40, 00-7F Sustain
Hold
1-16ch (16ch)*
˛
Control
Bn, 41, 00-7F Portamento 1-16ch ˛
Bn, 42, 00-7F Sostenuto 1-16ch ˛
Bn, 43, 00-7F Soft Pedal 1-16ch ˛
Bn, 47, 00-7F Resonance 1-16ch ˛
Bn, 48, 00-7F Release Time 1-16ch ˛
Bn, 49, 00-7F Attack Time 1-16ch ˛
Bn, 4A, 00-7F Brightness 1-16ch ˛
Bn, 4B, 00-7F Decay Time 1-16ch ˛
Bn, 4C, 00-7F Vibrato Rate 1-16ch ˛
Bn, 4D, 00-7F Vibrato Depth 1-16ch ˛
Bn, 4E, 00-7F Vibrato Delay 1-16ch ˛
Bn, 54, 00-7F Portamento Control 1-16ch ˛
Code (Hexadecimal) Function Receive Transmit Remarks
14
Appendix
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
250
* Can be changed in the MIDI settings (page 238).
** Can be output when assigned to channel 4.
2. Realtime Messages
* Received only when in the Ext. mode
3. System Exclusive Messages
3.1 Format
Universal Realtime Messages
Bn, 5B, 00-7F Reverb Send Level 1-16ch ˛
Bn, 5D, 00-7F Chorus Send Level 1-16ch ˛
Bn, 5E, 00-7F Variation Effect Send Level 1-16ch ˛
Bn, 60, 00-7F
Bn, 61, 00-7F
Data Increment
Data Decrement
1-16ch ˛
Bn, 62, 00-7F
Bn, 63, 00-7F
NRPN LSB
NRPN MSB
1-16ch ˛
Bn, 64, 00-7F
Bn, 65, 00-7F
RPN LSB
RPN MSB
1-16ch ˛
Bn, 78, 00
Bn, 79, 00
Bn, 7B, 00
Bn, 7C, 00
Bn, 7D, 00
Bn, 7E, 00
Bn, 7F, 00
All Sound Off
Reset All Controllers
All Note Off
Omni Off
Omni On
Mono
Poly
1-16ch ˛
Cn, 00-7F Program Change
1-16ch
16ch Control
Dn, 00-7F After Touch
1-16ch
(1ch)*
(2ch)*
˛
UK
LK
PEDAL
En, 00-7F, 00-7F Pitch Bend
1-16ch
˛
˛
˛
(1-16ch)*
UK
LK
Code (Hexadecimal) Function Receive Transmit Remarks
F8 Clock Ø* Ø
FA Start ØØ
FC Stop ØØ
FE Active Sensing ØØ
FF Reset ˛˛
Code (Hexadecimal) Message Receive Transmit
F0, 7F, 7F, 04, 01, SS, TT, F7
XN
GM2 Master Volume Ø˛
F0, 7F, 7F, 04, 03, SS, TT, F7
XN
GM2 Master Fine Tuning Ø˛
F0, 7F, 7F, 04, 04, 00, TT, F7
XN
GM2 Master Coarse Tuning Ø˛
F0, 7F, 7F, 04, 05, 01, 01, 01, 01, 01, PP, VV, ..., F7
XN
GM2 Reverb Parameter Ø˛
F0, 7F, 7F, 04, 05, 01, 01, 01, 01, 02, PP, VV, ..., F7
XN
GM2 Chorus Parameter Ø˛
F0, 7F, 7F, 09, 01, 0n, PP, VV, ..., F7
XN
GM2 After Touch Parameter Ø˛
Code (Hexadecimal) Function Receive Transmit Remarks
14
Appendix
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
251
Universal Non-Realtime Messages
XG Native
Clavinova Exclusive
Message Exclusive
Electone Exclusive
˛: don’t care N: Device Number (“0” on DDK-7) ID: Model ID (DDK-7 = 52H)
F0, 7F, 7F, 09, 03, 0n, CC, PP, VV, ..., F7
XN
GM2 Control Change Parameter Ø˛
F0, 7F, 7F, 0A, 01, 0n, KK, CC, PP, VV, ..., F7
XN
GM2 Key-Based Controller Ø˛
Code (Hexadecimal) Message Receive Transmit
F0, 7E, 7F, 09, 01, F7
XN
GM ON Ø˛
F0, 7E, 7F, 09, 03, F7
XN
GM2 ON Ø˛
F0, 7E, 7F, 09, 02, F7
XN
GM OFF Ø˛
F0, 7E, 7F, 08, 08, JJ, GG, MM, ..data.., F7
XN
GM2 Scale/Octave Tuning Ø˛
Code (Hexadecimal) Message Receive Transmit
F0, 43, 1N, 4C, AH, AM, AL, ..data.., F7 XG Parameter Change Ø˛
F0, 43, 0N, 4C, BH, BL, AH, AM, AL, ..data.., cc, F7 XG Bulk Dump Ø˛
F0, 43, 1N, 27, 30, 00, 00, MM, LL, cc, F7 XG Master Tuning Ø˛
Code (Hexadecimal) Message Receive Transmit
F0, 43, 73, 01, 02, F7
03
Request for Internal Synch. Mode
Request for External Synch. Mode
Ø
Ø
˛
˛
Code (Hexadecimal) Message Receive Transmit
F0, 43, 60, 7A, F7 Rhythm Start Ø˛
F0, 43, 60, 7D, F7 Rhythm Stop Ø˛
Code (Hexadecimal) Message Receive Transmit
F0, 43, 70, ID, 00, F7 Model ID Data ˛Ø
F0, 43, 70, 70, 30, F7 Request-to-Send Model ID Data Ø˛
F0, 43, 70, 70, 40, nn(*1), 7F, F7
00
Switch ON
Switch OFF
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
F0, 43, 70, 70, 40, 50, TL, TH, F7 Tempo ØØ
F0, 43, 70, 78, 41, cc, dd, F7(*2) Panel Switch Events ØØ
F0, 43, 70, 78, 42, 3C, ..data.., F7 Current Registration Data ØØ
F0, 43, 70, 78, 44, ..data..(*3), F7 MIDI Parameters ØØ
F0, 43, 70, 70, 70, nn(*4), F7 MDR Ø˛
F0, 43, 70, 70, 73, F7 EL ON Ø˛
F0, 43, 70, 70, 78, 00, 00, F7 Bar Signal ˛Ø
Code (Hexadecimal) Message Receive Transmit
14
Appendix
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
252
*1. Switches
*2. Panel Switch Events
Selectors
Volume
Organ Flute Voice
To Lower
Solo Mode
nn Switch Receive Transmit
45H Left Footswitch ØØ
cc Switch dd Remarks
Code Receive Rx Range
Transmit
Tx Range
0F Registration Memory [1-16] Ø [00-0F] ˛ -
cc Switch dd Remarks
Code Receive Rx Range
Transmit
Tx Range
12 Upper Keyboard Voice 1 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN
13 Lower Keyboard Voice 1 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN
14 Upper Keyboard Voice 2 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN
15 Lower Keyboard Voice 2 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN
16 Lead Voice 1 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN
17 Pedal Voice 1 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN
18 Pedal Voice 2 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN
19 Lead Voice 2 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN
1A Percussion Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN
1B Reverb Depth Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Depth Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN
cc Switch dd Remarks
Code Receive Rx Range
Transmit
Tx Range
30 Upper Organ Flute Voice
[U. ORGAN FLUTES]
Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON
31 Lower Organ Flute Voice
[L. ORGAN FLUTES]
Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON
cc Switch dd Remarks
Code Receive Rx Range
Transmit
Tx Range
36 Lead Voice 1 To Lower
[TO LOWER ▼]
Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON
37 Pedal Voice 1 To Lower
[TO LOWER ▲]
Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON
38 Pedal Voice 2 To Lower
[TO LOWER ▲]
Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON
cc Switch dd Remarks
Code Receive Rx Range
Transmit
Tx Range
39 Lead Voice 2 Solo (Knee)
[SOLO (FOOT PEDAL)]
Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON
MIDI Exclusive Format
F0, 43, 70, 78, 41, cc, dd, F7
14
Appendix
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
253
Brilliance
Sustain
Solo Bar
Keyboard Percussion
Disable
Rotary Speaker
Rhythm Sequence
cc Switch dd Remarks
Code Receive Rx Range
Transmit
Tx Range
42 Upper Keyboard Voice 1 Brilliance Ø [00-06] ˛ [00-06] 00:BRILLIANT, 06:MELLOW
43 Lower Keyboard Voice 1 Brilliance Ø [00-06] ˛ [00-06] 00:BRILLIANT, 06:MELLOW
44 Upper Keyboard Voice 2 Brilliance Ø [00-06] ˛ [00-06] 00:BRILLIANT, 06:MELLOW
45 Lower Keyboard Voice 2 Brilliance Ø [00-06] ˛ [00-06] 00:BRILLIANT, 06:MELLOW
46 Lead Voice 1 Brilliance Ø [00-06] ˛ [00-06] 00:BRILLIANT, 06:MELLOW
47 Pedal Voice 1 Brilliance Ø [00-06] ˛ [00-06] 00:BRILLIANT, 06:MELLOW
48 Pedal Voice 2 Brilliance Ø [00-06] ˛ [00-06] 00:BRILLIANT, 06:MELLOW
49 Lead Voice 2 Brilliance Ø [00-06] ˛ [00-06] 00:BRILLIANT, 06:MELLOW
cc Switch dd Remarks
Code Receive Rx Range
Transmit
Tx Range
50 Upper Sustain [UPPER (KNEE)] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON
51 Lower Sustain [LOWER (KNEE)] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON
52 Pedal Sustain [PEDAL] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON
cc Switch dd Remarks
Code Receive Rx Range
Transmit
Tx Range
59 Solo Bar Ø [00-01] Ø - 00:OFF, 01:ON
cc Switch dd Remarks
Code Receive Rx Range
Transmit
Tx Range
5B Keyboard Percussion [1] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON
5C Keyboard Percussion [2] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON
cc Switch dd Remarks
Code Receive Rx Range
Transmit
Tx Range
5F Disable [D.] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON
cc Switch dd Remarks
Code Receive Rx Range
Transmit
Tx Range
60 Rotary Speaker Speed
[ROTARY SP SPEED]
Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON
cc Switch dd Remarks
Code Receive Rx Range
Transmit
Tx Range
61 Sequence 1 [SEQ.1] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON
62 Sequence 2 [SEQ.2] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON
63 Sequence 3 [SEQ.3] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON
64 Sequence 4 [SEQ.4] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON
14
Appendix
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
254
*3. MIDI Parameter
Voice Section Parameters
Panel Voice Parameters
(Address mm: 0 – 7 = UK1
,
UK2
,
LK1
,
LK2
,
LEAD 1
,
LEAD 2
,
PEDAL 1
,
PEDAL 2)
Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range
hh mm ll
10 00-07 00-0D 5 00-7F
00-7F
00
00
00
Voice Assign Number 00-7F
00-7F
00
00
00
Ø 00-7F
00-7F
00
00
00
Ø 00-7F
00-7F
00
00
00
10 00-07 10 1 00-0D Voice Selector Number 00-0D Ø 00-0D Ø 00-0D
10 00-07 11 1 00-7F Volume 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F ˛ -
10 00-07 12 1 00-7F Reverb (Send Level) 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
10 00-07 13 1 00-7F Brilliance 00:BRILLIANT
40:CENTER
7F:MELLOW
Ø 00-7F ˛ -
10 00-07 14 1 00-04 Feet 00:PRESET
01:16'
02:8'
03:4'
04:2'
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-04
10 00-07 15 1 00-7F Pan 00:LEFT
40:CENTER
7F:RIGHT
Ø 00-7F Ø 08-78
10 00-07 16 1 00-7F Touch Tone Initial Touch 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
10 00-07 17 1 00-7F Touch Tone After Touch 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
10 00-07 18 1 00-7F Pitch After Touch 00:NARROW
7F:WIDE
Ø 00-7F Ø 32-4E
10 00-07 19 1 00-7F User Vibrato 00:PRESET
01:USER
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
10 00-07 1A 1 00-7F Vibrato Delay 00:SHORT
7F:LONG
Ø 00-7F Ø 02-1A
10 00-07 1B 1 00-7F Vibrato Depth 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-54
10 00-07 1C 1 00-7F Vibrato Speed 00:SLOW
7F:FAST
Ø 00-7F Ø 3C-6C
10 00-05 1D 1 00-7F Pitch Horizontal Touch 00:NARROW
7F:WIDE
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
10 00-07 1E 1 00-7F Touch Vibrato (On/Off) 00:OFF
7F:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
10 04-07 1F 1 00-7F TO LOWER▼/▲/SOLO (KNEE) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F ˛ -
10 04-05 20 1 00-02 Slide (On/Foot Pedal/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
02:Foot Pedal
Ø 00-02 Ø 00-02
10 04-05 21 1 00-7F Slide Time 00:FAST
7F:SLOW
Ø 00-7F Ø 02-7F
10 00-07 22 1 00-7F Tune/Detune 00:Down
40:Center
7F:Up
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
10 00-01/
04-07
23 1 00-7F 2nd Expression Pitch Bend 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
10 00-05 24 1 00-7F Footswitch Glide Control 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
10 00-07 25 1 3A-46 Transpose 3A:KeyDown
40:Normal
46:KeyUp
Ø 3A-46 Ø 3A-46
10 06-07 28 1 00-7F Poly (On/Off) 00:Mono
01:Poly
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
10 05 29 1 00-7F Priority (Last/Top) 00:TOP
01:LAST
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
10 00-07 2A 1 00-7F Volume Mute 00:Mute OFF
01:Mute ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
MIDI Exclusive Format
F0, 43, 70, 78, 44, hh, mm, ll, ..., F7
14
Appendix
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
255
Organ Flute Voice Parameters (Address mm: 0 – 1 = UK, LK)
10 00-07 40 3 00
00-7F
00-7F
Effect 1 Type MSB/LSB 00
00-7F
00-7F
Ø 00
00-7F
00-7F
Ø 00
00-7F
00-7F
10 00-07 41 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 1 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 42 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 2 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 43 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 3 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 44 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 4 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 45 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 5 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 46 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 6 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 47 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 7 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 48 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 8 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 49 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 9 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 4A 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 10 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 4B 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 11 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 4C 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 12 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 4D 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 13 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 4E 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 14 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 4F 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 15 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 50 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 16 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 51 3 00
00-7F
00-7F
Effect 2 Type MSB/LSB 00
00-7F
00-7F
Ø 00
00-7F
00-7F
Ø 00
00-7F
00-7F
10 00-07 52 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 1 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 53 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 2 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 54 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 3 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 55 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 4 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 56 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 5 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 57 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 6 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 58 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 7 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 59 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 8 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 5A 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 9 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 5B 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 10 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 5C 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 11 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 5D 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 12 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 5E 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 13 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 5F 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 14 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 60 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 15 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 61 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 16 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 62 1 Sustain (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
10 00-07 63 1 Length 7F:Hold
7E:Long
00:Short
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range
hh mm ll
11 00-01 00 1 00-7F Footage 16' 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
11 00-01 01 1 00-7F Footage 8' 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
11 00-01 02 1 00-7F Footage 5-1/3' 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
11 00-01 03 1 00-7F Footage 4' 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
11 00-01 04 1 00-7F Footage 2-2/3' 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range
hh mm ll
14
Appendix
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
256
Keyboard Parameters
Sustain Parameters (Address mm: 0 – 2 = UK, LK, PEDAL)
11 00-01 05 1 00-7F Footage 2' 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
11 00-01 06 1 00-7F Footage 1-3/5' 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
11 00-01 07 1 00-7F Footage 1-1/3' 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
11 00-01 08 1 00-7F Footage 1' 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
11 00-01 09 1 00-7F Response 00:FAST
7F:SLOW
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
11 00-01 0A 1 00-7F Attack 4' 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
11 00-01 0B 1 00-7F Attack 2-2/3' 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
11 00-01 0C 1 00-7F Attack 2' 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
11 00-01 0D 1 00-7F Attack Length 00:Short
7F:Long
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
11 00-01 10 1 00-7F Organ Flutes (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F ˛ -
11 00-01 11 1 00-7F Volume 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
11 00-01 12 1 00-7F Reverb (Send Level) 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
11 00-01 13 1 00-7F Type (Sine/Vintage) 00:Sine
01:Vintage
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
11 00-01 40 3 00
00-7F
00-7F
Effect Type MSB/LSB 00
00-7F
00-7F
Ø 00
00-7F
00-7F
Ø 00
00-7F
00-7F
11 00-01 41 2 0000-7F7F
1st:ParameterMSB
2nd:ParameterLSB
Effect1 Parameter1 MSB/LSB
Ø 0000-7F7F
Ø
0000-7F7F
11 00-01 42 2 0000-7F7F Effect1 Parameter2 MSB/LSB Ø 0000-7F7F
Ø
0000-7F7F
11 00-01 43 2 0000-7F7F Effect1 Parameter3 MSB/LSB Ø 0000-7F7F
Ø
0000-7F7F
11 00-01 44 2 0000-7F7F Effect1 Parameter4 MSB/LSB
Ø
0000-7F7F
Ø
0000-7F7F
11 00-01 45 2 0000-7F7F Effect1 Parameter5 MSB/LSB
Ø
0000-7F7F
Ø
0000-7F7F
11 00-01 46 2 0000-7F7F Effect1 Parameter6 MSB/LSB
Ø
0000-7F7F
Ø
0000-7F7F
11 00-01 47 2 0000-7F7F Effect1 Parameter7 MSB/LSB
Ø
0000-7F7F
Ø
0000-7F7F
11 00-01 48 2 0000-7F7F Effect1 Parameter8 MSB/LSB
Ø
0000-7F7F
Ø
0000-7F7F
11 00-01 49 2 0000-7F7F Effect1 Parameter9 MSB/LSB
Ø
0000-7F7F
Ø
0000-7F7F
11 00-01 4A 2 0000-7F7F Effect1 Parameter10 MSB/LSB
Ø
0000-7F7F
Ø
0000-7F7F
11 00-01 4B 2 0000-7F7F Effect1 Parameter11
Ø
0000-7F7F
Ø
0000-7F7F
11 00-01 4C 2 0000-7F7F Effect1 Parameter12
Ø
0000-7F7F
Ø
0000-7F7F
11 00-01 4D 2 0000-7F7F Effect1 Parameter13
Ø
0000-7F7F
Ø
0000-7F7F
11 00-01 4E 2 0000-7F7F Effect1 Parameter14
Ø
0000-7F7F
Ø
0000-7F7F
11 00-01 4F 2 0000-7F7F Effect1 Parameter15
Ø
0000-7F7F
Ø
0000-7F7F
11 00-01 50 2 0000-7F7F Effect1 Parameter16
Ø
0000-7F7F
Ø
0000-7F7F
11 00-01 62 1 00-7F Sustain (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø
00-7F
Ø
00-01
11 00-01 63 1 00-7F Length 7F:Hold
7E:Long
00:Short
Ø
00-7F
Ø
15-3D,7F
Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range
hh mm ll
12 00-02 00 1 00-7F Sustain (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F ˛ -
12 00-02 01 1 00-7F Length 00:Short
7F:Long
Ø 00-7F ˛ 15-3D
Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range
hh mm ll
14
Appendix
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
257
Keyboard Percussion Parameters (Address mm: 1 – 2 = K.B.P. [1], K.B.P. [2])
Rhythm
Rhythm Parameters
Rhythm Sequence Parameters
Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range
hh mm ll
12 01-02 10 1 00-7F Keyboard Percussion (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F ˛ -
12 01-02 11 1 00-08 Keyboard Percussion Menu 00:PRESET
01:USER 1
02:USER 2
03:USER 3
04:USER 4
05:USER 5
06:USER 6
07:USER 7
08:USER 8
Ø 00-08 Ø 00-08
Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range
hh mm ll
13 00 00-0B 2 0000-7F7F Rhythm Assign Number 0000-7F7F Ø 00-7F
00-7F
Ø 00-7F
00-7F
13 00 10 1 00-0B Rhythm Selector Number 00-0B Ø 00-0B Ø 00-0B
13 00 11 1 00-7F Percussion Volume 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F ˛ -
13 00 12 1 00-7F Percussion Reverb (Send Level) 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
13 00 13 1 00-7F 2nd Expression
Tempo Control (On/Off)
00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
13 00 14 1 00-7F Footswitch Rhythm Control 00:INTRO 1
01:INTRO 2
02:INTRO 3
08:MAIN A
09:MAIN B
0A:MAIN C
0B:MAIN D
18:BREAK
20:ENDING 1
21:ENDING 2
22:ENDING 3
7E:STOP
7F:OFF
(INTRO 1 –
STOP)
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
13 00 15 1 00-7F Add Drum (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
13 00 16 1 00-7F Main Drum (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
13 00 17 1 00-7F Chord 1 (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
13 00 18 1 00-7F Chord 2 (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
13 00 19 1 00-7F Pad (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
13 00 1A 1 00-7F Phrase 1 (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
13 00 1B 1 00-7F Phrase 2 (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
13 00 1C 1 00-7F Auto Fill (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range
hh mm ll
13 01 00-03 1 00-7F Sequence [SEQ.1] – [SEQ.4] 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F ˛ -
14
Appendix
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
258
Accompaniment Parameters
A.B.C. Function Parameters
M.O.C. Function Parameters
Section Parameters
Keyboard Percussion Parameters
Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range
hh mm ll
13 02 11 1 00-7F Accompaniment Volume 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
13 02 12 1 00-7F Accompaniment Reverb
(Send Level)
00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range
hh mm ll
13 03 00 1 00-7F Auto Bass Chord Mode 00:OFF
01:Single Finger
02:Fingered
03:Custom A.B.C.
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-03
13 03 01 1 00-7F Lower Memory (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
13 03 02 1 00-7F Pedal Memory (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range
hh mm ll
13 04 00 1 00-7F Melody On Chord Mode 00:OFF
01:1
02:2
03:3
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-03
13 04 01 1 00-7F M.O.C. Foot Pedal Control
(On/Off)
00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range
hh mm ll
13 05 00 1 00-7F Intro 1 (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
13 05 01 1 00-7F Intro 2 (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
13 05 02 1 00-7F Intro 3 (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
13 05 08 1 00-7F Main A (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
13 05 09 1 00-7F Main B (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
13 05 0A 1 00-7F Main C (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
13 05 0B 1 00-7F Main D (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
13 05 18 1 00-7F Break (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
13 05 20 1 00-7F Ending 1 (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
13 05 21 1 00-7F Ending 2 (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
13 05 22 1 00-7F Ending 3 (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range
hh mm ll
13 10 11 1 00-7F Volume 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
13 10 12 1 00-7F Reverb (Send Level) 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
14
Appendix
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
259
Overall
System Parameters
Effect Parameters (Overall): Reverb
Effect Parameters (Overall): Rhythm Reverb
Effect Parameters (Overall): Rotary Speaker
Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range
hh mm ll
14 00 00 1 00-7F Disable (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F ˛ -
14 00 01 1 00-7F Organ Flute Attack Mode 00:Each
01:First
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
14 00 02 1 3A-46 Transpose 3A:KeyDown
40:Normal
46:KeyUp
Ø 3A-46 Ø 3A-46
14 00 03 1 01-0C 2nd Expression Range 01:100 C
0C:1200 C
Ø 01-0C Ø 01-0C
14 00 04 1 00-7F Footswitch Mode 00:OFF
01:Rhythm
02:Glide
03:
Rotary Speaker
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-03
14 00 05 1 00-7F Pitch 00:PitchDown
40:Normal
7F:PitchUp
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
14 00 06 1 00-7F Footswitch Glide Time 00:FAST
7F:SLOW
Ø 00-7F Ø 04-1C
14 00 08 1 00-7F MIDI Control Expression (INT/EXT) 00:Internal
01:External
Ø 00-7F ˛ -
14 00 09 1 00-7F MIDI Control Lead 1 (INT/EXT) 00:Internal
01:External
Ø 00-7F ˛ -
14 00 0A 3 00-04, 06
00-03
00-0B
Registration Menu 00-04, 06
00-03
00-0B
Ø 00-04, 06
00-03
00-0B
Ø 00-04, 06
00-03
00-0B
Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range
hh mm ll
14 01 00 1 00-7F Reverb Depth 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F ˛ -
14 01 01 1 00-7F Reverb Time (Panel) 00:FAST
7F:SLOW
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-45
14 01 02 3 00
00-7F
00-7F
Reverb Type (Panel) 00
00-7F
00-7F
Ø 00
00-7F
00-7F
Ø 00
00-7F
00-7F
Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range
hh mm ll
14 02 01 1 00-7F Reverb Time (Rhythm) 00:FAST
7F:SLOW
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-45
14 02 02 3 00
00-7F
00-7F
Reverb Type (Rhythm) 00
00-7F
00-7F
Ø 00
00-7F
00-7F
Ø 00
00-7F
00-7F
Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range
hh mm ll
14 03 00 1 00-7F Rotary Speaker Speed (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F ˛ -
14 03 01 1 00-7F Rotary Speaker Speed Control
Mode
00:STOP
01:SLOW
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
14 03 02 2 0000-
007F
Rotary Speaker Speed Control
Speed
0000:SLOW
007F:FAST
Ø 0000-007F Ø 0040-007F
14
Appendix
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
260
AUX OUT
Foot Pedal
*
4. MDR
Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range
hh mm ll
14 04 00-13 1 00-03 AUX OUT
Address II: 00-07 = UK1, UK2,
LK1, LK2, Lead1, Lead2,
PEDAL1, PEDAL2
08 = Upper Organ Flutes, 09 =
Lower Organ Flutes, 0A = Main
Drum, 0B = Add Drum, 0C =
Accompaniment, 11 = KBP, 12 =
MIC, 13 = XG
00:MAIN
01:SUB1
02:SUB2
03:SUB1&2
Ø 00,04-7F
01
02
03
Ø 00
01
02
03
Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range
hh mm ll
14 05 00 1 00-09 Foot Pedal 1 Assign 00:OFF
01:Expression
02:Sustain
03:Slide
04:MOC
05:Solo
06:Rhythm Control
07:Glide
08:Rotary Speaker
09:Regist Shift
Ø 00,0A-7F
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
Ø 00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
14 05 01 1 00-01 Foot Pedal 1 Porality 00:-
01:+
Ø 00
01
Ø 00
01
14 05 02 1 00-7F Foot Pedal 1 Data (ON/OFF) Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
14 05 10 1 00-09 Foot Pedal 2 Assign 00:OFF
01:Expression
02:Sustain
03:Slide
04:MOC
05:Solo
06:Rhythm Control
07:Glide
08:Rotary Speaker
09:Regist Shift
Ø 00,0A-7F
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
Ø 00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
14 05 11 1 00-01 Foot Pedal 2 Porality 00:-
01:+
Ø 00
01
Ø 00
01
14 05 12 1 00-7F Foot Pedal 2 Data (ON/OFF) Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
nn Command Receive Transmit
01H Play Start Ø˛
02H Play Stop Ø˛
03H Record Start Ø˛
04H Record Stop Ø˛
05H Fast Forward Start Ø˛
06H Fast Forward Stop Ø˛
09H Rhythm Pointer Reset Ø˛
14
Appendix
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
261
0, 32
1, 5, 7, 10
4
6, 38
11
16
64
65-67
71-78
84, 91, 93, 94
96, 97
98-99, 100-101
:True Voice
1, 2, 3, 16
(
*
1)
1-16
Ø 9nH, v=1-127
˛ 9nH, v=0
˛
Ø
˛
˛
Ø
(
*
7)
˛
Ø
(
*
7)
˛
Ø
(
*
7)
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
Ø
(
*
10)
************************
˛
˛
˛
Ø
Ø
˛
˛
˛
˛
Ø
˛
*1;
*2;
*3;
*4;
*5;
*6;
*8;
*10;
*11;
*7; CONTROL only
*9; External Mode only
1ch: UK, 2ch: LK, 3ch: PEDAL, 16ch: CONTROL
1ch: UK, 2ch: LK, 3ch: PEDAL, 4ch: LEAD1, 5-14ch: XG, 15ch: KEYBOARD PERCUSSION, 16ch: CONTROL
UK: 48-96, LK: 36-96, PEDAL: 36-60
UK, LK, PEDAL, LEAD1: 36-96, XG: 0-127, PERCUSSION: 3-127
UK: UK HorizontalTouch, LK: LK HorizontalTouch
XG only
UK only
CONTROL: 0-15
UK, LK, PEDAL, CONTROL: 0-15 XG: 0-127
Mode 3
˛
************************
36-96
(
*
3)
************************
Ø
Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY
Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY
Ø
(
*
5)
1-3, 5-16
(
*
2)
4
Ø 9nH, v=1-127
˛ 9nH, v=0 or 8nH
Ø
(
*
6)
Ø
Ø
(
*
6)
Ø
(
*
6)
Ø
(
*
7)
Ø
(
*
6)
Ø
(
*
6, 7)
˛
Ø
(
*
6, 7)
Ø
(
*
6)
Ø
(
*
6)
Ø
(
*
6)
Ø
(
*
6)
Ø
(
*
6)
Ø
(
*
11)
˛
˛
˛
Ø
(
*
9)
Ø
Ø (120)
(
*
6)
Ø (121)
(
*
6)
˛
Ø (123-127)
(
*
6)
Ø
˛
Mode 3
˛
˛
0-127
(
*
4)
Ø
Ø
Bank Select
2
nd
Expression
Data Entry
Expression
VA After Touch
Sustain
Sound Controller
Data Entry SW
NRPN, RPN
(FAH, FCH)
Ø : Yes
˛ : No
Date: 6-Apr-2006
Version: 1.00
YAMAHA DDK / Model: DDK-7
Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO
Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO
TransmittedFunction Recognized Remarks
Basic
Channel
Note
Number
Velocity
After
Touch
Pitch Bend
Control
Change
Program
Change
System Exclusive
System
Common
System
Real Time
Aux
Messages
Notes
Mode
Default
Changed
Note on
Note off
Key's
Ch's
:Clock
:Commands
:All Sound Off
:Reset All Cntrls
:Local On/Off
:All Notes Off
:Active Sense
:Reset
:Song Position
:Song Select
:Tune
:True number
Default
Messages
Altered
MIDI Implementation Chart
14
Appendix
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
262
0, 32
1, 5, 7, 10
4
6, 38
11
16
64
65-67
71-78
84, 91, 93, 94
96, 97
98-99, 100-101
:True Voice
1, 2, 3, 16
1-16
Ø 9nH, v=1-127
˛ 9nH, v=0
˛
Ø
˛
˛
Ø
˛
Ø
˛
Ø
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
Ø 0-15
************************
˛
˛
˛
Ø
Ø
*1;
Same as that in the EL mode
Mode3
˛
************************
36-96
************************
Ø
Ø
1-16
1-16
Ø 9nH, v=1-127
˛ 9nH, v=0 or 8nH
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
˛
Ø
Ø
˛
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
Mode 3
˛
˛
0-127
Ø
Ø
Bank Select
2
nd
Expression
Data Entry
Expression
VA After Touch
Sustain
Sound Controller
Data Entry SW
NRPN, RPN
Date: 6-Apr-2006
Version: 1.00
YAMAHA [XG mode] / Model: DDK-7
Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY
Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY
Ø : Yes
˛ : No
Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO
Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO
˛
˛
˛
˛
Ø
˛
Ø (120)
Ø (121)
˛
Ø (123-127)
Ø
˛
Transmitted
(
*
1)
Function Recognized Remarks
Basic
Channel
Note
Number
Velocity
After
Touch
Pitch Bend
Control
Change
Program
Change
System Exclusive
System
Common
System
Real Time
Aux
Messages
Notes
Mode
Default
Changed
Note on
Note off
Key's
Ch's
:Clock
:Commands
:Song Position
:Song Select
:Tune
:True number
Default
Messages
Altered
:All Sound Off
:Reset All Cntrls
:Local On/Off
:All Notes Off
:Active Sense
:Reset
14
Appendix
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
263
Troubleshooting
Problem Possible Cause and Solution
GENERAL OPERATION
The sound is not heard for about 10 seconds after
turning the power on.
This is normal; the DDK-7 takes a while to start up.
A cracking noise is sometimes heard. Noise may be produced when either an electrical appliance is turned on or an
electric power tool (such as drill) is used in the proximity of the DDK-7. If this
occurs, plug the DDK-7 into an electrical outlet located as far as possible from
the device that seems to be the source of the problem.
Interference from radio, TV, or other sources occurs. This is caused by the proximity of a high-power broadcasting station, an
amateur ham radio setup or a mobile phone.
The sound of the DDK-7 causes surrounding objects
to resonate.
Because the DDK-7 is capable of producing powerful bass sounds,
resonance may be caused in surrounding objects, such as cabinets or glass
windows. To avoid this, relocate the objects or lower the DDK-7’s volume.
In the LCD display, there are some black points (unlit)
or white points (always lit).
Unfortunately, this is a common characteristic of TFT-LCDs.
The sound is too small even when the volume is set to
its maximum.
• The Master Volume may be set around the minimum position. Turn it
clockwise.
• The Expression Pedal or Foot Pedal may not be pressed down. Press it
down with your toe.
Foot Pedals has no effect. “OFF” is selected in the Foot Pedal display. Select function to assign it to the
Foot Pedal. (page 196)
The DDK-7 panel does not function normally or the
content of the memorized data has changed.
This happens very rarely. Occasionally, power surges and spikes due to
electrical storms or other reasons may cause the DDK-7 to malfunction and/or
alter the contents of memorized data. If this happens, perform the Factory Set
operation to reset the DDK-7 (page 23).
The Pedal Unit does not work. A cable of the Pedal Unit is disconnected. Make sure that power is OFF when
connecting or disconnecting the pedal.
Some parts cannot be heard from the Headphones or
an external speakers.
The parts are assigned to AUX OUT SUB jacks. If you want to hear all parts
from Headphones, select AUX OUT MAIN jacks for all parts. (page 228) If you
want to hear all parts from an external speakers, use the output from the mixer.
14
Appendix
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
264
VOICES/RHYTHMS
The pitch may sound excessively high on the
Pedalboard and low in the higher registers of the
Lower and Upper keyboards.
This may occur when you compare the DDK-7’s sounds with that of a piano.
Because of the difference of the harmonics structure, the tuning system of the
DDK-7 is different from the piano in the higher and lower ranges.
Some of the Voices may contain cracking and/or noisy
sounds.
You may find these mainly in the wind instrument Voices. These are purposely
added effects to the Voices to reproduce the characteristics of the wind
instruments such as the pipe vibrations, breath noises and squeaks.
When too many keys are pressed, not all of the notes
sound.
Total polyphonic capacity (notes sounding for both Upper and Lower
Keyboards) is 14 notes. When you turn the Pedal Polyphonic mode to on, the
total is 14 for all keyboards, Upper, Lower and Pedalboard.
Only one sound is heard when two notes of the Lead
or Pedal Voices are simultaneously played.
For practical performance reasons, the DDK-7 has been designed so that
only one note of the Lead or Pedal Voices can be played at a time. If you want,
the pedal Voice can be set to polyphonic mode (page 42).
The Pedal Voices do not sound, even though the
volume is properly set.
• The Single Finger or Fingered Chord mode of Auto Bass Chord is on. Turn
off the mode in the display (page 71).
• TO LOWER buttons in the Pedal Voice sections are turned on. Turn the
function off (page 29).
When selecting a Voice or rhythm, the Voice or rhythm
title at the top of the LCD does not match the selected
Voice or rhythm.
The currently assigned Voice or rhythm is displayed at the top of the LCD, and
remains until another Voice or rhythm has been selected.
When keys are pressed, the sounds of percussion
instruments are also heard.
The Keyboard Percussion function has been turned on. When not using the
function, be sure to turn it off (page 74).
Even though a User button’s rhythm has been
selected and started, the pattern does not sound.
Since the User buttons contain User rhythms, no rhythm will sound if a pattern
has not been saved to the selected User button.
EFFECTS
The Touch Tone function does not operate. Adjust the Touch Tone settings in the Voice Condition display (page 41).
The Reverb effect is not applied to the desired Voice
sections, even when the total Reverb depth on the
panel is increased.
Increase the Reverb depth for the desired Voice sections in Reverb Display
Pages 2 – 3.
The Rotary Speaker effect cannot be heard, even
when the [ROTARY SP SPEED] button in the DISPLAY
SELECT section is on.
Rotary Speaker must be selected first in Voice Condition display Pages 3 and/
or 4 (for panel Voices), or in the Organ Flute Voices ATTACK/VOLUME Page
(for Organ Flute Voices).
ACCOMPANIMENT
The pitch in the Single Finger mode does not change,
even when pressing different keys of the keyboard.
Single Finger mode will only produce notes when played within a fixed octave
interval on the Lower keyboard. If notes with the same letter name are pressed
outside of that range, the chords that are sounded will share the same pitch.
While an Intro/Ending pattern is automatically playing,
the Lower keyboard does not produce any sound,
even when the keys are played.
Since the Accompaniment chords play automatically one after another, the
Lower keyboard is designed not to produce any sound during the playback of
an Intro/Ending pattern.
The Accompaniment cannot be heard even when an
appropriate Accompaniment type is selected and the
rhythm has been started.
• The Accompaniment volume may have been set to 0. Be sure to raise the
Accompaniment volume in the Rhythm Condition display (page 71).
• All Accompaniment parts may be set to off (mute). Set the desired part on
(page 70).
The harmony notes of the Melody On Chord function
cannot be heard.
The Upper keyboard has been set to sound only Lead Voices. Increase the
volume of the Upper Keyboard Voices.
The bass phrase of the Auto Bass Cord cannot be
heard.
The pedal polyphonic mode may be set to on. Turn it off in the Voice Condition
display (page 42).
REGISTRATION MEMORY
Certain functions have not been memorized to
Registration Memory.
Some functions cannot be memorized. Refer to page 90.
Problem Possible Cause and Solution
14
Appendix
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
265
VOICE EDITING
During Voice editing, the specified Voice isn’t heard,
even when the keyboard is played.
• The Element is turned to mute or its level is set to minimum. Turn it to on or
increase the volume.
•You may have played keys outside the range of Note Limit. Play only keys
within the Note Limit range.
An error message appears while the Voice name is
entered.
Voice name capacity is 16 characters. Delete the unnecessary letters or
spaces.
RHYTHM PROGRAM
During use of the Rhythm Pattern Program, no sound
is produced even when you play a certain percussion
sound.
If percussion sounds have been recorded while memory is full, no
subsequently selected instruments can be heard or recorded. If necessary,
erase some of the less necessary percussion sounds and play again.
MUSIC DATA RECORDER
Recording or playback cannot be performed. • The part buttons in the Rec Standby display or Playing display may have
been turned off. Turn the desired part to REC or PLAY.
• The performance data is too large. The maximum limit for recording
performance data is 1 MB.
• The media is write-protected. Cancel the write-protect.
• The media/folder may contain EL-format songs. You cannot record to the
media/folder that contains EL-format songs. Create a new folder and record
the song to it.
Recording is stopped before the performance is
finished.
• The amount of recorded data on the media is close to the maximum limit.
Either use another media or delete the data of unnecessary songs.
• When you overwrite the song, the length of a subsequently recorded part
cannot exceed the length of the previously recorded parts. Delete the
previously recorded song, then record again (page 129).
• The performance data is too large. The maximum limit for recording
performance data is 1 MB.
An error message appears while entering a folder
name or song name.
• The song/folder name is too long. The capacity is 50 letters.
• The song/folder name may be an invalid name. Refer to page 115.
• The path name is too long. The capacity of the path name is 234 letters.
Reduce the layer or shorten the song/folder name to shorten the path.
The rhythm does not start at the beginning of a
recording, or stops in the middle of the performance.
The M.D.R. is designed so that the rhythm cannot be started at the very
beginning of a recording. If you wish to use the rhythm, start it after the time
indicator appears in the display.
The floppy disk cannot be formatted when you want to
format an unformatted disk.
Recognizing an unformatted disk takes a few seconds after it is inserted.
Wait about 30 seconds, then try to format again.
The notes of the recording are “stuck” and sound
continuously.
During playback, you may have removed the USB flash memory or floppy
disk. Whenever you wish to stop playback, always press the [J] (Stop)
button before removing the media.
Problem Possible Cause and Solution
14
Appendix
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
266
Specifications
KEYBOARD Keyboard Type
UPPER: 49 Keys (C-C) Standard (FS)
LOWER: 61Keys (C-C) Standard (FS)
Touch Tone
UPPER: Initial Touch/After Touch
LOWER: Initial Touch/After Touch
TONE GENERATION
AWM2
Maximum Polyphony
Voice Sections: 128 notes
Organ/Rhythm Sections, XG: 128 notes
Multi Timbral Capacity
16
Wave
Voice Sections: 177MB (when converted to 16-bit linear format)
Organ/Rhythm Sections, XG: 166MB (when converted to 16-bit linear format)
Registration Memory
1-16, D. (Disable)
Basic Registration
1-16, Current Registration
Registration Menu
288 Registrations
Voice Preset Voice
Preset: 415 Voices + 25 Drum Kits
XG(Only for playing): 480 Voices + 11 Drum Kits
User Voice: 16
Voice Sections
UPPER: 2, LEAD: 2, LOWER: 2, PEDAL: 2
Voice Buttons
SECTION SELECT, VOLUME UP/DOWN,
TO LOWER (LEAD1, PEDAL1,2), SOLO (LEAD2)
Effects
Reverb: 29 Types x 2 (Voice/Rhythm), Brilliance, Sustain,
Insertion(1, 2)x 183 Types x 8
Organ Flute Voice Organ Sections
UPPER, LOWER
Type
SINE, VINTAGE
Footage
16’, 5 1/3’, 8’, 4’, 2 2/3’, 2’, 1 3/5’, 1 1/3’, 1’,
Attack: 4’, 2 2/3’, 2’, LENGTH, RESPONSE
Mode
FIRST, EACH
Organ Effect
15 Type
Control
U.ORGAN FLUTES, L.ORGAN FLUTES, ROTARY SP SPEED
Rhythm Rhythm
Preset: 274 Pattern x 7 parts x 15 Sections
User Rhythm: 48 Pattern x 7 parts x 15 Sections
Rhythm Buttons
SECTION SELECT, VOLUME UP/DOWN
Parts
Main Drum, Add Drum, Chord 1, Chord 2, Pad, Phrase1, Phrase 2
Rhythm Control
INTRO 1,2,3, ENDING 1,2,3, MAIN A,B,C,D, FILL IN A,B,C,D, BREAK
Tempo
40 - 240
Keyboard Percussion
Preset: 2, User: 8
Subordinate
Performance
Auto Bass Chord
3 Type, Memory (LOWER, PEDAL)
Melody On Chord
3 Type, Memory (LOWER, PEDAL)
PROGRAMS Voice Edit Layers
AWM (4)
Parameter
Element ON/OFF, EQ Low Frequency, EQ Low Gain, EQ High Frequency, EQ
High Gain, Level, Note Limit, Pan, Note Shift, Tune Fine, Attack Rate, Release
Rate, Cutoff Frequency, Resonance, LFO waveform, LFO Speed, LFO Pitch
Modulation Depth, LFO Frequency Modulation Depth, LFO Amplitude
Modulation Depth
Rhythm Pattern
Program
Sections
INTRO 1, 2, 3, ENDING 1, 2, 3, MAIN A, B, C, D, FILL IN A, B, C, D, BREAK
Note Resolution
480 ppq (parts per quarter note)
Beat
2/4, 3/4, 4/4, 5/4
Measure
32
Kits
20 Drum Kits + 5 SFX Kits
Accompaniment
Chord1, 2
Voice
480 Voices
Effects
Reverb: 29 Types, Chorus:15 Types, Variations: 183 Type
Percussion Instrument
Setting
Pan, Volume, Reverb, Pitch Coarse/Fine
14
Appendix
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
267
Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or
modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in
every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer.
Rhythm Sequence
Program
Sequence
140 measures x 4 Sequences
Registration
Sequence Program
Sequence
140 Registration x 4Sequence, Next Registration
Set Resolution
96 ppq (parts per quarter note)
Keyboard Percussion
Assign
Kits
16 Drum Kits
Drum Setup
Pan, Volume, Reverb, Pitch Coarse/Fine
Registration Shift Steps
80 Steps
Shift End
Stop, Top, Next Regist
Unifying parameter Parameters
Reverb (Voice/Rhythm), Volume, Pan, Brilliance, Sustain
M. D. R. Folder
Up to 100 folders can exist in one media.
Song
Up to 100 songs can exist in one folder.
Registration
Up to 50 Registrations can exist in one song.
Recording
UPPER, LOWER, PEDAL, CONTROL, LEAD, K.B.P.
Playing
UPPER, LOWER, PEDAL, CONTROL, LEAD, K.B.P., XG
Sequence Format
DDK Original format (Copy Protect), SMF format 0, 1 (Format 1 load only)
Format Conversion
Convert TO EL, Convert FROM EL, Convert to XG
CONTROLS Display Control
VOICE DISPLAY, REGIST MENU, FOOT SWITCH, MDR, INTERNET, UTILITY,
PROGRAM, SUSTAIN, REVERB
Foot Pedal Section
1 (Expression), 2 (Sustain)
Select
Expression, Sustain, Rhythm, Glide, Rotary speaker, Slide, M.O.C.
FootSwitch (When
DDKU-P7 is used)
Left
Rhythm, Glide, Rotary speaker
Right
Shift, Jump, User
OTHERS LCD Display Size
6.5-inch 144(W) x 78.24(H)mm
Liquid Crystal Display
TFT(WVGA) + touch panel
Drive Method
Active Matrix
Dots
800 x RGB x 480 dots
Connectors
PHONES, MIC, MIC VOLUME, OUTPUT L/L+R, R(Phone), AUX OUT(LEVEL
FIXED) MAIN L/L+R, R, SUB 1,2(Phone), AUX IN L/L+R, R(Phone), TO PEDAL,
OPTICAL OUT, USB TO DEVICE x 2, USB TO HOST, MIDI IN/OUT, FOOT
PEDAL 1(VOLUME), 2(SUSTAIN), AC INLET
Power Consumption
51W
Dimensions (W x D x H), Weight
1,150 (W) x 424 (D) x 173 (H) mm, 18kg
Supplied Accessories
Owner’s Manual, AC Power cord
14
Appendix
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
268
Numerics
2nd Expression Pedal............................................................. 205
A
AC INLET jack......................................................................... 223
ACCENT.................................................................................. 156
Accompaniment........................................................................ 70
Add Drum ................................................................................. 70
AFTER touch (Pitch).................................................................. 42
AFTER touch (Touch Tone)....................................................... 41
ASSEMBLE ............................................................................. 153
ASSIGN (Keyboard Percussion)............................................... 79
ATTACK (Organ Flutes) ............................................................ 38
ATTACK RATE (Voice Edit)..................................................... 142
Auto Bass Chord....................................................................... 71
Auto Fill ..................................................................................... 64
AUX IN .................................................................................... 225
AUX OUT (LEVEL FIXED) ....................................................... 225
AWM (Voice Edit).................................................................... 140
B
BAR/BEAT................................................................................. 66
Bookmark................................................................................ 214
BREAK ...................................................................................... 63
Browser........................................................................... 211, 218
C
CHANGE SONG NAME .......................................................... 114
Channel Messages ................................................................. 236
CHORD 1 .................................................................................. 70
CHORD 2 .................................................................................. 70
CHORUS (Rhythm Pattern Program) ...................................... 169
Control Change....................................................................... 236
Control Menu .......................................................................... 211
CONVERT FROM EL............................................................... 135
CONVERT TO EL .................................................................... 134
CONVERT TO XG ................................................................... 132
CUSTOM A.B.C. ....................................................................... 72
CUTOFF FREQ........................................................................ 143
D
[D.] (Disable) ............................................................................ 91
DATA CONTROL dial................................................................ 10
DELAY (Vibrato)........................................................................ 43
DEPTH (Reverb) ....................................................................... 46
DEPTH (Vibrato)........................................................................ 43
Display Select ........................................................................... 10
E
EACH (Organ Flutes).................................................................38
EFFECT......................................................................................45
Effect category (Voice)..............................................................45
Effect Parameters ......................................................................45
EFFECT TYPE (Organ Flutes)....................................................39
Effect type (Voice) .....................................................................45
Element....................................................................................137
ENDING.....................................................................................63
EQ (Equalizer) .........................................................................140
EXTERNAL...............................................................................239
F
Factory Set ................................................................................23
Fast Forward............................................................................123
FEET ..........................................................................................42
File ...........................................................................................109
FILL IN .......................................................................................62
Filter.........................................................................................143
FINGERED CHORD...................................................................72
FIRST (Organ Flutes).................................................................38
Folder ......................................................................................109
Foot Pedal ...............................................................................196
FOOT PEDAL jacks .................................................................224
FOOT SWITCH ..................................................................94, 193
FOOTAGE..................................................................................37
Footswitches............................................................................193
FORMAT (MDR).......................................................................103
G
Gate Time ................................................................................165
Glide ........................................................................................195
H
Headphones............................................................................225
Home Page..............................................................................217
I
INITIAL touch.............................................................................41
Initialize (Factory Set) ................................................................23
Initialize (Internet Settings) ......................................................221
Initialize (Registration Memory) .................................................93
INTERNAL ...............................................................................239
INTERNET................................................................................210
Internet Direct Connection ......................................................209
INTRO........................................................................................62
J
Jacks and Controls..................................................................223
JUMP .........................................................................................95
Index
14
Appendix
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
269
K
Keyboard Percussion ............................................................... 74
L
L. ORGAN FLUTES ................................................................... 37
LAN ......................................................................................... 219
LANGUAGE .............................................................................. 16
LAST (Lead Voice).................................................................... 42
LAYER (Voice Edit) ................................................................. 141
LCD BRIGHTNESS ................................................................... 17
LCD Display.............................................................................. 10
LEAD 1, 2.................................................................................... 8
Lead Slide................................................................................. 44
Lead Voice................................................................................ 24
LEVEL (Voice Edit).................................................................. 142
LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator)............................................. 145
LOWER 1, 2 ................................................................................ 8
Lower Keyboard Voice ............................................................. 25
M
[M.] (Memory) ........................................................................... 89
M.O.C........................................................................................ 73
MAIN ......................................................................................... 62
Main Drum ................................................................................ 70
MAIN/FILL IN ............................................................................ 62
MASTER VOLUME .................................................................... 12
MDR ........................................................................................ 102
Melody On Chord ..................................................................... 73
MEMORY (A.B.C.)..................................................................... 73
METRONOME ......................................................................... 152
MIC jack.................................................................................. 223
MIC VOLUME.......................................................................... 223
MIDI ........................................................................................ 235
MIDI Control............................................................................ 238
MIDI IN/OUT ........................................................................... 224
MIDI OUT FILTER ................................................................... 238
MODE (Organ Flutes) ............................................................... 38
MODE (Rotary Speaker) ........................................................... 51
Music Data Recorder.............................................................. 102
N
Next Regist ............................................................................. 118
NEXT REGIST (Shift End).......................................................... 97
NOTE LIMIT ............................................................................ 142
NOTE SHIFT............................................................................ 142
O
OPTICAL OUT......................................................................... 224
Organ Flutes ............................................................................. 37
OUTPUT (MIDI)....................................................................... 238
P
PAD ...........................................................................................70
PAN (Voice Edit)......................................................................142
PAN (Voice) ...............................................................................41
Part (Rhythm).............................................................................70
PART SETUP (MDR) ........................................................106, 127
Pause.......................................................................................123
PEDAL 1, 2 ..................................................................................8
Pedal polyphonic mode ............................................................42
Pedal Unit ................................................................................229
Pedal Voice ...............................................................................25
PHONES ..................................................................................223
PHRASE 1..................................................................................70
PHRASE 2..................................................................................70
Pitch.........................................................................................208
PITCH (Voice Section)...............................................................42
Pitch Bend ...............................................................................206
Playback..................................................................................122
POLY .........................................................................................42
Power.........................................................................................12
PRESET (Vibrato).......................................................................43
Preset Keyboard Percussion.....................................................74
PRESET TEMPO ........................................................................66
PRIORITY...................................................................................42
PROGRAM...............................................................................148
Program Change .....................................................................236
Protected Song........................................................................131
Punch-in Recording.................................................................113
Q
Quantize ..................................................................................161
14
Appendix
DDK-7 Owner’s Manual
270
R
Real Time Write............................................................... 154, 162
Recording ............................................................................... 110
Recording (Lead Voice 1 Voice only) ..................................... 111
Recording (Part) ..................................................................... 111
REGIST EDIT (MDR) ............................................................... 116
REGIST MENU .......................................................................... 20
Registration Memory................................................................. 89
Registration Sequence ........................................................... 188
Registration Shift....................................................................... 94
RELEASE RATE (Voice Edit)................................................... 142
Repeat .................................................................................... 125
RESONANCE .......................................................................... 143
RESP. (Response) .................................................................... 38
Reverb ...................................................................................... 46
REVERB (MIC.) ....................................................................... 233
REVERB (Panel)........................................................................ 46
REVERB (Rhythm Pattern Program) ....................................... 168
Rewind .................................................................................... 123
Rhythm...................................................................................... 60
Rhythm button........................................................................... 60
Rhythm Clock.......................................................................... 156
Rhythm Condition ..................................................................... 64
Rhythm Menu............................................................................ 61
Rhythm Pattern Program......................................................... 148
Rhythm Program ..................................................................... 147
Rhythm Sequence Program.................................................... 183
Rhythmic Chord ...................................................................... 163
ROTARY SP SPEED .................................................................. 51
Rotary Speaker ......................................................................... 50
S
Sections .................................................................................... 62
SHIFT (Registration Shift).......................................................... 95
SHIFT END................................................................................ 97
SINGLE FINGER ....................................................................... 72
SLIDE ........................................................................................ 44
SLOW (Rotary Speaker)............................................................ 51
SOLO ........................................................................................ 30
Song................................................................................ 104, 109
Song Copy .............................................................................. 128
Song Delete ............................................................................ 129
Specifications ......................................................................... 266
SPEED (Rotary Speaker) .......................................................... 51
SPEED (Vibrato)........................................................................ 43
START ....................................................................................... 63
Step Write ............................................................................... 154
STOP (Rotary Speaker)............................................................. 51
STOP (Shift End) ....................................................................... 97
Style File Format ..................................................................... 175
Sustain ...................................................................................... 49
SUSTAIN (Panel)....................................................................... 49
SYNCHRO START..................................................................... 63
System Exclusive Messages .................................................. 236
System Messages................................................................... 236
T
TEMPO (MDR) .........................................................................124
TEMPO (Rhythm).......................................................................66
TIME (Slide) ...............................................................................44
TO LOWER ................................................................................29
TOP (Lead Voice) ......................................................................42
TOP (Shift End)..........................................................................97
TOUCH PANEL SOUND............................................................17
TOUCH TONE ...........................................................................41
TOUCH VIBRATO......................................................................44
Transpose................................................................................208
TRANSPOSE (Voice section).....................................................44
TUNE (Voice section) ................................................................44
TUNE FINE (Voice Edit)...........................................................142
U
U. ORGAN FLUTES ...................................................................37
UPPER 1, 2 ..................................................................................8
Upper Keyboard Voice..............................................................24
USB TO DEVICE..............................................................224, 234
USB TO DEVICE terminal ........................................................224
USB TO HOST .................................................................224, 230
USER (Registration Shift)...........................................................95
USER (Vibrato) ..........................................................................43
User Keyboard Percussion .......................................................79
User Rhythm............................................................................172
User Voice ...............................................................................145
UTILITY......................................................................................16
V
VARIATION (Rhythm Pattern Program) ...................................170
Version.......................................................................................23
VIBRATO ...................................................................................43
Voice..........................................................................................24
Voice button ..............................................................................26
Voice Condition ...................................................................28, 41
VOICE DISPLAY ........................................................................18
Voice Edit ................................................................................137
Voice section .............................................................................24
Volume (Accompaniment).........................................................71
Volume (Keyboard Percussion).................................................75
VOLUME (MIC.).......................................................................233
VOLUME (Organ Flutes)............................................................38
VOLUME (Rhythm Pattern Program) .......................................167
VOLUME (Rhythm) ....................................................................65
VOLUME (Voice) .......................................................................28
VOLUME (XG) .........................................................................127
W
Wireless LAN ...........................................................................219
X
XG........................................................................................6, 126
For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha
representative or the authorized distributor listed below.
Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou
au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante.
Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten
Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen
Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.
Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana
o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.
CANADA
Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.
135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,
M1S 3R1, Canada
Tel: 416-298-1311
U.S.A.
Yamaha Corporation of America
6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620,
U.S.A.
Tel: 714-522-9011
MEXICO
Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V.
Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149,
Col. Guadalupe del Moral
C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México
Tel: 55-5804-0600
BRAZIL
Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda.
Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4' andar, Itaim Bibi,
CEP 04534-013 Sao Paulo, SP. BRAZIL
Tel: 011-3704-1377
ARGENTINA
Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.
Sucursal de Argentina
Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053,
Buenos Aires, Argentina
Tel: 1-4371-7021
PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN
AMERICAN COUNTRIES/
CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.
Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella,
Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,
Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá
Tel: +507-269-5311
THE UNITED KINGDOM
Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd.
Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,
MK7 8BL, England
Tel: 01908-366700
IRELAND
Danfay Ltd.
61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin
Tel: 01-2859177
GERMANY
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: 04101-3030
SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,
Branch Switzerland
Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland
Tel: 01-383 3990
AUSTRIA
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,
Branch Austria
Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria
Tel: 01-60203900
CZECH REPUBLIC/SLOVAKIA/
HUNGARY/SLOVENIA
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,
Branch Austria, CEE Department
Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria
Tel: 01-602039025
POLAND
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH
Sp.z. o.o. Oddzial w Polsce
ul. 17 Stycznia 56, PL-02-146 Warszawa, Poland
Tel: 022-868-07-57
THE NETHERLANDS/
BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,
Branch Benelux
Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands
Tel: 0347-358 040
FRANCE
Yamaha Musique France
BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France
Tel: 01-64-61-4000
ITALY
Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A.
Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy
Tel: 02-935-771
SPAIN/PORTUGAL
Yamaha-Hazen Música, S.A.
Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230
Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain
Tel: 91-639-8888
GREECE
Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House
147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece
Tel: 01-228 2160
SWEDEN
Yamaha Scandinavia AB
J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1
Box 30053
S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden
Tel: 031 89 34 00
DENMARK
YS Copenhagen Liaison Office
Generatorvej 6A
DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark
Tel: 44 92 49 00
FINLAND
F-Musiikki Oy
Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260,
SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland
Tel: 09 618511
NORWAY
Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB
Grini Næringspark 1
N-1345 Østerås, Norway
Tel: 67 16 77 70
ICELAND
Skifan HF
Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120
IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland
Tel: 525 5000
OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: +49-4101-3030
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2312
TURKEY/CYPRUS
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: 04101-3030
OTHER COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Gulf FZE
LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jubel Ali,
Dubai, United Arab Emirates
Tel: +971-4-881-5868
THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA
Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd.
25/F., United Plaza, 1468 Nanjing Road (West),
Jingan, Shanghai, China
Tel: 021-6247-2211
HONG KONG
Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.
11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,
Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong
Tel: 2737-7688
INDONESIA
PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor)
PT. Nusantik
Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot
Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia
Tel: 21-520-2577
KOREA
Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.
8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong,
Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea
Tel: 080-004-0022
MALAYSIA
Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd.
Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,
Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia
Tel: 3-78030900
PHILIPPINES
Yupangco Music Corporation
339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO,
Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines
Tel: 819-7551
SINGAPORE
Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd.
#03-11 A-Z Building
140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015
Tel: 747-4374
TAIWAN
Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.
3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei.
Taiwan 104, R.O.C.
Tel: 02-2511-8688
THAILAND
Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.
891/1 Siam Motors Building, 15-16 floor
Rama 1 road, Wangmai, Pathumwan
Bangkok 10330, Thailand
Tel: 02-215-2626
OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2317
AUSTRALIA
Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.
Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank,
Victoria 3006, Australia
Tel: 3-9693-5111
NEW ZEALAND
Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd.
146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa,
Auckland, New Zealand
Tel: 9-634-0099
COUNTRIES AND TRUST
TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2312
NORTH AMERICA
CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA
EUROPE
AFRICA
MIDDLE EAST
ASIA
OCEANIA
HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-3273
[EL] 40
U.R.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation
© 2006 Yamaha Corporation
WJ07570 xxxMWDHx.x-01A0
Printed in Japan
Documenttranscriptie
PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING * Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference. WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/Power cord Water warning • Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument. • Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it. • Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings. • Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands. • Use only the supplied power cord/plug. • Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it. Fire warning • Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning item may fall over and cause a fire. If you notice any abnormality Do not open • Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/Power cord Location • When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it. • Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms. • Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal components. • Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet. • Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise. • Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. • Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables. • When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power switch is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. (1)B-11 2 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 1/2 • Do not place the instrument against a wall (allow at least 3 cm/one-inch from the wall), since this can cause inadequate air circulation, and possibly result in the instrument overheating. Connections • Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. Maintenance • When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths. Handling caution • Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument. • Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the panel or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard. • Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors. • Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. Saving data Saving and backing up your data • Always save data to a USB flash memory or other external media, in order to help prevent the loss of important data due to a malfunction or user operating error. Backing up the external media • To protect against data loss through media damage, we recommend that you save your important data onto two external media. The serial number of this product may be found on the bottom of the unit. You should note this serial number in the space provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase to aid identification in the event of theft. Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed. Model No. DDK-7 Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use. Serial No. (bottom) (1)B-11 2/2 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 3 Congratulations! You are the proud owner of a fine electronic keyboard, the DDK-7. The Yamaha DDK-7 combines the most advanced tone generation technology with state-of-the-art digital electronics and features to give you stunning sound quality with maximum musical versatility. In order to make the most of your DDK-7 and its extensive performance potential, we urge you to read the manual thoroughly while trying out the various features described. Keep the manual in a safe place for later reference. Accessories • Owner’s Manual • Power cord 4 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Main Features Wide Variety of Registration Menus page 20 The Registration Menu buttons feature a total of 288 Registrations, allowing you to instantly set up the DDK-7 for playing your favorite type of music. The Registrations in Registration Menu are divided into six basic categories for ease of selection. Moreover, you can edit any of the Registrations and customize them to fit your own performance needs. Richly textured, four-layer AWM Voices and High Quality Digital Effects pages 24 and 52 The DDK-7 contains a huge amount of exceptionally high-quality Voices – 415 altogether – created with the AWM (Advanced Wave Memory) tone generation system. The authentic touch response keyboard lets you play these Voices with all the expressiveness and control of an actual acoustic instrument. What’s more, there are 183 different effect types in 15 categories that you can apply to each Voice section —letting you enhance and even completely change the character of the Voices, without having to use the Voice Edit features. Dynamic, Contemporary Rhythms and Auto Accompaniment page 60 The exceptionally of wide selection of 274 rhythms lets you choose exactly the rhythm you need in your performance. Each rhythm contains 15 variations (sections) – such as Main, Fill In, Intro, Ending, and Break – that you can easily switch while you play, to make your performance even more dynamic and professional. Each rhythm has its own matching accompaniment divided into five instrument parts, providing basic backing as well as embellishments. Comprehensive input and output connectors ideal for live performance page 223 Since the DDK-7 is equipped with two types of AUX OUT jacks: MAIN and SUB, you can select outputs for each part. This lets you add an external effect to a specific part, or adjust the volume balance among the parts with an external mixer—allowing you to build up your own system and create just the sound you want. Large, 6.5-inch TFT-LCD with Intuitive Touch Panel Operation page 13 This large LCD display not only lets you clearly see a wide selection of settings and parameters at almost any angle, it also serves as a touch control panel — letting you intuitively make selections and adjust settings simply by touching the screen! Once you touch a setting, you can even adjust it in finer detail if necessary with the Data Control dial. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 5 The DDK-7 is compatible with the following formats. “GM (General MIDI)” is one of the most common Voice allocation formats. “GM System Level 2” is a standard specification that enhances the original “GM” and improves Song data compatibility. It provides for increased polyphony, greater Voice selection, expanded Voice parameters, and integrated effect processing. XG is a major enhancement of the GM System Level 1 format, and was developed by Yamaha specifically to provide more Voices and variations, as well as greater expressive control over Voices and effects, and to ensure compatibility of data well into the future. GS was developed by the Roland Corporation. In the same way as Yamaha XG, GS is a major enhancement of the GM specifically to provide more Voices and Drum kits and their variations, as well as greater expressive control over Voices and effects. The Style File Format combines all of Yamaha’s auto accompaniment know-how into a single unified format. This product utilizes NF, an embedded Internet browser from ACCESS Co., Ltd. NF is used with the patented LZW, licensed from Unisys Co., Ltd. NF may not be separated from this product, nor may it be sold, lent or transferred in any way. Also, NF may not be reverse-engineered, reverse-compiled, reverse-assembled or copied. This software includes a module developed by the Independent JPEG Group. • The bitmap fonts used in this instrument have been provided by and are the property of Ricoh Co., Ltd. • This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, styles files, MIDI files, WAVE data and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES. • Copying of the commercially available music sequence data and/or digital audio files is strictly prohibited except for your personal use. • Electone and STAGEA are the trademarks of Yamaha Corporation. • The company names and product names in this Owner’s Manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. • The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument. • The pan flute and sitar, shown in the displays of the DDK-7, are on display at the Hamamatsu Museum of Musical Instruments. • This device is capable of using various types/formats of music data by optimizing them to the proper format music data for use with the device in advance. As a result, this device may not play them back precisely as their producers or composers originally intended. 6 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Contents Accessories ..............................................................4 Main Features ...........................................................5 Panel Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Front Panel ................................................................8 LCD Display/Display Select ....................................10 Overview .................................................................10 Getting Started ........................................................11 Using the LCD Display............................................13 LCD Display Settings ..............................................16 Voice Display ..........................................................18 Registration Menu ...................................................20 Confirming the Version of Your DDK-7....................23 Factory Set (Initializing the DDK-7) .........................23 2 Voices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Voices for each keyboard .......................................24 Selecting Voices with the Voice buttons .................26 Voice List.................................................................32 3 Organ Flutes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Voice Structure......................................................137 Editing a Voice ......................................................138 Saving the edited Voice ........................................145 Quitting Voice Edit.................................................146 Recalling an Edited Voice .....................................146 Outline of the Rhythm Programming Operation ....147 Rhythm Pattern Program .......................................148 Rhythm Sequence Program ..................................183 Saving Rhythm Pattern and Rhythm Sequence Data to external media...................................................192 Footswitches .........................................................193 Foot Pedal .............................................................196 Expression Pedals.................................................205 Voices 3 Organ Flutes 4 Voice Controls and Effects 5 Rhythm/ Keyboard Percussion 6 Registration Memory 7 Music Data Recorder (MDR) 8 Voice Edit 9 Rhythm Program 11 Transpose and Pitch Controls . . . . 208 12 Internet Direct Connection . . . . . . . 209 Selecting from the Voice Condition display ............41 Selecting from the panel .........................................46 Effect List ................................................................52 5 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion . . . . . . 60 13 Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Selecting rhythms with the Rhythm button..............60 Rhythm List .............................................................68 Accompaniment ......................................................70 Automatic Accompaniment – Auto Bass Chord (A.B.C.) ...................................................................71 Melody On Chord (M.O.C.) .....................................73 Keyboard Percussion..............................................74 Accessory Jacks and Controls .............................223 Connecting Headphones or External System .......225 Connecting a Pedal Unit .......................................229 Connecting a Foot Pedal.......................................229 Connection with Computer....................................230 Connecting External Devices................................231 MIDI .......................................................................235 MIDI Control ..........................................................238 6 Registration Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Storing Registrations ...............................................89 Selecting Registrations ...........................................91 Saving the Registration data to USB flash memory .... 92 Initializing Registration Memory ..............................93 Registration Shift .....................................................94 Unifying a specific parameter .................................99 2 10 Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Connecting the Instrument to the Internet.............209 Accessing the Website from the DDK-7 ...............210 About the Internet Settings Display.......................218 Exiting from the Internet Display ...........................221 Initializing Internet Settings ...................................221 Glossary of Internet Terms ....................................222 4 Voice Controls and Effects . . . . . . . . . 40 Quick Introductory Guide 8 Voice Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 9 Rhythm Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 1 Quick Introductory Guide . . . . . . . . . . 11 1 14 Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 XG Voice & Drum List............................................240 XG Drum Map .......................................................245 MIDI Data Format ..................................................248 Troubleshooting ....................................................263 Specifications........................................................266 Index .....................................................................268 10 Controllers 11 Transpose and Pitch Controls 12 Internet Direct Connection 13 Connections 14 Appendix 7 Music Data Recorder (MDR) . . . . . . . 102 Calling Up the M.D.R. Display ..............................103 Formatting External Media ....................................103 Selecting a Song ...................................................104 Recording .............................................................110 Changing the Song Name ....................................113 Saving Registrations as Registration Data (File)...116 Recalling Recorded Registrations ........................121 Playing Back a Song .............................................122 Other Functions (Tools).........................................128 Panel Layout Front Panel LEAD 1, 2 (page 24) LCD display/ DISPLAY SELECT (page 10) UPPER 1, 2 (page 24) PEDAL 1, 2 (page 25) LOWER 1, 2 (page 25) REGIST MENU (page 20) RHYTHM/ KEYBOARD PERCUSSION (page 60) USB TO DEVICE terminal (page 224) SUSTAIN button (page 49) REVERB button (page 46) 13 [M.] (Memory) button (page 89) 8 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 14 15 16 1 Registration memory (page 89) 2 3 POWER switch (page 12) MASTER VOLUME dial (page 12) 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 D. [D.] (Disable) button (page 91) DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 9 LCD Display/Display Select 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 LCD display (touch-panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . page 13 2 DATA CONTROL dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 15 3 [VOICE DISPLAY] button . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 18 4 [REGIST MENU] button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 20 5 [FOOT SWITCH] button . . . . . . . . . .pages 94, 193 6 [MDR] button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 102 7 [INTERNET] button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 210 8 [UTILITY] button . . . . . . pages 16, 205, 208, 238 9 ) ! @ # $ 9 [PROGRAM] button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 138 ) [SUSTAIN] button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 49 ! [REVERB] button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 46 @ [U. ORGAN FLUTES] button. . . . . . . . . . . page 37 # [L. ORGAN FLUTES] button . . . . . . . . . . . page 37 $ [ROTARY SP SPEED] button . . . . . . . . . . page 50 Overview FOOT PEDAL jacks (page 224) USB/MIDI terminals (page 224) AC INLET jack (page 223) TO PEDAL connector (page 225) I/O connectors (page 225) Upper keyboard Front Panel (page 8) Lower keyboard PHONES jack (page 223) USB TO DEVICE terminal (page 224) MIC jack (page 223) 10 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 1 Quick Introductory Guide Whether you are an advanced performer or have never touched an electronic keyboard in your life, we recommend that you take the time to go through this basic section. It shows you in the simplest possible manner how to start playing your DDK-7. Contents 1 Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 2 Using the LCD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 • Changing the Display Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 • Pressing Buttons on the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 • Adjusting Parameter Values by Using the Display Sliders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 3 LCD Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 • Selecting the Display Language . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 • Muting the Touch Panel Sound. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 • Adjusting the Display Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 4 Voice Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 5 Registration Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 • Selecting Registrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 • Registration Menu List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 6 Confirming the Version of Your DDK-7 . . . . . . . . 23 7 Factory Set (Initializing the DDK-7) . . . . . . . . . . . 23 1 Getting Started 1 Connect the power cord. First insert the plug of the power cable into the AC INLET on the DDK-7, then plug the other end of the cable into the proper AC outlet on the wall. AC INLET jack Only use the voltage specified as correct for the DDK-7. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the DDK-7. Yamaha products are manufactured specifically for the supply voltage in the area where they are to be sold. If you intend to use the instrument in another location, or if any doubt exists about the supply voltage, please consult with a qualified technician. 2 Connect the speakers or headphones. Since the DDK-7 has no built-in speakers, you will need to monitor the sound of the instrument by using external equipment. Connect a set of headphones, powered speakers, or other playback equipment as required. Reference Page Using Headphones (page 225) Playing the Sounds of the DDK-7 Through an External Audio System (page 226) Using a mixer for live performance (page 226) DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 11 1 Quick Introductory Guide Do not use the instrument/ device or headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. Speaker (Left) Speaker (Right) OUTPUT L/L+R R PHONES 3 Even when the power switch is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum level. Turn the power on. Make sure the volume settings of the DDK-7 and external devices are turned down to the minimum. Turn the power on by pressing the [POWER] switch on the DDK-7 front panel, then turn the power on the amplifiers. For turning the power on or off. When powering down the setup, make sure to switch off the power of the external device (or lower its volume) before switching off the DDK-7. NOTE when you connect an external audio device to the AUX OUT jacks, the output level is fixed and cannot be controlled. 4 Set the MASTER VOLUME control. The MASTER VOLUME control is an overall control that affects the volume of the entire instrument. Decreasing the volume Increasing the volume Now that you've set up the DDK-7 properly, you're ready to begin playing it. The Expression Pedal on the DDKU-P7 Pedal Unit can be used to control the volume with your foot as you play. 12 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 1 This instrument features a special touch panel that allows you to change the parameters by simply touching the ‘virtual’ buttons or sliders on the display. (Please note that two or more parameters cannot be operated simultaneously.) You can also use the Data Control dial to make fine changes to the parameter value shown in the display. Quick Introductory Guide 2 Using the LCD Display NOTE When cleaning the display, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use any sharp or hard tools to operate the touch panel. Doing so may damage the display. Changing the Display Page There are some oval-shaped numbered buttons at the top right of the display. Pressing these buttons changes the “page” of the display. The selected page’s button turns orange. Page 1 Press this button to select Page 1 Page 2 Press this button to select Page 2 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 13 1 Pressing Buttons on the Display Quick Introductory Guide There are three types of buttons: those that select a function, those that switch a function on/off, and those that open a list or menu of parameters. To select the desired function, simply press the button in the display directly. For switching on/off or opening a parameter list, see the instructions below. To switch the function on or off: Off, or mute (button is grayed out) On You can independently mute each Voice section in the Voice Display, each accompaniment part in Rhythm Menu display, and each Element in the Voice Edit display. To open the parameter list: When you press the button, a parameter list will appear in which you can select the desired parameter. 14 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 1 Quick Introductory Guide Adjusting Parameter Values by Using the Display Sliders You can adjust some parameters such as Volume, Reverb, Pan and so on, by using the ‘virtual’ sliders in the display. There are two ways to move the slider in the display: touching it directly, and using the Data Control dial. We suggest that you touch the display slider when making coarse adjustments and use the Data Control dial for fine adjustment. Touching the display slider directly: Press a point in the slider to which you want to adjust the parameter value. The slider will move to the point you pressed. Also, by sliding your finger up or down while holding down the display slider, you can change the parameter value. or Slider will move to the point you touch Slider will follow your finger Using the Data Control dial: Touch on/above the slider in the display to enable the parameter and set a rough value, then turn the Data Control dial. Touch here to enable the parameter DATA CONTROL Blue mark To control Pan, you can move the horizontal slider in the same way as vertical sliders. DATA CONTROL DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 15 1 Quick Introductory Guide 3 LCD Display Settings Here you can change the display settings: displayed language (English or Japanese), touch panel sound, and display brightness. Selecting the Display Language The LCD display can be shown in two languages, English and Japanese. The default setting is English. NOTE 1 Press the [UTILITY] button to call up the GLOBAL Page of the Utility Display. 2 Press the desired button, The settings in the Utility Display are automatically saved when another display is called up. LANGUAGE 16 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual (Japanese) or [English]. 1 Muting the Touch Panel Sound 1 Press [UTILITY] button to call up GLOBAL Page of the Utility Display. 2 Press the [OFF] button of the TOUCH PANEL SOUND to mute the sound. Quick Introductory Guide The DDK-7 is set by default with the touch panel sound turned on, giving you audio feedback when you press a button or control. If you want to mute the touch panel sound, follow the procedure below. TOUCH PANEL SOUND To turn the sound on again, select [ON] in Step #2. Adjusting the Display Brightness You can adjust the display brightness to a comfortable, easy-to-read level. 1 Press the [UTILITY] button to call up the GLOBAL Page of the Utility Display. 2 Move the LCD BRIGHTNESS slider by touching it directly or using the Data Control dial. Higher settings make the display brighter and lower settings make it darker. DATA CONTROL LCD BRIGHTNESS DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 17 1 Quick Introductory Guide 4 Voice Display You can visually confirm the currently assigned Voices to each keyboard, currently selected rhythm, Registration Shift, and so on, in the Voice Display. How to call up the Voice Display: The Voice Display always appears when the DDK-7 is turned on. To call up the Voice Display from any other display, press the [VOICE DISPLAY] button. The Voice Display consists of three different pages that can be switched by pressing the [1], [2] or [3] button at the top right of the display. Voice Display [Page 1] Switching the Display Pages 1 3 2 4 18 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 5 6 Sections Shows the Voices currently assigned to each Voice section. You can also mute specific Voice section by pressing its button (the button is grayed-out). 2 RHYTHM Shows the currently selected rhythm. 3 1 Reference Page Selecting a Voice (page 26) Quick Introductory Guide 1 Voice Reference Page Selecting a rhythm (page 60) A.B.C. MODE Shows the mode of the Auto Bass Chord. Reference Page Auto Bass Chord (page 71) 4 TEMPO Shows the current rhythm tempo. 5 Reference Page Adjusting the tempo (page 66) BAR/BEAT Shows the bar/beat when the rhythm is playing. 6 REGISTRATION Shows the current position of the Registration Shift. Reference Page Registration Shift (page 94) Voice Display [Page 2] You can confirm the parameter values (for example, Reverb, Volume, Pan) for each Registration Memory simultaneously. Moreover, you can unify a specific parameter used in various Registration Memories at one time. See page 99 for the details. Voice Display [Page 3] Determines the Melody On Chord modes. See page 73 for details. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 19 1 Quick Introductory Guide 5 Registration Menu NOTE Additional basic Registrations are preset on the Registration Memory locations from 1 to 16. See page 89 for details. A “Registration” consists of panel settings including the selected Upper Keyboard Voices, Lower Keyboard Voices, Pedal Voices, rhythm and so on. The Registration Menu button includes 288 Registrations, specially suited for playing in a different music style. Selecting Registrations 1 Press the [REGIST MENU] button to call up the Registration Menu display. 2 Select the desired registration category with the category buttons in the display. Each button has different Registrations for different music genres. For example, if you want to play Jazz, press the [JAZZ & LATIN] button. For details on the Registration Menu, see page 22. 1 4 20 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 2 5 3 6 1 Live Performance 2 Basic 3 Pops & Rock 4 Dance & Ballad 5 Jazz & Latin 6 Symphony & World Quick Introductory Guide 3 1 Select the desired Registration by pressing the appropriate button on the display. One display page contains 12 Registration buttons. Pressing the numbered buttons in the display changes the display pages, letting you select up to 48 Registrations from one Registration category button. Change the display pages here. The color of the selected Registration name changes to orange, indicating that it has been selected, and the Auto Bass Chord mode is shown at the bottom of the display. 4 Reference Page Auto Bass Chord (page 71) Play your favorite song with the selected Registration. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 21 1 Registration Menu List Quick Introductory Guide Page 1 2 3 4 22 BASIC LIVE PERFORMANCE POPS & ROCK DANCE & BALLAD JAZZ & LATIN SYMPHONY & WORLD Bell Pop Piano Simple 8 Beat 1 Dynamic 8 Beat Organ Ballad Blow On Sax Fanfare AOR Piano Simple 8 Beat 2 NY Ballad Dramatic Ballad Sax Ensemble String Orchestra Ballad Stack Light Step British Pop Love Ballad Moonlight Romantic Violin Rockin’on Piano Sunny Pop 8 Beat Modern Smooth Lead Big Band Baroque Ballad Piano Kids March 1 Rock Band Pop Ballad Clarinet Swing Flute&Harp LA Fusion Kids March 2 Detroit Pop Guitar Ballad Jazz Combo Serenade 70’s Pops Kids March 3 Techno Pop Acoustic Ballad Medium Jazz Fast March Pop E.Piano Synth. Rock Sheriff Reggae Healing Guitar Organ Session Wild West Prism E.Piano Symphonic March 1 Rock&Roll Chillout Guitar Combo Vienna Waltz Kool E.Piano Symphonic March 2 Power Rock Sweetheart 1 Tender Ballad Polka Spacey E.Piano Bluegrass 60’s Guitar Rock Sweetheart 2 Jazz Waltz Chanson Club Smooth E.Piano Sea Carnival Unplugged Slow & Easy Five-Four Theatre Organ 60’s Soul Basic Waltz Motor City Euro Trance Big Band Samba Flamenco Classic Jazz Org Brass Ensemble Lovely Shuffle 6/8 Trance Mambo Brass Pop Flamenco Organ Band Pure Waltz Gospel Shuffle Cool Hip Hop Mambo Tenor Mexican Dance Bump Organ Rococo Ensemble Joyful Gospel Latin House Montuno Mariachi Kool Dist. Organ Pop Cha Cha Frankly Soul Dance Beat Bossa Nova Celtic Dance Rock Dist. Organ Comical Rumba Soul Euro Dance Pop Pop Bossa Folk Step Organ Funk Comical Samba Gospel UK Pop Sweet Rumba Italiano Progressive Rock Toy Orchestra 6/8 Soul Jive Beguine Musette Lounge Organ Charleston Hit Pop Disco Queen Cha Cha Cha Country 60’s Cheap Organ Winter Swing New Country Disco Soul Mellow Groove Hawaiian Sunset Reggae Snow Waltz 1 Eternal Pop Pop Disco Modern R&B Chinese Nocturne Hard Rock Organ Snow Waltz 2 Ground Beat Hot Disco Dixieland Jazz Japanese Sound 70’s Crossover Alpine Polka *A Bounce Pop *A Ibiza *A Jungle Drum *A Orchestra March*A East Coast Brass Alpine Polka *B Bounce Pop *B Ibiza *B Jungle Drum *B Orchestra March*B Fat Analog Synth Alpine Polka *C Bounce Pop *C Ibiza *C Jungle Drum *C Orchestra March*C Club Jazz Alpine Polka *D Bounce Pop *D Ibiza *D Jungle Drum *D Orchestra March*D Distor. Guitar Dream Ballad *A Blues Jam *A Power House *A Jazz Club *A Pasodoble *A Tricky Guitar Dream Ballad *B Blues Jam *B Power House *B Jazz Club *B Pasodoble *B Wow Guitar Dream Ballad *C Blues Jam *C Power House *C Jazz Club *C Pasodoble *C Flange Clavi. Dream Ballad *D Blues Jam *D Power House *D Jazz Club *D Pasodoble *D Pop Fusion Lead Pops Orchestra*A Evergreen Waltz*A Dance Latino *A Afro Session *A Tango *A AOR Lead Pops Orchestra*B Evergreen Waltz*B Dance Latino *B Afro Session *B Tango *B Sweet Fusion Pops Orchestra*C Evergreen Waltz*C Dance Latino *C Afro Session *C Tango *C Retro Pop Pops Orchestra*D Evergreen Waltz*D Dance Latino *D Afro Session *D Tango *D Sweep Pad Kids On Stage *A 16 Beat Pop *A Twilight Disco*A ChaCha Grandee*A Show Time *A Pop Ballad Kids On Stage *B 16 Beat Pop *B Twilight Disco*B ChaCha Grandee*B Show Time *B Fat Pad Kids On Stage *C 16 Beat Pop *C Twilight Disco*C ChaCha Grandee*C Show Time *C Deep Pad Kids On Stage *D 16 Beat Pop *D Twilight Disco*D ChaCha Grandee*D Show Time *D Oriental Pad Galaxy March *A Top Gear Rock *A Love Song *A 3/4 Fast Jazz *A Majestic Sound*A Spacious Piano Galaxy March *B Top Gear Rock *B Love Song *B 3/4 Fast Jazz *B Majestic Sound*B Majestic Sound*C 70’s Flute Pad Galaxy March *C Top Gear Rock *C Love Song *C 3/4 Fast Jazz *C Screen Ballad Galaxy March *D Top Gear Rock *D Love Song *D 3/4 Fast Jazz *D Majestic Sound*D Brass Pad SE *A Southern Pop *A Movie Ballad *A Twilight Sax *A Orchestra Swing*A Pop Rock Brass SE *B Southern Pop *B Movie Ballad *B Twilight Sax *B Orchestra Swing*B Dance Brass SE *C Southern Pop *C Movie Ballad *C Twilight Sax *C Orchestra Swing*C World Strings SE *D Southern Pop *D Movie Ballad *D Twilight Sax *D Orchestra Swing*D DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 1 Quick Introductory Guide 6 Confirming the Version of Your DDK-7 You can confirm the version of your DDK-7 by the following procedure. 1 Press the [UTILITY] button to call up the GLOBAL Page of the Utility Display. 2 Press the [Version] button in the display. The Version dialog appears in the display. Pressing [OK] closes the dialog. 7 Factory Set (Initializing the DDK-7) All current settings including Registration Memory, User Voices, User Rhythms, and LCD Display settings can be deleted at once by the following procedure. Be careful when executing Factory Set, since it erases all your existing data. Always save your important data to external media, such as USB flash memory. Factory Set does not reset the Internet Direct Connection settings. If you want to reset the Internet Direct Connection settings, see page 221. 1 Turn off the power. 2 While holding down the ENDING [1] button, turn the power back on. 3 Release the ENDING [1] button after Voice Display appears. If you don’t want to reset the LCD Display settings, you can initialize only Registration settings. See page 93 for more information. Reference Page Saving Registrations (page 116) Reference Page Initializing Internet Settings (page 221) Reference Page Initializing Registration Memory (page 93) DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 23 2 Voices The DDK-7 features hundreds of high quality Voices. Any of these Voices can be used on the Upper Keyboard and Lower Keyboard. If you connect the Pedal Unit to the DDK-7, you can use any of these voices also on the Pedalboard. Up to four Voice sections are available on the Upper Keyboard for playing together in a layer, while the Lower Keyboard and Pedalboard each have two Voice sections. 2 Voices Voices for the Upper Keyboard Voices for Pedalboard Voices for the Lower Keyboard Contents 1 Voices for each keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 2 Selecting Voices with the Voice buttons . . . . . . .26 • Selecting a Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 • Changing the Voice volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 3 Voice List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 1 Voices for each keyboard A total of 415 voices can be selected on the display which you can call up by pressing the Voice section buttons on the front panel. Voices for the Upper Keyboard Up to four different Voice sections are available on the Upper Keyboard for playing together: Upper Keyboard Voice 1, Upper Keyboard Voice 2, Lead Voice 1, and Lead Voice 2. Voices for each section can be selected from the panel. Upper Keyboard Voice 1 Upper Keyboard Voice 2 Lead Voice 1 Lead Voice 2 24 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Lead Voice 1 and 2 sound only the highest note (or last note played) if two or more keys are played together. This makes the Lead Voices ideal for “lead” or solo instruments such as Trumpet and Saxophone. 2 Voices Voices for the Lower Keyboard Up to two different Voice sections are available on the Lower Keyboard for playing together: Lower Keyboard Voice 1 and Lower Keyboard Voice 2. Voices for each section can be selected from the panel. Lower Keyboard Voice 1 Lower Keyboard Voice 2 Voices for Pedalboard Up to two different Voice sections are available on the Pedalboard for playing together: Pedal Voice 1 and Pedal Voice 2. Voices for each section can be selected from the panel. Pedal Voices 1 and 2 sound only the highest note if two or more pedals are played, by default. Reference Page POLY (page 42) Pedal Voice 1 Pedal Voice 2 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 25 2 Selecting Voices with the Voice buttons 2 Since selection of Voices follows the same procedure throughout all Voice sections, instructions for only the Upper Keyboard Voice 1 (UPPER 1) are given here. Voices Selecting a Voice 1 Press the [UPPER 1] button. The voice menu of the currently selected category is shown in the display. Voice menu Reference Page Voice Edit (page 137) 26 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 2 Select the desired instrument category with the category buttons in the display. You can also choose the “User” category to select a User voice you have created. For example, to call up Piano 1, select the Piano category. Voices 2 The name of the selected category (Piano) is displayed on the upper left. The Voice name shown under the category name is that of the currently assigned Voice and is irrelevant to the Voice menu below. 3 Select the desired Voice name (Piano 1, for example) from the Voice menu. The Voice menu contains many Piano Voices, more than can fit on one display page. To change the display pages, press the appropriate number buttons in the display. Reference Page Voice List (page 32) The color of the selected Voice name changes to orange, indicating that it has been selected. Changing the Voice volume There are two ways to set the Voice volume: using the VOLUME buttons on the panel and using the volume slider in the display. The VOLUME buttons let you make coarse adjustments to the volume while the slider gives you fine control. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 27 Using the VOLUME buttons on the panel (coarse) Press one of the VOLUME buttons of each Voice section on the panel to set the desired level for each Voice. The buttons have seven volume settings, from a minimum of 0, or no sound, to a maximum of full volume. 2 Voices Using VOLUME slider in the display (fine) Pressing the same Voice button on the panel again (or pressing the Voice name of the selected Voice in the display) calls up the Voice Condition Display. DATA CONTROL Volume slider NOTE Depending on the volume value (set by the slider), two adjacent VOLUME lamps may be lit at the same time, indicating an intermediate position. 28 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual To set the volume, touch the VOLUME slider in the display or use the Data Control Dial. The control range is from 0 (no sound) to 24 (full volume). Pressing a Voice button once calls up the Voice Menu display. Pressing it a second time calls up the Voice Condition display. Successive presses alternate between the two displays. Voices 2 When the Voice Condition display is shown, pressing [VOICE MENU] button on the display also calls up the Voice Menu. From the Voice Condition display, you can control Voice-related parameters such as Pan, Effect, Volume, and so on. For more information on the Voice Condition display, see page 41. Turning the DDK-7 off erases all panel settings you have made. About the To Lower function If you wish to keep the panel settings you have made, save them to a USB flash memory or other external media before turning the DDK-7 off (page 92). CAUTION Voices selected for the Lead Voice 1, Pedal Voice 1, and Pedal Voice 2 sections can also be played on the Lower Keyboard when the [TO LOWER] button in each section is on. When [TO LOWER] is on, the Lead Voice and Pedal Voice cannot be played on the Upper Keyboard and Pedalboard, respectively. The To Lower function is not available in the Lead Voice 2 section. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 29 About the Solo function Reference Page 2 Foot Pedal (page 196) Voices The Lead Voice 2 section features an exclusive Solo function. Solo lets you instantly switch to a solo Lead Voice in the middle of your performance, muting all other Upper Keyboard Voices. If you connect an optional Foot Pedal to the DDK-7, you can control the solo function without taking your hands from the keyboards. 1 Select the Voice that you wish to play solo in the Lead Voice 2 section. In this condition, all the Voices for Upper Keyboard (Upper Keyboard Voice 1 and 2, and Lead Voice 1 and 2) can be played. 2 Press the [SOLO] button in the Lead Voice 2 section. This sets Solo to standby status. 3 Press the [UTILITY] button to call up the Utility Display. Press the [F. PEDAL] button at the top right of the display to call up the FOOT PEDAL Page. 30 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Press the [SOLO] button in the display. Select the [SOLO] button in the left side of the display if you are using the (1 VOLUME) of the FOOT PEDAL jacks, or select in the right side if you are using (2 SUSTAIN). 2 Voices 4 The Solo function is assigned to the Foot Pedal, and the polarity is selected automatically. In this condition (Solo on), all Voices set to the Upper Keyboard except for Lead Voice 2 are playable on the Upper Keyboard. 5 To temporarily turn Solo on as you play, press the Foot Pedal and hold down. In this condition, only the Lead Voice 2 is playable on the Upper Keyboard. (All other voices are muted.) Each time you press the Foot Pedal (Solo on) you can play only Lead Voice 2, and each time you release it (Solo off ) you can play all Voices except Lead Voice 2 on the Upper Keyboard. Notes on using Solo • Some Registration Menu settings reverse the polarity of the Foot Pedal for the Solo function. In this condition, the situation described above is reversed. In other words, each time you press the Foot Pedal you can play all Voices except Lead Voice 2, and each time you release it you can play only Lead Voice 2 on the Upper Keyboard. To return the polarity to its original setting, press the [-] button in the display. • Pressing the Foot Pedal while holding down a key will not turn Solo on for that key. Solo will active when the next key is played after pressing the Foot Pedal. • Lead Voices 1 and 2 sound only the highest note if two or more keys are played. However, in the Solo mode, Lead Voice 2 sounds for the last key played. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 31 3 Voice List 2 This list shows all available Voices on the DDK-7. Numbers written at the left side of each column in this list indicate the numbered buttons displayed in the Voice Menu. Voices Category/ Voice Name Preset Preset Feet Effect 1 Preset Effect 2 STRINGS/VIOLIN Preset Preset Feet Effect 1 Preset Effect 2 BRASS/TRUMPET 1 Strings 1 8’ THRU THRU 1 Brass Section 1 8’ THRU THRU Strings 2 8’ Strings 3 8’ THRU THRU Brass Section 2 8’ THRU THRU AMBIENCE THRU Brass Section 3 8’ THRU Strings 4 THRU 8’ THRU THRU Brass Section 4 8’ HM ENHANCER THRU Strings 5 8’ THRU THRU Brass Section 5 8’ HM ENHANCER THRU Strings 6 8’ THRU THRU Brass Section 6 8’ THRU Strings 7 8’ DELAY LR THRU Trombone Sec 1 16’/8’ HM ENHANCER THRU Strings 8 8’ THRU THRU Trombone Sec 2 16’/8’ THRU THRU Strings 9 8’ HM ENHANCER THRU Trombone Sec 3 16’/8’ THRU THRU Chamber Strs 1 8’ AMBIENCE THRU Trombone Sec 4 16’/8’ AMBIENCE THRU Chamber Strs 2 8’ THRU THRU Trombone Sec 5 16’/8’ THRU HALL 1 Chamber Strs 3 8’ THRU THRU 2 Brass1&Trp6 8’ THRU THRU Chamber Strs 4 8’ HM ENHANCER THRU Brass2&Trp6 8’ ST 2BAND EQ THRU 2 Pizzicato Strs 1 8’ THRU ROOM S Horn 1&4 8’ ST 2BAND EQ HALL 1 Pizzicato Strs 2 8’ AMBIENCE ROOM S Octave Brass 1 8’ AMBIENCE THRU Pizzicato Strs 3 8’ AMBIENCE ROOM S Octave Brass 2 8’ DELAY LR THRU Pizzicato Strs 4 8’ BASEMENT ROOM S Octave Brass 3 8’ THRU THRU Tremolo Strings 8’ AMBIENCE THRU Octave Brass 4 8’ THRU THRU 8’ THRU THRU Octave Brass 5 8’ THRU THRU Strings2&Viola 8’ THRU THRU Octave Brass 6 8’ THRU THRU Strings3&4 8’ AMBIENCE THRU Octave Brass 7 8’ ECHO THRU Strings7&Violin5 8’ THRU THRU 3 Trumpet 1 8’ THRU THRU Violin5&Cello 8’ HM ENHANCER THRU Trumpet 2 8’ THRU THRU Octave Strings 1 8’ THRU THRU Trumpet 3 8’ THRU THRU Octave Strings 2 8’ THRU THRU Trumpet 4 8’ THRU THRU 4 Violin 1 8’ THRU THRU Trumpet 5 8’ HM ENHANCER THRU Violin 2 8’ AMBIENCE THRU Trumpet 6 8’ THRU THRU Violin 3 8’ THRU THRU Trumpet 7 8’ AMBIENCE THRU Violin 4 8’ THRU THRU Muted Trumpet 1 8’ THRU THRU Violin 5 8’ AMBIENCE THRU Muted Trumpet 2 8’ THRU THRU Violin 6 8’ AMBIENCE THRU Muted Trumpet 3 8’ PHASER 1 THRU 3 Strings1&7 THRU Viola 8’ AMBIENCE THRU Flugel Horn 1 8’ THRU THRU Cello 1 8’ RESONATOR THRU Flugel Horn 2 8’ THRU THRU Cello 2 8’ THRU THRU Pizzicato Violin 8’ AMBIENCE ROOM S 4 Trombone 1 16’/8’ ST 2BAND EQ THRU Trombone 2 16’/8’ THRU THRU Trombone 3 16’/8’ THRU THRU THRU Trombone 4 16’/8’ THRU THRU CONTRABASS 1 Contrabass 1 32 Category/ Voice Name 8’ THRU Contrabass 2 8’ THRU THRU Muted Trombone 1 16’/8’ THRU THRU Contrabass 3 16’/8’ THRU THRU Muted Trombone 2 16’/8’ ST 3BAND EQ PHASER 1 Contrabass 4 8’ THRU THRU Contrabass 5 8’ AMBIENCE THRU Acoustic Bass 1 8’ AMBIENCE THRU Acoustic Bass 2 8’ HM ENHANCER THRU Pizzicato Bass 1 8’ THRU THRU Pizzicato Bass 2 8’ THRU THRU DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Preset Preset Feet Effect 1 Preset Effect 2 Category/ Voice Name Preset Preset Feet Effect 1 Preset Effect 2 5 Horn 1 8’ THRU THRU 5 Sax Ens 1 16’/8’ THRU THRU Horn 2 8’ THRU THRU Sax Ens 2 16’/8’ THRU THRU Horn 3 8’ THRU THRU Sax Ens 3 16’/8’ THRU THRU Horn 4 8’ THRU THRU Woodwind Ens 1 8’ THRU THRU Horn 5 8’ THRU THRU Woodwind Ens 2 8’ THRU THRU Horn 6 8’ THRU THRU Woodwind Ens 3 8’ THRU THRU Muted Horn 8’ THRU THRU Woodwind Ens 4 8’ THRU THRU 16’ ST 2BAND EQ THRU TUTTI 1 Strings&Winds 6 Tuba 1 Tuba 2 16’/8’ THRU THRU 8’ THRU THRU Euphonium 16’/8’ THRU THRU Strings&Brass 1 8’ THRU THRU Brass Bass 1 16’ THRU THRU Strings&Brass 2 8’ XG HM ENHNCE THRU Brass Bass 2 8’ THRU THRU Strings&Horn 8’ THRU THRU Brass Bass 3 8’ THRU THRU Brass&Sax 1 8’ THRU THRU Brass&Sax 2 8’ THRU THRU WOODWIND/FLUTE 1 Flute 1 8’ THRU THRU Brass&Sax 3 8’ THRU THRU Flute 2 8’ THRU THRU Brass&Winds 8’ THRU THRU Flute 3 8’ THRU THRU 2 Orchestra Hit 8’ THRU THRU Flute 4 8’ THRU THRU CHOIR Piccolo 4’ THRU THRU 1 Choir 1 8’ THRU THRU Recorder 1 4’ THRU THRU Choir 2 8’ THRU THRU Recorder 2 4’ THRU THRU Choir 3 8’ THRU THRU Ocarina 4’ THRU THRU Choir 4 8’ THRU THRU Whistle 4’ ST 2BAND EQ AMBIENCE Choir 5 8’ THRU THRU 2 Clarinet 1 8’ THRU THRU Choir 6 8’ THRU THRU Clarinet 2 8’ THRU THRU Choir 7 8’ THRU THRU Clarinet 3 8’ THRU THRU Choir 8 8’ THRU THRU Clarinet 4 8’ THRU THRU Choir 9 8’ THRU THRU 16’/8’ THRU THRU 2 Vocal 8’ XG HM ENHNCE THRU 3 Oboe 1 8’ THRU THRU PAD Oboe 2 8’ THRU THRU 1 Smooth Pad 1 8’ THRU THRU Oboe 3 8’ THRU THRU Smooth Pad 2 4’ THRU THRU Oboe 4 8’ THRU THRU Smooth Pad 3 8’ THRU THRU Bass Clarinet Oboe 5 8’ HM ENHANCER THRU Smooth Pad 4 8’ DELAY LR THRU English Horn 1 8’ THRU THRU Smooth Pad 5 8’ DELAY LR THRU English Horn 2 8’ THRU THRU Smooth Pad 6 8’ THRU THRU Bassoon 1 16’/8’ THRU THRU Smooth Pad 7 4’ XG CHORUS 1 CROSS DELAY Bassoon 2 16’/8’ THRU THRU Smooth Pad 8 8’ XG CHORUS 1 XG HM ENHNCE Bassoon 3 16’/8’ THRU THRU 2 Resonance Pad 1 8’ ENS DETUNE TEMPO CROSS 4 Alto Sax 1 16’/8’ HM ENHANCER THRU Resonance Pad 2 8’ XG FLANGER 3 CROSS DELAY Alto Sax 2 16’/8’ THRU THRU Resonance Pad 3 8’ ENS DETUNE CROSS DELAY Tenor Sax 1 16’/8’ THRU THRU Resonance Pad 4 4’ CELESTE 2 DELAY LR Tenor Sax 2 16’/8’ THRU THRU Resonance Pad 5 8’ SYMPHONIC DELAY LR Tenor Sax 3 16’/8’ THRU THRU Resonance Pad 6 8’ XG PCH CHG 1 CROSS DELAY 8’ THRU THRU Resonance Pad 7 8’ DELAY LR PHASER 1 Soprano Sax 1 Soprano Sax 2 Baritone Sax 8’ THRU THRU Resonance Pad 8 8’ DELAY LR TEMPO CROSS 16’/8’ THRU THRU Resonance Pad 9 8’ V_FLANGER ECHO Resonance Pad 10 8’ DELAY LR XG CHORUS 1 Resonance Pad 11 8’ COMPRESSOR DELAY LR DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 2 Voices Category/ Voice Name 33 Category/ Voice Name 2 Preset Preset Feet Effect 1 Preset Effect 2 Category/ Voice Name Preset Effect 2 Voices 3 Bell Pad 1 8’ CELESTE 1 DELAY LR 4 Synth Brass 1 8’ PITCH CHANGE THRU Bell Pad 2 8’ XG CHORUS 3 CROSS DELAY Synth Brass 2 8’ THRU Bell Pad 3 8’ XG CHORUS 3 DELAY LR Synth Brass 3 8’ THRU THRU Bell Pad 4 8’ XG CHORUS 4 DELAY LR Synth Brass 4 8’ ST 3BAND EQ THRU Bell Pad 5 8’ CHORUS 1 XG DLY LCR Synth Brass 5 8’ XG 3BAND EQ THRU Bell Pad 6 8’ XG CHORUS 2 DELAY LR Synth Brass 6 8’ XG 3BAND EQ XG CHORUS 4 Bell Pad 7 8’ XG CHORUS 2 DELAY LR Synth Brass 7 8’ COMPRESSOR THRU Bell Pad 8 8’ XG AT PAN 1 DELAY LR Synth Brass 8 8’ ST 2BAND EQ DELAY LR THRU Bell Pad 9 4’ XG 3BAND EQ DELAY LR Synth Brass 9 8’ CROSS DELAY THRU 4 Space Pad 1 8’ ENS DETUNE DELAY LR Synth Brass 10 8’ ENS DETUNE CROSS DELAY Space Pad 2 8’ XG FLANGER 1 DELAY LR Synth Brass 11 8’ REVERS GATE DELAY LR Space Pad 3 8’ DELAY LR XG FLANGER 1 Synth Brass 12 8’ ST 3BAND EQ TEMPO CROSS Space Pad 4 16’ PITCH CHANGE DELAY LR Synth Brass 13 Space Pad 5 8’ XG CHORUS 1 DELAY LR Space Pad 6 8’ V_FLANGER 5 Noisy Pad 1 8’ ENS DETUNE Noisy Pad 2 8’ Noisy Pad 3 8’ Noisy Pad 4 Noisy Pad 5 8’ ST 2BAND EQ ENS DETUNE 5 Synth Strs 1 8’ ST 2BAND EQ XG CHORUS 1 TALKING MOD Synth Strs 2 8’ ST 3BAND EQ XG CHORUS 1 DELAY LR Synth Strs 3 8’ XG CHORUS 1 CROSS DELAY ENS DETUNE TALKING MOD Synth Strs 4 8’ XG 3BAND EQ XG CHORUS 1 XG FLANGER 2 DELAY LR Synth Strs 5 8’ XG CHORUS 1 CROSS DELAY 8’ ECHO XG FLANGER 2 Synth Strs 6 8’ PHASER 1 ER 1 8’ EQ DISCO CANYON Synth Strs 7 8’ XG CHORUS 1 CROSS DELAY 6 Synth Bell 1 8’ XG CHORUS 1 TEMPO DELAY 1 Synth Lead 1 8’ CELESTE 1 TEMPO DELAY Synth Bell 2 8’ XG PCH CHG 1 THRU Synth Lead 2 8’ ODRV+DELAY PHASER 1 Synth Bell 3 8’ ST 3BAND EQ TEMPO DELAY Synth Lead 3 8’ ER 1 DELAY LR Synth Bell 4 8’ XG HM ENHNCE XG SYMPHONIC Synth Lead 4 8’ XG CHORUS 4 THRU Synth Bell 5 8’ CROSS DELAY Synth Lead 5 8’ XG CHORUS 3 TEMPO CROSS Synth Bell 6 8’ XG HM ENHNCE XG SYMPHONIC Synth Lead 6 8’ XG CHORUS 4 XG DLY LCR Synth Bell 7 8’ CROSS DELAY TUNNEL Synth Lead 7 8’ GM CHORUS 3 DELAY LR Synth Decay 1 8’ ST 2BAND EQ TEMPO CROSS Synth Lead 8 SYNTH 34 Preset Preset Feet Effect 1 TUNNEL 8’ V_DIST SOFT DELAY LR Synth Decay 2 8’ ST 2BAND EQ ENS DETUNE 2 Pop Lead 1 8’ ST 2BAND EQ TEMPO DELAY Synth Decay 3 8’ AMBIENCE REVERS GATE Pop Lead 2 8’ XG HM ENHNCE TEMPO CROSS Synth Decay 4 8’ HM ENHANCER AMP SIM Pop Lead 3 8’ CMP+OD+TDLY ENS DETUNE ORGAN Pop Lead 4 8’ PITCH CHANGE TEMPO DELAY 1 Pipe Organ 1 8’ AMBIENCE THRU Pop Lead 5 8’ DELAY LR THRU Pipe Organ 2 8’ THRU THRU Pop Lead 6 8’ XG HM ENHNCE ECHO Pipe Organ 3 8’ THRU THRU Pop Lead 7 16’/8’ DELAY LCR THRU Pipe Organ 4 8’ THRU THRU THRU 3 Synth Cla 1 8’ ST 2BAND EQ TEMPO DELAY Pipe Organ 5 8’ THRU Synth Cla 2 8’ ENS DETUNE DELAY LR Harmonica 1 8’ THRU THRU Synth Cla 3 8’ XG 3BAND EQ DELAY LR Harmonica 2 8’ ST 3BAND EQ THRU Synth Cla 4 8’ DELAY LR ENS DETUNE Harmonica 3 8’ DELAY LR THRU Synth Cla 5 8’ ENS DETUNE XG DLY LCR Synth Cla 6 8’ XG FLANGER 3 DELAY LR Synth Sax 8’ ST 2BAND EQ DELAY LR Synth Trumpet 8’ ST 2BAND EQ DELAY LR Synth Violin 8’ ST 2BAND EQ DELAY LCR DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Preset Preset Feet Effect 1 Preset Effect 2 Category/ Voice Name HM ENHANCER Preset Preset Feet Effect 1 Preset Effect 2 2 Theatre Organ 1 8’ TREMOLO 2 2 DX E.Piano 1 8’ CHORUS 2 THRU Theatre Organ 2 8’ HM ENHANCER THRU DX E.Piano 2 8’ ENS DETUNE THRU Theatre Organ 3 8’ GT TREMOLO 1 HM ENHANCER DX E.Piano 3 8’ ST 2BAND EQ CELESTE 4 Theatre Organ 4 8’ TREMOLO 2 HM ENHANCER DX E.Piano 4 8’ ST 2BAND EQ TEMPO CROSS Theatre Organ 5 8’ TREMOLO 2 XG HM ENHNCE Stage E.Piano 1 8’ THRU THRU Theatre Organ 6 8’ THRU THRU Stage E.Piano 2 8’ ST 3BAND EQ CHORUS 1 Theatre Organ 7 8’ TREMOLO 2 THRU Stage E.Piano 3 8’ ST 2BAND EQ EP AUTO PAN Theatre Organ 8 8’ THRU XG HM ENHNCE Stage E.Piano 4 8’ ST 2BAND EQ PITCH CHANGE Accordion 1 8’ ST 3BAND EQ THRU Stage E.Piano 5 8’ XG TREMOLO XG CMP+DIST Accordion 2 8’ THRU THRU Stage E.Piano 6 8’ ST 2BAND EQ EP PHASER 3 Accordion 3 8’ THRU THRU 3 Stack E.Piano 1 8’ ST 2BAND EQ XG SYMPHONIC Accordion 4 8’ ST 3BAND EQ THRU Stack E.Piano 2 8’ HM ENHANCER ENS DETUNE Bandoneon 8’ THRU THRU Clavi 1 16’ THRU THRU Reed Organ 8’ THRU THRU Clavi 2 16’ ST 2BAND EQ TOUCH WAH 2 3 Jazz Organ 1 16’ 2WAY ROT SP THRU GUITAR Jazz Organ 2 16’ ROTARY SP 1 THRU 1 Nylon Guitar 1 16’/8’ THRU THRU Jazz Organ 3 16’ TREMOLO 1 XG ROTARY SP Nylon Guitar 2 16’/8’ ST 3BAND EQ THRU Jazz Organ 4 16’ TREMOLO 1 ROTARY SP 1 Steel Guitar 1 16’/8’ ST 2BAND EQ HM ENHANCER Jazz Organ 5 16’ ST 3BAND EQ BASEMENT Steel Guitar 2 16’/8’ THRU THRU Jazz Organ 6 16’ ST 3BAND EQ XG ROTARY SP 12Str Guitar 16’/8’ ST 2BAND EQ XG HM ENHNCE Jazz Organ 7 16’ ST 2BAND EQ ROTARY SP 1 Jazz Guitar 1 16’/8’ THRU THRU Jazz Organ 8 16’ ST 2BAND EQ XG ROTARY SP Jazz Guitar 2 16’/8’ THRU THRU Jazz Organ 9 16’ ST 3BAND EQ DUAL ROTSP 2 Harp 1 8’ THRU THRU 4 Pop Organ 1 8’ ST 2BAND EQ TREMOLO 1 Harp 2 8’ THRU THRU Pop Organ 2 8’ ST 3BAND EQ DUAL ROTSP 1 ER 1 THRU Pop Organ 3 8’ XG 3BAND EQ DUAL ROTSP 1 2 Elec Guitar 1 16’/8’ ST 2BAND EQ SYMPHONIC Pop Organ 4 8’ ST 2BAND EQ DIST+2ROT SP Elec Guitar 2 16’/8’ ST 2BAND EQ V_DIST SOFT Pop Organ 5 8’ XG PCH CHG 1 DIST+2ROT SP Elec Guitar 3 16’/8’ ST 2BAND EQ ST OVERDRIVE Rock Organ 1 8’ ST 2BAND EQ ODRV+ROT SP Elec Guitar 4 16’/8’ ODRV+T DLY THRU Rock Organ 2 8’ V_DIST SOFT DUAL ROTSP 2 Elec Guitar 5 16’/8’ ST 2BAND EQ V_DIST SOFT Harp 3 8’ Rock Organ 3 8’ COMP+DIST ROTARY SP 1 Muted Guitar 16’/8’ ST 2BAND EQ TEMPO DELAY 5 Organ Bass 1 8’ THRU THRU Distortion Gtr 1 16’/8’ ST 2BAND EQ WAH+OD+T DLY Organ Bass 2 16’ THRU THRU Distortion Gtr 2 16’/8’ ST 3BAND EQ V_DST H+TDLY Organ Bass 3 16’ THRU THRU Distortion Gtr 3 16’/8’ ST 3BAND EQ DIST+T DLY Organ Bass 4 16’ THRU THRU PIANO THRU 3 Banjo 8’ THRU THRU Mandolin 8’ THRU THRU Pedal Steel Gtr 8’ THRU THRU THRU 1 Piano 1 8’ THRU Piano 2 8’ XG HM ENHNCE THRU PERCUSSION Piano 3 8’ AMBIENCE THRU 1 Vibraphone 1 8’ THRU Honkytonk Piano 8’ LO-FI ST 3BAND EQ Vibraphone 2 8’ HM ENHANCER AUTO PAN Harpsichord 1 8’ THRU THRU Marimba 1 8’ THRU THRU Harpsichord 2 8’ THRU THRU Marimba 2 8’ THRU THRU Clavichord 8’ AMBIENCE THRU Xylophone 4’ THRU THRU Glockenspiel 1 4’ THRU THRU Glockenspiel 2 4’ THRU THRU DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 2 Voices Category/ Voice Name 35 Category/ Voice Name 2 Preset Preset Feet Effect 1 Preset Effect 2 Preset Preset Feet Effect 1 Preset Effect 2 Voices 2 Celesta 1 4’ HM ENHANCER THRU 3 Smooth Bass 1 16’ ST 2BAND EQ Celesta 2 4’ HM ENHANCER THRU Smooth Bass 2 16’ THRU THRU Music Box 1 4’ THRU Smooth Bass 3 16’ ST 2BAND EQ FLANGER 1 Music Box 2 4’ HM ENHANCER STAGE 2 Smooth Bass 4 16’ ST 2BAND EQ PITCH CHANGE Chime 1 4’ AMBIENCE THRU Smooth Bass 5 16’ ST 2BAND EQ ENS DETUNE Chime 2 8’ AMBIENCE HALL L Smooth Bass 6 16’ THRU THRU Chime 3 8’ ST 2BAND EQ PLATE 2 Smooth Bass 7 16’ ST 2BAND EQ PITCH CHANGE THRU TIMPANI PITCH CHANGE WORLD 1 Timpani 1 8’ ST 2BAND EQ ER 1 1 Pan Flute 1 8’ THRU THRU Timpani 2 8’ ST 2BAND EQ ER 2 Pan Flute 2 8’ THRU THRU Timpani Roll 1 8’ ST 2BAND EQ ER 1 Bagpipe 8’ THRU THRU Timpani Roll 2 8’ ST 2BAND EQ ER 2 Dulcimer 8’ THRU THRU Timpani Roll 3 8’ ST 2BAND EQ ER 1 Shakuhachi 8’ THRU THRU Yokobue 4’ THRU THRU ELECTRIC BASS 1 Fingered Bass 1 16’ THRU THRU Shamisen 8’ THRU THRU Fingered Bass 2 8’ THRU THRU Koto 8’ THRU THRU Fingered Bass 3 16’ THRU THRU Taishokoto 4’ THRU THRU Fingered Bass 4 16’ THRU THRU 2 Erhu 1 8’ HM ENHANCER THRU Fingered Bass 5 16’ THRU THRU Erhu 2 8’ THRU THRU Slap Bass 1 16’ THRU THRU Sheng 8’ THRU THRU Slap Bass 2 16’ THRU THRU Zheng 8’ THRU THRU Slap Bass 3 16’ ST 2BAND EQ XG PCH CHG 1 Pipa 8’ THRU THRU Slap Bass 4 16’ M BAND COMP THRU Nay 8’ THRU THRU 2 Picked Bass 1 16’ THRU THRU Surnay 8’ THRU THRU Picked Bass 2 16’ ST 2BAND EQ PITCH CHANGE Oud 8’ THRU THRU Picked Bass 3 16’ THRU THRU Sitar 8’ THRU THRU Picked Bass 4 16’ THRU THRU Kamanche 8’ THRU THRU Fretless Bass 1 16’ THRU THRU 3 Steel Drum 8’ THRU THRU Fretless Bass 2 16’ ST 2BAND EQ PITCH CHANGE Log Drum 8’ THRU THRU Kalimba 8’ THRU THRU SYNTH BASS 36 Category/ Voice Name 1 Funk Bass 1 16’ THRU THRU Funk Bass 2 16’ THRU THRU Funk Bass 3 16’ THRU THRU Funk Bass 4 16’ ENS DETUNE THRU Funk Bass 5 16’ ST 2BAND EQ XG FLANGER 1 Funk Bass 6 16’ ST 2BAND EQ ENS DETUNE Funk Bass 7 16’ ST 2BAND EQ XG HM ENHNCE Funk Bass 8 16’ THRU THRU Funk Bass 9 16’ ST 2BAND EQ ENS DETUNE Funk Bass 10 16’ ST 2BAND EQ PITCH CHANGE 2 Dance Bass 1 16’ THRU THRU Dance Bass 2 16’ THRU THRU Dance Bass 3 16’ THRU THRU Dance Bass 4 16’ ST 2BAND EQ HM ENHANCER Dance Bass 5 16’ ST 2BAND EQ ENS DETUNE Dance Bass 6 16’ ST 2BAND EQ ENS DETUNE Dance Bass 7 16’ THRU THRU Dance Bass 8 16’ HM ENHANCER FLANGER 1 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 3 Organ Flutes The DDK-7 has an Organ Flutes feature that allows you to create your own organ Voices, giving you access to an unlimited combination of organ sounds. With this function, you can recreate all of the classic organ sounds by adjusting the flute footage levels and the percussive sounds, just like on conventional organs. There are nine flute footage settings, with three additional footage settings for the attack sound. Organ Flutes 1 3 Press one of the Organ Flutes buttons (UPPER or LOWER). The Flute Footage Levers appear on the display. FOOTAGE Page 2 Press the ON/OFF button in the display to turn the Organ Flutes function on by selecting “ON”. To turn off the Organ Flutes function, press the same button a second time to select “OFF”. The lamp of the [U. ORGAN FLUTES] or [L. ORGAN FLUTES] button on the panel lights up when the Organ Flutes function is on. The lamp turns off when the function is off. 3 Select the wave type for the Organ Flute Voice. Selecting [SINE] button produces a clean, clear sound and selecting [VINTAGE] produces a gritty, slightly distorted sound. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 37 3 4 Adjust flute footage settings (over a range of 0 – 8). The Flute footage levers can be adjusted by directly touching the display. The Data Control dial cannot be used. Play the keyboard and listen to the changes in the sound as you adjust the footage levels. 5 Press the [ATTACK/VOLUME] button in the upper right on the display to adjust the volume and attack settings. ATTACK/VOLUME Page Organ Flutes 1 1 2 3 4 5 ATTACK Determines the level of each volume in the percussive portion of the Voice. Footage settings are 4', 2-2/3' and 2'. The LENGTH lever determines the duration of the attack sound. 2 RESP. (Response) Determines the overall speed of the keyboard response. Moving the lever downward makes the keyboard response slower, creating a pipe organ effect. 3 MODE Determines which notes in a held group of notes are given an attack sound. This parameter is common to both Upper and Lower Organ Flute Voices. FIRST: Only the first note played will have attack. All other notes played while the first is held have no attack. EACH: All notes played have an attack sound. 4 Reference Page Reverb (page 46) REVERB Determines the amount of reverb applied to the Organ Flute Voice. When the reverb depth in the REVERB Page 1 control is set to the minimum, the setting here will have no effect. 5 VOLUME Determines the overall volume of the Organ Flute Voice. The volume balance of the individual footages is maintained. A minimum setting here produces no Organ Flute sound. 38 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 6 Press the [EFFECT] button in the upper right on the display to adjust the Rotary Speaker settings. EFFECT Page 3 Organ Flutes 1 2 1 EFFECT TYPE Select the Rotary Speaker (tremolo) effect type. Pressing the button for which the effect type (or “OFF”) is displayed calls up a list of the effect types. Select the desired type from among the list. Reference Pages Effect List (page 52) Rotary Speaker (page 50) Select the desired effect type 2 EFFECT Parameters Effect parameters are displayed corresponding to the selected effect type. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 39 4 Voice Controls and Effects The DDK-7 is equipped with two general kinds of functions that can be used to change the sound of the Voices: Voice Controls and Effects. Each Voice has been given certain factory-preset effect settings to best enhance its sound. However, if you wish, you can change the sound to suit your preferences by using the controls and effects described in this section. All built-in effects are digital. The chart below shows the various Voice controls and effects for the individual Voice sections. Available functions are indicated by circles. The controls and effects are applied differently according to the different types: independently for each Voice section, independently for each keyboard or globally for the entire system. 4 Controls and Effects Selecting from the panel Selecting from the Voice Condition display Voice Controls and Effects Reference page for changing the settings Voice sections to which the controls/effects are applied Upper Keyboard Upper Keyboard Voice 1, 2 Organ Flute Voice Lead Voice Lower Keyboard Lead Voice 1, 2 Lower Keyboard Voice 1, 2 Organ Flute Voice Pedalboard Pedalboard Voice 1, 2 Pan page 41 O — O O — O Touch Tone page 41 O — O O — O Pitch page 42 O — O O — O Feet page 42 O — O O — O Reverb (send level) page 42 O O O O O O Brilliance page 42 O — O O — O Volume page 42 O O O O O O Priority* page 42 — — O* — — — Poly (Pedal polyphonic mode) page 42 — — — — — O Vibrato page 43 O — O O — O Touch Vibrato page 44 O — O O — O Lead Slide page 44 O — O — — — Transpose page 44 O — O O — O Tune page 44 O — O O — O Effect (1, 2) page 45 O — O O — O Reverb page 46 Sustain page 49 O O O Rotary Speaker page 50 O O O O O * Priority is applied only for Lead Voice 2. Contents 1 Selecting from the Voice Condition display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 2 Selecting from the panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 3 Effect List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 40 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 1 Selecting from the Voice Condition display Choose a Voice on the panel, then press the same button on the panel again (or press the name of the selected Voice in the display). The Voice Condition display appears. Voice Condition Display for each Voice has four pages that can be switched by pressing [1] – [4] buttons at the top right of the display. Voice Condition [Page 1] 1 2 2 2-1 2-2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2-1 2-2 4 3 4 5 6 7 Voice Controls and Effects 1 9 In this display, you can adjust the basic Voice controls, including panning, touch tone and volume. The displays of the various Voice sections have slight differences in their functions. 1 PAN Determines the position of the Voice in the stereo image. Seven pan positions are available. 2 TOUCH TONE The Touch Tone function gives you expressive control over the volume and timbre of a Voice. All Voices are provided with this expressive function, making it possible to perfectly reproduce the subtle dynamic and tonal changes of actual instruments. Two types of keyboard touch affect this function: Initial Touch and After Touch. 2 -1 INITIAL touch Controls volume and timbre according to the velocity at which you play the keys. The harder you play the keys, the greater the volume and the brighter the timbre will become. Higher settings make the change wider. Minimum setting produces no effect. Range: 0 – 14 2 -2 AFTER touch Controls volume and timbre according to the pressure you apply to the keys after playing them. The harder you press down on the keys, the greater the volume and the brighter the timbre will become. Higher settings make the change wider. Minimum setting produces no effect. Range: 0 – 14 NOTE Initial Touch may not be effective on some organ Voices. NOTE After Touch is not applied to the Pedal Voices. NOTE After Touch has no effect on percussive Voices (such as piano or vibraphone), percussion sounds, or some organ Voices. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 41 3 PITCH Controls pitch according to the play style of After Touch. AFTER touch Controls the pitch according to the pressure you apply to the keys after playing them. The minimum setting produces no effect at all. Higher (positive) settings make the pitch higher according to the pressure and lower (negative) settings make the pitch lower. The setting of +14 or -14 results in the widest pitch change. Range: -14 – +14 4 4 FEET Voice Controls and Effects Determines the octave setting of the Voice, letting you use the Voice over a wide register. There are three settings: 4', 8' and 16' (4' is highest and 16' is lowest). A 2' setting is added to the Pedal Voice sections. PRESET is the original (factory) setting. 5 REVERB Determines the amount of reverb applied to each Voice section. When the REVERB control in the Reverb Page 1 is set to the minimum, the setting here will have no effect. See page 46 for details. 6 BRILLIANCE Adjustment of the Voice tone, brighter or mellower. Range is from -3 to +3. Higher settings makes the voice tone brighter. 7 VOLUME Fine adjustment of the Voice volume. See page 28 for more information. 8 PRIORITY (only for the Lead Voice 2) Determines the mode of Lead Voice 2, Last or Top. LAST: Only the last played key is sounded when two or more keys are played simultaneously. TOP: Only the highest note is sounded when two or more keys are played simultaneously. When the Solo mode is on, Lead Voice 2 sounds according to Last mode, regardless of the setting made here. Reference Page Solo function (page 30) 9 POLY (only for Pedal Voices) Allows you to switch the pedal polyphonic mode on or off. Setting POLY to on switches the normally monophonic pedal Voices to polyphonic play. This makes it possible to play the Pedalboard in various expressive ways, such as playing legato or playing intervals and chords. Keep in mind that you cannot exceed the total maximum polyphony: 14 notes for all sections, Upper, Lower and Pedal. 42 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Voice Condition [Page 2] 1 1 -1 3 2 3-1 3-2 4 4 5 Voice Controls and Effects 1-2 1-3 1-4 The items included in this page differ between the Lead Voice sections and the other sections. SLIDE (3) only applies to Lead Voice 1 and 2. 1 VIBRATO The Vibrato function wavers the level of the Voices, making them sound warmer and more animated. This effect is applied independently to each Voice section. For some Voices, vibrato may not be effective at all or the effect may not sound as expected. Selecting PRESET calls up the original (factory) vibrato settings for the Voice. When PRESET is selected, DELAY, DEPTH and SPEED parameters cannot be edited. Selecting USER lets you adjust the vibrato settings for yourself. Vibrato Control Speed Delay Depth 1 - 1 PRESET/USER 1 - 2 DELAY Determines the amount of time that elapses between the playing of a key and the start of the vibrato effect. Higher settings increase the delay of the vibrato onset. Range: 0 – 14 1 - 3 DEPTH Determines the intensity of the vibrato effect. Higher settings result in a more pronounced vibrato. The minimum setting cancels the vibrato effect. Range: 0 – 14 1 - 4 SPEED Determines the speed of the vibrato effect. Higher settings increase the speed of the vibrato. Range: 0 – 14 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 43 2 NOTE Touch Vibrato is not applied to the Pedal Voices. Turns the Touch Vibrato function on or off. Setting Touch Vibrato to on lets you apply vibrato to individual notes as you play them by after touch. The harder you press down the key, the greater the vibrato will be. When Touch Vibrato is off, vibrato depth cannot be controlled, no matter how hard you press the keys. 3 Reference Page Controlling Lead Slide (with Foot Pedal); (page 199) 4 TOUCH VIBRATO SLIDE (only for Lead Voices) Applies a portamento effect to notes played in legato. The Slide function is effective within a one-octave range for Lead Voices. Slide has no effect when playing notes beyond a one-octave range. By connecting an optional Foot Pedal to the DDK-7, you can use it to control the slide function. 3 - 1 ON/OFF Voice Controls and Effects On/Off switch the Slide effect. 3 - 2 TIME Determines the speed of the slide or portamento effect. Higher settings makes the slide speed slower. Range: 0 – 14 Reference Page Transpose (for entire instrument); (page 208) 4 Changes the pitch in semitones for each Voice section. Range is from -6 to +6. 5 Reference Page Pitch (for entire instrument); (page 208) 44 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual TRANSPOSE TUNE Determines the fine pitch settings (detune) for each Voice section, producing a richer sound. Each step represents a 1-cent change in pitch. Range: -64 – +63 Voice Condition [Page 3, 4] 2 1 4 Voice Controls and Effects 3 You can edit the effect parameters from these two displays. Both displays have the same contents. You can select two effects for each Voice section with these displays (Voice Condition Pages 3 and 4). 1 EFFECT 1 (Page 3)/EFFECT 2 (Page 4) Selects the effect category. Pressing the effect button on the display calls up the effect category list. Select the desired effect category in the list. Reference Page Effect List (page 52) By selecting [PRESET] in the list, the original (factory) effect category for the selected Voice is automatically set. Selecting [THRU] bypasses the effect (no effect is added to the selected Voice). 2 TYPE 1 (Page 3)/ TYPE 2 (Page 4) Determines the type of the effect. Pressing the TYPE button on the display calls up the effect type list, corresponding to the selected effect category. Select the desired effect type in the list. If you have selected the [PRESET] category, the effect type cannot be edited. After changing the effect type, the effect parameter below is automatically changed corresponding to the selected effect type. 3 Effect Parameters Effect parameters are displayed corresponding to the selected effect type. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 45 2 Selecting from the panel The Reverb, Sustain and Rotary Speaker displays are called up by pressing the respective buttons on the panel. Reverb Reverb adds an echo-like effect to the sound, giving the impression of a performance in a large room or concert hall. You can adjust the reverb volume for each Voice sections, or adjust the reverb volume for rhythm and accompaniment separately. 4 Voice Controls and Effects To adjust the reverb effect and call up the Reverb pages: Press the REVERB button, located to the left of the panel, to set the Reverb effect. The Reverb display appears. The Reverb display consists of four pages. REVERB [Page 1] DEPTH: Fine adjustment of the depth of reverberation or the level of the reflected sounds. When this parameter is set to the minimum, the settings in the pages that follow have no effect. Range: 0 – 24 46 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual REVERB [Page 2] 2 4 3 1 TYPE Determines the reverb type for each of the Voice sections and the Organ Flute Voice. Several types can be selected: Room, Hall, Stage, and so on. Pressing the TYPE button on the display calls up the Reverb Type list. Voice Controls and Effects 1 Reference Page Effect List (page 52) Press the number buttons to change the display pages. The list contains many reverb types, more than can fit on one display page. To change the display pages, press the appropriate number buttons [1] or [2] in the display. Select the desired reverb type in the list. After changing the reverb type, the TIME parameter below is automatically changed corresponding to the selected reverb type. 2 TIME Determines the reverb length for each of the Voice sections and the Organ Flute Voice. Higher settings increase the reverberance. Range: 0.3s – 30.0s 3 ORGAN Determines the amount of reverb applied to the Organ Flute Voice. This parameter corresponds to the REVERB slider contained in the ATTACK/VOLUME Page of the Organ Flute display. Range: 0 – 24 Reference Page Organ Flutes (page 37) DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 47 REVERB [Page 3] 4 Voice Controls and Effects Determines the amount of reverb effect applied to each Voice section. Each slider corresponds to the REVERB slider in Voice Condition Page 1 of the respective Voices. Range: 0 – 24 REVERB [Page 4] 1 Reference Page Connecting a Microphone (page 232) 2 3 4 1 TYPE Determines the reverb type for rhythm, accompaniment, keyboard percussion, and microphone signal. 2 TIME Determines the length of reverb applied to the rhythm, accompaniment, keyboard percussion, and microphone signal. Range: 0.3s – 30.0s 3 Reference Pages Changing the rhythm reverb (page 67) Keyboard Percussion (page 74) RHYTHM Determines the amount of reverb applied to the rhythm (with PERCUSSION slider) and accompaniment (with ACCOMPANI. slider). Each slider corresponds to the REVERB slider in the Rhythm Condition display. Range: 0 – 24 4 KEYBOARD PERCUSSION Determines the amount of reverb applied to the Keyboard Percussion. Range: 0 – 24 48 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Sustain The sustain effect, selectable for the each Voice section, causes Voices to gradually fade out when the keys are released. The sustain on/off and sustain length settings are independent for each Voice section, providing maximum expressive control. The optional Foot Pedal can also be used to switch sustain on/off for voice sections other than Pedal Voice 1 and 2. Reference Page Foot Pedal (page 196) To add sustain to the Voices and call up the Sustain page: Press the SUSTAIN button, located to the left of the panel, to set the sustain. The Sustain display appears. Voice Controls and Effects 4 The Sustain display consists of two pages. SUSTAIN Display Switches the sustain function on/off Sustain length value The display shows the on/off status and the current sustain length values for each Voice section. The values here must be set high enough for the sustain effect to be noticeable. Press the ON/OFF button in the display to select “ON” above the Voice section name for which you want to apply sustain. To turn sustain off, press the same button a second time to select “OFF”. To adjust the sustain length value, use the display sliders. If you set the highest value (HOLD), some Voices such as organ or synth will sound continuously even when the keys are released. The lamp of the [SUSTAIN] button lights up when you turn on the Sustain effect for one of the Voice sections in the Sustain display. When you turn off the Sustain effect for all Voice sections in the Sustain display, the lamp turns off. Remember to check whether the sustain effects are on or off in the Sustain display before you start to play. Range: 0 – 12, HOLD DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 49 Rotary Speaker Rotary Speaker recreates the rich, swirling sound of the popular rotating speaker effect. The Rotary Speaker effect can be switched in real time as you play, with either the front panel button. The Rotary Speaker effect CANNOT be turned on only by turning on the [ROTARY SP SPEED] button. The following procedure is needed to use the Rotary Speaker effect. 1 Select the Rotary Speaker effect from the desired Voice. When you want to set Rotary Speaker to one of the Voice section, you can select the effect category of Rotary Speaker in the Voice Condition Display Page 3 or 4. See page 45 for details. 4 Voice Controls and Effects Select “Rotary Speaker” here. When you want to set Rotary Speaker for the Organ Flute Voice, select the effect type in the EFFECT Page. See page 39 for details. Select an effect type other than [OFF]. 50 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 2 Adjust the rotating speed and mode of the Rotary Speaker. Press the [ROTARY SP SPEED] button on the panel. The ROTARY SPEAKER display appears. The settings in this display are common to all Voice sections. ROTARY SPEAKER Display 1 1 Voice Controls and Effects 4 2 SPEED Determines the speed of the speaker rotation. Range: 2.69Hz – 39.7Hz 2 MODE Determines the slow/stop mode when [ROTARY SP SPEED] button is off. If [SLOW] is selected, a slow chorus effect is applied when you turn off the button on the panel. If [STOP] is selected, the Rotary Speaker effect turns off when you turn off the button on the panel. Once the Rotary Speaker effect has been turned on and set, you can control the effect in real time from the panel. 3 Control the Rotary Speaker effect from the panel. You can control Rotary Speaker on/off from the panel. An optional Foot Pedal, or the Footswitch on the Pedal Unit can also be used to switch the effect on/off. See page 196 for details. Reference Page Footswitches (page 193) Foot Pedal (page 196) DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 51 3 Effect List 4 Voice Controls and Effects REVERB Parameter Value Description Produces a gentle “wash” of aftertones in the sound, recreating the subtle ambience and depth of actual performance spaces and rooms. L DelayTime 0.1 - 1486.0 msec Echo: 0.1 - 371.5 msec Determines the time that elapses between the original sound and the delayed repeat in the left channel. R DelayTime 0.1 - 1486.0 msec Echo: 0.1 - 371.5 msec Determines the time that elapses between the original sound and the delayed repeat in the right channel. C DelayTime 0.1 - 1486.0 msec Echo: 0.1 - 371.5 msec Determines the time that elapses between the original sound and the delayed repeat in the center of the stereo image. L>R Delay Time 0.1 - 743.0 msec Determines the time for the sound to move from left to right (when using Cross Delay). R>L Delay Time 0.1 - 743.0 msec Determines the time for the sound to move from right to left (when using Cross Delay). DelayTime 32th - 4th When using Tempo Delay, this sets the time between delayed repeats to match the tempo of the rhythm/song. InputSelect L, R, L&R Determines the input configuration. Feedback Delay Time 0.1 - 1486.0 msec Determines the feedback time of the delayed repeats. The larger the value, the longer the time between delayed repeats. (For Delay LR, the left and right channels can be set independently.) Feedback Delay 1 0.1 - 1486.0 msec Determines the first feedback delay time of the L/R delay. Feedback Delay 2 0.1 - 1486.0 msec Determines the second feedback delay time of the L/R delay. Feedback Level -63 - +63 Determines the amount of delayed repeats in the sound. When this is set to 0%, the delayed repeat from the second time will not sound. L Feedback -63 - +63 Determines the feedback level in the left channel. R Feedback -63 - +63 Determines the feedback level in the right channel. Dry/Wet D63>W - D<W63 Determines the balance of original sound and the effect sound. Effect Type Effect Type HALL 1 PLATE 2 HALL 2 WHITE ROOM HALL 3 TUNNEL HALL M CANYON HALL L BASEMENT ROOM 1 XG HALL 1 ROOM 2 XG HALL 2 ROOM 3 XG ROOM 1 ROOM 4 XG ROOM 2 ROOM S XG ROOM 3 ROOM M XG STAGE 1 ROOM L XG STAGE 2 STAGE 1 XG PLATE STAGE 2 GM PLATE PLATE 1 Parameter Value Description Time 0.3 - 30.0 s Determines the decay time of the reverb. Dry/Wet D63>W - D<W63 Determines the balance of the original sound (dry) and the effect sound (wet). DELAY Produces delayed distinct repeats of the sound, or echoes. This is also useful for creating rhythmic repeats in the sound. Effect Type DELAY LCR XG DLY LCR DELAY LR ECHO CROSS DELAY TEMPO DELAY TEMPO ECHO TEMPO CROSS 52 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Parameter Value Description Produces early reflections without the subsequent reverb, or a deep echo effect like that used in Karaoke sing-along applications. LFO Freq. 0.00 - 39.7 Hz Determines the frequency of oscillation, or the speed of the wavering effect. LFO Depth 0 - 127 Determines the depth of oscillation, or the amount of the wavering effect. Input Mode Mono, Stereo Determines the input configuration. Detune -50 - +50 cent Determines the amount of detuning (or pitch shifting) is applied to the delayed repeats. L DelayTime 0.0 - 50.0 msec Determines the time that elapses between the original sound and the delayed repeat in the left channel. R DelayTime 0.0 - 50.0 msec Determines the time that elapses between the original sound and the delayed repeat in the right channel. Dry/Wet D63>W - D<W63 Determines the balance of the original sound and the effect sound. Effect Type ER 1 ER 2 GATE REVERB REVERS GATE KARAOKE 1 KARAOKE 2 KARAOKE 3 Parameter Value Description Type S-H, L-H, Rdm, Rvs, Plt, Spr Determines the early reflection type. The response of the early reflections varies depending on the type. Room Size 0.1 - 7.0 Determines the room size. The higher the value the longer the ER. Type Type A, Type B Determines the reverse gate type. DelayTime 0.1 - 400 msec Determines the time that elapses between the original sound and the delayed repeat. Feedback Level -63 - +63 Determines the amount of delayed repeats in the sound. When this is set to 0%, the delayed repeat from the second time will not sound. Dry/Wet D63>W - D<W63 Determines the balance of the original sound and effect sound. 4 Voice Controls and Effects ER/KARAOKE FLANGER This creates a metallic periodic “sweeping” effect, similar to Chorus but with a brighter more resonant sound. Effect Type FLANGER 1 FLANGER 2 XG FLANGER 1 XG FLANGER 2 XG FLANGER 3 GM FLANGER V_FLANGER TEMP FLANGER CHORUS DYNA FLANGER Creates a warm effect as if several of the same sound were playing at once. Makes the overall sound richer, “fatter” and more animated. Effect Type Effect Type CHORUS 1 GM CHORUS 4 CHORUS 2 FB CHORUS XG CHORUS 1 CELESTE 1 XG CHORUS 2 CELESTE 2 XG CHORUS 3 CELESTE 3 XG CHORUS 4 CELESTE 4 GM CHORUS 1 SYMPHONIC GM CHORUS 2 XG SYMPHONIC GM CHORUS 3 ENS DETUNE Parameter Value Description LFO Freq. 0.00 - 39.7 Hz Determines the frequency of oscillation, or the speed of the wavering effect. LFO Depth 0 - 127 Determines the depth of oscillation, or the amount of the wavering effect. FEEDBACK LEVEL -63 - +63 Determines the amount of output sound (with the flanging effect) that is returned to the input. The larger the value, the more complex and pronounced the flanging effect becomes. LFO Wave Triangle, Sine, Random Determines the waveform: triangular wave, sine wave or random. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 53 4 Parameter Value Description TREMOLO/AUTO PAN Sensitivity 0 - 127 Determines the sensitivity. The higher the value the greater the change. Threshold 0 - 127 Determines the input level at which effect begins to be applied. This periodically changes the volume and has the effect of moving the sound image both front and back, and left and right. Dry/Wet D63>W - D<W63 Determines the original sound and the effect sound. Effect Type Effect Type TREMOLO 1 ORGAN TREMOLO TREMOLO 2 AUTO PAN XG TREMOLO XG AT PAN 1 Voice Controls and Effects EP TREMOLO XG AT PAN 2 PHASER GT TREMOLO 1 EP AUTO PAN Similar to Flanger, this produces rolling timbre changes and a pronounced up/down filter sweep effect. GT TREMOLO 2 Parameter Value Description LFO Freq. 0.00 - 39.7 Hz Determines the tremolo speed. LFO Depth 0 - 127 Determines the depth of the Tremolo effect. AM Depth 0 - 127 Determines the amount of volume change. PM Depth 0 - 127 Determines the amount of pitch change in the sound. Input Mode Mono, Stereo Determines the input configuration. L/R Depth 0 - 127 Determines the depth of panning between the left and right channels. F/R Depth 0 - 127 Front/rear. Determines the depth of the front and rear panning effect. This controls both level and pitch at the same time. Pan L<->R, L->R, L<-R, Lturn, Rturn, L/R Determines the Auto Pan type. (“L<->R” is a sine wave and “L/R” is a sawtooth wave.) Dry/Wet D63>W - D<W63 Determines the balance of original sound and the effect sound. Effect Type PHASER 1 PHASER 2 EP PHASER 1 EP PHASER 2 EP PHASER 3 TEMPO PHASER DYNA PHASER Parameter Value Description LFO Freq. 0.00 - 39.7 Hz Determines the frequency of oscillation, or the speed of the wavering effect. LFO Depth 0 - 127 Determines the depth of oscillation, or the amount of the wavering effect. Phase Shift 54 0 - 127 Determines the phase relationship between the processed signal and the original. This changes the sound characteristics of the Phaser effect. Feedback Level -63 - +63 Determines the amount of output sound (with the phasing effect) that is returned to the input. The larger the value, the more complex and pronounced the phasing effect becomes. Sensitivity 0 - 127 Determines the sensitivity. The higher the value the greater the change. Threshold 0 - 127 Determines the input level at which effect begins to be applied. Dry/Wet D63>W - D<W63 Determines the balance of the original sound and the effect sound. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual ROTARY SPEAKER DISTORTION This popular effect (used mainly for electronic organ sounds) recreates the rich, animated pulsing sound of a rotating speaker horn. This effect adds distortion to the sound. Effect Type Effect Type DIST HARD 1 V_DIST HARD Effect Type DIST HARD 2 V_DIST SOFT XG ROTARY SP DUAL ROTSP 2 DIST SOFT 1 COMP+DIST ROTARY SP 1 DIST+ROT SP DIST SOFT 2 XG CMP+DIST ROTARY SP 2 ODRV+ROT SP ST DIST HARD AMP SIM AMP+ROT SP ST DIST SOFT XG AMP SIM ROTARY SP 4 DIST+2ROT SP OVERDRIVE ST AMP SIM 1 ROTARY SP 5 ODRV+2ROT SP ST OVERDRIVE ST AMP SIM 2 2WAY ROT SP AMP+2ROT SP XG DIST XG ST AMP Effect Type ROTARY SP 3 Parameter Value Description EQ Low Freq. 32 - 2.0k Hz Determines the central frequency of the low frequency range that is boosted or cut. Parameter Value Description Drive 0 - 127 Determines the amount or degree of distortion in the sound. Amp. Type Off, Stack, Combo, Tube Determines the type of amplifier that is simulated. LPF Cutoff 1.0 - 18kHz, Thru Determines the cutoff frequency of the low pass filter. Frequencies above this value are cut or filtered out. OutputLevel 0 - 127 Determines the level or volume of the processed sound. EQ Low Gain -12 - +12 dB Determines the amount of EQ boost or cut in the low frequency range. EQ Middle Gain -12 - +12 dB Determines the amount of EQ boost or cut in the mid frequency range. Overdrive 0 - 100 % Determines the depth of overdrive. The higher the value the greater the amount of distortion. Device Transistor, Vintage, Dist 1, Dist 2, Fuzz Determines the device that will create distortion: Transistor, VintageTube, Distortion, Fuzz and so on. Speaker Flat, Stack, Combo, Twin, Radio, Megaphone Determines the simulated speaker type: Flat, Stack, Combo, Twin, Radio, Megaphone and so on. Presence 0 - 20 Values in the higher range can give vocals more presence. Comp. Threshold -48 - -6 db Determines the input level at which compression begins to be applied. Dry/Wet D63>W - D<W63 Determines the balance of the original sound and the effect sound. EQ Low Gain -12 - +12 dB Determines the amount over which the low frequency range is boosted or cut. EQ Middle Freq. 100 - 16k Hz Determines the central frequency of the middle frequency range that is boosted or cut. EQ Middle Gain -12 - +12 dB Determines the amount over which the middle frequency range is boosted or cut. EQ Hi.Freq. 500 - 16k Hz Determines the central frequency of the high frequency range that is boosted or cut. -12 - +12 dB Determines the amount over which the high frequency range is boosted or cut. Low/High Balance L63>H - L<H63 Determines the volume balance between low and high speakers. MIC L-R Angle 0 - 180deg Determines the L/R angle of the apparent microphone. Dist. Drive 0 - 127 Determines the depth of distortion. The higher the value the greater the amount of distortion. Amp. Type Off, Stack, Combo, Tube Determines the amplifier type simulated. Drive 0 - 127 Determines the amount of distortion. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Voice Controls and Effects DUAL ROTSP 1 EQ Hi.Gain 4 XG ST DIST 55 4 DISTORTION+ WAH A combination of Distortion and Delay. This uses an automatic up/down filter sweep to change the timbre of the sound, producing a “wahwah” sound. Effect Type Effect Type DIST+DELAY V_DIST H+DLY Voice Controls and Effects ODRV+DELAY V_DIST S+DLY Effect Type Effect Type XG DIST+DLY DIST+T DLY AUTO WAH TC WAH+ODRV XG ODRV+DLY ODRV+T DLY XG AUTO WAH XG TC WAH+OD CMP+DIST+DLY CMP+DST+TDLY TOUCH WAH 1 CLAVI TC WAH CMP+ODRV+DLY CMP+OD+TDLY TOUCH WAH 2 EP TOUCH WAH XG CMP+DT+DL V_DST H+TDLY AT WAH+DIST WAH+DST+TDLY XG CMP+OD+DL V_DST S+TDLY XG AT WH+DST WAH+OD+T DLY AT WAH+ODRV WAH+DIST+DLY XG AT WAH+OD XG WH+DST+DL TC WAH+DIST WAH+ODRV+DLY XG TC WH+DST XG WH+OD+DLY Parameter Value Description Dist. Drive 0 - 127 Determines the depth of distortion. The higher the value the greater the amount of distortion. Value Description 0.00 - 39.7 Hz Determines the speed of the Wah effect. Dist. Out Level 0 - 127 Determines the output level of the distorted sound. LFO Freq. L DelayTime 0.1 - 1486.0 msec Determines the time that elapses between the original sound and the delayed repeat in the left channel. LFO Depth 0 - 127 Determines the depth of the Wah effect. Cutoff 0 - 127 Determines the central frequency that the wah filter acts upon. Resonance 1.0 - 12.0 Determines the frequency bandwidth (around the central frequency set in Cutoff above) that the wah filter affects. Drive 0 - 127 Higher values result in a more distorted sound. Sensitivity 0 - 127 Determines the degree to which the wah filter is affected by your playing touch. DelayTime 0.1 - 1486.0 msec Determines the time that elapses between the original sound and the delayed repeat. Delay Feedback -63 - +63 Determines the amount of delayed repeats in the sound. Comp. Threshold -48 - -6db Determines the input level at which compression begins to be applied. Dist. Out Level 0 - 127 Determines the output level of the distorted sound. Dry/Wet D63>W - D<W63 Determines the balance of the original sound and the effect sound. R DelayTime 0.1 - 1486.0 msec Determines the time that elapses between the original sound and the delayed repeat in the right channel. Delay Feedback -63 - +63 Determines the amount of delayed repeats in the sound. Comp. Threshold -48 - -6db Determines the input level at which compression begins to be applied. DelayTime 0.1 - 1486.0 msec Overdrive Device 0 - 100 % Determines the time that elapses between the original sound and the delayed repeat. Determines the depth of overdrive. The higher the value the greater the amount of distortion. Transistor, Vintage, Dist 1, Dist 2, Fuzz Determines the device that will create distortion: Transistor, VintageTube, Distortion, Fuzz and so on. Flat, Stack, Combo, Twin, Radio, Megaphone Determines the simulated speaker type: Flat, Stack, Combo, Twin, Radio, Megaphone and so on. Presence 0 - 20 Values in the higher range can give vocals more presence. Dry/Wet D63>W - D<W63 Determines the balance of original sound and the effect sound. Speaker 56 Parameter DDK-7 Owner’s Manual DYNAMIC EQ/ENHANCER This effect (also called compression) “squeezes” the overall dynamic range of the sound, and has a gain control–letting you make soft sounds louder, and thus give more “punch” to the sound. This effect boosts or cuts specific frequency bands, allowing you to shape the tone of the sound as required by the mix. Effect Type Effect Type ST 2BAND EQ M BAND COMP ST 3BAND EQ COMPRESSOR XG 3BAND EQ NOISE GATE EQ DISCO EQ TEL 4 HM ENHANCER Value Description Type Determines the compressor Normal, Low, Mid, type. High, Low/High, Low/Mid, Mid/High, FullBit, Wild, Attacky, LowEnd, Hard, Basic EQ Low Gain -63 - +63 Determines the amount of low-frequency gain (boost or cut). EQ Middle Gain -63 - +63 Determines the amount of mid-frequency gain (boost or cut). EQ Hi.Gain -63 - +63 Determines the amount of high-frequency gain (boost or cut). Attack 1 - 40 msec Determines how soon the compression effect is applied, once the compressor has been triggered (as a result of Threshold below). Release 10 - 680 msec Determines how soon the compressor returns to its normal gain, once the trigger signal drops below the Threshold point. Threshold multi-band compressor: -32 - +32 compressor: -48 - -6 dB Noise Gate: -72 - -30 dB Determines the level of the input signal required to trigger the compressor. Signals at a level below the Threshold pass through unaffected; signals at and above the Threshold are compressed. 1.0 - 20.0 Determines the amount of compression of the sound (for signals passing the Threshold). This is expressed as a ratio–the change in output signal relative to the change in input. The range here is 1/1 (no change in output signal, hence no compression) to 20/1. Higher ratios result in greater compression. Ratio OutputLevel 0 - 127 Determines the overall output of the compressed signal. Use this to bring up the overall level after you've reduced the dynamic range with compression. XG HM ENHNCE Parameter Value Description EQ LowFreq. 50 - 2.0k Hz ST2BandEQ: 32 - 2.0k Hz Determines the central frequency of the low frequency range that is to be boosted or cut. EQ Low Gain -12 - +12 dB Determines the amount over which the low frequency range is boosted or cut. EQ Middle Freq. 100 - 16k Hz Determines the central frequency of the middle frequency range that is to be boosted or cut. EQ Middle Gain -12 - +12 dB Determines the amount over which the middle frequency range is boosted or cut. EQ M Width 0.1 - 12.0 Determines the bandwidth or the range of frequencies around the specific middle frequency that is to be boosted or cut. Lower values let you narrow in on a specific frequency, while higher values select a broader range of frequencies to be affected. EQ Hi.Freq. 500Hz - 16 kHz Determines the central frequency of the high frequency range that is to be boosted or cut. EQ Hi.Gain -12 - +12 dB Determines how much increase/ decrease the wave frequency point of EQ high frequency. HPF Cutoff 500Hz - 16 k Hz Determines the cutoff frequency of the low pass filter. Frequencies above this value are cut or filtered out. Drive 0 - 127 Determines the amount or depth of the Enhancer effect. Mix Level 0 - 127 Determines how much of the processed enhanced sound is mixed together with the original sound. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Voice Controls and Effects Parameter 57 PITCH CHANGE IMPULSE EXP This effect changes the pitch. Effect Type PITCH CHANGE Parameter Value Description Density 0.159 - 22.61 msec Determines the density. Dispersion 4.028 msec - 4.000 sec Determines the resonance time. Wet Level 0 - 127 Determines the level of the effected sound. XG PCH CHG 1 XG PCH CHG 2 RESONATOR Parameter Value Description Parameter Value Description Type Type1 - 6 Determines the type. Pitch -24 - +24 Determines the amount of pitch change in semitones. Decay Time 4.028 msec 4.000 sec Determines the length of reverberation. 4 Pitch Fine 1 -50 - +50 Fine pitch adjustment to detune the sound and create a chorus effect. LPF Cutoff 28.5Hz 21.6 kHz (Thru) Voice Controls and Effects Pitch Fine 2 -50 - +50 Fine pitch adjustment to detune the sound and create a chorus effect. Determines the cutoff frequency of the Low Pass Filter. The portion of the signal above the specified frequency is cut. Dispersion 0 - 16 Initial Delay 0.1 - 400 msec Determines the time that elapses between the original sound and the early reflections. Determines the resonance time. Wet Level 0 - 127 Determines the level of the effected sound. Feedback Level Dry/Wet -63 - +63 D63>W - D<W63 Determines the amount of delayed repeats in the sound. When this is set to 0%, the delayed repeat from the second time will not sound. Determines the balance of original sound and the effect sound. VOICE CANCEL Parameter Value Description Low Adjust 0 - 26 Determines the frequencies in the lower portion of the middle range that are attenuated. High Adjust 0 - 26 Determines the frequencies in the upper portion of the middle range that are attenuated. Parameter Value Description Vowel a, i, u, e, o Determines the specific vowel used for the “talking” effect. TALKING MOD MISCELLANEOUS Creates special effects. Effect Type Drive 0 - 127 Determines the effect depth. AMBIENCE OutputLevel 0 - 127 Determines the output level of the effect-processed sound. Description IMPULSE EXP RESONATOR LO-FI VOICE CANCEL TALKING MOD Parameter Value LO-FI Sampling Control 44.1 kHz - 345.0 Hz Determines the sampling frequency. Word Length 0 - 127 Determines the resolution or roughness of the sound. Filter Type Thru, PwrBass, Radio, Tel, Clean, Low Determines the filter type. Dry/Wet D63>W - D<W63 Determines the balance of original sound and the effect sound. DYNA FILTER DYNA RINGMOD RING MOD ISOLATOR AMBIENCE 58 Parameter Value Description DelayTime 0.0 - 50.0 msec Determines the delay time. Output Phase Normal, Invers Determines the phase of the effect sound. Dry/Wet D63>W - D<W63 Determines the balance of original sound and the effect sound. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual DYNA FILTER Parameter Value Description Sensitivity 0 - 127 Determines the sensitivity. The higher the value the greater the change. Parameter Value Description THRU Level Offset 0 - 127 Determines the offset values of the filter frequency. The offset value affects the filter frequency when no control signals are received. Bypass control. This cancels the effect processing. Filter Type LPF (12 dB), LPF (18 dB), LPF (24 dB), HPF, BPF, BEF Determines the filter type. Resonance -16 - +111 The higher the value, the more sharp the frequency response curve is. Dry/Wet D63>W - D<W63 Determines the balance of original sound and the effect sound. Effect Type Thru 4 Parameter Value Description Sensitivity 0 - 127 Determines the modulation sensitivity for the input change. Threshold 0 - 127 Determines the input level at which effect begins to be applied. Dry/Wet D63>W - D<W63 Determines the balance of original sound and the effect sound. Voice Controls and Effects DYNA RINGMOD RING MOD Parameter Value Description Frequency 0.7 - 5002.6 Hz Determines the frequency for the Amplitude Modulation. Frequency Fine 0 - 127 Determines detailed adjustment of the Amplitude Modulation. LFO Wave Triangle, Sine Selects a triangular wave or sine wave as the wave for modulation. LFO Depth 0 - 127 Determines the wave depth. The higher the value, the greater the effect. Dry/Wet D63>W - D<W63 Determines the balance of original sound and the effect sound. ISOLATOR Parameter Value Description On/Off Off, On Determines the on/off status for the effect. Low Mute Off, On Mute switch for the low frequency range. Middle Mute Off, On Mute switch for the mid frequency range. High Mute Off, On Mute switch for the high frequency range. Low Level 0 - 127 Determines the level of the low frequencies. Middle Level 0 - 127 Determines the level of the mid frequencies. High Level 0 - 127 Determines the level of the high frequencies. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 59 5 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion This DDK-7 features 274 different real rhythms featuring actual drum and percussion sampled sounds. Automatic Accompaniment functions are used with the rhythms, providing appropriate and completely automatic accompaniment to match the style of the selected rhythm. Moreover, the DDK-7 has a Keyboard Percussion feature that allows you to play drum and percussion sounds from the Upper, Lower keyboard and Pedalboard. 5 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion Contents 1 Selecting rhythms with the Rhythm button . . . .60 • Selecting a rhythm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 • Operating the rhythm from the panel . . . . . . . . . .63 • Changing the rhythm volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 • Adjusting the tempo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66 • Changing the rhythm reverb. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 2 Rhythm List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 3 Accompaniment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70 4 Automatic Accompaniment – Auto Bass Chord (A.B.C.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 5 Melody On Chord (M.O.C.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 6 Keyboard Percussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 • Using the Preset Keyboard Percussion . . . . . . . . 74 • Preset Keyboard Percussion List . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 • Assigning sounds to the User Keyboard Percussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 • Copying the Keyboard Percussion settings . . . . . . 81 • Detailed settings for each percussion instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 • Kit Assign List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 1 Selecting rhythms with the Rhythm button A total of 274 rhythms can be instantly selected from the Rhythm Menu Display which is called up by pressing the RHYTHM button. Selecting a rhythm In the explanation below, 16Beat 1 in the POPS category is selected as an example. 1 Press the Rhythm button in the RHYTHM section on the front panel. Rhythm button The Rhythm Menu is displayed. 60 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 2 Select the desired Rhythm category with the category buttons in the display. You can also choose the “User” category to select a User rhythm you have created in the Rhythm Pattern Program. Rhythm category 5 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion For example, to call up 16Beat 1, select the POPS category. The name of the selected category (Pops) is displayed on the upper left. The Rhythm name shown under the category name is that of the currently assigned Rhythm and is irrelevant to the Rhythm menu below. 3 Select the desired rhythm name from the Rhythm menu. The Rhythm menu contains many Pops rhythms, more than can fit on the display page. To change the display pages, press the appropriate number buttons in the display. Reference Page Rhythm Pattern Program (page 148) The color of the selected rhythm name changes to orange, indicating that it has been selected. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 61 Rhythm Structure Each rhythm is made up of “sections.” Since each section is a rhythmic variation of the basic rhythm, you can use them to add “spice” to your performance and mix up the beats while you are playing. You can freely change the section while the rhythm is played back. INTRO This is used for the beginning of the song. There are three Intro sections that can be selected with INTRO [1] – [3] buttons. When the Intro finishes playing, the rhythm automatically shifts to the Main section. 5 Selected Intro section’s lamp is lit Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion MAIN This is used for playing the main part of the song. There are four Main sections that can be selected with MAIN/FILL IN [A] – [D] buttons. The rhythm pattern of several measures repeats indefinitely. Selected Main section’s lamp is lit FILL IN This is designed for use as a temporary and regular rhythmic pattern to spice up a repeating rhythm. There are four Fill In sections that can be played by pressing the selected (lit) MAIN/FILL IN [A] – [D] buttons as desired. When one measure pattern of Fill In finishes playing, the rhythm is automatically shifts to the Main section. Selected Fill In section’s lamp flashes 62 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual BREAK This lets you add dynamic variations and breaks in the rhythm pattern. The Break section is selected by pressing the [BREAK] button. When the one-measure Break pattern finishes playing, the rhythm automatically shifts to the Main section. The lamp is lit when the Break section is selected ENDING This is used for the ending of the song. There are three Ending sections that can be selected with the ENDING [1] – [3] buttons. When the ending is finished, the rhythm automatically stops. Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion 5 Selected Ending section’s lamp is lit Operating the rhythm from the panel You can turn the rhythm on/off and switch the sections as desired by pressing the buttons on the panel. Using the Fill Ins and Break patterns let you add dynamic interest and “spice” to your performance. To start/stop the rhythm: START The rhythm begins as soon as the [START] button is pressed. To stop the rhythm, press the button again. SYNCHRO START The [SYNCHRO START] button puts the rhythm in “standby.” The rhythm starts when you press a note on the Lower keyboard or Pedalboard. When you start the rhythm with the [SYNCHRO START] button, pressing this button again stops the rhythm. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 63 INTRO Pressing one of the INTRO [1] – [3] buttons automatically adds a short introduction before starting the actual (Main) rhythm. First press one of the INTRO [1] – [3] buttons, then press the [START] or [SYNCHRO START] button to actually start the rhythm. NOTE When an Intro or Ending pattern is playing, the Lower Keyboard cannot be played. While the introduction is playing, the BAR/BEAT display shows the countdown to the first measure of the pattern. For example, if there is a four-measure lead-in for a pattern in 4/4 time, the display at right appears: ENDING Pressing one of the ENDING [1] – [3] buttons automatically adds an ending phrase before stopping the rhythm. 5 NOTE Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion Pressing the ENDING [1] button during playback of the Main section will first call up the fill in pattern, then the Ending 1 pattern. When you press the Ending button while rhythm is playing back, the rhythm will automatically stop after the ending phrase is played. You can have the ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by pressing the ENDING button once again, while the ending is playing. To switch the rhythm sections: You can change the rhythm section of the Main phrase by pressing the desired MAIN/ FILL IN [A] – [D] button. The selected section’s lamp (above the button) is lit. To use the Fill In patterns: As you play the DDK-7 along with the rhythm, occasionally press the selected MAIN/ FILL button as desired. The Fill In pattern (one measure) will be played and the selected Fill In section’s lamp (above the button) flashes. When you use the Auto Fill In function, Fill Ins will be played automatically. The Auto Fill In function is set in the Rhythm Condition display. Pressing the Rhythm button on the panel again (or pressing the rhythm name of the selected rhythm in the display again) calls up the Rhythm Condition Display. 64 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual When Auto Fill is set to ON in the left side of the display, the Fill In pattern is automatically played whenever you switch the Main sections. To use the Break patterns: As you play the DDK-7 along with the rhythm, occasionally press the [BREAK] button. Moreover, you can start/stop the rhythm and switch the sections by using the Footswitch or optional footpedal. See page 194 for details. 5 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion Changing the rhythm volume There are two ways to set the rhythm volume: using the VOLUME buttons on the panel and using the volume slider in the display. The volume buttons let you make coarse adjustments to the volume while the slider gives you fine control. Using VOLUME buttons on the panel (coarse): Press the VOLUME buttons of the rhythm on the panel to set the desired level. The buttons have seven volume settings, from a minimum of 0, or no sound, to a maximum of full volume. Using VOLUME slider in the display (fine): Pressing the rhythm button on the panel again (or pressing the rhythm name of the selected rhythm in the display again) calls up the Rhythm Condition Display. DATA CONTROL To set the volume, touch the PERCUSSION VOLUME slider in the display or use the Data Control Dial. The control range is from 0 (no sound) to 24 (full volume). NOTE Depending on the volume value (set by the slider), two adjacent VOLUME lamps may be lit at the same time, indicating an intermediate position. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 65 Adjusting the tempo You can adjust the rhythm tempo by pressing the TEMPO buttons. Pressing the right button increases the tempo and pressing the left button decreases it. Each rhythm has its original (preset) tempo. Press the TEMPO buttons simultaneously to restore the tempo to the original setting. TEMPO Indicator Decreasing the tempo Increasing the tempo TEMPO display shows the current tempo. Displayed values are given in beats per minute. The tempo range is 40 to 240 beats per minute. 5 Each rhythm has its original (preset) tempo. Press [PRESET TEMPO] button in the display to restore the tempo to the original setting. Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion When the rhythm begins playing, the TEMPO indicator changes function to a BAR/ BEAT indicator. BAR/BEAT Indicator Bar (measure) Beat On the BAR/BEAT indicator, the number on the left indicates the current bar or measure and the one on the right indicates the number of the beat in each bar. 66 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual You can also see the Tempo and Bar/Beat indications in the Voice Display. In the Voice Display, both Tempo and Bar/Beat can be seen in one display. Reference Page Voice Display (page 18) Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion 5 Changing the rhythm reverb You can adjust the amount of reverb applied to the rhythms and the percussion sounds used in the rhythms in the Rhythm Condition display. Reference Page Reverb (page 46) DATA CONTROL When the Reverb depth for the entire instrument in Reverb Display Page 1 is set to the minimum, the setting here will have no effect. Range: 0 – 24 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 67 2 Rhythm List This list shows all available rhythms on the DDK-7. Numbers written at the left side of each column in this list indicate the numbered buttons displayed in the Rhythm Menu. MARCH Marching Band 1 Marching Band 2 Marching Band 3 Alpine March 6/8 March 1 6/8 March 2 1 6/8 Kids 6/8 Organ March Broadway SF March Wild West Baroque WALTZ Vienna Waltz Orchestra Waltz Simple Waltz Gentle Waltz Guitar Serenade 1 Snow Waltz Classic Waltz Mariachi Alpine Waltz Musette Jazz Waltz 1 Jazz Waltz 2 Jazz Waltz 3 2 Jazz Waltz 4 Modern Waltz Pop Waltz Country Waltz SWING&JAZZ Big Band 1 Big Band 2 Big Band 3 Big Band 4 Big Band 5 Big Band 6 1 Big Band 7 Big Band Bop Orch. Big Band Orchestra Swing Movie Panther Jungle Drum Jazz Club Simple Swing 2 Acoustic Jazz Medium Jazz 5 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion 68 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Fast Jazz Combo Swing Cool Combo Light Swing 2 Afro Cuban 1 Afro Cuban 2 Bebop Five-Four Jazz Ballad 1 Jazz Ballad 2 Movie Swing Piano Trio Midnight Swing 3 Slow Jazz Moonlight 1 Moonlight 2 Winter Song 1 Winter Song 2 Foxtrot Slowfox Quickstep Dixieland 1 4 Dixieland 2 Dixieland Jazz Ragtime Charleston Guitar Swing POPS 8Beat Light 1 8Beat Light 2 8Beat Light 3 8Beat Light 4 Folk Rock 1 Folk Rock 2 1 60’s 8Beat Asian Pops Unplugged 1 Unplugged 2 Unplugged 3 8Beat Adria Bubblegum Pop 70’s 8Beat Tijuana SingerSongWriter 2 Surfin’ 8Beat Finger Pickin’ Heart Beat Guitar Pop 2 British 16Beat 16Beat 1 16Beat 2 16Beat 3 16Beat 4 3 Fusion Shuffle 1 Fusion Shuffle 2 Jazz Pop 16Beat Shuffle 1 16Beat Shuffle 2 Pop Shuffle Eurovision Pop British Pop 4 Sing Along Simple Shuffle 1 Simple Shuffle 2 Simple Shuffle 3 R&B Blues Rock Motor City Soul 1 Soul 2 16Beat Soul Frankly Soul 1 Gospel Funk Jazz Funk Funk Beat 1 Funk Beat 2 Detroit Pop 1 Detroit Pop 2 New R&B Modern R&B New Gospel Cool Blues Gospel Shuffle 2 Gospel Sisters Amazing Gospel 6/8 Blues Slow Blues 6/8 Soul Blues Shuffle LATIN Samba Big Band Samba Light Samba 1 1 Light Samba 2 Pop Samba 1 Pop Samba 2 Bossa Nova 1 Bossa Nova 2 1 Bossa Nova 3 Pop Bossa Mambo 1 Mambo 2 Salsa 1 Salsa 2 2 Montuno Calypso Cha Cha Cha Big Band Cha Cha Pop Cha Cha Rumba Pop Rumba Fast Rumba Guitar Rumba Beguine 1 3 Beguine 2 Cuban Bolero Tango 1 Tango 2 Tango Orchestra Tango Milonga WORLD MUSIC Bolero Flamenco Pop Flamenco Pasodoble Polka 1 1 Polka 2 Banda Polka Irish Dance Tarantella Sirtaki Enka Reggae Happy Reggae Sheriff Reggae Shuffle Reggae Bluegrass 1 Bluegrass 2 2 Hoedown Country 2/4 Country Shuffle Country Band Hawaiian Mexican Dance DANCE Ibiza 1 Ibiza 2 Euro Trance Disco Teens Techno Party 1 Club Dance Dream Dance Club House UK Pop US Disco Swing House US Pop US Hip Hop Classic Hip Hop Trip Hop Chart Pop 2 Ground Beat Hip Hop Groove Hip Hop Pop Hip Hop Light Euro Hip Hop Latin DJ’s Club Latin Latin Disco 1 Latin Disco 2 Garage 3 6/8 Trance 80’s Dance Pop Beat 1 Pop Beat 2 Funky Dance Disco Philly 1 Disco Philly 2 70’s Disco 1 4 70’s Disco 2 Disco Funk Disco Chocolate Dance Pop Certain rhythms created for use with slow, soft Songs or for Songs that do not use a bass part at the Table 1: not have drum sections. To use beginning, may these rhythms, refer to the following information. Some sections of the following nine rhythms are configured with accompaniment only; they do not • contain any drum or percussion. Category Rhythm Section 6/8 Organ March Main A, Main B Baroque All sections except Intro 1 Simple Waltz Ending 1 Guitar Serenade All sections except Intro 1 Banda Polka Main A, Fill In A Hoedown Ending 1 Mexican Dance Main A, Fill In A BALLAD Dramatic Ballad Main A ROCK R&R Shuffle Ending 1 MARCH WALTZ WORLD MUSIC 5 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion BALLAD Power Ballad Dramatic Ballad Movie Ballad 1 Movie Ballad 2 Secret Service Carpenters Pop 1 Romantic Ballad Love Song 16Beat Ballad 1 16Beat Ballad 2 16Beat Ballad 3 Easy Ballad Guitar Ballad 1 Guitar Ballad 2 Guitar Ballad 3 Organ Ballad Chart Ballad 2 Analog Ballad Pop Ballad 8Beat Modern Chillout Slow&Easy 6/8 Slow Rock 1 6/8 Slow Rock 2 6/8 Orchestra 1 3 6/8 Orchestra 2 6/8 Ballad Acoustic Ballad ROCK Power Rock Southern Rock 60’s Rock 1 60’s Rock 2 Hard Rock 1 Hard Rock 2 1 Rock Shuffle 1 Rock Shuffle 2 Tears Rock 1 Tears Rock 2 Soft Rock British Rock Country Rock 1 Country Rock 2 New Country Cowboy Rock Rock&Roll 1 2 Rock&Roll 2 Skiffle Caribbean Rock R&R Shuffle Jive Boogie Woogie Some sections of the following five rhythms do not contain an Auto Bass part. This means that even though the Auto Bass Chord is turned on, the bass part will not sound. • • • • • Guitar Serenade in the WALTZ category Folk Rock 1 in the POPS category Unplugged 1 in the POPS category Pop Flamenco in WORLD MUSIC category New Country in the ROCK category DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 69 3 Accompaniment The Accompaniment function provides arpeggiated chords and other instrumental embellishments when rhythms are used. Accompaniment controls are selected from the Rhythm Menu and Rhythm Condition display. 1 Select the desired rhythm name in the display. 5 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion Accompaniment parts At the bottom of the display, there are seven part buttons, such as Chord 1, Chord 2, Pad, and so on. These parts, with the exception of Main Drum and Add Drum, are Accompaniment parts. 2 Turn the desired parts on. The Accompaniment consists of five parts, Chord 1, Chord 2, Pad, Phrase 1, and Phrase 2, and each of them can be set to on or off by pressing corresponding button in the display. If you turn all the parts off, the Accompaniment does not sound. CHORD 1/CHORD 2: These are the rhythmic chord backing parts. PAD: This part features sustained chords and commonly uses lush sounds such as strings and organ. PHRASE 1/PHRASE 2: These parts are used for various embellishments and riffs that enhance the song, such as brass section accents and chord arpeggios. Not all parts contain accompaniment data. Some parts may be empty depending on the selected rhythm and rhythm section. Main Drum and Add Drum contains the drum and percussion rhythm patterns. When you turn both Main Drum and Add Drum off, the drum and percussion do not sound. Generally, Main Drum contains the main part of the rhythm and Add drum has additional percussion sounds, such as tambourine. 70 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 3 Adjust the volume and amount of reverb applied to the Accompaniment. Pressing the rhythm button on the panel again calls up the Rhythm Condition display. The two sliders at the right side of the display can control the Accompaniment volume and reverb. Touch the slider in the display or use the Data Control dial to adjust the volume/reverb. DATA CONTROL 4 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion 5 Automatic Accompaniment – Auto Bass Chord (A.B.C.) The Auto Bass Chord (A.B.C.) function works with the Rhythm section of the DDK-7 to automatically produce bass accompaniment as you play. It adds an entirely new dimension to your performance by effectively putting a full backing band at your disposal. There are three modes used for producing Automatic Accompaniment patterns. Before using the A.B.C. function, turn Pedal Poly off. If Pedal Poly is set to on, the bass pattern of the A.B.C. will not sound. Reference Page POLY (page 42) To set the A.B.C. function: Rhythm Condition Display 1 2 Select the A.B.C. modes in the Rhythm Condition Display. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 71 1 A.B.C. MODE OFF: Cancels the Auto Bass Chord function. SINGLE FINGER: The Single Finger mode provides the fastest and easiest means to obtain many different chord/bass combinations. You can produce major, minor, 7th, and minor 7th chords by simply using one, or at most, two or three fingers to play the chords. The chord produced will sound in the same octave regardless of where it is played on the Lower keyboard. Key of C C Major chords: Press the root of the chord (the note that corresponds to the chord’s name). Cm Minor chords: 5 Simultaneously press the root and any one black key to the left of it. C7 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion 7th chords: Simultaneously press the root and any one white key to the left of it. Cm7 Minor 7th chords: Simultaneously press the root as well as any black key and any white key to the left of it. Playing single finger chords without the use of the rhythm lets you add full continuous chords to your performance. FINGERED CHORD: The Fingered Chord mode automatically produces bass accompaniment for chords played in the Lower keyboard. It allows you to use a wider range of chord types than in the Single Finger mode. In the Fingered Chord mode, you play full chords while the Auto Bass Chord function automatically selects the appropriate bass pattern. If you play only one or two notes in the Lower keyboard, the appropriate chord will sound on the basis of the previously played chord. Key of C NOTE When playing certain chords (aug, dim7, sus4, 6, and m6), make sure to play the root of the chord as the lowest note in that chord. C Cm C7 Cm7 Cmaj7 Cm maj7 Caug Cdim Cdim7 Csus4 C7sus4 Cm7-5 C6 Cm6 Cadd9 Playing fingered chords without the use of the rhythm lets you add full continuous chords to your performance. CUSTOM A.B.C.: The Custom A.B.C. mode is a slight variation on the Fingered Chord mode. It allows you to determine what bass notes will be played in the accompaniment by playing a note on the Pedalboard along with the chords you play in the Lower keyboard. 72 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 2 MEMORY LOWER: When this is set to on, the Lower keyboard Voices and chord accompaniment keep playing even after you release your fingers from the Lower keyboard, while the rhythm plays. PEDAL: When this is set to on, the Pedalboard Voices and bass accompaniment keep playing even after you release your foot from the Pedalboard, while the rhythm plays. (In the Single Finger and Fingered modes:) When this is set to on, the bass accompaniment of the Pedalboard Voices keeps playing even after you release your fingers from the Lower keyboard. When you start the rhythm with [SYNCHRO START] button, set the Lower/Pedal Memory to on. When Memory is off, releasing your fingers from Lower keyboard stops the rhythm. Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion 5 5 Melody On Chord (M.O.C.) The Melody On Chord (M.O.C.) feature automatically adds a harmony part to the melodies you play on the Upper keyboard. The harmony is derived from the chords you play on the Lower keyboard – or from the chords that are played for you, if you use Automatic Accompaniment. Melody On Chord has three different modes, each providing a different set of harmonics to accompany the melody played. Melody On Chord can also be controlled with the Footpedal. To set the M.O.C. function: Press the [VOICE DISPLAY] button, then call up the Page 3 by using the Page buttons. Voice Display [Page 3] The Melody On Chord display appears. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 73 1 M.O.C. MODE OFF: Cancels the Melody On Chord function. Mode 1: Produces harmonies of up to two notes in a range close to the melody played. Mode 2: Produces harmonies of up to three notes in a range close to the melody played. Reference Page Mode 3: Produces harmonies of up to four notes in a range relatively distant from the melody played. Controlling Melody On Chord (with Footpedal); (page 200) Melody On Chord can be heard only when the Upper Keyboard Voice section’s volume is set to the appropriate value. Melody On Chord does not apply to the Lead Voices. 5 6 Keyboard Percussion Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion The Keyboard Percussion function features many types of drum and percussion sounds, playable from the keyboards and Pedalboard. Keyboard Percussion has two different modes, Preset and User. Preset Keyboard Percussion lets you play the preset drum kit sounds from the keyboards (assigned beforehand to the keys), while the User Keyboard Percussion lets you freely assign the drum sounds to any key or pedal you wish. Using the Preset Keyboard Percussion NOTE In the Voice Display, each Voice section can be muted (page 19). 1 2 Turn off the Upper, Lower and/or Pedal Voices by setting each Voice’s volume to MIN. Turn on the Keyboard Percussion function by pressing the [K.B.P.1] or [K.B.P.2] button. The Keyboard Percussion (K.B.P.) Display appears. NOTE Two Keyboard Percussion sets, [K.B.P.1] and [K.B.P.2], can be played at the same time by setting both buttons to on. Reference Page Connecting a Pedal Unit (page 229) 74 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Pressing the [K.B.P.1] button calls up the Preset 1 kit on the Upper/Lower keyboards, and pressing [K.B.P.2] button calls up the Preset 2 kit on the Pedalboard. 3 Select the desired percussion kit. As a default, Multi Kit is assigned to the keyboards but you can change the kit from a total of 16 different kits. Pressing the Kit button on the display calls up the Percussion Kit List. Choose the desired Kit within the list. For details of percussion assignments for each kit, see the Preset Keyboard Percussion List on page 76. Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion 5 The message “Are you sure you want to clear all assignments and setup data?” may appear when you change the kit. Select [CLEAR] to clear all assignments (made in the ASSIGN Page) and detailed settings (made in the SETUP Page) and call up the selected kit on the panel. Select [CANCEL] to call up the selected kit without erasing the assignments and detailed settings. 4 Adjust the volume and amount of reverb applied to the Keyboard Percussion. Two sliders in the K.B.P. display determine the reverb and volume settings. DATA CONTROL The settings here determine the reverb/volume for the entire Keyboard Percussion setup, not for each percussion instrument. You can, however, adjust each percussion instrument’s reverb/volume (page 83). 5 Play some notes on the keyboards. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 75 Preset Keyboard Percussion List Multi Kit Preset 2(PK) Preset 1(UK) Preset 2(PK) Preset 1(UK) - Kick - SD Brush Roll - Side Stick Surdo Mute Snare Drum Heavy - Snare Surdo Open SD Brush Shot 1 Claves Hand Clap Hi Q SD Reverb 1 - Snare Tight Whip Slap Snare Drum Light - Floor Tom L Scratch H Tom 3 Synth Tom 3 Hi-Hat Closed Scratch L Snare Drum Rim 1 Concert BD Floor Tom H Finger Snap Tom 2 Synth Tom 2 Hi-Hat Pedal Click Noise Hi-Hat Close Bass Drum Heavy Low Tom Metronome Click Tom 1 Synth Tom 1 Hi-Hat Open Metronome Bell B1 Hi-Hat Open Bass Drum Light Mid Tom L Seq Click L C2 Ride Cymbal 1 Snare Drum Heavy - Mid Tom H Seq Click H - Synth Tom 3 SD Brush Roll - Crash Cymbal 1 Brush Tap - Crash Cymbal 1 Snare Drum Heavy - High Tom Brush Swirl - Synth Tom 2 SD Brush Shot 1 - Ride Cymbal 1 Brush Slap - E2 Orchestra Cymbal SD Reverb 1 - Chinese Cymbal Brush Tap Swirl - F2 - Snare Drum Light - Ride Cymbal Cup Snare Roll - Synth Tom 1 Tom 3 - Tambourine Castanet - - Snare Drum Rim 1 - Splash Cymbal Snare Soft - Tom 2 - Sticks - Hi-Hat Close - Kick Soft - Tom 1 - Open Rim Shot - B2 Hi-Hat Open - Kick Tight - C3 Ride Cymbal 1 - Kick Bongo H Orch Snare Drum - Side Stick Bongo L Crash Cymbal 1 - Snare Conga H Mute Snare Drum Roll - Hand Clap Conga H Open E3 Orchestra Cymbal - Snare Tight Conga L F3 Orch Cymbal Roll - Floor Tom L Timbale H Triangle Mute - Hi-Hat Closed Timbale L Tambourine - Floor Tom H Agogo H Triangle Open - Hi-Hat Pedal Agogo L Castanet - Low Tom Cabasa Cowbell 1 - Hi-Hat Open Maracas B3 Timbale 1 Low - Mid Tom L Samba Whistle H C4 Timbale 1 High - Mid Tom H Samba Whistle L Wood Block Low - Crash Cymbal 1 Guiro Short Conga Low - High Tom Guiro Long Wood Block High - Ride Cymbal 1 Claves E4 Conga High - Chinese Cymbal Wood Block H F4 Bongo Low - Ride Cymbal Cup Wood Block L Agogo Low - Tambourine Cuica Mute Bongo High - Splash Cymbal Cuica Open Agogo High - Cowbell Triangle Mute Cuica Low - Crash Cymbal 2 Triangle Open Hand Claps - Vibraslap Shaker Cuica High - Ride Cymbal 2 Jingle Bells Shaker - - Bell Tree C1 D1 D1 E1 F1 F1 G1 G1 A1 A1 C2 D2 D2 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion F2 G2 G2 A2 A2 C3 D3 D3 F3 G3 G3 A3 A3 C4 D4 D4 F4 G4 G4 A4 A4 B4 C5 C5 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B5 - - C6 - - D5 D5 E5 F5 F5 G5 G5 A5 A5 : Indicates the keys of the DDK-7 keyboard and DDKU-P7. *The 10 kits, Standard Kit 2 – Symphony Kit, have the same sound assignments as Standard Kit 1. 76 Preset 1(LK) Bass Drum Heavy C1 5 Standard Kit 1 - Symphony Kit Preset 1(LK) DDK-7 Owner’s Manual SFX Kit 2 Preset 1(LK) Preset 1(UK) Preset 2(PK) Preset 1(LK) Preset 1(UK) Cutting Noise 1 - Phone Call - Cutting Noise 2 - Door Squeak - - - Door Slam - String Slap - Scratch Cut - E1 - - Scratch H 3 - F1 - - Wind Chime - - - Telephone Ring - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Flute Key Click - - CarEngnIgnition - - - - - Car Tires Squeal - - - - - Car Passing - - - - - Car Crash - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Cutting Noise 1 - Phone Call Burst Cutting Noise 2 - Door Squeak Roller Coaster - - Door Slam Submarine String Slap - Scratch Cut - - - Scratch H 3 - - - Wind Chime - - - Telephone Ring - - - - - - Shower - Laugh - Thunder - Scream - Wind - Punch - Stream - Heart Beat - Bubble - Foot Steps - Feed - - - - - - - - - - Flute Key Click - CarEngnIgnition - - - Car Tires Squeal - - - Car Passing - - - Car Crash - - - Siren - - - Train - - - Jet Plane - - - Starship - - Dog - Machine Gun C1 C1 D1 D1 F1 G1 G 1 A1 A1 B1 C2 C2 D2 D2 E2 F2 F2 G2 G 2 A2 A2 B2 C3 C3 D3 D3 E3 F3 F3 G3 G3 A3 A3 B3 C4 C4 D4 D4 E4 F4 F4 G4 G4 A4 A4 B4 C5 C5 Horse Laser Gun Bird Tweet Explosion - Firework - - - - Ghost - Maou - - - - - - - B5 - - C6 - - D5 D5 E5 F5 F5 G5 G 5 A5 A5 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 5 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion SFX Kit 1 Preset 2(PK) 77 Arabic Kit Preset 2(PK) Preset 2(PK) Preset 1(LK) Preset 1(UK) - Bongo H Open 1 f - Side Stick - Bongo H Open 3 f - Snare Soft - Bongo H Rim - Arabic Hand Clap - Bongo H Tip - E1 Snare Drum - Bongo H Heel - F1 Floor Tom L - Bongo H Slap - Hi-Hat Closed - Bongo L Open 1 f Hand Clap Floor Tom H - Bongo L Open 3 f - Hi-Hat Pedal - Bongo L Rim - Low Tom - Bongo L Tip - Hi-Hat Open - Bongo L Heel Conga H Tip Mid Tom L - Bongo L Slap Conga H Heel Mid Tom H Nakarazan Dom - Timbale L Open Conga H Open - Crash Cymbal 1 Cabasa - - Conga H Mute - High Tom Nakarazan Edge - - Conga H SlapOpen - Ride Cymbal 1 Hager Dom - - Conga H Slap - Crash Cymbal 2 Hager Edge - - Conga H SlapMute - Duhulla Dom Bongo H - Paila L Conga L Tip - Tambourine Bongo L - Timbale H Open Conga L Heel - Duhulla Tak Conga H Mute - - Conga L Open - Conga H Open - Conga L Mute - Conga L - Conga L SlapOpen - Zagrouda H - Conga L Slap - Zagrouda L - Conga L Slide - Kick Soft Katem Dom Bongo H Open 1 f Cowbell Top Side Stick Katem Tak Bongo H Open 3 f - Snare Soft Katem Sak Bongo H Rim - Arabic Hand Clap Katem Tak Bongo H Tip - Snare Drum Doff Tak Bongo H Heel Guiro Short Floor Tom L Tabla Dom Bongo H Slap Guiro Long Hi-Hat Closed Tabla Tak 1 Bongo L Open 1 f - Floor Tom H Tabla Tik Bongo L Open 3 f - Hi-Hat Pedal Tabla Tak 2 Bongo L Rim Tambourine Low Tom Tabla Sak Bongo L Tip - Hi-Hat Open Tabla Roll Edge Bongo L Heel - Mid Tom L Tabla Flam Bongo L Slap - Mid Tom H Sagat 1 Timbale L Open Maracas Crash Cymbal 1 Tabel Dom - Shaker High Tom Sagat 3 - Cabasa Ride Cymbal 1 Tabel Tak - Cuica Mute Crash Cymbal 2 Sagat 2 - Cuica Open Duhulla Dom Rik Dom Paila L - Tambourine Rik Tak 2 Timbale H Open - Duhulla Tak Rik Finger 1 - - Cowbell Rik Tak 1 - - Duhulla Sak Rik Finger 2 - Triangle Mute Claves Rik BrassTremolo - Triangle Open Doff Dom Rik Sak Paila H - - Rik Tik - Wind Chime C1 D1 D1 F1 G1 G1 A1 A1 B1 C2 C2 D2 D2 E2 F2 F2 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion G2 G2 A2 A2 B2 C3 C3 D3 D3 E3 F3 F3 G3 G3 A3 A3 B3 C4 C4 D4 D4 E4 F4 F4 G4 G4 A4 A4 B4 C5 C5 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B5 - - C6 - - D5 D5 E5 F5 F5 G5 G5 A5 A5 78 Preset 1(UK) Kick Soft C1 5 Pop Latin Kit Preset 1(LK) DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Assigning sounds to the User Keyboard Percussion You can assign any desired drum and percussion sound to any key or pedal, and your original setups can be saved to eight memory locations: User 1 through User 8. The User setting saved in User memory location can be called up by using the [K.B.P.1] or [K.B.P.2] buttons. In the instructions below, drum sounds are assigned to User 1 and called up with [K.B.P.1] button. Turn on the Keyboard Percussion function by pressing the [K.B.P.1] button. The K.B.P. display appears. 2 Press [USER 1] on the display. This procedure assigns User 1 to the [K.B.P.1] button. You can call up the User 1 setting the next time you press the [K.B.P.1] button. 3 4 Select the desired percussion kit. See page 75 for selecting the kit. 5 Select the desired drum instrument that you wish to assign to a key. Select the desired drum instrument category with the category buttons in the display. The drum instrument menu of the selected category appears. 5 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion 1 Press the [ASSIGN] button at the top right of the display to call up the ASSIGN Page. In the ASSIGN Page, you can assign specific drum sounds to any of the keys. Reference Page Kit Assign List (page 85) Drum Instrument Category Drum Instrument Menu DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 79 6 Assign an instrument to a particular key or pedal by simultaneously holding down the desired instrument name in the display and pressing the key (or pedal) to which the instrument is to be assigned. The key to which the instrument is to be assigned Instrument Name NOTE Though eight User Keyboard Percussion setups can be created, they cannot be memorized to Registration Memory. Only on/off data and the Keyboard Percussion Menu are memorized to Registration Memory. 5 Press the key. Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion Hold down the Instrument name… When the assignment is complete, the key name and instrument name is displayed at the top of the display. The assignments are saved to the User memory selected in Step 2 (in this example, User 1). 7 Repeat the operation steps above as necessary to construct your own User Keyboard Percussion set. To erase one instrument: Simultaneously hold down the [CLEAR] button in the display (ASSIGN Page) and press the key (or pedal) corresponding to the instrument you wish to erase. The Keyboard Percussion setting you have created is automatically saved when you switch to another display. While data is being saved, the square at the top left of the display turns light blue for a few seconds. Do not turn the power off while the Keyboard Percussion settings are being saved. 80 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual To erase all instruments: You can clear all assignments using the [CLEAR] button in the display (ASSIGN Page). 1 Press, then release the [CLEAR] button. The following display appears, prompting confirmation of the operation. 2 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion 5 Press [CLEAR] in the display to erase all data. When [CLEAR] is selected, a “Completed” message momentarily appears on the display. Press [CANCEL] in the display to abort the operation. Copying the Keyboard Percussion settings You can copy the Preset Keyboard Percussion to one of the User locations, or copy from one User location to another. In the instructions below, Preset 1 is copied to User 1. 1 Press the [K.B.P.1] button to copy Preset 1. To copy Preset 1, select the [K.B.P.1] button; to copy Preset 2, select the [K.B.P.2] button. To copy either User location, select button [K.B.P.1] or [K.B.P.2]. 2 Press the [MENU] button at the top right of the display to call up the MENU Page. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 81 5 Within the Menu buttons, select the User location as the destination — for example, User 1. 4 Press the COPY [FROM] button in the display. A list appears, letting you select the copy source location. 5 Select the copy source (Preset 1 here) from the list. A message appears, prompting confirmation of the operation. 6 Press the [COPY] button in the display to copy Preset 1. When [COPY] is selected, a “Completed” message momentarily appears in the display. Press the [CANCEL] button in the display to abort the operation. Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion 3 82 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Detailed settings for each percussion instrument You can independently adjust the settings of pan, pitch, reverb and volume for each instrument. The settings here are system settings that cannot be memorized to Registration memory. Turn off the volume of the relevant keyboard (the keyboard to which the instrument to be changed is assigned). 2 Press the [SETUP] button at the top right of the K.B.P. display to call up the SETUP Page. 3 Press the appropriate key (the key to which the instrument to be changed is assigned). The selected instrument’s name is shown on the display and you can change its settings. 5 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion 1 The name of the selected instrument 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 PAN Determines the position of the currently selected instrument in the stereo image. Seven pan positions are available. 2 PITCH COARSE Adjusts the pitch of the currently selected instrument by 100 cents. Range: -64 – +63 3 PITCH FINE Adjusts the pitch of the currently selected instrument by one cent, allowing more detailed tuning of the instrument than PITCH COARSE (2). Range: -64 – +63 4 REVERB Determines the amount of reverb applied to the currently selected instrument. Range: 0 – 24 5 VOLUME Determines the volume of the currently selected instrument. Range: 0 – 24 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 83 6 RESET Initializes settings such as pan, pitch, and reverb to their default values. Pressing the [EXECUTE] button calls up the following display, prompting confirmation of the operation. 5 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion Press the [EXECUTE] button in the display to restore (initialize) the default settings. When [EXECUTE] is selected, a “Complete” message momentarily appears on the display. Press the [CANCEL] button in the display to abort the operation. 84 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Kit Assign List Timbale 1 Low Timbale 2 High Timbale 2 Low Timbale 3 High Timbale 3 Low Timbale 4 High Timbale 4 Low Cowbell 1 Cowbell 2 Cowbell 3 Cowbell 4 PERCUSSION 1 Cabasa Shaker Maracas High Maracas Low Guiro Short Guiro Long Wood Block High Wood Block Mid Wood Block Low Claves Castanet Vibraslap PERCUSSION 2 Agogo High Agogo Low Triangle Open Triangle Mute Windbell Down Windbell Up Tambourine Pandeiro Bells Hand Claps Finger Snap Scratch Noise Percussion PERCUSSION 3 Kotsuzumi 1 Kotsuzumi 2 Kotsuzumi 3 Kotsuzumi 4 Ohtsuzumi 1 Ohtsuzumi 2 Taiko 1 Taiko 2 Ohdaiko 1 Ohdaiko 2 Kakegoe 1 Kakegoe 2 Kakegoe 3 Standard Kit 1 CYMBAL Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 2 Splash Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Pedal SNARE DRUM Snare Snare Tight Snare Soft Snare Roll Side Stick Open Rim Shot Brush Tap Brush Slap Brush Swirl Brush Tap Swirl TOM Floor Tom L Floor Tom H Low Tom Mid Tom L Mid Tom H High Tom BASS DRUM Kick Kick Tight Kick Soft PERCUSSION 1 Conga H Open Conga L Conga H Mute Bongo H Bongo L Timbale H Timbale L Cowbell Claves Guiro Long Guiro Short Maracas Vibraslap PERCUSSION 2 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Cuica Mute Cuica Open Cabasa Shaker Agogo H Agogo L Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L PERCUSSION 3 Tambourine Castanet Jingle Bells Bell Tree Triangle Open Triangle Mute Wood Block H Wood Block L Sticks Whip Slap Finger Snap Hand Clap PERCUSSION 4 Hi Q Click Noise Scratch H Scratch L Seq Click L Seq Click H Metronome Click Metronome Bell Standard Kit 2 CYMBAL Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 2 Splash Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Pedal SNARE DRUM Snare Short Snare Tight H Snare Soft 2 Snare Roll Side Stick Light Open Rim Shot H Brush Tap Brush Slap Brush Swirl Brush Tap Swirl TOM Floor Tom L Floor Tom H Low Tom Mid Tom L Mid Tom H High Tom BASS DRUM Kick Short Kick Tight Kick Soft PERCUSSION 1 Conga H Open Conga L Conga H Mute Bongo H Bongo L Timbale H Timbale L Cowbell Claves Guiro Long Guiro Short Maracas Vibraslap PERCUSSION 2 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Cuica Mute Cuica Open Cabasa Shaker Agogo H Agogo L Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L PERCUSSION 3 Tambourine Castanet Jingle Bells Bell Tree Triangle Open Triangle Mute Wood Block H Wood Block L Sticks Whip Slap Finger Snap Hand Clap PERCUSSION 4 Hi Q Click Noise Scratch H Scratch L Seq Click L Seq Click H Metronome Click Metronome Bell 5 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion Multi Kit CYMBAL Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cym Mute Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Orchestra Cymbal Orch Cymbal Roll Orch Cymbal Mute Cymbal March Cym Brush Shot Tam-Tam HI-HAT Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Close Hi-Hat Pedal 1 Hi-Hat Pedal 2 Analog HH Open Analog HH Close SNARE DRUM Snare Drum Light Snare Drum Heavy Snare Drum Rim 1 Snare Drum Rim 2 SD Accent 1 SD Accent 2 SD Reverb 1 SD Reverb 2 Synth Snare Drum Orch Snare Drum Snare Drum Roll Analog SD SNARE BRUSH SD Brush Shot 1 SD Brush Shot 2 SD Brush Roll TOM Tom 1 Tom 2 Tom 3 Tom 4 Tom Brush Shot 1 Tom Brush Shot 2 Tom Brush Shot 3 Tom Brush Shot 4 Synth Tom 1 Synth Tom 2 Synth Tom 3 BASS DRUM Bass Drum Light Bass Drum Heavy Bass Drum Attack Synth Bass Drum Bass Drum March Concert BD Analog BD Short Analog BD Long CONGA/BONGO Conga High Conga Low Conga Slap Conga Muff Conga Slide Bongo High Bongo Low Bongo Slap Bongo Mute CUICA/SURDO Cuica High Cuica Middle Cuica Low Tamborim Open Tamborim Mute Surdo Open Surdo Mute Surdo Rim Surdo Muff TIMBALES/COWBELL Timbale 1 High Hit Kit CYMBAL Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 2 Splash Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Hi-Hat Open 2 Hi-Hat Closed 2 Hi-Hat Pedal 2 SNARE DRUM Snare Ambient Snare Tight 2 Snare Electro Snare Roll Stick Ambient Snare Pitched Brush Tap Brush Slap Brush Swirl Brush Tap Swirl TOM Hybrid Tom 1 Hybrid Tom 2 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 85 Hybrid Tom 3 Hybrid Tom 4 Hybrid Tom 5 Hybrid Tom 6 BASS DRUM Kick Tight H Kick Wet Kick Tight L PERCUSSION 1 Conga H Open Conga L Conga H Mute Bongo H Bongo L Timbale H Timbale L Cowbell Claves Guiro Long Guiro Short Maracas Vibraslap PERCUSSION 2 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Cuica Mute Cuica Open Cabasa Shaker Agogo H Agogo L Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L PERCUSSION 3 Tambourine Light Castanet Jingle Bells Bell Tree Triangle Open Triangle Mute Wood Block H Wood Block L Sticks Whip Slap Finger Snap Hand Clap PERCUSSION 4 Hi Q Click Noise Scratch H Scratch L Seq Click L Seq Click H Metronome Click Metronome Bell 5 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion Room Kit CYMBAL Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 2 Splash Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Pedal SNARE DRUM Snare Snappy Snare Tight Snap Snare Soft Snare Roll Side Stick Open Rim Shot Brush Tap Brush Slap Brush Swirl Brush Tap Swirl TOM Tom Room 1 Tom Room 2 Tom Room 3 Tom Room 4 Tom Room 5 86 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Tom Room 6 BASS DRUM Kick Kick Tight Kick Soft PERCUSSION 1 Conga H Open Conga L Conga H Mute Bongo H Bongo L Timbale H Timbale L Cowbell Claves Guiro Long Guiro Short Maracas Vibraslap PERCUSSION 2 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Cuica Mute Cuica Open Cabasa Shaker Agogo H Agogo L Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L PERCUSSION 3 Tambourine Castanet Jingle Bells Bell Tree Triangle Open Triangle Mute Wood Block H Wood Block L Sticks Whip Slap Finger Snap Hand Clap PERCUSSION 4 Hi Q Click Noise Scratch H Scratch L Seq Click L Seq Click H Metronome Click Metronome Bell Rock Kit CYMBAL Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 2 Splash Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Pedal SNARE DRUM Snare Rock Snare Rock Tight Snare Noisy Snare Roll Side Stick Open Rim Shot Brush Tap Brush Slap Brush Swirl Brush Tap Swirl TOM Tom Rock 1 Tom Rock 2 Tom Rock 3 Tom Rock 4 Tom Rock 5 Tom Rock 6 BASS DRUM Kick Gate Kick 2 Kick Soft PERCUSSION 1 Conga H Open Conga L Conga H Mute Bongo H Bongo L Timbale H Timbale L Cowbell Claves Guiro Long Guiro Short Maracas Vibraslap PERCUSSION 2 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Cuica Mute Cuica Open Cabasa Shaker Agogo H Agogo L Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L PERCUSSION 3 Tambourine Castanet Jingle Bells Bell Tree Triangle Open Triangle Mute Wood Block H Wood Block L Sticks Whip Slap Finger Snap Hand Clap PERCUSSION 4 Hi Q Click Noise Scratch H Scratch L Seq Click L Seq Click H Metronome Click Metronome Bell Electro Kit CYMBAL Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 2 Splash Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Pedal SNARE DRUM Snare Noisy 2 Snare Noisy 3 Snare Snap Elec Snare Roll Side Stick Open Rim Shot Brush Tap Brush Slap Brush Swirl Reverse Cymbal TOM Tom Electro 1 Tom Electro 2 Tom Electro 3 Tom Electro 4 Tom Electro 5 Tom Electro 6 BASS DRUM Kick Gate Heavy Kick Gate Kick 3 PERCUSSION 1 Conga H Open Conga L Conga H Mute Bongo H Bongo L Timbale H Timbale L Cowbell Claves Guiro Long Guiro Short Maracas Vibraslap PERCUSSION 2 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Scratch H 2 Scratch L 2 Cabasa Shaker Agogo H Agogo L Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L PERCUSSION 3 Tambourine Hi Q 2 Jingle Bells Bell Tree Triangle Open Triangle Mute Wood Block H Wood Block L Sticks Whip Slap Finger Snap Hand Clap PERCUSSION 4 Hi Q Click Noise Scratch H Scratch L Seq Click L Seq Click H Metronome Click Metronome Bell Analog Kit CYMBAL Crash Analog Crash Cymbal 2 Splash Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Hat Open Analog Hat Close Analog Hat Close Anlg 2 SNARE DRUM Snare Analog Snare Analog 2 Snare Noisy 4 Snare Roll Side Stick Anlg Open Rim Shot Brush Tap Brush Slap Brush Swirl Reverse Cymbal TOM Tom Analog 1 Tom Analog 2 Tom Analog 3 Tom Analog 4 Tom Analog 5 Tom Analog 6 BASS DRUM Kick Analog Kick Anlg Short Kick 3 PERCUSSION 1 Conga Analog M Conga Analog L Dance Kit CYMBAL Crash Analog Crash Cymbal 2 Splash Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Analog Ride Cymbal Cup Hi-Hat Open 3 Hi-Hat Closed 3 Hat Close Anlg 3 SNARE DRUM Snare Clap Snare Dry Snare Techno Reverse Dance 2 Side Stick Anlg Rim Gate Snare Analog 3 Snare Analog 4 Vinyl Noise Reverse Cymbal TOM Tom Dance 1 Tom Dance 2 Tom Dance 3 Tom Dance 4 Tom Dance 5 Tom Dance 6 BASS DRUM Kick Techno Kick Techno L Kick Techno Q PERCUSSION 1 Conga Analog M Conga Analog L Conga Analog H Bongo Analog H Bongo Analog L Timbale H Timbale L Cowbell Dance Claves 2 Guiro Long Guiro Short Maracas 2 Vibraslap Analog PERCUSSION 2 Kick Dance 1 Kick Dance 2 Dance Breath 1 Dance Breath 2 Cabasa Shaker Agogo H Agogo L Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L PERCUSSION 3 Tambourine Anlg Hi Q 2 Jingle Bells Bell Tree Triangle Open Triangle Mute Dance Perc 3 Dance Perc 4 Snare Dance 1 Whip Slap Finger Snap Dance Clap PERCUSSION 4 Hi Q Click Noise Scratch Dance 1 Scratch Dance 2 Dance Perc 2 Hi Q Dance 1 Dance Perc 1 Reverse Dance 1 Jazz Kit CYMBAL Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 2 Splash Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Pedal SNARE DRUM Snare Jazz L Snare Jazz M Snare Jazz H Snare Roll Side Stick Light Open Rim Shot Brush Tap Brush Slap Brush Swirl Brush Tap Swirl TOM Floor Tom L Floor Tom H Low Tom Mid Tom L Mid Tom H High Tom BASS DRUM Kick Jazz Kick Tight Kick Soft PERCUSSION 1 Conga H Open Conga L Conga H Mute Bongo H Bongo L Timbale H Timbale L Cowbell Claves Guiro Long Guiro Short Maracas Vibraslap PERCUSSION 2 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Cuica Mute Cuica Open Cabasa Shaker Agogo H Agogo L Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L PERCUSSION 3 Tambourine Castanet Jingle Bells Bell Tree Triangle Open Triangle Mute Wood Block H Wood Block L Sticks Whip Slap Finger Snap Hand Clap PERCUSSION 4 Hi Q Click Noise Scratch H Scratch L Seq Click L Seq Click H Metronome Click Metronome Bell Brush Kit CYMBAL Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 2 Splash Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Pedal SNARE DRUM Brush Slap 3 Brush Tap 2 Brush Slap 2 Snare Roll Side Stick Light Open Rim Shot Brush Tap Brush Slap Brush Swirl Brush Tap Swirl TOM Tom Brush 1 Tom Brush 2 Tom Brush 3 Tom Brush 4 Tom Brush 5 Tom Brush 6 BASS DRUM Kick Jazz Kick Tight Kick Soft PERCUSSION 1 Conga H Open Conga L Conga H Mute Bongo H Bongo L Timbale H Timbale L Cowbell Claves Guiro Long Guiro Short Maracas Vibraslap PERCUSSION 2 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Cuica Mute Cuica Open Cabasa Shaker Agogo H Agogo L Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L PERCUSSION 3 Tambourine Castanet Jingle Bells Bell Tree Triangle Open Triangle Mute Wood Block H Wood Block L Sticks Whip Slap Finger Snap Hand Clap PERCUSSION 4 Hi Q Click Noise Scratch H Scratch L Seq Click L Seq Click H Metronome Click Metronome Bell 5 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion Conga Analog H Bongo H Bongo L Timbale H Timbale L Cowbell Analog Claves 2 Guiro Long Guiro Short Maracas 2 Vibraslap PERCUSSION 2 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Scratch H 2 Scratch L 2 Cabasa Shaker Agogo H Agogo L Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L PERCUSSION 3 Tambourine Hi Q 2 Jingle Bells Bell Tree Triangle Open Triangle Mute Wood Block H Wood Block L Sticks Whip Slap Finger Snap Hand Clap PERCUSSION 4 Hi Q Click Noise Scratch H Scratch L Seq Click L Seq Click H Metronome Click Metronome Bell Symphony Kit CYMBAL Hand Cymbal Hand Cymbal 2 Splash Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Hand Cymbal S Hand Cymbal 2 S Ride Cymbal Cup Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Pedal SNARE DRUM Band Snare Band Snare 2 Snare Soft Snare Roll Side Stick Open Rim Shot Brush Tap Brush Slap Brush Swirl Brush Tap Swirl TOM Floor Tom L Floor Tom H Low Tom Mid Tom L Mid Tom H High Tom BASS DRUM Gran Cassa Mute Gran Cassa Kick Soft 2 PERCUSSION 1 Conga H Open Conga L Conga H Mute Bongo H Bongo L Timbale H Timbale L Cowbell Claves Guiro Long Guiro Short Maracas Vibraslap DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 87 PERCUSSION 2 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Cuica Mute Cuica Open Cabasa Shaker Agogo H Agogo L Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L PERCUSSION 3 Tambourine Castanet Jingle Bells Bell Tree Triangle Open Triangle Mute Wood Block H Wood Block L Sticks Whip Slap Finger Snap Hand Clap PERCUSSION 4 Hi Q Click Noise Scratch H Scratch L Seq Click L Seq Click H Metronome Click Metronome Bell 5 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion SFX Kit 1 SFX Cutting Noise 1 Cutting Noise 2 String Slap Flute Key Click Shower Thunder Wind Stream Bubble Feed Ghost Maou Dog Horse Bird Tweet SFX Kit 2 SFX 1 Phone Call Telephone Ring Wind Chime Door Squeak Door Slam Scratch Cut Scratch H 3 Laugh Scream Punch Heart Beat Foot Steps SFX 2 CarEngnIgnition Car Tires Squeal Car Passing Car Crash Siren Train Jet Plane Starship Burst Roller Coaster Submarine Machine Gun Laser Gun Explosion Firework 88 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Arabic Kit ARABIC 1 Nakarazan Dom Nakarazan Edge Hager Dom Hager Edge Zagrouda H Zagrouda L Arabic Hand Clap Duhulla Dom Duhulla Tak Duhulla Sak Doff Dom Doff Tak ARABIC 2 Katem Dom Katem Tak Katem Sak Tabla Dom Tabla Tak 1 Tabla Tak 2 Tabla Sak Tabla Tik Tabla Roll Edge Tabla Flam Tabel Dom Tabel Tak ARABIC 3 Sagat 1 Sagat 2 Sagat 3 Rik Dom Rik Tak 1 Rik Tak 2 Rik Sak Rik Tik Rik Finger 1 Rik Finger 2 Rik BrassTremolo CYMBAL/SNARE DRUM Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 1 Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Pedal Snare Drum Snare Soft Side Stick TOM/BASS DRUM Floor Tom L Floor Tom H Low Tom Mid Tom L Mid Tom H High Tom Kick Soft PERCUSSION Conga H Open Conga L Conga H Mute Bongo H Bongo L Cowbell Claves Cabasa Tambourine Pop Latin Kit CONGA Conga H Tip Conga H Heel Conga H Open Conga H Mute Conga H SlapOpen Conga H Slap Conga H SlapMute Conga L Tip Conga L Heel Conga L Open Conga L Mute Conga L SlapOpen Conga L Slap Conga L Slide BONGO Bongo H Open 1 f Bongo H Open 3 f Bongo H Rim Bongo H Tip Bongo H Heel Bongo H Slap Bongo L Open 1 f Bongo L Open 3 f Bongo L Rim Bongo L Tip Bongo L Heel Bongo L Slap PERCUSSION 1 Timbale H Open Timbale L Open Paila H Paila L Cowbell Top Tambourine Guiro Long Guiro Short Maracas Cuica Open Cuica Mute Cabasa Shaker PERCUSSION 2 Triangle Open Triangle Mute Wind Chime Hand Clap 6 Registration Memory Registration Memory allows you to store virtually all the settings you make on the panel and LCD, providing a convenient way to instantly change all Voice settings and rhythms while you’re playing, with the simple touch of a single button on the Registration Memory panel. The buttons are conveniently located between the Upper and Lower keyboards for easy access while playing. Moreover, you can also recall the settings using the right footswitch on the Pedal Unit, or optional Foot Pedal. All Registrations in Registration Memory can also be saved to a USB flash memory or other external media. 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 D Various types of basic Registrations have been programmed to the numbered Registration Memory buttons, 1 – 16. When you record your own Registration settings to a numbered button, the preset Registration for that button will be overwritten and erased as a result. When you initialize the Registration Memory (page 93), the preset settings will be recalled and your own Registration setting(s) will be erased and replaced with the factory defaults. 6 Contents 5 Registration Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 • Setting the Registration Shift mode in the Regist Shift display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 • Confirming the Registration Shift setting in the Voice Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 6 Unifying a specific parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 REGISTRATION MEMORY 1 Storing Registrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89 2 Selecting Registrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 3 Saving the Registration data to USB flash memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 4 Initializing Registration Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 1 Storing Registrations Newly created Registrations you make can be stored to the Registration Memory panel buttons. All Registrations in Registration Memory can also be saved to a USB flash memory or other external media for future recall. Reference Pages 1 Create your original Registration. 2 While holding down the [M.] (Memory) button in the Registration Memory section, press the numbered button to which you wish to save your Registration. 1. While holding down [M.] button... 13 14 15 16 Selecting a Voice (page 26) Selecting a Rhythm (page 60) Voice Controls and Effects (page 40) 2. Press desired numbered button. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 D. When the Registration is stored, the numbered button flashes momentarily. When recording Registration settings, the square at the top left of the display turns light blue for a few seconds, indicating that the Registration is currently being saved. Do not turn the power off while the Registration is being saved. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 89 Functions and settings that cannot be memorized: The following settings cannot be stored to a Registration Memory number. • Pitch (page 208) • MIDI Control settings (fpage 238) • Mic. Volume (page 233) • AUX OUT settings (page 228) • Mic. Reverb (page 233) • LCD related settings (page 16) • Internet Direct Connection settings (page 218) Reference Page Saving Registrations as Registration Data (File) (page 116) 6 REGISTRATION MEMORY 90 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual The following settings common to all Registration Memory numbers 1 – 16 and cannot be stored individually for each number. • Transpose (page 208) • Attack mode in Organ Flute Voices (page 38) • Registration Shift (page 94) • Auto Fill setting (page 64) • Reverb type (page 47) • User Voices (page 145) • User rhythms (page 172) • User Keyboard Percussion (page 79) • Rhythm Sequences (page 183) • Disable setting (page 91) 2 Selecting Registrations Simply press the numbered button that corresponds to the Registration you wish to select. • You can also recall Registrations by using the Foot Contollers. This function is called “Registration Shift” (page 94). • You can also program the Registrations to change automatically at specific points within the Rhythm Sequence. This function is called “Registration Sequence” (page 188). Reference Page Controlling the Registration Shift (page 203) Using the [D.] (Disable) button: Rhythm and automatic accompaniment patterns also change when you select different Registration Memory buttons. Pressing the [D.] (Disable) button allows you to keep the same rhythm, accompaniment patterns, tempo, and so on throughout all your Registration changes, or make your own rhythm selections if you want to. 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 REGISTRATION MEMORY Disable Button D. When the [D.] button is on, the following functions will not change, even when you change the Registration Memory number. • Rhythm menu, Rhythm section, Rhythm tempo, Rhythm volume, Rhythm reverb • Rhythm reverb time • Accompaniment volume, Accompaniment reverb, On/Off status of Accompaniment parts • A.B.C. mode, A.B.C. memory • M.O.C. mode • Second expression pedal control for rhythm tempo DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 91 Saving the Registration data to USB flash 3 memory Reference Page Saving Registrations as Registration Data (File); (page 116) You can save your Registration Memory settings to an external storage device, such as USB flash memory, with sixteen Registrations comprising a single file. The instructions below explain how to save the Registration data to a USB flash memory. For details about using other external storage devices, see chapter 7, Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.). 1 Insert a USB flash memory into the USB TO DEVICE terminal on the left side of the DDK-7. 2 Press the [MDR] button on the panel to call up the M.D.R. display. 3 Select the song to which you want to save the Registration data (page 104). 4 Press [REGIST EDIT] button in the display to call up the Registration Edit display. 5 Press the [SAVE] button in the display. A message appears, indicating the Registration data is currently being saved. When the operation is completed, the message closes. 6 REGISTRATION MEMORY Reference Page Recalling Recorded Registrations (page 121) Reference Page Changing the Song Name (page 113) 92 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 4 Initializing Registration Memory Deleting all Registration data in Registration Memory initializes the Registration Memory. Be careful when using this operation, since it erases all your existing data. In order to avoid inadvertently losing your important data, save it to an external storage device. 1 Reference Page Factory Set (Initializing the DDK-7); (page 23) Press the [UTILITY] button on the panel to call up the GLOBAL Page in the Utility display. REGISTRATION MEMORY 6 2 Press the INITIALIZE [EXECUTE] button on the right side in the display. The message “Are you sure you want to initialize Registration data?” appears. Press [INITIALIZE] to actually initialize the data. When the operation is complete, the DDK-7 will be restarted. Press [CANCEL] to cancel the operation. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 93 5 Registration Shift The Registration Shift function allows you to change Registrations without taking your hands from the keyboards. By using the Right Footswitch on the expression pedal, or optional Foot Pedal, you can “jump” to a specified Registration or step through the panel Registrations in sequence, either in numeric order or in any order you specify. Registration Shift has three modes: Shift, Jump and User. These are set in the Regist Shift display. You can also view and check the Registration Shift mode in the Voice Display. Reference Page Footswitches (page 193) Foot Pedal (page 196) Setting the Registration Shift mode in the Regist Shift display Connect the Pedal Unit (DDKU-P7) or optional Foot Pedal (FC4/FC5) to the instrument. 6 REGISTRATION MEMORY DDKU-P7 FC4 FC5 If you want to use the Foot Pedal, set the desired parameters in the Regist Shift display explained in this section, then assign the Regist Shift function to the Foot Pedal. Refer to the section “Controlling Registration Shift” on page 203. Setting the Registration Shift mode in the Regist Shift display 94 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 1 Press the [FOOT SWITCH] button on the panel. 2 Press the [RIGHT] button at the top right of the display to call up the RIGHT Page (Regist Shift display). REGIST SHIFT Display 1 1 2 3 4 OFF Turns off the Registration Shift assignment. When you select OFF, you cannot change Registrations by using the Right Footswitch, or with an optional Foot Pedal. 2 SHIFT In the Shift mode, each press of the Right Footswitch, or with an optional Foot Pedal selects the Registration Memory presets in their numerical order. After the last Registration is reached, the function ‘wraps around’ to select the first preset again. The numbered buttons light up as they are selected. REGISTRATION MEMORY 3 6 JUMP Pressing the Right Footswitch, or with an optional Foot Pedal jumps to select the designated panel Registration. You can set the Jump “destination” with buttons in the display or the Data Control dial. Registration number of the destination 4 USER In the User mode, each press of the Right Footswitch, or with an optional Foot Pedal selects Registrations according to the order you’ve specified. To set the User Registration order: 1 Press the desired numbered button in the Registration Memory section. 2 Press the [SET] button in the display. The Registration number appears in the display, indicating that the Registration is entered. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 95 3 Repeat the above procedure #1 through #2 to set the Registration order. NOTE When the cursor is positioned at “-”, Footswitch, or an optional Foot Pedal does not work. Registration row 3 1 1 2 POSITION These are cursor controls used to move the cursor (colored orange) along the Registration row in the display. Entered Registration numbers are shown in boxes, while the numbers in the row above indicate the position in the sequence (in other words, the number of successive presses of the Right Footswitch). Up to 80 steps (Registrations) can be memorized. 6 REGISTRATION MEMORY Moves the cursor to the first position. Moves the cursor one step to the left. Moves the cursor one step to the right. Moves the cursor five steps to the right. 2 DATA These are data controls used to enter and delete Registration numbers in the Registration row. SET: For initially entering a Registration number to a blank space in the Registration row, or for replacing a number at the current cursor position. To enter a number, press the desired Registration Memory button (the selected button will light), then press [SET] in the display. The entered Registration number will appear in the Registration row. After using SET to enter Registrations, the cursor can be moved among the numbers. INSERT: For inserting a Registration number just before the current cursor position. To perform the operation, first move the cursor to a numbered position. Then, press the desired Registration Memory button (the selected button will light), and press [INSERT] in the display. The new Registration number is inserted at the cursor position and all other numbers to the right of the cursor are moved to accommodate the new numbers. Registration numbers cannot be entered beyond the Registration Shift function’s capacity of 80. If the insert operation exceeds this capacity, a “Data Full” message appears and the operation cannot be executed. DELETE: For deleting a Registration number at the current cursor position. To delete the unnecessary number, move the cursor to a numbered position and press [DELETE] in the display. CLEAR: For erasing all current user Registration Shift settings. After selecting [CLEAR], a message appears prompting confirmation of the operation. Select [CLEAR] to clear all data. The message “Clear all data” momentarily appears in the display and returns to the previous display. Select [CANCEL] to abort the operation. 96 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 3 SHIFT END Determines how to end the Registration shift function. STOP: Selects the last Registration and quits the operation. TOP: After the last preset is reached, the first preset is called up again, starting the sequence over again from the beginning. Reference Page Saving Two or More Registration Banks to One Song (page 117) NOTE NEXT REGIST: After the last preset is reached, the next Registration data in the Song is called up. This function is available only when two or more Registration data sets are saved in one Song. This function is handy when you need to play a song with more than sixteen Registrations. The Shift End mark ( ) will automatically be put at the end of the Registrations you entered when Top or Next Regist is selected as the Shift End. When you play the song using Next Regist. function, always press the [F] (Play) button in the M.D.R. display to start the song and activate these functions. The [CUSTOM] (Custom Play) button will not activate the Next Regist. function. NOTE If the next Registration data contains User voices, the DDK-7 may produce no sound for a few seconds while loading the Registration. REGISTRATION MEMORY 6 Confirming the Registration Shift setting in the Voice Display You can confirm the Registration Shift mode in the Voice Display, Page 1. Press the [VOICE DISPLAY] button on the panel to call up the Voice Display. The Registration Shift mode is shown at the bottom right of the display. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 97 Registration Shift, OFF: The current Registration number is displayed. Registration Shift, in “SHIFT” mode: Current Registration Next Registration The current Registration number (left) and the next number (right) are displayed. 6 Registration Shift, in “JUMP” mode: REGISTRATION MEMORY Destination number can be changed. The current Registration number (left) and the destination number (right) will be displayed. You can change the destination number even in the middle of the performance by using the buttons in the display or the Data Control dial. Registration Shift, in “USER” mode: Indicates the current position of the Registration Shift. You can change the Registration by moving the cursor (in orange) right/left, using the displayed buttons or the Data Control dial. This is handy if you’ve inadvertently advanced the shift setting in the middle of your performance. The user Registration settings cannot be edited here. Moves the cursor to the first position. Moves the cursor one step to the left and selects the next Registration. Moves the cursor one step to the right and selects the previous Registration. Moves the cursor five step to the right and selects the Registration. 98 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 6 Unifying a specific parameter In the Voice Display, Page 2, you can conveniently “unify” a specific parameter used in different Voice groups at one time. This is useful when you are changing, for example, the Voice Brilliance setting for the Upper Keyboard and want the same setting to be applied to the entire instrument. Available parameters • Reverb • Panning • Rhythm Reverb • Brilliance • Volume • Sustain 1 Press the [VOICE DISPLAY] button on the panel. 2 Press the [2] button at the top right of the display to select Page 2. 3 Press the PARAMETER button (indicates the currently selected parameter) in the display to select the desired parameter for changing. The Parameter Select pop-up menu appears, letting you select the desired parameter. REGISTRATION MEMORY 6 Parameter Part DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 99 Select the parameter and part in the Parameter Select pop-up menu. After selecting the desired parameter, the pop-up menu automatically closes. The amount of the selected parameter for each Registration is shown in the display. Parameter value for each Registration Selected parameter 4 6 Select the targeted Registration numbers and turn them on. Parameters in Registrations set to ON will be changed. REGISTRATION MEMORY Press the targeted Registration in the display and turn it on with the SETTINGS buttons: ALL ON, ALL OFF, ON, OFF, and SELECT. ALL ON: Selects all Registration memory numbers. ALL OFF: Cancels all Registration memory numbers. ON: Sets the currently selected Registration memory number to “ON.” OFF: Sets the currently selected Registration memory number to “OFF.” SELECT: Turns on the Registration memory numbers that contain the same Voice as the one which is currently set in the Registration at the cursor position. The targeted Registration numbers are underlined. 100 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Unifies the currently turned-on parameter’s values. You unify the relevant parameter values in each Registration memory number or offset them. Keep in mind that you cannot restore the original data once you change the parameter’s value. Unifying the currently turned-on parameter’s value: Pressing [SET] unifies the currently turned-on parameter’s values to the one in the currently selected Registration (at the cursor position). A message appears prompting you to confirm the operation. 6 REGISTRATION MEMORY 5 To continue the operation, select [UNIFY]. Select [CANCEL] to abort the operation. Offsetting the currently turned-on parameter’s value. Pressing the [+]/[-] buttons in the display or using the Data Control dial offsets the currently turned-on parameter’s value. If you select Pan as the parameter, [E]/[F] buttons are shown instead of [+]/[-]. If you change the value, and if parameter values for some Registration memory number reach the maximum or minimum, the following message appears. In this case, pressing [OK] continues the operation, ignoring those parameters at maximum or minimum value. Pressing [CANCEL] aborts the operation. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 101 7 Music Data Recorder (MDR) The Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.) is a sophisticated recording system built into the DDK-7 that lets you record your performances and Registration settings to a USB flash memory or other external media. Moreover, the M.D.R. allows you to perform various other operations to your song data (such as copy, delete and convert). Before purchasing any USB storage device, you should check with your Yamaha dealer or an authorized Yamaha distributor for advice on compatibility. Contents 1 Calling Up the M.D.R. Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 2 Formatting External Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 3 Selecting a Song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 • Song Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 4 Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 • Recording your performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 • Re-recording (Retry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 • Recording each part separately . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 • Punch-in Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 5 Changing the Song Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 6 Saving Registrations as Registration Data (File) .116 • Saving Two or More Registration Banks to One Song. 117 • Replacing Registrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 • Next Regist Settings (Changing the order of the Registration data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 7 Recalling Recorded Registrations. . . . . . . . . . . 121 8 Playing Back a Song. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 • Playing Back the Selected Part(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 • Fast Forward, Rewind and Pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 • Changing the Tempo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 • Repeat Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 • Playing Back XG Songs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 9 Other Functions (Tools) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 • Song Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 • Song Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 • Converting to XG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 • XG Song Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 • XG Song Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 • Converting to EL format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 • Converting from EL format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 • Checking the Remaining Memory/media ID . . . . . . 136 7 Music Data Recorder (MDR) Copy Song data Delete USB flash memory Convert Before using a USB device, read through the important section “Precautions when using the USB TO DEVICE terminals” on page 234. About USB devices compatible with the DDK-7, see “Compatible USB devices” on page 234. To protect your data (write-protect switch): Some USB flash memory devices are equipped with a write-protect switch. To prevent accidental erasure of important data saved in USB flash memory, slide the write-protect switch on the device to the “protect” position. When saving data, make sure that the write-protect switch is set to the “overwrite” position. 102 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 1 Calling Up the M.D.R. Display Press the [MDR] button in the panel to call up the M.D.R. display. All operations related to the M.D.R., such as recording and playing your performances, can be done in the M.D.R. display. 7 Music Data Recorder (MDR) The M.D.R. display consists of two display pages: the SONG SELECT Page and the TOOLS Page. In the SONG SELECT Page, you can select the song that you want to playback, or to which you want to record your performance, then playback or record. The TOOLS Page has a variety of song utility operations, such as copy, delete, rename, etc. Pressing any button other than the [MDR] button while the M.D.R. display is open exits from the M.D.R. display. If you exit from the function inadvertently, simply press the [MDR] button again to recall the M.D.R. display. All the instructions in this chapter are related to the M.D.R. display. To call up the M.D.R. functions and the M.D.R. display, press the [MDR] button. 2 Formatting External Media If you find that you are unable to use new, blank external media (such as USB flash memory, floppy disks or USB storage devices) or old ones that have been used with other devices, you may need to format them. Formatting erases all the data in the media and makes it ready to record. The data erased by formatting will be lost permanently. Check whether or not the media contains any important data you wish to keep before executing the operation. 1 Connect the device to the USB TO DEVICE terminal. 2 Press the [TOOLS] button at the top right of the display to call up the TOOLS Page. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 103 3 NOTE “USB-FD01” appears in the display only when a floppy disk drive (UD-FD01) has been installed to the DDK-7. Press the [FORMAT] button in the display. 4 Select the desired media you want to format. To format a USB flash memory, select [USB XX]. To format a floppy disk, select [USB-FD1]. 5 Press the [EXECUTE] button in the display. A message appears, prompting confirmation of the operation. Select [OK] to format the media, or [CANCEL] to abort the operation. 7 Music Data Recorder (MDR) Do not remove the media while formatting. 3 Selecting a Song In the SONG SELECT Page, you can select a blank song to which you want to record your performance or save the Registration settings, or you can select a desired song for playback. To select the desired song: In the SONG SELECT Page, songs in the currently selected media are displayed. First call up the desired media (and folder, if necessary) in the display, then select the desired song. 104 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 1 Check the currently selected media at the top of the display. For example, if you want to select a song in the USB flash memory, confirm that “USB XX:/” is displayed at the top of the display. Currently selected media/folder For information on selecting the desired media, see page 107. Press desired song button in the display. Referring to the song name and icons, select the desired song. The selected song button is highlighted in orange. Song containing data Blank song (containing no data) Reference Pages Changing the Song Name (page 113) Song Icons (page 108) 7 Music Data Recorder (MDR) 2 One display contains eight songs, Song 1 – Song 8. To change the display page and call up other songs, press the appropriate number buttons in the display. For example, pressing the [2] button calls up Song 9 –16, while the [3] button calls up Song 17 – 24, and so on. Press the number buttons to change the displayed songs. Song 1 – Song 8 When the [3] button is selected When the [1] button is selected 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 Song 1 Song 2 Song 3 Song 4 Song 17 Song 18 Song 19 Song 20 Song 5 Song 6 Song 7 Song 8 Song 21 Song 22 Song 23 Song 24 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 105 Song Part Information Pressing the [PART SETUP] button calls up the Part Setup display of the currently selected song, letting you confirm which parts are played when playing the song. When playing back the song (by pressing the [F] button), only those parts that are set to “PLAY” in the Part Setup display actually play, while parts that are set to “OFF” are muted. (If the song contains no performance data, all parts are set to “OFF”.) You can change the status for each part by changing the PLAY/OFF settings for each part and pressing the [SAVE] button in the display. 7 Music Data Recorder (MDR) 106 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual To change the media/folder: 1 Press the [FOLDER SELECT] button in the SONG SELECT Page to call up the Folder Select display. 1 2 4 5 6 7 3 1 Current Media/Folder Displays the currently selected media/folder. For example, if “USB 01:/Folder1/” is shown, the folder named “Folder1” in the USB flash memory is selected. 2 Media/Folder List Displays the media or folders. Up to 120 folders can be displayed. 3 7 Scroll Buttons 4 Music Data Recorder (MDR) If the Media/Folder List contains many folders, more than can fit on the display, you can scroll the display with these buttons. UP Selects the upper layer folder or media. For example, when “USB 01:/Folder1/” (Folder1 in the USB flash memory) is selected, pressing the [UP] button selects “USB 01:/”. 5 CREATE FOLDER Creates a new folder in the Media/Folder List. Up to 120 folders can exist in one media or within a single upper folder. Pressing this button calls up the New Folder display in which you can enter the desired name. Enter the name and press the [OK] button to create a new folder. The method for entering the folder name is the same as that of the song name. See page 113 for more information. 6 RENAME FOLDER Calls up the Rename Folder display. You can change the folder name of the currently selected folder in the Media/Folder List. See page 113 for more information. 7 DELETE FOLDER Deletes the folder that is selected in the Media/Folder List. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 107 NOTE A message prompting initialization of the Registration data may appear when you select a folder. Select [INITIALIZE] to initialize the Registration called up on the panel, then select a new Song. Media is not initialized after the operation is complete. 2 Select the desired media and/or folder in the Media/Folder List. To call up the folder in the media in the display, press the selected media button in the Media/Folder List again. 3 Press the [EXECUTE] button. To abort the operation, press the [CLOSE] button. Song Icons These icons are shown when you select a media, folder, and song. Indicates media such as a USB flash memory or floppy disk. This icon is displayed in the Media/Folder List. Indicates a folder. Indicates that write-protect or copy-protect is effective for the media. 7 Music Data Recorder (MDR) Indicates that performance data is contained in the song. Indicates a Protected Original Song. See page 131 for more information. Indicates a Protected Edit Song. See page 131 for more information. These icons are shown when you select a song created on the Electone. Indicates a song that has been created with the ELS-01. Indicates a song that has been created with the ELS-01C or ELS-01X. Indicates a song that has been created with an EL-series Electone, such as the EL-900. 108 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Media Contents: Folders, Songs, and Files Folders: A folder is a storage location in the media, used to organize multiple songs in groups. If you’ve saved hundreds of songs to a USB flash memory or USB storage device, it may be difficult to find the desired song quickly. Organizing your songs in folders, with similar songs grouped together (for example, according to genre or tempo), makes it easier to find the songs you want. Song 1 Song 2 Song 3 Song 4 Song 5 Song 6 Song 1 2 Song 3 Folder A Creating folders... Song Song Song USB flash memory Song 4 5 6 Folder B USB flash memory Songs: A song is the DDK-7 data for a piece of music, recorded to external media. A single song can contain a variety of data, including the recorded performance, Registrations, and so on. Music Data Recorder (MDR) 7 Files: A file is an element of data in a song. For example, a single song consists of various files, such as Registration files and performance files. The following files are created with the M.D.R. (The extension will not appear in the DDK-7 display. They will, however, be displayed on a computer.) Files in the song File Explanation Extension Performance data This file contains performance data, played on the keyboards and pedals of the DDK-7. .mid Registration data This file contains Registration settings, User Voices, User rhythms, and Rhythm Sequences. .b00 XG-converted data This file contains XG song data, for which DDK-7 performance data is converted to XG-compatible format. .mid In addition, one file (extension: .nam) is automatically created in each folder for organization/maintenance of the folder contents. It does not appear on the DDK-7 display. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 109 4 Recording Recording your performance Never attempt to eject the media or turn the power off during recording, reading and playing back. NOTE 7 Music Data Recorder (MDR) You cannot record to a folder which contains songs for the EL-series Electone, such as EL-900. Set the desired Registrations on the DDK-7. Make all the DDK-7 settings necessary for the song you will record. This means entering the all Registrations you will need for the entire performance in the Registration Memory. Make sure also to select the Registration that you will use at the beginning of the song. 1 Insert a USB flash memory to the USB TO DEVICE terminal. 2 Select a blank song for recording your performance. For details on selecting a song, see page 104. If you want to overwrite an existing song already containing performance data, you will need to delete it beforehand. 3 Press the [RECORD] button in the display. The following display appears, indicating that you can record your performance. 4 Press the [F] (Play) button. An hourglass icon appears, indicating that Registration data is currently being read. 5 Do not remove the media from the instrument while data is being recorded (while the hourglass icon or other message is shown). 110 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 6 After the hourglass disappears, begin playing. When you finish playing, press the [J] (Stop) button in the display. The recording is finished and the LCD returns to the SONG SELECT Page. The song to which your performance is recorded is automatically named “SONG XX” (xx indicates song number). You can change the song name as desired. (For details, see page 113.) Re-recording (Retry) If you make a mistake during recording, you can re-record the song from the beginning. Press the [RETRY] button while the song is still running. This automatically stops recording and returns you to the starting point of the song. 2 Press the [F] (Play) or [CUSTOM] button to begin re-recording the song. Re-recording starts from the beginning of the song and replaces the previously recorded performance with the newly recorded performance. 7 Music Data Recorder (MDR) 1 Recording each part separately You can also record the parts of your performance independently. This function lets you record Keyboard Percussion and performance control data, such as Registration changes and expression pedal operation, separately from the other parts of the song. Even Keyboard Percussion and Lead Voice 1 Voices can be recorded separately, though, the Lead Voice 2 Voices will be included in the performance data of the Upper Keyboard. The following instruction is an example: First, record the chords and bass to the song using the Lower and Pedalboard, and then record the melody using the Upper Keyboard. 1 2 Follow steps 1 – 3 on page 110 to call up the Rec Standby display. Select the parts for recording. Each pressing of a part button switches the status: PLAY, OFF, and REC. PLAY: Playback the parts that have been recorded. OFF: Recording or playback is not active. REC: Records the part. If you set the Upper part to “REC,” the performance on the Upper Keyboard (including Lead Voice 1 Voices) is recorded. Setting Lead to “REC,” however, records only the Lead Voice 1 Voices. You cannot set both Upper and Lead to “REC” at the same time; neither can the Lower and Keyboard Percussion parts be recorded at the same time. NOTE When you record the Keyboard Percussion, make sure that the [K.B.P.1] or [K.B.P.2] button is set to on. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 111 The following setting lets you record only Lower Keyboard and Pedalboard parts. 7 Music Data Recorder (MDR) 3 Press the [F] (Play) button, and start playing after the hourglass icon disappears. 4 Press the [J] (Stop) button when you are finished with your performance to stop recording. Now you’ve recorded the first parts of your performance. 5 Press the [RECORD] button to set up recording of the next part — Upper part in this case. A message appears prompting confirmation of operation. Select [OK] to overwrite and the Rec Standby display appears. 6 Select the parts for recording. Set the next parts you want to record (in this case, the Upper part) to “REC.” Also set the part already recorded (in this case Lower and Pedal parts) to “PLAY,” so you can hear the previously recorded parts as you record new ones. 7 Press the [CUSTOM] button to start recording of the new part or parts (Upper part). Playback of the previously recorded parts starts immediately. The [CUSTOM] button is used here to record only the parts that have been selected for recording, and plays back only those parts that have been selected for playback. While you listen to the parts being played back, start playing the melody on the Upper keyboard. When the end of the recorded performance is reached, playback is automatically stopped. The length of a subsequently recorded part cannot exceed the length of the previously recorded parts. 112 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Punch-in Recording 1 Select the song which contains the phrase you want to change. For details on selecting a song, see page 104. 2 Press the [F] (Play) button to start playback of the song. 3 Press the [K] (Pause) button at the point you want to execute punch-in recording. 4 Press the [RECORD] button. The recording display appears, indicating that the Music Data Recorder is ready to record. 5 Set the parts which you want to change to “REC” status and other parts to “PLAY.” 6 Press the [F] (Play) button to start punch-in recording. Play the new phrase, as you want it to be changed. 7 Press the [J] (Stop) button to quit the punch-in recording as soon as you reach the end of the phrase. NOTE This function is best used when the phrase to be re-recorded has definite beginning and end points, with slight pauses before and after. 7 Music Data Recorder (MDR) This lets you re-record a specific phrase or section which you don’t want to use, either that of a specific part(s) or all parts. 5 Changing the Song Name You can name the song, such as giving it a title or indicating the date on which it was recorded. However, song names of the EL-series Electone, such as the EL-900, cannot be changed. 1 Select the song whose name you want to change. For details on selecting a song, see page 104. 2 Press the [TOOLS] button at the top right of the display to call up the TOOLS Page. NOTE When you change the name of an XG song, the extension (.mid) cannot be changed. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 113 3 Press the [CHANGE SONG NAME] button. The following display appears. 4 Move the cursor to the desired point by using the [E][F] buttons in the display or the Data Control dial. Cursor DATA CONTROL or 7 Music Data Recorder (MDR) NOTE If you select Japanese as the Language in the Utility display (page 16), you can also select Japanese language characters (hiragana and kanji, normal size katakana, half size katakana, full size alphabet, and full size symbols). NOTE An XG song name can contain up to 46 characters. 114 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 5 Select the desired character type: alphabet, upper or lowercase, or symbol. 6 Select the desired character for entry. A song name can contain up to 50 characters. 7 After finished, select [OK] to actually enter the name. The LCD will return to the TOOLS Page display. To delete the entered character: 1 Move the cursor to the character you want to delete. Cursor DATA CONTROL or 2 Press the [DELETE] button at the bottom right in the display. The character is deleted. 7 To convert into kanji (Japanese language): 1 (Kana-Kan) button in Japanese. Music Data Recorder (MDR) This applies only if you are using the When the input “Hiragana” characters are shown in the reverse display (highlighted), press the (kanji-conversion) button one or several times to convert to the characters into the appropriate kanji. • The reversed area can be changed by the [E][F] buttons in the display or the Data Control dial. • The converted area can be cleared at once by pressing the (cancel) button. 2 To actually enter the change, press the [OK] button or enter the next character. To enter the hiragana character itself (without converting it), press the (delete) button. A “name is not available” message may appear when you press the [OK] button to finish entering the name. If this message appears, the name is invalid and you should enter another name. The following names cannot be used. (“xx” indicates numbers.) MDR_xx.EVT MDR_xx.MID MDR_xx.Bxx MDR_xx.Vxx SONG.NAM ELS_SONG.NAM MDR_xxx.MID REG_xxx.B00 SONG_xxx.C02 MDR_xxx.TMP REG_xxx.TMP ELS_SONG.TMP TMP TMP.E02 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 115 6 Saving Registrations as Registration Data (File) You can also record Registrations by themselves, without recording a performance. Bulk data, including Registration Memory and Registration Shift settings, Rhythm Patterns (User rhythms) Rhythm Sequence data, and User Voices, are also saved in the operation. Registrations 1 – 16 stored to the numbered buttons are saved together as a bank. 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 D. Save Registrations new song 7 Music Data Recorder (MDR) 116 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 1 First create your original settings you want to save then select the destination (blank song). For details on selecting a song, see page 104. 2 Press the [REGIST EDIT] button in the SONG SELECT Page to call up the Regist Edit display. 3 Press the [SAVE] button. A message appears, indicating that the Registration is being recorded. After the message disappears, exit from the Regist Edit display by pressing the [CLOSE] button and return to the SONG SELECT Page. The song to which the Registration is recorded is automatically named “SONG XX” (xx indicates song number). Saving Two or More Registration Banks to One Song When you want to use more than 16 Registration numbers, you can save additional Registration banks to a single song, with the following procedure. REG:01 Registration 13 14 15 5 6 7 16 1 8 9 2 3 4 10 11 12 16 1 7 8 9 13 14 15 16 1 8 9 13 14 15 Add REG:02 Registration to be added REG:50 Registration to be added 5 5 2 3 4 6 7 2 3 4 10 11 12 2 3 4 10 11 12 First create the original settings you want to save, then select the destination song. For details on selecting a song, see page 104. Reference Page Next Regist. (page 97) Programming a Registration Sequence (page 188) 7 Press the [REGIST EDIT] button in the SONG SELECT Page to call up the Regist Edit display. The Registration data which has previously been saved to the song is shown. Music Data Recorder (MDR) 1 6 Press the lowest blank (empty) Registration button. Press the [SAVE] button. The Registration data will be added. When you play back this song, the top Registration in this display will be loaded to the DDK-7. You can also change the order of the Registration data. See page 118. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 117 Replacing Registrations The M.D.R. also lets you change the Registrations of an existing song without changing the performance data. In advance, you need to create the original Registration that will replace the old one. 1 Select the song for which you wish to replace the Registrations. For details on selecting a song, see page 104. 2 Press the [REGIST EDIT] button in the SONG SELECT Page to call up the Regist Edit display. The Registration data which has been saved to the song is shown. 3 4 Select the Registration data you wish to replace. Press the [SAVE] button. A message appears, prompting confirmation of overwriting the Registration data. Select [OK] to overwrite (replace), or select [CANCEL] to abort the operation. 7 Music Data Recorder (MDR) Next Regist Settings (Changing the order of the Registration data) NOTE If the next Registration data contains User voices, the DDK-7 may produce no sound for a few seconds while loading the Registration. When playing back a song which uses more than 16 Registration numbers, you can use two or more Registration banks saved in a single song and recall them one by one as you play the song. This function is called Next Regist. M1 M16 REG_001 M1 M16 REG_002 If you want to use the Next Regist function, you'll have to make one of the following settings in advance: • Set the Registration Shift mode to User, and select Next Regist as the Shift End (page 94). • Enter the Next Regist data in the Registration Sequence (page 189). 1 118 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Save the desired Registrations to a song. For instructions on saving two or more Registration banks to a song, see page 117. 2 Select the song containing the Registrations for which you want to change the order. For details on selecting a song, see page 104. 3 Press the [REGIST EDIT] button in the SONG SELECT Page to call up the Regist Edit display. 4 Change the Registration order, in the order you want to recall. First select the specific Registration bank you want to edit, then move, copy or delete the selected data as needed to change the order. Music Data Recorder (MDR) 7 4 1 5 6 7 2 1 3 Registration Data List From this list, select the Registration you want to move, copy or delete. The selected Registration is highlighted in orange. When more than five Registration banks are saved in the song, a scroll button is available for scrolling through the Registration Data List. 2 MOVE Moves the selected Registration bank up or down. 3 DATA TO BE LOADED When loading the Registration bank to the panel, select the desired data you want to load. For more information, see page 121. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 119 4 LOAD Loads the selected Registration bank to the panel/keyboards. After loading, you can check the Registration by playing the keyboards. 5 SAVE Saves the current panel settings as a Registration bank in the song. The currently selected Registration in the Registration Data List (1) will become the destination location. 6 COPY Copies the currently selected Registration to the lowest blank location in the Registration Data List. 7 DELETE Deletes the currently selected Registration bank in the Registration Data List. 5 7 Music Data Recorder (MDR) 120 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Exit from the Regist Edit display by pressing the [CLOSE] button at the top right of the display. 7 Recalling Recorded Registrations Registrations (and bulk data) recorded to song numbers can be easily loaded back to the DDK-7 by the following procedure. The M.D.R. independently records the following five types of data: • REGIST • USER VOICE • K.B.P. • USER RHYTHM • SEQUENCE You can select and recall the desired data independently. Insert the appropriate media and select the song you want to load back to the DDK-7. For details on selecting a song, see page 104. 2 Press the [REGIST EDIT] button in the SONG SELECT Page to call up the Regist Edit display. 3 Select the Registration you want to load to the DDK-7. 7 Music Data Recorder (MDR) 1 NOTE 4 Using the five “DATA TO BE LOADED” buttons, select the desired data you want to load. 5 Press the [LOAD] button to load the selected data in the Registration. 6 Exit from the Regist Edit display by pressing the [CLOSE] button at the top right of the display. When you load the Registration data by using the Next Regist function, all data will be loaded no matter which buttons you select here. NOTE If you are loading a Registration while a rhythm is playing, the sequence data and User rhythms in the Registration data cannot be loaded. When you select the protected song, the buttons (DATA TO BE LOADED) may be unavailable (grayed out). For example, combining a part of one protcted song with another protected song is not allowed. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 121 NOTE When you play Electone data, the resulting song balance will vary according to the speakers you are using. NOTE The functions intended for control with the Knee Lever must be assigned to the Foot Pedal. 8 Playing Back a Song 1 Select the song to be played back. For details on selecting a song, see page 104. 2 Press the [F] (Play) button in the display to load the Registration data. An hourglass icon appears, indicating the Registration data is loading. If the song contains more than two Registration banks, the first one will be loaded. You can check the Registration order in the Regist. Edit display. If the song contains no performance data, after loading the Registration data, the LCD returns to the SONG SELECT Page. 3 Playback starts automatically after reading the Registration data (the elapsed time is shown). In general, all parts recorded to the song are played back; however, you can mute specific parts and playback only selected parts. For more information, see page 123. When the end of the recorded performance is reached, playback automatically stops. You can, however, stop playback in the middle of the song by pressing the [J] (Stop) button in the display. Reference Page Next Regist Settings (page 118) Reference Page Song Part Information (page 106) 7 Music Data Recorder (MDR) Custom Play If you want to play back the song without resetting the Registrations, press the [CUSTOM] button instead of the [F] (Play) button. This displays the song time and starts playback immediately. When you play the song using the Next Regist function, always press the [F] (Play) button to start the song, not the [CUSTOM] button. 122 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Playing Back the Selected Part(s) You can also play back selected parts of your recorded performance, while other parts are temporarily turned off. This function is especially useful for playing a single part, such as the melody, over previously recorded accompaniment parts. To play back the selected part(s): During playback, press each part button to turn the part you want to playback to “PLAY” and the part you want to mute to “OFF.” 7 Music Data Recorder (MDR) Fast Forward, Rewind and Pause Fast Forward and Rewind: During playback, press the [H] (Fast forward) button or [G] (Rewind) button and hold it down until the time reaches the desired position. Even when the button is released, playback is paused. To resume playback from the point you’ve advanced or reversed to, press the [F] (Play) button or [CUSTOM] button. Pause: If you want to temporarily stop playback of the song or songs, press the [K] (Pause) button. To resume playback from the point at which the song was paused, press the [K] (Pause) button again or press the [F] (Play) or [CUSTOM] button. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 123 Changing the Tempo You can change the tempo of the song as the song is playing in the M.D.R. display, either while the song is stopped or while it is playing. To Change the Tempo: Use the TEMPO buttons in the display to change the tempo. (The TEMPO buttons on the panel cannot be used to change the tempo for the Music Data Recorder.) The range is 50 – 200%. The original recorded tempo is 100% and values less than 100% indicate slower tempo; values greater than 100% indicate faster tempo. 7 To reset the changed tempo: Music Data Recorder (MDR) Use the [TEMPO RESET] button in the display to reset the tempo to its original value (100%). 124 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Repeat Playback This feature allows you to repeatedly play back either all songs on a folder or only one specific song. 1 Select the song you wish to play back. If you wish to play back all songs on a folder, select the first song that will be played back. For details on selecting a song, see page 104. 2 Press the [TOOLS] button at the top right of the display to call up the TOOLS Page. 3 Press the [REPEAT SETTING] button to call up the Repeat Setting display. 4 1 Music Data Recorder (MDR) 7 Select the repeat mode. 1 2 3 4 ALL Repeats all songs in the currently selected folder in order. 2 SINGLE Repeats the currently selected song again and again. 3 RANDOM Repeats all songs in the currently selected folder randomly. 4 OFF Cancels repeat playback. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 125 5 Exit from the Repeat Setting display by pressing the [CLOSE] button at the top right of the display. 6 Press the [F] (Play) button in the SONG SELECT Page to begin playback. When you stop playback, the repeat setting is automatically cancelled. Playing Back XG Songs Reference Page Converting to XG (page 132) The DDK-7 allows you to playback XG song data, created on the computer or converted from DDK-7 song format to XG format. The fast forward, rewind and pause controls are available, just as with songs (performances) recorded on the DDK-7. 1 7 Insert the media containing XG song data into the USB TO DEVICE terminal. 3 Press the [XG] button in the SONG SELECT Page to call up the XG songs in the display. When the [ORIGINAL] button is selected, the DDK-7 songs are shown in the SONG SELECT Page; when the [XG] button is selected, the XG songs are shown. Music Data Recorder (MDR) 2 Select the media that contains the desired XG song in the SONG SELECT Page. For details on selecting media, see page 107. 126 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 4 Select the desired song for playback. 5 Press the [F] (Play) button in the display to start song playback. The following display appears, letting you set the volume or mute settings for each part. 3 1 1 2 PART buttons Sets the each part for playback or mute (off ). Each press of the button toggles between PLAY and OFF. XG VOLUME Music Data Recorder (MDR) 2 7 Adjusts the volume of the XG song within a range of 0 – 100. To set the volume, touch the slider in the display directly or use the Data Control dial. 3 PART SETUP Determines the volume balance of the parts. Pressing this button calls up the following display. You can adjust the volume of each part within a range of 0 – 100. Use the ALL slider to adjust the volume of the XG song (the same function as XG VOLUME above). Each channel button below each slider (for example, the [CH1] button) lets you set the part to mute or play (the same function as the PART buttons above). DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 127 9 Other Functions (Tools) The TOOLS Page in the M.D.R. display has many functions, such as song copy, song delete, etc. Song Copy This function lets you copy data recorded in one song to another song. You can copy and exchange the data even between two different media. (Songs created with the ELseries, such as the EL-900, cannot be copied.) Make sure to check the remaining memory of the destination media in advance. If memory space is insufficient, or if the folder already contains 100 songs, Song Copy is not available. Copying of XG songs is done with a different method from Song Copy here. Refer to “XG Song Copy,” page 133. Moving a Protected Song A protected song can be copied within a folder, but it cannot be copied to another folder or media. If you specify another folder or media as the copy destination, a message appears prompting moving of the song — not copying. When the [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the protected original song and all protected edited songs which come from the same protected original song will be moved together. 7 Music Data Recorder (MDR) To copy within one media: Insert the appropriate media. To copy a song from one USB flash memory to another: Insert the appropriate source and destination USB flash memory devices. To copy between a SmartMedia card and USB flash memory: Insert the Smartmedia card into the appropriate USB device connected to the DDK-7, as well as the USB flash memory device. 128 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 1 Select the song to be copied. For details on selecting a song, see page 104. 2 Press the [TOOLS] button at the top right of the display to call up the TOOLS Page. 3 Press the [SONG COPY] button to call up the Song Copy display. Confirm that the desired song to be copied is displayed in the upper half of the display. If you want to change the song, press the COPY FROM [CHANGE] button to call up the Song Select display and select another song. 4 Press the COPY TO [CHANGE] button to call up the Song Select display, then select the destination song. 5 Press the [EXECUTE] button to execute Song Copy. If you have not selected a blank song, a message appears prompting confirmation whether to overwrite or not. Select [OVERWRITE] to execute or [CANCEL] to abort the operation. Never attempt to eject the media or turn the power off during copying. 7 Music Data Recorder (MDR) The song name of the destination is the same as the one of the source song, but “*” is attached at the beginning. If you want to change the song name, see page 113. Song Delete You can delete data in one song; only Registration data, only performance data, or both of them (entire song) can be deleted. The songs created with the EL series such as EL900 cannot be deleted. To delete the XG song, the method is different from the song delete. Refer to “XG Song Delete,” page 134. 1 Select the song to be deleted. For details on selecting a song, see page 104. 2 Press the [TOOLS] button at the top right of the display to call up the TOOLS Page. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 129 3 Press the [SONG DELETE] button to call up the Song Delete display. Confirm that the desired song to be deleted is displayed in upper half of the display. If you want to change the song, press the [CHANGE] button to call up the song select display and select the desired song. 4 Select the desired data you want to delete, “REGIST” and/or “SONG.” When you want to delete the entire song, select both REGIST and SONG. If only “REGIST” is selected, the Registration data in the song will be deleted. If only “SONG” is selected, the performance data in the song will be deleted. If the song does not contain Registration (or performance) data, you cannot select “REGIST” (or “SONG”) in the display. 5 Press the [EXECUTE] button. A message will appear prompting confirmation of the operation. Select [DELETE] to delete the song, or [CANCEL] to abort the operation. 7 Music Data Recorder (MDR) 130 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual About Protected Songs If you buy or download the song data, it may be protected so that you cannot delete or copy, in order to prevent accidental erasure or protect copyright. This is “Protected Song.” Protected songs can be saved to a USB flash memory. The protected song can be played back as same as the song you created, but it cannot be converted to XG format, or EL format. It is not possible to edit the Registration data in the protected song, nor to overwrite the performance data. If you want to edit the protected song, first copy it within one media/folder, then edit the copy. (You cannot copy to another media/folder.) The copy song (called “protected edit song”) is available only when the original song (called “protected original song”) exists in the same folder. Be careful not to delete the protected original song. Folder Protected Original Song Protected Edit Song Copy 7 Music Data Recorder (MDR) You can edit this song, only when this is in the folder that contains protected original song. You cannot edit this song To move the protected song in a USB flash memory with a computer, you’ll need to use the Musicsoft Downloader application. If you move the song without Musicsoft Downloader, the song cannot be played back. Musicsoft Downloader can be obtained at the following Internet address: http://music.yamaha.com/download/ DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 131 Converting to XG This function allows you to convert the DDK-7 song data to XG format data. You can playback the data using XG devices. The converted XG song data may sound differently from the original data. Confirm that the media should contain enough amount of available memory before the conversion. The protected songs cannot be converted to XG format. 1 Selects a song to be converted to XG. For details on selecting a song, see page 104. 2 Press the [TOOLS] button at the top right of the display to call up the TOOLS Page. 3 Press the [CONVERT TO XG] button. A message will appear, prompting confirmation of the converted data. 4 Press the [EXECUTE] to convert. The M.D.R. starts playback of the selected song for you to decide whether you convert it to the XG data, or not. After finishing playback the following message appears. 5 (If necessary) Press the [RENAME] to give a name to the converted XG song. For details of the method to edit the song name, see page 113. 7 Music Data Recorder (MDR) 132 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 6 Press the [CONVERT] button. After the process of the conversion the LCD returns to the original display. To call up the XG song in the display, press [XG] button in the SONG SELECT Page of the M.D.R. display. For more information, see page 126. XG Song Copy 1 Select the XG song to be copied. For details to select an XG song, see page 126. 2 Press the [TOOLS] button at the top right of the display to call up the TOOLS Page. 3 Press the [XG SONG COPY] button to call up the XG Song Copy display. Music Data Recorder (MDR) 7 Confirm that the desired song to be copied is displayed in upper half of the display. If you want to change the song, press the COPY FROM [CHANGE] button to call up the Song Select display and select the desired song. 4 Press the COPY TO [CHANGE] button to call up the folder select display, then select the destination media. 5 Press the [EXECUTE] button to execute the XG Song Copy. Select [CANCEL] or [CLOSE] to abort the operation. If the remaining memory of the destination media is insufficient, XG Song Copy cannot be executed. (An error message will appear and the operation is cancelled.) Up to 120 XG songs can be saved in one folder. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 133 XG Song Delete 7 Music Data Recorder (MDR) 1 Select the XG song to be deleted. For details on selecting an XG song, see page 126. 2 Press the [TOOLS] button at the top right of the display to call up the TOOLS Page, then select the [XG SONG DELETE] button. The XG Song Delete display appears. 3 Confirm that the desired song to be deleted is shown in the upper half of the display, then press the [EXECUTE]. If you want to change the song, press the [CHANGE] button to call up the Song Select display and select the desired song. After pressing the [EXECUTE] button, a message appears prompting confirmation of the operation. Select [DELETE] to delete the selected XG song, or select [CANCEL] to abort the operation. Converting to EL format Reference Pages About Protected Songs (page 131) NOTE User rhythms cannot be converted to EL format. 134 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual You can convert songs created on the DDK-7 to EL-series format, and save them to a floppy disk. The converted data can be used with EL-series Electones, such as the EL900. This function is not available for protected songs. To use the floppy disk, you’ll need to install the optional UD-FD01 floppy disk drive. 1 Select the song to be converted to EL-series format. For details on selecting a song, see page 104. 2 In the TOOLS Page, press the [CONVERT TO EL] button to call up the Convert display. 3 Press the [CHANGE] button of the Change To section in the display, then select the destination. If the source song contains two or more Registration banks, you’ll need to make ready the same number of destination songs to save the converted data. 4 Press the [EXECUTE] button in the display to start conversion. A message appears, prompting confirmation of the operation. Select [CONVERT] to convert to EL format, or [CANCEL] to abort the operation. If the remaining memory of the floppy disk is insufficient, conversion cannot be executed. (An error message appears and the operation is cancelled.) NOTE If the source song’s name contains full size characters or Japanese characters, the converted song name will be shown with question marks (such as “????”). 7 Music Data Recorder (MDR) Confirm that the desired song to be converted is displayed in the upper half of the display. If you want to change the song, press the [CHANGE] button of the Change From section to call up the Song Select display and select the desired song. Converting from EL format You can convert the songs in the floppy disk created with an EL-series Electone, such as the EL-900, to the DDK-7 format, and save it to a USB flash memory. To use the floppy disk, you’ll need to install the optional UD-FD01 floppy disk drive. Depending on the original song, the sound or tempo of the converted song may differ from the original data, or the Next Song function of the original song may not be effective. 1 Insert the floppy disk that contains the song you want to convert, then select the source song. For details on selecting a song, see page 104. 2 In the TOOLS Page, press the [CONVERT FROM EL] button to call up the Convert display. NOTE When you convert the protected EL data to DDK-7 format, set the write-protect tab of the EL disk to the “overwrite” position (tab closed). NOTE When converting a protected EL song to the DDK-7 format, make sure to use a USB flash memory card with ID. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 135 3 Confirm that the desired song to be converted is shown in upper half of the display. If you want to change the song, press the [CHANGE] button of the Change From section to call up the Song Select display and select the desired song. 4 Press the [CHANGE] button of the Change To section in the display, then select the destination. The specified destination location must be within the range of Song 1 - 100 in the USB flash memory. If a destination is not selected, an empty song is automatically set as the destination. 5 Press the [EXECUTE] button in the display to start conversion. A message appears, prompting confirmation of the operation. Select [CONVERT] to convert from EL format, or [CANCEL] to abort the operation. If the remaining memory of the USB flash memory is insufficient, conversion cannot be executed. (An error message appears and the operation is cancelled.) 7 Music Data Recorder (MDR) Checking the Remaining Memory/media ID In the TOOLS Page, press the [REMAINING MEMORY] button. This allows you to check the remaining memory in the media, the song data capacity of the currently selected song, and whether or not the media has an ID. 136 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 8 Voice Edit This DDK-7 has a Voice Edit feature that allows you to create your own Voices. We suggest that you read through the Voice Structure below at first to get a firmer understanding of the Voices. Then go through the editing steps, reading Editing a Voice on page 140 for editing of an AWM Voice. Contents 1 Voice Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137 • AWM Voice structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137 2 Editing a Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 • Selecting a Voice for editing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 • Editing an AWM Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140 3 Saving the edited Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 4 Quitting Voice Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 5 Recalling an Edited Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 1 Voice Structure The internal structure of the Voices of this DDK-7 is explained below. AWM Voice structure AWM Voices consist of up to four recorded samples of a real instrument. Each waveform, referred to as an “Element,” can be edited, by changing the level (volume), filter settings, and so on. A single Voice contains four boxes (AWM1 – AWM4) in which the Elements are put. If a Voice consists of less than three Elements, some boxes are empty. For example, Strings 1 consists of two Elements (as shown). Voice Edit 8 Strings 1 Element 1 Element 2 AWM1 AWM2 AWM3 AWM4 You can add Elements from other Voices – Brass, for example – if a box (AWM3 and/or AWM4) is empty. This allows you to create your own original ensemble sounds. In the Voice Edit function, you can edit not only each Element, but also assemble some Elements from other Voices. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 137 2 Editing a Voice Selecting a Voice for editing 1 Select the Voice you want to edit from the Voice Menu. For example, if you want to edit Accordion 1, select [Accordion 1] in the Voice Menu in any Voice section. Mute all other Voice sections except for the targeted Voice section. 8 3 Select the desired voice section at the left half of this display. Voice Edit 2 Press the [PROGRAM] button to call up the PROGRAM Display. After you have selected the Voice section, the AWM Page (first page of the Voice Edit display) will appear. 138 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual The message “Voice data is too large to edit” may appear when you press the [PROGRAM] button. If this message appears, select another Voice. Voice Edit 8 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 139 Editing an AWM Voice You can edit an AWM Voice on the AWM Page and LAYER Page in the Voice Edit display. In the AWM Page, the tonal balance of the entire Voice can be corrected by some EQ parameters. In the LAYER Page, you can make detailed edits to each Element. AWM Page 1 2 1 3 Element On/Off switches The [AWM1] – [AWM4] buttons indicate the Elements which make up the selected Voice. You can mute any of the Elements by simply pressing the corresponding button. Pressing the button again cancels the mute. 2 8 EQ LOW FREQ./EQ LOW GAIN Voice Edit Sets the frequency and gain (level) of the low frequency band. The EQ LOW FREQ. slider sets the desired frequency band over a range of 32 Hz – 2.0 kHz. The EQ LOW GAIN slider sets the level for the frequency band (specified by the EQ LOW FREQ. slider) over a range of -12 dB – +12 dB. 3 EQ HIGH FREQ./EQ HIGH GAIN Sets the frequency and gain (level) of the high frequency band. The EQ HIGH FREQ. slider sets the desired frequency band over a range of 500 Hz – 16.0 kHz. The EQ HIGH GAIN slider sets the level for the frequency band (specified by the EQ HIGH FREQ. slider) over a range of -12 dB – +12 dB. EQ (Equalizer) Usually an equalizer is used to correct the sound output from amps or speakers to match the special character of the room. The sound is divided into several frequency bands, then by raising or lowering the level for each band, the correction is made. This DDK-7 has a two-band (high and low) digital equalizer that lets you adjust the overall sound according to the type of music you play — classical music being more refined and soft, pop music more crisp, and rock music more dynamic. 140 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual LAYER Page 1 3 2 1 Element select buttons Select the Element you wish to edit. 2 Element On/Off switches The [AWM1] – [AWM4] buttons indicate the Elements which make up the selected Voice. You can mute any of the Elements by simply pressing the corresponding button. Pressing the button again cancels the mute. Muting all other Elements except for the one you are editing lets you clearly hear that single Element for ease in editing. Note that when some Elements are muted, playing the keyboard in certain key areas or with certain velocities may result in no sound. 3 Display switch buttons buttons are used to switch among 8 Voice Edit The LAYER Page contains three pages. The them. LAYER Page 1 These buttons switch the display. 1 2 3 4 1 VOICE/ELEMENT Indicates the Voice/Element currently being edited. For example, the screen above shows that Element 1 of Accordion 1 is being edited. You can also call up another Element from another Voice and replace the currently selected Element with it. Pressing the VOICE or ELEMENT button in the display calls up the Voice or Element menu, from which you can select the desired Voice/ Element. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 141 2 LEVEL Determines the output level of the Element. Range: 0 – 127 3 NOTE LIMIT Determines the lowest and highest notes in the range for which the Element sounds. The setting of the HIGH slider cannot be set lower than that of the LOW slider. Some Elements are not affected by this parameter. Range: C-2 – G8 4 PAN Determines the position of the Element in the stereo image. Range: L64 – R63 LAYER Page 2 8 1 Voice Edit 1 2 3 4 5 6 NOTE SHIFT Determines the pitch settings in semitones. Range: -64 – +63 2 TUNE FINE Determines the fine tuning. Range: -64 – +63 3 ATTACK RATE Determines how quickly the Element will reach its maximum level after the key is played. Higher values produce a faster attack. Range: 0 – 127 4 RELEASE RATE Determines how much time it takes for the level to reach 0 after the key is released. Higher values make the time shorter. Range: 1 – 127 142 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 5 CUTOFF FREQ. Determines the cutoff frequency of the filter. Range: 9600 – 24000 cent 6 RESONANCE Determines the amount of resonance (harmonic emphasis) applied to the signal at the cutoff frequency. Some Elements are not affected by this parameter. Range: 16 – 140 Filter — Cutoff frequency and Resonance Filter modifies the tone by cutting the output of a specific frequency portion of the sound. This DDK-7 is equipped with a low pass filter, which passes only those signals below the cutoff frequency and cuts signals above the cutoff frequency. Cutoff Frequency Level Frequency These frequencies are passed by the filter. Level Resonance Cutoff Frequency Voice Edit 8 Frequency You can produce a relatively bright or darker sound by setting the cutoff frequency. Resonance is a parameter that boosts the level of the signal in the area of the cutoff frequency. By emphasizing the overtones in this area, this can produce a distinctive “peaky” tone. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 143 LAYER Page 3 1 1 2 3 4 5 LFO WAVE Determines the LFO waveform used to vary the sound. For details, see page 145. 2 LFO SPEED Determines the speed of the LFO waveform. Higher values make the speed faster. Range: 2 – 93 3 LFO PMD (Pitch Modulation Depth) Determines the amount by which the LFO waveform varies the pitch of the sound. Higher values result in a greater amount of pitch change. For the minimum setting, the pitch does not change. Range: 0 – 400 8 Voice Edit 4 LFO FMD (Frequency Modulation Depth) Determines the amount by which the LFO waveform varies the filter cutoff frequency. Higher values result in a greater amount of frequency change. For the minimum setting, the frequency does not change. Range: 0 – 4800 cent 5 LFO AMD (Amplitude Modulation Depth) Determines the amount by which the LFO waveform varies the amplitude of the sound. Higher values result in a greater amount of amplitude change. For the minimum setting, the amplitude does not change. Range: 0 – 128 Reference Page Vibrato (page 43) 144 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual When playing a User Voice you have created using the LFO parameters (above), set the Vibrato setting in the Voice Condition display to “Preset,” not “User.” If Vibrato is set to “User” and the Vibrato parameters (depth and/or speed) are set fairly high, you may not be able to hear the effect of the LFO. LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator) As its name suggests, the LFO creates waveforms of a low frequency. These waveforms can be used to vary the pitch, filter or amplitude to create effects such as vibrato, wah and tremolo. The following five waveforms are available. saw tri rnd sine squ 3 Saving the edited Voice Edited AWM Voices can be saved as User Voices (up to sixteen). Press the [SAVE] button at the top right of the display to call up the SAVE Page. 2 Select the User Voice number you wish to save to. The message appears to prompt confirmation of the operation. (Saving a new Voice automatically erases the Voice previously stored to the selected User number.) 3 (If necessary) Press the [RENAME] button to give a name to your original Voice. The method for editing the name is the same as the one for the song name in the M.D.R. section. (See page 113 for more information.) Up to sixteen characters can be entered. 8 Voice Edit 1 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 145 4 Press the [SAVE] button to save the Voice, or press [CANCEL] to abort the operation. This operation automatically erases any Voice that had been previously saved to the selected User Voice number. Be careful not to erase any important data. Always save your important data in advance to a USB flash memory or other external media using the M.D.R. function. After saving the Voice, be sure to quit the Voice Edit function (page 146) before turning the power off. Turning off the DDK-7 without quitting Voice Edit erases the User Voice you have edited. 4 Quitting Voice Edit You can quit the Voice Edit function from any of its display pages. 8 1 Press the [PROGRAM] button on the panel. If your original Voice has already been saved, the Voice Edit function quits automatically. If the edited Voice has not been saved, a message appears prompting confirmation of the operation. 2 Select [EXIT] to quit the Voice Edit function, or [CANCEL] to abort the operation and return to the previous display. Voice Edit When quitting Voice Edit, the square at the top left of the display turns light blue for a few seconds, indicating that the Voice you have created is currently being saved. Do not turn the power off while the Voice is being saved. 5 Recalling an Edited Voice Once your original AWM Voice has been saved, it can be selected from the User menu in each Voice section. Refer to chapter 2, “Selecting Voices with the Voice buttons” (page 26). 146 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 9 Rhythm Program The DDK-7 includes powerful rhythm programming functions: Rhythm Pattern Program and Rhythm Sequence Program. Rhythm Pattern Program allows you to record your own original rhythms and save them as user rhythms. Rhythm Sequence Program lets you connect the existing rhythms or your original rhythms to create complete rhythm tracks, which you can automatically play back during your performance. Moreover, Rhythm Sequence Program includes an automatic Registration Shift feature — called Registration Sequence. Contents 1 Outline of the Rhythm Programming Operation . 147 2 Rhythm Pattern Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 • Entering the Rhythm Pattern Program . . . . . . . . . . 148 • Basic settings for the Rhythm Pattern . . . . . . . . . . 151 • Entering Percussion Sounds to a Rhythm Pattern – Step Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 • Editing Entered Percussion Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 • Entering Percussion Sounds to a Rhythm Pattern – Real Time Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 • Creating Backing Patterns (Rhythmic Chord Function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 • Changing the Voices for Accompaniment Parts. . . 166 • Adjusting Volume and Panning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 • Effect Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 • Detailed settings for each percussion instrument . 171 • Saving Rhythm Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 • Quitting the Rhythm Pattern Program . . . . . . . . . . . 174 • Recalling User Rhythm Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 • Selecting Rhythm from an External Media . . . . . . . 175 • Percussion Kit List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 3 Rhythm Sequence Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 • Selecting a Sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 • Programming a Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 • Auditioning a Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 • Editing an Existing Rhythm Sequence . . . . . . . . . . 186 • Programming a Registration Sequence . . . . . . . . . 188 • Editing an Existing Registration Sequence. . . . . . . 189 • Quitting the Rhythm Sequence Program . . . . . . . . 190 • Playing Rhythm Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 • Playing All Sequences in Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 4 Saving Rhythm Pattern and Rhythm Sequence Data to external media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 1 Outline of the Rhythm Programming Operation Rhythm Pattern Program (pages 148 – 173) You can create your original rhythm patterns by entering percussion sounds or editing preset rhythm patterns. 9 Entering percussion sounds and/or editing them Rhythm Program Creating the backing (Rhythmic Chord) patterns and/or editing them Effect settings and detailed settings for each percussion Voice (Panning, Tuning, and so on) Saving your rhythm patterns as User rhythms Rhythm Sequence Program (pages 183 – 190) You can connect any of the rhythms together to make complete rhythm compositions. Moreover, you can also program Registration Shift events at any point in the composition so that the Registration Memory settings automatically change as the rhythm sequence plays back. Selecting the destination of the sequence Entering a rhythm pattern one by one Programming the Registration Sequence DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 147 2 Rhythm Pattern Program Rhythm Pattern Program lets you use any of the different instrument sounds (drum and percussion) assigned to each key on the Upper and Lower keyboards in creating your own rhythms. Up to 48 of your original rhythms can be saved as User Rhythms. Entering the Rhythm Pattern Program There are two ways to program a User pattern: copying a preset rhythm that is similar to the rhythm you want to create, and creating your own rhythm from scratch. To copy a preset rhythm: Copying a preset rhythm lets you make changes to an existing rhythm, saving you time if you want to program a rhythm that is similar to an existing preset pattern. To create your own rhythm from scratch: Load a blank pattern to the Rhythm Pattern Program, then create a completely new rhythm. 1 To copy a preset rhythm, select the rhythm you want to copy from the Rhythm Menu. NOTE Pressing the [PROGRAM] button while the rhythm is running automatically stops the rhythm. 9 Rhythm Program 148 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 2 Press the [PROGRAM] button to call up the Program Display. To copy a preset rhythm, press the [RHYTHM] button. To create your own rhythm from scratch, press the [NEW RHYTHM] button. To copy a preset rhythm To create your own rhythm 9 Rhythm Program 3 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 149 A Rhythm consists of 15 sections: Intro 1 – 3, Main A – D, Fill In A – D, Ending 1 – 3, and Break. In Rhythm Pattern Program, you can enter or edit percussion notes one by one, or assemble each part from other different rhythms to create your own new User Rhythm. Case 1: Creating your own rhythm by changing a preset rhythm Preset Rhythm User Rhythm Intro 1 Main A Fill In A 2 B B 3 C C D D Changing Intro 1 to Intro 1' Save as a User Rhythm Fill In A Intro 1' Main A 2 B B 3 C C D D Ending 1 Ending 1 Break 2 Break 2 3 3 All Rhythm sections, including any which have not been edited, are saved as one User Rhythm. Case 2: Creating your own rhythm by assembling parts from other different rhythms Preset Rhythm Fill In A Intro 1 Main A 2 B B 3 C C Ending 1 D D 2 Assemble some sections or parts User Rhythm Break 3 Save as a User Rhythm Preset Rhythm 9 Intro 1 Main A Fill In A 2 B B 3' C' C' D' D' Ending 1 Intro 1' Main A' Fill In A' 2 2' B' B' 3 3' C' C' Ending 1' D' D' 2' Break' Break' 3' Rhythm Program Case 3: Creating your own rhythm from scratch Blank Rhythm Intro 1 Main A Fill In A 2 B B 3 C C D D 3 Save as a User Rhythm User Rhythm Fill In A Intro 1 Main A 2 B B 3 C C D D Ending 1 Ending 1 2 Entering percussion sounds into each section Break 2 Break 3 These are blank sections (no percussion sounds); if you press ENDING [2] or [3] button, no sound is played. 150 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Basic settings for the Rhythm Pattern In the SETTING Page of the display, set the conditions of the rhythm, such as time signature, measure length, and so on. You can also customize the part settings in this SETTING Page — deleting any part or copying a part from another rhythm to the currently selected rhythm. 1 Press the [SETTING] button in the display to call up the SETTING Page. 2 Determines the time signature used for the rhythm. You can select the time signature with the BEAT buttons. Rhythm Program 9 If you start the Rhythm Pattern Program from a preset rhythm, pressing a BEAT button that is not the same as the currently selected rhythm calls up the following message. Selecting [CLEAR] deletes all data in the rhythm and changes the time signature. Select [CANCEL] to abort the operation. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 151 3 Select a section to which you want to enter or edit the rhythm pattern. Pressing the SECTION button on the display calls up the Section Select pop-up menu. After selecting the desired section, the pop-up menu automatically closes. You can play the selected section by pressing the Rhythm [START] button on the panel. You can also change the section while the rhythm is playing. For details on muting the accompaniment part, refer to page 167. 4 Sets the measure length of the rhythm pattern. Pressing the MEASURE button on the display calls up the Measure Select popup menu. Select the desired measure in the pop-up menu. If you select Break or Fill In as the section, the measure cannot be changed. 5 (If necessary) Set the Metronome, Part Assemble, and Part Clear parameters. 9 Rhythm Program 2 3 1 Reference Pages Step Write and Real Time Write (page 154) Entering Percussion Sounds to a Rhythm Pattern – Real Time Write (page 162) 152 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 1 METRONOME Turns the metronome click on or off. When set to ON, the metronome sounds on each beat of the measure (for example, three times per measure in 3/4 time) to serve as a rhythmic guide when programming patterns. Set to On here with Real Time Write. 2 ASSEMBLE Copies the part from another rhythm to the currently selected rhythm. You can assemble various sections from multiple rhythms to create your original rhythm. Pressing the [ASSEMBLE] button calls up the following display. Select copy source (Rhythm, Section, and Part) Select the part for the copy destination Press here to execute the copy Select the copy source: Rhythm, Section and Part. Then select the destination. You can copy only one part, or all parts of a rhythm. After setting the source and destination, press [EXECUTE]. Copy is executed and returning to the previous display. 3 CLEAR PART Clears a specific part or parts from the currently selected rhythm. Pressing this button calls up the following display. Select the part you want to delete from the displayed parts. You cannot select a part that contains no data (the button is grayed out). If you select [ALL] here, the percussion and all accompaniment parts are cleared. When selecting the desired part, a display prompting confirmation of the operation appears. Select [CLEAR] to execute the operation, or select [CANCEL] to abort the operation. Rhythm Program 9 Reference Page Accompaniment (page 70) NOTE If you select BASS here, the bass phrase in the A.B.C. will be cleared. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 153 Step Write and Real Time Write There are two different methods you can use to program rhythms: Step Write and Real Time Write. Step Write allows you to enter percussion sounds as individual note values. As a method, it is very similar to writing down the notes on a sheet of music paper; each note is entered one at a time, and though you can hear each individual note entered, you cannot actually hear the pattern playing as you create it. Step Write is good for precision and for entering percussion sounds whose note placement and rhythmic value has been determined, such as a bass drum that plays every beat in a measure. Real Time Write on the other hand, is similar to using a multi-track tape recorder; you can hear previously recorded parts of the pattern as you record new parts on top. Real Time Write is best for capturing the “feel” of a rhythm, because it allows you to actually play the pattern as you are creating it. Each method has its own advantages and uses. Which method you use depends partly on the type of rhythm you intend to create and partly on your own personal preference. You can switch between the two methods in editing to create a single rhythm by the use of both methods. This would come handy, for example, in programming the basic beats of a rhythm with Step Write, then using Real Time Write to add percussion accents and embellishments. Which mode of the operation is selected depends on the play status of the rhythm. If the rhythm is stopped, Step Write is automatically selected. If the rhythm is playing, Real Time Write is selected. See the instructions below for Step Write, and page 162 for Real Time Write. Entering Percussion Sounds to a Rhythm Pattern – Step Write NOTE 9 Rhythm Program The volume of the percussion and accompaniment sound during use of Rhythm Pattern Program can be controlled with the VOLUME button of the RHYTHM section. When you quit Rhythm Pattern Program, the VOLUME of the RHYTHM section will return to the previous selected level. 154 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual You can enter percussion sounds in the INPUT Page of the display. Before entering percussion sounds, turn off the Upper and Lower keyboard Voices by setting each Voice’s volume to MIN. 1 Press the [INPUT] button at the top of the display to call up the INPUT Page. 2 Select the part, MAIN DRUM or ADD DRUM, to which you want to enter the percussion. In general, main (or basic) drum/percussion instruments (such as Bass Drum, Snare Drum, and so on) are entered in Main Drum part and others (such as Tambourine, Triangle) are entered in Add Drum part. 3 Select the desired Drum Kit. You can select a kit from 20 Drum kits and 5 SFX kits. For details on each kit, see page 176. Pressing the button indicating the currently selected kit calls up the kit Select the pop-up menu, then select the desired kit from the pop-up menu. The selected kit is called up on the Upper and Lower keyboards. Drum kit SFX kit You can select only one kit for each part (Main Drum or Add Drum). When you want to create a rhythm pattern including two different drum kits, select one kit for Main Drum and another for Add Drum. Select the percussion sound you wish to enter by pressing the key on the Upper or Lower keyboard that corresponds to the sound. The selected instrument’s name appears on the display. Selected key 5 Instrument name Set the appropriate Quantize value. For details on Quantize, refer to page 161. 9 Rhythm Program 4 NOTE The Quantize setting can be changed in the middle of Step Write. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 155 6 Set the Gate Time. (This is optional, and only necessary when you want to enter a sustaining sound, such as a whistle.) For a list of instruments that require a Gate Time setting, refer to the Percussion Kit List on page 176. For details on Gate Time, refer to page 165. 7 Use the ACCENT buttons to enter the sound to the selected point. Press each ACCENT button to actually enter the percussion sounds. You can change the rhythm clock to which the percussion sound is entered by pressing the QUANTIZE [E][F] buttons. 1 2 1 Reference Page Basic settings for the Rhythm Pattern (page 151) 9 3 Rhythm Clock box Displays the current position in the pattern according to measure, beat, and number of clicks. A click is the smallest division of a pattern, and one beat is made up of 480 clicks. The rhythm clock advances up to the measures set in the SETTING Page and loops back to the beginning of the rhythm (01:01:000). 2 ACCENT buttons Rhythm Program Records the instrument and determines its volume or Accent level. Press one of the ACCENT buttons you wish to set (“ppp” is softer and “fff ” is louder; “REST” is no sound). The instrument is automatically inserted at the Accent level to the selected position in the pattern. Selection of an Accent level automatically advances the rhythm clock by one step, according to the current Quantize resolution value. 3 QUANTIZE [E][F] controls Each press of the buttons advances or reverses the rhythm clock by one step. The size of a single step is determined by the Quantize value. 8 156 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Repeat steps #4 through #7 above to layer each instrument and complete your own rhythm. Editing Entered Percussion Notes You can change the accent level, position, or gate time of the entered sound, or delete the entered sound. To change the accent level of an entered note: 1 Select the desired note for changing the accent level. 1 1 1 2 23 4 5 3 NEXT INSTRUMENT Selects the entered instruments one by one, from left key to right. 2 NOTE [E][F] controls Selects the previous/next position’s note of the currently selected instrument. In the above notes for example, you can select notes 1, 3 and 4 one by one. Rests (2 and 5) are ignored. 3 9 QUANTIZE [E][F] controls Rhythm Program Advances or reverses the rhythm clock by one step. The size of a single step is determined by the Quantize value. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 157 2 Change the accent level by using the ACCENT buttons or Accent box. The Accent box allows for finer changes. 1 2 1 Accent box Touch on the box to enable the Accent box. Turning the Data Control dial changes the accent level over a range of 0 – 127. The minimum setting results in no sound. 2 ACCENT buttons Determines the coarse accent level. Eight accent levels (from “ppp” to “fff ”) are available. Press the desired Accent button to change the currently selected note to the selected level. To move an entered note: 9 Rhythm Program 158 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 1 Select the note you want to move (as in Step 1 on page 157). 2 Press the Rhythm Clock box to enable the box. 3 Turn the Data Control dial to change the position by one clock. To change the length of an entered note: The length of sustaining sounds such as Snare Roll and Whistle can be changed by adjusting the Gate Time. See page 166 for more information. To erase an entered note: 1 Select the note you want to erase (as in Step 1 on page 157). 2 Press the [REST] button in the ACCENT section of the display. The selected note is deleted and replaced with a rest. You can also erase all notes of a single instrument, or all notes entered. To erase one instrument: Selected key 2 9 Rhythm Program 1 Select the key to which the instrument that you want to erase is assigned. The key name you have selected and its instrument name are displayed. Instrument name Press [CLEAR] in the display. The following display appears, prompting confirmation of the operation. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 159 3 Select [CLEAR] to erase the selected instrument. A bell sound indicates that the instrument has been erased. The following method can also be used to erase one instrument. While holding down the [CLEAR] button, press the key on the keyboard corresponding to the instrument you wish to erase. A bell sound indicates that the instrument has been erased. To erase all instruments: 9 1 Press [CLEAR] in the display. The following display appears, prompting confirmation of the operation. 2 Select [CLEAR ALL] to erase all instruments. All instruments are instantly erased. Rhythm Program When you want to replace the instrument you have already entered with another instrument, it’s not necessary to delete and re-enter. You can quickly replace the sound with the following procedure. To replace the instrument: Before the operation, stop the rhythm. 1 Select the key to which the instrument you want to replace is assigned. The key name you have selected and its instrument name are displayed. Selected key 2 160 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Instrument name Simultaneously hold down the [CHANGE] button in the display and press the key on the Upper or Lower keyboard that corresponds to the instrument you want to use. The instrument is instantly erased and replaced with the newly selected one. About Quantize The Quantize function is a process of rounding off timing or duration values, so that each note plays with precise timing. You can select nine types of Quantize value. With this button, change the displayed Quantize buttons 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 5 With Step Write It allows you to automatically correct the length (duration) and timing of each note you enter. Steps Depending on the Quantize Values 1 2 240 3 120 4 60 6 320 7 160 8 9 80 9 Clock 0 120 240 360 Rhythm Program 40 480 (1 beat) Setting Quantize to FREE (5) results in the finest, least amount of quantization (1/480 beat). With Real Time Write It allows you to automatically correct the timing of the notes you play, according to the specified Quantize resolution. No correction occurs when you select FREE. Generally, you should set Quantize to be the same as the shortest note you intend to play. Original data (you play) Quarter note length After applying a “ ” quantize value to the original data DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 161 Entering Percussion Sounds to a Rhythm Pattern – Real Time Write While you listen to the entered rhythm or metronome click, play the Upper/Lower keyboards to enter the desired percussion sounds. 1 Select the desired part to which the percussion sounds are entered, and the desired drum kit, by following Steps 1 – 3 on page 154. 2 Set the appropriate Quantize value. The positions at which the sounds are input will be corrected according to the predetermined Quantize value in the Real Time Write operation. For details, refer to page 161. 3 Press the rhythm [START] button in the panel. The rhythm (or Metronome) starts playing, enabling the Real Time Write operation. 4 While the rhythm is running, play the percussion sounds from the Upper and/or Lower keyboards. If you have started the Rhythm Pattern Program by copying a preset rhythm, you can listen the selected rhythm as you play the sound. If you have started from scratch, set the Metronome to “on” in the SETTING Page and listen to the metronome click. The pattern will automatically repeat (or “loop”) for a certain number of measures as set in the SETTING Page. 5 Repeat steps #2 through #4 above to layer each instrument and complete your own rhythm. 9 Rhythm Program Reference Page Metronome (page 152) 162 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual You can erase an instrument while rhythm is played. To erase an instrument/key assignment: While holding down the [CLEAR] button, press the key on the keyboard corresponding to the instrument you wish to erase. All instances of the selected instrument will be erased from the pattern. When you want to erase all instruments, or edit entered percussion notes, you need to stop the rhythm then edit. See page 157, “Editing Entered Percussion Notes.” Creating Backing Patterns (Rhythmic Chord Function) The Rhythm Pattern Program allows you to use one of the DDK-7’s Accompaniment patterns with your original rhythm. You can select and save the Accompaniment pattern that best matches the rhythm that you have created. Moreover, Rhythm Pattern Program features a Rhythmic Chord function that lets you add your own backing patterns to the rhythms you create. To select an appropriate Accompaniment pattern for your newly created rhythm: 1 Press the [SETTING] button at the top of the display to call up the SETTING Page. 2 3 Press the [ASSEMBLE] button. A pop-up menu appears, letting you select the copy source and destination part. 4 Using the COPY TO [PART] button, select the desired accompaniment part (CHORD 1 or CHORD 2) to be used for the Rhythmic Chord pattern. 5 Using the COPY FROM [PART] button, select the accompaniment part you want to copy. Reference Page Basic settings for the Rhythm Pattern (page 151) 9 Rhythm Program Using the COPY FROM [RHYTHM] and [SECTION] buttons, select the rhythm and the section which has the accompaniment you wish to use. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 163 6 Press the [EXECUTE] button to execute the copy. The desired accompaniment part (Rhythmic Chord pattern) has been copied. To create your own backing patterns with the Rhythmic Chord function: The Rhythmic Chord pattern can be entered by the same methods as the rhythm: Step Write and/or Real Time Write. 1 Press the [INPUT] button at the top of the display to call up the INPUT Page. 2 Select the part, CHORD 1 or CHORD 2, which you want to create for the Rhythmic Chord pattern. If the part you have select contains a preset accompaniment pattern, a message appears prompting you to confirm whether you want to clear the existing data or not. To create your own Rhythmic Chord pattern, select [CLEAR]. 9 NOTE Rhythm Program The Voice menu that appears here is not the same as the one for the Voice Sections. See the Rhythm Program Voice List on page 179. 3 Select the desired Voice. Pressing the button showing the Voice name calls up the relevant Voice Menu. Select the desired Voice category with the instrument icon buttons, then select the desired Voice from the Voice Menu. The selected Voice is called up for both the Upper and Lower keyboards. Voices can also be changed even after entering the Rhythmic Chord pattern. You can select only one Voice for one part (Chord 1 or Chord 2). When you want to create a Rhythmic Chord pattern including two different Voices, select one Voice for Chord 1 and another for Chord 2. 164 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 4 Set the appropriate Quantize value. For details on the Quantize function, refer to page 161. 5 Set the Gate Time. You can adjust the Gate Time setting by using GATE TIME in the display, or Data Control dial. buttons DATA CONTROL Gate time determines the actual length of time a note sounds. For example, a quarter note is sometimes played as tenuto (long length) and sometimes played as staccato (short length). Since 1 beat is made up of 480 clocks, a quarter note played tenuto may have a gate time between 450 – 470, and a staccato quarter note may be about 240. Enter the Rhythmic Chord pattern. The methods for entering the Rhythmic Chord pattern are the same as those for entering the rhythm pattern. Any key you press sounds a C major triad chord (C, E, and G). For information on Step Write, see page 156; for information on Real Time Write, see page 162. 9 Rhythm Program 6 You can also edit the entered Rhythmic Chord pattern using the same method as in “Editing Entered Percussion Notes” (page 157). To change the gate time of the notes of the Rhythmic Chord pattern, follow the instructions below. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 165 To change the Gate Time: 1 Select the note for which you want to change the gate time (see Step 1 on page 157). 2 Press the Gate Time box to enable the box. 3 Turn the Data Control dial to change the Gate Time. Changing the Voices for Accompaniment Parts In Rhythm Pattern Program, you can create your original drum patterns using Main Drum and Add Drum, and original backing patterns using Chord 1 and Chord 2. Moreover, you can change the Voices for all accompaniment parts, including Pad, Phrase 1 and Phrase 2. Voices can be changed in the VOICE/EFFECT Page. 9 Rhythm Program 166 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 1 Press the [VOICE/EFFECT] button at the top of the display to call up the VOICE/EFFECT Page. 2 Press the [VOICE] button in the display. The following display will appear. 3 Select the desired part for which you wish to change the Voice. The Voice menu appears. 4 Select the desired Voice, and the Voice menu automatically closes. After selecting the desired Voice, customize the accompaniment to your personal preference by adjusting the volume and pan, and setting the desired effects below. NOTE The Voice menu that appears here is not the same as the one for the Voice Sections. See the Rhythm Program Voice List on page 179. Adjusting Volume and Panning Volume and Pan are set in VOICE/EFFECT Page. VOLUME Display 9 Rhythm Program 1 2 1 ON/OFF Determines the on/off status of each accompaniment part. When this is set to OFF, the part is muted. 2 Volume sliders Determines the volume of each accompaniment part. Range: 0 – 127 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 167 PAN Display Determines the position of each accompaniment part in the stereo image. Range: L64 – R63 Effect Settings You can set Reverb, Chorus, and Variation effects as desired for your original rhythm. Reverb adds a warm ambience to the sound, simulating the complex reflections of actual performance spaces, such as a concert hall or a small club. Chorus provides a wide variety of sound transformations and enhancements. Variation includes many kinds of special effects for changing the sound, both subtly and radically. These effects are set in the VOICE/EFFECT Page. REVERB Display 9 Rhythm Program Determines the amount of reverb applied to each accompaniment part. Range: 0 – 127 168 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual CHORUS Display 1 2 1 CHORUS TYPE Determines the type of the chorus effect. Pressing the CHORUS TYPE button calls up the chorus type list. Select the desired chorus type, and the list automatically closes. 2 Chorus sliders 9 Rhythm Program Determines the amount of chorus effect applied to each accompaniment part. Range: 0 – 127 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 169 VARIATION Display 1 2 3 Reference Page Effect List (page 52) 1 VARIATION (Variation Effect Category) Selects the effect category of the variation effect. Pressing the VARIATION button calls up the effect category list. Select the desired effect category, and the list automatically closes. After changing the category, the variation type below automatically changes corresponding to the selected category. 9 2 TYPE (Variation Type) Rhythm Program Determines the type of the variation effect. Pressing the TYPE button calls up the effect type list. LCD Select the desired type, and the list automatically closes. 3 Variation sliders Determines the amount of Variation effect applied to each accompaniment part. Range: 0 – 127 170 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Detailed settings for each percussion instrument You can independently adjust the settings of pan, pitch, reverb and volume for each instrument. 1 Press the [DRUM SETUP] button at the top of the display to call up the DRUM SETUP Page. 2 Select the desired part, Main Drum or Add Drum. 3 Press the appropriate key (the key to which the instrument to be changed is assigned). The selected instrument’s name is shown on the display and you can change its settings. Rhythm Program 9 4 Adjust the parameters: Pan, Volume, Reverb and Pitch. 1 2 3 4 5 6 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 171 1 Reference Page Percussion Kit List (page 176) Percussion Kit Name Indicates the currently selected kit. Pressing this button calls up the Percussion Kit list, letting you select the desired kit. When you change the kit, the instruments you have already entered are replaced with the instruments of the newly selected kit. 2 PAN Determines the position of the currently selected instrument in the stereo image. Range: L63 – R63 3 VOLUME Determines the volume of the currently selected instrument. Range: 0 – 127 4 REVERB Determines the amount of reverb applied to the currently selected instrument. Range: 0 – 127 5 PITCH COARSE Determines the pitch of the currently selected instrument, adjustable in semitone (100-cent) steps. Range: -64 – +63 6 PITCH FINE Determines the pitch of the currently selected instrument, adjustable in 1-cent steps, allowing more detailed tuning of the instrument than in PITCH COARSE ( 5) above. Range: -64 – +63 Saving Rhythm Patterns You can save your newly created rhythm pattern as a User Rhythm, up to a maximum of 48 patterns. 9 Rhythm Program 1 If necessary, confirm the contents of the rhythm you want to save. For details, see page 173. 2 Press the [SAVE] button at the top right of the display to call up the SAVE Page. If the rhythm is playing, it will automatically be stopped. 3 Select the User Rhythm number to which you wish to save. The following display appears, prompting confirmation of the operation. LCD 172 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 4 Press the [SAVE] button to save the pattern, or press [CANCEL] to abort the operation. Remaining Memory (amount of memory available for storing rhythms) is shown on the display as a percentage. Remaining Memory When the pattern cannot be saved because of lack of available memory space, a “Data full” message appears. Return to the previous page by pressing [OK] in this case. You should periodically save your rhythm as you are creating it and check the amount of remaining memory. If the rhythm currently being edited cannot be saved because of a lack of memory space, erase some of the less necessary percussion sounds with the [CLEAR] button in the INPUT Page, and try saving the pattern again. After saving the Rhythm, be sure to quit Rhythm Pattern Program (page 174) before turning the power off. Turning off the DDK-7 without quitting Rhythm Pattern Program erases the User Rhythm you have created. Confirming rhythm patterns before saving 9 Rhythm Program The rhythm pattern you have created will be saved with 15 sections collectively into one rhythm. Before saving, we recommend that you confirm the contents of each section. Example: When saving the Main A and Main B sections you have created into one user rhythm First select “Main A” by using the [SECTION] button on the SETTING Page, then press the [START] button on the panel. This lets you hear the Main A pattern you have created. Confirm that the rhythm pattern is what you want to save as Main A. Next, select “Main B” by using the [SECTION] button, then play it back and confirm that this is what you want to save as Main B. If the Main A and/or Main B patterns contain undesired data or no data, create the desired data by using the Assemble function (page 153). After confirming the desired section (Main A and Main B here), we recommend that you confirm that all other sections contain no data. If unnecessary data is contained in some sections which you don’t want to save, delete that unnecessary data. This can reduce the data size of the user rhythm. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 173 Quitting the Rhythm Pattern Program You can quit the Rhythm Pattern Program from any of its display pages. 1 Press the [PROGRAM] button. If a rhythm is playing, it will automatically be stopped. If you leave Rhythm Pattern Program without having edited any patterns, this simply quits the Rhythm Pattern Program. If you have not saved the edited pattern, a message appears, prompting confirmation of the operation. 2 Select [EXIT] to leave Rhythm Pattern Program, or [CANCEL] to abort the operation and return to the previous display. When you leave the Rhythm Pattern Program, the square at the top left in the display turns light blue for a few seconds, indicating that data is currently being saved. Do not turn the power off while the data is being saved. Recalling User Rhythm Patterns The User rhythms you have created in the Rhythm Pattern Program can be selected and played from the User menu. Refer to Chapter 5, “Selecting rhythms with the Rhythm button” (page 60). Select “USER” category here. 9 Rhythm Program Select the User Rhythm number. 174 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Selecting Rhythm from an External Media You can load rhythms from a USB flash memory, or other external media and edit and save them as User Rhythms. Data that can be loaded includes not only that of the DDK-7, but also all Style File Format files. 1 2 Insert the media which contains the desired pattern into the USB TO DEVICE terminal. 3 Press [FILE] at the top right in the display. If you open the FILE Page while the rhythm is playing, the rhythm will automatically be stopped. 4 Press the [SELECT] button to select the desired pattern file. The method for selecting a file is the same as that in the M.D.R. section. See page 104 for more information. 5 Press [EXECUTE] or press the highlighted, selected button again to load the pattern. To edit the loaded pattern, go to the INPUT Page (page 157), then save your created pattern(s) as a User Rhythm (page 172). Press the [PROGRAM] button on the panel. Rhythm Program 9 About file types that can be loaded to the DDK-7 This DDK-7 is compatible with Style File Format data. The Style File Format (SFF) is Yamaha’s original style data format, which uses a unique conversion system to provide high-quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord types. In this format, each rhythm pattern (called a “style”) is made up of fifteen sections (Intro 1 – 3, Main A – D, Fill In A – D, Break, Ending 1 – 3) as rhythm pattern variations. Each of these fifteen sections in turn has eight different parts, made up of MIDI sequence data. You can load any patterns (styles) which have been created by an SFF-compatible instrument. Instruments compatible with SFF have the Style File Logo on the panel. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 175 Percussion Kit List Standard Kit 1 Live!Std Kit Live!Std+P Kit C-1 C-1 D-1 D-1 E-1 F-1 G-1 A-1 F-1 G-1 A-1 B-1 C0 C0 D0 D0 E0 F0 G0 Lower Keyboard A0 F0 G0 A0 B0 C1 C1 D1 D1 E1 F1 G1 A1 F1 G1 A1 B1 C2 C2 D2 D2 E2 F2 G2 9 A2 F2 G2 A2 B2 Rhythm Program C3 C3 D3 D3 E3 F3 G3 A3 F3 G3 A3 B3 Upper Keyboard C4 C4 D4 D4 E4 F4 G4 A4 F4 G4 A4 B4 C5 C5 D5 D5 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl* Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl* Snare Roll* Castanet Snare Soft Sticks Kick Soft Open Rim Shot Kick Tight Kick Side Stick Snare Hand Clap Snare Tight Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle L* Guiro Short Guiro Long* Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Standard Kit 2 Live!Funk Kit Live!Funk+P Kit Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl* Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl* Snare Roll* Castanet Snare Soft 2 Sticks Kick Soft Open Rim Shot H Kick Tight Kick Short Side Stick Light Snare Short Hand Clap Snare Tight H Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle L* Guiro Short Guiro Long* Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Hit Kit Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl* Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl* Snare Roll* Castanet Snare Electro Sticks Kick Tight L Snare Pitched Kick Wet Kick Tight H Stick Ambient Snare Ambient Hand Clap Snare Tight 2 Hybrid Tom 1 Hi-Hat Closed 2 Hybrid Tom 2 Hi-Hat Pedal 2 Hybrid Tom 3 Hi-Hat Open 2 Hybrid Tom 4 Hybrid Tom 5 Crash Cymbal 1 Hybrid Tom 6 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Light Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle L* Guiro Short Guiro Long* Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Room Kit Rock Kit Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl* Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl* Snare Roll* Castanet Snare Soft Sticks Kick Soft Open Rim Shot Kick Tight Kick Side Stick Snare Snappy Hand Clap Snare Tight Snap Tom Room 1 Hi-Hat Closed Tom Room 2 Hi-Hat Pedal Tom Room 3 Hi-Hat Open Tom Room 4 Tom Room 5 Crash Cymbal 1 Tom Room 6 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle L* Guiro Short Guiro Long* Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl* Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl* Snare Roll* Castanet Snare Noisy Sticks Kick Soft Open Rim Shot Kick 2 Kick Gate Side Stick Snare Rock Hand Clap Snare Rock Tight Tom Rock 1 Hi-Hat Closed Tom Rock 2 Hi-Hat Pedal Tom Rock 3 Hi-Hat Open Tom Rock 4 Tom Rock 5 Crash Cymbal 1 Tom Rock 6 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle L* Guiro Short Guiro Long* Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Electro Kit Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl* Brush Slap Reverse Cymbal* Snare Roll* Hi Q 2 Snare Snap Elec Sticks Kick 3 Open Rim Shot Kick Gate Kick Gate Heavy Side Stick Snare Noisy 2 Hand Clap Snare Noisy 3 Tom Electro 1 Hi-Hat Closed Tom Electro 2 Hi-Hat Pedal Tom Electro 3 Hi-Hat Open Tom Electro 4 Tom Electro 5 Crash Cymbal 1 Tom Electro 6 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle L* Guiro Short Guiro Long* Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Scratch H 2 Scratch L 2 Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree E5 F5 F5 G5 *: Indicates an instrument which requires the Gate Time setting. 176 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual C-1 C-1 D-1 D-1 E-1 F-1 G-1 A-1 F-1 G-1 A-1 B-1 C0 C0 D0 D0 E0 F0 G0 Lower Keyboard A0 F0 G0 A0 B0 C1 C1 D1 D1 E1 F1 G1 A1 F1 G1 A1 B1 C2 C2 D2 D2 E2 F2 G2 A2 F2 G2 A2 B2 C3 C3 D3 D3 E3 F3 G3 A3 F3 G3 A3 B3 Upper Keyboard C4 C4 D4 D4 E4 F4 G4 A4 F4 G4 A4 B4 C5 C5 D5 D5 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl* Brush Slap Reverse Cymbal* Snare Roll* Hi Q 2 Snare Noisy 4 Sticks Kick 3 Open Rim Shot Kick Anlg Short Kick Analog Side Stick Anlg Snare Analog Hand Clap Snare Analog 2 Tom Analog 1 Hat Close Analog Tom Analog 2 Hat Close Anlg 2 Tom Analog 3 Hat Open Analog Tom Analog 4 Tom Analog 5 Crash Analog Tom Analog 6 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Analog Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga Analog H Conga Analog M Conga Analog L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas 2 Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle L* Guiro Short Guiro Long* Claves 2 Wood Block H Wood Block L Scratch H 2 Scratch L 2 Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Dance Kit Jazz Kit Brush Kit Kick Dance 1 Kick Dance 2 Hi Q Whip Slap* Scratch Dance 1* Scratch Dance 2* Finger Snap Click Noise Dance Perc 1 Reverse Dance 1 Dance Perc 2 Hi Q Dance 1 Snare Analog 3 Vinyl Noise* Snare Analog 4 Reverse Cymbal* Reverse Dance 2* Hi Q 2 Snare Techno Snare Dance 1 Kick Techno Q Rim Gate Kick Techno L Kick Techno Side Stick Anlg Snare Clap Dance Clap Snare Dry Tom Dance 1 Hi-Hat Closed 3 Tom Dance 2 Hat Close Anlg 3 Tom Dance 3 Hi-Hat Open 3 Tom Dance 4 Tom Dance 5 Crash Analog Tom Dance 6 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Anlg Splash Cymbal Cowbell Dance Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Analog Ride Analog Bongo Analog H Bongo Analog L Conga Analog H Conga Analog M Conga Analog L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas 2 Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle L* Guiro Short Guiro Long* Claves 2 Dance Perc 3 Dance Perc 4* Dance Breath 1 Dance Breath 2* Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl* Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl* Snare Roll* Castanet Snare Jazz H Sticks Kick Soft Open Rim Shot Kick Tight Kick Jazz Side Stick Light Snare Jazz L Hand Clap Snare Jazz M Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle L* Guiro Short Guiro Long* Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl* Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl* Snare Roll* Castanet Brush Slap 2 Sticks Kick Soft Open Rim Shot Kick Tight Kick Jazz Side Stick Light Brush Slap 3 Hand Clap Brush Tap 2 Tom Brush 1 Hi-Hat Closed Tom Brush 2 Hi-Hat Pedal Tom Brush 3 Hi-Hat Open Tom Brush 4 Tom Brush 5 Crash Cymbal 1 Tom Brush 6 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle L* Guiro Short Guiro Long* Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Symphony Kit Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl* Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl* Snare Roll* Castanet Snare Soft Sticks Kick Soft 2 Open Rim Shot Gran Cassa Gran Cassa Mute Side Stick Band Snare Hand Clap Band Snare 2 Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Hand Cymbal High Tom Hand Cymbal S Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Hand Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Hand Cymbal 2 S Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle L* Guiro Short Guiro Long* Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Multi Kit 1 Scratch Concert BD Noise Percussion Bass Drum March Analog BD Short Synth Tom 3 Analog BD Long Synth Tom 2 Synth Bass Drum Synth Tom 1 Bass Drum Attack Bass Drum Heavy Tom 4 Bass Drum Light Tom 3 Orch Snare Drum Snare Drum Roll* Tom 2 SD Brush Roll Tom 1 SD Brush Shot 2 Tom Brush Shot 4 SD Brush Shot 1 Snare Drum Heavy Tom Brush Shot 3 Snare Drum Light Tom Brush Shot 2 SD Accent 2 SD Accent 1 Tom Brush Shot 1 SD Reverb 2 Snare Drum Rim 2 SD Reverb 1 Snare Drum Rim 1 Synth Snare Drum Analog SD Triangle Mute Tambourine Triangle Open Castanet Claves Cabasa Finger Snap 9 Hand Claps Crash Cymbal 2 Hi-Hat Close Crash Cymbal 1 Hi-Hat Open Crash Cym Mute Ride Cymbal 2 Hi-Hat Pedal 2 Ride Cymbal 1 Hi-Hat Pedal 1 Ride Cymbal Cup Rhythm Program Analog Kit Cym Brush Shot Cymbal March Analog HH Close Orch Cymbal Roll Analog HH Open Orchestra Cymbal Orch Cymbal Mute Tam-Tam E5 F5 F5 G5 *: Indicates an instrument which requires the Gate Time setting. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 177 Multi Kit 2 C-1 C-1 D-1 D-1 E-1 F-1 G-1 A-1 F-1 G-1 A-1 B-1 C0 C0 D0 D0 E0 F0 G0 Lower Keyboard A0 F0 G0 A0 B0 C1 C1 D1 D1 E1 F1 G1 A1 F1 G1 A1 B1 C2 C2 D2 D2 E2 F2 G2 A2 9 F2 G2 A2 B2 Rhythm Program C3 C3 D3 D3 E3 F3 G3 A3 F3 G3 A3 B3 Upper Keyboard C4 C4 D4 D4 E4 F4 G4 A4 F4 G4 A4 B4 C5 C5 D5 D5 Maracas High Surdo Mute Maracas Low Surdo Muff Surdo Rim Cuica High Surdo Open Cuica Middle Tamborim Mute Cuica Low Tamborim Open Pandeiro Bongo High Conga Slide Bongo Low Conga Slap Conga Muff Bongo Mute Conga High Bongo Slap Conga Low Timbale 1 High Timbale 1 Low Timbale 2 High Timbale 2 Low Timbale 3 High Woodblock High Timbale 3 Low Woodblock Mid Timbale 4 High Woodblock Low Timbale 4 Low Vibraslap Triangle Mute Tambourine Triangle Open Castanet Claves Cabasa Finger Snap Hand Claps Wind Bell Down Agogo High Wind Bell Up Agogo Low Bells Cowbell 4 Shaker Cowbell 3 Guiro Short Cowbell 2 Guiro Long Cowbell 1 Taiko 2 Ohdaiko 2 Taiko 1 Ohdaiko 1 Ohtsuzumi 2 Ohtsuzumi 1 Kakegoe 3 Kotsuzumi 4 Kakegoe 2 Kotsuzumi 3 Kakegoe 1 Kotsuzumi 2 Kotsuzumi 1 Live!Studio Kit Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl* Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl* Snare Roll* Castanet Snare Studio L Sticks Kick Ambience H Open Rim Shot Kick Ambience L Kick Studio Side Stick Snare Studio M Hand Clap Snare Studio L Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle L* Guiro Short Guiro Long* Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree SFX Kit 1 SFX Kit 2 Arabic Kit Cuban Kit Pop Latin Kit Hand Clap Cutting Noise 1* Cutting Noise 2* String Slap* Flute Key Click* Shower* Thunder* Wind* Stream* Bubble* Feed* Dog* Horse* Bird Tweet* Phone Call* Door Squeak* Door Slam* Scratch Cut* Scratch H 3* Wind Chime* Telephone Ring* CarEngnIgnition* Car Tires Squeal* Car Passing* Car Crash* Siren* Train* Jet Plane* Starship* Burst* Roller Coaster* Submarine* Laugh* Scream* Punch* Heart Beat* Foot Steps* Machine Gun* Laser Gun* Explosion* Firework* Nakarazan Dom Cabasa Nakarazan Edge Hager Dom Hager Edge Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Zagrouda H Zagrouda L* Kick Soft Side Stick Snare Soft Arabic Hand Clap Snare Drum Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 2 Duhulla Dom Tambourine Duhulla Tak Cowbell Duhulla Sak Claves Doff Dom Katem Dom Katem Tak Katem Sak Katem Tak Doff Tak Tabla Dom Tabla Tak 1 Tabla Tik Tabla Tak 2 Tabla Sak Tabla Roll Edge* Tabla Flam Sagat 1 Tabel Dom Sagat 3 Tabel Tak Sagat 2 Rik Dom Rik Tak 2 Rik Finger 1 Rik Tak 1 Rik Finger 2 Rik BrassTremolo* Rik Sak Rik Tik Conga H Tip Conga H Heel Conga H Open Conga H Mute Conga H SlapOpen Conga H Slap Conga H SlapMute Conga L Tip Conga L Heel Conga L Open Conga L Mute Conga L SlapOpen Conga L Slap Conga L Slide* Bongo H Open 1 f Bongo H Open 3 f Bongo H Rim Bongo H Tip Bongo H Heel Bongo H Slap Bongo L Open 1 f Bongo L Open 3 f Bongo L Rim Bongo L Tip Bongo L Heel Bongo L Slap Timbale L Open Conga H Tip Conga H Heel Conga H Open Conga H Mute Conga H SlapOpen Conga H Slap Conga H SlapMute Conga L Tip Conga L Heel Conga L Open Conga L Mute Conga L SlapOpen Conga L Slap Conga L Slide* Bongo H Open 1 f Bongo H Open 3 f Bongo H Rim Bongo H Tip Bongo H Heel Bongo H Slap Bongo L Open 1 f Bongo L Open 3 f Bongo L Rim Bongo L Tip Bongo L Heel Bongo L Slap Timbale L Open Paila L Timbale H Open Paila L Timbale H Open Paila H Cowbell Top Paila H Cowbell Top Guiro Short Guiro Long* Guiro Short Guiro Long* Tambourine Tambourine Maracas Shaker Cabasa Maracas Shaker Cabasa Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Wind Chime E5 F5 F5 G5 Ghost* Maou* *: Indicates an instrument which requires the Gate Time setting. 178 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Rhythm Program Voice List CHROMATIC PERC. 1 Vibraphone JazzVibes Suspense Marimba Xylophone SteelDrums Celesta Glockenspiel MusicBox TubularBell Kalimba Dulcimer Timpani XG Celesta XG Glockenspiel XG MusicBox 2 XG Orgel XG Vibraphone XG VibesKSP XG HardVibes XG Marimba XG MarimbaKSP XG SineMarimba XG Balimba XG LogDrums XG Xylophone XG TubularBells XG ChurchBells XG Carillon XG Dulcimer XG Dulcimer2 XG Cimbalom 3 XG Santur ORGAN 1 Cool!Organ Cool!JazzOrgan Cool!RotorOrgan Cool!FullRocker StadiumOrgan RotaryDrive PercOrgan RockOrgan1 DanceOrgan GospelOrg DrawbarOrgan1 JazzOrgan1 RockOrgan2 PurpleOrgan ElectricOrgan DrawbarOrgan2 2 JazzOrgan2 RockOrgan3 ClickOrgan MellowDraw BrightDraw 60’sOrgan JazzOrgan3 Tibia 16+4 TibiaFull Tibia 8+4 Tibia 8 Kinura 8 Vox 8 Thtr.Trp. 8 Thtr.Trp. 16+8 Tibia+Vox 3 Trp.+Kinura ChapelOrgan1 ChapelOrgan2 ChapelOrgan3 PipeOrgan ReedOrgan Musette TuttiAccrd SmallAccrd Accordion TangoAccrd Steirisch Bandoneon SoftAccordion Sweet!Harmonica ModernHarp 4 BluesHarp XG DrawbarOrgan XG DetunedDrawOrg XG 60’sDrawOrg1 XG 60’sDrawOrg2 XG 70’sDrawOrg1 XG DrawbarOrgan2 XG 60’sDrawOrg3 XG EvenBarOrg XG 16+2’2_3Org XG OrganBass XG 70’sDrawOrg2 XG CheezyOrgan XG DrawbarOrgan3 XG Perc.Organ XG 70’sPercOrg1 5 XG Det.Perc.Org XG LightOrgan XG Perc.Organ2 XG RockOrgan XG RotaryOrgan XG SlowRotary XG FastRotary XG ChurchOrgan XG ChurchOrgan3 XG ChurchOrgan2 XG NotreDame XG OrganFlute XG Trem.OrganFl XG ReedOrgan XG PuffOrgan XG Accordion 6 XG AccordIt XG Harmonica XG Harmonica2 XG TangoAccord XG TangoAccord2 GUITAR 1 Live!NylonGuitar Cool!JazzGuitar Cool!El.Guitar Live!SteelGuitar Live!DynoSteel1 Sweet!Mandolin Cool!FunkGuitar Cool!Stratsphere Cool!VintageLead Cool!PowerLead Cool!BluesGuitar RockGuitar VintageStrum Live!12StrGuitar Live!DynoSteel2 Cool!CleanGuitar 2 3 4 5 6 VodooLead PowerChord CampfireGuitar SolidGuitar VintageAmp AlohaGuitar CrunchGuitar SmoothLead 60’sClean Live!ClassicGtr Cool!JazzSoloGtr VintageOpen FolkGuitar SolidChord VintageMute PedalSteel LeadGuitar ChorusGuitar VintageTrem OctaveGuitar DeepChorus TremoloGuitar HeavyStack BrightClean WahGuitar DXJazzGuitar Distortion El.12StrGuitar FeedbackGuitar 18StringGuitar MutedGuitar FunkGuitar Overdrive Mega SteelGuitar Mega HiStrGuitar Mega 12StrGuitar Mega CleanGuitar Mega Overdrive Mega Distortion XG NylonGuitar XG NylonGuitar2 XG NylonGuitar3 XG Vel.GtrHarmo XG Ukulele XG SteelGuitar XG SteelGuitar2 XG 12StrGuitar XG Nylon&Steel XG Steel&Body XG Mandolin XG JazzGuitar XG MellowGuitar XG JazzAmp XG CleanGuitar XG ChorusGuitar XG MutedGuitar XG FunkGuitar1 XG MuteSteelGtr XG FunkGuitar2 XG JazzMan XG Overdriven XG GuitarPinch XG Distortion XG FeedbackGtr XG FeedbackGtr2 XG GtrHarmonics XG GtrFeedback XG GtrHarmonics2 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 9 Rhythm Program PIANO 1 Live!GrandPiano BrightPiano Harpsichord GrandHarpsi HonkyTonk Live!WarmGrand BalladStack MIDIGrand OctavePiano1 OctavePiano2 CP80 Cool!GalaxyEP StageEP PolarisEP JazzChorus HyperTines 2 Cool!E.Piano PhaseEP NewTines FunkEP DXModern SmoothTine ChorusBell VintageEP VenusEP ModernEP TremoloEP SuperDX SuitcaseEP StereoClavi. PhaseClavi. Clavi. 3 WahClavi. XG GrandPiano XG GrndPianoKSP XG MellowGrPno XG PianoStrings XG Dream XG BrightPiano XG BritePnoKSP XG El.GrandPiano XG El.GrPnoKSP XG DetunedCP80 XG LayeredCP1 XG LayeredCP2 XG Honkytonk XG HonkytonkKSP XG El.Piano1 4 XG El.Piano1KSP XG MellowEP1 XG ChorusEP1 XG HardEl.Piano XG VXfadeEl.P1 XG 60’sEl.Piano1 XG El.Piano2 XG El.Piano2KSP XG ChorusEP2 XG DXEPHard XG DXLegend XG DXPhaseEP XG DX+AnalogEP XG DXKotoEP XG VXfadeEl.P2 XG Harpsichord 5 XG Harpsi.KSP XG Harpsichord2 XG Harpsichord3 XG Clavi. XG Clavi.KSP XG Clavi.Wah XG PulseClavi. XG PierceClavi. 179 BASS 1 Cool!FingerBass AcousticBass Cool!DynoPick Cool!Fretless SlapBass SubBass HardBass ResoBass HouseBass BigDroneBass RockBass SuperFretles PickBass FusionBass Bass&Cymbal AnalogBass 2 DXFunkBass DrySynBass 80’sSynBass HiQBass FunkBass MellowFinger ClickBass PunchyBass TBBass Mega Aco.Bass Mega FingerBass Mega PickBass Mega Fretless XG AcousticBass XG JazzRhythm XG VXUprghtBass 3 XG FingerBass XG FingerDark XG FlangeBass XG Bass&DistEG XG FingerSlap XG FingerBass2 XG ModulatedBass XG PickBass XG MutePickBass XG FretlessBass XG FretlessBass2 XG FretlessBass3 XG FretlessBass4 XG Syn.Fretless XG SmoothFretless XG SlapBass1 4 XG ResonantSlap XG PunchThumb XG SlapBass2 XG Vel.SwitchSlap XG SynthBass1 XG SynBass1Dark XG FastResoBass XG AcidBass XG Clavi.Bass XG TechnoBass XG Orbiter XG SquareBass XG RubberBass XG Hammer XG SynthBass2 XG MellowSyBass 5 XG SequencedBass XG ClickSynBass XG SynBass2Dark XG SmoothSyBass XG ModulrSyBass XG DXBass XG XWireBass 9 Rhythm Program 180 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual STRINGS 1 Sweet!Violin Viola Cello Contrabass Harp Hackbrett Fiddle Banjo Sitar Koto Shamisen SoloViolin TremoloStrings PizzicatoStrings XG Violin XG SlwAtkViolin 2 XG Viola XG Cello XG Contrabass XG Trem.Strings XG SlwAtTremStr XG SuspenseStr XG PizzicatoStr XG OrchestralHarp XG YangChin ENSEMBLE 1 Live!Strings Live!Allegro Live!Orchestra Symphon.Str OberStrings OrchestraHorns OrchestraFlute OrchestraOboe Tutti Strings Orch.Strings StringsQuartet ConcertStrings AnalogStrings ChamberStrings BowStrings 2 SlowStrings MarcatoStrings SynStrings1 SynStrings2 OrchestraHit Live!Gospel Live!Humm HahChoir SweetHeaven DreamHeaven Live!Mmh GothicVox Sunbeam BellHeaven PanHeaven ProHeaven 3 Choir AirChoir VoxHumana Voices UuhChoir XG Timpani XG Strings1 XG StereoStrings XG SlwAtkStrings XG ArcoStrings XG 60’sStrings XG Orchestra XG Orchestra2 XG TremOrchestra XG Vel.Strings XG Strings2 4 XG S.SlowStrings XG LegatoStrings XG WarmStrings XG Kingdom XG 70’sStrings XG Strings3 XG SynStrings1 XG ResoStrings XG SynStrings4 XG SynStrings5 XG SynStrings2 XG ChoirAahs XG StereoChoir XG ChoirAahs2 XG MellowChoir XG ChoirStrings 5 XG VoiceOohs XG SynthVoice XG SynthVoice2 XG Choral XG AnalogVoice XG OrchestraHit XG OrchestraHit2 XG Impact BRASS 1 Sweet!Trumpet Sweet!Trombone Sweet!MutedTrp. Sweet!FlugelHorn JazzTrumpet SoloTrumpet Trombone SoloTrombone SoftTrombone MellowTrombone MutedTrombone BaritonHorn BaritonHit AlpBass FlugelHorn Tuba 2 Live!HyperBrass Live!PopBrass Live!OctaveBrass Live!FrenchHorns Live!Symph.Horns BrassCombo BrassSection BreathBrass HybridCompBrass NaturalBrass Sforzando BigBrass BallroomBrass BrightBrass MellowBrass HybriHorn 3 Hybripad SoftVel.Brass 80’sBrass SoftBrass FullHorns SmoothTrombone HighBrass OberBrass TrumpetEns MellowHorns BigBandBrass PopBrass BrassHit AnalogBrass TromboneSection SmallBrass 4 SoftAnalog FunkyAnalog TechnoBrass SynthBrass OberHorns FatSynBrass XG Trumpet XG Trumpet2 XG BriteTrumpet XG WarmTrumpet XG Trombone XG Trombone2 XG Tuba XG Tuba2 XG MutedTrumpet XG FrenchHorn 5 XG FrenchHornSolo XG FrenchHorn2 XG HornOrchestra XG BrassSection XG Tp&TbSection XG BrassSection2 XG HighBrass XG MellowBrass XG SynthBrass1 XG QuackBrass XG ResoSynBrass XG PolyBrass XG SynthBrass3 XG JumpBrass XG AnaVel.Brass1 XG AnalogBrass1 XG SynthBrass2 XG SoftBrass XG SynthBrass4 XG ChoirBrass XG AnaVel.Brass2 XG AnalogBrass2 REED 1 Sweet!TenorSax Sweet!AltoSax Sweet!SopranoSax GrowlSax BaritoneSax Live!SaxSection Saxappeal MoonLight BalladBrass SaxyMood SopranoSax TenorSax AltoSax SaxStack Live!SaxSect.Sft Live!SaxSect.Hrd 2 WoodwindEns Sweet!Clarinet Sweet!Oboe EnglishHorn Bassoon Clarinet Oboe XG SopranoSax XG AltoSax XG SaxSection XG HyperAltoSax XG TenorSax XG BreathyTenor XG SoftTenorSax XG TenorSax2 XG BaritoneSax 3 XG Oboe XG EnglishHorn XG Bassoon XG Clarinet PIPE 1 Sweet!Flute Sweet!PanFlute FluteEnsemble Flute PanFlute ClassicalFlute Piccolo EthnicFlute Shakuhachi Whistle Recorder Ocarina XG Piccolo XG Flute XG Recorder XG PanFlute 2 XG BlownBottle XG Shakuhachi XG Whistle XG Ocarina SYNTH LEAD 1 Oxygen Matrix WireLead HipLead HopLead DanceHook TechLead Tekkline SoftMini OctaveHook TranceLead FireWire Analogon Blaster Skyline SquareLead 2 SawtoothLead PopLead ProLead BrightMini TinyLead FunkyLead Paraglide Robolead Fargo Portatone BigLead Warp Adrenaline Stardust AeroLead MiniLead 3 Impact SunBell UnderHeim HiBias Vinylead PanLead Stringbells CrystalEyes Padbells MelodyMaker BigTune TrumpetSaw AttackSaw PercSquare XG SquareLead XG SquareLead2 4 XG LMSquare XG Hollow XG Shroud XG Mellow XG SoloSine XG SineLead XG SawtoothLead XG SawtoothLead2 XG ThickSaw XG DynamicSaw XG DigitalSaw XG BigLead XG HeavySynth XG WaspySynth XG PulseSaw XG Dr.Lead 5 XG VelocityLead XG Seq.Analog XG CalliopeLead XG PurePad XG ChiffLead XG Rubby XG CharangLead XG DistortedLead XG WireLead XG VoiceLead XG SynthAahs XG VoxLead XG FifthsLead XG BigFive XG Bass&Lead XG Big&Low 6 XG Fat&Perky XG SoftWhirl SYNTH PAD 1 Insomnia Skydiver Bubblespace HipaStringPad MellowPad Mediterrain NeoWarmPad CyberPad OberSweep Messenger Wave2001 FarEast Disclosure BrightOber DarkPad Mystery 2 Sirius S&HGroove Velo.Ashrami EveningStars AngelVibes Atmosphere XenonPad Equinox GlassPad Fantasia DX Pad Symbiont Stargate Area51 DarkMoon Ionosphere 3 GoldenAge Solaris TimeTravel Millennium Dunes XG NewAgePad XG Fantasy XG WarmPad XG ThickPad XG SoftPad XG SinePad XG HornPad XG RotaryStrings XG PolySynthPad XG PolyPad80 XG ClickPad 4 XG AnalogPad XG SquarePad XG ChoirPad XG Heaven XG Itopia XG CCPad XG BowedPad XG Glacier XG GlassPad XG MetallicPad XG TinePad XG PanPad XG HaloPad XG SweepPad XG Shwimmer XG Converge 5 XG PolarPad XG Celestial SYNTH EFFECTS 1 XG Rain XG Clavi.Pad XG HarmoRain XG AfricanWind XG Carib XG SoundTrack XG Prologue XG Ancestral XG Crystal XG SynthDr.Comp XG Popcorn XG TinyBells XG RoundGlocken XG GlockenChime XG ClearBells XG ChorusBells 2 XG SynthMallet XG SoftCrystal XG LoudGlocken XG ChristmasBel XG VibeBells XG DigitalBells XG AirBells XG BellHarp XG Gamelimba XG Atmosphere XG WarmAtmos. XG HollowRelease XG NylonEl.Piano XG NylonHarp XG HarpVox XG Atmos.Pad 3 XG Planet XG Brightness XG FantasyBells XG Smokey XG Goblins XG GoblinsSynth XG Creeper XG RingPad XG Ritual XG ToHeaven XG Night XG Glisten XG BellChoir XG Echoes XG Echoes2 XG EchoPan 4 XG EchoBells XG BigPan XG SynthPiano XG Creation XG StarDust XG Reso&Panning XG Sci-Fi XG Starz DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 9 Rhythm Program 6 181 ETHNIC 1 Bagpipe XG Sitar XG DetunedSitar XG Sitar2 XG Tambra XG Tamboura XG Banjo XG MutedBanjo XG Rabab XG Gopichant XG Oud XG Shamisen XG Koto XG Taisho-kin XG Kanoon XG Kalimba 2 XG Bagpipe XG Fiddle XG Shanai XG Shanai2 XG Pungi XG Hichiriki XG TinkleBell XG Bonang XG Altair XG GamelanGongs XG StereoGamelan XG RamaCymbal XG AsianBells PERCUSSION 1 XG Agogo XG SteelDrums XG GlassPerc. XG ThaiBells XG Woodblock XG Castanets XG TaikoDrum XG GranCassa XG MelodicTom XG MelodicTom2 XG RealTom XG RockTom XG SynthDrum XG AnalogTom XG ElectroPerc. XG Rev.Cymbal SOUND EFFECTS 1 XG GtrFretNoise XG BreathNoise XG Seashore XG BirdTweet XG TelephoneRing XG Helicopter XG Applause XG Gunshot XG CuttingNoise XG CuttingNoise2 XG StringSlap XG Fl.KeyClick XG Shower XG Thunder XG Wind XG Stream 2 XG Bubble XG Feed XG Dog XG Horse XG BirdTweet2 XG Ghost XG Maou XG PhoneCall XG DoorSqueak XG DoorSlam XG ScratchCut XG ScratchSplit XG WindChime XG TelphoneRing2 XG CarEngineIgn XG CarTiresSqel 9 Rhythm Program 182 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 3 4 XG CarPassing XG CarCrash XG Siren XG Train XG JetPlane XG Starship XG Burst XG RollrCoaster XG Submarine XG Laugh XG Scream XG Punch XG Heartbeat XG FootSteps XG MachineGun XG LaserGun XG Explosion XG Firework 3 Rhythm Sequence Program With the Rhythm Sequence Program function, you can string together any of the DDK-7’s existing rhythms and the rhythms of your own creation together to make complete rhythm compositions. You can save four rhythm compositions (each can contain up to 140 bars) to the Sequence buttons on the panel for future recall. Two or more rhythm compositions can be played back in succession, letting you divide a song into parts and play back the rhythm data as desired. Here are a couple of example applications: • When you want to play more than two songs in a medley, save the rhythm composition for each song to a separate sequence button. You can then recall each desired song by simply pressing the corresponding sequence button to which the song is saved. • When you want to practice a song in separate sections (for example, separately practicing the verse, chorus and bridge), divide the song into the relevant parts. For example, save the intro part to the [SEQ. 1] button, the main chorus part to the [SEQ. 2] button, the ending to the [SEQ. 3] button, and so on. Then, recall the desired part simply by pressing the appropriate sequence button. You can also play through a song by recalling all the parts in sequence. Selecting a Sequence There are two ways to program a rhythm sequence: copying an existing sequence that is similar to the sequence you want to create, or creating your own sequence from scratch. Press the [PROGRAM] button in the DISPLAY SELECT section. 9 Rhythm Program 1 Any rhythm currently playing will automatically be stopped when you call up the Rhythm Sequence Program function. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 183 2 Press one of the Sequence buttons ([SEQ. 1] – [SEQ. 4]) in the display to select the rhythm sequence number you want to edit. The lamp of the selected numbered sequence button in the Rhythm section lights, and the Sequence Display appears. Instead of pressing the Sequence button on the Program display, you can press one of the sequence buttons on the Sequence display, or you can press the Sequence buttons in the Rhythm section on the panel to select the sequence number. This selects the Sequence number, to which a rhythm composition can be saved. If you want to copy a rhythm composition from another Sequence number, go on to the next step. 9 Rhythm Program 184 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 3 Press the Sequence button ([SEQ. 1] – [SEQ. 4]) of the copy source on the right half in the display. A message appears, prompting confirmation of the operation. 4 Press [COPY] to execute the operation, or select [CANCEL] to abort the operation. Programming a Sequence 1 Press the [RHYTHM] button at the top right of the display to call up the RHYTHM Page. 2 Press the [CATEGORY] button to call up the Rhythm Category Select pop-up menu, then select the Rhythm category corresponding to the rhythm you want to enter to the sequence. If you press User category button, you can select a rhythm of your own creation (User rhythm). The rhythm menu of the selected rhythm category is displayed. 3 Select the desired rhythm from the displayed rhythm menu. Rhythm Program 9 4 Select a rhythm section (Main A – D, Fill in A – D, Intro 1 – 3, Ending 1 – 3, or Break) by pressing one of the rhythm control buttons on the panel. The selected rhythm and section appears at the top of the display. 5 Press the [SET] button in the display. One bar of the selected rhythm is entered and its name is displayed as a box in the rhythm row on the display. When the rhythm is entered, the cursor (colored orange) will automatically move to one step right. A maximum of 140 bars can be entered to a single sequence. When you select an ending pattern and press the [SET] button, an entire ending pattern (more than one bar) is entered. You cannot enter a rhythm after an ending pattern. NOTE When entering an Intro section, check the number of bars at the top of the display. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 185 6 Repeat steps #2 through #5 above to enter the rhythm and create your own rhythm composition. Turning the power off before quitting or closing the Rhythm Sequence Program erases any sequences you have made. Before turning the power off, quit the Rhythm Sequence Program (page 190). Auditioning a Sequence You can play a sequence you are editing at any time to audition the changes. 1 Move the cursor to the desired position for playback. Move the cursor by using the Data Control dial, or the POSITION buttons on the display. DATA CONTROL 2 9 Press the rhythm [START] button on the panel. Rhythm Program The Sequence plays back. Pressing the [START] button again stops playback. Editing an Existing Rhythm Sequence You can insert a new rhythm between the rhythms you have already entered, or delete the entered rhythm from the sequence. 186 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 1 1 2 POSITION These are cursor controls for moving the cursor (colored orange) along the rhythm row in the display. Moves the cursor to the first position. Moves the cursor one step to the left. Moves the cursor one step to the right. Moves the cursor five steps to the right. 2 DATA These are data controls for entering rhythms and deleting existing rhythms in the rhythm row. SET For initially entering a rhythm to an empty position in the rhythm row, or for replacing a pattern at the cursor position. Pressing the [SET] button enters the rhythm selected from the rhythm menu to the cursor position. This operation is not available between measures of an ending pattern. When you insert an ending pattern into the editing sequence, any existing rhythm data that follows an Ending pattern is automatically deleted. 9 Rhythm Program INSERT For inserting a rhythm before the current cursor position. The new rhythm is entered just before the cursor position and all other rhythms to the right of the cursor are moved to accommodate the new number. This operation is not available between measures of an ending pattern. Additional rhythms cannot be entered beyond the Rhythm sequence function’s capacity of 140. If the Insert operation results in the rhythm number going over the capacity, a “Data Full” message appears and the operation cannot be executed. DELETE For deleting a rhythm at the current cursor position. When the ending pattern is selected, pressing the [DELETE] button deletes the entire ending pattern (more than one bar). CLEAR For erasing all patterns entered to the selected sequence. After selecting [CLEAR], a message appears prompting confirmation of the operation. Select [CLEAR] to clear the currently selected rhythm sequence, or select [CANCEL] to abort the operation and return to the previous display. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 187 Programming a Registration Sequence The Registration Sequence feature allows you to have desired Registrations automatically called up in sequence, when playing a Rhythm Sequence. It lets you program the timing (bar/beat/clock) at which the Registration is changed. You can also program the Next Regist function in Registration Sequence. A Registration Sequence is saved as a part of the corresponding Rhythm Sequence. With this feature, you can have the sounds of the instrument change as desired automatically to match the Rhythm Sequence playback. NOTE If you are loading a Registration while a rhythm is playing, the sequence data and User rhythms in the Registration data cannot be loaded. 1 Press the [REGIST] button at the top right in the display to call up the Registration Sequence display. The Registration Sequence is programmed from this display. The entered Registration number is shown along the Registration row in the middle of the display. 2 9 13 14 15 16 Press the desired numbered button in the Registration Memory section. 1 Rhythm Program 3 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 D. Using the buttons in the display or the Data Control dial, set the Bar/Beat/Clock position at which you want to change the Registration (1 beat = 96 Clock). DATA CONTROL When using the Data Control dial, first press the number you wish to change in the display, then turn the dial. 188 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 4 Press the DATA [SET] button in the display. The Registration number appears in the display (in the timing order), indicating that the Registration is entered. Up to 140 Registrations can be entered. If some Registration numbers are entered to the same Bar/Beat/Clock, the last entered one takes priority. 5 Repeat steps #2 through #4 above to set the Registration Sequence. Entering Next Regist: When you program the Next Regist function in Registration Sequence, the next registration data in current song can be loaded automatically just by playing the rhythm sequence. 1 Using the buttons in the display or the Data Control dial, set the Bar/Beat/Clock position at which you want to enter the Next Regist (1 beat = 96 clock). 2 Press the NEXT REGIST [INSERT] button in the display. The Next Regist mark appears at the timing point you set in step #1, indicating that the Next Regist is entered. Next Regist Loading Time • Loading Next Regist may take a few seconds (the time may differ depending on the size of the data to be loaded). • When using a floppy disk instead of USB flash memory, the loading time will be longer than when using USB flash memory. • Next Registration data can be loaded by two ways: using optional foot pedal/right footswitch and programming Next Regist in the Registration Sequence. Loading time is the same regardless of which way you load the Next Registration data. Rhythm Program 9 Editing an Existing Registration Sequence You can move or delete the entered Registration Sequence (Registration number or Next Regist data) from the sequence. To move an entry: 1 Using the POSITION buttons, move the cursor and select the data (Registration number or Next Regist) you want to move. 2 Change the position by pressing the Bar/Beat/Clock buttons in the display. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 189 3 To move the Registration number timing, press the DATA [SET] button. To move the Next Regist timing, press the NEXT REGIST [SET] button. The position of the Registration number or Next Regist is changed and displayed in the proper order. To erase an entry: 1 Using the POSITION buttons, move the cursor and select the data (Registration number or Next Regist) you want to delete. 2 Press the [DELETE] button to delete the data. Quitting the Rhythm Sequence Program You can quit the Rhythm Sequence Program from any of its display pages. When you quit, the sequence you have made will be automatically saved. To quit the Rhythm Sequence Program: Press the [PROGRAM] button on the panel. The Voice Display appears, indicating that the Rhythm Sequence Program is closed. When quitting the Rhythm Sequence Program, the square at the top left of the display turns light blue for a few seconds, indicating that the sequence is currently being saved. Do not turn the power off while the sequence is being saved. 9 Rhythm Program 190 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Playing Rhythm Sequences To play any of the rhythm sequences you have created: 1 Press the appropriate Sequence button ([SEQ. 1] – [SEQ. 4]) on the panel. The SEQ button’s lamp lights. 2 Press the rhythm [START] button. The rhythm in the selected sequence starts playback. The Registration Memory also changes with the Rhythm Sequence playback, if the sequence includes a Registration Sequence. Rhythm playback automatically stops when the sequence reaches its end. If you’ve stopped rhythm playback in the middle of the sequence, press the [START] button again to resume playback. Playing All Sequences in Order You can also have up to all four rhythm sequences automatically play in order, one after another. 2 Press the rhythm [START] button. The rhythm sequences start from the lowest number and play in order automatically to the highest number. (For example, if you press Sequence buttons 4, 2 and 1 in that order, the sequences will be played back not in the order you pressed them, but in their numeric order: 1, 2, then 4.) This function effectively allows you to make a long rhythm sequence that exceeds the 140pattern memory limit of a single sequence. 9 Rhythm Program 1 Press the desired Sequence buttons, making sure that all their LEDs are lit. Pressing one of the SEQ. buttons while a Rhythm Sequence is playing back automatically cancels the pressed sequence, and its LED turns off. You cannot cancel a sequence that is currently playing. The SEQ. lamp goes out when the sequence assigned to it is finished playing. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 191 To start a sequence using the Left Footswitch: Reference Page Connecting a pedal unit (page 229) Footswitches (page 193) You can start or stop the Rhythm Sequence playback using the left footswitch. To use the left footswitch, pedal unit must be connected to the DDK-7. 1 Press the desired Sequence buttons, making sure that all their LEDs are lit. 2 Press the [FOOT SWITCH] button on the panel to call up the Footswitch display, LEFT Page. 3 Set the control mode of the Footswitch to RHYTHM STOP. (See page 193 for information about the Footswitch settings.) 4 Press the Left Footswitch with your right foot to turn the sequence on. Pressing the Left Footswitch again in the middle of the sequence playback cancels the Rhythm Sequence. When you are playing a Rhythm Sequence that is made up of several sequences (SEQ. buttons), pressing the Left footswitch turns off the currently playing Rhythm Sequence, and pressing it again starts the next sequence. You can also start the Rhythm Sequence playback using the optional foot pedal. Reference Page Connecting a foot pedal (page 229) Foot pedal (page 196) 4 9 Saving Rhythm Pattern and Rhythm Sequence Data to external media Rhythm Program You can save your own rhythm patterns (created in the Rhythm Pattern Program) and Rhythm Sequence (created in the Rhythm Sequence Program) to external media, such as USB flash memory. Refer to the section “Saving Registrations as Registration Data (File)” on page 116 for instructions. When loading your original Rhythm data from external media back to the DDK-7, be sure to stop the rhythm if it is playing. Loading cannot be executed when a rhythm is running. 192 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 10 Controllers These leg- and foot-operated controls allow you to execute various performance functions and switch the effect on/off, without taking your hands from the keyboard. In order to use these controllers, you’ll need to connect the DDKU-P7 Pedal Unit or an optional FC4/5/7/9 Foot Pedal to the DDK-7. Contents 1 Footswitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193 • Controlling the Rhythm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194 • Controlling Glide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195 • Controlling Rotary Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196 2 Foot Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 • Controlling Sustain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198 • Controlling Lead Slide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199 • Controlling Melody On Chord. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200 • Controlling the Solo Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201 1 • Controlling the Rhythm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 • Controlling Glide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 • Controlling Rotary Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 • Controlling Registration Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 • Controlling Expression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 3 Expression Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 • Controlling Pitch Bend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 • Controlling the Rhythm Tempo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Footswitches To use the Footswitches, connect the Pedal Unit DDKU-P7 to the DDK-7. The Pedal Unit DDKU-P7 has two Footswitches on the main expression pedal. The Right Footswitch is used for the Registration Shift function. The Left Footswitch can be set to control one of the following functions: Rhythm, Glide, and Rotary speaker. See page 94 for the details of the Registration Shift function or Right Footswitch. The explanation on the Left Footswitch is given here. Reference Page Connecting a pedal unit (page 229) Right Footswitch Left Footswitch 10 Controllers Expression Pedal 1 Press the [FOOT SWITCH] button. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 193 2 Press the [LEFT] button at the top right of the display to call up the LEFT Page. FOOTSWITCH Display In this display, you can assign the control function to the Left Footswitch: Rhythm, Glide, and Rotary Speaker. If you choose OFF here, the Left Footswitch will not control any function. Controlling the Rhythm You can control the rhythm start/stop or switch the rhythm sections by using the Left Footswitch. 1 2 3 10 Controllers 4 Reference Page Rhythm Structure (page 62) 1 5 STOP Switches the rhythm on/off whenever you press the Footswitch. 2 BREAK When you press the Footswitch, the Break section turns on. This function corresponds to the [BREAK] button on the panel. 3 MAIN A – MAIN D These functions correspond to the MAIN/FILL IN [A] – [D] buttons on the panel. For example, when the [MAIN A] button is selected in this display and you press the Footswitch, the rhythm section is switched to Main A or Fill In A. 194 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 4 INTRO 1 – INTRO 3 These functions correspond to the INTRO [1] – [3] buttons on the panel. For example, when the INTRO [1] button is selected in this display and you press the Footswitch, the rhythm section is switched to Intro 1. 5 ENDING 1 – ENDING 3 These functions correspond to the ENDING [1] – [3] buttons on the panel. For example, when the ENDING [1] button is selected in this display and you press the Footswitch, the rhythm section is switched to Ending 1. After the ending pattern is played, the rhythm stops. You can also control the rhythm start/stop or switch the rhythm sections by using an optional Foot Pedal. Reference Page Foot pedal (page 196) Controlling Glide You can control the Glide effect by using the Left Footswitch. 1 2 Pressing the Footswitch immediately lowers the pitch of the selected Voice or Voices by a half-step and releasing it slowly returns the pitch to the original. 1 10 Voice Selections (UPPER1/UPPER2/LEAD1/LEAD2/LOWER1/ LOWER2) Controllers Select the desired Voice section(s) to which the Glide function is to be applied. 2 TIME Determines the speed of the Glide function, or in other words, how gradually the pitch returns when the Footswitch is released. Higher values make the speed slower. Range: 1 – 5 Reference Page You can also control the Glide effect by using an optional Foot Pedal. Foot pedal (page 196) DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 195 Controlling Rotary Speaker Reference Page You can control the Rotary Speaker effect (on/off ) by using the Left Footswitch. Rotary Speaker (page 50) When the [Rotary Speaker] button is selected in this display and you press the Footswitch, the Rotary Speaker effect is switched on or off. This function corresponds to the [ROTARY SP SPEED] button on the panel. To use this function, you’ll need to make the appropriate Rotary Speaker settings for each Voice section or Organ Flute Voice. For details, see page 50. Reference Page Foot pedal (page 196) You can also control the Rotary Speaker effect (on/off ) by using an optional Foot Pedal. 2 Foot Pedal To use the Foot Pedal, you will need to connect an optional Foot Pedal (FC4/FC5/ FC7/FC9) to the DDK-7. The Foot Pedal then can be used to turn one of the following functions on and off. Up to two Foot Pedals can be connected to the DDK7. You can assign one function for each Foot Pedal in the FOOT PEDAL Page of the Utility display. Note that Some functions will need to be turned on or its parameters set beforehand. Assignable Functions 10 Controllers Sustain Lead Slide Melody On Chord Solo Rhythm Glide Rotary Speaker Registration Shift Expression To control Expression, use the FC7/FC9. To control other functions, use the FC4/ FC5. FC4 196 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual FC7 Assigning functions to a Foot Pedal: 1 Press the [UTILITY] button to call up the Utility display. 2 Press the [F.PEDAL] button at the top right of the display to call up the Foot Pedal Page. In this display, you can assign the control function to the Foot Pedal. 3 Select the control function to be assigned to the Foot Pedal. Select the desired function button from the left side of the display if you've connected the Foot Pedal to the FOOT PEDAL (1 VOLUME) terminal; select from the right side if you've connected the Foot Pedal to the FOOT PEDAL (2 SUSTAIN) terminal. Controllers 10 The polarity of the Foot Pedal will automatically be selected depending on the selected function; however, you can select the polarity manually. 4 The effect is constantly applied as long as the Foot Pedal is pressed. Releasing the Foot Pedal turns the effect off. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 197 Controlling Sustain You can control the on/off status of Sustain for each Voice Section by using the Foot Pedal. Sustain for the Pedalboard cannot be controlled. Reference Page 1 Press the [SUSTAIN] button to call up the Sustain display, then turn the desired Voice section on from the display. 2 Select [SUSTAIN] in the FOOT PEDAL Page of the UTILITY display. The Sustain function is now assigned to the Foot Pedal. 3 To apply sustain, press the Foot Pedal. Sustain is constantly applied as long as the Foot Pedal is pressed. Releasing the Foot Pedal turns sustain off. Sustain (page 49) 10 Controllers 198 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Controlling Lead Slide 1 Call up the Voice Condition display Page 2 of the Lead Voice section to which you want to apply the Lead Slide effect. Reference Page Voice Condition Display (page 41) Press the [ON] button of the Slide section on the display. 3 Select [SLIDE] in the FOOT PEDAL Page of the Utility display. The Slide effect function is now assigned to the Foot Pedal. 4 Press the Foot Pedal when you want to apply the Slide effect. The Slide effect is applied as long as the Foot Pedal is pressed. Releasing the Foot Pedal, cancels the Lead Slide effect. 10 Controllers 2 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 199 Controlling Melody On Chord 1 Call up the Page 3 of the Voice Display. VOICE Display [Page 3] Reference Page Voice display (page 18) 2 Select one of the modes. 3 Select [M.O.C.] in the FOOT PEDAL Page of the Utility display. The M.O.C. function is now assigned to the Foot Pedal. 4 Press the Foot Pedal when you want to apply the M.O.C. effect. The M.O.C. effect is applied constantly, as long as the Foot Pedal is pressed. When you release the Foot Pedal, the M.O.C. effect is cancelled. Reference Page Melody On Chord (page 73) 10 Controllers 200 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Controlling the Solo Function You can turn the Solo function on/off by using the Foot Pedal. See page 30 for more information. Controlling the Rhythm You can control the rhythm start/stop or switch the rhythm sections not only by using the Left Footswitch, but also the Foot Pedal. Reference Page Set the rhythm settings in the LEFT Page of the Footswitch display. 2 Select [RHYTHM CONTROL] in the FOOT PEDAL Page of the Utility display. The Rhythm Control function is now assigned to the Foot Pedal. 3 Press the Foot Pedal when you want to start/stop the rhythm or switch the rhythm sections. Footswitch Display (page 194) 10 Controllers 1 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 201 Controlling Glide You can control the Glide effect not only by using the Left Footswitch, but also the Foot Pedal. Reference Page Footswitch Display (page 194) 1 Set the Glide settings in the LEFT Page of the Footswitch display. 2 Select [GLIDE] in the FOOT PEDAL Page of the Utility display. The Glide Effect is now assigned to the Foot Pedal. 3 Pressing the Foot Pedal immediately lowers the pitch of the selected Voice or Voices by a half-step and releasing it slowly returns the pitch to the original. Controlling Rotary Speaker 10 You can control the Rotary Speaker effect (on/off ) not only by using the Left Footswitch, but also the Foot Pedal. Controllers 1 202 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Select [ROTARY SPEAKER] in the FOOT PEDAL Page of the Utility display. The Rotary Speaker function is now assigned to the Foot Pedal. 2 Press the Foot Pedal when you want to switch the Rotary Speaker effect on or off. Pressing the Foot Pedal has the same effect as pressing the [ROTARY SP SPEED] button. To use this function, you will need to select the Rotary Speaker effect for the desired Voice. Refer to page 50. Controlling Registration Shift You can control Registration Shift not only by using the right Footswitch, but also the Foot Pedal. Reference Page Set the Registration Shift mode in the Regist Shift display. 2 Select [REGIST SHIFT] in the FOOT PEDAL Page of the UTILITY display. The Registration Shift function is now assigned to the Foot Pedal. 3 Press the Foot Pedal when you want to change Registrations. Registration Shift (page 94) 10 Controllers 1 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 203 Controlling Expression You can control Expression not only by using the Expression Pedal, but also the Foot Pedal. 10 Controllers 204 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 1 Select [EXPRESSION] in the FOOT PEDAL Page of the Utility display. The Expression function is now assigned to the Foot Pedal. 2 Press the Foot Pedal down to control the Expression. 3 Expression Pedals The Pedal Unit DDKU-P7 features a expression pedal and a 2nd expression pedal. The Expression pedal can be used to control the volume with your foot as you play. The 2nd Expression Pedal can be used to control the Pitch Bend and the Tempo of the Rhythm. The explanation on the 2nd Expression Pedal is given here. Reference Page Connecting a Pedal Unit (page 229) Reference Page Expression Pedal Getting Started (page 11) 2nd Expression Pedal Pedal Unit 1 Press the [UTILITY] button on the front panel. The Utility display appears. 2 Press the [EXP.] button in the upper right of the display to call up the EXP. (Expression) Page. Controllers 10 In this display, you can assign the Pitch Bend control or Tempo control to the 2nd Expression Pedal. If both Pitch Bend and Rhythm Tempo controls are set to ON, both functions are applied when you press the 2nd Expression Pedal. Generally one of them is assigned to the 2nd Expression Pedal. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 205 Controlling Pitch Bend 1 1 2 MODE Determines the range of the Pitch Bend control. Each step changes the pitch range by a semitone. Range: 1 – 12 The setting 2 (NARROW) results in a small amount of pitch variation (over +/- two semitones); the setting 12 (WIDE) results in a large amount of pitch variation (over +/- one octave). 2 Voice Sections (PITCH BEND) Selects the Voice sections to which the Pitch Bend function will be applied, and turns the function ON. Pitch Bend can be selected independently or together for Upper Voices 1 and 2, Lead Voice 1 and 2, Pedal Voices 1 and 2. 10 Controllers 206 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Controlling the Rhythm Tempo 1 1 2 MODE Determines the range of tempo change. Range: 1 – 12 The setting 2 (NARROW) results in a small amount of tempo change (70% – 140%); the setting 12 (WIDE) results in a large amount of tempo change (50% – 200%). 2 TEMPO When you want to control the tempo with the 2nd Expression Pedal, set this to “ON.” When set to on, pressing the pedal down with your toe speeds up the tempo and pressing it back with your heel slows it down. Controllers 10 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 207 11 Transpose and Pitch Controls There are two pitch-related controls on the DDK-7: Transpose and Pitch. Transpose allows you to change the key of the instrument and Pitch lets you finely adjust the tuning. Transpose and Pitch can be adjusted in the Utility display. (The settings here cannot be recorded to the Music Data Recorder.) 1 Press the [UTILITY] button. The Utility display appears. 2 Press the [GLOBAL] button at the top right of the display to call up the GLOBAL Page. 1 2 In this display, you can change the Transpose and Pitch settings. 1 TRANSPOSE NOTE 11 The Transpose setting here is not applied to an XG Song (page 126). Determines the coarse pitch setting of all the Voices, and is adjustable in half-steps (semitones). Range: -6 – +6 Transpose and Pitch Controls 2 PITCH Determines the fine pitch setting of all the Voices. Each step changes the pitch by 0.2 Hz. The default Pitch is 440.0 Hz (corresponding to key A3). Range: 427.2 Hz – 452.6 Hz You can also change the Transpose and Pitch for each Voice section, in the Voice Condition display. For more information, see page 43. 208 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 12 Internet Direct Connection This convenient, powerful feature lets you directly connect your DDK-7 to the Internet. In this section, you may come across some unfamiliar terms and phrases related to computers and online communications. To look up the meaning of these terms, refer to the Internet Glossary (page 222). Contents 1 Connecting the Instrument to the Internet . . . .209 2 Accessing the Website from the DDK-7 . . . . . .210 • Scrolling the Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 • Following Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 • Refreshing a Web Page/Canceling Loading of a Web Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213 • Return to the Previous Web Page . . . . . . . . . . .213 • Saving Bookmarks of Your Favorite Pages. . . . .214 • Editing Bookmarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216 • Changing the Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217 3 About the Internet Settings Display . . . . . . . . . 218 • Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 • LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 • Wireless LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 • Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 4 Exiting from the Internet Display. . . . . . . . . . . . 221 5 Initializing Internet Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 6 Glossary of Internet Terms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 1 Connecting the Instrument to the Internet You can connect the instrument to a full-time online connection (ADSL, optical fiber, cable Internet, etc.) via a router or a modem equipped with a router. Use a computer to connect to the Internet and get online before connecting the instrument, since no modem or router settings can be made from the instrument itself. To use the Internet connection, you will first need to subscribe to an Internet service or provider. Connection example 1: Connecting by cable (using a modem without router) Modem* Router Cable type No router capability NOTE Depending on the Internet connection, you may not be able to connect to two or more devices (for example, a computer and the instrument), depending on the contract with the provider. This means you cannot connect with the DDK-7. If in doubt, check your contract or contact your provider. Reference Page Connecting USB storage devices or USB-LAN adaptor (page 234) LAN cable LAN cable USB-LAN adaptor 12 Internet Direct Connection * Here, “modem” refers to an ADSL modem, optical network unit (ONU) or cable modem. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 209 NOTE Connection example 2: Connecting by cable (using a modem with router) Some types of modems require an optional hub network for simultaneously connecting to several devices (such as computer, musical instrument, etc.). LAN cable ADSL modem Router capability LAN cable USB-LAN adaptor Connection example 3: Wireless connection Modem* Router Access point USB wireless LAN adaptor * Here, “modem” refers to an ADSL modem, optical network unit (ONU) or cable modem. 2 Accessing the Website from the DDK-7 To access the website, press the [INTERNET] button while the instrument is connected to the Internet. 12 Internet Direct Connection Control Menu 210 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Browser In the Control Menu located in the left part of the display, you can control the displayed website and set various settings. The browser display, to the right of the control menu, is the area in which the website is displayed. The first page shown when opening a browser and connecting to the Internet is called the “home page.” If you want to return to the home page from another website, press the [HOME] button in the Control Menu. Reference Page Changing the Home Page (page 217) Scrolling the Display When the size of the web page is too large to be shown at one time in the browser display of the instrument, a scroll bar appears at the right side or bottom of the display. Touch and move the scroll bar to view those parts of the page that are not shown. Following Links When there is a link in the page, it is shown as a button or in colored text, etc. To select the link, press it (the button or text) directly on the display. The touch panel will not sound when you press a link, even if the touch panel sound is set to ON in the Utility Display (page 17). Internet Direct Connection 12 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 211 Monitoring the Internet Connection Status The four icons and a message indicate the current Internet connection status. 1234 5 1 Offline indicator ( ) This is shown when the instrument is not connected to the Internet. When this appears, you cannot view any web pages. 2 Communication Status indicator ( ) This flashes when the web page is being loaded, indicating that communication with the site is in progress. The indicator lights continuously when loading is finished (communication is established). 3 SSL indicator ( ) This is shown when the opened website uses SSL, and it indicates that data is encrypted before transmission. 4 Wireless LAN indicator When you connect the DDK-7 to Internet using wireless LAN, an icon indicating the condition of the connection is displayed. If the signal to the DDK-7 becomes weak or there is no signal from the access point, move the DDK-7 nearer to the access point. : Strong : Normal : Weak (not connected to Internet) : No signal (not connected to Internet) 12 Internet Direct Connection 212 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 5 Communication status indicator The following three messages will be shown depending on the status of accessing web site. Now opening web page ... Indicates loading of the web page. Web page has been displayed. Indicates the web page has been loaded and the web page is completely displayed. Disconnected. Indicates the DDK-7 is offline (not connected to Internet). Refreshing a Web Page/Canceling Loading of a Web Page To refresh a web page (to make sure you have the latest version of the page, or to try reloading), press the [REFRESH] button. To cancel loading of a page (if the page is taking too long to open), press the [STOP] button. Return to the Previous Web Page To return to a previously selected web page, press the [BACK] button. To return to the page selected before pressing the [BACK] button, press the [FORWARD] button. Internet Direct Connection 12 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 213 Saving Bookmarks of Your Favorite Pages You can “bookmark” the page you’re viewing, and set up a custom link so the page can be instantly called up in the future. 1 With the desired page currently selected, press the [BOOKMARK] button in the control menu. The Bookmark display appears, showing a list of the currently saved bookmarks. The title of the web page registered to the selected bookmark is shown below the list. 2 Call up the display for registering bookmarks by pressing the [ADD] button. Page title 12 Internet Direct Connection 214 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 3 Select the position of the new bookmark by pressing the desired position directly, or using the [UP]/[DOWN] button or the Data Control Dial. DATA CONTROL 4 To save the bookmark, press the [EXECUTE] button, or press the [CANCEL] button to cancel. 5 To return to the browser, press the [EXIT] button. Opening a Bookmarked Page: Press the [BOOKMARK] button in the control menu to call up the Bookmark display, then select the desired bookmark. 2 Press the [JUMP] button to open the page of the selected bookmark. 12 Internet Direct Connection 1 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 215 Editing Bookmarks From the Bookmark display, you can change the names and rearrange the order of your bookmarks, as well as delete unnecessary bookmarks from the list. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 UP/DOWN Moves the selection position in the Bookmark list. 2 JUMP Opens the web page of the selected bookmark. 3 ADD Used when saving a bookmark (page 214). 4 CHANGE Changes the name of the selected bookmark. Pressing this button calls up the display for entering characters. For details on entering characters, see page 113. 5 DELETE Deletes the selected bookmark from the Bookmark list. 6 MOVE Changes the order of the bookmarks. 1 Select the bookmark you wish to move, then press the [MOVE] button. The left part of the display changes, letting you select the new position for the bookmark. 2 Select the intended position by pressing the desired position in the display, or by using the [UP]/[DOWN] buttons or Data Control dial. 3 Move the bookmark to the selected position by pressing the [EXECUTE] button. 12 Internet Direct Connection 7 CLOSE This closes the Bookmark display and returns to the browser display. 216 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Changing the Home Page You can specify any desired page on the site to be the home page. In advance, open the page you wish to set as your new home page. 1 Press the [SETTING] button in the control menu to call up the Internet Setting display. 2 Press the [Browser] button to call up the Browser Page. 3 Press the [Register] button of the “Set this page as Home.” To return to the browser, press the [EXECUTE] button in the control menu. A message appears, prompting confirmation of the operation. Select [YES] to return to the browser. 12 Internet Direct Connection 4 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 217 3 About the Internet Settings Display From the Internet Settings display, you can make various settings related to the Internet connection, including preferences for the menus and displays. The Internet Settings display has four sub-displays: Browser, LAN, Wireless LAN, and Others. Browser 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 Encode Selects the character code encoding for the browser. 2 Home page Shows and allows editing of the web page which is set as the home page. 3 Set this page as Home For details, refer to “Changing the Home Page” on page 217. 4 Restore default Home Restores the home page setting. 5 Show images Image data and pictures in the web page are shown in the browser when this is set to on. Image data is not shown when this is set to off. 6 Character entry keys This setting lets you select the character order of the virtual keyboard for entering characters. When this is set to “Alphabetical,” the keys are in alphabetical order. When this is set to “ASCII,” the keys are arranged as a conventional “QWERTY” keyboard. 12 Internet Direct Connection 7 Time zone This determines the time setting for the browser. 218 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual LAN In this display page, you can make settings for the LAN connection. These settings are needed for not only wired LAN connection but also wireless LAN connection. 1 2 Make a written note of these settings, in case you have to enter the settings again. Use DHCP 3 DNS server 1 DNS server 2 IP address Subnet mask Gateway 1 Use DHCP Determines whether or not DHCP is used. If your router is compatible with DHCP, select “ON (set DNS automatically)” here. 2 DNS server 1 / DNS server 2 These determine the addresses of the primary and secondary DNS servers. These settings must be made when “Use DHCP” above is set to “ON (set DNS manually)” or “OFF.” 3 IP address / Subnet mask / Gateway These settings are available only when DHCP is not used. The settings here are: IP address, subnet mask, and gateway server address. These settings must be made when “Use DHCP” above is set to “OFF.” Wireless LAN In this display page, you can make settings for the wireless LAN connection. These settings must be the same as the settings on the Access Point. 5 Make a written note of these settings, in case you have to enter the settings again. SSID Channel Ch Encryption On Off WEP key type ASCII Hexadecimal WEP key length 64 bit 128 bit 12 Internet Direct Connection 1 2 3 4 WEP key DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 219 1 NOTE An access point that is encrypted in a non-WEP format cannot be used. NOTE If no signal from the access point is received, the access point cannot be listed. Access Point Pressing the [Display Information] button calls up the access point list. It shows the access points near the DDK-7. Once you select the desired access point and press the [OK] button, a message appears prompting confirmation of whether to transfer the access point settings to the DDK-7 or not. When you select [YES], the SSID, Channel and Encryption settings are transferred to the DDK-7. 2 SSID Determines the SSID setting. NOTE The WEP key type, length and WEP key are not entered automatically. You have to enter them by yourself if you want to use an access point that is encrypted. 3 Channel Determines the channel. 4 Encryption Determines whether or not the data is encrypted. 5 WEP key type / WEP key length / WEP key These settings are available only when Encryption above is enabled. These set the type and length of the encryption key. Others 1 2 3 4 5 NOTE When using two or more nonproxy servers, separate each server name with a comma. 12 1 Proxy server / Proxy port / Non-proxy server Determines the proxy server name, port number and the host name for a main, nonproxy server. The settings here are only necessary when using a proxy server. 2 Delete cookies Deletes the contents of all saved cookies. Internet Direct Connection 3 Delete all bookmarks Deletes all saved bookmarks. 4 Initialize setup Restores all settings in the Internet Settings displays to their defaults. See “Initializing Internet Settings” on page 221. 220 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 5 Connection information Shows detailed information on the current connection. 4 Exiting from the Internet Display Pressing any button other than [INTERNET] button quits the Internet Direct Connection and closes the website display. Pressing the [INTERNET] button again automatically opens the previously opened website. 5 Initializing Internet Settings The settings of the Internet function are not initialized when using the Initialize operation of the DDK-7 (page 23); Internet settings must be initialized separately, as explained here. Initializing will reset to the default values not only the settings of the browser, but also all settings you have made in the Internet Settings displays, including those related to Internet connection. 1 Press the [SETTING] button in the control menu to call up the Internet Settings display. 2 Press the [Others] button at the top right of the display. 3 Press the [Initialize] button to initialize the Internet settings. A message appears, prompting confirmation of the operation. 4 Internet Direct Connection 12 Select [YES] to initialize the Internet settings, or select [NO] to abort the operation. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 221 6 Glossary of Internet Terms 12 Internet Direct Connection 222 Broadband An Internet connection technology/service (such as ADSL and optical fiber) that allows for high-speed, highvolume data communication. Browser The software used to search for, access, and view web pages. For this instrument, this refers to the display that shows the contents of the web pages. Cookie A system that records certain information that the user transfers when visiting a website and using the Internet. The function is similar to a preference file in a conventional computer program, in that it “remembers” certain information such as your user name and password, so you don’t have to re-enter the information each time you visit the site. DHCP This is a standard or protocol by which IP addresses and other low-level network configuration information can be dynamically and automatically assigned each time connection is made to the Internet. DNS A system that translates names of computers connected to a network to their corresponding IP addresses. Download Transferring data over a network, from a larger “host” system to a smaller “client” system’s hard drive or other local storage device — much like copying files from your hard disk drive to a floppy disk. For this instrument, this refers to the process of transferring Song and other data from a website to the instrument. Gateway A system which links different networks or systems, and makes possible data transfer and conversion despite differing communications standards. Home page The first page shown when opening a browser and connecting to the Internet. This phrase is also used to mean the “front screen” or top page of a website. Internet A huge network made up of networks, the Internet allows high-speed data transfer among computers, mobile phones and other devices. IP address A string of numbers assigned to each computer connected to a network, and indicating the device’s location on the network. LAN Short for Local Area Network, this is a data-transfer network that connects a group of computers at a single location (such as an office or home) by means of a special cable. Link A highlighted word, button or icon within a web page that, when clicked, opens another web page. Modem A device which connects and allows data transfer between a conventional telephone line and a computer. It converts the digital signals from the computer to analog audio for sending over the phone line, and vice versa. NTP Short for Network Time Protocol, a standard for setting the internal system clock of the computer over a network. For this instrument, the internal clock of the computer is used to specify the valid time/date for cookies and SSL. Provider A communications business that offers Internet connection services. In order to connect to the Internet, it is necessary to contract to a provider. Proxy A proxy server is a server that all computers on a local network have to go through before accessing information on the Internet. It intercepts all or designated requests to the real server to see if it can fulfill the requests itself. If not, it forwards the request to the real server. Proxy servers are used to improve performance and speed, and to filter requests, usually for security and to prevent unauthorized access to an internal network. Router A device for connecting multiple computer networks. For example, a router is necessary when connecting several computers in a house or office, and allow them to all access the Internet and share data. A router is usually connected between a modem and a computer, although some modems have a built-in router. Server A hardware system or computer used as a central point for a network, providing access to files and services. Site Short for “website,” this refers to the group of web pages that are opened together. For example, the collection of web pages whose addresses begin with “http://www.yamaha.co.jp/” is referred to as the Yamaha site. SSID This is an identification name for specifying a particular network over a wireless LAN connection. Communication is possible only between terminals with matching SSID names. SSL Short for Secure Sockets Layer, a standard for transmitting confidential data such as credit card numbers over the Internet. Subnet mask A setting used to divide a large-scale network into several smaller networks. URL Short for Uniform Resource Locator, a string of characters used to identify and link to specific websites and pages on the Internet. A complete URL usually starts with the characters “http://.” Web page Refers to each individual page that makes up a website. Wireless LAN A LAN connection that allows data transfer through a wireless, cable-free connection. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 13 Connections On the backside and front left side of the DDK-7 keyboard is a separate panel equipped with various input/output terminals and miscellaneous controls. Contents 1 Accessory Jacks and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 2 Connecting Headphones or External System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 • Using Headphones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 • Playing the Sounds of the DDK-7 Through an External Audio System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 • Using a mixer for live performance. . . . . . . . . . .226 • Selecting Outputs for Each Part . . . . . . . . . . . . .228 3 Connecting a Pedal Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229 4 Connecting a Foot Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229 5 Connection with Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230 • Using the USB terminal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230 • Using the MIDI IN/OUT terminals . . . . . . . . . . . .231 6 Connecting External Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 • Recording the Sounds of the DDK-7 to an External Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 • Outputting the Sound of an External Device Through the External Speakers of the DDK-7. . . . . . . . . . 232 • Connecting a Microphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 • Controlling External MIDI Devices from the DDK-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 • Controlling the DDK-7 from an External Device . 234 • Connecting USB storage devices or USB-LAN adaptor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 7 MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 • What is MIDI? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 • MIDI Messages of the DDK-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 • MIDI Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 8 MIDI Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 1 Accessory Jacks and Controls This section provides brief explanations for each jack/control on the DDK-7. For details on connecting to external devices, see page 225. 1 5 2 1 3 4 AC INLET jack For connecting the power cable. 2 PHONES jacks For connection of a stereo headphone set. 3 Reference Page Using Headphones (page 225) MIC jack For connecting a mono input, such as a microphone. The DDK-7 outputs the microphone signal, with reverb processing, through the OUTPUT jacks or AUX OUT jacks. MIC VOLUME knob For adjusting the level of input signal from the MIC jack. Connections 4 13 Reference Page Connecting a Microphone (page 232) DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 223 5 USB TO DEVICE terminal For connecting USB storage devices such as USB flash memory. 1 2 3 1-2 1-1 4 5 6 3-1 3-2 7 7-1 8 7-2 (View from rear.) Reference Pages Foot Pedal (page 196) 1 FOOT PEDAL jacks For connecting to an optional FC4/FC5/FC7/FC9 Foot Pedal. 1 - 1 VOLUME jack For controlling the volume and a range of other important functions. Reference Pages Controlling External MIDI Devices from the DDK-7 (page 233) Controlling the DDK-7 from an External Device (page 234) Connection with Computer (page 230) 1 - 2 SUSTAIN jack For controlling the sustain and a range of other important functions. 2 MIDI IN/OUT terminals For connecting external MIDI devices such a synthesizer or sequencer. You can also use these to connect with a computer that has a MIDI Interface. 3 USB terminals What is MIDI? (page 235) 3 - 1 USB TO DEVICE terminal For connecting USB storage devices (such as USB flash memory) or a USB-LAN adaptor for connecting to the Internet. Reference Pages 3 - 2 USB TO HOST terminal Internet Direct Connection (page 209) For connecting to a computer with a USB cable. To connect to a computer, make sure that an appropriate USB-MIDI driver is installed to the computer. Connecting USB storage devices or USB-LAN adaptor (page 234) USB Connection with Computer (page 230) Reference Page 13 Recording the Sounds of the DDK-7 to an External Recorder (page 231) Connections 224 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual USB is an abbreviation for Universal Serial Bus. It is a serial interface for connecting a computer with peripheral devices. 4 OPTICAL OUT terminal For connection using an optical-fiber cable. This terminal outputs a digital signal of 44.1 kHz, 24 bits. 5 TO PEDAL terminal Reference Pages For connecting to the DDKU-P7 Pedal Unit. 6 AUX IN (Phone; L/L+R, R) jacks This pair of stereo phone jacks is for connection to an external device. The signal from the connected external device sounds from external speakers connected to the DDK-7. 7 Reference Page Outputting the Sound of an External Device Through the External Speakers of the DDK-7 (page 232) AUX OUT (LEVEL FIXED) jacks 7 - 1 SUB (1, 2) jacks For connection to an external amplifier/speaker system. These outputs can be selected for each part. The output level is fixed and cannot be controlled with the MASTER VOLUME Dial. 7 - 2 MAIN (L/L+R, R) jacks This set of stereo outputs is for connection to an external amplifier/speaker. The output level is fixed and cannot be controlled. 8 Connecting a Pedal Unit (page 229) Reference Pages Playing the Sounds of the DDK-7 Through an External Audio System (page 226) Recording the Sounds of the DDK-7 to an External Recorder (page 231) OUTPUT (L/L+R, R) jacks This set of stereo outputs is for connection to an external amplifier/speaker. The output level can be controlled. Connecting Headphones or External 2 System Before connecting the DDK-7 to other electronic components, turn off the power to all the components. Before turning the power of the components on or off, set all volume levels to minimum (0). Otherwise, electrical shock or damage to the components may occur. Using Headphones To use headphones, connect to the PHONES jack. 13 Connections PHONES DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 225 Playing the Sounds of the DDK-7 Through an External Audio System By using the OUTPUT jacks, you can connect your DDK-7 to external powered speakers. If you’re connecting the DDK-7 to a mono device, use only the OUTPUT L/ L+R jack. Speaker (Left) Speaker (Right) OUTPUT L/L+R R Using a mixer for live performance Generally, when you use the DDK-7 on stage (in concert, etc.), you should connect it to a mixer. By using a mixer, you can easily adjust the volume and tone quality of each component. To connect to a mixer, use the AUX OUT jacks of the DDK-7. The DDK-7 features two types of AUX OUT jacks: MAIN and SUB, allowing you to assign some parts of the DDK-7's output to the SUB jacks and the other parts to the MAIN jacks. In this way, you can apply effects to the specific parts or adjust the volume balance among the parts with an external mixer. For details, see “Selecting Outputs for Each Part” on page 228. Connection example Main Speakers (ex. Powerd-amp Speakers) Monitor Speaker Sound Sound External Effector Sound Keyboards Other parts MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER Some Parts AUX OUT (MAIN) L/L+R AUX OUT (SUB) R 1 Mic. Sound 13 Connections 226 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Mixer DDK-7 2 Jacks Output Type Location AUX OUT MAIN jacks L/L+R, R Unbalanced* LEVEL FIXED Backside of the keyboard AUX OUT SUB jacks 1, 2 Unbalanced LEVEL FIXED Backside of the keyboard OUTPUT jacks L/L+R, R Unbalanced LEVEL FIXED Backside of the keyboard *The Unbalanced line is intended for line-level signals. Power-on Procedure Before turning the power on to all components, set all volume levels to minimum (0) then turn on the power in the following order: (1) DDK-7 and external keyboard(s) (2) Mixer (3) Powered Speaker To turn the power off, first turn down the volume for each devices, then turn off the power in the reverse order (3 → 2 → 1). Connections 13 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 227 Selecting Outputs for Each Part You can assign each individual part of the DDK-7's sounds such as Voice, Percussion, to be output from specific AUX OUT jacks: MAIN and/or SUB. 1 Press the [UTILITY] button to call up the GLOBAL Page of the Utility display. 2 Press the [AUX OUT] button in the upper right of the display to call up the AUX OUT Page. You can assign individual parts to the AUX OUT MAIN and/or SUB jacks: each Voice section, Organ Flute Voice, Main drum, Add drum, Accompaniment, Keyboard Percussion, XG and microphone to the AUX OUT MAIN and/or SUB jacks. 3 Turn the desired output on for each part. You can select these from MAIN, SUB1, SUB2 and SUB1&2. NOTE Chorus and variation effects of the Rhythm, and Reverb are not applied to the sound output through SUB1, SUB2 and SUB1&2. NOTE The settings in the Utility display are automatically saved when another display is called up. 13 Connections 228 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual If you select a setting other than MAIN, no sound will be heard from the headphones and monitor speakers because the parts assigned to SUB1, SUB2 and SUB1&2 will not be output through the PHONES and OUTPUT jacks. Any parts assigned to the AUX OUT MAIN or SUB1&2 will be output in stereo (1: left, 2: right). Any parts assigned to AUX OUT SUB1 or SUB2 will be output in mono. 3 Connecting a Pedal Unit Connecting a Pedal Unit (DDKU-P7) to the DDK-7 allows you to use the Pedalboard, right and left Footswitches, Expression Pedal and 2nd Expression Pedal. These footoperated controls allow you to execute various performance functions and switch effects on/off, without taking your hands from the keyboard. If you connect and disconnect the Pedal Unit, you must be sure to first turn off the power of the DDK-7, then use the cable to make the connection. If you connect and disconnect the cable while the power to the DDK-7 is on, DDK-7 and the Pedal Unit can be damaged. Reference Page Voices for each keyboard (page 24) Footswitches (page 193) Expression Pedals (page 205) Dedicated Cable Messages TO PEDAL DDKU-P7 4 Connecting a Foot Pedal FOOT PEDAL 1 (VOLUME) 2 (SUSTAIN) Foot Pedal Reference Page Foot Pedal (page 196) Controlling Sustain (page 198) Controlling Melody On Chord (page 200) Controlling Lead Slide (page 199) Controlling the Solo Function (page 201) Controlling the Rhythm (page 201) Controlling Rotary Speaker (page 196) Controlling Expression (page 204) Controlling Registration Shift (page 203) Controlling Glide (page 202) 13 Connections Connecting an optional Foot Pedal (FC4/FC5/FC7/FC9) to the DDK-7 allows you to execute various performance functions and switch effects on/off, without taking your hands from the keyboard. To do this, you must assign a desired function to the Foot Pedal. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 229 5 Connection with Computer By using the USB TO HOST terminal or MIDI IN/OUT terminals, you can connect your DDK-7 to a computer and receive/transmit MIDI data (for more information about MIDI, see page 235). Before you can actually transfer data between the DDK-7 and a computer via the USB connection, you will need to install an appropriate MIDI driver. Download the latest MIDI driver software from the Yamaha web site at “http://music.yamaha.com/download/.” NOTE When you are using the M.D.R., MIDI data cannot be transferred to/from the computer. Connecting your DDK-7 to a computer opens up a whole new world of musical possibilities. You can save your original songs to computer and create notation (score writing application or sequencing software is needed), and even upload your original DDK-7 song data to your own website, to promote your talents or share songs with your friends. You can also control the DDK-7 from the computer, for example, by playing a MIDI file on the computer to play back the sounds of your DDK-7. Using the USB terminal Using the DDK-7’s USB TO HOST terminal and a standard USB cable, connect the DDK-7 and the computer. USB cable USB TO HOST Computer MIDI terminals are automatically disabled when the USB TO HOST terminal is used. Precautions when using the USB TO HOST terminals When connecting the computer to the USB TO HOST terminal, make sure to observe the following points. Failing to do so may result in freezing of the computer, corrupting data, and even losing data. If the computer or the instrument freezes, turn the power to the instrument off or restart the computer. • Before connecting the computer to the USB TO HOST terminal, exit from any power-saving mode (such as suspended, sleep, standby) of the computer. • Before turning on the power to the instrument, connect the computer to the USB TO HOST terminal. • Execute the following before turning the power to the instrument on/off or plugging/unplugging the USB cable to/from the USB TO HOST terminal. • Quit any open applications. • Make sure that data is not being transmitted from the instrument. (Data is transmitted only by playing notes on the keyboard or playing back a Song.) • While a USB device is connected to the instrument, you should wait for six seconds or more between these operations: When turning the power of the instrument off then on again, or when alternately connecting/disconnecting the USB cable. 13 Connections 230 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Using the MIDI IN/OUT terminals By using an optional MIDI interface such as the UX16, you can connect the DDK-7 to the computer, with the MIDI IN/OUT terminals on the instrument. Connect the DDK-7 and the MIDI Interface with two standard MIDI cables (one connecting the OUT terminal on the DDK-7 to the MIDI IN terminal on the interface, and the other connecting the IN terminal on the DDK-7 to the MIDI OUT terminal on the interface). Connect the MIDI interface to the computer with a USB cable. NOTE Depending on your particular MIDI interface, you may have to connect the MIDI Interface and the computer with a serial cable. MIDI Interface (for example, UX16) MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI OUT IN Computer 6 Connecting External Devices Recording the Sounds of the DDK-7 to an External Recorder You can record your DDK-7 performance to an external recorder, such as an MD recorder or cassette tape recorder, using the OPTICAL OUT terminal or AUX OUT jacks. Using the OPTICAL OUT terminal allows you to record to external media with exceptionally high-quality digital sound (providing the external recorder has an Optical In terminal). Or you can use the AUX OUT jacks. Audio cable Optical digital cable Recording LINE IN R L Cassette tape recorder, etc. If you want to record the sound input from the AUX IN jack together with the DDK-7 sound, use the AUX OUT MAIN jack. Recording R OPTICAL OUT OPTICAL IN Cassette tape recorder, etc. 13 Connections AUX OUT MAIN L/L+R NOTE DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 231 Outputting the Sound of an External Device Through the External Speakers of the DDK-7 You can connect the AUX IN jacks of the DDK-7 with the LINE OUT of an external device, such as a CD player. You can also connect the OUTPUT jacks of the DDK-7 to external speakers. The sound from the CD player is output from an external audio system via the DDK-7. First turn on the power of the external device(s), then that of the DDK-7. Reverse this order when you turn the power off. Playing Playing Speaker (Left) Speaker (Right) Playing OUTPUT (MAIN) L+L/R AUX IN R L+L/R R LINE OUT R L+L/R Stereo audio system If you’re connecting the DDK-7 to a mono device, use only the AUX IN L/L+R jack. Connecting a Microphone By connecting a microphone to the DDK-7, you can enjoy singing along with your own performance. The DDK-7 outputs your vocals through the external audio system connected to the AUX OUT or OUTPUT jacks of the DDK-7. 1 Connect your microphone to the MIC jack. A dynamic microphone is recommended. MIC 2 13 Connections 232 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Use the MIC VOLUME knob to set the microphone volume. To adjust the volume/reverb: 1 Press the [UTILITY] button on the panel to call up the Utility display. 2 Using the MIC. REVERB and VOLUME sliders in the GLOBAL Page, adjust the amount of the reverb applied to the microphone, and the volume. Reference Page Reverb (page 48) No sound from the microphone can be heard even though you raise the volume here, unless you turn the MIC VOLUME knob to the right. Similarly, no reverb can be heard even though you raise the reverb level here, unless you raise the total reverb level in the REVERB display. Controlling External MIDI Devices from the DDK-7 You can use the DDK-7 to remotely play the Voices of a MIDI keyboard (or tone generator), combining them with the DDK-7 and letting you create even richer, more multi-layered sound textures. (The MIDI receive channels of the MIDI keyboard must match the transmit channels on your DDK-7.) The DDK-7 transmits as digital data a variety of performance messages along with note information, including values that indicate how far the expression pedal is pressed down and how hard you play the keyboard. How the connected external device responds to these messages depends on the particular device. Reference Page What is MIDI? (page 235) MIDI messages NOTE MIDI cable When you are using the M.D.R., MIDI data cannot be transmitted. MIDI OUT MIDI IN Tone generator 13 Connections MIDI terminals are automatically disabled when the USB TO HOST terminal is used. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 233 Controlling the DDK-7 from an External Device NOTE When you are using the M.D.R., MIDI data cannot be received. You can use an external MIDI keyboard or sequencer to remotely play the sounds of your DDK-7 and change its Registrations. (You will need to set the MIDI transmit channels of the MIDI keyboard to match the fixed receive channels on your DDK-7.) MIDI cable MIDI messages MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI keyboard or synthesizer MIDI terminals are automatically disabled when the USB TO HOST terminal is used. Connecting USB storage devices or USB-LAN adaptor Reference Pages Internet Direct Connection (page 209) Using the USB TO DEVICE terminal(s), you can connect USB storage devices for saving your DDK-7 data, and/or a USB-LAN adaptor for direct connection to the Internet. Formatting External Media (page 103) Compatible USB devices NOTE If necessary, use a USB hub. Only self-powered (battery or external power supply) types can be used. USB hubs of up to one levels can be used. You can connect a single USB-LAN adaptor and up to two USB storage devices (such as USB flash memory) to the USB TO DEVICE terminal(s). Before purchasing a USBLAN adaptor or USB storage devices, please consult your Yamaha dealer, or an authorized Yamaha distributor for advice, or see the Yamaha website (http:// www.global.yamaha.com/). Precautions when using the USB TO DEVICE terminals • Never turn the USB device’s power on/off and never plug/unplug the USB cable when the connected USB storage device is of the self-powered type. Doing so may result in the operation of the DDK-7 “freezing” or hanging up. • While the instrument is accessing data (such as Save, Load, and Delete operations), do NOT unplug the USB cable, do NOT remove the media from the device, and do NOT turn the power off to either device. Doing so may corrupt the data on either or both devices. 13 Connections 234 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 7 MIDI This section explains what MIDI is, and what it can do, as well as how you can use MIDI on your DDK-7. What is MIDI? No doubt you have heard the terms “acoustic instrument” and “digital instrument.” In the world today, these are the two main categories of instruments. Let’s consider a grand piano and a classical guitar as representative acoustic instruments. They are easy to understand. With the piano, you strike a key, and a hammer inside hits some strings and plays a note. With the guitar, you directly pluck a string and the note sounds. But how does a digital instrument go about playing a note? Digital instrument note production Acoustic guitar note production L Internal amp Tone generator Internal amp (Electric circuit) R Playing the keyboard Pluck a string and the body resonates the sound. Based on playing information from the keyboard, a sampled note stored in the tone generator is played through the speakers. As shown in the illustration above, in an electronic instrument the sampled note (previously recorded note) stored in the tone generator section (electronic circuit) is played based on information received from the keyboard, and output through the speakers. So then what is the information from the keyboard that becomes the basis for note production? For example, let’s say you play a “C” quarter note using the grand piano sound on the keyboard. Unlike an acoustic instrument that puts out a resonated note, the electronic instrument puts out information from the keyboard such as “with what Voice,” “with which key,” “about how strong,” “when was it pressed” and “when was it released.” Then each piece of information is changed into a number value and sent to the tone generator. Using these numbers as a basis, the tone generator plays the stored sampled note. Example of Keyboard Information Voice number (with what Voice) 01 (grand piano) Note number (with which key) 60 (C3) Note on (when was it pressed) Timing expressed numerically (quarter note) Velocity (about how strong) 120 (strong) 13 Connections As described above, your keyboard performance and panel operations such as Voice selection are handled as MIDI events. All rhythm-related data – including rhythm patterns, auto accompaniment patterns, Rhythm Sequences, etc. – also consist of MIDI messages. DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 235 MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) allows electronic musical instruments to communicate with each other, by sending and receiving compatible Note, Control Change, Program Change and various other types of MIDI data, or messages. MIDI Messages of the DDK-7 MIDI messages can be divided into two groups: the Channel Messages and System Messages. Channel Messages consist of data related to the performance on the keyboard for a specific channel. System Messages consist of data that allows several MIDI devices to communicate with each other. Channel Messages Each time you play the keyboard on the DDK-7, channel messages (indicating which keys are played and how strongly) are transmitted via a specific channel. Similarly, the DDK-7 can be played remotely when receiving this data from an external keyboard. Note On: Indicates which keys are played with the note numbers 0 through 127. The reception note range is C-2 (0) – G8 (127), C3 = 60. Note Off: Generated when a key is released. Velocity: Indicates how strongly the key is played. The range is 1 – 127. For more detailed information, see MIDI Data Format on page 248 and MIDI Implementation Chart on page 261. • Program Change Program Change messages allow you to change Voices in the middle of a song. With these messages you can change the Registrations of the DDK-7. For more detailed information, see MIDI Data Format on page 248 and MIDI Implementation Chart on page 261. • Control Change Control Change Messages let you select Voice banks, control the volume, panning, modulation, portamento time, brightness and various other sound parameters, through specific Control Change numbers. For more detailed information on the Control Change messages available on the DDK7, see MIDI Data Format on page 248 and MIDI Implementation Chart on page 261. System Messages • System Exclusive Messages System Exclusive messages are used to exchange the system and Voice/Registration data. 13 Connections 236 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual MIDI Channels MIDI data is assigned to one of sixteen MIDI channels. Using these channels, 1 – 16, the performance data for sixteen different instrument parts can be simultaneously sent over one MIDI cable. Think of the MIDI channels as TV channels. Each TV station transmits its broadcasts over a specific channel. Your home TV set receives many different programs simultaneously from several TV stations and you select the appropriate channel to watch the desired program. Weather Report NEWS 1 2 NEWS 2 MIDI operates on the same basic principle. The transmitting instrument sends MIDI data on a specific MIDI channel (MIDI Transmit Channel) via a single MIDI cable to the receiving instrument. If the receiving instrument’s MIDI channel (MIDI Receive Channel) matches the Transmit Channel, the receiving instrument will sound according to the data sent by the transmitting instrument. MIDI cable MIDI Transmit channel 2 MIDI Receive channel 2 The receive channel of the DDK-7 is fixed at channel 1 for the Upper Keyboard, channel 2 for the Lower Keyboard, and channel 3 for the Pedalboard. This means that when you are using another MIDI device to play the DDK-7’s Voices, you must set the MIDI transmit channel(s) of the connected device to match the receive channel(s) of the DDK-7. You can select the transmit channel for each keyboard (Upper, Lower and Pedal) from channels 1 – 16. See page 238 for more information. Connections 13 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 237 8 MIDI Control When you connect your DDK-7 with a second MIDI device (such as a synthesizer or computer), you can determine how the DDK-7 controls that MIDI device, or how the DDK-7 is controlled. 1 Press the [UTILITY] button in the panel to call up the Utility Display. 2 Press the [MIDI] button at the top right of the display to call up the MIDI Page. 1 2 3 3-1 1 3 -2 3 -3 OUTPUT For setting the channels over which MIDI information will be transmitted. Any channel from 1 through 16 can be assigned to the Upper keyboard, the Lower keyboard, the Pedalboard, Sustain, Expression Pedal and 2nd Expression Pedal. The MIDI messages on each keyboard will be sent on the channels set here. You must set the transmit channel here to match the receive channel of the connected device. Pressing each OUTPUT button calls up the channel selection pop-up menu. After you select the desired channel, the pop-up menu automatically closes. Sustain, Expression Pedal and 2nd Expression Pedal can be set to “OFF” (MIDI information will not be transmitted.) 2 MIDI OUT FILTER Deletes unnecessary MIDI data and keeps it from being transmitted from the DDK-7. After Touch, second Expression and Rhythm start/stop are automatically filtered. Set the parameter for which you wish to disable transmission to ON. 13 Connections 238 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 3 INTERNAL/EXTERNAL Switches control over the displayed items between the DDK-7 (INTERNAL) or the connected device (EXTERNAL). 3 - 1 LEAD 1 Determines Internal or External control of the Lead Voices. INT. (Internal): Lead Voice 1 is played from the Upper keyboard of the DDK-7. (If the To Lower function is on, it is played from Lower keyboard.) EXT. (External): The Lead Voice 1 is played from the connected instrument via MIDI channel 4. 3 - 2 SYNC. To synchronize playback with an external MIDI device, you can use either the instrument’s internal clock (int.) or MIDI clock signals from the external device (ext.). INT. (Internal): The instrument uses its own internal clock. EXT. (External): The instrument uses MIDI clock signals from the external device (midi). 3 - 3 EXPRESSION Determines the control of the expression pedal functions. Ordinarily, this control is set to AUTO. AUTO: Internal and External is automatically switched. INT. (Internal): You can manually control the expression pedal and Foot Pedal even during M.D.R. playback. EXT. (External): While playing the M.D.R. or receiving MIDI messages, the expression pedal and Foot Pedal is invalid. (The volume is controlled by the recorded data in a USB flash memory or received MIDI data.) Connections 13 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 239 14 Appendix XG Voice & Drum List Only for XG song playback. Voice Number Appendix 14 240 MSB LSB PRG 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 18 40 41 0 1 0 1 32 40 41 0 1 0 1 18 32 40 45 64 0 1 32 33 34 40 41 42 45 0 1 25 35 0 1 27 64 65 0 0 0 64 0 1 45 0 1 64 97 98 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 8 9 10 11 11 12 12 12 13 13 13 13 13 Voice Name XG GrandPiano XG GrndPianoKSP XG MellowGrPno XG PianoStrings XG Dream XG BrightPiano XG BritePnoKSP XG El.GrandPiano XG El.GrndPnoKSP XG DetunedCP80 XG LayeredCP1 XG LayeredCP2 XG Honkytonk XG HonkytonkKSP XG El.Piano1 XG El.Piano1KSP XG MellowEP1 XG ChorusEP1 XG HardEl.Piano XG VXfadeEl.P1 XG 60’sEl.Piano1 XG El.Piano2 XG El.Piano2KSP XG ChorusEP2 XG DXEPHard XG DXLegend XG DXPhaseEP XG DX+AnalogEP XG DXKotoEP XG VXfadeEl.P2 XG Harpsichord XG Harpsi.KSP XG Harpsichord2 XG Harpsichord3 XG Clavi. XG Clavi.KSP XG Clavi.Wah XG PulseClavi. XG PierceClavi. XG Celesta XG Glockenspiel XG MusicBox XG Orgel XG Vibraphone XG VibesKSP XG HardVibes XG Marimba XG MarimbaKSP XG SineMarimba XG Balimba XG LogDrums DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Category PIANO CHROMATIC PERC. Voice Number MSB LSB PRG 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 96 97 0 35 96 97 0 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 40 64 65 66 67 0 24 32 33 37 0 64 65 66 0 32 35 40 64 65 0 40 0 32 0 32 0 64 0 16 25 43 96 0 16 14 15 15 15 16 16 16 16 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 18 18 18 18 18 19 19 19 19 20 20 20 20 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 25 25 25 26 26 Voice Name XG Xylophone XG TubularBells XG ChurchBells XG Carillon XG Dulcimer XG Dulcimer2 XG Cimbalom XG Santur XG DrawbarOrgan XG DetDrawOrg XG 60’sDrawOrg1 XG 60’sDrawOrg2 XG 70’sDrawOrg1 XG DrawbarOrgan2 XG 60’sDrawOrg3 XG EvenBarOrg XG 16+2’2_3Org XG OrganBass XG 70’sDrawOrg2 XG CheezyOrgan XG DrawbarOrgan3 XG Perc.Organ XG 70’sPercOrg1 XG Det.Perc.Org XG LightOrgan XG Perc.Organ2 XG RockOrgan XG RotaryOrgan XG SlowRotary XG FastRotary XG ChurchOrgan XG ChurchOrgan3 XG ChurchOrgan2 XG NotreDame XG OrganFlute XG Trem.OrganFl XG ReedOrgan XG PuffOrgan XG Accordion XG AccordIt XG Harmonica XG Harmonica2 XG TangoAccord XG TangoAccord2 XG NylonGuitar XG NylonGuitar2 XG NylonGuitar3 XG Vel.GtrHarmo XG Ukulele XG SteelGuitar XG SteelGuitar2 Category CHROMATIC PERC. ORGAN GUITAR LSB PRG 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 35 40 41 96 0 18 32 0 32 0 40 41 43 45 0 43 0 40 41 0 65 66 0 40 45 0 18 27 40 43 45 65 0 28 0 32 33 34 96 97 0 27 32 0 43 0 18 20 24 35 40 64 65 66 96 0 6 12 26 26 26 26 27 27 27 28 28 29 29 29 29 29 30 30 31 31 31 32 32 32 33 33 33 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 35 35 36 36 36 36 36 36 37 37 37 38 38 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 40 40 40 Voice Name XG 12StrGuitar XG Nylon&Steel XG Steel&Body XG Mandolin XG JazzGuitar XG MellowGuitar XG JazzAmp XG CleanGuitar XG ChorusGuitar XG MutedGuitar XG FunkGuitar1 XG MuteSteelGtr XG FunkGuitar2 XG JazzMan XG Overdriven XG GuitarPinch XG Distortion XG FeedbackGtr XG FeedbackGtr2 XG GtrHarmonics XG GtrFeedback XG GtrHarmonics2 XG AcousticBass XG JazzRhythm XG VXUprghtBass XG FingerBass XG FingerDark XG FlangeBass XG Bass&DistEG XG FingerSlap XG FingerBass2 XG ModulatedBass XG PickBass XG MutePickBass XG FretlessBass XG FretlessBass2 XG FretlessBass3 XG FretlessBass4 XG Syn.Fretless XG SmthFretless XG SlapBass1 XG ResonantSlap XG PunchThumb XG SlapBass2 XG Vel.SwSlap XG SynthBass1 XG SynBass1Dark XG FastResoBass XG AcidBass XG Clavi.Bass XG TechnoBass XG Orbiter XG SquareBass XG RubberBass XG Hammer XG SynthBass2 XG MellowSyBass XG SequencedBass Category GUITAR BASS Voice Number MSB LSB PRG 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 18 19 32 40 41 64 0 8 0 0 0 0 8 40 0 0 40 0 0 3 8 24 35 40 41 42 45 0 3 8 40 41 64 65 0 27 64 65 0 0 3 16 32 40 0 0 40 41 64 0 35 64 0 16 17 32 0 18 40 40 40 40 40 40 41 41 42 43 44 45 45 45 46 47 47 48 49 49 49 49 49 49 49 49 49 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 51 51 51 51 52 53 53 53 53 53 54 55 55 55 55 56 56 56 57 57 57 57 58 58 Voice Name XG ClickSynBass XG SynBass2Dark XG SmoothSyBass XG ModulrSyBass XG DXBass XG XWireBass XG Violin XG SlwAtkViolin XG Viola XG Cello XG Contrabass XG Trem.Strings XG SlwAtTremStr XG SuspenseStr XG PizzicatoStr XG Orch.Harp XG YangChin XG Timpani XG Strings1 XG StereoStrings XG SlwAtkStrings XG ArcoStrings XG 60’sStrings XG Orchestra XG Orchestra2 XG TremOrchestra XG Vel.Strings XG Strings2 XG S.SlowStrings XG LegatoStrings XG WarmStrings XG Kingdom XG 70’sStrings XG Strings3 XG SynStrings1 XG ResoStrings XG SynStrings4 XG SynStrings5 XG SynStrings2 XG ChoirAahs XG StereoChoir XG ChoirAahs2 XG MellowChoir XG ChoirStrings XG VoiceOohs XG SynthVoice XG SynthVoice2 XG Choral XG AnalogVoice XG OrchestraHit XG OrchestraHit2 XG Impact XG Trumpet XG Trumpet2 XG BriteTrumpet XG WarmTrumpet XG Trombone XG Trombone2 Category BASS STRINGS ENSEMBLE Appendix Voice Number MSB BRASS DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 14 241 Voice Number Appendix 14 242 MSB LSB PRG 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 16 0 0 6 32 37 0 35 40 41 42 0 12 20 24 27 32 45 64 0 18 40 41 45 64 0 0 40 43 0 40 41 64 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 8 18 19 64 65 66 0 6 8 59 59 60 61 61 61 61 62 62 62 62 62 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 64 64 64 64 64 64 65 66 66 66 67 67 67 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 81 81 81 81 81 81 81 82 82 82 Voice Name XG Tuba XG Tuba2 XG MutedTrumpet XG FrenchHorn XG FrHornSolo XG FrenchHorn2 XG HornOrchestra XG BrassSection XG Tp&TbSection XG BrassSection2 XG HighBrass XG MellowBrass XG SynthBrass1 XG QuackBrass XG ResoSynBrass XG PolyBrass XG SynthBrass3 XG JumpBrass XG AnaVel.Brass1 XG AnalogBrass1 XG SynthBrass2 XG SoftBrass XG SynthBrass4 XG ChoirBrass XG AnaVel.Brass2 XG AnalogBrass2 XG SopranoSax XG AltoSax XG SaxSection XG HyperAltoSax XG TenorSax XG BreathyTenor XG SoftTenorSax XG TenorSax2 XG BaritoneSax XG Oboe XG EnglishHorn XG Bassoon XG Clarinet XG Piccolo XG Flute XG Recorder XG PanFlute XG BlownBottle XG Shakuhachi XG Whistle XG Ocarina XG SquareLead XG SquareLead2 XG LMSquare XG Hollow XG Shroud XG Mellow XG SoloSine XG SineLead XG SawtoothLead XG SawtoothLead2 XG ThickSaw DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Category BRASS REED PIPE SYNTH LEAD Voice Number MSB LSB PRG 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 18 19 20 24 25 40 41 45 96 0 65 0 64 0 64 65 0 24 64 0 35 0 16 64 65 0 64 0 16 17 18 64 65 0 64 65 66 67 0 64 66 67 0 64 65 0 64 65 0 0 20 27 64 66 0 45 64 65 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 83 83 84 84 85 85 85 86 86 86 87 87 88 88 88 88 89 89 90 90 90 90 90 90 91 91 91 91 91 92 92 92 92 93 93 93 94 94 94 95 96 96 96 96 96 97 97 97 97 Voice Name XG DynamicSaw XG DigitalSaw XG BigLead XG HeavySynth XG WaspySynth XG PulseSaw XG Dr.Lead XG VelocityLead XG Seq.Analog XG CalliopeLead XG PurePad XG ChiffLead XG Rubby XG CharangLead XG DistortedLead XG WireLead XG VoiceLead XG SynthAahs XG VoxLead XG FifthsLead XG BigFive XG Bass&Lead XG Big&Low XG Fat&Perky XG SoftWhirl XG NewAgePad XG Fantasy XG WarmPad XG ThickPad XG SoftPad XG SinePad XG HornPad XG RotaryStrings XG PolySynthPad XG PolyPad80 XG ClickPad XG AnalogPad XG SquarePad XG ChoirPad XG Heaven XG Itopia XG CCPad XG BowedPad XG Glacier XG GlassPad XG MetallicPad XG TinePad XG PanPad XG HaloPad XG SweepPad XG Shwimmer XG Converge XG PolarPad XG Celestial XG Rain XG Clavi.Pad XG HarmoRain XG AfricanWind Category SYNTH LEAD SYNTH PAD SYNTH EFFECTS LSB PRG 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 66 0 27 64 0 12 14 18 35 40 41 42 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 0 18 19 40 64 65 66 67 0 64 96 0 64 65 66 67 68 70 71 96 0 8 14 64 65 66 67 68 69 0 64 0 32 35 96 97 0 97 98 98 98 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 101 101 101 102 102 102 102 102 102 102 102 102 103 103 103 103 103 103 103 103 103 104 104 105 105 105 105 105 106 Voice Name XG Carib XG SoundTrack XG Prologue XG Ancestral XG Crystal XG SynthDr.Comp XG Popcorn XG TinyBells XG RoundGlocken XG GlockenChime XG ClearBells XG ChorusBells XG SynthMallet XG SoftCrystal XG LoudGlocken XG ChristmasBel XG VibeBells XG DigitalBells XG AirBells XG BellHarp XG Gamelimba XG Atmosphere XG WarmAtmos. XG HollowRelease XG NylonEl.Piano XG NylonHarp XG HarpVox XG Atmos.Pad XG Planet XG Brightness XG FantasyBells XG Smokey XG Goblins XG GoblinsSynth XG Creeper XG RingPad XG Ritual XG ToHeaven XG Night XG Glisten XG BellChoir XG Echoes XG Echoes2 XG EchoPan XG EchoBells XG BigPan XG SynthPiano XG Creation XG StarDust XG Reso&Panning XG Sci-Fi XG Starz XG Sitar XG DetunedSitar XG Sitar2 XG Tambra XG Tamboura XG Banjo Category SYNTH EFFECTS ETHNIC Voice Number MSB LSB PRG 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 28 96 97 98 0 0 96 97 0 0 0 0 64 96 97 0 96 97 98 99 100 101 0 0 97 98 0 96 0 96 0 64 65 66 0 64 65 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 106 106 106 106 107 108 108 108 109 110 111 112 112 112 112 113 113 113 113 113 113 113 114 115 115 115 116 116 117 117 118 118 118 118 119 119 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 1 2 4 17 33 34 35 36 37 38 49 50 Voice Name XG MutedBanjo XG Rabab XG Gopichant XG Oud XG Shamisen XG Koto XG Taisho-kin XG Kanoon XG Kalimba XG Bagpipe XG Fiddle XG Shanai XG Shanai2 XG Pungi XG Hichiriki XG TinkleBell XG Bonang XG Altair XG GamelanGongs XG StereoGamelan XG RamaCymbal XG AsianBells XG Agogo XG SteelDrums XG GlassPerc. XG ThaiBells XG Woodblock XG Castanets XG TaikoDrum XG GranCassa XG MelodicTom XG MelodicTom2 XG RealTom XG RockTom XG SynthDrum XG AnalogTom XG ElectroPerc. XG Rev.Cymbal XG GtrFretNoise XG BreathNoise XG Seashore XG BirdTweet XG TelephoneRing XG Helicopter XG Applause XG Gunshot XG CuttingNoise XG CuttingNoise2 XG StringSlap XG Fl.KeyClick XG Shower XG Thunder XG Wind XG Stream XG Bubble XG Feed XG Dog XG Horse Category ETHNIC PERCUSSION SOUND EFFECTS DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Appendix Voice Number MSB 14 243 Voice Number MSB LSB PRG 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 126 126 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 51 55 56 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 97 98 99 100 101 113 114 115 116 1 2 5 9 17 25 26 28 33 41 49 1 2 Voice Name XG BirdTweet2 XG Ghost XG Maou XG PhoneCall XG DoorSqueak XG DoorSlam XG ScratchCut XG ScratchSplit XG WindChime XG TelphoneRing2 XG CarEngineIgn XG CarTiresSqel XG CarPassing XG CarCrash XG Siren XG Train XG JetPlane XG Starship XG Burst XG RollrCoaster XG Submarine XG Laugh XG Scream XG Punch XG Heartbeat XG FootSteps XG MachineGun XG LaserGun XG Explosion XG Firework Standard Kit 1 Standard Kit 2 Hit Kit Room Kit Rock Kit Electro Kit Analog Kit Dance Kit Jazz Kit Brush Kit Symphony Kit SFX Kit 1 SFX Kit 2 Appendix 14 244 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Category SOUND EFFECTS DRUM *Refer to Drum Kit Map XG Drum Map 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 Standard Kit 1 (127/0/1) Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Castanet Snare Soft Sticks Kick Soft Open Rim Shot Kick Tight Kick Side Stick Snare Hand Clap Snare Tight Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree No Sound Key Off Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Standard Kit 2 (127/0/2) Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Castanet Snare Soft 2 Sticks Kick Soft Open Rim Shot H Kick Tight Kick Short Side Stick Light Snare Short Hand Clap Snare Tight H Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Key Off Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Hit Kit (127/0/5) Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Castanet Snare Electro Sticks Kick Tight L Snare Pitched Kick Wet Kick Tight H Stick Ambient Snare Ambient Hand Clap Snare Tight 2 Hybrid Tom 1 Hi-Hat Closed 2 Hybrid Tom 2 Hi-Hat Pedal 2 Hybrid Tom 3 Hi-Hat Open 2 Hybrid Tom 4 Hybrid Tom 5 Crash Cymbal 1 Hybrid Tom 6 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Light Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Key Off Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Room Kit (127/0/9) Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Castanet Snare Soft Sticks Kick Soft Open Rim Shot Kick Tight Kick Side Stick Snare Snappy Hand Clap Snare Tight Snap Tom Room 1 Hi-Hat Closed Tom Room 2 Hi-Hat Pedal Tom Room 3 Hi-Hat Open Tom Room 4 Tom Room 5 Crash Cymbal 1 Tom Room 6 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Key Off Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Rock Kit (127/0/17) Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Castanet Snare Noisy Sticks Kick Soft Open Rim Shot Kick 2 Kick Gate Side Stick Snare Rock Hand Clap Snare Rock Tight Tom Rock 1 Hi-Hat Closed Tom Rock 2 Hi-Hat Pedal Tom Rock 3 Hi-Hat Open Tom Rock 4 Tom Rock 5 Crash Cymbal 1 Tom Rock 6 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Key Off Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Electro Kit (127/0/25) Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Reverse Cymbal Snare Roll Hi Q 2 Snare Snap Elec Sticks Kick 3 Open Rim Shot Kick Gate Kick Gate Heavy Side Stick Snare Noisy 2 Hand Clap Snare Noisy 3 Tom Electro 1 Hi-Hat Closed Tom Electro 2 Hi-Hat Pedal Tom Electro 3 Hi-Hat Open Tom Electro 4 Tom Electro 5 Crash Cymbal 1 Tom Electro 6 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Scratch H 2 Scratch L 2 Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Key Off Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Appendix MSB/LSB/PC Note 14 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 245 MSB/LSB/ PCNote Appendix 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 14 246 Analog Kit (127/0/26) Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Reverse Cymbal Snare Roll Hi Q 2 Snare Noisy 4 Sticks Kick 3 Open Rim Shot Kick Anlg Short Kick Analog Side Stick Anlg Snare Analog Hand Clap Snare Analog 2 Tom Analog 1 Hat Close Analog Tom Analog 2 Hat Close Anlg 2 Tom Analog 3 Hat Open Analog Tom Analog 4 Tom Analog 5 Crash Analog Tom Analog 6 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Analog Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga Analog H Conga Analog M Conga Analog L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas 2 Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves 2 Wood Block H Wood Block L Scratch H 2 Scratch L 2 Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Key Off Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Dance Kit (127/0/28) Kick Dance 1 Kick Dance 2 Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch Dance 1 Scratch Dance 2 Finger Snap Click Noise Dance Perc 1 Reverse Dance 1 Dance Perc 2 Hi Q Dance 1 Snare Analog 3 Vinyl Noise Snare Analog 4 Reverse Cymbal Reverse Dance 2 Hi Q 2 Snare Techno Snare Dance 1 Kick Techno Q Rim Gate Kick Techno L Kick Techno Side Stick Anlg Snare Clap Dance Clap Snare Dry Tom Dance 1 Hi-Hat Closed 3 Tom Dance 2 Hat Close Anlg 3 Tom Dance 3 Hi-Hat Open 3 Tom Dance 4 Tom Dance 5 Crash Analog Tom Dance 6 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Anlg Splash Cymbal Cowbell Dance Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Analog Ride Analog Bongo Analog H Bongo Analog L Conga Analog H Conga Analog M Conga Analog L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas 2 Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves 2 Dance Perc 3 Dance Perc 4 Dance Breath 1 Dance Breath 2 Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Key Off Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Jazz Kit (127/0/33) Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Castanet Snare Jazz H Sticks Kick Soft Open Rim Shot Kick Tight Kick Jazz Side Stick Light Snare Jazz L Hand Clap Snare Jazz M Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Key Off Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Brush Kit (127/0/41) Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Castanet Brush Slap 2 Sticks Kick Soft Open Rim Shot Kick Tight Kick Jazz Side Stick Light Brush Slap 3 Hand Clap Brush Tap 2 Tom Brush 1 Hi-Hat Closed Tom Brush 2 Hi-Hat Pedal Tom Brush 3 Hi-Hat Open Tom Brush 4 Tom Brush 5 Crash Cymbal 1 Tom Brush 6 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Key Off Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Symphony Kit (127/0/49) Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Castanet Snare Soft Sticks Kick Soft 2 Open Rim Shot Gran Cassa Gran Cassa Mute Side Stick Band Snare Hand Clap Band Snare 2 Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Hand Cymbal High Tom Hand Cymbal S Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Hand Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Hand Cymbal 2 S Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Key Off SFX Kit 1 (126/0/1) Key Off Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Cutting Noise 1 Cutting Noise 2 Ø Ø String Slap Ø Flute Key Click Ø Shower Thunder Wind Stream Bubble Feed Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Dog Horse Bird Tweet Ø Ø Ø Ghost Maou Ø Ø Ø 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 SFX Kit 2 (126/0/2) Key Off Phone Call Door Squeak Door Slam Scratch Cut Scratch H 3 Wind Chime Telephone Ring Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø CarEngnIgnition Car Tires Squeal Car Passing Car Crash Siren Train Jet Plane Starship Burst Roller Coaster Submarine Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Laugh Scream Punch Heart Beat Foot Steps Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Machine Gun Laser Gun Explosion Firework Ø Ø Ø Ø Appendix MSB/LSB/ PCNote 14 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 247 MIDI Data Format 1. Channel Messages 1.1 DDK Mode “˛” indicates “Not available.” “Ø” indicates “Available.” Code (Hexadecimal) Appendix 14 248 Receive Transmit 8n, nn, 00-7F Note Off Function 1ch 2ch 3ch (4ch)* 5-14ch 15ch ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ UK LK PEDAL LEAD 1 XG Keyboard Percussion 9n, nn, 00 9n, nn, 01-7F Note Off Note On 1ch 2ch 3ch (4ch)* 5-14ch 15ch (1ch)* (2ch)* (3ch)* ˛ ˛ ˛ UK LK PEDAL LEAD 1 XG Keyboard Percussion An, nn, 00-7F Polyphonic After Touch 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 00, 00-7F Bn, 20, 00-7F Bank select 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 01, 00-7F Modulation 5-14ch Bn, 04, 00-7F 2nd Expression Bn, 05, 00-7F Portamento Time 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 06, 00-7F Bn, 26, 00-7F Data Entry 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 07, 00-7F Volume 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 0A, 00-7F Pan 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 0B, 00-7F Expression 16ch 5-14ch (16ch)* Control XG Bn, 40, 00-7F Sustain Hold 16ch 5-14ch (16ch)* ˛ Control XG Bn, 41, 00-7F Portamento 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 42, 00-7F Sostenuto 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 43, 00-7F Soft Pedal 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 47, 00-7F Resonance 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 48, 00-7F Release Time 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 49, 00-7F Attack Time 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 4A, 00-7F Brightness 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 4B, 00-7F Decay Time 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 4C, 00-7F Vibrato Rate 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 4D, 00-7F Vibrato Depth 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 4E, 00-7F Vibrato Delay 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 54, 00-7F Portamento Control 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 5B, 00-7F Reverb Send Level 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 5D, 00-7F Chorus Send Level 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 5E, 00-7F Variation Effect Send Level 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 60, 00-7F Bn, 61, 00-7F Data Increment Data Decrement 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 62, 00-7F Bn, 63, 00-7F NRPN LSB NRPN MSB 5-14ch ˛ XG Bn, 64, 00-7F Bn, 65, 00-7F RPN LSB RPN MSB 5-14ch ˛ XG DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 16ch (4ch)* ˛ 16ch (4ch)** Remarks XG Control LEAD 1 Code (Hexadecimal) Function Receive Transmit Remarks Bn, 78, 00 Bn, 79, 00 Bn, 7B, 00 Bn, 7C, 00 Bn, 7D, 00 Bn, 7E, 00 Bn, 7F, 00 All Sound Off Reset All Controllers All Note Off Omni Off Omni On Mono Poly 5-14ch ˛ XG Cn, nn Program Change 5-14ch 16ch ˛ 16ch XG Control Dn, 00-7F After Touch 1ch 2ch 3ch (4ch)* 5-14ch (1ch)* (2ch)* ˛ UK LK PEDAL LEAD 1 XG En, 00-7F, 00-7F Pitch Bend 1ch 2ch (4ch)* ˛ ˛ ˛ (1-16ch)* ˛ UK LK LEAD 1 XG * Can be changed in the MIDI settings (page 238). ** Can be output when assigned to channel 4. 1.2 XG Mode Code (Hexadecimal) Function Receive 1-16ch Transmit 8n, nn, 00-7F Note Off 9n, nn, 00 9n, nn, 01-7F Note On Note Off An, nn, 00-7F Polyphonic After Touch 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 00, 00-7F Bn, 20, 00-7F Bank select 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 01, 00-7F Modulation Remarks ˛ (1ch)* (2ch)* (3ch)* UK LK PEDAL 1-16ch ˛ 1-16ch Bn, 04, 00-7F 2nd Expression Bn, 05, 00-7F Portamento Time 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 06, 00-7F Bn, 26, 00-7F Data Entry 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 07, 00-7F Volume 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 0A, 00-7F Pan 1-16ch Bn, 0B, 00-7F Expression ˛ 16ch (4ch)** Control LEAD 1 ˛ (16ch)* Control Control Bn, 40, 00-7F Sustain Hold 1-16ch (16ch)* ˛ Bn, 41, 00-7F Portamento 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 42, 00-7F Sostenuto 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 43, 00-7F Soft Pedal 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 47, 00-7F Resonance 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 48, 00-7F Release Time 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 49, 00-7F Attack Time 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 4A, 00-7F Brightness 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 4B, 00-7F Decay Time 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 4C, 00-7F Vibrato Rate 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 4D, 00-7F Vibrato Depth 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 4E, 00-7F Vibrato Delay 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 54, 00-7F Portamento Control 1-16ch ˛ Appendix 1-16ch 14 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 249 Code (Hexadecimal) Function Receive Transmit Bn, 5B, 00-7F Reverb Send Level 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 5D, 00-7F Chorus Send Level 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 5E, 00-7F Variation Effect Send Level 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 60, 00-7F Bn, 61, 00-7F Data Increment Data Decrement 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 62, 00-7F Bn, 63, 00-7F NRPN LSB NRPN MSB 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 64, 00-7F Bn, 65, 00-7F RPN LSB RPN MSB 1-16ch ˛ Bn, 78, 00 Bn, 79, 00 Bn, 7B, 00 Bn, 7C, 00 Bn, 7D, 00 Bn, 7E, 00 Bn, 7F, 00 All Sound Off Reset All Controllers All Note Off Omni Off Omni On Mono Poly 1-16ch ˛ Cn, 00-7F Program Change Remarks 16ch Control (1ch)* (2ch)* ˛ UK LK PEDAL 1-16ch Dn, 00-7F After Touch 1-16ch En, 00-7F, 00-7F Pitch Bend 1-16ch ˛ ˛ ˛ (1-16ch)* UK LK * Can be changed in the MIDI settings (page 238). ** Can be output when assigned to channel 4. 2. Realtime Messages Receive Transmit F8 Code (Hexadecimal) Clock Function Ø* Ø FA Start Ø Ø FC Stop Ø Ø FE Active Sensing Ø Ø FF Reset ˛ ˛ Remarks * Received only when in the Ext. mode 3. System Exclusive Messages 3.1 Format Universal Realtime Messages Code (Hexadecimal) Appendix 14 250 Message Receive Transmit F0, 7F, 7F, 04, 01, SS, TT, F7 XN GM2 Master Volume Ø ˛ F0, 7F, 7F, 04, 03, SS, TT, F7 XN GM2 Master Fine Tuning Ø ˛ F0, 7F, 7F, 04, 04, 00, TT, F7 XN GM2 Master Coarse Tuning Ø ˛ F0, 7F, 7F, 04, 05, 01, 01, 01, 01, 01, PP, VV, ..., F7 XN GM2 Reverb Parameter Ø ˛ F0, 7F, 7F, 04, 05, 01, 01, 01, 01, 02, PP, VV, ..., F7 XN GM2 Chorus Parameter Ø ˛ F0, 7F, 7F, 09, 01, 0n, PP, VV, ..., F7 XN GM2 After Touch Parameter Ø ˛ DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Code (Hexadecimal) Message Receive Transmit F0, 7F, 7F, 09, 03, 0n, CC, PP, VV, ..., F7 XN GM2 Control Change Parameter Ø ˛ F0, 7F, 7F, 0A, 01, 0n, KK, CC, PP, VV, ..., F7 XN GM2 Key-Based Controller Ø ˛ Universal Non-Realtime Messages Receive Transmit F0, 7E, 7F, 09, 01, F7 XN Code (Hexadecimal) GM ON Message Ø ˛ F0, 7E, 7F, 09, 03, F7 XN GM2 ON Ø ˛ F0, 7E, 7F, 09, 02, F7 XN GM OFF Ø ˛ F0, 7E, 7F, 08, 08, JJ, GG, MM, ..data.., F7 XN GM2 Scale/Octave Tuning Ø ˛ XG Native Receive Transmit F0, 43, 1N, 4C, AH, AM, AL, ..data.., F7 Code (Hexadecimal) XG Parameter Change Message Ø ˛ F0, 43, 0N, 4C, BH, BL, AH, AM, AL, ..data.., cc, F7 XG Bulk Dump Ø ˛ F0, 43, 1N, 27, 30, 00, 00, MM, LL, cc, F7 XG Master Tuning Ø ˛ Receive Transmit Ø Ø ˛ ˛ Clavinova Exclusive Code (Hexadecimal) F0, 43, 73, 01, 02, F7 03 Message Request for Internal Synch. Mode Request for External Synch. Mode Message Exclusive Receive Transmit F0, 43, 60, 7A, F7 Code (Hexadecimal) Rhythm Start Message Ø ˛ F0, 43, 60, 7D, F7 Rhythm Stop Ø ˛ Receive Transmit ˛ Ø Electone Exclusive Code (Hexadecimal) Message F0, 43, 70, ID, 00, F7 Model ID Data F0, 43, 70, 70, 30, F7 Request-to-Send Model ID Data Ø ˛ F0, 43, 70, 70, 40, nn(*1), 7F, F7 00 Switch ON Switch OFF Ø Ø Ø Ø F0, 43, 70, 70, 40, 50, TL, TH, F7 Tempo Ø Ø F0, 43, 70, 78, 41, cc, dd, F7(*2) Panel Switch Events Ø Ø F0, 43, 70, 78, 42, 3C, ..data.., F7 Current Registration Data Ø Ø F0, 43, 70, 78, 44, ..data..(*3), F7 MIDI Parameters Ø Ø F0, 43, 70, 70, 70, nn(*4), F7 MDR Ø ˛ F0, 43, 70, 70, 73, F7 EL ON Ø ˛ F0, 43, 70, 70, 78, 00, 00, F7 Bar Signal ˛ Ø N: Device Number (“0” on DDK-7) ID: Model ID (DDK-7 = 52H) Appendix ˛: don’t care 14 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 251 *1. Switches nn Switch 45H *2. Receive Transmit Ø Ø Left Footswitch Panel Switch Events MIDI Exclusive Format F0, 43, 70, 78, 41, cc, dd, F7 Selectors cc Switch Code 0F Registration Memory [1-16] dd Remarks Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range Ø [00-0F] ˛ - Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range Volume cc Switch Code dd Remarks 12 Upper Keyboard Voice 1 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN 13 Lower Keyboard Voice 1 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN 14 Upper Keyboard Voice 2 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN 15 Lower Keyboard Voice 2 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN 16 Lead Voice 1 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN 17 Pedal Voice 1 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN 18 Pedal Voice 2 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN 19 Lead Voice 2 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN 1A Percussion Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN 1B Reverb Depth Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Depth Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range Organ Flute Voice cc Switch Code dd Remarks 30 Upper Organ Flute Voice [U. ORGAN FLUTES] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON 31 Lower Organ Flute Voice [L. ORGAN FLUTES] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON To Lower cc Switch Code dd Remarks Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range 36 Lead Voice 1 To Lower [TO LOWER ▼] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON 37 Pedal Voice 1 To Lower [TO LOWER ▲] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON 38 Pedal Voice 2 To Lower [TO LOWER ▲] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON Solo Mode cc Switch Code 39 Lead Voice 2 Solo (Knee) [SOLO (FOOT PEDAL)] Appendix 14 252 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual dd Remarks Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON Brilliance cc Switch Code dd Remarks Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range 42 Upper Keyboard Voice 1 Brilliance Ø [00-06] ˛ [00-06] 00:BRILLIANT, 06:MELLOW 43 Lower Keyboard Voice 1 Brilliance Ø [00-06] ˛ [00-06] 00:BRILLIANT, 06:MELLOW 44 Upper Keyboard Voice 2 Brilliance Ø [00-06] ˛ [00-06] 00:BRILLIANT, 06:MELLOW 45 Lower Keyboard Voice 2 Brilliance Ø [00-06] ˛ [00-06] 00:BRILLIANT, 06:MELLOW 46 Lead Voice 1 Brilliance Ø [00-06] ˛ [00-06] 00:BRILLIANT, 06:MELLOW 47 Pedal Voice 1 Brilliance Ø [00-06] ˛ [00-06] 00:BRILLIANT, 06:MELLOW 48 Pedal Voice 2 Brilliance Ø [00-06] ˛ [00-06] 00:BRILLIANT, 06:MELLOW 49 Lead Voice 2 Brilliance Ø [00-06] ˛ [00-06] 00:BRILLIANT, 06:MELLOW Sustain cc Switch Code dd Remarks Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range 50 Upper Sustain [UPPER (KNEE)] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON 51 Lower Sustain [LOWER (KNEE)] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON 52 Pedal Sustain [PEDAL] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON Solo Bar cc Switch Code 59 Solo Bar dd Remarks Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range Ø [00-01] Ø - Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range 00:OFF, 01:ON Keyboard Percussion cc Switch Code dd Remarks 5B Keyboard Percussion [1] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON 5C Keyboard Percussion [2] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON Disable cc Switch Code 5F Disable [D.] dd Remarks Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON Rotary Speaker cc Switch Code 60 Rotary Speaker Speed [ROTARY SP SPEED] dd Remarks 00:OFF, 01:ON Rhythm Sequence Switch Code dd Remarks Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range 61 Sequence 1 [SEQ.1] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON 62 Sequence 2 [SEQ.2] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON 63 Sequence 3 [SEQ.3] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON 64 Sequence 4 [SEQ.4] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON Appendix cc 14 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 253 *3. MIDI Parameter Voice Section Parameters MIDI Exclusive Format F0, 43, 70, 78, 44, hh, mm, ll, ..., F7 Panel Voice Parameters (Address mm: 0 – 7 = UK1, UK2, LK1, LK2, LEAD 1, LEAD 2, PEDAL 1, PEDAL 2) Address Appendix 14 254 Size Data Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range 00-0D 5 00-7F 00-7F 00 00 00 Voice Assign Number 00-7F 00-7F 00 00 00 Ø 00-7F 00-7F 00 00 00 Ø 00-7F 00-7F 00 00 00 00-07 10 1 00-0D Voice Selector Number 00-0D Ø 00-0D Ø 00-0D 10 00-07 11 1 00-7F Volume 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F ˛ - 10 00-07 12 1 00-7F Reverb (Send Level) 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 10 00-07 13 1 00-7F Brilliance 00:BRILLIANT 40:CENTER 7F:MELLOW Ø 00-7F ˛ - 10 00-07 14 1 00-04 Feet 00:PRESET 01:16' 02:8' 03:4' 04:2' Ø 00-7F Ø 00-04 10 00-07 15 1 00-7F Pan 00:LEFT 40:CENTER 7F:RIGHT Ø 00-7F Ø 08-78 10 00-07 16 1 00-7F Touch Tone Initial Touch 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 10 00-07 17 1 00-7F Touch Tone After Touch 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 10 00-07 18 1 00-7F Pitch After Touch 00:NARROW 7F:WIDE Ø 00-7F Ø 32-4E 10 00-07 19 1 00-7F User Vibrato 00:PRESET 01:USER Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 10 00-07 1A 1 00-7F Vibrato Delay 00:SHORT 7F:LONG Ø 00-7F Ø 02-1A 10 00-07 1B 1 00-7F Vibrato Depth 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-54 10 00-07 1C 1 00-7F Vibrato Speed 00:SLOW 7F:FAST Ø 00-7F Ø 3C-6C 10 00-05 1D 1 00-7F Pitch Horizontal Touch 00:NARROW 7F:WIDE Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 10 00-07 1E 1 00-7F Touch Vibrato (On/Off) 00:OFF 7F:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 10 04-07 1F 1 00-7F TO LOWER▼/▲/SOLO (KNEE) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F ˛ - 10 04-05 20 1 00-02 Slide (On/Foot Pedal/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON 02:Foot Pedal Ø 00-02 Ø 00-02 10 04-05 21 1 00-7F Slide Time 00:FAST 7F:SLOW Ø 00-7F Ø 02-7F 10 00-07 22 1 00-7F Tune/Detune 00:Down 40:Center 7F:Up Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 10 00-01/ 04-07 23 1 00-7F 2nd Expression Pitch Bend 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 10 00-05 24 1 00-7F Footswitch Glide Control 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 10 00-07 25 1 3A-46 Transpose 3A:KeyDown 40:Normal 46:KeyUp Ø 3A-46 Ø 3A-46 10 06-07 28 1 00-7F Poly (On/Off) 00:Mono 01:Poly Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 10 05 29 1 00-7F Priority (Last/Top) 00:TOP 01:LAST Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 10 00-07 2A 1 00-7F Volume Mute 00:Mute OFF 01:Mute ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 hh mm ll 10 00-07 10 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Parameter Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range 40 3 00 00-7F 00-7F Effect 1 Type MSB/LSB 00 00-7F 00-7F Ø 00 00-7F 00-7F Ø 00 00-7F 00-7F 00-07 41 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 1 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F 00-07 42 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 2 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 43 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 3 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 44 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 4 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 45 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 5 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 46 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 6 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 47 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 7 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 48 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 8 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 49 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 9 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 4A 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 10 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 4B 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 11 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 4C 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 12 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 4D 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 13 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 4E 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 14 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 4F 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 15 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 50 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 16 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 51 3 00 00-7F 00-7F 10 00-07 52 2 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 53 2 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 54 2 10 00-07 55 10 00-07 56 10 00-07 10 00-07 10 10 hh mm ll 10 00-07 10 10 Effect 2 Type MSB/LSB 00 00-7F 00-7F Ø 00 00-7F 00-7F Ø 00 00-7F 00-7F Effect 2 Parameter 1 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 2 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 3 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 4 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 5 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 57 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 6 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 58 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 7 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 00-07 59 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 8 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 00-07 5A 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 9 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 5B 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 10 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 5C 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 11 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 5D 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 12 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 5E 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 13 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 5F 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 14 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 60 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 15 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 61 2 0000-7F7F 10 00-07 62 1 Sustain (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 10 00-07 63 1 Length 7F:Hold 7E:Long 00:Short Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range Effect 2 Parameter 16 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F Address Size Data 00 1 00-7F Footage 16' 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 00-01 01 1 00-7F Footage 8' 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 11 00-01 02 1 00-7F Footage 5-1/3' 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 11 00-01 03 1 00-7F Footage 4' 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 11 00-01 04 1 00-7F Footage 2-2/3' 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F hh mm ll 11 00-01 11 Parameter Data DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Appendix Organ Flute Voice Parameters (Address mm: 0 – 1 = UK, LK) 14 255 Address Size Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range 05 1 00-7F Footage 2' 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 00-01 06 1 00-7F Footage 1-3/5' 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 11 00-01 07 1 00-7F Footage 1-1/3' 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 11 00-01 08 1 00-7F Footage 1' 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 11 00-01 09 1 00-7F Response 00:FAST 7F:SLOW Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 11 00-01 0A 1 00-7F Attack 4' 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 11 00-01 0B 1 00-7F Attack 2-2/3' 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 11 00-01 0C 1 00-7F Attack 2' 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 11 00-01 0D 1 00-7F Attack Length 00:Short 7F:Long Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 11 00-01 10 1 00-7F Organ Flutes (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F ˛ - 11 00-01 11 1 00-7F Volume 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 11 00-01 12 1 00-7F Reverb (Send Level) 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 11 00-01 13 1 00-7F Type (Sine/Vintage) 00:Sine 01:Vintage Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 11 00-01 40 3 00 00-7F 00-7F Effect Type MSB/LSB 00 00-7F 00-7F Ø 00 00-7F 00-7F Ø 00 00-7F 00-7F hh mm ll 11 00-01 11 Parameter Data 1st:ParameterMSB 2nd:ParameterLSB 11 00-01 41 2 0000-7F7F Effect1 Parameter1 MSB/LSB Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F 11 00-01 42 2 0000-7F7F Effect1 Parameter2 MSB/LSB Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F 11 00-01 43 2 0000-7F7F Effect1 Parameter3 MSB/LSB Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 11 00-01 44 2 0000-7F7F Effect1 Parameter4 MSB/LSB Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 11 00-01 45 2 0000-7F7F Effect1 Parameter5 MSB/LSB Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F 11 00-01 46 2 0000-7F7F Effect1 Parameter6 MSB/LSB Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F 11 00-01 47 2 0000-7F7F Effect1 Parameter7 MSB/LSB Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 11 00-01 48 2 0000-7F7F Effect1 Parameter8 MSB/LSB Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 11 00-01 49 2 0000-7F7F Effect1 Parameter9 MSB/LSB Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F 11 00-01 4A 2 0000-7F7F Effect1 Parameter10 MSB/LSB Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F 11 00-01 4B 2 0000-7F7F Effect1 Parameter11 Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 11 00-01 4C 2 0000-7F7F Effect1 Parameter12 Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 11 00-01 4D 2 0000-7F7F Effect1 Parameter13 Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F 11 00-01 4E 2 0000-7F7F Effect1 Parameter14 Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F 11 00-01 4F 2 0000-7F7F Effect1 Parameter15 Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F Effect1 Parameter16 Ø 0000-7F7F 11 00-01 50 2 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F Ø 11 00-01 62 1 00-7F Sustain (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 11 00-01 63 1 00-7F Length 7F:Hold 7E:Long 00:Short Ø 00-7F Ø 15-3D,7F Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range Keyboard Parameters Appendix Sustain Parameters (Address mm: 0 – 2 = UK, LK, PEDAL) Address 14 256 Size Data Parameter Data hh mm ll 12 00-02 00 1 00-7F Sustain (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F ˛ - 12 00-02 01 1 00-7F Length 00:Short 7F:Long Ø 00-7F ˛ 15-3D DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Keyboard Percussion Parameters (Address mm: 1 – 2 = K.B.P. [1], K.B.P. [2]) Address Size Data 10 1 00-7F Keyboard Percussion (On/Off) 11 1 00-08 Keyboard Percussion Menu hh mm ll 12 01-02 12 01-02 Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F ˛ - 00:PRESET 01:USER 1 02:USER 2 03:USER 3 04:USER 4 05:USER 5 06:USER 6 07:USER 7 08:USER 8 Ø 00-08 Ø 00-08 Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range 0000-7F7F Ø 00-7F 00-7F Ø 00-7F 00-7F 00-0B Rhythm Rhythm Parameters Address Size Data 00-0B 2 0000-7F7F 00 10 1 00-0B Rhythm Selector Number Ø 00-0B Ø 00-0B 00 11 1 00-7F Percussion Volume 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F ˛ - 13 00 12 1 00-7F Percussion Reverb (Send Level) 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 13 00 13 1 00-7F 2nd Expression Tempo Control (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 00 14 1 00-7F Footswitch Rhythm Control 00:INTRO 1 01:INTRO 2 02:INTRO 3 08:MAIN A 09:MAIN B 0A:MAIN C 0B:MAIN D 18:BREAK 20:ENDING 1 21:ENDING 2 22:ENDING 3 7E:STOP 7F:OFF (INTRO 1 – STOP) Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 13 00 15 1 00-7F Add Drum (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 00 16 1 00-7F Main Drum (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 00 17 1 00-7F Chord 1 (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 00 18 1 00-7F Chord 2 (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 00 19 1 00-7F Pad (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 00 1A 1 00-7F Phrase 1 (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 00 1B 1 00-7F Phrase 2 (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 00 1C 1 00-7F Auto Fill (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range Ø 00-7F ˛ - hh mm ll 13 00 13 13 Parameter Rhythm Assign Number Address hh mm ll 13 01 00-03 Size Data 1 00-7F Parameter Sequence [SEQ.1] – [SEQ.4] Data 00:OFF 01:ON Appendix Rhythm Sequence Parameters 14 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 257 Accompaniment Parameters Address Size Data 11 1 00-7F Accompaniment Volume 12 1 00-7F Accompaniment Reverb (Send Level) hh mm ll 13 02 13 02 Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F A.B.C. Function Parameters Address Size Data Parameter 00 1 00-7F 03 01 1 03 02 1 hh mm ll 13 03 13 13 Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range Auto Bass Chord Mode 00:OFF 01:Single Finger 02:Fingered 03:Custom A.B.C. Ø 00-7F Ø 00-03 00-7F Lower Memory (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 00-7F Pedal Memory (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 M.O.C. Function Parameters Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range hh mm ll 13 04 00 1 00-7F Melody On Chord Mode 00:OFF 01:1 02:2 03:3 Ø 00-7F Ø 00-03 13 04 01 1 00-7F M.O.C. Foot Pedal Control (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 Size Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range Section Parameters Address Parameter Data hh mm ll 13 05 00 1 00-7F Intro 1 (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 05 01 1 00-7F Intro 2 (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 05 02 1 00-7F Intro 3 (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 05 08 1 00-7F Main A (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 05 09 1 00-7F Main B (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 05 0A 1 00-7F Main C (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 05 0B 1 00-7F Main D (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 05 18 1 00-7F Break (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 05 20 1 00-7F Ending 1 (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 05 21 1 00-7F Ending 2 (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 13 05 22 1 00-7F Ending 3 (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range Keyboard Percussion Parameters Address Appendix Size Data 11 1 00-7F Volume 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 12 1 00-7F Reverb (Send Level) 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F hh mm ll 13 10 13 10 14 258 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Parameter Data Overall System Parameters Address Size Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range 00 1 00-7F Disable (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F ˛ - 00 01 1 00-7F Organ Flute Attack Mode 00:Each 01:First Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 14 00 02 1 3A-46 Transpose 3A:KeyDown 40:Normal 46:KeyUp Ø 3A-46 Ø 3A-46 14 00 03 1 01-0C 2nd Expression Range 01:100 C 0C:1200 C Ø 01-0C Ø 01-0C 14 00 04 1 00-7F Footswitch Mode 00:OFF 01:Rhythm 02:Glide 03:Rotary Speaker Ø 00-7F Ø 00-03 14 00 05 1 00-7F Pitch 00:PitchDown 40:Normal 7F:PitchUp Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 14 00 06 1 00-7F Footswitch Glide Time 00:FAST 7F:SLOW Ø 00-7F Ø 04-1C 14 00 08 1 00-7F MIDI Control Expression (INT/EXT) 00:Internal 01:External Ø 00-7F ˛ - 14 00 09 1 00-7F MIDI Control Lead 1 (INT/EXT) 00:Internal 01:External Ø 00-7F ˛ - 14 00 0A 3 00-04, 06 00-03 00-0B Registration Menu 00-04, 06 00-03 00-0B Ø 00-04, 06 00-03 00-0B Ø 00-04, 06 00-03 00-0B Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range hh mm ll 14 00 14 Parameter Data Effect Parameters (Overall): Reverb Address Size Data 00 1 00-7F Reverb Depth 00:MIN 7F:MAX Ø 00-7F ˛ - 01 01 1 00-7F Reverb Time (Panel) 00:FAST 7F:SLOW Ø 00-7F Ø 00-45 01 02 3 00 00-7F 00-7F Reverb Type (Panel) 00 00-7F 00-7F Ø 00 00-7F 00-7F Ø 00 00-7F 00-7F Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range hh mm ll 14 01 14 14 Parameter Data Effect Parameters (Overall): Rhythm Reverb Address Size Data 01 1 00-7F Reverb Time (Rhythm) 00:FAST 7F:SLOW Ø 00-7F Ø 00-45 02 3 00 00-7F 00-7F Reverb Type (Rhythm) 00 00-7F 00-7F Ø 00 00-7F 00-7F Ø 00 00-7F 00-7F Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range hh mm ll 14 02 14 02 Parameter Data Effect Parameters (Overall): Rotary Speaker Address Size Data Parameter Data mm ll 14 03 00 1 00-7F Rotary Speaker Speed (On/Off) 00:OFF 01:ON Ø 00-7F ˛ - 14 03 01 1 00-7F Rotary Speaker Speed Control Mode 00:STOP 01:SLOW Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01 14 03 02 2 0000007F Rotary Speaker Speed Control Speed 0000:SLOW 007F:FAST Ø 0000-007F Ø 0040-007F Appendix hh 14 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 259 AUX OUT Address hh mm ll 14 04 00-13 Size Data 1 00-03 Size Data Parameter AUX OUT Address II: 00-07 = UK1, UK2, LK1, LK2, Lead1, Lead2, PEDAL1, PEDAL2 08 = Upper Organ Flutes, 09 = Lower Organ Flutes, 0A = Main Drum, 0B = Add Drum, 0C = Accompaniment, 11 = KBP, 12 = MIC, 13 = XG Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range Ø 00,04-7F 01 02 03 Ø 00 01 02 03 Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range 00:MAIN 01:SUB1 02:SUB2 03:SUB1&2 Foot Pedal Address mm ll 14 05 00 1 00-09 Foot Pedal 1 Assign 00:OFF 01:Expression 02:Sustain 03:Slide 04:MOC 05:Solo 06:Rhythm Control 07:Glide 08:Rotary Speaker 09:Regist Shift Ø 00,0A-7F 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 Ø 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 14 05 01 1 00-01 Foot Pedal 1 Porality 00:01:+ Ø 00 01 Ø 00 01 14 05 02 1 00-7F Foot Pedal 1 Data (ON/OFF) Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F 14 05 10 1 00-09 Foot Pedal 2 Assign 00:OFF 01:Expression 02:Sustain 03:Slide 04:MOC 05:Solo 06:Rhythm Control 07:Glide 08:Rotary Speaker 09:Regist Shift Ø 00,0A-7F 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 Ø 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 14 05 11 1 00-01 Foot Pedal 2 Porality 00:01:+ Ø 00 01 Ø 00 01 14 05 12 1 00-7F Foot Pedal 2 Data (ON/OFF) Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F *4. MDR nn Command Receive Transmit 01H Play Start Ø ˛ 02H Play Stop Ø ˛ 03H Record Start Ø ˛ 04H Record Stop Ø ˛ 05H Fast Forward Start Ø ˛ 06H Fast Forward Stop Ø ˛ 09H Rhythm Pointer Reset Ø ˛ Appendix 14 260 Parameter hh DDK-7 Owner’s Manual MIDI Implementation Chart Date: 6-Apr-2006 Version: 1.00 YAMAHA DDK / Model: DDK-7 Transmitted Recognized Basic Channel Default Changed 1, 2, 3, 16 (*1) 1-16 1-3, 5-16 (*2) 4 Mode Default Messages Altered Mode 3 ˛ ************************ Mode 3 ˛ ˛ 0-127 (*4) :True Voice 36-96 (*3) ************************ Ø 9nH, v=1-127 ˛ 9nH, v=0 Ø 9nH, v=1-127 ˛ 9nH, v=0 or 8nH ˛ Ø Ø (*6) Ø Ø (*5) Ø ˛ ˛ Ø (*7) ˛ Ø (*7) ˛ Ø (*7) ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø (*6) Ø (*6) Ø (*7) Ø (*6) Ø (*6, 7) ˛ Ø (*6, 7) Ø (*6) Ø (*6) Ø (*6) Ø (*6) Ø (*6) Ø (*10) ************************ Ø (*11) Ø Ø Note Number Velocity Note on Note off After Touch Key's Ch's Pitch Bend Control Change Program Change 0, 32 1, 5, 7, 10 4 6, 38 11 16 64 65-67 71-78 84, 91, 93, 94 96, 97 98-99, 100-101 :True number System Exclusive System Common :Song Position :Song Select :Tune ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ System Real Time :Clock :Commands Ø Ø Ø (*9) Ø :All Sound Off :Reset All Cntrls :Local On/Off :All Notes Off :Active Sense :Reset ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ Ø (120) (*6) Ø (121) (*6) ˛ Ø (123-127) (*6) Ø ˛ Aux Messages Notes Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY *1; *2; *3; *4; *5; *6; *8; *10; *11; Remarks Bank Select 2nd Expression Data Entry Expression VA After Touch Sustain Sound Controller Data Entry SW NRPN, RPN (FAH, FCH) Appendix Function 1ch: UK, 2ch: LK, 3ch: PEDAL, 16ch: CONTROL 1ch: UK, 2ch: LK, 3ch: PEDAL, 4ch: LEAD1, 5-14ch: XG, 15ch: KEYBOARD PERCUSSION, 16ch: CONTROL UK: 48-96, LK: 36-96, PEDAL: 36-60 UK, LK, PEDAL, LEAD1: 36-96, XG: 0-127, PERCUSSION: 3-127 UK: UK HorizontalTouch, LK: LK HorizontalTouch XG only *7; CONTROL only UK only *9; External Mode only CONTROL: 0-15 UK, LK, PEDAL, CONTROL: 0-15 XG: 0-127 Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO 14 Ø : Yes ˛ : No DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 261 Date: 6-Apr-2006 Version: 1.00 YAMAHA [XG mode] / Model: DDK-7 Function Transmitted (*1) Recognized Basic Channel Default Changed 1, 2, 3, 16 1-16 1-16 1-16 Mode Default Messages Altered Mode3 ˛ ************************ Mode 3 ˛ ˛ 36-96 ************************ 0-127 :True Voice Ø 9nH, v=1-127 ˛ 9nH, v=0 Ø 9nH, v=1-127 ˛ 9nH, v=0 or 8nH ˛ Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ Ø ˛ Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø Ø ˛ Ø Ø ˛ Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø 0-15 ************************ Ø System Exclusive Ø Ø System Common :Song Position :Song Select :Tune ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ System Real Time :Clock :Commands Ø Ø ˛ ˛ Aux Messages :All Sound Off :Reset All Cntrls :Local On/Off :All Notes Off :Active Sense :Reset ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ Ø (120) Ø (121) ˛ Ø (123-127) Ø ˛ Note Number Note on Note off Velocity Key's Ch's After Touch Pitch Bend Control Change Program Change 0, 32 1, 5, 7, 10 4 6, 38 11 16 64 65-67 71-78 84, 91, 93, 94 96, 97 98-99, 100-101 :True number Appendix Notes *1; Remarks Bank Select 2nd Expression Data Entry Expression VA After Touch Sustain Sound Controller Data Entry SW NRPN, RPN Same as that in the EL mode 14 Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY 262 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO Ø : Yes ˛ : No Troubleshooting Problem Possible Cause and Solution GENERAL OPERATION This is normal; the DDK-7 takes a while to start up. A cracking noise is sometimes heard. Noise may be produced when either an electrical appliance is turned on or an electric power tool (such as drill) is used in the proximity of the DDK-7. If this occurs, plug the DDK-7 into an electrical outlet located as far as possible from the device that seems to be the source of the problem. Interference from radio, TV, or other sources occurs. This is caused by the proximity of a high-power broadcasting station, an amateur ham radio setup or a mobile phone. The sound of the DDK-7 causes surrounding objects to resonate. Because the DDK-7 is capable of producing powerful bass sounds, resonance may be caused in surrounding objects, such as cabinets or glass windows. To avoid this, relocate the objects or lower the DDK-7’s volume. In the LCD display, there are some black points (unlit) or white points (always lit). Unfortunately, this is a common characteristic of TFT-LCDs. The sound is too small even when the volume is set to its maximum. • The Master Volume may be set around the minimum position. Turn it clockwise. • The Expression Pedal or Foot Pedal may not be pressed down. Press it down with your toe. Foot Pedals has no effect. “OFF” is selected in the Foot Pedal display. Select function to assign it to the Foot Pedal. (page 196) The DDK-7 panel does not function normally or the content of the memorized data has changed. This happens very rarely. Occasionally, power surges and spikes due to electrical storms or other reasons may cause the DDK-7 to malfunction and/or alter the contents of memorized data. If this happens, perform the Factory Set operation to reset the DDK-7 (page 23). The Pedal Unit does not work. A cable of the Pedal Unit is disconnected. Make sure that power is OFF when connecting or disconnecting the pedal. Some parts cannot be heard from the Headphones or an external speakers. The parts are assigned to AUX OUT SUB jacks. If you want to hear all parts from Headphones, select AUX OUT MAIN jacks for all parts. (page 228) If you want to hear all parts from an external speakers, use the output from the mixer. Appendix The sound is not heard for about 10 seconds after turning the power on. 14 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 263 Problem Possible Cause and Solution VOICES/RHYTHMS The pitch may sound excessively high on the Pedalboard and low in the higher registers of the Lower and Upper keyboards. This may occur when you compare the DDK-7’s sounds with that of a piano. Because of the difference of the harmonics structure, the tuning system of the DDK-7 is different from the piano in the higher and lower ranges. Some of the Voices may contain cracking and/or noisy You may find these mainly in the wind instrument Voices. These are purposely sounds. added effects to the Voices to reproduce the characteristics of the wind instruments such as the pipe vibrations, breath noises and squeaks. When too many keys are pressed, not all of the notes sound. Total polyphonic capacity (notes sounding for both Upper and Lower Keyboards) is 14 notes. When you turn the Pedal Polyphonic mode to on, the total is 14 for all keyboards, Upper, Lower and Pedalboard. Only one sound is heard when two notes of the Lead or Pedal Voices are simultaneously played. For practical performance reasons, the DDK-7 has been designed so that only one note of the Lead or Pedal Voices can be played at a time. If you want, the pedal Voice can be set to polyphonic mode (page 42). The Pedal Voices do not sound, even though the volume is properly set. • The Single Finger or Fingered Chord mode of Auto Bass Chord is on. Turn off the mode in the display (page 71). • TO LOWER buttons in the Pedal Voice sections are turned on. Turn the function off (page 29). When selecting a Voice or rhythm, the Voice or rhythm title at the top of the LCD does not match the selected Voice or rhythm. The currently assigned Voice or rhythm is displayed at the top of the LCD, and remains until another Voice or rhythm has been selected. When keys are pressed, the sounds of percussion instruments are also heard. The Keyboard Percussion function has been turned on. When not using the function, be sure to turn it off (page 74). Even though a User button’s rhythm has been selected and started, the pattern does not sound. Since the User buttons contain User rhythms, no rhythm will sound if a pattern has not been saved to the selected User button. EFFECTS The Touch Tone function does not operate. Adjust the Touch Tone settings in the Voice Condition display (page 41). The Reverb effect is not applied to the desired Voice sections, even when the total Reverb depth on the panel is increased. Increase the Reverb depth for the desired Voice sections in Reverb Display Pages 2 – 3. The Rotary Speaker effect cannot be heard, even when the [ROTARY SP SPEED] button in the DISPLAY SELECT section is on. Rotary Speaker must be selected first in Voice Condition display Pages 3 and/ or 4 (for panel Voices), or in the Organ Flute Voices ATTACK/VOLUME Page (for Organ Flute Voices). ACCOMPANIMENT The pitch in the Single Finger mode does not change, even when pressing different keys of the keyboard. Single Finger mode will only produce notes when played within a fixed octave interval on the Lower keyboard. If notes with the same letter name are pressed outside of that range, the chords that are sounded will share the same pitch. While an Intro/Ending pattern is automatically playing, the Lower keyboard does not produce any sound, even when the keys are played. Since the Accompaniment chords play automatically one after another, the Lower keyboard is designed not to produce any sound during the playback of an Intro/Ending pattern. The Accompaniment cannot be heard even when an appropriate Accompaniment type is selected and the rhythm has been started. • The Accompaniment volume may have been set to 0. Be sure to raise the Accompaniment volume in the Rhythm Condition display (page 71). • All Accompaniment parts may be set to off (mute). Set the desired part on (page 70). The harmony notes of the Melody On Chord function cannot be heard. The Upper keyboard has been set to sound only Lead Voices. Increase the volume of the Upper Keyboard Voices. The bass phrase of the Auto Bass Cord cannot be heard. The pedal polyphonic mode may be set to on. Turn it off in the Voice Condition display (page 42). Appendix REGISTRATION MEMORY Certain functions have not been memorized to Registration Memory. 14 264 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual Some functions cannot be memorized. Refer to page 90. Problem Possible Cause and Solution VOICE EDITING During Voice editing, the specified Voice isn’t heard, even when the keyboard is played. • The Element is turned to mute or its level is set to minimum. Turn it to on or increase the volume. • You may have played keys outside the range of Note Limit. Play only keys within the Note Limit range. An error message appears while the Voice name is entered. Voice name capacity is 16 characters. Delete the unnecessary letters or spaces. RHYTHM PROGRAM During use of the Rhythm Pattern Program, no sound is produced even when you play a certain percussion sound. If percussion sounds have been recorded while memory is full, no subsequently selected instruments can be heard or recorded. If necessary, erase some of the less necessary percussion sounds and play again. MUSIC DATA RECORDER Recording or playback cannot be performed. • The part buttons in the Rec Standby display or Playing display may have been turned off. Turn the desired part to REC or PLAY. • The performance data is too large. The maximum limit for recording performance data is 1 MB. • The media is write-protected. Cancel the write-protect. • The media/folder may contain EL-format songs. You cannot record to the media/folder that contains EL-format songs. Create a new folder and record the song to it. Recording is stopped before the performance is finished. • The amount of recorded data on the media is close to the maximum limit. Either use another media or delete the data of unnecessary songs. • When you overwrite the song, the length of a subsequently recorded part cannot exceed the length of the previously recorded parts. Delete the previously recorded song, then record again (page 129). • The performance data is too large. The maximum limit for recording performance data is 1 MB. An error message appears while entering a folder name or song name. • The song/folder name is too long. The capacity is 50 letters. • The song/folder name may be an invalid name. Refer to page 115. • The path name is too long. The capacity of the path name is 234 letters. Reduce the layer or shorten the song/folder name to shorten the path. The rhythm does not start at the beginning of a recording, or stops in the middle of the performance. The M.D.R. is designed so that the rhythm cannot be started at the very beginning of a recording. If you wish to use the rhythm, start it after the time indicator appears in the display. The floppy disk cannot be formatted when you want to Recognizing an unformatted disk takes a few seconds after it is inserted. format an unformatted disk. Wait about 30 seconds, then try to format again. During playback, you may have removed the USB flash memory or floppy disk. Whenever you wish to stop playback, always press the [J] (Stop) button before removing the media. Appendix The notes of the recording are “stuck” and sound continuously. 14 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 265 Specifications KEYBOARD Keyboard Type UPPER: 49 Keys (C-C) Standard (FS) LOWER: 61Keys (C-C) Standard (FS) Touch Tone UPPER: Initial Touch/After Touch LOWER: Initial Touch/After Touch TONE GENERATION AWM2 Maximum Polyphony Voice Sections: 128 notes Organ/Rhythm Sections, XG: 128 notes Multi Timbral Capacity 16 Wave Registration Voice Voice Sections: 177MB (when converted to 16-bit linear format) Organ/Rhythm Sections, XG: 166MB (when converted to 16-bit linear format) Memory Basic Registration 1-16, Current Registration Registration Menu 288 Registrations Preset Voice UPPER: 2, LEAD: 2, LOWER: 2, PEDAL: 2 Voice Buttons SECTION SELECT, VOLUME UP/DOWN, TO LOWER (LEAD1, PEDAL1,2), SOLO (LEAD2) Reverb: 29 Types x 2 (Voice/Rhythm), Brilliance, Sustain, Insertion(1, 2)x 183 Types x 8 Organ Sections UPPER, LOWER Type SINE, VINTAGE Footage Mode Organ Effect Rhythm FIRST, EACH 15 Type Control U.ORGAN FLUTES, L.ORGAN FLUTES, ROTARY SP SPEED Preset: 274 Pattern x 7 parts x 15 Sections User Rhythm: 48 Pattern x 7 parts x 15 Sections Parts Rhythm Control Tempo Keyboard Percussion SECTION SELECT, VOLUME UP/DOWN Main Drum, Add Drum, Chord 1, Chord 2, Pad, Phrase1, Phrase 2 INTRO 1,2,3, ENDING 1,2,3, MAIN A,B,C,D, FILL IN A,B,C,D, BREAK 40 - 240 Preset: 2, User: 8 Subordinate Performance Auto Bass Chord 3 Type, Memory (LOWER, PEDAL) Melody On Chord 3 Type, Memory (LOWER, PEDAL) Voice Edit Layers Parameter Rhythm Pattern Program Sections Note Resolution Beat Appendix Measure Kits Accompaniment 14 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual AWM (4) Element ON/OFF, EQ Low Frequency, EQ Low Gain, EQ High Frequency, EQ High Gain, Level, Note Limit, Pan, Note Shift, Tune Fine, Attack Rate, Release Rate, Cutoff Frequency, Resonance, LFO waveform, LFO Speed, LFO Pitch Modulation Depth, LFO Frequency Modulation Depth, LFO Amplitude Modulation Depth INTRO 1, 2, 3, ENDING 1, 2, 3, MAIN A, B, C, D, FILL IN A, B, C, D, BREAK 480 ppq (parts per quarter note) 2/4, 3/4, 4/4, 5/4 32 20 Drum Kits + 5 SFX Kits Chord1, 2 Voice 480 Voices Effects Reverb: 29 Types, Chorus:15 Types, Variations: 183 Type Percussion Instrument Setting 266 16’, 5 1/3’, 8’, 4’, 2 2/3’, 2’, 1 3/5’, 1 1/3’, 1’, Attack: 4’, 2 2/3’, 2’, LENGTH, RESPONSE Rhythm Rhythm Buttons PROGRAMS Preset: 415 Voices + 25 Drum Kits XG(Only for playing): 480 Voices + 11 Drum Kits User Voice: 16 Voice Sections Effects Organ Flute Voice 1-16, D. (Disable) Pan, Volume, Reverb, Pitch Coarse/Fine Rhythm Sequence Program Sequence 140 measures x 4 Sequences Registration Sequence Program Sequence 140 Registration x 4Sequence, Next Registration Keyboard Percussion Assign Kits Registration Shift Steps Set Resolution Drum Setup Shift End Unifying parameter M. D. R. Parameters Folder Song Registration Recording 80 Steps Stop, Top, Next Regist Reverb (Voice/Rhythm), Volume, Pan, Brilliance, Sustain Up to 100 folders can exist in one media. Up to 100 songs can exist in one folder. Up to 50 Registrations can exist in one song. UPPER, LOWER, PEDAL, CONTROL, LEAD, K.B.P., XG Sequence Format DDK Original format (Copy Protect), SMF format 0, 1 (Format 1 load only) Format Conversion Convert TO EL, Convert FROM EL, Convert to XG Display Control Foot Pedal OTHERS 16 Drum Kits Pan, Volume, Reverb, Pitch Coarse/Fine UPPER, LOWER, PEDAL, CONTROL, LEAD, K.B.P. Playing CONTROLS 96 ppq (parts per quarter note) VOICE DISPLAY, REGIST MENU, FOOT SWITCH, MDR, INTERNET, UTILITY, PROGRAM, SUSTAIN, REVERB Section 1 (Expression), 2 (Sustain) Select Expression, Sustain, Rhythm, Glide, Rotary speaker, Slide, M.O.C. FootSwitch (When DDKU-P7 is used) Left Right Shift, Jump, User LCD Display Size 6.5-inch 144(W) x 78.24(H)mm Liquid Crystal Display Drive Method Dots Connectors Power Consumption Dimensions (W x D x H), Weight Supplied Accessories Rhythm, Glide, Rotary speaker TFT(WVGA) + touch panel Active Matrix 800 x RGB x 480 dots PHONES, MIC, MIC VOLUME, OUTPUT L/L+R, R(Phone), AUX OUT(LEVEL FIXED) MAIN L/L+R, R, SUB 1,2(Phone), AUX IN L/L+R, R(Phone), TO PEDAL, OPTICAL OUT, USB TO DEVICE x 2, USB TO HOST, MIDI IN/OUT, FOOT PEDAL 1(VOLUME), 2(SUSTAIN), AC INLET 51W 1,150 (W) x 424 (D) x 173 (H) mm, 18kg Owner’s Manual, AC Power cord Appendix Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer. 14 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 267 Index Numerics E 2nd Expression Pedal............................................................. 205 EACH (Organ Flutes).................................................................38 EFFECT......................................................................................45 Effect category (Voice)..............................................................45 Effect Parameters ......................................................................45 EFFECT TYPE (Organ Flutes)....................................................39 Effect type (Voice) .....................................................................45 Element....................................................................................137 ENDING.....................................................................................63 EQ (Equalizer) .........................................................................140 EXTERNAL...............................................................................239 A AC INLET jack......................................................................... 223 ACCENT.................................................................................. 156 Accompaniment........................................................................ 70 Add Drum ................................................................................. 70 AFTER touch (Pitch).................................................................. 42 AFTER touch (Touch Tone)....................................................... 41 ASSEMBLE ............................................................................. 153 ASSIGN (Keyboard Percussion)............................................... 79 ATTACK (Organ Flutes) ............................................................ 38 ATTACK RATE (Voice Edit)..................................................... 142 Auto Bass Chord....................................................................... 71 Auto Fill ..................................................................................... 64 AUX IN .................................................................................... 225 AUX OUT (LEVEL FIXED) ....................................................... 225 AWM (Voice Edit).................................................................... 140 B BAR/BEAT................................................................................. 66 Bookmark................................................................................ 214 BREAK ...................................................................................... 63 Browser........................................................................... 211, 218 C CHANGE SONG NAME .......................................................... 114 Channel Messages ................................................................. 236 CHORD 1 .................................................................................. 70 CHORD 2 .................................................................................. 70 CHORUS (Rhythm Pattern Program) ...................................... 169 Control Change....................................................................... 236 Control Menu .......................................................................... 211 CONVERT FROM EL............................................................... 135 CONVERT TO EL .................................................................... 134 CONVERT TO XG ................................................................... 132 CUSTOM A.B.C. ....................................................................... 72 CUTOFF FREQ........................................................................ 143 D Appendix [D.] (Disable) ............................................................................ 91 DATA CONTROL dial................................................................ 10 DELAY (Vibrato)........................................................................ 43 DEPTH (Reverb) ....................................................................... 46 DEPTH (Vibrato)........................................................................ 43 Display Select ........................................................................... 10 F Factory Set ................................................................................23 Fast Forward............................................................................123 FEET ..........................................................................................42 File ...........................................................................................109 FILL IN .......................................................................................62 Filter.........................................................................................143 FINGERED CHORD...................................................................72 FIRST (Organ Flutes).................................................................38 Folder ......................................................................................109 Foot Pedal ...............................................................................196 FOOT PEDAL jacks .................................................................224 FOOT SWITCH ..................................................................94, 193 FOOTAGE..................................................................................37 Footswitches............................................................................193 FORMAT (MDR).......................................................................103 G Gate Time ................................................................................165 Glide ........................................................................................195 H Headphones............................................................................225 Home Page..............................................................................217 I INITIAL touch.............................................................................41 Initialize (Factory Set) ................................................................23 Initialize (Internet Settings) ......................................................221 Initialize (Registration Memory) .................................................93 INTERNAL ...............................................................................239 INTERNET................................................................................210 Internet Direct Connection ......................................................209 INTRO........................................................................................62 J Jacks and Controls..................................................................223 JUMP .........................................................................................95 14 268 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual K P Keyboard Percussion ............................................................... 74 PAD ...........................................................................................70 PAN (Voice Edit)......................................................................142 PAN (Voice) ...............................................................................41 Part (Rhythm).............................................................................70 PART SETUP (MDR) ........................................................106, 127 Pause.......................................................................................123 PEDAL 1, 2 ..................................................................................8 Pedal polyphonic mode ............................................................42 Pedal Unit ................................................................................229 Pedal Voice ...............................................................................25 PHONES ..................................................................................223 PHRASE 1..................................................................................70 PHRASE 2..................................................................................70 Pitch.........................................................................................208 PITCH (Voice Section)...............................................................42 Pitch Bend ...............................................................................206 Playback..................................................................................122 POLY .........................................................................................42 Power.........................................................................................12 PRESET (Vibrato).......................................................................43 Preset Keyboard Percussion.....................................................74 PRESET TEMPO ........................................................................66 PRIORITY...................................................................................42 PROGRAM...............................................................................148 Program Change .....................................................................236 Protected Song........................................................................131 Punch-in Recording.................................................................113 L L. ORGAN FLUTES ................................................................... 37 LAN ......................................................................................... 219 LANGUAGE .............................................................................. 16 LAST (Lead Voice).................................................................... 42 LAYER (Voice Edit) ................................................................. 141 LCD BRIGHTNESS ................................................................... 17 LCD Display.............................................................................. 10 LEAD 1, 2.................................................................................... 8 Lead Slide................................................................................. 44 Lead Voice................................................................................ 24 LEVEL (Voice Edit).................................................................. 142 LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator)............................................. 145 LOWER 1, 2 ................................................................................ 8 Lower Keyboard Voice ............................................................. 25 M [M.] (Memory) ........................................................................... 89 M.O.C........................................................................................ 73 MAIN ......................................................................................... 62 Main Drum ................................................................................ 70 MAIN/FILL IN ............................................................................ 62 MASTER VOLUME .................................................................... 12 MDR ........................................................................................ 102 Melody On Chord ..................................................................... 73 MEMORY (A.B.C.)..................................................................... 73 METRONOME ......................................................................... 152 MIC jack.................................................................................. 223 MIC VOLUME.......................................................................... 223 MIDI ........................................................................................ 235 MIDI Control............................................................................ 238 MIDI IN/OUT ........................................................................... 224 MIDI OUT FILTER ................................................................... 238 MODE (Organ Flutes) ............................................................... 38 MODE (Rotary Speaker) ........................................................... 51 Music Data Recorder.............................................................. 102 Q Quantize ..................................................................................161 N Next Regist ............................................................................. 118 NEXT REGIST (Shift End).......................................................... 97 NOTE LIMIT ............................................................................ 142 NOTE SHIFT............................................................................ 142 O Appendix OPTICAL OUT......................................................................... 224 Organ Flutes ............................................................................. 37 OUTPUT (MIDI)....................................................................... 238 14 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual 269 R T Real Time Write............................................................... 154, 162 Recording ............................................................................... 110 Recording (Lead Voice 1 Voice only) ..................................... 111 Recording (Part) ..................................................................... 111 REGIST EDIT (MDR) ............................................................... 116 REGIST MENU .......................................................................... 20 Registration Memory................................................................. 89 Registration Sequence ........................................................... 188 Registration Shift....................................................................... 94 RELEASE RATE (Voice Edit)................................................... 142 Repeat .................................................................................... 125 RESONANCE .......................................................................... 143 RESP. (Response) .................................................................... 38 Reverb ...................................................................................... 46 REVERB (MIC.) ....................................................................... 233 REVERB (Panel)........................................................................ 46 REVERB (Rhythm Pattern Program) ....................................... 168 Rewind .................................................................................... 123 Rhythm...................................................................................... 60 Rhythm button........................................................................... 60 Rhythm Clock.......................................................................... 156 Rhythm Condition ..................................................................... 64 Rhythm Menu............................................................................ 61 Rhythm Pattern Program......................................................... 148 Rhythm Program ..................................................................... 147 Rhythm Sequence Program.................................................... 183 Rhythmic Chord ...................................................................... 163 ROTARY SP SPEED .................................................................. 51 Rotary Speaker ......................................................................... 50 TEMPO (MDR) .........................................................................124 TEMPO (Rhythm).......................................................................66 TIME (Slide) ...............................................................................44 TO LOWER ................................................................................29 TOP (Lead Voice) ......................................................................42 TOP (Shift End)..........................................................................97 TOUCH PANEL SOUND............................................................17 TOUCH TONE ...........................................................................41 TOUCH VIBRATO......................................................................44 Transpose................................................................................208 TRANSPOSE (Voice section).....................................................44 TUNE (Voice section) ................................................................44 TUNE FINE (Voice Edit)...........................................................142 S Appendix Sections .................................................................................... 62 SHIFT (Registration Shift).......................................................... 95 SHIFT END................................................................................ 97 SINGLE FINGER ....................................................................... 72 SLIDE ........................................................................................ 44 SLOW (Rotary Speaker)............................................................ 51 SOLO ........................................................................................ 30 Song................................................................................ 104, 109 Song Copy .............................................................................. 128 Song Delete ............................................................................ 129 Specifications ......................................................................... 266 SPEED (Rotary Speaker) .......................................................... 51 SPEED (Vibrato)........................................................................ 43 START ....................................................................................... 63 Step Write ............................................................................... 154 STOP (Rotary Speaker)............................................................. 51 STOP (Shift End) ....................................................................... 97 Style File Format ..................................................................... 175 Sustain ...................................................................................... 49 SUSTAIN (Panel)....................................................................... 49 SYNCHRO START..................................................................... 63 System Exclusive Messages .................................................. 236 System Messages................................................................... 236 14 270 DDK-7 Owner’s Manual U U. ORGAN FLUTES ...................................................................37 UPPER 1, 2 ..................................................................................8 Upper Keyboard Voice..............................................................24 USB TO DEVICE..............................................................224, 234 USB TO DEVICE terminal ........................................................224 USB TO HOST .................................................................224, 230 USER (Registration Shift)...........................................................95 USER (Vibrato) ..........................................................................43 User Keyboard Percussion .......................................................79 User Rhythm............................................................................172 User Voice ...............................................................................145 UTILITY......................................................................................16 V VARIATION (Rhythm Pattern Program) ...................................170 Version.......................................................................................23 VIBRATO ...................................................................................43 Voice..........................................................................................24 Voice button ..............................................................................26 Voice Condition ...................................................................28, 41 VOICE DISPLAY ........................................................................18 Voice Edit ................................................................................137 Voice section .............................................................................24 Volume (Accompaniment).........................................................71 Volume (Keyboard Percussion).................................................75 VOLUME (MIC.).......................................................................233 VOLUME (Organ Flutes)............................................................38 VOLUME (Rhythm Pattern Program) .......................................167 VOLUME (Rhythm) ....................................................................65 VOLUME (Voice) .......................................................................28 VOLUME (XG) .........................................................................127 W Wireless LAN ...........................................................................219 X XG........................................................................................6, 126 For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below. Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante. NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. 135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario, M1S 3R1, Canada Tel: 416-298-1311 Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen Bestimmungsländern erhältlich. Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo. THE NETHERLANDS/ BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Benelux Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands Tel: 0347-358 040 FRANCE U.S.A. Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620, U.S.A. Tel: 714-522-9011 CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA MEXICO Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V. Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149, Col. Guadalupe del Moral C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México Tel: 55-5804-0600 Yamaha Musique France BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France Tel: 01-64-61-4000 ITALY Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A. Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy Tel: 02-935-771 SPAIN/PORTUGAL Yamaha-Hazen Música, S.A. Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230 Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain Tel: 91-639-8888 GREECE BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda. Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4' andar, Itaim Bibi, CEP 04534-013 Sao Paulo, SP. BRAZIL Tel: 011-3704-1377 ARGENTINA Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Sucursal de Argentina Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053, Buenos Aires, Argentina Tel: 1-4371-7021 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES/ CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá Tel: +507-269-5311 EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDOM Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd. Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes, MK7 8BL, England Tel: 01908-366700 IRELAND Danfay Ltd. 61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin Tel: 01-2859177 GERMANY Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Switzerland Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland Tel: 01-383 3990 AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-60203900 CZECH REPUBLIC/SLOVAKIA/ HUNGARY/SLOVENIA Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Austria, CEE Department Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-602039025 POLAND Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House 147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece Tel: 01-228 2160 ASIA THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd. 25/F., United Plaza, 1468 Nanjing Road (West), Jingan, Shanghai, China Tel: 021-6247-2211 HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd. 11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: 2737-7688 INDONESIA PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor) PT. Nusantik Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia Tel: 21-520-2577 KOREA Yamaha Music Korea Ltd. 8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong, Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea Tel: 080-004-0022 MALAYSIA Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd. Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya, Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia Tel: 3-78030900 SWEDEN Yamaha Scandinavia AB J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1 Box 30053 S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden Tel: 031 89 34 00 PHILIPPINES DENMARK YS Copenhagen Liaison Office Generatorvej 6A DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark Tel: 44 92 49 00 FINLAND F-Musiikki Oy Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260, SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland Tel: 09 618511 Yupangco Music Corporation 339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO, Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines Tel: 819-7551 SINGAPORE Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd. #03-11 A-Z Building 140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015 Tel: 747-4374 TAIWAN NORWAY Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB Grini Næringspark 1 N-1345 Østerås, Norway Tel: 67 16 77 70 ICELAND Skifan HF Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120 IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland Tel: 525 5000 Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd. 3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei. Taiwan 104, R.O.C. Tel: 02-2511-8688 THAILAND Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd. 891/1 Siam Motors Building, 15-16 floor Rama 1 road, Wangmai, Pathumwan Bangkok 10330, Thailand Tel: 02-215-2626 OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: +49-4101-3030 Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2317 OCEANIA AFRICA Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2312 MIDDLE EAST TURKEY/CYPRUS Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 OTHER COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Gulf FZE LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jubel Ali, Dubai, United Arab Emirates Tel: +971-4-881-5868 AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd. Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, Victoria 3006, Australia Tel: 3-9693-5111 NEW ZEALAND Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd. 146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa, Auckland, New Zealand Tel: 9-634-0099 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2312 Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Sp.z. o.o. Oddzial w Polsce ul. 17 Stycznia 56, PL-02-146 Warszawa, Poland Tel: 022-868-07-57 HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-3273 [EL] 40 U.R.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation © 2006 Yamaha Corporation WJ07570 xxxMWDHx.x-01A0 Printed in Japan-
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
5
-
6
-
7
-
8
-
9
-
10
-
11
-
12
-
13
-
14
-
15
-
16
-
17
-
18
-
19
-
20
-
21
-
22
-
23
-
24
-
25
-
26
-
27
-
28
-
29
-
30
-
31
-
32
-
33
-
34
-
35
-
36
-
37
-
38
-
39
-
40
-
41
-
42
-
43
-
44
-
45
-
46
-
47
-
48
-
49
-
50
-
51
-
52
-
53
-
54
-
55
-
56
-
57
-
58
-
59
-
60
-
61
-
62
-
63
-
64
-
65
-
66
-
67
-
68
-
69
-
70
-
71
-
72
-
73
-
74
-
75
-
76
-
77
-
78
-
79
-
80
-
81
-
82
-
83
-
84
-
85
-
86
-
87
-
88
-
89
-
90
-
91
-
92
-
93
-
94
-
95
-
96
-
97
-
98
-
99
-
100
-
101
-
102
-
103
-
104
-
105
-
106
-
107
-
108
-
109
-
110
-
111
-
112
-
113
-
114
-
115
-
116
-
117
-
118
-
119
-
120
-
121
-
122
-
123
-
124
-
125
-
126
-
127
-
128
-
129
-
130
-
131
-
132
-
133
-
134
-
135
-
136
-
137
-
138
-
139
-
140
-
141
-
142
-
143
-
144
-
145
-
146
-
147
-
148
-
149
-
150
-
151
-
152
-
153
-
154
-
155
-
156
-
157
-
158
-
159
-
160
-
161
-
162
-
163
-
164
-
165
-
166
-
167
-
168
-
169
-
170
-
171
-
172
-
173
-
174
-
175
-
176
-
177
-
178
-
179
-
180
-
181
-
182
-
183
-
184
-
185
-
186
-
187
-
188
-
189
-
190
-
191
-
192
-
193
-
194
-
195
-
196
-
197
-
198
-
199
-
200
-
201
-
202
-
203
-
204
-
205
-
206
-
207
-
208
-
209
-
210
-
211
-
212
-
213
-
214
-
215
-
216
-
217
-
218
-
219
-
220
-
221
-
222
-
223
-
224
-
225
-
226
-
227
-
228
-
229
-
230
-
231
-
232
-
233
-
234
-
235
-
236
-
237
-
238
-
239
-
240
-
241
-
242
-
243
-
244
-
245
-
246
-
247
-
248
-
249
-
250
-
251
-
252
-
253
-
254
-
255
-
256
-
257
-
258
-
259
-
260
-
261
-
262
-
263
-
264
-
265
-
266
-
267
-
268
-
269
-
270
-
271
-
272
in andere talen
- English: Yamaha DDK-7 User manual
- italiano: Yamaha DDK-7 Manuale utente
- русский: Yamaha DDK-7 Руководство пользователя
- français: Yamaha DDK-7 Manuel utilisateur
- español: Yamaha DDK-7 Manual de usuario
- Deutsch: Yamaha DDK-7 Benutzerhandbuch
- português: Yamaha DDK-7 Manual do usuário
- dansk: Yamaha DDK-7 Brugermanual
- čeština: Yamaha DDK-7 Uživatelský manuál
- svenska: Yamaha DDK-7 Användarmanual
- Türkçe: Yamaha DDK-7 Kullanım kılavuzu
- polski: Yamaha DDK-7 Instrukcja obsługi
- română: Yamaha DDK-7 Manual de utilizare